Copyright: (c) 1992 - 1999 Corel Corporation. All rights reserved.
Citation: (c) 1992 - 1999 Corel Corporation. All rights reserved.


Using Barcode Wizard


Overview: Using Barcode Wizard
Using Barcode Wizard

Bar coding is a method of automatic identification that lets you collect data quickly and accurately. Barcode Wizard helps you create your own bar codes for a wide range of industry-standard formats. You can adjust many of the bar code properties, such as bar height, check digits, and magnification to create a symbol that suits your needs. Also, the overall appearance of the symbol is affected as you change the bar code text options.

 More Detailed Information


Selecting industry-standard formats


Overview: Selecting industry-standard formats
Selecting industry-standard formats

Barcode Wizard supports the following 18 industry-standard formats:

Codabar

Codabar format is commonly used in libraries, blood banks, and the air parcel business. The variable-length format allows encoding of the following 20 characters: 0123456789-$:/.+ABCD. The start and stop characters of a Codabar message must be A, B, C, or D.

Code 25

Code 25, also known as "Code 2 of 5," is a discrete, variable-length code format. Code 25 format consists of two thick bars in a total of five bars for each encoded character. It is used primarily for inventory handling, identification of photo-finishing envelopes, airline ticketing, and baggage and cargo handling.

Code 39

Code 39, also known as "Code 3 of 9," is the most popular format used in the nonretail market for inventory and tracking. The format consists of three thick elements [image] bars or spaces [image] in a total of nine elements for each encoded character. This bar code is used extensively in manufacturing, military, and health applications. The discrete, variable-length format will accept the following 44 characters:

•	0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ-.*$/+%.

The asterisk (*) is used as the start/stop character and cannot be used in the body of the message.

You can also add a check digit that helps to ensure the security of the bar code. Code 39 supports Modulo 43 and xxx-nnnnnnn-c check digit formats used by US Customs for import/export shipping.

Code 128

Code 128 is a variable-length, high-density, alphanumeric format that is used in the shipping and labeling industry. This code has 106 bar and space patterns. Each pattern can have one of three meanings, depending on which of the three character sets is employed. One character set encodes all uppercase and ASCII control characters; another encodes all uppercase and lowercase characters; and the third set encodes the numeric digit pairs 00 through 99. The character set used is determined by the start character.

Code 128 also allows you to encode four function codes: FNC1, FNC2, FNC3, and FNC4.

•	FNC1 [image] is reserved for use in European Article Numbering (EAN).

•	FNC2 [image] is used to instruct a bar code reader to link together the message in a bar code symbol with the message in the text symbol.

•	FNC3 [image] is used to instruct a bar code reader to perform a reset.

•	FNC4 [image] is used in closed system applications.

A variation of Code 128 format is EAN 128. This symbol uses the same code set as Code 128; however the function codes FNC2 to FNC4 cannot be used, and FNC1 is used as part of the start code. An advanced option of Code 128 in Barcode Wizard lets you enable or disable the EAN 128 format.

EAN-8

The European Article Numbering (EAN) system is the European version of the Universal Product Code (UPC). This code is now called the International Article Number; however the EAN abbreviation remains. EAN codes are found on European retail items.

EAN-8 encodes eight digits, consisting of two country-code digits, five data digits, and one check digit. In Barcode Wizard, you must enter seven digits, and the eighth digit [image] or the check digit [image] is automatically generated.

An optional two or five-digit number may be added to the main bar code. This number is designed for use on publications and periodicals, and appears as an additional bar code to the right of the main bar code.

EAN-13

EAN-13 is the European version of the Universal Product Code (UPC (A)). The difference between EAN-13 and UPC (A) is that EAN-13 encodes a 13th digit into the left six digits of a UPC (A) symbol. The 13th digit, combined with the 12th digit, represents a country code.

An optional two or five-digit number may be added to the main bar code. This number is designed for use on publications and periodicals and appears as an additional bar code to the right of the main bar code.

FIM

Facing Identification Mark (FIM) patterns are used by the US Postal Service in automated mail processing. FIM patterns are used for automatic facing and canceling of mail that does not have a stamp or meter imprint, such as business reply mail, penalty mail, etc.

Four FIM patterns are currently in use: FIM-A, FIM-B, FIM-C, and FIM-D.

•	FIM-A [image] used on courtesy reply mail already preprinted with POSTNET bar codes

•	FIM-B [image] used on business reply, penalty, and government (franked) mail that is not preprinted with POSTNET bar codes

•	FIM-C [image] used on business reply, penalty, and government mail already preprinted with POSTNET bar codes

•	FIM-D [image] indicates that postage is required

FIM patterns are placed in the upper right corner along the top edge, indented two inches from the right edge.

ISBN

ISBN (International Standard Book Number) codes are printed on books. This format is not a separate bar code type. ISBN numbers have a specific structure and are encoded using EAN-13 bar codes. The message is formed by a fixed three-digit country code of 978, followed by the 10-digit ISBN number. The 10th digit [image] or the check digit [image] is discarded. Enter the digits using the x-xxxx-xxxx format.

ISSN

ISSN (International Standard Serial Number) codes are printed on magazines, newspapers, and other serial publications. This format is not a separate bar code type. ISSN is an EAN-13 bar code with a 977 country code and a two-digit supplemental code. The two-digit supplemental code contains the issue number. For example, January=01, and February=02. Enter the digits using the xxxx-xxxx format.

ITF

ITF (Interleaved 2 of 5) was designed on the basis of Code 25. Each format uses the same encoding techniques except that both bars and spaces carry data in the ITF format: the odd-position digits are encoded in the bars, and the even-position digits are encoded in the spaces. ITF is a high-density, variable-length, number-only format. This bar code is one of the most popular formats used by the shipping and warehouse industries. Barcode Wizard allows you to enter up to 40 digits.

ITF-14

ITF-14 is similar to the ITF format, except that exactly 13 digits must be entered in Barcode Wizard. An optional five digits may be entered for the add-on bar code.

JAN-8

JAN-8 is the Japanese equivalent to EAN-8.

JAN-13

JAN-13 is the Japanese equivalent to EAN-13.

MSI Plessey

The MSI Plessey bar code is used primarily in libraries and store shelf labeling. MSI Plessey is a variable-length format that allows you to encode the following 10 characters: 0123456789. Each character consists of eight elements: four bars and four spaces.

Pharmacode

Pharmacode is used for Online Security Control of the pharmaceutical packaging process. Only the bars carry data, not the spaces. The high printing tolerance and the option of printing the bar code in multiple colors makes Pharmacode a practical format.

POSTNET

POSTNET (Postal Numeric Encoding Technique) bar codes are used to encode ZIP codes on US mail. The Postal Service mail-handling process is designed to be fully automated, and POSTNET bar codes feed the automated equipment.

POSTNET differs from other formats in that the bar heights alternate, as opposed to the bar widths. Each number is represented by a pattern of five bars. A single tall bar is used for the start and stop bars. POSTNET can be used for five-digit, nine-digit, and 11-digit delivery point barcode. These codes are often used in conjunction with FIM bars which are found in the upper right corner of a mail piece such as Business Reply Mail.

UPC(A)

UPC (Universal Product Code) symbols are used for retail applications in the United States and Canada. UPC(A) is a 12-digit format. The symbol consists of 11 digits of data and one check digit. The first digit usually represents the type of product being identified. The following five digits are a manufacturer's code, and the next five digits are used to identify a specific product.

UPC(E)

Like UPC(A), UPC(E) is used for retail applications; however, since the bar code is smaller, it is better suited to smaller items. This format is also called "zero-suppressed," because UPC(E) compresses a 12-digit UPC(A) code into a six-digit code. UPC(E) suppresses the number-system digit, trailing digits in the manufacturer's code, and leading zeros in the product identification part of the code.

An optional two or five-digit number may be added to the main UPC(A) or UPC(E) bar code. This number is designed for use on publications, and periodicals and appears as an additional bar code to the right of the main bar code.

 Related Topics


Choosing a bar code

The format you choose depends on how you intend to use the symbol and the features offered by each bar code. The characters you want to encode, available space, and design may also affect your choice.

To choose a bar code

1.	Click the arrow to the right of the Industry-Standard Formats list box.

2.	Choose a bar code format from the list.

3.	Type the characters you want to encode in the Numeric Digits box.

 Notes

•	The Sample Preview box displays a current image of the bar code.

•	Facing Identification Mark (FIM) patterns require you to choose a code (A, B, C, or D) instead of entering numerical data.


Adjusting industry-standard properties


Overview: Adjusting industry-standard properties
Adjusting industry-standard properties

You can adjust many of the industry-standard properties to create the bar code that you want. Changing these properties affects how easily a scanner can read a symbol. You want to ensure that the bar code is readable the first time it is passed under a scanner.

 Related Topics


Generating bar codes

Printing a bar code is affected by three settings: printer resolution, units of measurement, and bar width reduction. A printer's resolution is given in dpi (dots per inch). A printer dot or pixel is the smallest unit a printer can output. Barcode Wizard uses whole printer pixels to create symbols. Printing bar codes requires accuracy. To ensure that your symbol is accurate, Barcode Wizard allows you to choose from three units of measurement: inches, centimeters, and millimeters. Printing distortions that effect the bar code measurements may occur. You can set the bar width reduction [image] the number of pixels subtracted from the original bar width [image] to prevent any distortions.

The size of a bar code is affected by three settings: magnification, bar height, and the wide-to-narrow ratio. Magnification increases the size of the entire image while bar height adjusts only the height of the bars. Wide-to-narrow ratio refers to the distance between wide bars and spaces and the narrow bars. A high ratio makes the bar code wider and more readable to the scanner.

To adjust printer resolution

1.	Click the arrow to the right of the Industry-Standard Formats list box.

2.	Choose a bar code format from the list.

3.	Type the characters you want to encode in the Numeric Digits box.

4.	Click the Next button.

5.	Click the arrow to the right of the Printer Resolution list box, and choose a dpi setting.

To adjust units of measurement

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To adjust printer resolution" procedure.

2.	Click the arrow to the right of the Units list box, and choose inches, millimeters, or centimeters.

To adjust bar width reduction

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To adjust printer resolution" procedure.

2.	Click the arrows to the right of the Bar Width Reduction box to set a pixel value.

To adjust magnification

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To adjust printer resolution" procedure.

2.	Click the arrows to the right of the Magnification box to set a percentage value.

To adjust bar height

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To adjust printer resolution" procedure.

2.	Click the arrows to the right of the Bar Height box to set a height.

To adjust wide to narrow ratio

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To adjust printer resolution" procedure.

2.	Click the arrows to the right of the Wide to Narrow Ratio box to set the ratio.

 Notes

•	You should not use UPC, EAN, and JAN bar codes below 85 percent magnification.

•	You can reduce the bar height, but if the symbol is too short the scanner may miss the bar code. UPC symbols should not be shortened.

•	Wide bar codes are read more accurately than narrow bar codes.


Setting advanced bar code options


Overview: Setting advanced bar code options
Setting advanced bar code options

Most of the advanced options in Barcode Wizard involve setting check digits or changing the look of the bar code. A check digit determines if the data is read correctly. A formula is applied to the encoded numbers to yield one digit. That check digit is usually placed at the end of the bar code. The computer checks that the numbers were read correctly by comparing the check digit it calculates with the check digit it read.

Other advanced options effect the appearance of the symbol. For example, the advanced options allow you to attach a numeric prefix to the bar code, ignore spaces in the symbol, ignore brackets in the symbol, and so on.

 Related Topics


Enabling advanced options

You can add or remove check digits, brackets, spaces and prefixes from the following bar codes: Codabar, Code 128, Code 39, UPC(A), ISBN, ISSN, ITF 14, and MSI Plessey.

To enable advanced options

1.	Click the Advanced button on the Industry-Standard Properties screen.

2.	Enable the radio button beside the option you want activated.

3.	Click OK.


Adjusting text properties


Overview: Adjusting text properties
Adjusting text properties

The number of text properties that you can adjust for a bar code depends on the format you chose. Text properties affect the final appearance of the symbol. The following terms require some clarification:

•	Quiet zone [image] the clear area (free from marks) before and after the bars and spaces. Reading the color and reflectance of the quiet zone establishes how the spaces will be read and determines the difference between the spaces and the bars.

•	Human-readable [image] data represented by the bars and spaces that is printed as readable text

•	Start code [image] a character that indicates the start of a symbol; and the stop code is a character that indicates the end of a symbol

•	FACT Data Identifier [image] clarifies what is referred to by the encoded characters

•	The asterisk (*) [image] used as the start/stop character for Code 39. You can choose whether or not to print out the asterisk as part of the human-readable.

 Related Topics


Changing text options

The appearance of your text is determined by the options you set on the Text Properties screen. The font, placement, size, and weight of the text can be adjusted.

To change text font

1.	Click the arrow to the right of the Industry-Standard Formats list box

2.	Choose a bar code format from the list.

3.	Type the characters you want to encode in the Numeric Digits box.

4.	Click the Next button.

5.	Adjust the industry-standard properties.

6.	Click the Next button.

7.	Click the arrow to the right of the Font list box, then click a font style.

To change text weight

1.	Follow steps 1 to 6 from the "To change text font" procedure.

2.	Click the arrow to the right of the Weight list box, then click Normal, Normal-Italic, Bold, or Bold-Italic.

To change text alignment

1.	Follow steps 1 to 6 from the "To change text font" procedure.

2.	Click the arrow to the right of the Alignment box, then click Center, Left, or Right.

To change text size

1.	Follow steps 1 to 6 from the "To change text font" procedure.

2.	Click the arrows to the right of the Size box to choose a point size.

 Related Topics


Changing bar code options

The appearance of your bar code is determined by the human-readables you set on the Text Properties screen. Placing add-on text at the bottom or at the top of your bar code, centering check digits, and showing start and stop characters are some of the options you can change.

To change bar code options

1.	Click the arrow to the right of the Industry-Standard Formats list box

2.	Choose a bar code format from the list.

3.	Type the characters you want to encode in the Numeric Digits box.

4.	Click the Next button.

5.	Adjust the industry-standard properties.

6.	Click the Next button.

7.	Enable the check box beside the options you want to activate.

 Notes

•	Some of the check boxes cannot be enabled or disabled. These settings are industry-standards for that particular bar code.

•	You can open your symbol in a graphics or business application to print the bar code.

 Related Topics


Arrange menu commands


Opens the Transformation Docker window, which lets you position, rotate, size, scale, mirror, or skew objects.


Opens the Transformation Docker window, which lets you move and position a selected object with precision.


Opens the Transformation Docker window, which lets you rotate a selected object with precision.


Opens the Transformation Docker window, which lets you scale a selected object with precision, or mirror a selected object vertically or horizontally.


Opens the Transformation Docker window, which lets you increase or decrease the size of a selected object with precision.


Opens the Transformation Docker window, which lets you skew or slant a selected object with precision.


Removes the last transformation applied to an object, with the exception of changes to position.


Opens the Align And Distribute dialog box, which lets you align or distribute objects horizontally and vertically. This command is available only when you select two or more objects.


Places the selected object on top of all objects on its layer. This command is available only when you select one or more objects.


Places the selected object beneath all objects on its layer. This command is available only when you select one or more objects.


Moves the selected object forward by one object on its layer.


Moves the selected object back by one object on its layer.


Places the selected object in front of any object on the same layer. The cursor changes to a horizontal arrow that you can use to choose the object in front of which you want to place the selected object.


Places the selected object behind any object on the same layer. The cursor changes to a horizontal arrow that you can use to choose the object behind which you want to place the selected object.


Reverses the order of all objects on a layer.


Groups the selected objects to create a single unit.


Divides the selected group into its original components.


Divides the selected group into its original components. Use this command if the selected group is composed of nested groups and you want to be left with all of the individual objects.


Combines the selected objects to create a single curve object. Overlapping areas of the objects are removed to create "clipping holes."


Separates combined objects, leaving the objects with their original shapes.


Locks the selected object to prevent it from being modified in any way.


Unlocks the selected object, allowing you to modify it.


Unlocks all the objects in your drawing.


Opens the Shaping Docker window and lets you create an object from the area where two or more objects overlap.


Opens the Shaping Docker window and lets you reshape an object by removing the area overlapped by two or more other objects.


Opens the Shaping Docker window and lets you create an object by joining two or more objects at points where their paths intersect.


Separates the original objects from intermediate shapes created using the Blend or Contour commands, and from the extruded surfaces created by the Extrude command. Also separates text fitted to a path.


Converts an object to curves, allowing it to be reshaped.


Converts an outline to an object.


Enable to horizontally align the selected objects' bottom edges.


Enable to align the selected objects' horizontal centers.


Enable to align the selected objects' top edges.


Enable to align the selected objects' left edges.


Enable to vertically align the selected objects' center points.


Enable to align the selected objects' right edges.


Enable to align the selected objects at the center of the Drawing Page, based on the settings you specify. For example, if you enable the Left check box, the object's left edges line up at the center of the page.


Enable to align the selected objects at the edge of the Drawing Page, based on the settings you specify. For example, if you enable the Left check box, the objects' left edges line up at the left edge of the page.


Enable to move the selected objects so that they line up with the grid, based on the settings you specify. For example, if you enable the Left check box, the objects move so that their left edges line up with the nearest grid point.


Distribute tab


Enable to distribute the selected objects vertically by spacing their top edges evenly.


Enable to distribute the selected objects horizontally by spacing their center points evenly.


Enable to distribute the selected objects vertically by spacing their center points evenly.


Enable to distribute the selected objects vertically by placing equal spaces between them.


Enable to distribute the selected objects  horizontally by placing equal spaces between them.


Enable to distribute the selected objects vertically by spacing their bottom edges evenly.


Enable to distribute the selected objects vertically by spacing their center points evenly.


Enable to distribute the selected objects horizontally by spacing their left edges evenly.


Enable to distribute the selected objects horizontally by spacing their right edges evenly.


Enable to distribute the selected objects to the extent of the marquee box that surrounds them when they are selected.


Enable to distribute the selected objects to the extent of the Drawing Page.


Customizable Align & Distribute buttons


Aligns the selected objects' left edges on the Drawing Page.


Aligns the selected objects' center points horizontally on the Drawing Page.


Aligns the selected objects' right edges on the Drawing Page.


Aligns the selected objects' top edges on the Drawing Page.


Aligns the selected objects' center points vertically on the Drawing Page.


Aligns the selected objects' bottom edges on the Drawing Page.


Distributes the selected objects vertically down the center of the Drawing Page by spacing their center points evenly.


Distributes the selected objects horizontally across the center of the Drawing Page by spacing their center points evenly.


Centers the objects horizontally and vertically on the Drawing Page according to their center points.


Weld, Trim, and Intersection on the Property Bar

(Property Bar: Multiple Objects)


Welds the selected objects. If you marquee select the objects, the welded object takes on the fill and outline properties of the bottom-most selected object. If you use multiple selection, the welded object takes on the fill and outline properties of the object you select last.


Creates a trimmed object from multiple selected objects. If you marquee select the objects, the bottom-most selected object is trimmed by the other selected objects. If you use multiple selection, the object you selected last is trimmed by the other selected objects.


Intersects the selected objects out of the area where they overlap. If you marquee select the objects, the new object takes on the fill and outline properties of the bottom-most selected object. If you use multiple selection, the new object takes on the fill and outline properties of the object you select last.


Click the top button to mirror an object horizontally. Click the bottom button to mirror an object vertically.


Transformation Docker – 9.0


Lets you position an object with precision.


Lets you rotate an object with precision.


Lets you scale an object with precision, or mirror an object vertically or horizontally.


Lets you increase or decrease the size of an object with precision.


Lets you skew an object with precision.


Position


Lets you specify values for the position of an object. If the Relative Position check box is enabled, the object moves relative to its position in the Drawing Window. If the check box is disabled, the object moves in relation to the Horizontal ruler.


Lets you specify a value for the horizontal position of an object. If the Relative Position check box is enabled, the object moves relative to its position in the Drawing Window. If the check box is disabled, the object moves in relation to the Horizontal ruler.


Lets you specify a value for the vertical position of an object. If the Relative Position check box is enabled, the object moves relative to its position in the Drawing Window. If the check box is disabled, the object moves in relation to the Vertical ruler.


Enable to move an object a specified distance relative to its position in the Drawing Window.


Enable to use the top left corner of the selected object's bounding box as the anchor point.


Enable to use the top mid point of the selected object's bounding box as the anchor point.


Enable to use the top right corner of the selected object's bounding box as the anchor point.


Enable to use the right mid point of the selected object's bounding box as the anchor point.


Enable to use the bottom right corner of the selected object's bounding box as the anchor point.


Enable to use the bottom mid point of the selected object's bounding box as the anchor point.


Enable to use the bottom left corner of the selected object's bounding box as the anchor point.


Enable to use the left mid point of the selected object's bounding box as the anchor point.


Enable to use the center of the selected object's bounding box as the anchor point.


Applies the transformations you specify to the selected object.


Applies the transformations you specify to a copy of the selected object.


Rotation


Lets you specify the number of degrees by which you want to rotate the selected object.


Lets you specify the number of degrees by which you want to rotate the selected object.


Lets you specify the horizontal coordinate around which you want the object to rotate. If you want to specify a coordinate in relation to the current position of the object, enable the Relative Center check box. If you want to specify a relative to the Horizontal ruler, disable the check box.


Lets you specify the vertical coordinate around which you want the object to rotate. If you want to specify a coordinate in relation to the current position of the object, enable the Relative Center check box. If you want to specify a relative to the Horizontal ruler, disable the check box.


Enable to rotate the object, relative to the object's current position.


Enable to rotate the object around the top left corner of its bounding box.


Enable to rotate the object around the top mid point of its bounding box.


Enable to rotate the object around the top right corner of its bounding box.


Enable to rotate the object around the right mid point of its bounding box.


Enable to rotate the object around the bottom right corner of its bounding box.


Enable to rotate the object around the bottom mid point of its bounding box.


Enable to rotate the object around the bottom left corner of its bounding box.


Enable to rotate the object around the left mid point of its bounding box.


Enable to rotate the object around the center of its bounding box.


Applies the transformations you specify to a copy of the selected object.


Applies the transformations you specify to the selected object.


Scale & Mirror


Lets you specify the percentages by which you want to scale the selected object.


Lets you flip the selected object horizontally or vertically.


Lets you specify the percentage by which you want to scale the selected object horizontally.


Lets you specify the percentage by which the you want to scale the selected object vertically.


Flips the selected object left to right, and vice versa.


Flips the selected object top to bottom, and vice versa.


Enable to maintain the ratio of height to width while you scale the selected object.


Enable to keep the top left corner of the selected object's bounding box fixed when you scale or mirror the object.


Enable to keep the bottom left corner of the selected object's bounding box fixed when you scale or mirror the object.


Enable to keep the left mid point of the selected object's bounding box fixed when you scale or mirror the object.


Enable to keep the top mid point of the selected object's bounding box fixed when you scale or mirror the object.


Enable to keep the top right corner of the selected object's bounding box fixed when you scale or mirror the object.


Enable to keep the center of the selected object's bounding box fixed when you scale or mirror the object.


Enable to keep the bottom right corner of the selected object's bounding box fixed when you scale or mirror the object.


Enable to keep the bottom mid point of the selected object's bounding box fixed when you scale or mirror the object.


Enable to keep the right mid point of the selected object's bounding box fixed when you scale or mirror the object.


Applies the transformations you specify to a copy of the selected object.


Applies the transformations to the selected object.


Size


Lets you specify a new size for the selected object.


Lets you specify width of a selected object.


Lets you specify the height of a selected object.


Enable to maintain the ratio of height to width while you size the selected object.


Enable to keep the bottom left corner of the selected object's bounding box fixed while you size the object.


Enable to keep the top mid point of the selected object's bounding box fixed while you size the object.


Enable to keep the top right corner of the selected object's bounding box fixed while you size the object.


Enable to keep the right mid point of the selected object's bounding box fixed while you size the object.


Enable to keep the bottom right corner of the selected object's bounding box fixed while you size the object.


Enable to keep the bottom mid point of the selected object's bounding box fixed while you size the object.


Enable to keep the left mid point of the selected object's bounding box fixed while you size the object.


Enable to keep the center of the selected object's bounding box fixed while you size the object.


Enable to keep the bottom left corner of the selected object's bounding box fixed while you size the object.


Applies the transformations to the selected object.


Applies the transformations you specify to a copy of the selected object.


Skew


Lets you specify the number of degrees by which you want to skew the selected object.


Lets you specify the number of degrees by which you want to skew the selected object horizontally.


Lets you specify the number of degrees by which you want to skew the selected object vertically.


Enable to choose an anchor point.


Enable to keep the top left corner of the selected object's bounding box fixed while you skew the object.


Enable to keep the top mid point of the selected object's bounding box fixed while you skew the object.


Enable to keep the top right corner of the selected object's bounding box fixed while you skew the object.


Enable to keep the right mid point of the selected object's bounding box fixed while you skew the object.


Enable to keep the bottom right corner of the selected object's bounding box fixed while you skew the object.


Enable to keep the bottom mid point of the selected object's bounding box fixed while you skew the object.


Enable to keep the bottom left corner of the selected object's bounding box fixed while you skew the object.


Enable to keep the left mid point of the selected object's bounding box fixed while you skew the object.


Enable to keep the center of the selected object's bounding box fixed while you skew the object.


Applies the transformations you specify to the selected object.


Applies the transformations you specify to a copy of the selected object.


Shaping Docker


Lets you weld two or more objects together.


Displays an example of a weld, trim, or intersection operation, depending on which of the three buttons you click.


Enable to keep a copy of the selected object after welding.


Enable to keep a copy of the target object after welding.


Welds, trims, or intersects the selected objects, according to the settings you specify.


Lets you reshape an object by removing the area overlapped by other objects.


Enable to keep a copy of the object you’re using to trim, after trimming.


Enable to keep a copy of the target object after trimming.


Lets you create an object from the intersection of two or more objects.


Enable to keep a copy of all selected objects except the target object after the intersection.


Enable to keep a copy of the target object after the intersection.


Customizable Shaping buttons that are not elsewhere defined


Trims the selected objects by letting you choose a target object for the trim. The object created by the trim takes on the properties of the target object you select.


Intersects two or more objects by letting you choose a target object for the intersection. The object created by the intersection takes on the properties of the target object you select.


Welds two or more objects by letting you choose a target object for the weld. The object created by the weld takes on the properties of the target object.


Transform Property Bar


Lets you move an object relative to ruler coordinates by specifying values in the horizontal (X) vertical (Y) boxes.


Lets you specify the width of the selected object in the top box and the height in the bottom box.


Lets you specify a value the percentage by which you want to scale the selected object horizontally (top box) and vertically (bottom box).


Sizes or scales objects nonproportionally. Disable this button to maintain the ratio of height to width.


Lets you rotate an object around a fixed point, called the center of rotation. You set the center of rotation by clicking anywhere in the Drawing Window with the Free Rotation tool.


Lets you mirror an object according to the angle you specify. You specify the angle by dragging the line of reflection.


Lets you scale an object along the horizontal and vertical axes simultaneously, relative to the object's anchor point. You set the anchor point by clicking anywhere in the Drawing Window with the Free Scale tool.


Lets you slant the horizontal and vertical lines of an object simultaneously, relative to the object's anchor point. You set the anchor point by clicking anywhere in the Drawing Window with the Free Skew tool.


Lets you rotate the selected object.


Lets you set the horizontal (top box)and vertical (bottom box) position of the object’s center of rotation.


Lets you specify the angle to which you want to skew the object vertically and horizontally.


Enable to move an object a specified distance from its position in the Drawing Window.


Applies the transformation you specify to a copy of the selected object.


Opens the Transform Docker window you used last.


Advanced Options dialog box


Displays the check digit options.


Enable to disable the check digit. The check digit is used to ensure that the data is read correctly.


Lets you choose a start character.


Lets you choose a stop character.


Enable to use this variation of the check digit, which is one of three check digit formats commonly used by libraries.


Enable to use this variation of the check digit, which is one of three check digit formats commonly used by libraries.


Enable to use this variation of the check digit, which is one of three check digit formats commonly used by libraries.


Lets you choose a start character. The start character indicates the beginning of the symbol.


Lets you choose a stop character. The stop character indicates the end of the symbol.


Enable to choose the EAN-128 option, which is a powerful variation of Code 128.


Enable to ignore the brackets in the bar code.


Enable to ignore the spaces in the bar code.


Enable to use this format option required by U.S. Customs. XXX is alphanumeric, NNNNNNN is numeric, and C is the check digit.


Enable to use Mod 43 check digits, a format used by U.S. Customs for all Import and Export shipping.


Enable when you do not want to use the 978 or 979 prefix with the bar code.


Enable to add the 978 prefix to the bar code. This generates an EAN-13 code from the ISBN number.


Enable to add the 979 prefix to your bar code. This generates an EAN-13 code from the ISBN number.


Enable when you do not want to use the 977 prefix with the bar code.


Enable to add the 977 prefix to your bar code. This generates an EAN-13 code from the ISSN number.


Enable when you do not want to display the bearer bars in the bar code. The bearer bars are thick lines that surround the bar code.


Enable to display bearer bars on the top and bottom of the bar code. The bearer bars are thick lines that surround the bar code.


Enable to frame the bar code with bearer bars. The bearer bars are thick lines that surround the bar code.


Enable to use this variation of automatically calculating the check digit.


Enable to display an "N" to the left of the bars when the system character "3" is used. The system character "3" is assigned to the NDC (National Drug Code) and HRI (National Health Related Items Code).


Generate custom bar codes page


Lets you choose industry-standard formats that are available for bar codes.


Lets you specify the number assigned to the bar code.


Lets you specify the number assigned to the bar code.


Lets you specify the number assigned to the bar code.


Lets you specify the number assigned to the bar code.


Lets you specify the number assigned to the bar code.


Displays a sample of the industry-standard format you chose.


Lets you specify the Federation of Automated Coding Technologies (FACT) data identifier.


Displays the check digit that is automatically generated. The check digit is used to ensure that the data is read correctly.


Lets you specify an additional two or five digits to be used for the add-on bar code.


Lets you choose a Face Identification Marking (FIM) type.


Enable to choose Face Identification Marking (FIM) type A. FIM type A indicates that postage is required, prebarcoded.


Enable to choose Face Identification Marking (FIM) type B. FIM type B indicates that postage is prepaid, and no bar code exits.


Enable to choose Face Identification Marking (FIM) type C. FIM type C indicates that postage is prepaid, prebarcoded.


Enable to choose Face Identification Marking (FIM) type D. FIM type D indicates that postage is required, and no bar code exits.


Advanced button on the Adjust industry standard properties page


Opens the Advanced Options dialog box, which lets you choose advanced options associated with the industry standard format for the bar code that you chose.


Adjust industry standard properties page


Lets you choose the height of the bars. The height is measured from the bottom of the text to the top of the bars.


Lets you choose the bar width reduction in pixels. The bar width reduction is subtracted from the bar width. Reducing the bar width lets you compensate for print gain.


Lets you choose the magnification to be applied to the entire image. Choosing 200% prints the image at twice its size.


Lets you choose the printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi).


Displays the width of the symbol from the left edge of the left-most bar to the right edge of the right-most bar. It does not include quiet zones. The value cannot be edited.


Lets you choose the unit of measurement.


 Lets you choose the unit of measurement.


Lets you choose the proportion between wide bars and spaces and narrow bars and spaces. The wider, or larger, the ratio, the wider the bar code symbol is.


Adjust text properties in your bar code page


Lets you choose the alignment of the text that is below the bar code.


Enable to vertically center the system and check digits on the bar code symbol. The system digit appears before the bar code symbol and the check digit appears after the bar code symbol.


Lets you choose a font.


Lets you choose the size of the font.


Lets you choose a font weight.


Enable to print text with the bar code symbol.


Enable to print the text associated with the add-on bar code. Add-on bar codes do not apply to all bar code formats.


Enable to print asterisks before and after the bar code text. Asterisks do not apply to all bar code formats.


Enable to print Federation of Automated Coding Technologies (FACT) data.


Enable to print the quiet zone marks. The quiet zone is the clear area (free from marks) before and after the bars and spaces.


Enable to print the start and stop characters. The start character indicates the beginning of the symbol. The stop character indicates the end of the symbol.


Enable to print the human-readable text above the bar code symbol.


Enable to print the add-on text at the bottom of the add-on bar code. The text is printed on top of the bar code by default.


Lets you convert vector objects created in CorelDRAW to bitmaps.


Opens Corel PHOTO-PAINT, allowing you to make changes to a bitmap.


Crops a bitmap down to the size of its bounding box.


Opens CorelTRACE, allowing you convert to a bitmap to a vector drawing.


Lets you resample the image size by increasing or decreasing the dimensions and resolution of a bitmap.


Lets you convert the existing bitmap to a 1-bit black-and-white bitmap. You can choose from different black and white conversion options.


Lets you convert the existing bitmap to grayscale.


Lets you convert the existing bitmap to duotone. A duotone image can be monotone, duotone, tritone, or quadtone.


Lets you convert a bitmap to an 8-bit paletted color bitmap. You can choose from different conversion options.


Lets you convert a bitmap to 24-bit (RGB) color.


Lets you convert a bitmap to 32-bit (CMYK) color.


Lets you convert a bitmap to 24-bit Lab color.


Applies an Internal Color Consortium (.ICC) profile to your image.


Opens the Bitmap Color Mask Docker window, which lets you specify a number of colors that you want to hide or a number of colors that you want to show in a bitmap.


Automatically inflates a bitmap, enabling you to apply effects.


Lets you specify the exact amount to inflate a bitmap.


Removes the link of an imported image in a drawing.


Updates the bitmap that is linked in a drawing.


 Links to a Corel Web site, where you can access information and download additional bitmap effects.


Lets you rotate a bitmap horizontally and vertically.


Lets you wrap a bitmap along the outside or inside of a cylinder.


Lets you create a three-dimensional relief effect, so that bitmap details become three-dimensional ridges and crevices on a flat surface.


Lets you give the impression that a corner of the bitmap has rolled in on itself.


Lets you give a bitmap the sense of three-dimensional depth, as if it is on a flat plane receding into the distance.


Lets you warp a bitmap by either "pinching" the bitmap away from you or "punching" it toward you.


Lets you wrap a bitmap along the outside or inside of a sphere.


Lets you give the impression that the bitmap is a charcoal drawing.


Lets you give the impression of a bitmap textured using a conté crayon.


Lets you give the impression that the bitmap is a wax crayon drawing.


Lets you give a bitmap the appearance of a Cubist painting by grouping similar colored pixels into squares.


Lets you give a bitmap the appearance of an Impressionist painting by converting the bitmap to dabs of solid color.


Lets you give a bitmap the appearance that a knife has spread paint on a canvas.


Lets you give the impression that the bitmap is a pastel drawing.


Lets you give the impression that the bitmap is a drawing in pen and ink.


Lets you give a bitmap the appearance of a Pointillist painting by analyzing the main colors and converting them to small dots.


Lets you create the impression of an image scratched in paint by scattering and layering pixels in long strands.


Lets you give the impression that the bitmap is a pencil sketch.


Lets you give the impression that the bitmap is a watercolor painting.


Lets you give the impression that the bitmap is an abstract color marker sketch.


Lets you give the impression that the bitmap is a painting on textured wave paper.


Lets you smooth regions of gradual change in a bitmap while preserving the edge detail and texture.


Lets you blur a bitmap by spreading the pixel information outward using bell-shaped curves.


Lets you scatter bitmap colors to create a soft, blurred image with minimal distortion.


Lets you remove sharp edges and detail from a bitmap, leaving smooth gradients and low-frequency areas.


Lets you create the illusion of movement in a bitmap.


Lets you create a blurring effect that radiates outward from a central point in a bitmap.


Lets you tone down differences between adjacent pixels, resulting in only a slight loss of detail while smoothing the bitmap.


Lets you smooth and tone down the harsh edges in bitmaps without losing important image detail.


Lets you blur pixels outward from a center point in a bitmap.


Lets you reduce a bitmap to basic RGB color components and emphasize tonal changes.


Lets you edit the color settings and convert to duotone.


Lets you give a bitmap the look of a color halftone.


Lets you change the colors in a bitmap to bright, electric colors.


Lets you transform colors to appear like those of a photographic negative.


Detects and accentuates the edges of bitmaps.


Lets you find the edges of items in a bitmap and converts these edges to lines on a single-color background.


Lets you locate edges in a bitmap and converts these edges to soft or solid lines.


Lets you trace bitmap items using a 16-color palette.


Lets you use the shapes of traditional craft items as a framework for effects.


Lets you transform a bitmap into crystal fragments.


Lets you transform a bitmap using different textiles.


Lets you frame a bitmap using a preset frame or another image.


Lets you give the impression of viewing a bitmap through blocks of glass.


Lets you transform a bitmap into shapes.


Lets you break a bitmap into unequal, elliptical pieces, creating the appearance of a mosaic painting.


Lets you add bubble and star particles to a bitmap.


Lets you distort a bitmap by scattering its pixels.


Lets you apply a transparent tint to a bitmap.


Lets you transform a bitmap into fragments and creates edges between the fragments.


Lets you produce a whirlpool around the center point of a bitmap.


Lets you create a frame around a bitmap.


Lets you apply atmospheric conditions, such as snow or rain, to a bitmap.


Lets you break a bitmap into puzzle-like pieces.


Lets you alter a bitmap using a displacement map.


Lets you shift a bitmap according to the specific values.


Lets you break a bitmap into square, rectangular, or circular cells.


Lets you warp a bitmap by adding a wave.


Lets you rotate a bitmap in a swirling pattern.


Lets you reduce the dimensions of a bitmap and reproduce it as a series of tiles on a grid.


Lets you give the impression that a bitmap is a wet painting.


Lets you apply a fluid, swirling pattern across a bitmap.


Lets you blur a bitmap in a specific direction, creating the effect of wind blowing across the image.


Lets you create a granular effect that adds a texture to a flat or overly blended bitmap.


Lets you distribute a bitmap's pixels to fill blank spaces and remove noise.


Lets you reduce bitmap noise by averaging pixel values.


Lets you remove noise by adjusting a pixel's color value, based on the maximum color values of its neighboring pixels.


Lets you remove noise and detail by averaging the color values of the pixels in a bitmap.


Lets you remove noise by adjusting a pixel's color value, based on the minimum color values of its neighboring pixels.


Lets you remove undesired wave patterns that occur when halftone screens of two different frequencies are superimposed in the same bitmap.


Lets you soften a bitmap and reduce the speckled effect that can occur during the scanning or video-capturing process.


Lets you accentuate edge detail by analyzing the values of neighboring pixels.


Lets you analyze pixels near an edge to determine the direction in which to apply the greatest amount of sharpening.


Lets you remove low-frequency areas and shading in a bitmap.


Lets you accentuate the edges of a bitmap by increasing the contrast between adjacent pixels.


Lets you accentuate edge detail and focus some blurred areas in a bitmap.


Lets you choose the number of colors to be saved with the bitmap.


Lets you choose a resolution for a bitmap.


Enable to smooth the edges of a bitmap.


Enable to improve the transition between colors in a bitmap.


Enable to convert an image to bitmap using the active separations profile.


Enable to make the background of the bitmap transparent.


Displays the projected uncompressed file size of the image.


Displays the original width of the image.


Displays the original height of the image.


Lets you specify the width to which you want to inflate your image using the defined units of measure.


Lets you specify the height to which you want to inflate your image using the defined units of measure.


Lets you specify the width to which you want to inflate your image as a percentage.


Lets you specify the height to which you want to inflate your image as a percentage.


Enable to maintain the same width and height for the inflated bitmap.


Enable to hide any color(s) within a bitmap.


Enable to display any color(s) within a bitmap.


Lets you choose colors and enable them in the active mask.


Lets you select a color from a bitmap.


Lets you edit a color without affecting any of the other colors in the image.


Lets you access bitmap color masks saved on your system.


Lets you choose the folder to which you want to save a color mask.


Lets you set the color tolerance for each color. Increasing the tolerance masks a broader range of the selected color.


Removes all color masking and restores the original bitmap.


Applies a mask to the selected bitmap.


Lists commands for opening an existing mask, saving the active one, and editing the color in the Select Color dialog box.


Enable to link the bitmap externally instead of saving it in the file.


Enable when importing TIFF (or CT) files to link a low-resolution place holder image to a high-resolution file. These TIFF (or CT) images become known as OPI images.


Print Options - General tab


Lets you choose a device driver. Click the arrow to access a list of other available printer and imagesetter drivers.


Displays the name of the printing device.


Displays the status of the printing device.


Displays information about the printing device.


Displays the path of the printing device.


Opens the Properties dialog box. The Properties dialog box lets you choose settings for each printer you select.


Creates a .PRN file from the print job instead of printing the file.


Enable to specify options for printing from a Macintosh computer or for separating files.

When Print to file is disabled, you can specify options for collating pages in the document.


Enable to print more than one open document at a time.


Click the flyout tool to prepare the .PRN file for printing from a Macintosh computer system, sending a single file, sending pages as separate files, or sending plates as separate files.


Displays a range of pages to print.


Enable to print all pages in the document.


Prints only the chapters you specify.


Displays a list of chapters that you can print.


Displays a list of documents that you can print.


Enable to print the active page.


Enable to print selected objects.


Enable to specify the pages, or the range of pages, to print.

The option works in conjunction with the Print Left/Right Pages option.


Lets you specify the pages, or the range of pages, to print.

The option works in conjunction with the Print Odd/Even Pages option.


Lets you choose whether to print left or right pages, or both left and right pages.


Lets you choose whether to print odd or even pages, or both odd and even pages.


Displays the number of copies to print.


Enable to print one set of the specified pages before printing the second set (e.g., a first set of pages 1 to 10 print, before the second set of pages 1 to 10 print, and so on.)


Displays how collated copies are printed (e.g., a first set of pages 1 to 10 print, before the second set of pages 1 to 10 print, and so on.)


Lets you choose a print style (a configuration of print settings).


Saves a print style (a configuration of print settings).


Opens the print preview window which lets you see how work appears when it is printed and change print options.


Lets you print a file for a Macintosh system, print one file, print pages to separate files, or print plates to separate files.


Lets you choose a PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file.


Print Options - Layout tab


Enable to reset the position of the printed image.


Enable to automatically scale the image so that it fits the printable page.


Enable to place the printed image in the position specified in the list box on the right.


Lets you choose the position of the printed image when the button on the left is enabled.


Lets you choose the width of the printed image (not the original document) by the specified percentage.


Lets you choose the height of the printed image (not the original document) by the specified percentage.


Enable to constrain resizing and scaling so that the height and width ratio of the image is maintained.


Enable to print large print jobs on multiple sheets, or tiles, that can be assembled later to form the entire document.


Lets you choose the amount that images on each tile overlap with images on adjacent tiles.


Lets you choose the amount that images on each tile overlap with images on adjacent tiles based on a percentage of the page width.


Enable to specify a bleed limit, which determines how far beyond the crop marks an image can extend when it is printed.


Lets you use preset page layouts and save custom styles.


Displays a list of preset or saved imposition layouts.


Displays an approximate preview of the layout settings.


Print Options - Separations tab


Displays print separation options.


Enable to separate a color image into its component colors so that each component color prints on one sheet.


Enable to print the separations in color (i.e., on a color printer).


Enable to specify Hexachrome process color. Hexachrome color uses six inks instead of four, adding orange and green to the regular process colors of yellow, magenta, cyan, and black.


Enable to set Hexachrome color to use high density inks when you print solid colors. Hexachrome color uses six inks instead of four, adding orange and green to the regular process colors of yellow, magenta, cyan, and black.


Enable to convert spot colors in your print job to process colors. This does not affect the document itself, only the way it is printed.


Enable to print all plates, including those that do not contain an image.


Enable to cause objects that contain 95% black or more to overprint underlying objects. This is a useful option for print jobs containing a lot of black text, but use it carefully on print jobs with a high graphics content.


Enable to create color trapping by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as the object's fill, and then by having the outline overprint underlying objects.


Enable to specify fixed width auto-spreading. When this option is enabled, the auto-spread outline assigned to each object is always the same width.


Enable to change the advanced settings of your color separations.


Opens the Advanced Separations Setting dialog box which lets you set advanced screening parameters, such as screening technology, screen frequency and angle per color plate, overprinting per plate, halftone dot type, etc.


Displays which color separation(s) you want to print.

The list of colors shows all separations used in your print job. You can choose to print all separations, one separation only, or any combination of separations.


Print Options - Advanced dialog


Displays the imagesetter and screening technology that is used to image your print job.

Proprietary screening technologies supported by Corel include AGFA Balanced screening, Linotronic RT, and HQS screening.


Displays the resolution in dots per inch (DPI) of the print job.


Displays the basic screen frequency in lines per inch (LPI) of the print job.

The higher the screen frequency setting, the more intense the colors and the sharper the image. The lower the screen frequency, the lighter the colors and the less sharp the image.

A high frequency gives you fewer levels of gray; a low frequency gives you more levels of gray.


Displays all separations used in your print job.


Lets you specify a halftone screen for the drawing if you are printing to a PostScript device.


Print Options - Prepress tab


Enable to print a negative image.


Enable to specify that the film emulsion faces down.


Displays a graphical representation of the enabled film options (emulsion up or down and negative or positive).


Enable to print the filename, current date, and time (and tile number, if applicable) at the bottom of the page.


Enable to print the file information on the page. If the working page size is the same as the paper or film size, enable Position Within Page.


Lets you specify the text that is displayed in the file information.


Enable to place page numbers on the printed sheets.


Enable to print crop and fold marks, which are used as alignment aids when you trim the printed output to its final size.


Enable to print crop and fold marks only along the outer edge of the sheet. This option is often preferable when you are printing multiple layouts per sheet.


Enable to print registration marks on each sheet. These marks serve as guides for aligning color separations.


Displays the chosen registration marks style.


Enable to print a bar of the six basic colors (red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, and yellow) beside the print job. These color patches are used to verify the quality of the printed output.


Enable to print a densitometer scale, a bar of varying shades of gray, on each separation sheet. This lets you check the accuracy, quality, and consistency of the output with a densitometer.


Displays the density (the levels of gray) that appear in each of the seven squares of the densitometer scale. This option is available only when you have chosen the Densitometer Scales check box.


Print Options - PostScript tab


Lets you choose a PostScript level.


Enable to ensure that the PostScript file conforms to the Document Structuring Convention. Some prepress devices, such as color trapping software, require that the PostScript file conform to DSC.


Enable to compress bitmaps using JPEG compression. Enabling this option can reduce the size of a print job.


Lets you set the degree of JPEG compression used when you print bitmaps.


Enable to define bitmaps in RGB values instead of the usual CMYK values that are found in PostScript files. Use this option when you output to RGB devices (e.g., slidemakers) and when you print to CMY devices. It is easier for these devices to translate from RGB to CMY than from CMYK to CMY.


Enable to tell the service bureau's Open Prepress Interface (OPI) server to substitute the corresponding high-resolution images for the low-resolution ones in your file. This substitution is done before your print file is rasterized and imaged to film.


Enable to replace the low-resolution Desktop Color Separation placeholder with high-resolution Desktop Color Separation images in the PostScript file. If this option is not enabled, the service bureau must replace the low-resolution files when the print file is rasterized and imaged to film.


Displays the basic halftone screen frequency for the print job, in lines per inch (LPI.)


Enable to download Type 1 fonts to the output device. If you disable this option, fonts are printed as graphics (either curves or bitmaps).


Enable to convert True Type fonts to Type 1 fonts. If you enable the Download Type 1 Fonts option, by default the Convert True Type to Type 1 is also enabled. This ensures that True Type fonts are converted to Type 1 fonts so that they can be downloaded.


Lets you choose the maximum allowable number of control points per curve. Reducing this number helps alleviate printing problems caused by objects that are too complex.


Lets you choose the level of flatness that is applied to curves when you print. Increasing the flatness reduces printing time. A high flatness level produces distorted curves.


Enable to automatically increase the flatness in increments of 2. Attempts to print an object will stop when the flatness value exceeds the value set in the Set Flatness To box by 10. The printer skips the problematic object and goes to the next object.


Enable to analyze the file and the print settings, and, if necessary, automatically increase the number of steps used to render fountain fills to avoid banding.

This option may increase printing time, but it ensures the best possible rendering of fountain fills.


Enable to analyze the file and the print settings. If the number of steps in a fountain fill is greater than the number that your output device can render, the number of steps used to render the fountain fill is decreased automatically.


Print Options - Miscellaneous tab


Enable to reproduce colors accurately based on the selected color profiles.


Displays the name of the color profile.


Lets you specify the number of steps to use to render fountain fills in a print job. A low value prints faster but the transition between shades may be coarse, which causes banding. A higher value results in a smoother blend but longer printing times.


Displays the number of steps used to render fountain fills in a print job.


Enable to print only vector graphics.


Enable to print only pictures and graphics.


Enable to print only hidden pictures.


Enable to print only bitmaps.


Enable to print only text.


Enable to print only text.


Enable to fit the print job in the printable page. Use this setting to proof a large layout on your desktop printer.


Enable to print all text in black.


Enable to print using the full-color capabilities of the printing device.


Enable to print all colors in black.


Enable to print all colors in grayscale.


Enable to print a job information sheet with the print job. The sheet contains information about the application that produced the job, the driver that was used, the print settings, the font information, and the file links.


Lets you choose an option and change its settings.


Opens the Job Information Sheet dialog box, which lets you specify the categories of information you want to include in the report.


Opens a dialog box that lets you choose color profiles.


Print Options - Info Settings


Displays the contents of the Print Job Information Sheet.


Lets you specify the information that the Print Job Information Sheet contains.


Sends the Print Job Information Sheet to a .TXT file.


Lets you specify the .TXT file that the Print Job Information Sheet is sent to.


Sends the Print Job Information Sheet to a printer.


Lets you specify the printer that the Print Job Information Sheet is sent to.


Standard toolbar


Displays a list of print styles.


Saves the print options in a print style with a name that you specify.


Deletes the print style.


Opens the Print Options dialog box, that lets you specify print options.


Enable to print the document.


Displays a list of preset zoom settings.


Enable to specify a full-screen preview.


Closes the print preview.


Pick Tool and Property Bar


Lets you select, position, and scale images in the document.


Lets you choose a preset position on the page for the print job.


Lets you specify the placement on the page of the print job. The X value indicates the distance from the left edge of the printable page. The Y value indicates the distance from the top edge of the printable page.


Lets you specify the height and width of the printed image.


Lets you specify the percentage by which to scale the printed image.


Displays the unit of measure that is used when you specify the layout of the print job.


Lets you specify the number of tiles to be placed horizontally and vertically on the printable page.


Imposition layout and Property bar


Lets you choose and edit an imposition layout.


Lets you select, position and edit imposition layouts and binding methods.


Lets you choose a preset or custom imposition layouts.


Lets you save an imposition layout.


Lets you delete an imposition layout.


Lets you specify the number of frames to be placed on the printable page.


Enable to place the working page in each frame of the printable page.


Enable to keep the frame size equal to the working page size.


Lets you specify the distance between each frame that is placed on the printable page.


Enable to set the gutters automatically.


Lets you set the top and left page margins.


Lets you set the bottom and right page margins.


Enable to make the right margin equal to the left margin, and the bottom margin equal to the top margin.


Enable to set the margins automatically.


Enable to change basic settings of a layout. For example, you can change the binding method, and document page size.


Enable to change the position of a page. For example, you can change page numbers and the rotation of a page.


Enable to change gutter size, spacing, and cut and fold locations.


Enable to change margin size.


Enable to choose the Perfect Binding method where individual pages are cut apart and glued at the spine.


Enable to choose the Saddle Binding method where sheets are folded and inserted into one another.


Enable to choose the Collate Cut binding method where all signatures forming a copy of the document are collated and stacked together.


Enable to choose the Custom binding method to individually arrange the pages that are printed on each signature.


Enable to print on both sides of the page.


Enable to switch between a preview of the print job and a preview of the current imposition layout.


Lets you choose the number of signatures on a page.


Lets you choose the number of signatures per group.


Enable to automatically arrange the page on a signature.


Enable to arrange the page(s) left to right, top to bottom, in reading order.


Enable to place the same page at each location on a signature.


Lets you choose the number of pages on a signature.


Lets you choose whether the page is printed top up (0 degrees) or top down (180) degrees.


Enable to apply equal horizontal and vertical gutter sizes.


Lets you change the size of the gutters.


Enable to place cut marks between any two pages.


Enable to place fold marks between any two pages.


Marks Placement tool and property bar


Lets you add, remove, and position printers' marks.


Resets the position of the bounding box.


Lets you specify the position of the bounding box. By repositioning the bounding box, you can change the position of printers' marks.


Zoom tool and property bar


Lets you magnify areas of the document.


Enable to increase the magnification of the document.


Enable to decrease the magnification of the document.


Enable to display items in the drawing at their actual size.


Enable to display the selected image.


Enable to increase or decrease the magnification which lets you display the entire image.


Enable to display the entire page.


Enable to display the width of the page.


Enable to display the height of the page.


Opens the Zoom dialog box which lets you set zoom options.


Status Bar


Displays the name of the selected image.


Lets you choose a printing device.


Displays the name of the printing device.


Displays whether you're printing a composite print job or color separations.


Displays whether you're printing a negative image or whether you're printing a mirrored imaged.


Enable to tile large images so that they are printed on several sheets of paper.


Displays information about the tiling settings.


Displays the mouse position.


Displays the range of pages to be printed.


File Menu


Saves the print options in a print style.


Prints the active page.


View menu


Lets you display the image to be printed or hide the image. A check mark beside the print preview represents the position of the image.


Lets you automatically set a dot beside the view options to best simulate the output of your printer.


Displays the image in color.


Displays the image in grayscale.


Displays a composite color image (all colors on one page).


Displays each color separation on a different page.


Displays the toolbar of the Print Preview window.


Displays the status bar of the Print Preview window.


Displays the rulers of the Print Preview window.


Displays a dotted line around the edge of the page that indicates the limit of the printable area.


Displays PostScript fills the way they will be printed. When PostScript fills aren't rendered, the fills are replaced with a PS pattern.


Displays the selected tile.


Opens the Go To dialog box, which lets you navigate the document.


Settings Menu


Open the Print Options dialog box to the General tab.


Opens the Print Options dialog box to the Layout tab.


Opens the Print Options dialog box to the Separations tab.


Opens the Print Options dialog box to the Prepress tab.


Open the Print Options dialog box to the PostScript tab.


Open the Print Options dialog box to the Miscellaneous tab.


Opens the Print Job Information Sheet dialog box, which lets you specify the categories of information you want to include in the report.


Opens the Duplex Printing wizard, which helps you produce double-sided output using a single-sided printer.


Opens the Driver Compatibility dialog box, which contains options that let you fine-tune printer performance.


Help menu


Opens the Printing online Help.


Opens the About dialog box, which displays information about the application.


Zoom dialog


Enable to set the magnification to 200%.


Enable to set the magnification to 100%.


Enable to set the magnification to 75%.


Enable to set the magnification to 50%.


Enable to set the magnification to 25%.


Lets you specify a magnification percentage.


Displays a preview of the zoom settings.


Go To dialog


Lets you specify the page number to go to.


Enable to specify the side of the page to go to.


Lets you specify the color separation to go to.


Displays a list of pages in the document.


Driver compatibility


Lets you choose a printer.


Displays the capabilities of the printer you choose.


Enable to send text as graphics to the printer.


Enable to switch to clipping controlled by the application. Clipping is the process through which portions of a fill that should not be visible are removed.


Enable to determine whether bitmaps are sent to non-PostScript printers all at once or in smaller blocks (below 64 KB) called chunks. Usually, the driver tells the application which method it can handle.


Enable to let the printing device render bezier curves and paths.


Enable to use the selected color profile.


Enable to send the printed page already split into bands to the driver.


Enable to specify a color profile.


Save Print style


Displays the print style or the name you specified for a new style.


Displays the print options and lets you change them.


Warning dialogs


Cancels the print job.


Continues printing.


Disables this warning for the rest of the print job.


Provides information about this warning.


Skips the object that is causing the PostScript error. If you skip an object, it won't appear in the final output.


The following fixes are only temporary fixes. Apr. 98


Click this to display an overview of this dialog box.

For Help on an item, click ? at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item.


Itemizes in list/details form.


Click to display more options.


Opens a Help file containing a list of Corel Approved Service Bureaus.


Printing from the copy editor

When you print from the Corel VENTURA copy editor you don't have access to all of the available printing options. You can select a printer and specify which pages you want to print, but you can't set any of the PostScript or Prepress options that are available when you aren't printing from the copy editor.


Changes made for Draw 9 release


Displays a list of present print options and lets you change them.


Displays information about the printing device.


Lets you choose options from the following list.


Enable to choose a PostScript Description (PPD) file. The PPD file describes the capabilities and features of your PostScript printer.


Displays the destination of the Job Information Sheet.


Displays a list of options to include in the Job Information Sheet.


layout tab


Lets you resize the height of your printed artwork (not the original document.)


Displays the height of your printed artwork (not the original document.)


Displays a list of preset or saved imposition layouts.


Displays the number of horizontal and vertical tiles on the printable page.


Click the flyout to choose a page from the list.


Displays position, size and scale factors for the selected page.


Displays the position of your document on the page.


Displays the scale of your printed artwork (not the original document) by the specified percentage.


Displays the size of your printed artwork (not the original document.)


Lets you resize the width of your printed artwork (not the original document.)


Displays the specified width of your printed artwork.


Lets you choose the distance from the left edge of the printable page.


Displays the distance from the left edge of the printable page.


Lets you specify the number of tiles to be placed horizontally on the printable page.


Displays the number of tiles placed horizontally on the printable page.


Lets you choose the distance from the top edge of the printable page.


Displays the distance from top edge of the printable page.


Lets you specify the number of tiles to be placed vertically on the printable page.


Displays the number of tiles placed vertically on the printable page.


Misc tab


Enable to reduce the number of pixels per line in a color bitmap


Lets you change the number by which the color bitmap is downsampled.


Lets you downsample bitmaps to reduce file size.


Enable to reduce the number of pixels per line in a grayscale bitmap.


Lets you change the number by which the grayscale bitmap is downsampled.


Lets you change the number by which the monochrome bitmap is downsampled.


Enable to reduce the number of pixels per line in a monochrome bitmap


Lets you print color bitmaps as CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black,) RGB (red, green, blue,) or grayscale.


Displays how color bitmaps are printed.


IDH_PRN_MISCOPTIONS_VECTOR_PRN_PRINTPICTURES


Displays a list of proofing options.


Enable to convert each page to a bitmap.


Lets you change the resolution of the bitmap.


Displays a list of printing options.


Postscript tab


Enable to include links or URLS to other Web page or the Internet.


Enable to include links to other pages in the file represented by text.


Tools options/global/printing/driver compatibility


Lets you choose to display a full screen, the current page, or only the thumbnails on startup in Acrobat Reader or Acrobat Exchange.


Enable to send the printed page already split into bands to the driver.


Enable to determine whether bitmaps are sent to non-PostScript printers all at once or in smaller blocks (below 64 KB) called chunks. Usually, the driver tells the application which method it can handle.


Displays the currently selected printer.


Lets you specify a color profile.


Enable to let the printing device render bezier curves and paths.


Enable to switch to clipping controlled by the application.


Enable to send text as graphics to the printer.


Enable to specify a color profile.


Enable to print the current page by default.


Displays a list of printing options and lets you assign them new settings.


Displays the default print style.


Tools options/global/printing/preflight


Displays a list of issues that can cause print problems.


Displays a list of issues that can cause print problems.


Displays a list of print separation options.


separations/ trapping


Displays a list of trapping options which let you maintain color consistency.


Enable to preserve overprint settings in a document.


Preflight Tab


Enable so that Preflight does not check for the selected issue.


Displays that Preflight is analyzing the file.


Opens the Preflight Settings dialog box which lets you choose which issues Preflight checks for each time you print.


Displays a summary of the selected issue and a suggestion of how to resolve the issue.


Displays a list of issues that can cause print problems.


PPD Properties dialog box


Displays .PPD print settings.


Lists .PPD file printing options.


Enable to turn on collating.


Enable to turn off collating.


Displays .PPD printing options.


Displays paper print settings of a .PPD file.


Enable to print one set of the specified pages before printing the second set (e.g., a first set of pages 1 to 10 print, before the second set of pages 1 to 10 print, and so on).


Enable to print the document in color.


Lets you choose the number of copies to print.


Displays the name and type of the PostScript printer using the .PPD file.


Displays the position of the paper when printed.


Enable to print along the long side of the page on both sides.


Enable when you do not want to print on both sides of a paper.


Enable to print along the short side of the page on both sides.


Displays the file version of the selected .PPD file.


Displays the name and location of a .PPD file.


Enable to print the document as monochrome.


Displays the name and type of the PostScript printer using the .PPD file.


Enable to print the document with the long side of the page (landscape.)


Enable to print the document with the short side of the page (portrait.)


Enable to print the document rotated at 180 degrees.


Lets you choose the size of the paper the .PPD prints on.


Lets you choose the paper feed location for the currently selected printer.


Opens the Select PPD file dialog box that lets you choose a .PPD file from the hard drive or network.


Halftone Screen - Under Fixed Templates/Options/PostScript


Displays the shape of the dots in the halftone screen.


Displays the shape of the dots in the halftone screen.


Displays the screen frequency of the halftone screen.


Displays the lines per inch (LPI) of the screen frequency.


Lets you choose the screen angle of the halftone screen.


Lets you choose the frequency and angle of a halftone screen.


Displays the screen angle of the halftone screen.


Displays the degree of the screen angle.


Lets you choose the screen frequency of the halftone screen.


Color Dialog


Lets you choose a color from visual representations of the visible spectrum.


Lets you choose from a mixer to blend and harmonize colors.


Lets you choose a fixed color palette. A fixed color palette is useful when you work with spot or process color systems by DIC, DuPont, FOCOLTONE, PANTONE, TOYO, HKS, or TRUMATCH. Use these palettes, along with a color reference book, to view how colors look when they are printed.


Lets you choose a custom color palette. You can edit a custom palette.


Lets you choose a color model you can use to select colors


Lets you choose a color from the palette.


Displays the color of the selected object and the currently selected color. A dot in the corner of the color indicates that the color is a spot color.


Lets you choose the closest in gamut color your printer can print.


Displays the color of the selected object and the currently selected color.


Adds the New color to the end of the on-screen custom Color Palette you choose in the list box.


Displays a color component value for the current color. The letter next to the box identifies the component name, e.g., C for cyan when you use the CMYK model, R for red when you use the RGB model, and so on. For colors in the custom palette, the components correspond to the color model or color matching palette you use to edit the color.


Displays the name of the current color. Lets you type or choose the name or number of an existing color to display that color.


Lets you set a color.


Lets you choose outline or fill color for text or objects


Displays the current and the selected colors. An in gamut color swatch will appear if you select a color outside of the printer's color range.


Displays the current and the selected colors. An in gamut color swatch will appear if you select a color outside of the printer's color range. A dot in the corner of the color indicates that the color is a spot color.


Displays the color currently selected.


Displays the color of the currently selected object or text.


 Displays the color currently selected. A dot in the corner of the color indicates that the color is a spot color.


Displays the color of the currently selected object or text. A dot in the corner of the color indicates that the color is a spot color.


Displays the color component values for the current color. View different component values through the Options flyout


Mixers Blend


Lets you choose a color to blend with the three other colors chosen from the color pickers.


Displays the blended colors.


Lets you set the number of blended color swatches displayed.


Color Harmonies


Lets you superimpose a dot or a shape over the color wheel. The shape you choose influences the number of rows displayed below the color wheel.


Displays a grid of colors derived from the position of the black and white circles on the color wheel.


Lets you choose the shape that is superimposed on the color wheel. Different shapes produce different relationships between the colors that are displayed in the grid of colors below the color wheel. Different shapes determine the number of color rows that appear below the color wheel.


Lets you choose variations in the colors appearances.


Lets you set the number of colors displayed in the color grid below the color wheel.


Fixed Palettes


Lets you set a tint for the selected color.


Hides all the on-screen Color Palettes.


Displays the CorelDRAW default Color Palette.


Displays and lets you choose colors from an independent palette (not based on a color-matching system or your image) that provides 256 colors uniformly spread between red, green, and blue.


 Displays and lets you choose colors from the HKS Color system which are spot colors. HKS Color system contain spot colors which, correspond to solid inks and are not CMYK-based, each unique color applied to an object results in an additional color separation plate.


Displays and lets you choose colors from a palette of 216 colors used by Microsoft® Internet Explorer web browser. Use these colors to ensure that your image colors display clearly on systems that use this browser.


Displays and lets you choose colors from a palette of 216 colors used by Netscape Navigator(TM) web browser.Use these colors to ensure that your image colors display clearly on systems that use this browser.


Displays and lets you choose colors from the PANTONE® Matching System Coated palette which simulates printing colors on coated paper. PANTONE® Matching System Coated palette contains spot colors which correspond to solid inks and are not CMYK-based, each unique color applied to an object results in an additional color separation plate.


Displays and lets you choose colors from the PANTONE® Matching System Uncoated palette which simulates printing these colors on uncoated paper. The PANTONE® Matching System Uncoated palette contains spot colors that correspond to solid inks and are not CMYK-based, each unique color applied to an object results in an additional color separation plate.


Displays and lets you choose colors from the PANTONE® Matching System palette that was included in DRAW 8. This palette is for compatibility purposes only and is superseded by the PANTONE® Matching System Coated palette.


Displays and lets you choose colors from the PANTONE® Process Color system, which is based on the CMYK color model. The PANTONE® Process Color system colors are based on CMYK and do not add color separation plates.


Displays and lets you choose colors from the PANTONE® Hexachrome Uncoated palette which is based on the Hexachrome color model and contains six process inks and a broader range of colors. The PANTONE® Hexachrome Uncoated palette simulates printing colors on uncoated paper.


Displays and lets you choose colors from the PANTONE® Hexachrome Coated palette which is based on the Hexachrome color model and contains six process inks and a broader range of colors. PANTONE® Coated palette simulates printing colors on coated paper.


 Displays and lets you choose colors from the PANTONE® Metallic Colors palette which is based on spot colors that correspond to solid inks and are not CMYK-based. Each unique color applied to an object results in an additional color separation plate.


Displays and lets you choose colors from the PANTONE® Pastel Colors Coated palette which simulates printing colors on coated paper. The PANTONE® Pastel Colors Coated palette contains spot colors that correspond to solid inks and are not CMYK-based; each unique color applied to an object results in an additional color separation plate.


Displays and lets you choose colors from the PANTONE® Pastel Colors Uncoated palette which simulates printing colors on uncoated paper. The PANTONE® Pastel Colors Uncoated palette contains spot colors that correspond to solid inks and are not CMYK-based; each unique color applied to an object results in an additional color separation plate.


Displays and lets you choose colors from the TRUMATCH® color matching system, which is based on the CMYK color model does not add color separation plates. Colors are organized by hue (red to violet), saturation (deep to pastel), and brightness (adding or removing black).


 Displays and lets you choose colors from the FOLCOLTONE color matching system which provides a range of spot colors using, cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (CMYK).


 Displays and lets you choose colors from a palette of colors available from the DuPont® SpectraMaster solid color library. Colors are based on the Lab Color model and are converted to RGB for display and CMYK for printing.


 Displays and lets you choose colors from a palette of colors from the TOYO COLOR FINDER system. The range of colors includes colors created using TOYO process inks and colors reproduced using TOYO standard inks.


 Displays and lets you choose colors from a palette of colors from DIC Color Guide, DIC Color Guide Part II, and DIC Traditional Colors of Japan. Colors are created by mixing DIC brand inks.


 Displays and lets you choose colors from a color palette based on the Lab color model. The Lab color model consists of three components: lightness (L*), green to red chromaticity (a*), and blue to yellow chromaticity (b*). Lab colors are converted to CMYK when printed.


Opens the Open Palette dialog box which lets you locate and open a color palette.


 Opens the Save Palette As dialog box which lets you save a custom color palette from the chosen selection.


Opens the Save Palette As dialog box which lets you save a custom color palette from the chosen document.


Opens the Palette Editor which lets you edit the active Color Palette.


Custom palettes


Displays the contents of the color palette.


Displays and lets you choose colors from the CorelDRAW Palette of colors.


Displays and lets you choose colors from the Corel PHOTO-PAINT Palette of colors.


Displays and lets you choose colors from a gray palette that shows an increasing percentage of black.


Displays and lets you choose colors from a palette that shows 256 shades gray.


Color Docker


Opens the Color Docker window.


Applies the current color as the outline.


Applies the current color to the background.


Applies the current color as the fill.


Shows the currently selected color.


Shows the currently selected Paint and Paper colors. The small boxes on the bottom left corner reset the Paint and Paper colors to their default values.


Lets you choose a color model.


Lets you select a color by clicking. Move the slider on the right and position the square in the color selection area to select a color.


Lets you select the closest in gamut color your printer can print.


Shows the selected color as numeric values.


Palette Editor


Controls


Opens a color palette.


Creates a new color palette.


Saves the color palette.


Saves the color palette with a name that you specify.


Lets you choose a color palette.


Displays the colors in the active color palette.


Opens the Select Color dialog box and lets you to edit the active color palette.


Adds the selected color or colors to the active color palette.


Deletes the selected color or colors from the active color palette.


Lets you sort the colors in the active color palette.


Lets you load colors in the active color palette.


Returns the color palette to the state it was in when you last saved it.


Opens the Duotone dialog box.


Displays the numeric values, name and a color swatch of the selected color. Edit the color name by entering a new color name in the name box.


Displays a color component value for the current color. The letter next to the box identifies the component name, e.g., C for cyan when you use the CMYK model, R for red when you use the RGB model, and so on.


Displays the name and allows you to change the color name of the selected color.


Displays the selected color.


Palettes Browser window


Opens the Color Palette Browser which lets you browse the color palettes on your computer and load them into the on-screen Color Palette.


Displays a list of color palettes stored on your computer.


Opens the Open Palette dialog box, which lets you choose a color palette.


Color Management


Enable to correct on-screen colors based on the monitor's color profile.


Enable to display on-screen colors as they would printout.


Enable to simulate composite printer color output on your monitor. Use the composite printer if you are printing to a full-color desktop printer.


Enable to simulate separations printer color output on your monitor. Use the separations printer if you are printing to an imagesetter.


Enable to highlight colors that can't be printed using the selected warning color.


Lets you choose a warning color for colors that can't be printed.


Set the transparency of the selected warning color. Making the warning color transparent lets you view the image even when the colors are outside the printer's color gamut.


General


Enable to produce a separate printing plate for each FOCOLTONE color. Each FOCOLTONE color requires a separate ink.


Enable to produce a separate printing plate for each TOYO color. Each TOYO color requires a separate ink.


Enable to produce a separate printing plate for each DIC color. Each DIC color requires a separate ink.


Enable to set CMYK values range from 0 to 100 (percentages) or 0 to 255. When you display values as percentages, 100 is equivalent to 255.


Enable to map spot colors into CMYK gamut when you print.


Enable to simulate the output of a separations printer on a composite printer. This is useful for proofing your work.


Lets you choose the color space conversion method based on your file content.


Profiles


Lets you choose a preset monitor profile.


Lets you choose a preset scanner profile.


Lets you choose a preset composite printer profile.


Lets you choose a preset separations printer profile.


Lets you choose a preset internal RGB color space profile.


Trace - Convert to Palette


Options Tab


Lets you set the amount of smoothing you want. This controls color transitions to minimize abrupt color changes.


Lets you choose a color palette to convert the image.


Opens the Open Palette dialog box which lets you locate and open a custom palette to convert the image to the 8-bit Paletted color mode.


Lets you choose a dithering type that determines how adjacent pixels are arranged to create colors.


Lets you set the amount by which adjacent pixels are arranged to create colors.


Lets you specify the number of colors to include in an adaptive or optimized Color Palette.


Enable to specify a target color for optimized conversion.


Lets you choose the color you want to emphasize in Processed Palette.


Displays the color you selected using the eyedropper tool or lets you choose a color from the drop down color palette so similar colors are used during the conversion.


Returns the target color to the default color.


Lets you select a preset conversion option.


Opens the save Preset dialog box from which you can save the conversion option.


Deletes the selected preset option.


Previews the changes that you apply.


Enable to preview the changes automatically.


Resets the image to the default values.


Displays the source image.


Displays the preview image.


Displays a preview of the changes made to the source file.


Range Sensitivity Tab


Displays the specified target color.


Lets you set the emphasis placed on the selected color and colors related to it. A higher Importance value includes more shades of the selected color in the color palette.


Lets you set the emphasis placed on the selected color.


Lets you set the lightness component of the target color during the conversion.


Lets you set the lightness component of the selected value.


Lets you set the emphasis of the green/red component of the target color during the conversion.


Lets you set the emphasis of the blue/yellow component of the target color during the conversion.


Resets the Importance and the Lightness sliders to the default value.


Resets the Importance slider to the default value.


Resets the Lightness slider to the default value.


Resets the Green Red axis slider to the default value.


Resets the Blue Yellow axis slider to the default value.


Processed Palette


 Displays the colors you are using to convert the current image.


Opens the Color Table dialog box, which lets you edit the Process Palette.


Opens the Save Palette As dialog box, which lets you save the color palette as a .CPL file.


Displays the RGB color values of the color swatch in the Process Palette.


Displays the numeric location of the selected color in the Process Palette.


Displays the Hex values of the color swatch in the Process Palette.


Batch Mode


Displays open images that you can convert to the 8-bit Paletted color mode.


Displays the images you are converting to the 8-bit Paletted color mode.


Adds the selected image to the list of images you are converting.


Adds all open images to the list of images you are converting.


Removes the selected image from the list of images you are converting.


Removes all the images except the active image from the list of images you are converting.


Lets you choose the image you want to preview.


Duotone Mode


Lets you choose the number of inks to use in the conversion and displays a visual representation of the ink curves. The display is based on the grayscale value and ink intensity of each point on the curve.


Displays the ink colors, and lets you change an ink color.


Resets the current curve to the default setting.


Enable to display all ink curves in the grid simultaneously.


Opens the Load Duotone Files dialog box, which lets you load duotone files (.CPD).


Opens the Save Duotone Files dialog box, which lets you save the set of ink curves.


Lets you choose an overprint ink color.


 Enable to view overprint areas on screen.


Returns the current overprint to the default settings.


Returns all items in the Overprint list to their default settings.


Lets you add the chosen color to the selected custom color palette


Opens the Options flyout which lets you choose different options to manipulate the colors.


Displays the dynamic ink curves. The horizontal plane displays the 256 possible shades of gray in a grayscale image (0 is black; 255 is white). The vertical plane represents the intensity of an ink (from 1 to 100 per cent) that is applied to the corresponding grayscale values.


Displays the selected overprint ink colors and how they appear when printed to a composite printer.


Places a bounding box with handles at each corner of the selected object. You can position the handles to create the impression that the object is receding from a view in one direction (one-point perspective) or in two directions (two-point perspective).


Opens the Envelope Docker window, which lets you distort the shape of an object by applying an envelope to it and shaping the envelope.


Opens the Blend Docker window, which lets you blend one object into another through a series of intermediate shapes.


Opens the Extrude Docker window, which lets you give an object a three-dimensional appearance. Using the controls on the Property Bar, you can apply vector and bitmap extrusions to objects.


Opens the Contour Docker window, which lets you create a series of concentric shapes radiating inward or outward from an object.


Opens the Lens Docker window, which lets you apply a lens effect to an object.


 Lets you adjust shadow, midtone, and highlighted areas by redistributing shades from darkest to lightest.


 Lets you enhance the contrast near edges and reveals the details of light and dark areas of a bitmap.


 Lets you correct colors precisely by changing individual pixel values.


 Lets you adjust the colors in your image using HSB (hue, saturation, and brightness) values.


Lets you shift the colors in your image between CMY (cyan, magenta, and yellow) color values and RGB (red, green, and blue) values.


Lets you pick up detail in a low-contrast drawing without significantly affecting the shadows or highlights.


Lets you adjust the colors in your drawing using HSL (hue, saturation and lightness) values.


 Lets you modify colors by adjusting the percentage of the component process colors (CMYK values) in a color spectrum option (reds, yellows, greens, cyans, blues, magentas).


 Lets you adjust color values in an image with sample colors taken directly from the image itself.


 Lets you replace one image color with another color.


 Reduces the saturation of each color to zero and removes the hue component, converting each color to grayscale.


Makes a negative of your drawing by converting all color values to their opposites; e.g., black becomes white, blue becomes yellow.


Lets you convert color ranges in your image to solid blocks of color.


Lets you remove horizontal lines from scanned images to produce clearer results.


Places the selected object (the contents object) inside another object (the container object) to create a PowerClip object.


Removes the contents object from the container object. The objects remain in the same position; however, the extracted object is no longer part of the PowerClip object.


Temporarily separates the content and container objects to let you edit the content object.


Reunites the content and container objects after you edit the PowerClip object.


Removes the last effect you apply to the selected object, allowing you to restore an object to its original appearance.


Copies the perspective from an object with perspective and applies it to the selected object.


Copies the envelope of an object with an envelope and applies it to the selected object.


Copies the blend and applies it to the two selected objects.


Copies the extrusion of an extruded object and applies it to the selected object.


Copies the contour of a contoured object and applies it to the selected object.


Copies the lens from a lens object and applies it to the selected object.


Copies the content object of a PowerClip object and applies it to the selected object. The selected object becomes the container object.


Copies the drop shadow of an object and applies it to the selected object.


Copies the distortion effect of an object and applies it to the selected object.


Clones the blend and applies it to the two selected objects.


Clones the extrusion of an extruded object and applies it to the selected object.


Clones the contour of a contoured object and applies it to the selected object.


Clones the drop shadow of an object and applies it to the selected object.


 Links to a Corel Web site, where you can access information and download additional tools.


Shapes an envelope by applying a straight line to a segment of an envelope.


Shapes an envelope by applying a single-arc curve to a segment of an envelope.


Shapes an envelope by applying a double-arc curve to a segment of an envelope.


Shapes an envelope without limits. You can move envelope nodes freely and use control points to make precise adjustments.


Adds a rectangular envelope to the selected object. You can reshape the object based on the shape you give the envelope.


Lets you choose a preset envelope.


Lets you choose a mapping mode by which an object is fitted to an envelope.


Lets you keep the lines of an object straight or convert them to curves when you apply an envelope. Lines remain straight when the button appears pressed.


Removes envelopes one at a time, starting with the one you applied most recently. Before you can clear an envelope, you must remove any effects that were applied to the object after you applied the envelope.


Adds a rectangular envelope to the selected object. You can reshape the object based on the shape you give the envelope.


Displays available preset envelopes.


Lets you choose a preset envelope.


Lets you choose a mapping mode by which an object is fitted to an envelope.


Enable to prevent the selected object's straight lines from being converted to curves when you apply the envelope.


Creates an envelope around the selected object based on the shape of another object you select from the Drawing Window.


Resets envelope settings to the previous saved settings.


Applies the envelope, including its editing mode and mapping settings, to the selected object.


Copies the properties of the blend to another object.


Remove the blend from the objects.


Click the top button to specify the number of intermediate objects between the blend's start and end objects. Click the bottom button to specify the spacing between the intermediate objects for blends fitted to a path.


Lets you specify the number of intermediate objects you want in a blend (top box), and lets you specify the spacing between intermediate objects in a blend fitted to a path (bottom box).


Lets you specify the number of degrees the blend's intermediate objects rotate as they progress from the start object to the end object.


Lets you rotate or straighten the selected blend's intermediate objects. The value specified in the Blend Direction box determines the degree of the loop. Looping occurs when the button appears pressed.


Blends the start and end objects' colors by following a direct path through the color spectrum. This path progresses from the start object's color to the end object's color.


Blends the start and end objects' colors by following a clockwise path through the spectrum. This path progresses from the start object's color to the end object's color.


Blends the start and end objects' colors by following a counterclockwise path through the spectrum. This path progresses from the start object's color to the end object's color.


Lets you set the rate of acceleration of objects and colors for the intermediate objects in a blend.


Lets you set the rate of acceleration of the intermediate objects in a blend. The rate you set determines the proximity of the objects as they approach the end object.


Lets you set the rate of acceleration of the fill and outline colors of the intermediate objects in a blend. The rate you set determines how quickly or slowly the colors move through the spectrum as they approach the end object.


Lets you accelerate the change in size of intermediate objects or maintain the size of intermediate objects. Size acceleration is enabled when the button appears pressed. The change in size is determined by the rate you set on the Blend Object Acceleration slider.


Lets you link and unlink the color and object rates of acceleration for the intermediate objects in a blend. Linked acceleration occurs when the button appears pressed. You can specify the object and color acceleration rate by clicking the Object And Color Acceleration button on the Property Bar.


Lets you work with the nodes in a blend.


Lets you change the start and end objects of a blend.


Lets you specify a new start object for the selected blend.


Selects the start object of the selected blend.


Lets you specify a new end object for the selected blend.


Selects the end object in the selected blend.


Lets you change the path of the selected blend.


Lets you specify a new path for the selected blend.


Selects the path to which the selected blend is attached.


Separates the selected blend from the path along which it's blended.


Opens the Blend Steps page, which lets you set the number of steps, the spacing, and the rotation of a blend.


Opens the Blend Acceleration page, which lets you specify acceleration settings for a blend.


Opens the Blend Color page, which lets you specify settings for blending the colors of the start and end objects in the blend.


Opens the Miscellaneous Blend Options page, which lets you map the nodes of a blend, split a blend, or fuse the start or end of a blend.


Enable to specify the number of intermediate objects between the two objects being blended.


Enable to specify the amount of space between the intermediate objects of a blend that is fitted to a path.


Lets you specify the number of intermediate shapes between the start and end objects of a blend.


Lets you specify the amount of space between the intermediate objects of a blend that is fitted to a path.


Lets you specify the number of degrees by which the blend's intermediate objects rotate as they progress from the start object to the end object.


Enable to rotate a blend's intermediate objects around a point halfway between the start and end objects' centers of rotation. This creates an arc shape.


Enable to stretch the selected blend over the entire length of the path to which it's attached.


Enable to rotate the selected blend's intermediate objects so that their centers follow the path to which they're attached.


Lets you set the rate of acceleration of the intermediate objects in blend. The rate you set determines the proximity of the objects as they approach the end object.


Lets you set the rate of acceleration of the fill and outline colors of the intermediate objects in a blend. The rate you set determines how quickly or slowly the colors move through the spectrum as they approach the end object.


Enable to accelerate the change in size of intermediate objects. The change in size is determined by the rate you set on the Acceleration Objects slider.


Enable to accelerate fills, outlines, and objects at the same rate.


Resets the sliders on the Blend Acceleration page to the default settings.


Lets you specify which nodes you use to blend the start and end objects.


Lets you split a blend at an intermediate object, which results in a compound blend. The object at which you split the blend becomes the end object of one component and the start object of the other component.


Unites the start object of a compound or split blend to create a single blend.


Unites the end object of a compound or split blend to create a single blend


Lets you specify a new start object or display the start object of a blend.


Lets you specify a new start object for the selected blend.


Selects the start object of the selected blend.


Lets you specify a new end object or display the end object of a blend.


Lets you specify a new end object for the selected blend.


Selects the end object in the selected blend.


Lets you display the blend path, fit a blend to a new path, or detach a blend from a path.


Lets you specify a new path for the selected blend.


Selects the path to which the selected blend is attached.


Separates the selected blend from the path along which it's blended.


Applies the settings you specify in the Blend Docker window to the selected objects or blend.


Lets you apply a bitmap extrusion to an object.


Lets you specify the depth of an extrusion.


Lets you choose a bevel type for the front of the selected bitmap extrusion.


Lets you choose a bevel type for the back of the selected bitmap extrusion.


Lets you choose a texture for the selected bitmap extrusion.


Lets you specify rotation values for the selected extrusion.


Lets you specify a value to rotate the extrusion along the x-axis.


Lets you specify a value to rotate the extrusion along the y-axis.


Lets you specify a value to rotate the extrusion along the z-axis.


Lets you apply Ambient light to a bitmap extrusion.


Enable to apply Ambient light to the selected bitmap extrusion.


Opens the Color dialog box, which lets you choose a color for the Ambient light.


Lets you set the intensity of the Ambient light.


Lets you specify the intensity of the Ambient light.


Applies the Ambient light properties to the selected bitmap extrusion.


Lets you specify the height of the beveled surfaces.


Lets you apply Point light to a bitmap extrusion.


Adds a Point light, which you can position to cast a light in a specific direction.


Removes the selected Point light from the bitmap extrusion.


Opens the Color dialog box, which lets you choose a color for the Point light.


Lets you set the brightness of the selected Point light.


Lets you specify the brightness of the selected Point light.


Applies the Point light properties to the selected bitmap extrusion.


Fits a bitmap extrusion to its bounding box.


Lets you apply a vector extrusion to an object.


Lets you specify a horizontal coordinate for the vanishing point (X box) and a vertical coordinate (Y box). The coordinates can be relative to the page origin (i.e., the rulers) or to the center of the object.


Enable to position the vanishing point relative to the 0,0 points on the rulers.


Enable to position the vanishing point relative to the center of the selected extrusion.


Resets all rotation values to 0 for the selected extruded object.


Lets you set color properties for the extruded surfaces of the selected object.


Applies the fill of the control object to all of its extruded surfaces.


Lets you apply a color other than that of the control object to the extruded surfaces.


Lets you blend two colors along the length of the extruded surfaces.


Lets you choose a color to apply to the extruded surfaces as either a solid or shade fill, depending on the color properties you specify.


Lets you choose the shade color to which you want the extruded surfaces to fade.


Lets you apply fill of the extruded surfaces to the beveled surfaces, or lets you choose a different color for the beveled surfaces. Beveled surfaces use the fill of the extruded surfaces when the button appears pressed.


Lets you choose a color for the beveled surfaces of the selected extruded object.


Lets you wrap the entire extruded object with a fill, or lets you apply the fill to each extruded surface separately. Draping occurs when the button appears pressed.


Lets you set bevel properties for the selected extrusion.


Lets you apply or remove beveled surfaces. Beveled surfaces are applied to the selected object when the button appears pressed.


Lets you apply beveled surfaces only or beveled and extruded surfaces to the selected object. Only beveled surfaces are applied when the button appears pressed.


Lets you set lighting properties for the selected vector extrusion.


Lets you add a light source to the selected vector extrusion, adjust the position of the light source, and vary its intensity.


Lets you add or remove a simulated light source. A light source is projected toward the selected extruded object when the button appears pressed.


Lets you add or remove a simulated light source. A light source is projected toward the selected extruded object when the button appears pressed.


Lets you add or remove a simulated light source. A light source is projected toward the selected extruded object when the button appears pressed.


Lets you combine the light and dark shades (brightness and saturation) of a light source precisely or lets you use a more basic shading process.


Removes the extrusion you applied to the selected object.


Opens the Extrude Camera page, which lets you set properties for an extrusion.


Opens the Extrude Rotation page, which lets you rotate an extrusion in three dimensions.


Opens the Extrude Light page, which lets you set lighting properties for an extrusion.


Opens the Extrude Color page, which lets you set color properties for an extrusion.


Opens the Extrude Bevel page, which lets you set bevel properties for an extrusion.


Displays the effect the specified extrusion type will have on an object.


Lets you choose an extrusion type.


Lets you choose the attributes of the extrusion's vanishing point.


Lets you specify how far a perspective extrusion recedes from or approaches the vanishing point.


Provides controls that let you set the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the extrusion's vanishing point.


Lets you specify the horizontal position of the extrusion's vanishing point. Its position is relative to the rulers or to the center of the selected object.


Lets you specify the vertical position of the extrusion's vanishing point. Its position is relative to the rulers or to the center of the selected object.


Lets you define the extrusion's vanishing, point relative to the rulers or relative to the center of the selected object.


Enable to position the vanishing point relative to the 0,0 points on the rulers.


Enable to position the vanishing point relative to the center of the selected object.


Displays the position of the extruded object. Drag the model to rotate the extruded object.


Cancels the rotation and returns the object to its previous position.


Lets you rotate an object by dragging the Corel logo or by specifying values.


Lets you specify a value to rotate the extrusion along the x-axis.


Lets you specify a value to rotate the extrusion along the y-axis.


Lets you specify a value to rotate the extrusion along the z-axis.


Adds a simulated light that is projected toward the extruded object. You can position the light source by dragging circle 1 in the Preview window.


Adds a simulated light that is projected toward the extruded object. You can position the light source by dragging circle 2 in the Preview window.


Adds a simulated light that is project toward the extruded object. You can position the light source by dragging circle 3 in the Preview Window.


Lets you set the amount of light emanating from the selected light source.


Enable to use combine light and dark shades (brightness and saturation) of a light source precisely.


Resets the intensity of the light source to zero.


Lets you set color properties for the extruded surfaces of the selected object.


Enable to apply the color of the control object to all of its extruded surfaces.


Enable to apply a color other than that of the control object to the extruded surfaces.


Enable to wrap the entire extruded object with a pattern, texture, or bitmap, instead of filling each extruded surface separately.


Lets you choose a fill color for the extruded surfaces.


Enable to blend two colors along the length of the extruded surfaces.


Lets you choose the shade color from which you want the extruded surfaces to fade.


Lets you choose the shade color to which you want the extruded surfaces to fade.


Enable to apply the fill settings to the selected object's beveled surfaces as well as its extruded surfaces.


Enable to apply beveled surfaces to the selected object.


Enable to apply beveled surfaces only to the control object (i.e., no extruded surfaces).


Displays a graphical representation of the bevel depth, and angle settings and lets you adjust the settings.


Lets you specify the depth of the beveled surfaces.


Lets you specify the angle of the beveled surfaces.


Lets you edit the selected extruded object.


Applies the bevel settings you specify to the selected object.


Resets the bevel values.


Copies the properties of the contour to another object.


Removes the contour from the object.


Adds contour lines to the center of the selected object.


Adds contour lines inside the outline of the selected object.


Adds contour lines outside the outline of the selected object.


Lets you specify the number of concentric shapes you want to create. If you select the To Center option, as many concentric shapes as possible given the offset value are automatically created.


Creates a color progression that passes through the color spectrum in a straight line from the original object's fill color to the last contour shape's fill color.


Creates a color progression that passes through the color spectrum in a clockwise path from the original object's fill color to the last contour shape's fill color.


Creates a color progression that passes through the color spectrum in a counterclockwise path from the original object's fill color to the last contour shape's fill color.


Lets you choose an outline color for the last concentric shape.


Lets you choose a fill color for the last concentric shape.


Lets you choose the end color for the fountain fill, which is applied to the last concentric shape. This button is available only when you apply a fountain fill to the original object.


Lets you specify the number of concentric shapes (top box) and the distance between concentric shapes (bottom box).


Opens the Contour Steps page of the Contour Docker window, which lets you set the contour properties for the selected object.


Opens the Contour Color page of the Contour Docker window, which lets you set the color properties for a contour.


Enable to create concentric shapes inside the selected object that get progressively smaller until they reach the object's center.


Enable to create concentric shapes inside the selected object that get progressively smaller as they approach the object's center.


Enable to create concentric shapes outside the selected object that get progressively larger as they move away from the object.


Lets you specify the distance you want between concentric shapes.


Lets you specify the number of concentric shapes you want to create. If you enable the To Center button, as many concentric shapes as possible given the offset value are created automatically.


Displays the path the color progression will take through the spectrum as it moves from the original object's fill color to the last contour shape's fill color. This path is indicated with a black line.


Lets you choose a fill color for the last concentric shape.


Lets you choose the start color for the fountain fill, which is applied to the last concentric shape. This color picker is available only when you apply a fountain fill to the original object.


Lets you choose the end color for the fountain fill, which is applied to the last concentric shape. This button is available only when you apply a fountain fill to the original object.


Applies the contour settings to the selected object.


Provides a preview of the lens selected in the Lens Type list box.


Lets you choose a lens effect.


Lets you specify the rate of the lens applied to the object.


Lets you choose a color for the lens.


Lets you choose a type of Custom Color Map lens. The lens object type determines the direction of the color progression that the lens displays.


Lets you choose the color that starts the color range you want the lens object to display.


Interchanges the To and From colors.


Lets you choose the color that ends the color range you want the lens object to display.


Lets you choose a color for the Tinted Grayscale lens.


Enable to display the outlines of objects behind the lens with a specific color.


Lets you choose a color for the outlines of objects displayed through the lens.


Enable to display the fills of objects behind the lens with a specific color. Otherwise, the object's fills will appear transparent.


Lets you choose a color for all fills displayed through the lens.


Enable to fix the contents to the lens.


Enable to edit the lens' viewpoint.


Lets you specify a horizontal coordinate for the lens' viewpoint, relative to the ruler origin.


Lets you specify a vertical position for the lens' viewpoint, relative to the ruler origin.


Applies the settings you specify.


Switches to the basic controls for the selected lens type after you edit the viewpoint.


Enable to display the effects of the lens only where the lens covers the object.


Applies the lens settings to the selected object.


Opens a dialog box of the transparency applied to the selected object, which lets you adjust the transparency's attributes.


Lets you choose a transparency type.


Applies a linear fountain transparency to the selected object.


Applies a radial fountain transparency to the selected object.


Applies a conical fountain transparency to the selected object.


Applies a square fountain transparency to the selected object.


Lets you set the opacity of the transparency.


Lets you specify the angle (top box) and the edge pad (bottom box) of fountain transparencies.


Lets you create a two-color bitmap pattern, which includes the two colors that you choose for the transparency.


Lets you create a full-color bitmap pattern for the transparency.


Lets you create a vector pattern for the transparency.


Lets you choose a pattern for the transparency.


Lets you set the opacity for the front color of the transparency.


Lets you set the opacity for the back color of the transparency.


Lets you choose a texture for the transparency.


Lets you choose a merge mode for the transparency.


Fixes the contents of the transparency to the object, so that you can reposition a frozen transparent object without changing what's displayed through it.


Removes an object's transparency.


Copies the properties of the transparency to another object.


Lets you distort the selected object by either pushing the object's nodes away from the center of the distortion, or pulling the object's nodes toward the center of the distortion.


Lets you specify the amount to which the selected object is distorted. Values from -200 to -1 apply a Pull distortion; values from the 1 to 200 apply a Push distortion.


Lets you apply a Zipper distortion to the selected object.


Lets you specify the amount by which the selected object is distorted.


Lets you specify the number of zipper points per segment.


Lets you make the Zipper distortion random or uniform. Random distortion is applied when the button appears pressed.


Lets you smoothen the points of the Zipper distortion or return the points to in the original distortion. Smooth Zipper distortion is applied when the button appears pressed.


Lets you emphasize the Zipper distortion in a specific area of the selected object. Local Distortion is applied when the button appears pressed.


Lets you apply a Twister distortion to the selected object.


Twists the selected object in a clockwise direction.


Twists the selected object in a counterclockwise direction.


Lets you specify the number of complete 360-degree rotations that are applied to the selected object the horizontal line of origin.


Lets you specify the number of additional degrees of rotation, beyond the horizontal line of origin, that are applied to the selected object.


Lets you add another distortion to a distorted object.


Lets you position a selected object's distortion effect at the center of the object.


Removes the distortion effect you applied from the object.


Lets you specify the position of the drop shadow along the horizontal and vertical axis, relative to the selected object.


Lets you specify the opacity of the selected object's drop shadow. Low values produce a less opaque drop shadow; high values produce a more opaque drop shadow.


Lets you specify a value to define the selected object's drop shadow feathering properties. Low values create a more subtle feathering effect; high values create a more pronounced feathering effect.


Lets you choose a direction in which to feather the selected object's drop shadow. You can choose to feather the drop shadow toward the inside from the shadow's edges, to the outside of the shadow's edges, to the middle, or the average of the two directions.


Changes the feathering direction to Inside.


Changes the feathering direction to Middle.


Changes the feathering direction to Outside.


Changes the feathering direction to Average.


Lets you choose a feathering edge style to apply to the selected object's drop shadow.


Changes the feathering edge style to Linear.


Changes the eathering edge style to Squared.


Changes the eathering edge style to Inverse Squared.


Changes the eathering edge style to Flat.


Lets you choose a position for the drop shadow relative to the object.


Changes the perspective type to Flat.


Changes the perspective type to Bottom.


Changes the perspective type to Top.


Changes the perspective type to Left.


Changes the perspective type to Right.


Lets you specify the angle of the drop shadow.


Lets you specify the fade level of the drop shadow.


Lets you choose a color to apply to the selected object's drop shadow.


Lets you specify a value to stretch the drop shadow.


Removes the drop shadow you applied to the selected object.


Customizable Effects menu commands


Opens the Docker window that corresponds to the effect you are applying.


Copies the vanishing point settings from an extruded object to the object you select.


Locks the contents object to the PowerClip object. Locking is enabled when the button appears pressed.


Lets you specify how far the extrusion recedes.


Lets you choose a preset bevel for the front face of the extruded text.


Lets you choose a preset bevel for the back face of the extruded text.


Lets you specify a width for the bevel.


Lets you specify a height for the bevel.


Lets you simulate light sources to create a shading effect.


Lets you apply Ambient light, which is the equivalent of environmental light.


Adds a Point light, which projects a simulated light onto the text.


Removes a Point light.


Enable to use the Brightness slider and the Brightness box.


Lets you choose a color for the selected Point light.


Lets you set the amount of light emanating from the selected Point light.


Applies the specified Point light settings.


Displays a graphical representation of the Point light settings, and lets you drag a light to another location in the window.


Lets you set the amount of light emanating from the light source.


Displays a graphical representation of the Ambient light settings.


Applies the specified Ambient light settings.


Lets you specify a width for the rendered image.


Lets you specify a height for the rendered image.


Lets you specify a resolution for rendered image.


Lets you choose the unit of measure in which you want to specify the dimensions of the image.


Enable to maintain the ratio of width to height when you specify the size of the image.


Returns the object to its original size.


Displays the object's original size.


Displays the size of the object as if the specified settings were applied.


Lets you choose a render quality, which determines the resolution of the final two-dimensional image, as well as the time it takes to render an image.


Lets you specify the number of degrees by which you want to rotate text around the z-axis.


Lets you specify the number of degrees by which you want to rotate text around the x-axis.


Lets you specify the number of degrees by which you want to rotate text around the y-axis.


Lets you specify a value for the zoom level in the 3D Viewport.


Lets you choose a preset zoom level.


Applies a wide-angle lens.


Applies a normal lens.


Applies a telephoto lens.


Zooms in incrementally.


Zooms out incrementally.


Fits the 3D text object in the Viewport.


Lets you specify the distance by which you want to move the camera toward or away from the 3D text object.


Lets you choose a preset walk level.


Moves the camera toward the 3D text object incrementally.


Rotates the camera around the x-axis.


Rotates the camera around the y-axis.


Rotates the camera around the z-axis.


Lets you rotate the text object along an axis.


Displays and hides the coordinate widget design aid, which provides a point of reference when moving and rotating objects and cameras along the x, y and z axes in the 3D Viewport.


Displays and hides the grid design aid, which provides a point of reference when rotating and translating objects and cameras in the 3D Viewport.


Displays and hides light objects in the 3D Viewport.


Changes to the default camera view.


Changes the view to director view.


Displays the top of the object.


Displays the bottom of the object.


Displays the front of the object.


Displays the back of the object.


Displays the left side of the object.


Displays the right side of the object.


Rotates the object side to side (Roll) according to the specified number of degrees.


Rotates the object front to back (Pitch) according to the specified number of degrees.


Rotates the object around its upright axis (Yaw) according to the specified number of degrees.


Moves the object along the x axis according to the specified value.


Moves the object along the y axis according to the specified value.


Moves the object along the z axis according to the specified value.


Lets you point the camera in a different direction.


Lets you move the camera towards or away from the 3D object along the z-axis.


Lets you slide the camera along the xy plane for a different view of the 3D object.


Lets you change the lens magnification of the camera in the 3D Viewport.


Opens the Illumination dialog box, which lets you set advanced properties for the selected light.


Controls the brightness of the selected light. Move the slider or type a percentage value in the box to set brightness.


Turns the selected light on and off.


Adds a Point light. A Point light casts light in all directions.


Opens the Render Settings dialog box, which allows you to specify settings for rendering the 3D object.


Adds a Spot light. A Spot light casts light in a specific direction.


Opens the Illumination dialog box, which allows you to set properties for light objects in the 3D Viewport.


Displays the name of the active drawing or toolbar. You can right-click on the Title bar to open a menu of commands such as minimize, maximize, move, size, and close.


Saves the active CorelDRAW file.


Starts another Corel graphics application.


Opens the Scrapbook, which lets you manage graphic files and their properties.


Lets you choose a preset magnification level for displaying your drawing, or specify one of your own.


Lets you choose a view quality for your drawing.


Links to the Corel Designer.com Web site.


Status Bar


Displays the fill name and color of the selected object.


Displays the outline name and color of the selected object.


Displays details on the selected object such as the width, height, and position as well as number of nodes.


Displays the snap setting for the active drawing.


Displays the time as set in the Control Panel.


Displays the date as set in the Control Panel.


Displays whether CAPS LOCK is on or off.


Displays whether NUM LOCK is on or off.


Displays whether SCROLL LOCK is on or off.


Displays how much swap space is available.


Displays how much memory is allocated to the application.


Displays the location of the mouse pointer relative to the 0,0 point on the rulers.


Displays information such as the object type and layer for the selected object.


Displays tips for using the tool selected from the Toolbox.


Let you apply fill and outline colors to text and objects.


Displays a group of buttons that provide quick access to a series of related commands or tools.


Horizontal and vertical rulers display the length and width of the Drawing Window using the units of measure you specify.


An object in the Drawing Window. For more information about the object, right-click the object, and click What's This?


Reduces the Application Window or Drawing Window to an icon or, if already minimized, restores the window to its previous size.


Enlarges the Application or Drawing Window to full screen size or restores the window to the previous screen size.


Closes the active document or the application.


Restores the Application Window to the previous screen size.


Lets you move the Application Window using the Arrow keys.


Lets you size the Application Window using the Arrow keys.


Reduces the Application Window to an icon on the Taskbar.


Enlarges the Application Window to full screen size.


Lets you shift the view of your drawing up, down, left, or right.


Lets you shift the view of your drawing up, down, left, or right.


Displays the current page number and the number of pages in your drawing. The Navigator also lets you go directly to any page and add pages. You can delete a page by right-clicking the page tab and clicking Delete Page.


Scrolls back one page in your drawing. If the current page is the first page in your drawing, this button adds a new page before the current one.


Scrolls to the next page in your drawing. If the current page is the last page in your drawing, this button adds a new page after the current one.


Opens the first page of your drawing.


Opens the last page of your drawing..


Displays the Application Window and Drawing Window and lets you scale these windows when they are not maximized.


The Drawing Page is the area of the Drawing Window indicated by a rectangle with a drop shadow. Although you can draw anywhere in the Drawing Window, only objects on the Drawing Page appear in your print jobs.


The Drawing Window is the area where you create drawings. Although you can draw anywhere in the Drawing Window, only objects on the Drawing Page (the area enclosed by a rectangle with a drop shadow) appear in your print jobs.


Displays the names of the application menus, which let you access various commands.


VBA toolbar


Puts the VBA project into design mode, so that events are ignored. Design mode occurs when the button appears pressed.


Unsnaps objects from guidelines, the grid, and other objects.


Snaps objects to guidelines, the grid, and other objects.


Aligns text between the left and right margins of the text object.


Displays the style of the selected text.


Opens the Spelling page in the Options dialog box, which lets you set options for the automatic spell checker.


Displays the previous Drawing Page of the active drawing.


Displays the next Drawing Page of the active drawing.


Lets you position Docker windows at the top of the Drawing Window.


Lets you position Docker windows at the left of the Drawing Window.


Lets you position Docker windows at the bottom of the Drawing Window.


Lets you position Docker windows at the right of the Drawing Window.


Lets you select, move, and resize objects using the mouse. You must select an object before you can carry out a task.


Lets you manipulate nodes and paths to change the shape of objects. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout, from which you can choose a different shape tool.


Lets you split an object into separate objects. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout, from which you can choose a different shape tool.


Lets you erase portions of an object without cutting any closed paths. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout, from which you can choose a different shape tool.


Lets you change the orientation and appearance of objects. Clicking this tool displays the four Free Transform tools on the Property Bar. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout, from which you can choose a different shape tool.


Lets you magnify or reduce your view of the drawing. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout, from which you can choose the Pan tool.


Lets you change your view by moving your drawing around in the Drawing Window. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout, from which you can choose the Zoom tool.


Lets you draw freehand lines and shapes by dragging the cursor across the drawing page. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout, from which you can choose a different curve tool.


Lets you draw curves by placing nodes and shaping the line segments between the nodes. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout, from which you can choose a different curve tool.


Lets you apply strokes or objects to a curve. The Artistic Media tool has five modes: Preset, Brush, Object Sprayer, Calligraphic, and Pressure-sensitive. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout, from which you can choose a different curve tool.


Lets you draw vertical, horizontal, slanted, and angular dimension lines, as well as callouts. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout, from which you can choose a different curve tool.


Lets you connect two objects with a line. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout, from which you can choose a different curve tool.


Lets you draw flow lines between objects. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout, from which you can choose a different curve tool.


Lets you draw rectangles and squares.


Lets you draw ellipses and circles.


Lets you draw polygons and stars. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout, from which you can choose a different object tool.


Lets you draw symmetrical and logarithmic spirals. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout, from which you can choose a different object tool.


Lets you draw a grid. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout, from which you can choose a different object tool.


Lets you type words directly on the screen as Artistic text, or create a Paragraph text frame and enter Paragraph text.


Lets you apply fills to the selected object. Holding down the mouse button opens a flyout, from which you can choose the Interactive Mesh tool.


Lets you apply a mesh fill to an object, curve, or bitmap to create unique effects. Holding down the mouse button opens a flyout, from which you can choose the Interactive Fill tool.


Lets you apply a transparency to an object.


Lets you blend two objects by creating a progression of intermediate objects and colors. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout, from which you can choose a different interactive tool.


Lets you apply distortions to objects. The distortion tools are displayed on the Property Bar. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout, from which you can choose a different interactive tool.


Lets you apply an envelope to an object and shape the envelope's nodes to reshape the object. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout, from which you can choose a different interactive tool.


Lets you make objects appear three-dimensional. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout, from which you can choose a different interactive tool.


Lets you add a drop shadow to an object to create the illusion of depth. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout, from which you can choose a different interactive tool.


Lets you create a series of concentric shapes radiating into or away from an object. You can adjust a contour by using controls on the Property Bar. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout, from which you can choose a different interactive tool.


Lets you select a fill color from an object in your drawing. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout, from which you can choose the Paintbucket tool.


Lets you fill an object with a color that you select from an object in your drawing. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout, from which you can choose the Eyedropper tool.


Opens the Outline flyout, from which you can specify an outline style, color, and thickness.


Lets you specify outline attributes.


Lets you create and apply a custom outline color.


Lets you specify outline attributes.


Removes the outline from selected objects.


Sets the outline thickness of selected objects to 0.2 points.


Sets the outline thickness of selected objects to 0.5 points.


Sets the outline thickness of selected objects to 2 points.


Sets the outline thickness of selected objects to 8 points.


Sets the outline thickness of selected objects to 16 points.


Sets the outline thickness of selected objects to 24 points.


Opens the Fill flyout, from which you can specify a fill color, type, and pattern.


Lets you create and apply a uniform fill color.


Lets you specify and apply a fountain fill.


Lets you specify and apply a pattern fill.


Lets you specify and apply a texture fill.


Lets you apply a texture fill designed using the PostScript language.


Removes the fill from objects.


Opens the Color Docker Window, which lets you set fill and outline colors.


Opens the Special Fill Docker window, which lets you create custom fountain, pattern or texture fills for a bitmap or vector object.


Locks connector lines to the object nodes to which they are connected. If this button is disabled, connector lines join two objects across the shortest possible distance.


Closes an open path.


Lets you set a smoothing value for a curve.


Lets you split an object into two subpaths instead of creating two separate objects.


Lets you automatically close objects that are open after you cut them using the Knife tool.


Lets you specify the size of the area that you want to erase.


Lets you choose a square or circular nib shape when using the Eraser tool.


Lets you automatically reduce the number of nodes as you erase part of an object.


Lets you specify the number of rows and columns in the grid you want to draw.


Lets you specify the number of revolutions in the spiral you want to draw.


Makes the spiral you want to draw symmetrical; i.e., the distance between each revolution is constant.


Makes the spiral you want to draw logarithmic; i.e., the distance between each revolution increases towards the spiral's outer edge.


Lets you specify the factor for increasing the distance between each revolution of a logarithmic spiral you want to draw.


Lets you specify the number of sides on a polygon or the number of points on a star you want to draw.


Lets you set the sharpness of stars and star-shaped polygons.


Lets you draw a polygon or star. You can draw a star when the button appears pressed.


Converts an arc or a pie shape to an ellipse.


Converts an ellipse or arc to a pie shape.


Converts an ellipse or pie shape to an arc.


Lets you specify the starting angle of an arc or pie shape in the top box and the ending angle of an arc or pie shape in the bottom box.


Lets you specify the direction of an arc or pie shape you want to draw.


Lets you set the roundness for the top left corner of the rectangle in the top box and for the bottom left corner in the bottom box.


Lets you set the roundness for the top right corner of the rectangle in the top box and for the bottom right corner in the bottom box.


Lets you round all the corners of a rectangle at the same time. When the button appears pressed, you can only set one roundness level for all corners. When the button appears raised, you can set a different setting for each corner.


Lets you draw both horizontal and vertical dimension lines.


Lets you draw vertical dimension lines.


Lets you draw horizontal dimension lines.


Lets you draw slanted dimension lines.


Lets you draw callouts.


Lets you draw angular dimension lines.


Lets you choose a dimension style for the dimension text.


Lets you choose the number of decimal places to use to display the dimension.


Lets you choose a unit of measure for the Angular dimension line.


Enable to display the unit of measure beside the dimension text.


Lets you specify a prefix for the dimension text.


Lets you specify a suffix for the dimension text.


Lets you update the dimension after the object it is snapped to is stretched or scaled.


Lets you choose where you want the dimension text placed, relative to the dimension line.


Opens the Linear Dimensions Docker window, which lets you set the properties of linear dimension lines.


Lets you position the dimension text in the middle of the dimension line.


Lets you position the dimension text above the dimension line.


Lets you position the dimension text below the dimension line.


Lets you position the dimension text horizontally in the middle of the dimension line.


Lets you position the dimension text in the center of the dimension line, provided you drag inside the extension lines when establishing the dimension text placement.


Enable to turn on Dynamic Dimensioning. When Dynamic Dimensioning is enabled, CorelDRAW updates the dimension line after the object it is snapped to is stretched or scaled. You can disable Dynamic Dimensioning if you need to specify custom measurements for an object.


Displays how the dimension text will look, based on the specified formatting settings.


Applies the formatting settings to the dimension text of the selected dimension line. If no dimension lines are selected, this button sets the formatting settings as the default for new dimension lines.


Opens the Angular Dimension Docker window, which lets you set the properties of angular dimension lines.


Displays and hides the Workspace toolbar. The toolbar is displayed when the button appears pressed.


Opens the Pattern Fill dialog box, in which you can specify two-color bitmap fills.


Opens the Pattern Fill dialog box, in which you can specify full-color bitmap fills.


Opens the Pattern Fill dialog box, in which you can specify Bitmap pattern fills.


Drapes or maintains individual special fills across grouped objects.


Lets you apply a white fill to selected objects.


Lets you apply a fill of 10% black to selected objects.


Lets you apply a fill of 20% black to selected objects.


Lets you apply a fill of 30% black to selected objects.


Lets you apply a fill of 40% black to selected objects.


Lets you apply a fill of 50% black to selected objects.


Lets you apply a fill of 60% black to selected objects.


Lets you apply a fill of 70% black to selected objects.


Lets you apply a fill of 80% black to selected objects.


Lets you apply a fill of 90% black to selected objects.


Lets you apply a black fill to selected objects.


 Lets you adjust the tint of a PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM or PANTONE HEXACHROME palette color.


Lets you set the outline thickness of selected objects to 1 point.


Lets you set the outline thickness of selected objects to 4 points.


Lets you set the outline thickness of selected objects to 12 points.


Lets you set the outline thickness of selected objects to 20 points.


Lets you apply a white outline to selected objects.


Lets you apply an outline of 10% black to selected objects.


Lets you apply an outline of 20% black to selected objects.


Lets you apply an outline of 30% black to selected objects.


Lets you apply an outline of 40% black to selected objects.


Lets you apply an outline of 50% black to selected objects.


Lets you apply an outline of 60% black to selected objects.


Lets you apply an outline of 70% black to selected objects.


Lets you apply an outline of 80% black to selected objects.


Lets you apply an outline of 90% black to selected objects.


Lets you apply a black outline to selected objects.


Lets you specify the amount of space before (top box) and after (bottom box) a paragraph.


Overprinting


Lets you set the selected object to overprint fill.


Overprints the selected object's outline.


Starts Corel MULTIMEDIA MANAGER, which helps you organize, manage, and work with multimedia files.


Displays open Docker windows.


Hides open Docker windows.


Lets you display or hide the Standard toolbar. The toolbar is displayed when the button appears pressed.


Lets you display or hide the Text toolbar. The toolbar is displayed when the button appears pressed.


Lets you display or hide the Zoom toolbar. The toolbar is displayed when the button appears pressed.


Lets you display or hide the Dockers toolbar. The toolbar is displayed when the button appears pressed.


Lets you display or hide the Library toolbar. The toolbar is displayed when the button appears pressed.


Lets you display or hide the Internet Objects toolbar. The toolbar is displayed when the button appears pressed.


Lets you display or hide the Transform toolbar. The toolbar is displayed when the button appears pressed.


Enable to have the cursor indicate the action you're performing (for example, show a rectangle when the Rectangle tool is selected).The interactive cursor is active when the button appears pressed.


Enable to export only the active page.


Lets you choose and specify a linear, radial, conical, or square fountain fill.


Lets you specify the horizontal offset of a radial, conical, or square fountain fill. Negative values shift the center to the left; positive values shift the center to the right.


Lets you specify the vertical offset of a radial, conical, or square fountain fill. Negative values shift the center down; positive values shift the center up.


Lets you specify the angle of linear, conical, and square fountain fills. Positive values rotate the fill counterclockwise; negative values rotate it clockwise.


Lets you specify the numbers of bands (steps) used to display a fountain fill.

When this box is locked, the fill prints with the number of steps specified in the Print Options dialog box and displays with the number of steps specified in the Options dialog box.


Lets you lock and unlock the Steps box. The Steps box is unlocked when the button appears pressed.


Lets you specify how long the beginning and ending colors in a fill remain as solid colors before they start blending with the next color in the fountain fill. Lower values result in a smoother transformation between the two colors. You cannot specify an edge pad for conical fills.


Displays a thumbnail image of the selected fountain fill and lets you change the fill's orientation.


Lets you specify the blend settings for a two-color or custom fountain fill.


Enable to display the controls that let you set the start and end colors of your fill, and the path that the colors follow across the Color Wheel.


Enable to display the controls that let you customize your fountain fill by adding intermediate colors.


Lets you specify the position of the selected intermediate color, indicated with a color marker.


Lets you choose or create an intermediate color for the selected marker.


Lets you choose an intermediate color for the selected marker.


Previews your custom fountain fill.


Displays the positions of intermediate colors in a custom fountain fill.


Blends the intermediate fill colors, according to hue and saturation changes, along a straight line, beginning at the From color and continuing across the Color Wheel to the To color.


Blends the intermediate fill colors, according to hue and saturation changes, along a counterclockwise path around the Color Wheel.


Blends the intermediate fill colors, according to hue and saturation changes, along a clockwise path around the Color Wheel.


Lets you choose or create a color for the start of the fountain fill's color progression.


Lets you choose or create a color for the end of the fountain fill's color progression.


Shows the color path that determines your intermediate fill colors.


Lets you set an imaginary line that appears between two colors in a fountain fill.


Lets you choose a preset fountain fill.


Saves the current custom fountain fill. If you have created the fill, type a name in the Presets box. Custom preset fills are added to the list in alphabetical order.


Deletes the selected custom fountain fill from the Presets list.


Opens the PostScript Options dialog box, in which you can adjust the halftone screen settings for spot colors.


Enable to create a two-color pattern using two colors you choose.


Enable to create a full-color pattern using lines and fills.


 Enable to create a bitmap pattern.


Lets you choose a pattern type.


Lets you choose the color to apply to the background of a pattern.


Lets you choose the color to apply to the foreground of a pattern.


Opens the Two-Color Pattern Editor, which you can use to create two-color patterns.


Lets you specify a custom pattern tile width.


Lets you specify a custom pattern tile height.


Opens the Import dialog box, from which you can import a graphic to use as your pattern.


Deletes the selected pattern from the pattern list.


Enable to change the resolution of the Edit Grid to 16 x 16 squares. You lose all pattern edits when you change resolution.


Enable to change the resolution of the Edit Grid to 32 x 32 squares. You lose all pattern edits when you change resolution.


Enable to change the resolution of the Edit Grid to 64 x 64 squares. You lose all pattern edits when you change resolution.


Enable to change the pen size to 1 grid square.


Enable to change the pen size to a 2 x 2 grid square.


Enable to change the pen size to a 4 x 4 grid square.


Enable to change the pen size to an 8 x 8 grid square.


Lets you specify the position of the first tile, relative to the upper left corner of the object's selection box. Increasing the value moves the pattern to the right; decreasing the value moves the pattern to the left.


Lets you specify the position of the first tile, relative to the upper left corner of the object's selection box. Increasing the value moves the pattern down; decreasing the value moves the pattern up.


Lets you specify the shift percentage of alternating rows or columns.


Enable to shift the tile size for the row.


Enable to shift the tile size for the column.


Enable to rotate and skew the pattern fill with the object.


Lets you specify the rotation of the pattern fill in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.


Lets you specify the skew of the pattern fill.


Fills the selected object with the default two-color pattern fill.


Fills the selected object with the default full color pattern fill.


Fills the selected object with the default bitmap pattern fill.


Lets you choose a texture library.


Opens the Save Texture As dialog box, in which you can add a texture to one of your libraries or modify an existing texture.


Deletes the selected texture from the library.


Lets you choose a texture from the list.


Displays a preview of the texture with the parameters you specify.


Updates the texture preview to reflect any changes to the texture parameters. If you do not make any changes, the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters.


Opens the Texture Options dialog box, in which you can set the bitmap resolution and the maximum tile width of your texture fill.


Lets you specify the parameters for the selected texture. Changing one or more of these parameters alters the appearance of the texture.


Lets you specify the texture numeric parameters which control different aspects of the texture's generation.


Lets you specify the texture color parameters which control the different shades used to create the texture.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters. Locking all the buttons prevents changes from appearing in the preview area. Unlocking any button allows you to see changes in the preview area.


Lets you specify the bitmap resolution at which your pattern will print.


Lets you specify the maximum width of your pattern at full resolution.


Displays the amount of memory your bitmap will use at its maximum tile width.


Resets the texture options to their default settings.


Opens the Tiling dialog box, in which you can specify the size, origin, and transformation settings for the tile.


Opens the online Help file that displays an overview of this dialog box.


Lets you choose an available PostScript texture.


Displays the name of the selected PostScript texture or displays a preview of the texture if the Preview fill check box is enabled.


Regenerates the PostScript texture preview using the parameters you specify.


Enable to preview the PostScript texture.


Lets you specify the PostScript texture parameters, which control different aspects of the texture's generation.


Lets you choose a fill type.


Lets you choose a preset outline width.


Opens the associated fill dialog box, in which you can modify the fill's attributes.


Lets you choose the start of the fill's color progression.


Lets you choose the end of the fill's color progression.


Lets you copy the fill properties from another object you specify.


Lets you specify the number of vertical rows (top Grid Size box) and horizontal rows (bottom Grid Size box) to apply to a mesh object.


Lets you change the smoothness of curves by reducing the number of nodes between intersection points.


Lets you add additional nodes to a mesh object.


Lets you copy the mesh properties from another object you specify.


Lets you remove the mesh from an object.


Lets you select the fill or outline of an area.


Lets you select the color in a 1X1 area.


Lets you select the color in a 3X3 area.


Lets you select the color in a 5X5 area.


Lets you marquee select an area in an image. Marquee selecting is a method of selecting objects or nodes using the Pick or Shape tool.


Lets you choose a color model you can use to select colors


Lets you specify a value for the color component. The color component name is identified by the letter next to the box, e.g., when you use the CMYK model, "C" represents cyan, when you use the RGB model, "R" represents red, and so on.


Applies a linear type fountain fill, which displays a progression of colors in a straight line.


Applies a radial type fountain fill, which displays a progression of colors in a series of concentric circles that radiates from the center of the object.


Applies a conical type fountain fill, which displays a progression of colors in a circular path that radiates from the center of the object.


Applies a square type fountain fill, which displays a progression of colors in a series of concentric squares that radiate from the center of the object outwards.


Lets you set the line (mid-point) between two colors in a fountain fill.


Lets you specify the angle (top box) at which a fill slants. You cannot specify an angle for radial fills. Lets you specify the Edge Pad (bottom box), which determines how long the beginning and ending colors in a fill remain as solid colors before they start blending with the next color in the fountain fill. You cannot specify an edge pad for conical fills.


Lets you choose the color you can apply to the foreground of a pattern fill.


Lets you choose the color you can apply to the background of a pattern fill.


Sets the tile size to 0.25 x 0.25 inches, or to 25%.


Sets the tile size to 0.50 x 0.50 inches, or to 50%.


Sets the tile size to 1.00 x 1.00 inches, or to 100%.


Lets you specify a custom pattern tile width (top box) and height (bottom).


 Rotates and skews the pattern fill with the object.


Opens the Create Pattern dialog box, in which you can create custom two-color and full-color pattern fills.


Lets you choose a texture library.


Regenerates the texture fill, creating a totally new look.


Opens the Texture Options dialog box, in which you can specify the resolution of the bitmap used in the texture, and adjust the tile width and bitmap size.


Lets you choose a PostScript texture library.


Common


Lets you choose the fountain fill, pattern fill, or texture fill type.


Opens the associated fill dialog box, in which you can modify the fill attributes.


Applies the fill to the selected object. If no objects are selected, you can define the default fill for new objects.


Lets you choose and edit fountain fills.


Lets you choose and edit pattern fills.


Lets you choose and edit texture fills.


Lets you choose a type pattern fill.


Lets you choose a type of texture fill.


Displays the thickness of the selected object's outline.


Lets you specify the width of the selected line or outline.


Lets you choose a dashed or dotted line style.


Lets you choose an outline color.


Opens the Outline Pen dialog box, in which you can specify an outline's attributes.


Applies the outline settings to selected objects.


Lets you apply an object's outline attributes to other objects.


Lets you choose an outline color.


Lets you specify the thickness of an object's outline.


Lets you specify the unit of measurement for the outline width.


Lets you choose a dashed or dotted line style.


Enable to draw mitered (pointed) corners.


Enable to draw rounded corners.


Enable to draw blunted(squared-off) corners.


Enable to set squared-off (truncated) ends that are perpendicular to the path.


Enable to set the diameter of the cap equal to the width of the line which causes the line to be slightly longer.


Enable to set square ends that extend half of the line width beyond the end of the line.


Lets you choose an arrowhead to apply to the start of an open path.


Lets you specify an arrowhead to apply to the end of an open path.


Lets you create and edit a line-ending shape for the start of a line.


Lets you create and edit a line-ending shape for the end of a line.


Lets you specify the amount by which you want to stretch the nib's shape.


Displays the unit of measure for stretching the nib's shape.


Lets you specify the angle of the nib in relation to the drawing surface.


Displays the unit of measure for changing the angle of the nib in relation to the drawing surface.


Displays the shape and orientation of the nib using the values specified in the Angle and Stretch boxes.


Resets the angle value to 0.0 degrees and the stretch value to 100%.


Opens the Edit Line Style dialog box, in which you can modify the points in a line.


Adds the line style you create to the Style list box.


Replaces the selected line style in the Style list box with the one you create.


Displays the line style based on the above line style settings.


Enable to specify whether the outline is placed behind or in front of the object's fill.


Enable to specify whether the outline thickness and nib orientation remain the same or change in proportion to the object.


Centers the line-ending shape horizontally on the line. The letter X refers to the horizontal axis.


Centers the line-ending shape vertically on the line. The letter Y refers to the vertical axis.


Flips the line-ending shape horizontally on the line. The letter X refers to the horizontal axis.


Flips the line-ending shape vertically on the line. The letter Y refers to the vertical axis.


Enable to get a closer view of the line-ending shape.


Displays a magnified, editable image of the line-ending shape. You can edit the arrowhead using the following controls:

The nodes marked in red stretch the arrowhead in one direction.

The nodes marked in red scale the arrowhead evenly.

The nodes marked in red move the arrowhead without changing its size or shape.


Shape and Interactive Envelope tool Property Bar


Joins two selected end nodes of a single curve object.


Breaks a curve into two or more subpaths at the selected nodes.


Draws a line between two unconnected nodes. Each node must be at the end of a path.


Creates a separate path from an object's subpath.


Displays eight stretching/scaling handles, which let you stretch and scale selected parts of a curve.


Displays eight rotating/skewing handles, which let you rotate and skew selected parts of a curve.


Aligns selected nodes of an object and their associated control points.


Lets you make selected nodes move according to their distance from the node you are dragging. Elastic mode is on when the button appears pressed.


Enable to move selected nodes according to their distance from the node you are dragging.


Adds nodes to the selected curve or envelope.


Deletes the selected node or nodes.


Changes the selected curve or envelope segment from curved to straight.


Changes the selected curve or envelope segment from straight to curved.


Changes the selected node to a cusp node.


Changes the selected node to a smooth node.


Changes the selected node to a symmetrical node.


Automatically reduces the number of nodes on a curve.


Lets you turn node tracking on or off. When node tracking is on, you can select a node with the Pick tool or a drawing tool. Node tracking is on when the button appears pressed.


Reverses the direction of the curve. If you have applied line-ending shapes to the curve, the line-ending shapes change ends.


Edit menu


Reverses the last action you performed.


Restores changes reversed by the Undo command. It becomes available immediately after you click the Undo command.


Repeats the last action you performed.


Removes selected objects or text from your drawing and places them on the Clipboard.


Copies selected objects or text to the Clipboard. From the Clipboard, you can paste them into another Windows application or CorelDRAW file.


Pastes the text or objects that have been cut or copied to the Clipboard into your drawing.


Places a copy of the Clipboard's contents at the center of the Drawing Page. Lets you specify what format the pasted object uses and create a link to its source file.


Removes selected objects or nodes without placing a copy on the Clipboard. You can only restore a deleted object or node using the Undo command if no further action has been performed.


Creates a copy of the selected object in your drawing. By default, the duplicate appears slightly offset from the original.


Creates a copy of a selected object in your drawing. By default, the clone appears slightly offset from the original. Most subsequent changes applied to the original object (the master) are automatically applied to the copy (the clone).


Selects all objects in the Drawing Window. Once the objects are selected, any operation you perform applies to all objects.


Selects all text objects in the Drawing Window. Once the text objects are selected, any operation you perform applies to all text objects.


Selects all guidelines in the Drawing Window. Once the guidelines are selected, any operation you perform applies to all guidelines.


Selects all nodes in the selected object. Once the nodes are selected, any operation you perform applies to all nodes.


Opens the Object Properties Docker window which displays the properties of an object.


Lets you copy properties from one object to another.


Starts the Find Wizard, which lets you find an object that matches the search criteria you specify.


Starts the Replace Wizard, which lets you find an object that has the properties you specify and replace those properties with others you specify.


Lets you find text that matches the search criteria you specify.


Lets you find text that matches the search criteria and replace it with text you specify.


Searches for objects with Pantone fills.


Searches for objects with Pantone outlines.


Searches for objects with overprinted outlines.


Searches for objects that have the Scale With Image option disabled.


Searches for text filled with RGB color.


Inserts a Java applet in your drawing.


Inserts an embedded file in your drawing.


Inserts a simple button in your drawing.


Inserts a submit button in your drawing.


Inserts a reset button in your drawing.


Inserts a radio button in your drawing.


Inserts a check box in your drawing.


Inserts a text edit field in your drawing.


Inserts a text edit box in your drawing.


Inserts a pop-up menu in your drawing.


Inserts an options list in your drawing.


Lets you view a URL link using your browser.


Lets you assign a URL to the Internet object.


Lets you link or embed an object created in another application. You can also insert the contents of another file as an embedded or linked object.


Starts the Barcode wizard, which lets you create bar codes that conform to industry-wide symbology standards.


Lets you edit the selected OLE object.


Lets you convert an OLE object to another type of OLE object.


Lists all the links in the active drawing. This list includes internal links to other CorelDRAW files and external links to other Windows applications.


Selects the master object of a cloned object.


Opens the Revert to Master dialog box, which lets you specify settings to revert to based on the master object.


Selects all the clones for the selected master object.


Object Properties


General tab


Displays the number of objects in your selection.


Displays the layer on which the selected object is located.


Displays a description of the selected object.


Enable to make Paragraph text flow around objects.


Lets you specify the offset by which you want text to flow around objects.


Lets you specify a graphic or text style for the selected object.


Lets you choose the unit of measure for the offset by which you want text to flow around objects.


Applies the changes you make on the General page to the selected object.


Detail tab


Displays the width of the area enclosed by the selection handles.


Displays the height of the area enclosed by the selection handles.


Displays the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the selection's center point location, relative to the rulers.


Displays the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the selection's center of rotation, relative to the rulers. The coordinates shown here are different from the selection's center point only if the center of rotation has been moved manually from its default location.


Displays the number of words in the selected text object.


Fill tab


Opens the associated Fill dialog box, in which you can set specific values for your fill.


Lets you choose a uniform color fill.


Lets you choose a two-color, full-color, or bitmap pattern fill for selected objects.


Lets you choose a PostScript texture fill.


Removes the fill from the selected object, leaving it transparent.


Displays the current uniform fill color.


Lets you choose colors from the default color palette.


Displays a linear fountain fill, which is a progression of colors that follows a straight line.


Displays a conical fountain fill, which is a progression of colors that follows a circular path that radiates from the center of the object.


Displays a radial fountain fill, which is a progression of colors in a series of concentric circles that radiate from the center of the object.


Displays a square fountain fill, which is a progression of colors in a series of concentric squares that radiate from the center of the object.


Displays a preview of the selected fill.


Enable to create a bitmap pattern.


Lets you choose a texture fill to apply.


Applies the changes you make on the Fill page to the selected object.


Outline tab


Lets you specify the width of an outline.


Opens a Color Palette, from which you can choose the outline color.


Lets you choose a dashed or dotted line style.


Removes the outline from the selected objects.


Enable to specify whether the outline is placed behind or in front of the object's fill. When placed behind, only half the outline's thickness will be visible.


Enable to specify whether the outline thickness and nib orientation remain the same or change in proportion to the object.


Lets you choose a line-ending shape to apply to the start of an open path.


Lets you specify a line-ending shape to apply to the end of an open path.


Opens the Outline Pen dialog box, which lets you set and apply outline pen attributes such as color, width, style, nib shape, and arrowheads.


Applies the changes you make on the Outline page to the selected object.


Rectangle Tab


Lets you set a roundness value between 0 and 100 for each corner of a rectangle.


Locks the corner roundness settings on the Rectangle page so you can apply these settings to other rectangles in your drawing.


Lets you round the upper left corner of a rectangle.


Lets you round the upper right corner of a rectangle.


Lets you round the lower left corner of a rectangle.


Lets you round the lower right corner of a rectangle.


Enable to round all corners of a rectangle at the same time. Disable to round each corner individually.


Applies the changes you make on the Rectangle page to the selected object.


Ellipse Tab


Locks the settings on the Ellipse page so you can apply these settings to other ellipses in your drawing.


Enable to set the Ellipse tool to draw ellipses and circles.


Enable to set the Ellipse tool to draw pie shapes.


Enable to set the Ellipse tool to draw arcs.


Lets you specify the angle at which you want the arc or pie shape to begin.


Lets you specify the angle at which you want the arc or pie shape to end.


Enable to draw pie shapes and arcs in a clockwise direction. The beginning and ending points of pie shapes and arcs are determined by the angles specified in the Starting and Ending angles boxes.


Enable to draw pie shapes and arcs in a counterclockwise direction. The beginning and ending points of pie shapes and arcs are determined by the angles specified in the Starting and Ending angles boxes.


Applies the changes you make on the Ellipse page to the selected object.


Polygon tab


Lets you specify the number of sides or points on the selected polygon, star, or polygon as star.


Lets you set a sharpness level for the selected star or polygon as star.


Enable to change a star to a polygon.


Enable to change a polygon to a star.


Locks the settings on the Polygon page so you can apply these settings to other polygons in your drawing.


Displays a thumbnail image of the polygon based on the settings on the Polygon page.


Applies the changes you make on the Polygon page to the selected object.


OLE object tab


Displays the type of OLE object that is selected.


Displays the location of the selected OLE object.


Bitmap tab


Displays the size in pixels of the selected bitmap.


Displays the color mode of the selected bitmap.


Displays the resolution of the selected bitmap in dots per inch.


Displays the path name of the externally linked bitmap.


Curve tab


Displays the number of nodes on the selected curve.


Displays the number of subpaths in the selected curve.


Displays the coordinates of the first node on the selected curve.


Displays the coordinates of the last node on the selected curve.


Enable to close the selected curve.


Connector Lines page


Indicates the connector line is set to snap to the closest nodes on the two connected objects.


Indicates the connector line is locked to the nodes on the two connected objects.


Displays the straight line threshold for the selected interactive connector line. Line segments smaller than the threshold are removed and the interactive connector line is redrawn.


Dimension Page


Displays the type of dimension line.


Displays the size or angle of the selected dimension line.


Mesh Fill Page


Lets you specify the number of columns to create on the selected mesh object.


Lets you specify the number of rows to create on the selected mesh object.


Locks the column and row settings so they apply to any other mesh objects you create.


Applies the changes you make on the Mesh Fill page to the selected object.


Internet page


Lets you choose or specify a URL to assign a hyperlink destination for the selected object.


Lets you specify a name to assign a bookmark to the selected object.


Enable to use the object's bounding box as the hotspot.


Enable to use the object's shape as the hotspot.


Applies the changes you make on the Internet page to the selected object.


Page page


Lets you specify the name of the page in your Web document. The Page Title box updates as you move from page to page in your document.


Lets you specify the name of the HTML file that's associated with the page you're viewing in your Web document. The HTML File box updates as you move from page to page in your document.


Lets you specify additional information about your file, such as the author's name, a description of the file's contents, and associated keywords.


Applies the changes you make on the Page page to the selected object.


Form page


Lets you specify the address of the CGI Script that controls the functionality of the preconfigured Internet objects on the active page of your Web document.


Lets you choose how the GET or Post form data is sent to the server.


Lets you choose the type of frame or window in which your published Web document will be loaded.


Applies the changes you make on the Form page to the selected object.


Common page


Lets you specify additional attributes and values that will apply specific conditions, as defined in the CGI Script, to the preconfigured Internet object.


Applies the changes you make on the Common page to the selected object.


Java Applet page


Lets you specify the name of the Java applet's class file. The class filename is usually identical to the name of the inserted Java applet in your Web document.


Lets you specify the path that points to the location of the Java applet. A path is required only if the Java applet is located in a folder other than the one in which your published Web document will reside.


Lets you specify text that acts as a placeholder for the Java applet's graphic while your Web document loads into a browser.


Lets you specify the Java applet's parameters and corresponding values. The parameters and values define the applet in your published Web document.


Applies the changes you make on the Java Applet page to the selected object.


Embedded File page


Lets you specify the name of a source file you want to insert in your Web document. The source file is not native to the Web browser software and requires extended commands.


Lets you search your computer for source files you want to insert in your Web document.


Applies the changes you make on the Embedded File page to the selected object.


Simple Button page


Lets you specify a simple button name that corresponds to a specific CGI Script control reference. The CGI Script determines the function of the simple button.


Lets you specify the text that will appear on the simple button in your Web document.


Applies the changes you make on the Simple Button page to the selected object.


Submit Button page


Lets you specify a submit button name that corresponds to a specific CGI Script control reference. The CGI Script determines the function of the submit button.


Lets you specify the text that will appear on the submit button in your Web document.


Applies the changes you make on the Submit Button page to the selected object.


Reset Button page


Lets you specify a reset button name that corresponds to a specific CGI Script control reference. The CGI Script determines the function of the reset button.


Lets you specify the text that will appear on the reset button in your Web document.


Applies the changes you make on the Reset Button page to the selected object.


Radio Button page


Lets you specify a radio button name that corresponds to a specific CGI Script control reference. The CGI Script determines the function of the radio button.


Lets you specify the text that will appear on the radio button in your Web document.


Enable to specify the default state(i.e., enabled or disabled) of the radio button in your published Web document.


Applies the changes you make on the Radio Button page to the selected object.


Check Box page


Lets you specify a check box name that corresponds to a specific CGI Script control reference. The CGI Script determines the function of the check box.


Lets you specify the text that will appear with the check box in your Web document.


Lets you specify the default state of the check box in your published Web document(i.e., enabled or disabled).


Applies the changes you make on the Check Box page to the selected object.


Text And Password Field page


Lets you specify a text edit field name that corresponds to a specific CGI Script control reference. The CGI Script determines the function of the text edit field.


Lets you specify the text that will appear in the text edit field in your published Web document.


Lets you specify the maximum number of characters that can be typed in the text edit field. You can type a value between 1 and 50.


Lets you specify the size of the text edit field, based on the number of characters that can be typed in the field. If the maximum number of characters exceeds the size value, the Web browser will provide scroll bars. You can type a value between 1 and 50.


Lets you specify whether this Internet object is a standard text edit field or if it has password functionality.


Applies the changes you make on the Text And Password Field page to the selected object.


Text Edit Box page


Lets you specify a text edit box name that corresponds to a specific CGI Script control reference. The CGI Script determines the function of the text edit box.


Lets you specify the number of columns available in the text edit box. You can type a value between 1 and 255.


Lets you specify the number of rows available in the text edit box. You can type a value between 1 and 255.


# Lets you specify the default text that will appear in your Web document when the document is viewed in a Web browser.


Applies the changes you make on the Text Edit Box page to the selected object.


Pop-up Menu/Options List page


Lets you specify a pop-up menu or options list name that corresponds to a specific CGI Script control reference. The CGI Script determines the function of the pop-up menu or options list.


Enable to select multiple items from your Web document's Options list box when the document is viewed in a Web browser. This control is disabled by default if you insert a pop-up menu Internet object.


Enable to specify the number of rows that can be viewed in the list. This control is disabled by default if you insert a pop-up menu Internet object.


Enable to specify that the options list is a drop-down menu.


Enable to specify that the options list is a list.


Displays the names contained in the options list in the Label column and the corresponding reference to the CGI Script in the Value column. You can determine which names are selected by default in the options list by enabling the associated check boxes.


Applies the changes you make on the List page to the selected object.


Enable to copy the outline pen attributes from one object to another.


Enable to copy the outline color attributes from one object to another.


Enable to copy the fill attributes from one object to another.


Enable to copy the text attributes from one text object to another.


Confirms your selections and changes the cursor to a large horizontal arrow, which lets you select the object whose attributes you want to copy.


Disregards your selections and closes the dialog box.


Find and Replace: Find Objects


Find Wizard screen 1


Enable to start a new search.


Enable to load a preset search or one you've saved before.


Enable to find objects that have properties matching those of the selected object.


Find Wizard screen 2: Begin a New Search


# Enable to find objects that have specific fills, outlines, and special effects. Use the controls on the Fills, Outlines, and Special Effects pages to set your search criteria.


Enable to find objects that use specific names or styles.


Enable the check box next to each object type you want to find.


Enable the check box next to each fill attribute you want to find.


Enable the check box next to each outline attribute you want to find.


Enable the check box next to each special effect you want to find.


Find Wizard screen: find objects (rectangles, ellipses, curves, polygons)


Displays the categories of objects you have selected.


Lets you specify more specific properties of the object you are looking for.


Displays a list of the objects and specific properties you have specified for your search.


Find Wizard screen: list of what you have selected


Displays the objects and properties you've specified for your search.


Returns you to the previous screen so you can change your search.


Click the Finish button if you are satisfied with the objects you have specified.


Opens a dialog box that allows you to save the current search.


Find toolbar


 Finds and selects the previously selected occurrence of the object or properties specified using the Find And Replace wizard.


Finds and selects the next occurrence of the object or properties specified using the Find And Replace wizard.


Finds and selects all occurrences of the object or properties specified using the Find And Replace wizard.


Starts the Find And Replace wizard so that you can change your search criteria.


Click a button on the Find toolbar to find the previous, next, or every occurrence of the object or properties you specified in the Find And Replace wizard, or to modify your search criteria.


Common controls


Closes the Find And Replace Wizard and displays your search results.


Returns to the previous screen.


Moves to the next screen.


Specific Curve dialog


Enable to search for curves with a specific number of nodes.


Lets you specify search criteria for the curves you want to find.


Lets you specify whether to search for more than, less than, or exactly the same number of nodes you specify.


Lets you specify the number of nodes that corresponds to the search criteria.


Lets you specify the number of nodes that corresponds to the search criteria.


Specific Rectangle screen


Displays the shape of the polygon or star you are searching for, based on the options you set.


Enable to specify the search criteria for rectangles with corner roundness.


Lets you specify the search criteria used to find rectangles with a specific corner roundness.


Enable to search for rectangles with all four corners rounded according to the value you specify.


Enable to search for rectangles with at least one corner rounded according to the value you specify.


Lets you specify a corner roundness value to search for, ranging from one to 100. You can type a value in the box, or use the slider.


# Enable to search for rectangles of a specific width.


Lets you specify the width of the rectangle you want to find.


Lets you choose the unit of measure you want to use to specify the rectangle's width.


Enable to search for rectangles of a specific height.


Lets you specify the height of the rectangle.


Lets you choose the unit of measure you want to use to specify the rectangle's height.


Resets the options in the dialog box to their default settings so you can start over.


Specific Ellipse dialog


Enable to search for a specific type of ellipse.


Enable to search for full ellipses and circles.


Enable to search for pie shapes.


Enable to search for arcs.


Enable to search for pie shapes or arcs with specific starting or ending angles.


Lets you specify the starting angle of the pie or arc.


Lets you specify the starting angle of the pie or arc.


Displays the unit of measure or degree of the starting angle of the pie or arc.


Lets you specify the ending angle of the pie or arc.


Lets you specify the ending angle of the pie or arc.


Displays the unit of measure or degree of the ending angle of the pie or arc.


Enable to search for pie shapes or arcs drawn in a clockwise direction.


Enable to search for pie shapes or arcs drawn in a counterclockwise direction.


Enable to search for ellipses of a specific width.


Lets you specify the width of the ellipse you want to find.


Lets you choose the unit of measure you want to use to specify the width of the ellipse.


Enable to search for ellipses of a specific height.


Lets you specify the height of the ellipse you want to find.


Lets you choose the unit of measure you want to use to specify the height of the ellipse.


Resets the options in the dialog box to their default settings so you can start over.


Specific Polygon dialog


Enable to search for polygons or stars with a specific number of points.


# Lets you specify the number of points in a polygon or star you want to find.


Enable to search for stars with a specific sharpness level.


Lets you specify the sharpness level of stars you want to find.


Enable to search specifically for polygons or stars.


Enable to search for a polygon.


Enable to search for a star.


Enable to search for a polygon or star of a specific width.


Lets you specify the width of the polygon or star you want to find.


Lets you choose the unit of measure you want to use to specify the width of the polygon or star.


Enable to search for a polygon or star of a specific height.


Lets you specify the height of the polygon or star.


Lets you choose the unit of measure you want to use to specify the height of the polygon or star.


Displays the shape of the polygon or star you are searching for based on the options you set.


Resets the options in the dialog box to their default settings so you can start over.


Specific Artistic Text dialog


Enable to search for specific strings of text. Type the string you want to search for in the box.


Lets you type a specific string of text to search for.


Enable to search for the text string using the same combinations of uppercase and lowercase text you typed.


Enable to search for text in a specific font.


Lets you choose a specific font.


Enable to search for text that is a specific font size.


Lets you specify a font size.


Lets you choose the unit of measure you want to use to specify font size.


Enable to search for text with specific attributes, such as bold or italics.


Lets you choose a text attribute.


Enable to search for text with a specific alignment style.


Lets you choose an alignment style.


Enable to search for text with a specific underline style.


Lets you choose an underline style.


Enable to search for text with a specific overline style.


Lets you choose an overline style.


Enable to search for text with a specific strikeout style.


Lets you choose a strikeout style.


Enable to search for normal, subscript, or superscript text.


Lets you choose a placement style.


# Enable to search for text that has a specific text effect applied.


Lets you choose a text effect.


Resets the options in the dialog box to their default settings so you can start over.


Specific paragraph Text dialog


Enable to search for specific strings of text. Type the string you want to search for in the box.


Lets you type a specific string of text to search for.


Enable to search for the text string using the same combinations of upper and lower case text you typed.


Enable to search for text in a specific font.


Lets you choose a specific font.


Enable to search for text that is a specific font size.


Lets you specify a font size.


Lets you choose the unit of measure you want to use to specify font size.


Enable to search for text with specific attributes, such as bold or italics.


Lets you choose a text attribute.


Enable to search for text with a specific alignment style.


Lets you choose an alignment style.


Enable to search for text with a specific underline style.


Lets you choose an underline style.


Enable to search for text with a specific overline style.


Lets you choose an overline style.


Enable to search for text with a specific strikeout style.


Lets you choose a strikeout style.


Enable to search for normal, subscript, or superscript text.


Lets you choose a placement style.


Enable to search for text that has a specific text effect applied.


Lets you choose a text effect.


Resets the options in the dialog box to their default settings so you can start over.


Specific Text on a Path dialog


Enable to search for specific strings of text. Type the string you want to search for in the box.


Lets you type a specific string of text to search for.


Enable to search for the text string using the same combinations of upper and lower case text you typed.


Enable to search for text in a specific font.


Lets you choose a specific font.


Enable to search for text that is a specific font size.


Lets you specify a font size.


Lets you choose the unit of measure you want to use to specify font size.


Enable to search for text with specific attributes, such as bold or italics.


Lets you choose a text attribute.


Enable to search for text with a specific alignment style.


Lets you choose an alignment style.


Enable to search for text with a specific underline style.


Lets you choose an underline style.


Enable to search for text with a specific overline style.


Lets you choose an overline style.


Enable to search for text with a specific strikeout style.


Lets you choose a strikeout style.


Enable to search for normal, subscript, or superscript text.


Lets you choose a placement style.


Enable to search for text that has a specific text effect applied.


Lets you choose a text effect.


Resets the options in the dialog box to their default settings so you can start over.


Specific Linear Dimensions dialog


Select the type of linear dimensions you want to find.


Enable to specify the size of the dimension line you want to find.


Lets you specify how exact the match must be between the search angle and a dimension line's angle for that dimension line to be found.


Lets you choose the search criteria for the dimension line you want to find.


Lets you specify the size of the dimension line you want to find.


Lets you choose the units of measure you want for the dimension line size.


Enable to specify the style of the dimension line you want to find.


Lets you choose the dimension line style you want to find.


Enable to specify the precision of the dimension line you want to find.


Lets you choose the precision of the dimension line you want to find.


Enable to specify the prefix of the dimension line you want to find.


Lets you specify the dimension line prefix you want to find.


Enable to specify the suffix of the dimension line you want to find.


# Lets you specify the dimension line suffix you want to find.


Resets the options in the dialog box to their default settings so you can start over.


Specific Angular Dimensions


Select the type of Angular Dimensions you want to find.


Enable to specify the angle of the dimension line you want to find.


Lets you choose whether to find a dimension line whose angle is more than, less than, or the same as the degree you specify.


Lets you specify the angle of the dimension line you want to find.


Lets you choose the unit of measure you want to use to specify the dimension line angle you want to find.


Enable to search for a dimension line with precision.


Lets you specify the number of decimal places with which to search for a dimension line.


Enable to search for a dimension line prefix.


Lets you specify the dimension line prefix you want to find.


Enable to search for a dimension line suffix.


Lets you specify the dimension line suffix you want to find.


Resets the options in the dialog box to their default settings so you can start over.


Specific Call outs


Lets you specify the text of the callout you want to find.


Enable to specify the text of the callout you want to find.


Lets you specify the text of the callout you want to find.


Enable to search for the callout using the same combinations of upper and lower case text you typed.


Specific Bitmap screen


Enable to search for a bitmap of a specific color mode.


Lets you choose a color mode.


Specific OLE object screen


Enable to search for a specific type of OLE object.


Lets you choose the type of OLE object.


Specific Envelope


Displays the objects and properties you've specified for your search.


Enable to find objects that use a specific type of envelope.


Lets you choose the type of envelope you want to find.


Specific Blend


Enable to find blends that have a specific number of intermediate steps.


Lets you specify the number of steps in the blends you want to find.


Enable to find blends that have a specific rotation angle.


Lets you set the rotation angle of the blends you want to find.


Enable to specify whether or not to include blends that are attached to a path in your search criteria.


Lets you choose whether you want to search for blends that are attached to a path or are not attached to a path.


Enable to specify whether or not to include blends that show a color progression passing clockwise or counterclockwise through the color spectrum in your search.


Enable to search for blends that show a rainbow or linear color progression through the color spectrum.


Resets the options in the dialog box to their default settings so you can start over.


Specific Extrude


Enable to search for extrusions that have a specific depth setting.


Lets you set the depth of the extrusions you want to find.


Enable to search for extrusions of a specific type.


Lets you choose the style of extrusion you want to find.


Enable to specify whether or not to include light sources in your search criteria.


Lets you choose whether to search for extrusions that have light sources applied to them, or extrusions that don't have light sources applied to them.


Enable to search for extrusions that use a specific vanishing point or rotation setting.


Lets you choose the vanishing point or rotation setting you want to find.


Enable to specify whether or not to include beveled edges in your search criteria.


Lets you choose whether you want to search for objects that have beveled edges or objects that don't have beveled edges.


Resets the options in the dialog box to their default settings so you can start over.


Specific Contour


Enable to search for objects that have a specific contour style.


Lets you choose the style of contour used by the objects you want to find.


Enable to search for objects that have a specific contour offset.


Lets you specify the exact contour offset applied to the objects you want to find.


Lets you choose the units of measure you want to use to specify the contour offset you want to find.


Enable to search for objects that have a specific number of contour shapes.


Lets you set the exact of contour steps applied to the objects you want to find.


Enable to specify whether or not to include clockwise or counterclockwise progression through the color spectrum in your search criteria.


Lets you choose whether you want to search for contoured objects that show a rainbow or linear progression through the color spectrum.


Resets the options in the dialog box to their default settings so you can start over.


Specific Lens


Enable to search for objects that have a specific type of lens applied to them.


Lets you choose the type of lens you want to find.


Enable to specify whether or not to include the Frozen option in your search criteria.


Lets you choose whether you want to find lenses that use the Frozen option or that don't use the Frozen option.


Enable to search for lenses that use a specific numeric or color setting. Use the control to the right to set the value or color.


Lets you specify the numeric setting of the lenses you want to find.


Enable to specify a color used by the lenses you want to find.


Lets you choose the color used by the lenses you want to find.


Resets the options in the dialog box to their default settings so you can start over.


Specific Transparency


Enable to search for objects that have a specific type of transparency applied to them.


Lets you choose the type of transparency you want to find.


Specific Distortion


Enable to search for objects that have a Push And Pull distortion applied to them.


# Enable to search for objects that have a Zipper distortion applied to them.


Enable to search for objects that have a random Zipper distortion applied to them.


Enable to search for objects that have a smooth Zipper distortion applied to them.


Enable to search for objects that have a local Zipper distortion applied to them.


Enable to search for objects that have a Twister distortion applied to them.


Fills Tab


Enable to search for objects with any uniform fill color.


Enable to search for objects with a specific uniform fill color.


Lets you specify the color of the uniform fill color.


Enable to specify whether or not to include objects with an overprint fill in your search criteria.


Lets you choose whether you want to find objects with an overprint fill.


Lets you choose a special fill and specify its properties.


Displays each category of object for which you are searching, along with the properties you have specified.


Displays the categories of fill you have selected.


Enable to search for objects with any type of the selected fill.


Enable to search for objects with a specific type of the selected fill.


Displays the categories of fill you have selected.


Opens the associated Fill dialog box, which lets you adjust the search criteria for the fills you want to find.


Lets you specify the type of outline you want like to find.


Enable to search for objects based, on the width of their outline.


Lets you choose whether you want to search for outlines that have a specific width or that are smaller or larger than a specific width.


Lets you specify the outline width you want to use as the basis of the search. You can search for outlines that are the same size, smaller or larger than the value you set here.


Lets you choose the unit of measure you want to use to specify the outline width you want to find.


Enable to search for objects that have outlines of a specific color.


Lets you choose the outline color you want to find.


Enable to specify whether or not to include objects with the Overprint Outline option enabled.


Enable to find objects that have the Overprint Outline option enabled.


Enable to display the details of the current search.


# Enable to specify whether or not to include objects that have been outlined using the Behind Fill option in your search criteria.


Lets you choose whether you want to find objects that have the Behind Fill option enabled or disabled.


Enable to specify whether or not to include objects that have been outlined using the Scale With Image option in your search criteria.


Lets you choose whether you want to find objects that have the Scale With Image option enabled or disabled.


Enable to find objects that have a specific line cap.


Enable to find objects that have butted line caps.


Enable to find objects that have rounded line caps.


Enable to find objects that have square line caps.


Enable to search for objects by name. You can type the name in the box to the right.


Lets you specify the name of the objects you want to find.


Enable to search using the same combination of uppercase and lowercase characters you specify.


Enable to search for objects that have a specific style name and type.


Enable to search for objects that use a specific style.


Lets you choose the name of the style you want to find.


Enable to search for objects that use a specific style type.


Lets you choose the style type you want to find.


Edit: Find and Replace: Replace Objects


Enable to replace a specific color with another color.


Enable to replace a specific color model or color palette with another color model or palette.


Enable to replace specific outline pen properties in your drawing.


Enable to replace specific text properties with other text properties.


Enable to replace the objects that are selected in the Drawing Window.


Replace a color screen


Lets you specify the color you want to find and the color you want to replace it with.


Lets you choose the color you want to use to replace the color you find.


Lets you choose the color you want to find.


Lets you choose the color you want to find.


Lets you choose the color you want to use to replace the color you find.


Enable to replace the color where it appears as a fill.


Enable to replace the color where it appears as an outline.


Enable to replace the color where it forms part of a fountain fill.


Enable to replace the color wherever it is used in a two-color pattern fill.


Enable to replace the color where it occurs in a monochrome bitmap fill.


Replace a color model or palette screen


Lets you select the color model or palette you want to find, and the color model you want to replace it with.


Enable to find any color palette or color model and replace it with a specific color model.


Enable to find a specific color model and replace it with a specific color model.


Lets you choose the color model you want to find and replace.


Lets you choose the color palette you want to find and replace with a specific color model.


# Enable to find a specific color palette and replace it with a specific color model.


Lets you choose the color model with which you want to replace the selected models or palettes.


Enable to replace the color model or color palette where it occurs in object fills.


Enable to replace the color model or color palette where it occurs as an outline.


Enable to replace the color model or color palette where it forms part of a fountain fill.


Enable to replace the color model or color palette wherever it is used in a two-color pattern fill.


Enable to replace the color model or color palette wherever it is used for a monochrome bitmap fill.


Replace outline pen properties: Find section


Lets you specify which Outline Pen properties you want to find and with which attributes you would like to replace them.


Enable to replace outlines of a specific width.


Lets you specify the outline width you want to replace.


Lets you choose a unit of measure in which to specify the outline width you want to find.


Enable to specify whether or not to replace outlines that have the Scale With Image option enabled, or to replace objects that don't have it enabled.


Lets you choose whether you want to replace outlines that use the Scale WIth Image option, or replace objects that don't.


Enable to specify whether or not to replace outlines that have the Overprint Outline option enabled, or to replace objects that don't have it enabled.


Lets you choose whether you want to replace outlines that have the Overprint Outline option enabled, or replace objects that don't.


Replace outline pen properties: Replace section


Enable to replace outlines with an outline of a specific width.


Lets you specify the width of the outline you want to use to replace the one you find.


Lets you choose the unit of measure you want to use to specify the outline width to apply to the outlines you find.


Enable to specify whether or not to replace outlines with outlines that scale with the image, or to replace them with outlines that remain static.


Lets you choose whether you want to replace outlines with an outline that scale with the image, or outlines that remain static.


Enable to specify whether to replace outlines with outlines that overprint, or to replace them with outlines that don't overprint.


Lets you choose whether you want to replace outlines with outlines that overprint, or with outlines that don't.


Replace text properties screen: Find section


Lets you specify which text properties you want to find and the properties you want to replace them with.


Enable to find a specific font.


Lets you choose the font of the text you want to find.


Enable to find text with a specific weight (e.g., bold or italic).


Lets you choose the font weight (e.g., bold or italic) of the text you want to find.


Enable to find text of a specific size.


Lets you specify the replacement font size for the text you want to find.


Lets you choose the unit of measurement you want to use to specify the font size of the text you want to find.


Enable to replace text you find with text in a specific font.


Lets you specify the replacement font for the text you find.


Enable to replace text you find  with text of a specific weight.


Lets you choose the replacement weight for the text you find.


Enable to replace text you find with text of a specific size.


Lets you choose a unit of measure to use to specify the replacement font for the text you find.


Lets you choose a unit of measure in which to specify the replacement font size for the text you want to find.


Find And Replace Toolbar for Replace Objects


Replaces the object or properties found in your search with other objects or properties you specify using the Find And Replace wizard.


Replaces all occurrences of the object or properties found in your search with other objects or properties you specify using the Find And Replace wizard.


Moves the object to a new location.


Copies the object to a new location, leaving the original in place.


Copies the fill attributes from one object to another.


Copies the outline attributes from one object to another.


Copies the fill and outline attributes from one object to another.


Copies the fill and outline attributes from one object to a group of objects.


Places the selected object (the contents object) inside another object (the container object). The contents and container become a PowerClip object.


Closes the menu without performing any actions.


Enable to revert the clone fill to the master fill.


Enable to revert the clone outline to the master outline.


Enable to revert the clone path shape to the master path shape.


Enable to revert the clone transformation to the master transformation.


Enable to revert the clone bitmap color mask to the master bitmap color mask.


Copy Properties From dialog box


Enable to copy outline pen attributes from one object to another.


Enable to copy outline color attributes from one object to another.


Enable to copy fill attributes from one object to another.


Enable to copy text attributes from one object to another.


3D Effects Filters


Shared buttons


Updates the image in the Image Window.


Definition included in c_color.rtf.


Displays the application progress of the current effect.


3D Rotate


Displays the image as the shaded portion of a three-dimensional model, and lets you change the image perspective.


Lets you specify the vertical rotation.


Lets you specify the horizontal rotation.


Enable to position the entire image in the Image Window.


Cylinder


Enable to use a horizontal cylinder to shape the image.


Enable to use a vertical cylinder to shape the image.


Lets you set how closely the image conforms to the inside or outside of a cylinder.


Displays the image wrapping using a wire frame.


Emboss


Lets you set the depth of the ridges and indentations in the engraving.


Lets you set the amount of background color an engraving contains.


Lets you set the angle at which the light hits the engraving.


Lets you specify the angle at which the light hits the engraving.


Enable to create an engraving using the original image colors.


Enable to create an engraving using gray as the embossing color.


Enable to create an engraving using black as the embossing color.


Enable to create an engraving using the color you choose as the embossing color.


Lets you choose an embossing color.


Lets you choose an embossing color from the Image Window.


Glass


Lens Tab


Lets you set the width of the bevel.


Lets you set the sharpness of the edges of the bevel.


Lets you set the angle at which the light is bent at the bevel.


Lets you set the transparency level of the glass sheet.


Lets you choose a drop off style which defines the way the light hits the bevel.


Lets you choose a preset glass style.


Opens the Save Preset dialog box, which lets you save the glass style.


Deletes the current glass style.


Lighting Tab


Lets you set the intensity of the glass highlights.


Lets you set the sharpness of the light hitting the bevel.


Lets you choose a glass color.


Lets you choose a glass color from the Image Window.


Lets you set the direction of the light hitting the bevel.


Lets you specify the direction of the light hitting the bevel.


Lets you set the angle of the light hitting the bevel.


Lets you specify the angle of the light hitting the bevel.


Page Curl


Places a page curl on the top left corner of the image.


Places a page curl on the top right corner of the image.


Places a page curl on the bottom left corner of the image.


Places a page curl on the bottom right corner of the image.


Enable to begin the page curl along the top or bottom edge of the image.


Enable to begin the page curl along the left or right edge of the image.


Lets you set the width of the page curl.


Lets you set the height of the page curl.


Lets you choose a curl color.


Lets you choose a curl color from the Image Window.


Lets you choose a background color.


Lets you choose a background color from the Image Window.


Enable to create a page curl that you cannot see through.


Enable to create a page curl that you can see through.


Perspective


Displays a two-dimensional model of the image and lets you drag the corner nodes to change the perspective of the image.


Enable to change the perspective of the image by moving two nodes in opposite directions simultaneously.


Enable to skew the image by moving two nodes in the same direction simultaneously.


Enable to position the entire image in the Image Window.


Pinch/Punch


Lets you set the amount of pinching or punching. Negative values pinch the image toward you. Positive values punch the image away from you.


Lets you set the center point in the Image Window from which the pinch/punch effect originates. The Set Center button is on when the button appears pressed.


Displays the pinching and punching using a wire frame.


Sphere


Lets you set the center point in the Image Window from which the sphere effect originates. The Set Center button is on when the button appears pressed.


Lets you set the amount by which the image conforms to the inside or outside of a sphere.


Displays the amount and direction of the wrapping using a wire frame.


The Boss


Edge Tab


Lets you choose a Boss style.


Opens the Save Preset dialog box, which lets you save the current Boss style.


Deletes the current Boss style.


Lets you set the width of the bevel.


Lets you set the height of the bevel.


Lets you set the sharpness of the edges of the bevel.


Lets you choose a drop off style which defines the way the light hits the bevel.


Enable to reverse the effect so that elevated areas are indented.


Lighting Tab


Lets you set the brightness of the light hitting the bevel.


Lets you set the sharpness of the light hitting the bevel.


Lets you set the direction of the light hitting the bevel.


Lets you specify the direction of light as it hits the bevel.


Lets you set the angle of the light hitting the bevel.


Lets you specify the angle of the light hitting the bevel.


Zig Zag


Enable to create distortion waves that resemble the ripples in a pond.


Enable to create distortion waves that extend outward from a central point and dissipate toward the edges of the image.


Enable to create distortion waves around the center of the image.


Lets you set the number of waves.


Lets you set the intensity of the waves.


Lets you set the center point in the Image Window from which the zig zag effect originates. The Set Center button is on when the button appears pressed.


Displays a graphic representation of the waves.


Art Strokes Filters


Charcoal


Lets you set the size of the charcoal.


Lets you set the level of contouring.


Conté Crayon


Enable to create a black conté crayon drawing.


Enable to create a white conté crayon drawing.


Enable to create a sanguine conté crayon drawing.


Enable to create a bistre conté crayon drawing.


Enable to create a sepia conté crayon drawing.


Lets you set the pressure applied to the crayon.


Lets you set the granularity level.


Lets you choose a paper color upon which the conté crayon drawing is based.


Lets you choose a paper color (from the Image Window) upon which the conté crayon drawing is based.


Crayon


Lets you set the crayon size.


Lets you set the edge detail of the crayon stroke.


Cubist


Lets you set the size of the brushstrokes.


Lets you set the amount of light in the image.


Lets you choose a paper color upon which the Cubist artwork is based.


Lets you choose a paper color (from the Image Window) upon which the Cubist artwork is based.


Dabble


Lets you choose a dabble brushstroke style.


Randomly distributes the dabble brushstrokes.


Lets you specify a value to randomly distribute the dabble brushstrokes.


Lets you set the size of the dabble brushstrokes.


Impressionist


Enable to use smudged brushstrokes.


Enable to use concentrated brushstrokes.


Lets you set the size of the brushstrokes or the dabs.


Lets you set the color variation between the brushstrokes.


Lets you set the amount of light in the image.


Palette Knife


Lets you set the size of the strokes of the palette knife.


Lets you set the amount of smudging.


Lets you set the direction of the strokes of the palette knife.


Lets you specify the direction of the strokes of the palette knife.


Pastels


Enable to use a soft pastel.


Enable to a use smudged pastel.


Lets you set the size of the pastel brushstrokes.


Lets you set the color variation of the brushstrokes.


Pen And Ink


Enable to shade the image using intersecting diagonal lines.


Enable to shade the image using ink dots.


Lets you set the density of the lines or dots.


Lets you set the amount of ink in the drawing.


Pointillist


Lets you set the size of the dots.


Lets you set the amount of light in the image.


Scraperboard


Enable to scratch the image to reveal color.


Enable to scratch the image to reveal white.


Lets you set the density of the brushstrokes.


Lets you set the size of the brushstrokes.


Sketch Pad


Enable to create a black-and-white image, emphasizing the black lines.


Enable to create a colored image, emphasizing the colored lines.


Lets you set the detail of the drawing.


Lets you set the lead type or the pencil pressure.


Lets you set the sharpness of the outlines.


Watercolor


Lets you set the size of the brushstroke.


Lets you set the texture of the paper.


Lets you set the amount of water in the brushstroke.


Lets you set the bleed rate of the brushstroke.


Lets you set the amount of light in the image.


Water Marker


Enable to create brushstrokes in a default pattern.


Enable to create brushstrokes in an ordered pattern.


Enable to create brushstrokes in a random pattern.


Lets you set the size of the brushstrokes.


Lets you set the contrast between the brushstrokes.


Wave Paper


Enable to convert the image to a colored drawing.


Enable to convert the image to a black-and-white drawing.


Lets you set the brushstroke pressure.


Blur Filters


Tune Blur


Lets you set the intensity of the blurring.


Produces a hazy effect that slightly blurs the image.


Blends the colors of adjacent pixels.


Analyzes the values of similarly colored pixels to determine the direction in which to apply the greatest amount of smoothing.


Smoothes and tones down harsh contrasts.


Removes the last blurring action.


Directional Smooth


Lets you set the intensity of the directional smooth blurring.


Gaussian Blur


Lets you set the intensity of the Gaussian blurring.


Jaggy Despeckle


Lets you set the number of neighboring pixels evaluated from left to right.


Lets you set the number of neighboring pixels evaluated from top to bottom.


Enable to maintain the equal height and width of neighboring pixels.


Low Pass


Lets you set the degree to which harsh transitions between shadows and highlights are reduced.


Lets you set the number of pixels that are modified by the low pass effect.


Motion Blur


Lets you set the degree to which the span of the motion blur is increased.


Lets you set the direction of blurring.


Lets you specify the direction of blurring.


Enable to prevent blurring the pixels that fall outside the image.


Enable to begin the blurring effect with the paper color.


Enable to begin the blurring effect with the colors at the edge of the image.


Radial Blur


Lets you set the intensity of the radial blur.


Lets you set the center point in the Image Window from which the radial blur originates. The Set Center button is on when the button appears pressed.


Smooth


Lets you set the intensity of the smooth blurring.


Soften


Lets you set the intensity of the soften blurring.


Zoom


Lets you set the intensity of the zoom blurring.


Lets you set the center point in the Image Window from which the zoom blur originates. The Set Center button is on when the button appears pressed.


Color Transform Filters


Bit Planes


Lets you set the tonal values on the red plane.


Lets you set the tonal values on the green plane.


Lets you set the tonal values on the blue plane.


Enable to set equal values of red, green, and blue.


Halftone


Lets you set the angle of the cyan color channel, which lets you specify how cyan mixes with colors in other channels.


Lets you set the angle of the magenta color channel, which lets you specify how magenta mixes with colors in other channels.


Lets you set the angle of the yellow color channel, which lets you specify how yellow mixes with colors in other channels.


Lets you set the angle of the black color channel, which lets you specify how black mixes with colors in other channels.


Lets you set the radius of the biggest halftone dot.


Psychedelic


Lets you set the intensity of the psychedelic effect.


Solarize


Lets you set the intensity of the solarize effect.


Contour Filters


Edge Detect


Enable to apply a white fill to areas that are not outlined.


Enable to apply a black fill to areas that are not outlined.


Enable to apply the selected color to areas that are not outlined.


Lets you choose a color to apply to areas that are not outlined.


Lets you choose a color (from the Image Window) to apply to areas that are not outlined.


Lets you set the intensity of the edge detection.


Find Edges


Enable to create a smooth, blurred outline.


Enable to create a sharp, crisp outline.


Lets you set the intensity of the find edges effect.


Trace Contour


Lets you set the brightness threshold that is used for outlining.


Enable to trace areas of the image where the brightness levels of the pixels fall below the value you set using the Level slider.


Enable to trace the areas of the image where the brightness values of the pixels exceed the value you set using the Level slider.


Creative Filters


Crafts


Lets you choose a craft item upon which the image is based.


Lets you set the size of the craft item.


Lets you set the percentage of the image that is covered with craft items.


Lets you set the amount of light in the image.


Lets you set the angle of the craft items.


Lets you specify the angle of the craft items.


Crystalize


Lets you set the size of the crystals.


Fabric


Lets you choose a fabric item upon which the image is based.


Lets you set the size of the fabric item.


Lets you set the percentage of the image that is covered with fabric items.


Lets you set the amount of light in the image.


Lets you set the angle of the fabric items.


Lets you specify the angle of the fabric items.


Frame


Select Tab


Displays the current frame.


Lets you choose a preset frame and displays the name of the frame in the Current Frame box.


Opens the Save Preset dialog box, which lets you save the current frame.


Deletes the current frame.


Removes the current frame from the Preview Window.


Lets you choose or load a frame.


Modify Tab


Lets you choose a frame color.


Lets you choose a frame color from the Image Window.


Lets you set the transparency of the frame.


Lets you blur or feather the edges of the frame.


Lets you choose a blend style that determines how the frame blends with the image.


Lets you set the size of the frame from left to right.


Lets you set the size of the frame from top to bottom.


Enable to maintain equal horizontal and vertical values for the frame size.


Lets you set the angle of the frame.


Lets you specify the angle of the frame.


Reverses the frame from right to left.


Reverses the frame from top to bottom.


Lets you set a center point in the Image Window from which the frame effect originates. The Align button is on when the button appears pressed.


Returns the frame to its original location.


Glass Block


Lets you set the width of the glass blocks.


Lets you set the height of the glass blocks.


Enable to maintain equal height and width values for the glass blocks.


Kid's Play


Lets you choose a game item upon which the image is based.


Lets you set the size of the game item.


Lets you set the percentage of the image that is covered with game items.


Lets you set the amount of light in the image.


Lets you set the angle of the game items.


Lets you specify the angle of the game items.


Mosaic


Lets you set the size of the mosaic pieces.


Lets you choose a background color upon which the mosaic is created.


Lets you choose a background color (from the Image Window) upon which the mosaic is created.


Enable to create a frame around the mosaic.


Particles


Enable to sprinkle the image with stars.


Enable to sprinkle the image with bubbles.


Lets you set the size of the particles.


Lets you set the degree to which the image is covered with particles.


Lets you set the amount of color in the particles.


Lets you set the degree to which you can see through the particles.


Lets you set the direction of the light.


Lets you specify the direction of the light.


Scatter


Lets you set the scattering pattern of pixels from left to right.


Lets you set the scattering pattern of pixels from top to bottom.


Enable to maintain equal horizontal and vertical values.


Smoked Glass


Lets you set the degree to which you can see through the glass tint.


Lets you set the amount of blurring on the image.


Lets you choose a tint color.


Lets you choose a tint color from the Image Window.


Stained Glass


Lets you set the size of the stained glass fragments.


Lets you set the brightness of the effect.


Lets you specify the width of the solder between the stained glass pieces.


Lets you choose a solder color.


Lets you choose a solder color from the Image Window.


Enable to create three-dimensional lighting.


Vignette


Enable to use black as the frame color.


Enable to use white as the frame color.


Enable to use a custom color as the frame color.


Lets you choose a frame color.


Lets you choose a frame color from the Image Window.


Enable to use an oval frame.


Enable to use a circular frame.


Enable to use a rectangular frame.


Enable to use a square frame.


Lets you set the frame size.


Lets you set the degree to which the pixels in the image blend into the frame.


Vortex


Lets you choose a vortex brushstroke type.


Lets you set the brushstroke size.


Lets you set the center point in the Image Window from which the vortex originates. The Set Center button is on when the button appears pressed.


Lets you set the direction of the central pixels in the vortex.


Lets you specify the direction of the central pixels in the vortex.


Lets you set the direction of the peripheral pixels in the vortex.


Lets you specify the direction of the peripheral pixels in the vortex.


Weather


Enable to create a snowy weather effect.


Enable to create a rainy weather effect.


Enable to create a foggy weather effect.


Lets you set the intensity of the weather effect.


Lets you set the size of the weather elements.


Lets you set the direction of the rain.


Lets you specify the direction of the rain.


Randomly distributes the pixel placement.


Lets you specify a value to randomly distribute the pixel placement.


Custom Filters


Alchemy


Brush Tab


Selects one of six default brush shapes.


Enable to apply the brushstrokes without a specific or repeating pattern.


Enable to apply patterned brushstrokes.


Enable to apply the brushstrokes so that the brightest portion of the stroke is always visible.


Opens the Load Brush dialog box, which lets you load a preset brush.


Randomly distributes the alchemy pixel placement.


Lets you specify a value to randomly distribute the alchemy pixel placement.


Lets you set the brushstroke variation from left to right.


Lets you set the brushstroke variation from top to bottom.


Lets you set the concentration of the brushstrokes.


Lets you choose a preset alchemy style.


Opens the Save Preset dialog box, which lets you save the current alchemy style.


Deletes the current alchemy style.


Lets you set the center point in the Image Window from which the alchemy effect originates. The Set Center button is on when the button appears pressed.


Color Tab


Enable to base each brushstroke on the image pixel color that falls in the center of the brushstroke.


Enable to base all brushstrokes on the color that you choose from the color picker.


Lets you choose a brushstroke color.


Enable to apply the brushstrokes to the image.


Enable to apply the brushstrokes to a solid colored background.


Lets you choose a color for a solid colored background.


Lets you set the amount of hue variation each brushstroke contains.


Lets you set the amount of saturation variation each brushstroke contains.


Lets you set the amount of brightness variation each brushstroke contains.


Size Tab


Lets you set the size of the brushstroke, according to the pattern you choose from the Vary Brush Size list box.


Lets you set the amount of variation in the size of the brushstrokes.


Lets you set the contrasting size of the brushstroke, according to the pattern you choose from the Vary Brush Size list box.


Lets you choose a pattern style.


Angle Tab


Lets you set the angle of the brushstroke, according to the pattern you choose from the Vary Brush Angle list box.


Lets you set the amount of variation in the brushstroke angles.


Lets you set the contrasting angle of the brushstroke, according to the pattern you choose from the Vary Brush Angle list box.


Lets you set the transparency of the brushstroke, according to the pattern you choose from the Vary Brush Angle list box.


Lets you set the amount of variation between the transparency levels of the brushstrokes.


Lets you set the contrasting transparency of the brushstroke, according to the pattern you choose from the Vary Brush Angle list box.


Band Pass


Lets you set the frequency levels of the image.


Lets you set the band width.


Bump Map


Opens the Load Bump Map Files dialog box, from which you can open an image to use as a bump map.


Enable to stretch a single bump map over the entire image area.


Enable to repeat the bump map image to cover the entire image area.


Lets you specify the width of the bump map tiles.


Lets you specify the height of the bump map tiles.


Enable to maintain equal proportions for the width and height of the tiles.


Lets you choose a preset bump map style upon which the bump map is based.


Opens the Save Preset dialog box, which lets you save the current bump map.


Deletes the current bump map.


Enable to reverse the current bump map.


Enable to soften the rough edges of the current bump map.


Lets you set the size of the bump map.


Lets you set the clipping of the lower parts of the bump map.


Lets you set the clipping of the upper parts of the bump map.


Lets you set the amount of highlighting in the bump map.


Lets you set the path of the directional light source.


Lets you specify the path of the directional light source.


Lets you set the decline of the directional light source.


Lets you specify the decline of the directional light source.


Lets you choose a color for the directional light source.


Lets you choose a color (from the Image Window) for the directional light source.


Lets you set the amount of directional light.


Enable to ensure that the overall brightness of the image is maintained and falls between the values of 1 and 255.


Lets you choose a color for the ambient light source.


Lets you choose a color (from the Image Window) for the ambient light source.


Lets you set the amount of ambient light.


User Defined


Lets you specify a name for the User Defined filter.


Opens the Load User Defined Filter Files dialog box, from which you can load a User Defined filter.


Opens the Save User Defined Filter Files dialog box, which lets you save the current User Defined filter.


Lets you specify a value by which to divide the product of each matrix value and the brightness value of the corresponding pixel.


Lets you specify a value that is added to the pixel values.


Enable to ensure the color values remain within the range of 0 to 255.


Enable to ensure the colors of the image are maintained.


Lets you specify values in the Filter Values matrix to create different effects.


Enable to set values in the Filter Values matrix to create different effects.


Distort Filters


Blocks


Lets you choose a fill type for the empty area in the image.


Lets you choose a fill color for the empty area in the image.


Lets you choose a fill color (from the Image Window) for the empty area in the image.


Lets you set the width of each block piece.


Lets you set the height of each block piece.


Enable to maintain equal values for the height and width of the block pieces.


Lets you set the distance between the block pieces.


Displace


Enable to tile multiple, side-by-side copies of the displacement map over the image.


Enable to extend the displacement map to cover the image.


Lets you choose between stretching the edges of the image to fill empty areas or using the opposite edge of the image to fill empty areas.


Lets you set the displacement map position from left to right.


Lets you set the displacement map position from top to bottom.


Displays the current displacement map.


Lets you choose a displacement map.


Opens the Load Displacement Map Files dialog box, from which you can open a displacement map.


Mesh Warp


Displays the image with a superimposed grid and lets you manipulate the image by dragging the nodes that intersect the gridlines.


Lets you set the number of grid lines. A higher number of grid lines enhances your ability to manipulate the image.


Lets you choose a Mesh Warp style.


Opens the Save Mesh Warp Files dialog box, which lets you save the current Mesh Warp style.


Deletes the current Mesh Warp style.


Offset


Lets you set the position of the image from left to right.


Lets you set the position of the image from top to bottom.


Enable to specify the horizontal and vertical shift values relative to the size of the image or object.


Lets you choose a fill style for the empty areas of an image.


Lets you choose a color to fill the empty areas.


Lets you choose a color (from the Image Window) to fill empty areas.


Pixelate


Enable to divide the image into square blocks.


Enable to divide the image into rectangular blocks.


Enable to divide the image into a series of arcs.


Lets you set the center point around which the radial pixelate effect originates. The Set Center button is on when the button appears pressed.


Lets you set the block or arc width.


Lets you set the block or arc height.


Lets you set the percentage by which you can see through the pixelate effect.


Ripple


Lets you set the number of ripples in the primary wave.


Lets you set the size of the primary wave.


Enable to create a perpendicular wave.


Lets you set the size of the perpendicular wave.


Enable to create waves with jagged edges.


Lets you set the angle of the waves.


Lets you specify the angle of the waves.


Displays a graphic representation of the waves.


Shear


Lets you choose an editing style for the response curve.


Creates a response curve perpendicular to the vertical axis.


Creates a response curve perpendicular to the horizontal axis.


Softens jagged lines on the response curve when you are using the Freehand editing style.


Lets you set the degree to which the image conforms to the response curve.


Lets you choose a fill style for the empty image areas.


Lets you choose a color to fill the empty areas.


Lets you choose a color (from the Image Window) to fill empty areas.


Opens the Load Shear Map Files dialog box, from which you can load a Shear filter.


Opens the Save Shear Map Files dialog box, which lets you save the current shear map.


Displays the current shear map and lets you reshape the response curve.


Swirl


Enable to twist the image to the right.


Enable to twist the image to the left.


Lets you set the number of 360-degree rotations.


Lets you set the number of partial rotations.


Displays a graphic representation of the swirl.


Lets you set the center point in the Image Window from which the swirl originates. The Set Center button is on when the button appears pressed.


Tile


Lets you set the number of times the image appears along the horizontal axis.


Lets you set the number of times the image appears along the vertical axis.


Enable to create an equal number of horizontal and vertical tiles.


Wet Paint


Lets you set the amount of dripping and the colors that drip.


Lets you set the size of the paint drips.


Whirlpool


Lets you set the distance between swirls.


Lets you set the length of each swirl.


Lets you set how many times each swirl turns.


Lets you set the visibility of fine lines in the swirls.


Lets you choose a preset Whirlpool style.


Opens the Save Preset dialog box, which lets you save the current whirlpool style.


Removes the current whirlpool style.


Enable to distort the whirlpool.


Wind


Lets you set the strength of the wind effect.


Lets you set the percentage by which you can see through the wind effect.


Lets you set the direction of the wind.


Lets you specify the direction of the wind.


Noise Filters


Noise Tune


Lets you set the degree of noise that is applied to the image.


Lets you set the concentration of random pixels that appear on the surface of the image.


Produces a thin, light-colored grain.


Prioritizes colors along a Gaussian curve.


Adds colors randomly to produce a granular appearance.


Scatters colors to create a smooth appearance.


Intensifies the color in certain areas by adding pixels of similar color.


Removes noise from scanned images that have a grainy appearance.


Lightens an image without washing out image detail.


Scatters colors in the image to create a soft, blurred effect with minimal distortion.


Softens edges to reduce the speckled effect that can occur during scanning.


Cancels your last action.


Add Noise


Enable to apply noise along a Gaussian distribution curve.


Enable to apply noise that produces a thin, light-colored grain.


Enable to apply noise that produces a uniform granular appearance.


Lets you set the intensity and color value range affected by the noise.


Lets you set the compression of random pixels appearing on the image.


Enable to add a significant amount of noise.


Enable to create noise using randomly-colored pixels.


Enable to create noise using the color you choose from the color picker.


Lets you choose a color for the noise.


Lets you choose a color (from the Image Window) for the noise effect.


Diffuse


Lets you set the intensity of the diffuse effect.


Dust And Scratch


Lets you set the amount of image noise reduction.


Lets you set the number of pixels that are successively changed by the dust and scratch effect.


Maximum


Lets you set the intensity of the maximum filter.


Lets you set the number of pixels that are changed by the maximum effect.


Median


Lets you set the number of pixels that are changed by the median effect.


Minimum


Lets you set the intensity of the minimum effect.


Lets you set the number of pixels that are changed by the minimum effect.


Remove Moire


Lets you set the amount of noise to remove.


Enable to apply a high-quality effect at a slower speed.


Enable to apply a lower-quality effect at a faster speed.


Displays the original resolution of the image.


Lets you specify the resolution of the image.


Remove Noise


Lets you set the brightness level at which pixels are considered noise.


Enable to automatically calculate and apply the noise reduction level that is required to improve image quality.


Render Filters


3D Stereo Noise


Lets you set the three-dimensional depth of the stereogram image.


Enable to display two dots that help you focus on the stereogram image.


Lens Flare


Enable to create a lens flare that mimics the focal lengths between a standard 50 mm lens and the magnified perspective of a 300 mm telephoto/zoom lens.


Enable to create a lens flare that mimics a moderate wide-angle lens.


Enable to create a lens flare that mimics a moderate telephoto/zoom lens.


Lets you set the intensity of the lens flare.


Lets you choose a lens flare color.


Lets you choose a lens flare color from the Image Window.


Lets you set the center point in the Image Window from which the lens flare originates. The Set Center button is on when the button appears pressed.


Lighting Effects


Main Area (Bottom)


Adds a light source to the Preview Window.


Deletes the selected light source from the Preview window.


Lets you view the light sources in the Preview window.


Lets you specify the horizontal coordinate for the position of the light source.


Lets you specify the vertical coordinate for the position of the light source.


Lets you choose a preset lighting style.


Opens the Save Preset dialog box, which lets you save the current lighting source.


Deletes the current lighting source.


Light Source Tab


Enable to apply a concentrated light source.


Enable to apply a filtered light source.


Enable to activate the light source.


Lets you choose a light source color.


Lets you choose a light source color from the Image Window.


Lets you set the level of illumination.


Lets you set the focus of the light.


Lets you set the amount of fading at the edge of the light shaft.


Lets you specify the direction of the light source.


Lets you set the slope of the light source.


Applies the Omni preset light source style.


Lets you set the amount of white the light source contains.


Atmosphere Tab


Lets you set the intensity of the ambient light.


Enable to activate the ambient light.


Lets you choose an ambient light color.


Lets you choose an ambient light color from the Image Window.


Lets you set the amount of light in the image.


Lets you choose a color channel in which to create a texture.


Lets you set the amount of projecting detail on the surface of the image.


Lets you set the variation of the texture.


Sharpen Filters


Sharpen Tune


Accentuates edge detail and sharpens smooth areas.


Accentuates edge detail without affecting the rest of the image.


Sharpens the overall focus of the image.


Analyzes similarly colored pixels to determine the direction in which to apply the greatest amount of sharpening.


Lets you set the intensity of the sharpening effect.


Lets you set the amount by which the value of a given pixel must change before the sharpen effect is applied.


Cancels your last action.


Adaptive Unsharp


Lets you set the degree of the sharpening effect.


Directional Sharpen


Lets you set the intensity of the directional sharpen effect.


High Pass


Lets you set the degree to which shadow detail is removed.


Lets you set the bleed rate of the image colors.


Sharpen


Lets you set the degree to which edge detail is accentuated.


Lets you determine how great a change in value must occur to any pixel before the effect is applied.


Enable to prevent dramatic shifts in hue when applying a sharpening effect.


Unsharp Mask


Lets you set the intensity of the unsharp mask effect.


Lets you set the number of pixels that are affected simultaneously.


Lets you set how many pixels are affected by the unsharp mask effect.


Texture Filters


Brick Wall


Lets you set the texture of the bricks.


Lets you specify width of the bricks.


Lets you specify height of the bricks.


Enable to set equal values for the width and height of the bricks.


Lets you specify the size of the space between the bricks.


Lets you set the direction of the light hitting the bricks.


Lets you specify the direction of the light hitting the bricks.


Bubbles


Lets you set the width of the bubbles.


Lets you set the number of bubbles that cover the image.


Lets you set the direction of the light hitting the bubbles.


Lets you specify the direction of the light hitting the bubbles.


Enable to produce distortion within the bubbles through light refraction.


Canvas


Lets you set the degree to which you can see through the effect.


Lets you set the intensity of the raised, relief effect.


Lets you set the position of the canvas map by shifting from left to right.


Lets you set the position of the canvas map by shifting from top to bottom.


Enable to change the offset of horizontal tiles.


Enable to change the offset of vertical tiles.


Enable to stretch the canvas map to fit the image.


Lets you set the offset of the canvas map tile.


Displays the current canvas map.


Displays the name of the current canvas map.


Opens the Load Canvas Map Files dialog box, from which you can open an image to use as a canvas map.


Cobblestone


Lets you set the roughness of the cobblestones.


Lets you set the size of the cobblestones.


Lets you specify the amount of space between the cobblestones.


Lets you set the direction of the light hitting the cobblestones.


Lets you specify the direction of the light hitting the cobblestones.


Enable to distort the shape of the cobblestones.


Elephant Skin


Lets you set the intensity of the elephant skin effect.


Lets you choose a color for the wrinkles.


Lets you choose a color (from the Image Window) for the wrinkles.


Randomly distributes the placement of the wrinkles.


Lets you specify a value to randomly distribute the placement of the wrinkles.


Etching


Lets you set the amount of image detail.


Lets you set the depth of the etching.


Lets you set the direction of the light hitting the etching.


Lets you specify the direction of the light hitting the etching.


Lets you choose a color for the surface of the etching.


Lets you choose a color (from the Image Window) for the surface of the etching.


Plastic


Lets you set the brightness of the image accents.


Lets you set the depth of the plastic wrap.


Lets you set the smoothness of the plastic wrap.


Lets you set the direction of the light hitting the plastic wrap.


Lets you specify the direction of the light hitting the plastic wrap.


Lets you choose a color for the plastic wrap.


Lets you choose a color (from the Image Window) for the plastic wrap.


Plaster Wall


Lets you set the amount of detail in the plaster.


Lets you set the amount of light hitting the plaster wall.


Randomly distributes the placement of the brushstrokes.


Lets you specify a value to randomly distributes the placement of the brushstrokes.


Relief Sculpture


Lets you set the amount of image detail in the relief sculpture.


Lets you set the amount of embossing in the relief sculpture.


Lets you set the amount of blurring in the relief sculpture.


Lets you set the direction of the light hitting the relief sculpture.


Lets you specify the direction of the light hitting the relief sculpture.


Lets you choose a surface color for the relief sculpture.


Lets you choose a surface color (from the Image Window) for the relief sculpture.


Screen Door


Enable to see black-and-white background through the screen door.


Enable to see colored background through the screen door.


Lets you set the density of the screen door mesh.


Lets you set the sharpness of the image pixels.


Lets you set the lightness of the image pixels.


Stone


Lets you set the roughness of the stone effect.


Lets you set the amount of detail in the stone effect.


Lets you choose a preset stone style upon which the image is based.


Opens the Save Preset dialog box, which lets you save the current stone style.


Deletes the current stone style.


Lets you set the direction of the light hitting the stones.


Lets you specify the direction of the light hitting the stones.


Enable to create a mirror image of the stone texture.


Underpainting


Lets you set the intensity of the underpainting.


Lets you set the amount of light in the underpainting.


Fancy Effects


Terrazzo


Displays the image and resize area that is used to create a kaleidoscopic pattern.


Opens the Symmetry dialog box, which lets you choose a kaleidoscopic pattern.


Displays how the base tile looks using the current settings.


Displays the dimensions (in pixels) of the base tile.


Opens the Save Tile dialog box, which lets you save the current tile.


Displays the different symmetry patterns you can use as the basis for the kaleidoscopic pattern.


Lets you choose an image to use as the basis for the kaleidoscopic pattern.


Lets you set the fade rate between base tiles.


Enable to view the boundary that indicates where one base tile fades into the next.


Lets you set the amount by which you can see through the Terrazzo image.


Lets you choose a merge mode for the tiles.


Enable to continuously update the Result window with your changes.


Global Bitmaps (Options Dialog Box)


Enable to preview an image in a full screen view.


Enable to preview an image (before and after an effect filter is applied) in two separate windows.


Enable to preview an image (with the effect filter applied) in one large window.


Enable to preview an image using the last preview method (i.e., full screen, before and after, etc.).


Enable to preview an image using the last values that you selected in the effects filter dialog box.


Begins a new file by creating a blank drawing page.


Starts the Template wizard, which helps you create a drawing based on the template of your choice.


Lets you open an existing file or style template.


Closes the active drawing.


Lets you save a new drawing or a new version of an existing drawing. You can keep the original drawing if you save its new version with a different filename.


Lets you save all open drawings.


Reverts to the last saved version of a drawing, letting you undo all the changes you have made to the drawing since you last saved it.


Lets you import graphics into CorelDRAW or merge other CorelDRAW files (.CDR or .CMX) with the active drawing.


Lets you scan an image into CorelDRAW.


Lets you select a scanning device.


Lets you acquire an image using TWAIN.


Lets you select a digital camera to use.


Lets you download images from a digital camera.


Lets you upload images from a digital camera.


Lets you save your drawing in a different file format.


Lets you save and send drawings to other users via Microsoft Exchange.


Lets you print your work, modify print options, and change the printer and its properties.


Lets you see how your drawing will look before it is printed. For example, you can see where printers' marks will appear, and how your color separations look.


Lets you combine a specially formatted text file (.TXT) with a CorelDRAW file during printing.


Lets you change the printer and printer properties.


Starts the Prepare For Service Bureau wizard, which guides you through the steps involved in preparing and gathering files for professional output at a service bureau.


Starts the Publish To Internet wizard, which helps you publish the active drawing to the World Wide Web.


Lets you specify settings and options to publish the active drawing to a PDF (Portable Document Format) file.


Lets you view details about the active drawing.


Lets you specify archive settings and a directory for the active drawing.


Lets you view and retrieve archived versions of the active drawing.


Lets you open a saved version of an archived drawing.


Retrieves a file from a list of the four most recently opened files.


 Links to a Corel Web site, where you can access information and download additional templates.


 Links to the Corel community Web site for graphic designers, where you can access tips, demonstrations and more.


 Links to a Corel Web site, where you can download additional clipart and photos.


Links to a Corel Web site, where you can download and access information about digital cameras.


Closes the active CorelDRAW session.


Displays the name of the file you whose details you are viewing.


Displays details about the active drawing.


Enable to display the name and location of the drawing.


Enable to display the number of pages, layers, page size, orientation, and other settings of the active drawing.


Enable to display the number of objects in the active drawing, as well as their properties.


Enable to display the number of text objects in the active drawing, as well as their properties.


Enable to display information (e.g., type of color model) about the bitmaps in the active drawing.


Enable to display the types of styles (e.g., Graphic, Artistic, and Paragraph) in the active drawing as well as the number of times each style is used.


Enable to display the types of special effects in the active drawing and the number of times each special effect is used.


Enable to display the types of fills in the active drawing and the number of times each type of fill is used.


Enable to display the types of outlines in the active drawing and the number of times each type of outline is used.


Opens the Save As dialog box, which lets you specify the location where you want to save the details of the active drawing. This information is saved as a text file.


Opens the Print dialog box, which lets you choose a printer and set options for printing the active drawing.


Displays the CorelDRAW version of the selected file.


Displays the compression ratio of the selected file.


Displays the last version of CorelDRAW used to create the file you choose.


Enable to maintain layers and pages when importing files.


Displays keywords that identify the drawing you want to open.


Displays the language used in the selected file.


Lets you choose a version of CorelDRAW in which to save the active drawing.


Lets you choose a thumbnail's file size or choose to hide the file's thumbnail.


Lets you specify settings for the drawing you want to save.


Enable to save only selected objects in the active drawing.


Enable to ensure that the fonts in a drawing can be viewed on a computer on which the fonts are not installed.


Lets you type in keywords that will help you find and recognize your files for future use.


Enable to save the image to .CMX format, a file format native to CorelDRAW.


Enable to use the file's current thumbnail.


Lets you choose whether to use bitmap compression or graphic object compression.


Enable to use bitmap compression.


Enable to use graphic object compression.


Lets you choose whether to save textures with the file, or rebuild textures when opening the file.


Enable to save texture attributes with the file.


Enable to rebuild textures when opening the file.


Lets you choose whether to save blends and extrudes with the file, or rebuild them when opening the file.


Enable to save blends and extrusion attributes with the file.


Enable to rebuild blends and extrusions when opening the file.


Lets you specify or choose a URL for the selected object.


Lets you specify a bookmark name for the selected object.


Identifies all the hypergraphics that are in the active drawing. The hypergraphics are covered by a cross-hatch pattern.


Displays a hypergraphic as the hotspot. The cross-hatch pattern covers only the hypergraphic.


Displays a hypergraphic's bounding box as the hotspot. The cross-hatch pattern extends to the hypergraphic's bounding box.


Lets you choose a hypergraphic's cross-hatch color.


Lets you choose a fill color for a hypergraphic's background.


Lets you assign a URL to the selected object.


Lets you access additional URLs.


Lets you assign a bookmark to the selected object.


Lets you access additional bookmarks.


Lets you specify a font size for the selected HTML text.


Lets you specify an Internet object name that corresponds to a specific CGI Script control reference.


Lets you specify the name of the Internet object.


Lets you specify the folder in which you want to save the drawing.


Opens the Select Directory dialog box, which lets you choose a drive and folder where you want to save the drawing.


Enable to use the HTML name for the file.


Lets you specify the name of the folder in which you want to save the graphics in your drawing.


Lets you choose the type of HTML layout you want to use when you export your document to the Internet.


Opens the Publish To Internet dialog box, which lets you specify the settings for publishing the active drawing to the Internet.


Enable to export graphics to the JPEG image file format.


Opens the JPEG Export dialog box, which lets you set advanced JPEG-specific options.


Enable to export graphics to the GIF image file format.


Enable to display an image in its entirety in your browser.


Enable to separate a bitmap from other types of graphics in the drawing.


Enable to automatically resample large bitmaps to 96 dots per inch, the World Wide Web's default screen resolution.


Enable to override HTML-compatible text and export it as a bitmap.


Displays the page number,  the filename, and the title that will appear on the World Wide Web browser's Title Bar and lets you edit the title and filename of each page.


Lets you export all of the pages in a multipage drawing to the World Wide Web.


Enable to replace existing files with updated files when you publish to the Internet.


Enable to start your browser and verify the page.


Enable to generate a document listing the page information.


Lets you choose the type of HTML layout you want to use when you export your document to the Internet from the list.


Lets you specify the HTML folder for your document.


Lets you specify the name of the folder in which you want to save the bitmaps in a document.


Enable to use the HTML name for the file.


Lists the pages, page names, and filenames in your document to publish to the Internet.


Opens the Publish To Internet wizard, which guides you through the process of publishing a drawing to the World Wide Web.


Opens the Select Directory dialog box, which lets you choose a drive and folder where you want to save a drawing.


Lets you export all of the pages in a multipage drawing to the World Wide Web.


Opens the Publish To Internet page of the Options dialog box, which lets you set advanced Internet publishing options.


Enable to replace existing files with updated files when you publish to the Internet.


Enable to start your browser and verify the page.


Enable  to generate a document listing the page information.


Enable to choose a template from a set of CorelDRAW templates.


Displays all available template types and lets you choose one for your drawing.


Displays available templates and lets you choose one for your drawing.


Enable to open the template with the contents that are displayed in the Preview box.


Displays a thumbnail sketch of the selected template.


Displays keywords associated with the selected template.


Displays notes associated with the selected template.


Enable to choose a template from a selection of PaperDirect text and paper templates.


Enable to choose a template from a selection of PaperDirect text templates.


Enable to create a new drawing using the selected template.


Enable to open the selected template for editing.


Enable to load the template's styles, page layout settings, and objects for the new drawing. Disable to load only the template's styles.


Open dialog box


Displays a thumbnail of the selected file when the Preview check box is enabled. If the file is not a graphics file, the Preview window displays an X.


Enable to display a thumbnail of the selected file in the Preview window. If the file is not a graphics file, the Preview window displays an X.


Lets you choose a method for opening files.


Lets you display or hide file information such as image size, file format, keywords, and notes.


Displays the dimensions and color mode of the image.


Displays the file format of the image.


Displays any notes that are associated with the selected file.


Displays the last version with which this file was created.


Enable to use the filter's default settings without opening its dialog box.


Enable to maintain the layers and pages of a file when you import it.


Enable to link the bitmap externally instead of saving it in the image file. This saves disk space and the image can be loaded and edited faster.


Enable to link a low Resolution place holder image to a high resolution file when you import TIFF (or CT) files.


Enable to apply the embedded International Color Consortium (.ICC) profile in the imported file.


Enable to save the embedded International Color Consortium (.ICC) profile of the file to the color directory where the application was installed.


Lets you choose the sorting order of the extensions in the Files Of Type or Save As Type list box.


Enable to import bitmaps that contain multiple layers. The multi-layers are combined into one layer upon import of image.


Enable to check for a encoded Digimarc watermark when you import files.


Provides a space for you to type the name of the file. You can use * as a wildcard. For example, you can type *.* to see a list of all the files. You can also type the full path of a file. For example, you can type c:mydocs\letter.doc or if you have used a long filename, you might type C:\mydocs\letter to mom.


Lists the type of files to display. This is useful for narrowing the list of files displayed to only those files you're interested in.


Preview video by moving Slider.


Displays keywords that identify the drawing you want to open.


Crop Image dialog box


Lets you define the cropping area.


Displays the path, filename, and extension of the image.


Displays the image with a cropping box around it, which you can use to resize the image.


Lets you specify the height of the cropping box.


Lets you specify the width of the cropping box.


Lets you specify the number of units to crop from the top of the image.  You can choose a unit of measurement from the Units list box.


Lets you specify the number of units you want to crop from the left side of the image.  You can choose a unit of measure from the Units list box.


Selects the entire image.


Lets you choose the unit of measurement for sizing and positioning the cropping box.


Displays the size of the cropped image.


Resample dialog box


Displays the path, filename, and extension of the image.


Lets you specify the width of the image. You can choose the unit of measurement from the Units list box.


Lets you specify the height of the image. You can choose the unit of measurement from the Units list box.


Lets you specify the width of the resampled image as a percentage of its original width.


Lets you specify the height of the resampled image as a percentage of its original height.


Lets you specify the width of the image.


Lets you specify the height of the image.


Lets you choose the unit of measurement for sizing the image.


Lets you specify the  horizontal resolution of the image in pixels or dots per inch (dpi).


Lets you specify the vertical resolution of the image in pixels or dots per inch (dpi).


Displays the vertical resolution of the original image.


Enable to maintain equal horizontal and vertical resolution values automatically.


Displays the file size of the image in bytes.


Displays the file size of the resampled image.


Lets you choose the resolution of an image.


Enable to maintain the width-to-height ratio of the image.


Displays the horizontal resolution of the original image.


Bitmap dialog box


Displays the color controls and lets you change the color characteristics of the image.


Lets you choose a color mode. The number of bits a color mode uses determines both the computer power required and the number of colors or shades the color mode is capable of producing.


Enable to use image dithering. Dithering is a method of enhancing the color in Black and White, 16 bit Color, or 256 bit Color paletted images.


Enable to use a color profile when you export the bitmap image.


Displays the dimension controls and lets you change the dimensions of the bitmap image.


Lets you choose the export dimensions of the bitmap image.


Lets you specify the width of the bitmap image in pixels.


Lets you specify the height of the bitmap image in pixels.


Displays the resolution controls and lets you change the resolution of the bitmap image.


Lets you choose the resolution of the bitmap image.


Lets you specify the vertical resolution of the bitmap image.


Lets you specify the horizontal resolution of the bitmap image.


Enable to maintain the width-to-height ratio of the image.


Displays the anti-aliasing controls and lets you choose the method of anti-aliasing for the bitmap image.


Displays the estimated size of the bitmap file before it is compressed.


Enable to mask an area outside the selected objects.


Enable to maintain the aspect ratio between the height and the width of the image size.


Resets the bitmap properties to the default settings.


Enable to smooth the curved and diagonal edges in the bitmap image.


Save dialog box


Lets you choose a compression type with which to save the file.


Enable to suppress the dialog box of the filter.


Lets you specify information about the file.


Saves the image.


Closes the dialog box without saving any of the changes.


Lets you choose a version of CorelDraw in which to save the active drawing.


Lets you choose a thumbnail's file size or choose to hide the file's thumbnail.


Lets you choose the sorting order of the extensions in the Files Of Type or Save As Type list box.


Enable to replace the white space in a filename with an underscore. Special characters are replaced by characters suitable for WEB Based file names.


Enable to save an embedded Internal Color Consortium (.ICC) profile as part of the file.


Provides a space for you to type the name of the file. You can use * as a wildcard. For example, you can type *.* to see a list of all the files. You can also type the full path of a file. For example, you can type c:mydocs\letter.doc or if you have used a long filename, you might type C:\mydocs\letter to mom.


Lists the type of files to display. This is useful for narrowing the list of files displayed to only those files you're interested in.


Lets you choose the type of compression format you want to save your image in. Will only be available if filter you are using can be compressed.


Enable to save your Visual Basic for Application (VBA) project in your file. If you don't save your project, you will lose any work you have done on that project.


Lets you specify keywords that will help you find and recognize your files for future use.


Options dialog box, Global/Filters/Associate


Lets you choose the file extension that will open with the Corel application you are running.


Enable to choose a file type for the Corel application you are running.


Displays a description of the selected filter.


Resets the associate page properties to the default settings.


Options dialog box, Global/Filters


Lets you choose the filter type.


Lets you choose the active filters.


Adds a filter to the list of active filters.


Removes a filter from the list of active filters.


Moves the selected filter down one position in the list of active filters.


Moves the selected filter up one position in the list of active filters.


Displays a description of the selected filter.


Resets the file format properties to the default settings.


Lets you type words directly on the screen as Artistic text or create a Paragraph text frame and enter text in the frame.


Lets you specify a font for the selected text.


Lets you specify a font for Asian, Arabic, or Hebrew text. If you are running CorelDRAW on an Asian, Arabic, or Hebrew operating system, you can choose a font appropriate to your operating system.


Lets you specify which text is updated when you apply new font settings to a text object. You can apply changes to text entered in one or both of the languages you are using.


Enable to orient new or selected text left to right.


Enable to orient new or selected text top to bottom.


Enable to have the words in a paragraph flow from left to right.


Enable to have the words in a paragraph flow from right to left.


Lets you specify the size of the space between Latin and Asian text on a line. The size of the space is based on a percentage of the normal space width.


Enable to prevent lines from breaking after any of the characters specified in the box to the right. Disable to break lines between any two characters.


Enable to prevent lines from breaking before any of the characters specified in the box to the right. Disable to break lines between any two characters.


Enable to allow any of the characters specified in the box to the right to extend beyond the right or bottom margin. Disable to wrap to a new line at the right or bottom margin.


Displays the leading characters you do not want appearing at the end of a line. Text will break either before the leading character or after the character following the leading character.


Displays the following characters you do not want appearing at the beginning of a line. Text will break either before the character preceding the following character or after the following character.


Displays the overflow characters you want to extend beyond the right or bottom margin.


Resets the list of leading characters to the default list.


Resets the list of following characters to the default list.


Resets the list of overflow characters to the default list.


Enable to use the in-line Input Method Editor (IME) from CorelDRAW. Disable to use the IME available with your system.


Displays the contents of the CorelDRAW Online Help system, which provides access to descriptions and procedures that will help you learn how to use CorelDRAW.


Changes the cursor to the What's This? cursor. When you click a component of the application with this cursor, a related, context-sensitive Help topic is displayed in a pop-up window.


Starts CorelTUTOR, which provides you with step-by-step instructions on completing basic tasks, such as transforming objects, to more difficult tasks like publishing to the Internet.


Starts CorelDRAW Hints, which provides useful tips based on the operation you're performing.


Starts the CorelDRAW What’s New? screens, which highlight the tools and features that are new for CorelDRAW 9.


Displays the contents of the Technical Support Help system, which provides information about product support for Corel applications including available support services, error messages, and troubleshooting tips.


Helps you to locate a service bureau near you that works with CorelDRAW software.


Links to a Corel Web site.


Links to the Corel Web site and copies the site’s latest links to a text file on your hard drive in order to keep your list of Corel Web links current.


Displays information about your copy of CorelDRAW and your system.


Lets you specify the serial number of the software you've purchased as well as your personal identification number (PIN) for obtaining technical support.


Displays information about your system, display, printing, Corel EXEs, DLLs, and system DLLs.


Displays copyright information about CorelDRAW.


Lets you print licensing information about CorelDRAW.


Displays information about this version of CorelDRAW.


Displays copyright and licensing information about CorelDRAW.


Displays the registration information about CorelDRAW.


 Displays system information about the selected category.


Provides a list of system information categories, including: system, display, printing, and Corel EXEs, DLLs, and System DLLs.


Saves all system information as SYSINFO.TXT. Once it's saved, a message box appears informing you of the location of the saved file.


Displays the serial number located on your proof of purchase.


Displays the personal identification number (PIN). This number is not needed to run the software but is necessary to receive customer support.


Opens the Print dialog box, which allows you to print your work, modify print options, and change the printer and its properties.


Edit Links dialog box


Displays a list of details for all the links in the Corel On The Web flyout. The details include each the command text displayed on the flyout and the corresponding URLs.


Displays the text and corresponding Uniform Resource Locator (URL) of the links that appear on the Corel On The Web flyout in the Help menu.


Lets you edit the text or the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) of the link you choose from the list on the left.


Lets you add a new link to the Corel On The Web flyout in the Help menu.


Removes the selected menu item.


Moves the selected menu item up.


Moves the selected menu item down.


Lets you create a menu command or edit an existing command on the Corel On The Web flyout. You can also assign a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) to a new command or edit the URL of an existing command.


Lets you type a name for your menu item. Insert an ampersand (&) before the letter you want to use as the shortcut.


Lets you type the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) you want to link to when you select the corresponding menu item.


Displays the CorelTUTOR.


Displays the previous page of the CorelTUTOR.


Displays the next page of the CorelTUTOR.


Displays the main page of the CorelTUTOR, from which you can access an introduction and lessons.


Opens a menu from which you can add or go to bookmarks.


Opens the Bookmarks dialog box, from which you can add and edit bookmarks.


Provides information and tips about the CorelTUTOR.


Common Controls


Updates the image in the Image Window.


Definition included in c_color.rtf.


Displays the application progress of the current adjustment or transformation.


Level Equalization


Lets you choose colors in the Image Window to set as input and output values for the darkest image pixels.


Lets you choose colors in the Image Window to set as input and output values for the lightest image pixels.


Enable to set input values.


Enable to set output values.


Lets you choose a color channel to adjust its shadows, midtones, and highlights.


Enable to automatically adjust the shadows, midtones, and highlights within the specified tonal range.


Opens the Auto-Adjust Range Dialog box, which lets you adjust the percentage of outlying pixels on either end of the tonal range.


Lets you specify the clipping value percentage of the histogram.


Enable to automatically clip the outlying brightness values in the image.


Lets you specify the clipping range for the darkest pixels in the image.


Lets you specify the clipping range for the brightest pixels in the image.


Lets you set the clipping range for the darkest and brightest pixels in the image.


Lets you specify the output brightness value of the darkest pixels in the image.


Lets you specify the output brightness value of the brightest pixels in the image.


Lets you set the output brightness value of the darkest and brightest pixels in the image.


Lets you set the midtones of the image.


Displays the brightness value of every pixel in the image graphically.


Lets you specify a black limit value.


Lets you specify a white limit value.


Local Equalization


Lets you set the width of the pixel region in which the local equalization is applied.


Lets you set the height of the pixel region in which the local equalization is applied.


Enable to maintain a square pixel region in which the local equalization is applied.


Sample/Target Balance


Lets you choose a color channel to shift colors in the shadow, midtone, and highlight areas of the image.


Enable to apply the current settings to all channels, regardless of which channel you choose in the Channel list box.


Lets you choose a dark color in the Image Window.


Lets you choose a medium color in the Image Window.


Lets you choose a highlighted color in the Image Window.


Displays the sample or target colors you choose using the eyedropper tools, and lets you edit the colors.


Displays the distribution of pixels in the image according to brightness.


Lets you specify a clipping percentage that is displayed in the boxes below the histogram.


Enable to automatically adjust the number of light and dark pixels that are omitted from the calculations of the filter.


Tone Curve


Lets you choose the color channel for which you want to adjust the brightness values of pixels in specific areas.


Shapes the response curve as you drag the curve by smoothing the distribution of values.


Shapes the response curve as you drag the curve by retaining straight line segments between the nodes of the response curve.


Shapes the response curve as you drag the curve.


Weighs corrections toward the midtones when you shape the response curve.


Flips the response curve vertically.


Flips the response curve horizontally.


Mirrors the response curve.


Returns the response curve to its default setting.


Equalizes the response curve.


Opens the Auto-Adjust Range dialog box, which lets you specify the boundaries for the lightest and darkest pixels in the image.


Opens the Load Tone Curve Files dialog box, which lets you open preset and previously saved response curves.


Opens the Save Tone Curve Files dialog box, which lets you save customized response curves.


Enable to display the response curves for all channels simultaneously.


Displays the response curve and lets you drag it to a new position.


Displays the value of the x coordinate.


Displays the value of the y coordinate.


Lets you specify a value for the gamma response curve.


Brightness-Contrast-Intensity


Lets you set the image brightness by lightening or darkening all image colors equally.


Lets you set the contrast by increasing or decreasing the difference between the lightest and darkest pixels in the image.


Lets you set the intensity by emphasizing or de-emphasizing lighter areas of the image without washing out the dark areas.


Color Balance


Enable to apply the effect to the darkest pixels in the image.


Enable to apply the effect to the medium pixel areas in the image.


Enable to apply the effect to the lightest pixels in the image.


Enable to maintain the current brightness values of the image.


Lets you set the balance of cyan and red in the image.


Lets you set the balance of magenta and green in the image.


Lets you set the balance of yellow and blue in the image.


Gamma


Lets you set the amount of detail that is emphasized in a low-contrast image, without significantly affecting the shadows or highlights.


Hue/Saturation/Lightness


Enable to apply the effect to all color channels in the image.


Enable to apply the effect to the red channel.


Enable to apply the effect to the yellow channel.


Enable to apply the effect to the green channel.


Enable to apply the effect to the cyan channel.


Enable to apply the effect to the blue channel.


Enable to apply the effect to the magenta channel.


Enable to apply the effect to the grayscale channel.


Lets you set the hue of the colors in the image.


Lets you set the saturation of the colors in the image.


Lets you set the amount of black or white in the colors in the image.


Displays the original color spectrum of the image.


Displays the modified color spectrum of the image.


Selective Color


Lets you set the percentage of cyan in the color spectrum.


Lets you set the percentage of magenta in the color spectrum.


Lets you set the percentage of yellow in the color spectrum.


Lets you set the percentage of black in the color spectrum.


Enable to modify the red color channel.


Enable to modify the yellow color channel.


Enable to modify the green color channel.


Enable to modify the cyan color channel.


Enable to modify the blue color channel.


Enable to modify the magenta color channel.


Displays the original colors in the image.


Displays the adjusted color spectrum.


Enable to add or remove a percentage of the process color from the selected color spectrum.


Enable to add or remove a percentage of the process color from the selected color spectrum.


Enable to add the process color to the image shadows.


Enable to add the process color to the image midtones.


Enable to add the process color to the image highlights.


Replace Colors


Lets you choose the color you want to replace in the image.


Lets you choose the color you want to replace in the image from the Image Window.


Lets you choose a replacement color for the image.


Lets you choose a replacement color for the image from the Image Window.


Lets you set the hue of the replacement color.


Lets you set the saturation of the replacement color.


Lets you set the amount of black or white in the replacement color.


Lets you set the percentage of colors that are replaced in the image.


Enable to ignore all grayscale pixels.


Enable to replace all colors that fall within the current range with the new color.


Displays the areas of the image that are affected by the color replacement.


Color Hue


Adds more red to the image.


Adds more green to the image.


Adds more blue to the image.


Adds more cyan to the image.


Adds more magenta to the image.


Adds more yellow to the image.


Enable to adjust the dark tones in the image.


Enable to adjust the medium tones in the image.


Enable to adjust the light tones in the image.


Enable to adjust the brightness of the image.


Lets you set the intensity of each color application.


Color Tone


Darkens the image.


Increases the purity of the colors in the image.


Increases the difference between light and dark areas of the image.


Lightens the image.


Decreases the purity of the colors in the image.


Decreases the difference between light and dark areas of the image.


Lets you set the intensity of the effect.


Deinterlace


Enable to remove even numbered horizontal lines from scanned or interlaced video images.


Enable to remove odd numbered horizontal lines from scanned or interlaced video images.


Enable to fill alternating horizontal lines with copies of the adjacent pixels.


Enable to fill spaces with colors created by averaging the surrounding pixels.


Posterize


Lets you set the gradations of color in the image.


Threshold


Lets you choose a color channel from which you can set a threshold.


Enable to convert pixels that fall below the threshold value to black or to the specified low-level value.


Enable to convert pixels that fall below the threshold value to white or to the high-level value.


Enable to convert the colors in the image to black and white.


Lets you specify the percentage of outlying brightness values in the image that are ignored when you identify the lightest and darkest pixels in the histogram.


Enable to automatically change the sensitivity of the histogram.


Displays the distribution of pixels according to brightness.


Lets you set the brightness level at which colors are converted to black or white.


Lets you specify the brightness level of the darkest color.


Lets you specify a threshold value above (or below) which pixels are displayed in black or white, depending on the threshold color you choose.


Lets you specify the brightness level of the lightest color.


Resample


Lets you specify the width of the image in the specified unit of measure.


Lets you specify the height of the image in the specified unit of measure.


Lets you specify the width of the image as a percentage of the original width of the image.


Lets you specify the height of the image as a percentage of the original height of the image.


Lets you choose a unit of measure to calculate image height and width.


Displays the unit of measure used to calculate image height and width.


Lets you specify the horizontal resolution of the image in dots per inch (dpi).


Lets you specify the vertical resolution of the image in dots per inch (dpi).


Enable to create equal horizontal and vertical resolution values.


Displays the original file size of the image.


Displays the file size of the resampled image.


Enable to create pixels based on the average values of adjacent pixels.


Enable to maintain the physical size and resolution proportions of the image.


Enable to maintain the original file size (the amount of space that the file takes up on your hard drive) when you resample an image.


Stitch 1: Select Images


Displays a list of images and lets you choose an image to stitch.


Displays a list of images and lets you choose an image to stitch.


Stitches the images vertically.


Stitches the images horizontally.


Reverses the image order in the Selected Files list.


Displays the image you choose from the Source Files list.


Adds the image you choose from the Source Files list to the Selected Files list.


Removes the image you choose from the Selected Files list.


Adds all images in the Source Files list to the Selected Files list.


Removes all images from the Selected Files list.


Displays a list of the images that will be stitched.


Stitch 2: Edit Overlap


Displays the images and the overlap markers.


Displays the relative position of the overlap.


Lets you choose an overlap so that you can adjust it.


Returns to the previous overlap in the stitch sequence.


Advances to the next overlap in the stitch sequence.


Enable to convert the composite stitched image to an object.


Lets you set the overlap of the images by moving the overlapping images from top to bottom.


Lets you set the overlap of the images by moving overlapping images from left to right.


Returns the images to their default position.


Paper Size


Displays the position of the image on the paper and lets you change the image position by dragging.


Displays the original paper width in the specified unit of measure.


Lets you specify the paper width in the specified unit of measure.


Displays the original paper height in the specified unit of measure.


Lets you specify the paper height in the specified unit of measure.


Enable to maintain equal values in the Height and Width boxes.


Displays the original image size.


Displays the current image size.


Lets you choose a unit of measure for the paper size.


Lets you choose a paper color.


Returns the paper size to the default values.


Duplicate


Displays the name and location of the active file.


Lets you specify a name for the duplicate image.


Enable to create a duplicate in which all objects are merged with the background.


Channel Calculations


Lets you choose a first-source image that contains color channels that you want to modify or combine with other images.


Lets you choose a first-source image that contains a color channel that you want to modify or combine with other images.


Enable to invert the colors of the first-source image.


Lets you choose a second-source image that contains color channels that you want to modify or combine with other images.


Lets you choose a color channel from the second-source image that you want to modify or combine with other images.


Enable to invert the colors of the second-source image.


Lets you choose a merge mode that determines how the colors in the specified source image are combined to create the destination image.


Lets you specify the degree to which you want to see through the source image in relation to the destination image.


Lets you choose a method for filling the source image in the destination image.


Enable to use a mask or a color channel as a mask during channel calculations.


Enable to use all color channels of the source image and the destination image.


Lets you choose an image from which you can choose a mask or a color channel to use in the channel calculations.


Lets you choose a mask or color channel to use as a mask in the channel calculations.


Enable to invert the values of the specified channel or mask.


Updates the preview of the modified image.


Lets you choose a destination image.


Lets you choose a color channel for the destination image.


Lets you move the image to preview areas outside the Preview window.


Lets you magnify the image in the Preview window.


Rotate Custom


Lets you specify the rotation angle.


Enable to rotate the image to the right.


Enable to rotate the image to the left.


Enable to rotate the image without changing its size.


Enable to prevent the edges on the rotated image from appearing jagged.


Lets you choose a paper color.


Black-And-White Mode


Lets you choose a conversion option.


Lets you specify conversion options.


Lets you set the level at which conversion takes place.


Lets you set the amount of the conversion.


Lets you choose the shape that creates the halftone dot pattern.


Lets you specify the angle of the halftone pattern.


Lets you specify the line frequency of the halftone pattern.


Lets you choose the unit of measure to calculate the line frequency.


Updates the preview of the modified image.


Combine Channels


Enable to combine the channels using the RGB color mode.


Enable to combine the channels using the CMYK color mode.


Enable to combine the channels using the HSB color mode.


Enable to combine the channels using the HLS color mode.


Enable to combine the channels using the YIQ color mode.


Enable to combine the channels using the Lab color mode.


Enable to apply the first channel of the specified color mode to the image you choose from the Image list.


Enable to apply the second channel of the specified color mode to the image you choose from the Image list.


Enable to apply the third channel of the specified color mode to the image you choose from the Image list.


Enable to apply the fourth channel of the specified color mode to the image you choose from the Image list.


Displays all open grayscale images and lets you associate a file with the specified color channel.


Enable to close the original documents.


Crop To Border Color


Enable to crop a paper-colored border from the image.


Displays the current paper color.


Enable to crop a paint-colored border from the image.


Displays the current paint color.


Enable to crop a border using the color you choose.


Lets you choose a border color.


Lets you select a color (from the Image Window) that you want to crop.


Sets a cropping area based on the color similarity between adjacent pixels.


Sets a cropping area based on the similarity of hue, saturation, and brightness levels between pixels.


Lets you set a tolerance value for the color that you are cropping.


Histogram


Displays the brightness value of every pixel in the image graphically.


Displays all 256 possible brightness values.


Lets you choose a color channel that you want to plot on the histogram.


Enable to ignore a percentage of outlying brightness values in the image when you identify a range of light and dark pixels in the histogram.


Lets you add blank pages to your drawing.


Lets you delete pages from your drawing.


Lets you rename a page.


Lets you go directly to a page in your drawing.


Lets you switch the orientation of the active page without changing that of other pages in your drawing.


Lets you change the size of pages in your drawing.


Lets you set page formatting options.


Insert Page dialog box


Lets you specify the number of pages you want to add to your drawing.


Enable to add the specified number of pages before the page number displayed in the Page box.


Enable to add the specified number of pages after the page number displayed in the Page box.


Lets you specify the page number before or after which you want to add a page.


Sets the page orientation so that the short end is horizontal.


Sets the page orientation so that the long end is horizontal.


Lets you choose a page size from a preset list of custom page sizes.


Lets you specify the width of a custom-sized page.


Lets you specify the height of a custom-sized page.


Lets you choose a unit of measure in which to specify width and height for a custom page size.


Displays the unit of measure in which you specify width and height for a custom page size.


Inserts a page before the active page.


Inserts a page after the active page.


Deletes the active page.


Lets you specify the number of the page you want to delete, or the number of the first page in a range of pages that you want to delete.


Enable to delete a range of pages.


Lets you specify the number of the last page in a range of pages you want to delete.


Lets you specify the number of the last page in a range of pages you want to delete.


Lets you specify a page name.


Lets you specify the number of the page you want to display in the Drawing Window.


Resize Page dialog box


Lets you choose a page size from a preset list of custom page sizes.


Lets you specify the width of a custom-sized page.


Lets you specify the height of a custom-sized page.


Lets you choose a unit of measure in which to specify width and height for a custom page size.


Displays the unit of measure in which you specify width and height for a custom page size.


Lets you choose a preset size for the Drawing Page.


Lets you specify a width for the Drawing Page in the top box and a height in the bottom box.


Sets the Drawing Page so that its short end is horizontal.


Sets the Drawing Page so that its long end is horizontal.


Click the top button to apply the current page size and orientation as the default for the whole document. Click the bottom button to apply the current page size and orientation to an individual page in a multipage document.


Lets you choose a unit of measure for the drawing. The rulers will display the type of units you specify.


Lets you specify the distance an object moves when you nudge it.


Lets you specify the horizontal position (X-box) and vertical position (Y-box) of a duplicate object relative to the original object.


Lets you make the outline of a complex object dotted when you position it in the Drawing Window. The outline is dotted when the button appears pressed.


Lets you select unfilled objects by clicking inside them. You can select unfilled objects in this way when the button appears pressed.


Opens the Workspace page of the Options dialog box, which lets you view set preferences that relate to the function, performance, or display of various tools and features of CorelDRAW.


Page tab


Enable to display the border of the Drawing Page.


Enable to display the printable area of the Drawing Page.


Enable to display the bleed area of the Drawing Page.


Page Size tab


Enable to specify paper settings for the Drawing Page.


Enable to specify label settings for the Drawing Page.


Enable to orient the page so that its shortest dimension is horizontal.


Enable to orient the page so that its longest dimension is horizontal.


Displays a preview of the Drawing Page with the settings you specify.


Lets you specify the width of the Drawing Page.


Lets you specify the height of the Drawing Page.


Lets you choose a unit of measure for all controls in CorelDRAW.


Lets you specify a size for the bleed area.


Lets you choose a paper type from a list of preset options. The type of page you choose is reflected in the preview box to the right.


Lets you choose a resolution for your drawing.


Sets the size and orientation of the Drawing Page to the current printer settings.


Adds a rectangle the size of the Drawing Page to your drawing. The rectangle lies behind all other objects in your drawing.


Opens the Custom Page Type dialog box, which lets you save a custom page. After you have saved at least one custom page, this button also lets you delete a custom page.


Edit Pixel Resolution dialog box (Page Size)


Lets you specify a horizontal resolution for the Drawing Page.


Lets you specify a vertical resolution for the Drawing Page.


Enable to make the horizontal and vertical resolutions equal.


Lets you choose a layout style for your drawing.


Displays the width of the Drawing Page.


Displays the height of the Drawing Page


Displays how many pages of the document will be printed on one sheet of paper.


Displays where the page is intended to be folded or cut.


Enable to have pages in a multipage document face each other.


Lets you choose the side (right or left) you want the drawing to start on in a multipage document with facing pages.


Displays the name of the label style you choose.


Lets you choose a manufacturer and a label style.


Opens the Customize Label dialog box, which lets you adjust a label style or create and save your own.


Customize label dialog box


Lets you choose a label to customize from a list of preset labels. You can add labels to this list by choosing them in the Labels dialog box.


Opens the Save Settings dialog box, which lets you save the changes you make to the label style.


Deletes the label style displayed in the Label Style list box.


Displays a preview of the labels on the Drawing Page.


Lets you specify the number of rows of labels that you want to print on a page.


Lets you specify the number of columns of labels that you want to print on a page.


Lets you specify a width for the labels.


Lets you specify a height for the labels.


Lets you choose a unit of measure for sizing labels.


Enable to round the corners of labels.


Lets you specify the distance from the left edge of the page to the left end of the labels in the first column.


Lets you specify the distance from the right edge of the page to the right edge the labels in the last column.


Lets you specify the distance from the top of the page to the top of the first row of labels on the page.


Lets you specify the distance from the bottom of the page to the bottom of the last row of labels on the page.


Lets you choose a unit of measure for setting page margins.


Enable to make the all of the margins equal in size.


Enable to center the labels horizontally and vertically on the page.


Lets you specify the amount of space you want between each column of labels.


Lets you set the amount of space you want between each row of labels.


Lets you choose a unit of measure for setting gutters.


Enable to automatically equalize the space between labels and, if possible, keep the labels within the defined margins.


Save Settings dialog box (labels)


Lets you specify a name for the label style you want to save.


Enable to have no background for the Drawing Page.


Enable to apply a solid color to the background.


Lets you choose a solid color for the background.


Enable to use a bitmap to create a tiled background.


Opens the Import dialog box, which lets you choose a bitmap for the background.


Enable to link the bitmap you choose for the background to your drawing. Changes you make to the source graphic will be updated in your document.


Enable to add the bitmap you choose for the background to your drawing.


Displays the path of the bitmap you choose for the background.


Enable to maintain the size of the bitmap you choose for the background.


Enable to customize the size of the bitmap you choose for the background.


Lets you specify the width of the bitmap you choose for the background.


Lets you specify the height of the bitmap you choose for the background.


Enable to maintain the ratio of width to height as you size the bitmap you choose for the background.


Enable to make the background printable and exportable.


No objects are selected. To display information on a specific object, right-click the object and select What's This?


A group of objects is selected.

A group is a set of objects that behave as a single unit. Most operations you perform on a group apply equally to each of its components.


More than one object is selected. To display information on one of the selected objects, you must first deselect all other objects.


A polygon is selected.

A polygon is a multisided, enclosed object which is drawn using the Polygon tool. You can also create stars and polygons as stars using the Polygon tool.


An ellipse is selected.

An ellipse is an oval-shaped, closed-plane curve  which is drawn using the Ellipse tool. You can change an ellipse to an arc or a pie shape using the Shape tool. You can also create circles by holding down the CTRL key while drawing with the Ellipse tool.


A rectangle is selected.

A rectangle is a parallelogram with four 90-degree angles and is drawn using the Rectangle tool. You can also create squares by holding down the CTRL key while drawing with the Rectangle tool.


A curve is selected.

Curve objects are drawn with the Freehand tool, Bezier tool, Spiral tool, or Artistic Media tool.


Artistic text is selected.

Artistic text is created using the Text tool.

Artistic Text is particularly useful for short text entries that require only simple formatting, or when you want to apply special effects to text. You can add Artistic Text objects containing up to 32,000 characters.


Paragraph text is selected.

Paragraph text is created using the Text tool.

Paragraph text is designed to let you add large blocks of text to your drawing. You can have many sets of connected frames, with each set containing up to 32,000 frames linking up to 32,000 paragraphs of 32,000 characters each.


An OLE object is selected.

The selected object has been added from an external application or from another CorelDRAW file.


A dimension line is selected.

Dimension lines are drawn using the Dimension tool. A dimension line is a line used in technical illustrations to show the size of objects or the distance between them.


A connector line is selected.

A connector line connects objects together and is drawn using the Connector Line tool.


A callout line is selected.

A callout line is a line that points to and labels objects in a drawing. Callout lines are drawn using the Callout tool. When you draw a callout, a text cursor appears at the end of the line. This cursor lets you enter text that describes the object indicated by the callout.


An Interactive Connector line is selected.

Interactive Connector lines are drawn using the Interactive Connector tool. Interactive Connector lines are used in flowcharts and organizational charts to show the connections in a system, process, or organization. They have only horizontal and vertical line segments.


The selected object(s) contains special effects.


The selected object contains no special effects.


A blend is selected.

A blend is a special effect created by the merging of one object with another through a progression of intermediate shapes and colors. The intermediate shapes are linked dynamically. This means that you can edit either of the blended objects, which will re-form automatically to incorporate your changes.


A vector extrusion is selected.

A vector extrusion creates the illusion of depth. You can apply an extrusion to any object you've created using CorelDRAW.


A contour is selected.

A contour is a special effect created through the addition of evenly spaced concentric shapes inside or outside the borders of an object. These lines use the same shape as the original object, but are smaller or larger depending on where they are created.


An envelope is selected.

When an envelope is added to an object, it is superimposed on the object and appears as a dotted red line with a series of squares at points along its path. These squares represent the envelope's nodes. By dragging these nodes in any direction, you reshape the envelope.


A perspective is selected.

A perspective lets you add another dimension to your drawings by creating the illusion of distance and depth. Although objects in a drawing appear on a two-dimensional page, you can use the Add Perspective command to simulate one and two-point perspectives. With a one-point perspective, an object looks as if it's receding from view in one direction. With a two-point perspective the object looks as if it's receding from view in two directions. You can apply a perspective to any object (or group of objects) except Paragraph text or imported objects.


A clone is selected.

A clone is a duplicate of an object or area of an image. Most changes made to the original object are automatically applied to its clone.


A lens is selected.

A lens lets you simulate the effects created by certain types of camera lenses. The Lens effects can be applied to any shape that has been created using the CorelDRAW drawing tools.


A PowerClip object is selected.

PowerClip objects let you put one object inside another object. One object becomes the PowerClip object's contents, while the other becomes its container.


Any object with a closed path can be filled in with a solid color or one of several special fill types. If you leave an object without a fill or remove an object's existing fill, any object behind it shows through as if it was transparent.


The selected object contains no fill. Objects behind it will show through as if it were transparent.


A uniform fill is selected.

Uniform fills are fills that may be applied to any closed-path objects. When you apply a uniform fill, you give an object a solid color. In addition, you can choose colors from color models, color palettes, and color mixers. You can quickly fill an object with a color from the on-screen Color Palette.


A fountain fill is selected.

A fountain fill is a progression of colors that follow a linear, radial, conical, or square path.

There are two types of fountain fills: two-color and custom. Two-color fountain fills blend directly from one color to another. Custom fills let you create a cascade of different colors.


A texture fill is selected.

A texture fill is a fractally generated picture that you can use to give your objects a natural appearance. There are more than three hundred pregenerated textures. Each texture has a set of parameters that you can change to create millions of variations.


A PostScript texture fill is selected.

PostScript textures are a special type of pattern fill that are designed with the PostScript language.


A two-color bitmap pattern fill is selected.

A two-color bitmap is a very simple picture composed of "on" and "off" pixels. There are no colors in the bitmap except for the two you define.


A bitmap pattern fill is selected.

You can import external bitmaps to use as bitmap patterns. A bitmap pattern fill uses a simple bitmap pattern to fill an object. Choose from a preset bitmap fill or use your own bitmap pattern.


A bitmap is selected.

Bitmaps are graphics composed of pixels that combine to form an image. Since a bitmap is created as a collection of arranged pixels, its parts cannot not be manipulated individually.


A full-color pattern fill is selected.

A full-color pattern fill is a picture composed of lines and fills. These pictures are smoother and more complex than bitmap images and are generally easier to manipulate.

You can import any CorelDRAW file to use as a full-color pattern.


Every object you create has outlines that you can manipulate in a variety of ways. You can think of each object as being drawn with a pen that changes size, shape, and color. In addition, you can apply these effects to a particular object or to all objects you add to your diagram.


The selected object contains no outline.


A distortion lets you alter the appearance of objects.

You can use the Interactive Distortion tool to create a wide variety of interesting effects. You can alter the appearance of an object by applying a single distortion effect, or you can apply multiple distortions to create a more interesting appearance. There are four types of distortion from which you can choose: Push, Pull, Zipper, and Twister. You can apply each type of distortion effect to any object you create, including shapes, lines, curves, and Artistic text.


Adding drop shadows to objects enhances the realism of your work by creating the illusion of depth in your two-dimensional drawings.


A locked object is selected.

Locking an object allows you to anchor it to a specific location. This lets you preserve the object's properties to ensure that no changes are made to it.


A guideline is selected.

You can select, rotate, nudge, duplicate, and delete guidelines as you would objects. Unselected standard guidelines are blue, and selected guidelines are red. Unselected preset guidelines are green. You can change these default colors if you choose.


A Mesh object is selected.

You can apply a mesh to simple objects, curves, and bitmaps using the Interactive Mesh tool. Define the mesh object by specifying the grid and its points of intersection. Manipulating grid nodes using the Shape tool enables you to create unique effects.


A Java applet is selected.

Embedded Java applets are placed on a separate layer that resides above all other graphics layers in CorelDRAW. This layer is called the Internet layer.


An embedded object is selected.

Embedded objects are placed on a separate layer that resides above all other graphics layers in CorelDRAW. This layer is called the Internet layer.


An Internet object is selected.

An Internet object is an object related to a script that performs when the end-user activates the object. You can customize Internet objects by placing text on them and by specifying the default values and constraints you want to apply to the object. You can place Internet objects anywhere in your drawing, but they cannot overlap one another.


PDF - GENERAL TAB


Lets you browse for a file name and location.


Enable to publish or export all pages in a file.


Lets you choose an export range for publishing a .PDF file.


Enable to publish or export the currently displayed page.


Enable to specify the pages, or the range of pages, to publish.

A dash (-) between numbers defines a range of sequential pages (e.g., 1-5 prints pages 1 to 5).

A comma (,) between numbers defines a series of nonsequential pages (e.g., 1,5 prints pages 1 and 5 only).

Any combination of dashes and commas is supported (e.g., 1-3, 5, 7, 10-12 prints pages 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 11, and 12).


Lets you specify the pages, or the range of pages, to publish.


Enable to publish the selected object.


Displays the name and location of a .PDF file.


Lets you generate a job ticket. A job ticket lets you view, share, or print a .PDF file on any platform.


Enable to include a job ticket for the .PDF file.


Lets you choose the drive where you want to save a .JTF file. This option is available only when you choose the External option from the Generate Job Ticket section.


Enable to create a .PDF file that contains a Portable Job Ticket object.


Enable to create two separate files: a .PDF file and a .JTF file.


Displays the filename and location of a .JTF file.


Lets you set up information about the customer and on the delivery, and finishing of a job.


Lets you delete a .PDF style.


Displays a .PDF style from the list box. You can choose a preset .PDF style or create your own. The preset PDF styles contain guidelines for general publishing, prepress publishing, and publishing to the Web.


Lets you add or save a .PDF style.


PDF - GENERAL TAB/job ticket settings


Lets you add, delete, or edit an account number.


Displays the customer's account number.


Displays the address of the primary contact.


Enable to identify that the information given is the billing address.


Enable to identify yourself as the creator or submitter of the job.


Displays the address of the primary contact.


Displays the name of the primary contact's city.


Displays the name of the primary contact's company.


Displays the name of the primary contact's country.


Displays the email address of the primary contact.


Displays the FAX number of the primary contact.


Displays the name of the primary contact.


Displays the phone number of the primary contact.


Displays the postal code of the primary contact.


Displays the primary contact's state or province.


Displays the name of the job.


Lets you type the primary contact's mobile/pager number.


Displays the mobile/pager number of the primary contact.


Enable to identify yourself as the primary contact for the job.


Enable to identify that the information given is the shipping address.


Displays any comments or notes necessary to the finishing of a job.


Lets you add to your job specifications, the binding or finishing method selected in the Available Finishing Operations list box.


Displays a list of available binding and finishing methods.


Lets you move the selected binding or finishing method down in the Selected Finishing Operations list box.


Lets you move the selected binding or finishing method up in the Selected Finishing Operations list box.


Let you remove the selected binding or finishing method from the Selected Finishing Operations list box.


Displays a list of selected binding and finishing methods.


Displays the number of copies to be delivered.


Lets you change the number of copies to be delivered.


Displays instructions for delivering a job.


Displays the method of delivery. You can choose a method of delivery from the list box.


PDF - objects tab


Enable to downsample color bitmaps. This is useful when you want to reduce file size.


Lets you type a number by which you can downsample a color bitmap.


Lets you compress bitmaps using JPEG or LZW compression. This is useful when you want to reduce file size.


Enable to compress text. This is useful when you want to reduce file size.


Enable to convert True Type to Type 1 fonts. Converting True Type to Type 1 fonts can increase file size if there are many fonts in a file.


Lets you downsample color, grayscale, and monochrome images. This is useful when you want to reduce file size.


Enable to let CorelDRAW embed the 14 basic fonts to your computer system. This eliminates font variances on different systems.


Enable to embed fonts. This makes a .PDF file more portable since the fonts do not have to reside on other systems.


Enable to downsample grayscale bitmaps. This is useful when you want to reduce file size.


Lets you type a number by which you can downsample a grayscale bitmap.


Lets you type a number by which you can downsample a monochrome bitmap.


Enable to downsample monochrome bitmaps. This is useful when you want to reduce file size.


Enable to export files in ASCII file format. ASCII is a fully portable file format.


Enable to export files in binary file format. Binary is less portable as some computers do not support the file format.


Displays the degree of JPEG compression quality used when publishing bitmaps.


Lets you change JPEG compression quality. The higher the image quality, the larger the file size.


Lets you change JPEG compression quality. The higher the image quality, the larger the file size.


Lets you change JPEG compression quality. The higher the image quality, the larger the file size.


Lets you change JPEG compression quality. The higher the image quality, the larger the file size.


Displays a percentage of the fonts used.


Displays a percentage of the fonts used.


Enable to subset Type 1 fonts. Subsetting fonts can reduce file size.


Lets you type a percentage of fonts used in a document.


Enable to export text as curves. If you are using unusual text characters, exporting text as curves can eliminate problems with font variances on different computer systems.


PDF - Advanced tab


Enable to preserve spot colors. This maintains color consistency.


Displays the chosen Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file. EPS files contain two portions: the PostScript portion and the preview portion. Use the PostScript portion for high-resolution images and a large file size; use the preview portion for low-resolution images and a small file size.


Enable to render complex fills as bitmaps. This reduces the complexity of a file.


Displays the number of steps used in a fountain fill. A low number of steps prints faster, but the transition between shades may appear coarse.


Displays the generic printer profile.


Displays the offset separations printer profile.


Lets you output values as CMYK, RGB, or grayscale. This ensures accurate color reproduction.


Enable to substitute low-resolution images for high-resolution images.


Lets you output an .EPS file as a PostScript or preview file.


Enable to preserve document overprints. This is useful if you are not trapping an object in another application.


Enable to preserve the halftone screen information. This is useful if you do not need to change the halftone screen information.


Enable to use a composite printer profile. Use the composite printer profile if you are printing to a full-color desktop printer.


Enable to use a separations printer profile. Use the separations printer profile if you are printing to an imagesetter.


Opens the Color Profiles dialog box that lets you set color profiles.


Enable to use a color printer profile.


Lets you use color management options to ensure accurate color reproduction.


PDF - Documents tab


Lets you set bookmarks options to view in Acrobat Reader or Acrobat Exchange.


Enable to include hyperlinks in a .PDF file. Including hyperlinks lets you view, in Acrobat Reader or Acrobat Exchange, jumps to other Web pages or the Internet.


Enable to generate bookmarks in a .PDF file. Bookmarks are links represented by text.


Enable to display the project page in Acrobat Reader and Acrobat Exchange.


Enable to display a full screen in Acrobat Reader and Acrobat Exchange.


Enable to display bookmarks in Acrobat Reader and Acrobat Exchange.


Enable to display thumbnails in Acrobat Reader and Acrobat Exchange.


Enable to generate thumbnails in a .PDF file. Thumbnails are low-resolution miniatures of a page.


Lets you specify text formatting properties.


Lets you add, edit, and format text.


Shapes Artistic text along the outline of the selected nontext object.


Opens the Fit Text To Path Docker window which lets you shape Artistic text along the outline of the selected nontext object.


Increases or decreases the point size of text in a Paragraph text frame so that it fits the frame exactly.


Returns characters that you've shifted vertically to the baseline.


Returns characters that you've shifted, angled, or fit to a curved path to the baseline.


Lets you check your drawing for misspelled words, duplicate words, and irregular capitalization.


Lets you check your drawing for spelling, grammar, punctuation, and writing style errors.


Lets you replace a word in the drawing with a synonym or antonym.


Opens the Type Assist page of the Options dialog box, which lets you automatically replace text and punctuation marks, change letter case, and correct common spelling and typographic errors.


Lets you change the case attributes of the selected text, such as making all of the selected text lowercase.


Lets you convert standard Paragraph text in your drawing to true HTML-compatible text, so that you can edit the text directly in a Web browser.


Converts Artistic text to Paragraph text, and vice versa.


Summarizes the text elements, such as the number of words and the text styles used, that are present in a drawing.


Lets you display or hide nonprinting characters, such as paragraph markers. Nonprinting characters are displayed when the button appears pressed.


Links to the Fonts Information Web site, where you can access fonts and information about fonts.


Saves text objects in a drawing as ASCII text, which you can edit in a text editor. After editing the text, you can insert it into your drawing using the Merge Back command.


Lets you insert text from an ASCII file, created using the Extract command, into a drawing.


Provides online Help about editing text.


Lets you type and edit text.


Opens the Format Text dialog box, which lets you specify formatting properties for the selected text.


Opens the Import dialog box, which lets you choose a file and import it into CorelDRAW.


Lets you select and format text, access writing utilities, modify the display of text on screen, and customize the dialog box.


Lets you apply bold formatting to or remove it from the selected text. Bold formatting is applied when the button appears pressed.


Lets you apply italic formatting to or remove it from the selected text. Italic formatting is applied when the button appears pressed.


Lets you add an underline or remove it from text. Text is underlined when the button appears pressed.


Applies no justification to the selected text object. However, the text object aligns to the left margin by default.


Aligns the text object to the left margin.


Centers the text object between the left and right margins.


Aligns the text object to the right margin.


Aligns the text object to both the left and right margins.


Aligns the text object to both the left and right margins, and stretches the last line of the text to the right margin.


Lets you add bullets to or remove them from Paragraph text. Bullets are applied when the button appears pressed.


Lets you add a drop cap to remove it from Paragraph text. A drop cap is applied when the button appears pressed.


Lets you display or hide nonprinting characters. Nonprinting characters are displayed when the button appears pressed.


Lets you choose a font for the selected text.


Lets you choose a font size for the selected text.


Lets you apply or remove a Paragraph text wrap style. You can choose from a variety of wrapping styles. A Paragraph text wrap style is applied when the button appears pressed.


Removes Paragraph text wrapping.


Wraps text around the left side of the selected object so that the text follows the shape of the object.


Wraps text around the right side of the selected object so that the text follows the shape of the object.


Wraps text around all sides of the selected object so that the text follows the shape of the object.


Wraps text above and below the selected object so that the text follows the shape of the object.


Wraps text around the left side of the selected object so that the text follows the object's bounding box.


Wraps text around the right side of the selected object so that the text follows the object's bounding box.


Wraps text around all sides of the selected object so that the text follows the object's bounding box.


Wraps text above and below the selected object so that the text follows the object's bounding box.


Lets you specify the distance between the text and the object.


Click the top button to change the default formatting properties for Artistic text when no text object is selected. Click the bottom button to change the default formatting properties for Paragraph text when no text object is selected.


Decreases the indent in Paragraph text.


Increases the indent of Paragraph text.


Lets you add bullets to or remove them from Paragraph text. Bullets are applied when the button appears pressed.


Lets you add a drop cap to or remove it from Paragraph text. A drop cap is applied when the button appears pressed.


Sets paragraph line spacing to single spacing.


Lets you change the alignment of text.


Enable to change the formatting properties for the default Artistic Text style.


Enable to change the formatting properties for the default Paragraph Text style.


Enable to change the formatting properties for the default Graphic style.


Lets you choose a font for the selected text.


Lets you preview the text before you apply the formatting properties.


Lets you specify a font size for the selected text.


Lets you choose a style for the selected text.


Lets you choose an underline style.


Opens the Edit Underline dialog box, which lets you change underline properties.


Opens the Edit Strikethru dialog box which, lets you change strikethrough (line) properties.


Opens the Edit Overscore dialog box which, lets you change overscore (line) properties.


Provides access to online Help.


Lets you specify the width of the single thin underline.


Lets you specify the width of the single thick underline.


Lets you specify the line thickness.


Lets you specify the distance by which the line is shifted from the text.


Lets you choose the unit of measure in which you want to specify the line thickness.


Lets you specify the width of the top underline.


Lets you specify the width of the bottom underline.


Lets you specify the width of the single underline.


Lets you specify the distance between the underline and the text.


Lets you choose the unit of measure in which you want to specify the line thickness.


Lets you choose the unit of measure in which you want to specify the line thickness.


Displays the unit of measure in which the line thickness is specified.


Lets you choose an overscore line style.


Lets you choose a strikethrough line style.


Lets you choose a position for text, relative to the baseline.


Lets you choose capitalization settings.


Lets you specify the spacing between character pairs.


Lets you specify the amount of space you want between characters. The value is expressed as a percentage of the width of the space character.


Lets you specify the amount of space you want between words. The value is expressed as a percentage of the width of the space character.


Lets you specify the amount of space you want between lines.


Lets you choose the unit of measure in which you want to specify the spacing between lines.


Lets you specify the amount of space before the first line of a paragraph.


Lets you specify the amount of space after the last line of a paragraph.


Enable to have text hyphenate automatically.


Opens the Hyphenation Settings dialog box, which lets you to specify hyphenation settings.


Enable to hyphenate capitalized words.


Lets you specify the distance between the last word and the right margin before hyphenation occurs.


Lets you specify the minimum number of characters a word must have for it to be included in automatic hyphenation.


Lets you specify the minimum number of characters (including spaces) that must appear in the hot zone before a hyphen.


Lets you specify the minimum number of characters (including spaces) that must appear in the hot zone after a hyphen.


Enable to apply no justification to the text object, however, the text aligns to the left margin.


Enable to align the text object to the left margin.


Enable to align the text object between the left and right margins.


Enable to align the text object to the right margin.


Enable to align the text object to both the left and right margins.


Enable to align the text object between both the left and right margins, and to stretch the last line of the text to the right margin.


Lets you specify the maximum distance you can set between words.


Lets you specify the minimum distance you can set between words.


Lets you specify the maximum distance you can set between characters.


Lets you specify the distance by which you want to indent the first line in the selected paragraphs.


Lets you specify the distance by which you want to indent all lines except the first in the selected paragraphs.


Lets you specify the distance by which you want to indent text from the right margin in the selected paragraphs.


Lets you specify the distance by which you want to move the selected characters horizontally along the baseline.


Lets you specify the distance by which you want to move the selected characters vertically, relative to the baseline.


Lets you specify the number of degrees by which you want to rotate the selected characters.


Adds a tab.


Deletes the selected tab.


Deletes all tabs.


Sets tabs at the interval you specify.


Lets you specify the interval at which tabs are set.


Lets you specify the tab setting, the tab type, and whether the tab is leadered.


Lets you specify a character for a leadered tab.


Lets you specify the character you want to use as the leadered tab.


Lets you specify the number of the character you want to use as the leadered tab.


Lets you change the spacing between characters in a trailing leadered tab.


Lets you change the spacing between characters in a trailing leadered tab.


Displays a preview of the trailing leader tab.


Lets you specify the number of columns in a Paragraph text frame.


Displays the column number.


Lets you specify the width of the corresponding column.


Lets you specify the distance between the corresponding column and the next column.


Enable to create columns and gutters of equal width.


Displays a preview of the columns.


Displays the width of the frame.


Displays the unit of measure in which the width of the frame is specified.


Enable to keep the frame width fixed.


Enable to have the width of the frame adjust automatically when you change the column width.


Lets you choose a vertical alignment option.


Lets you choose the effect you want to apply to the selected paragraphs in a Paragraph text frame.


Lets you specify the number of the symbol you want to use as a bullet.


Lets you choose a font for the bullet.


Lets you specify the size of the bullet.


Lets you specify the distance by which the bullet is offset from the baseline.


Lets you specify the distance between the Paragraph text frame and the Paragraph text.


Wraps text around the bullet or drop cap.


Indents the text from the bullet or drop cap.


Lets you choose the symbol you want to use as a bullet.


Lets you specify the number of lines of text that will appear beside the drop cap.


Lets you specify the distance between the drop cap and the text.


Enable to capitalize the first letter of the first word in a sentence.


Enable to change uppercase characters in the selected text to lowercase.


Enable to change lowercase characters in the selected text to lowercase.


Enable to capitalize the first letter of each word of the selected text.


Enable to reverse the text case in the selected text.


Opens the online Help.


Lets you choose the vertical position of the text on the path.


Lets you choose how the text is oriented on the path.


Lets you choose the horizontal position if the text is fit to an open path or lets you choose the quadrant of the object if the text is fit to a closed path.


Enable to place text on the other side of the path.


Opens the Fix Text To Path Offsets dialog box, which lets you change the vertical and horizontal position of the text in relation to the path.


Applies the selected text to the path using the settings in the Docker window.


Lets you specify the distance by which you want to move the text along the path horizontally.


Lets you specify the vertical distance between the text and the path.


Opens the online Help.


Lets you choose how the text is oriented on the path.


Lets you choose the vertical position of the text on the path.


Lets you specify the vertical distance between the text and the path.


Lets you specify the distance by which you want to move the text along the path horizontally.


Lets you place text on the other side of the path or return text to its original position on the path. Text is placed on the other side of the path when the button appears pressed.


Displays the type of text included in the active drawing.


Enable to show the number and names of text styles used in the active drawing.


Displays the number of text objects, lines, words, characters, fonts, and styles in the active drawing.


Opens the online Help guide and provides more information about checking text statistics.


Lets you position text above the baseline or return the text to the baseline. Superscript is applied when the button appears pressed.


Lets you position text below the baseline or return the text to the baseline. Subscript is applied when the button appears pressed.


Lets you capitalize text or return the text to its original case. Capitalization is applied when the button appears pressed.


Lets you make the selected text small capitals or returns the text to its original case. Small capitals are applied when the button appears pressed.


Aligns the paragraph with the top of the Paragraph text frame.


Centers the paragraph vertically in the Paragraph text frame.


Aligns the paragraph with the bottom of the Paragraph text frame.


Aligns the paragraph equally between the top and bottom of the Paragraph text frame.


Sets paragraph line spacing one and one half.


Sets paragraph line spacing to double.


Moves the cursor up one paragraph.


Moves the cursor down one paragraph.


Moves the cursor up one Paragraph text frame.


Moves the cursor down one Paragraph text frame.


Moves the cursor to the beginning of a Paragraph text frame or column.


Moves the cursor to the end of a Paragraph text frame or column.


Moves the cursor to the beginning of the text in a Paragraph text frame.


Moves the cursor to the end of the text in a Paragraph text frame.


Opens the Symbols And Special Characters Docker window, which provides access to symbols and graphic objects.


Selects the paragraph above the cursor.


Selects the paragraph below the cursor.


Selects all the paragraphs above the cursor.


Selects all the paragraphs below the cursor.


Selects text from the cursor to the beginning of the line.


Selects text from the cursor to the end of the line.


Selects text from the cursor to the beginning of a paragraph or column.


Selects text from the cursor to the end of a paragraph or column.


Selects text from the cursor to the beginning of the text.


Increases the spacing between the selected characters.


Decreases the spacing between the selected characters.


Deletes the word to the left of the cursor.


Deletes the word to the right of the cursor.


Adjusts the horizontal space between text characters. Type a value as a percentage of point size.


Adjusts the vertical space between text characters. Type a value as a percentage of point size.


Sets the angle of rotation for text characters. Positive values rotate text characters counterclockwise; negative values rotate clockwise.


Increases the font size by one point.


Decreases the font size by one point.


Increases the font size to the next size displayed in the Font Size List list box.


Decreases the font size to the previous size displayed in the Font Size List list box.


Lets you specify the amount of line space before and after a paragraph.


Lets you specify the amount of space between characters as a percentage of the width of the space character.


Lets you specify the amount of space between words as a percentage of the width of the space character.


Lets you change the vertical alignment of text.


Lets you choose a symbol library.


Lets you choose a symbol.


Lets you specify the index number of the symbol you want to use.


Lets you specify a size for the symbol you choose.


Opens a menu which lets you choose display options for symbols and special characters.


Lets you specify the width of a tiled object or the number of objects that appear in the row. This box works in combination with the list box.


Lets you specify the height of a tiled object or the number of object that appear in the column. This box works in combination with the list box.


Enable to make the horizontal and vertical values of the tiled object the same.


 Lets you choose tile settings that affect the Horizontal and Vertical boxes. Tile Size affects the horizontal and vertical size of the objects. Number Of Tiles lets you specify the number of tiles you want in the columns and rows.


Lets you choose the font style of the selected text.


Lets you choose the range of frames to which you want to apply the formatting changes. For example you can apply the changes to the frames you select only.


Lets you lock or unlock the properties of the page. Page properties are locked when the button appears pressed.


Applies the changes you make on the Text page to the selected text.


Ignores the word that the Spell Checker identifies as a misspelled word.


Disables the Ignore All command so that the Spell Checker will identify misspelled words.


Suggests spelling alternatives for the misspelled word.


Capitalizes the first letter of the first word in the selected text.


Changes uppercase text to lowercase.


Changes lowercase text to uppercase.


Capitalizes the first letter of each word in the selected text.


Changes uppercase text to lowercase and lowercase text to uppercase.


Displays the name of the missing font.


Displays the name of font that will be used as a substitute for the missing font.


Reflects the status of the substitution.


Displays the results of the font matching.


Enable to install the missing font.


Enable to use the PANOSE substitute to replace the font.


Lets you choose a font for substitution.


Enable to use the substitute font to replace the missing font for this session.


Enable to use the substitute font to replace the missing font permanently.


Enable to align HTML text to the left margin


Enable to align HTML text between the left and right margins.


Enable to align HTML text to the right margin.


Lets you choose a font for the selected HTML text.


Lets you specify the font size of the selected HTML text.


Applies bold formatting to the selected HTML text.


Applies italic formatting to the selected HTML text.


Applies an underline to the selected HTML text.


Applies the strikeout line style to the selected HTML text.


Places the selected HTML text above the baseline.


Places the selected HTML text below the baseline.


Displays the effect of changes you make to the selected HTML text.


Lets you set various preferences for the active drawing or change the default settings of a feature.


Lets you specify settings for a basic work environment that is the same every time you create a new drawing.


Opens the Color Management page of the Options dialog box, which lets you set color management options.


Opens the Object Data Manager Docker window, which lets you manage the data involved in coordinating large projects.


Lets you choose and save different zoom levels of your drawing.


 Lets you manage the Internet bookmarks in your document.


Opens the Symbols Docker window, which lets you choose symbols to add to your drawings.


Creates a line-ending shape from the selected object.


Creates two-color and full-color pattern fills from an area of your drawing.


Adds the selected object to the specified Symbol Category.


Opens the Script and Preset Manager Docker window, which lets you record, edit, and play scripts and presets.


Opens a menu that contains commands for adjusting the Script and Preset Manager.


Plays the selected script.


Stops recording a script.


Begins recording a script.


Opens the Run Script dialog box, which lets you select and execute a script file.


Launches Corel SCRIPT Editor, which lets you create and edit script files.


Opens the Object Manager Docker window, which lets you use layers to organize and manipulate objects in your drawing.


Opens the Scrapbook, which lets you choose an item from a folder and drag it directly into the active drawing.


Opens the Scrapbook, which lets you choose a clipart file from the CorelDRAW Clipart CD-ROM and drag it to the active drawing.


Opens the Scrapbook, which lets you choose a photo file from the CorelDRAW Photos CD-ROM and drag it to the active drawing.


Opens the Scrapbook, which lets you choose a preset fill or outline and drag it onto an object in the active drawing.


Opens the Scrapbook, which lets you choose a three-dimensional model file from the CorelDRAW Photos CD-ROM and drag it to the active drawing.


Opens the Scrapbook, which lets you connect, either anonymously or by supplying a user name and password, to any File Transfer Protocol (FTP) site.


Opens the Visual Basic for Applications Macros dialog box, which lets you run a VBA macro.


Launches the Visual Basic Editor, which lets you create macros.


Opens the Security dialog box, which lets you set the security level when you load Visual Basic macros.


Links to the Corel Web site, where you can access CorelSCRIPT scripts and script information.


Links to the Corel Web site, where you can access color profiles and color profile information.


Object Manager


Adds a layer to your drawing.


Displays the list of Internet objects on the Internet Layer of your drawing.


The Master Page is composed of the four basic master layers of an active drawing: Guides, Desktop, Layer 1, and Grid. Master layers are layers whose contents appear on each page of a multipage document.

You cannot delete any of the four master layers, but you can rename Layer 1 and add more layers if you choose.


The layer in your document where you place objects. Clicking a layer makes it the active layer. Any new objects you add to a drawing are assigned to the active layer.

If the active layer is also a master layer, any objects you add to it will appear on each page of a multipage document.


Displays or hides detailed information about objects on different layers of your drawing, such as fill, outline, and shape. This button is active when it appears pressed.


Displays the current layer name.


Opens a menu that contains commands for editing layer properties and contents.


Displays the name of the active layer.


Allows editing across all the layers in your drawing.


Switches to Layer Manager view, displaying lists of layers but no objects or sublevels.


Layer Properties dialog box


Displays the name of the selected layer.


Enable to display the selected layer.


Enable to print the selected layer.


Enable to edit the selected layer.


Enable to specify that the selected layer is a master layer.


Lets you specify the layer color and Override Full Color option.


Lets you choose the color to be displayed when Color Override full color view is enabled.


Enable to display the selected layer's objects as outlines of the color displayed in the Layer Color picker.


Enable to apply the changes you make to the selected layer's settings to the active page in your drawing.


Opens the Guidelines Setup dialog box, which lets you create, edit, and delete guidelines.


Displays the names and page numbers of all the bookmarks assigned in the active drawing.


Creates a hyperlink from a selected object to a bookmarked object.


Lets you scroll to and select the bookmarked object you choose from the Bookmark list.


Deletes the bookmark you choose from the Bookmark list. Only the bookmark is deleted from your document, not the object to which it is assigned.


Rescans the active page of the drawing to check for HTML object conflicts.


Rescans the entire drawing to check for HTML object conflicts.


Lets you scroll up through the HTML object conflict list to select an earlier warning or error message that you want to fix.


Lets you scroll down through the HTML object conflict list to select a later warning or error message that you want to fix.


Lets you scroll to and select the conflicting object.


Automatically repairs HTML object conflicts that don't need manual repair.


Opens the HTML Conflicts page of the Options dialog box, which lets you set the type of conflicts you want displayed.


Displays the HTML object conflicts of the active drawing. The list includes the page on which the conflict occurs and a description of the error or warning.


Displays the directory tree, which you can use to access a drive or folder.


Moves up through the directory tree one level at a time.


Opens a menu that contains commands for working with the contents of the Scrapbook.


Displays the current thumbnail size, and lets you determine the thumbnail size interactively by dragging one of the corner handles. As you drag, the values in the Width and Height boxes update automatically.


Lets you choose a preset thumbnail size.


Lets you specify a thumbnail width. When you specify the width, the value in the Height box updates automatically to maintain the thumbnail's aspect ratio.


Lets you specify a thumbnail height. When you specify the height, the value in the Width box updates automatically to maintain the thumbnail's aspect ratio.


Lets you specify or choose the address of the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) site to which you want to connect.


Enable to connect anonymously to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP). Disable to login with a user name and password.


Lets you specify a user name to access a restricted File Transfer Protocol (FTP) site.


Lets you specify a password to access a restricted File Transfer Protocol (FTP) site.


Enable to perform an anonymous login. Disable to connect to a restricted File Transfer Protocol (FTP) site by supplying a valid user name and password.


Lets you choose the application in which you want to open the selected file.


Opens the contents of the selected folder in the Scrapbook.


Lets you connect to the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) site either anonymously or by supplying a valid user name and password.


Opens the selected folder.


Lets you apply your favorite fill or outline to selected objects.


Lets you send the selected file to a specific application or printer. You must predefine the application or printer to list it in the submenu.


Removes the selected file from the Scrapbook.


Copies the selected file in the Scrapbook.


Creates a shortcut to the selected file in the Scrapbook.


Deletes the selected file in the Scrapbook.


Lets you rename the selected file in the Scrapbook.


Lets you view file information, such as file type, creation date, and modification date, for the selected file in the Scrapbook.


Lets you create a thumbnail image of the fill or outline that you've dragged to the Scrapbook.


Lets you add a folder to the Scrapbook page on which you're working.


Lets you split the Scrapbook's window into two sections to increase your viewing and file management capabilities.


Lets you search drives and folders for specific files. You can use the Find command on any page in the Scrapbook, except the FTP Sites page.


Lets you display the contents of the Scrapbook as thumbnails.


Lets you display the contents of the Scrapbook as icons.


Lets you display the contents of the Scrapbook in a list format.


Lets you display the contents of the Scrapbook in a list, along with additional information such as file size, file type, and modification date.


Opens the Thumbnail Size dialog box, in which you can choose a preset thumbnail size or define a custom thumbnail size.


Lets you display the contents of the Scrapbook in alphabetical order, according to filename.


Lets you display the contents of the Scrapbook in alphabetical order, according to file type extension.


Lets you display the contents of the Scrapbook according to file size.


Lets you display the contents of the Scrapbook according to file modification date.


Lets you connect to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) site by typing the site's address or by choosing an existing address from the list box.


Lets you create a shortcut to a favorite File Transfer Protocol (FTP) site.


Object Data Docker window


Displays the column headings, which identify the data listed below them.


Lets you enter or edit data in a field. You must first select the field from the Field list, then type or edit the data and press ENTER. The length of your entry is limited to the width of your screen.


Displays the field and associated values attached to the selected object. Name, Cost and Comments are built-in fields that are available for all objects.


Opens the Object Data menu, which provides commands for manipulating the data associated with the selected object.


Opens the Object Data Manager spreadsheet, which lets you create a database using the information about the objects in your drawing.


Displays the name of the field selected in the list box below, and lets you rename the field by typing a new name.


Displays the field names for the selected object.


Creates a field and adds it to the list.


Adds selected fields to the selected object.


Removes selected fields from the selected object. If the field is assigned to more than one object in the current drawing, you can delete it from all objects.


Enable to add the selected fields to all objects (including those you add later) in the active drawing.


Enable to add the selected fields to the list of default fields for new drawings.


Enable to add the values for a selected field. Totals for each selected group of objects appear in the Object Data Manger spreadsheet.


Opens the Format Definition dialog box which, lets you change the format of the data that appears in the selected fields.


Enable to assign a general format to the selected fields.


Enable to assign a date/time format to the selected fields. You can choose preset format from the list box to the right or type your own in the Create box.


Enable to assign a linear/angular format to the selected fields. You can choose a preset format from the list box to the right or type your own in the Create box.


Enable to assign a numeric format to the selected fields. You can choose a preset formula from the list box to the right or type your own in the Create box.


Lets you specify a format.


Lets you choose a format for the selected format type.


Displays a sample of the format based on the selection.


Removes the selected format.


Enable to print the grid lines displayed in the Object Data Docker window.


Enable to print the column headers displayed in the Object Data Docker window.


Enable to print the row headers displayed in the Object Data Docker window.


Lets you specify the left-margin size in the Width box, and lets you choose the unit of measure you want to use from the Units box.


Lets you specify the top margin size in the Top box, and lets you choose the unit of measure you want to use from the Units box.


Displays a menu that contains commands for using the View Manager.


Zooms in on your drawing by a factor of two.


Zooms out of your drawing by a factor of two or to the previous level of magnification.


Fits all selected objects inside the Drawing Window.


Fits all objects in the Drawing Window.


Saves the current view and adds it to the list.


Zooms to an area you marquee select using the Zoom tool.


Deletes the view selected in the list.


Lets you choose one of the views you have saved.


Embeds the selected bitmap into the CorelDRAW document.


Updates the status of all out-of-date bitmaps.


Launches the system default browser of the selected hyperlink or launches the associated bitmap editor of the selected bitmap.


Reruns the Link Manager's starter thread to check the validity of all links.


Displays the current status of each link in your document.


Lets you specify a symbol category.


Options dialog box


Lets you choose one of the last four pages that you visited.


Displays the contents of the Options dialog box and lets you navigate to the page you want. To expand the tree, click the plus sign (+) beside a category or section heading. To open a page, click the page title.


Workspace


Displays the available workspaces and lets you choose another workspace. A bullet indicates the current workspace.


Opens the New Workspace dialog box, which lets you create a new workspace.


Deletes the selected workspace.


Sets the selected workspace as the current workspace.


Displays the name of the current workspace.


Displays a description of the selected workspace.


New Workspace dialog box


Lets you specify a name for the new workspace.


Lets you choose a workspace from the list to use as a basis for the new workspace.


Lets you specify a description for the new workspace.


Enable to set the new workspace as the default.


Edit


Lets you specify the amount of horizontal space a duplicate or cloned object is offset from the original object.


 Lets you specify the amount of vertical space a duplicate or cloned object is offset from the original object.


Enable to save the duplicate placement and nudge value settings with the active document.


Lets you specify the distance a selected object moves when you press the Arrow keys to nudge an object.


Lets you specify the distance a selected object moves when you hold down SHIFT and press the Arrow keys to super nudge an object.


Lets you choose a unit of measure for nudging and super nudging an object.


Lets you specify the constrain angle for rotations, skews, and reflections.


Lets you specify the number of decimal places you want to display in measurements and coordinates. This setting only affects how the numbers are displayed in the Status Bar.


Lets you specify the miter limit which controls when the application switches from a mitered (pointed) joint to a beveled (squared-off) joint.


Lets you specify the facet size for rendering and printing extruded objects. Facet size represents the distance between shades of color in extruded objects.


Enable to save the facet size you specify for rendering and printing extruded objects.


Enable to automatically center the contents of a PowerClip object inside its container.


Display


Lets you specify the number of bands used to represent fountain fills on the screen.


Enable to display color using its own dithering scheme. To use this setting, you must have a monitor or graphics adapter that can display 256 simultaneous colors and a compatible Windows screen driver.


Enable to display color using the screen driver's default dithering scheme. To use this setting, you must have a monitor or graphics adapter that can display 256 simultaneous colors and a compatible Windows screen driver.


Enable to stop a screen redraw when you click the mouse or press a key.


Enable to redraw the screen when you click the slider on a scroll bar or when you click the Refresh Window command.


Enable to copy the drawing into memory, which results in no redraw.


Enable to automatically scroll when you drag beyond the Drawing Window's edges.


Enable to display a pop-up Help label that identifies tools and buttons.


Enable to display snapping location marks.


Enable to view PostScript fills in Enhanced view, which uses 2X oversampling to show the best possible display quality.


Enable to select a node using the Pick tool or any of the basic drawing tools.


Enable to view bitmaps in Enhanced view, which uses 2X oversampling to show the best possible display quality.


Enable to highlight an object outline for the objects you select.


Lets you see what your drawing will look like when you print it. Use Normal view mode to view objects with their outline and fill attributes.


Enable to use the Enhanced view when you preview the Drawing Window without the user interface.


Enable to display the page border when you preview the Drawing Window without the user interface.


Enable to select an object after you draw it.


General


Lets you specify the number of actions that can be reversed when using the Undo command in the Edit menu.


Lets you specify the number of actions that can be reversed when working with bitmaps.


Enable to set all dialog boxes to open in the center of the Drawing Window.


Enable to show titles on floating dockers.


Enable to display a patterned fill to show which objects are overprinted.


Enable to set a feature that has a single item pop-up menu to execute automatically.


Lets you choose the start-up screen you want to display when you launch CorelDRAW.


Enable to support feedback sounds for events.


Warnings


Enable to display a warning message when you convert a bitmap to CMYK.


Enable to display a warning message when a transparent object interacts with a spot color.


Enable to display a warning message when a drop shadow interacts with a spot color.


Enable to display a warning message when a texture fill is not RGB.


Enable to display a warning message when you convert an object to duotone.


Enable to display a warning message when you convert a lens effect to duotone.


 Enable to display a warning message when you try to apply a distortion that is too complex.


 Enable to display a warning message when you replace a soft mask with a color mask.


 Enable to display a warning message when you apply effects to text with embedded graphics.


Enable to display a warning message when you import a file into a document with facing pages.


Enable to display a warning message when you import multiple 3DMF files.


Enable to display a warning message when your destination file format does not support multiple pages.


Enable to display a warning message when you attempt to modify a preset guideline.


 Enable to display a warning message when you open a file that uses a VBA macro and you do not have VBA installed on your system.


Enable to display a warning message if you attempt to save a brush stroke that contains invalid objects.


Enable to a display a warning message if you attempt to apply a spot color to a Mesh Fill object.


Enable to automatically create a backup file at set intervals while you work.


Lets you specify the time between backups. You can specify a value between one and 120 minutes.


Enable to store a backup copy of the active drawing in the same folder from which you opened its original.


Enable to display the current auto-backup directory or specify a new one.


Lets you specify where you want to store the backup files on your system.


Opens the Select Directory dialog box, which lets you choose the location in which you want to save a drawing's backup for backups made while you work.


Enable to create a backup file each time you save a drawing. These backup files are always saved in the same directory as the original file.


Workspace - Memory


Lets you choose to artificially increase the amount of memory available on your computer.


Lets you choose to artificially increase the amount of memory available on your computer.


Tells you how much RAM is available on your computer.


Lets you specify the percentage of the total memory you want to make available for drawings you create in CorelDRAW.


Calculates and displays in kilobytes the total memory available for drawings you create in CorelDRAW according to the percentage you specify.


Enable to save files in smaller sizes than normal to save space on your hard disk.


Workspace - Plug-Ins


Displays the location of the folders that contain the bitmap plug-ins.


Opens the Select a Plug-in Folder dialog box, which lets you specify the location of the plug-in folder to add.


Removes the selected bitmap plug-in from the list and the Bitmaps menu.


Workspace - Text


Enable to edit text on screen using the Text tool.


Enable to display the interactive spacing arrows when you select Paragraph text frames with the Text tool.


Enable to cut and paste text directly on screen by dragging text to within a line of Artistic text or a Paragraph text frame.


Enable to fill jagged pixels with intermediate shades of gray to increase the clarity of text.


Lets you specify the number of characters permitted in lines of Paragraph text shaped to fit odd-shaped envelopes.


Lets you specify a point size for text. Text formatted below that font sized will be greeked.


Lets you specify whether CorelDRAW shows the outline of characters you are kerning using the mouse. If the number of characters you are kerning is less than or equal to the value you specify, the outlines are displayed as you kern.


Lets you specify the increment used to adjust the point size of text using the numeric keypad.


Enable to copy calligraphic pen outlines to the Clipboard. Some export filters retain calligraphic outlines regardless of the setting.


Enable to paste text, its font type, point size, and other text attributes to the Clipboard. Otherwise the text will be pasted to the Clipboard as a curve object.


 Lets you choose a unit of measure for the text in a drawing.


Lets you choose which nonprinting characters you want to appear in your document while in text editing mode.


Workspace - (Text) Paragraph


Enable to create a Paragraph text frame that automatically increases to accommodate the amount of text in the frame as you type.


Enable to display arrows that identify the direction of text flow between linked frames.


Enable to show Paragraph text frame outlines.


Enable to apply the same text formatting to all linked Paragraph text frames.


Enable to apply the same text formatting to only selected Paragraph text frames.


Enable to apply the same text formatting to only selected and successive linked Paragraph text frames.


Workspace - (Text) Font


Enable to display TrueType fonts in the Font list boxes.


Enable to display Type 1 fonts in the Font list boxes.


Enable to display TrueType symbols in the Font list boxes.


Enable to display Type 1 symbols in the Font list boxes.


Enable to display only the fonts used in the active document in the Font list boxes.


Enable to display font samples in the Font list boxes.


Lets you specify the number of recently used fonts that will be displayed in the Font list boxes.


Enable if you don't want to display the font path in the Font Matching Results dialog box. Enabling this button lets you use PANOSE font substitutions only.


Enable to display the Font Matching Results dialog box when you open a document that has been formatted with a font that is not installed on your computer.


Opens the PANOSE Font Matching Preferences dialog box, which lets you create a list of matches for uninstalled fonts. This list is saved for all subsequent documents.


Enable to display TrueType fonts in the Symbols list boxes.


Enable to display Type 1 fonts in the Symbols list boxes.


Enable to display Type 1 symbols in the Symbols list boxes.


Enable to display TrueType symbols in the Symbols list boxes.


Enable to allow PANOSE font substitutions when you open documents with fonts that aren't installed on your computer.


Enable to display the Font Matching dialog box when you open documents that have been formatted with fonts that aren't installed on your computer.


Lets you set the precision with which font substitutions are made. A lower value increases the precision.


Opens the PANOSE Font Matching Exceptions dialog box, which lets you change the default substitution font.


Opens the Alternate Spellings dialog box, which lets you specify the Windows equivalent for Macintosh fonts that are used in the drawing.


Lets you choose a default font.


Displays a list of all of the available Windows fonts.


Displays a list of all of the available Macintosh fonts.


Lets you choose a Windows font and its Macintosh equivalent.


Opens the Add Alternate Spelling dialog box, which lets you add a font to the font list.


Opens the Edit Alternate Spelling dialog box, which lets you edit a font's spelling.


Removes a font from the font list.


Add Alternate Spelling dialog box


Lets you choose the name of a Windows font for which you want to provide an alternate spelling.


Lets you specify a Macintosh font name. The Windows font you specify in this dialog box will replace the Macintosh font.


Lets you choose the name of the Windows font you want to edit.


Lets you specify the name of the Macintosh font. The Windows font you specify in this dialog box will replace the Macintosh font.


Displays the fonts that are not installed on your computer.


Displays the fonts that CorelDRAW uses to replace the missing fonts.


Lets you choose a missing font and its replacement font.


Opens the Add Matching Exception dialog box, which lets you add a missing and substitution font to the font list.


Opens the Edit Matching Exception dialog box, which lets you edit a missing font's spelling or change the substitution font.


Removes a font from the font list.


Lets you specify the name of a missing font for which you want to provide a substitute font. These fonts will be added to the font list.


Lets you choose a substitute font that replaces a missing font. These fonts will be added to the font list.


Lets you specify the missing font you want to edit.


Lets you change the substitute font that replaces a missing font. These fonts will be added to the font list.


Workspace - (Text) Spelling


Enable to automatically spell check words as you type.


Enable to underline misspelled words in a Paragraph text frame with a red wavy line.


Enable to underline misspelled words in the selected Paragraph text frame with a red wavy line.


Lets you specify the number of spelling suggestions displayed when you right-click a misspelled word.


Enable to add spelling corrections to Type Assist automatically.


Enable to identify spelling errors that you've ignored by underlining the words with a blue wavy line.


Workspace - (Text) Type Assist


Enable to capitalize the first letter of a sentence.


Enable to change the standard quotation marks included in most font sets to curly quotation marks.


Enable to change the second capital letter in a word to lowercase. Capitalization is maintained if the capitals are followed by a space, a period, or if the word contains other capitals.


Enable to automatically capitalize the names of days of the week.


Enable to replace text as you type.


Lets you specify the word, phrase, or text string you want Type Assist to replace.


Lets you type the word, phrase, or text string you want to use as replacement text.


Lets you choose preset and custom text strings and their replacement strings.


Adds a text string and replacement text to Type Assist.


Deletes a text string and replacement text from Type Assist.


 Enable to work with cross hairs instead of the pointer.


Enable to treat an object as filled so that you can select an unfilled object by clicking anywhere inside it.


Enable to draw a dotted outline of a complex object when you pause while moving it.


Lets you specify a delay time for redrawing complex objects. If you pause while dragging a complex object, the outline of the object is drawn after the specified interval.


 Time unit used to measure the delay interval.


Enable to use the functionality associated with CorelDRAW for SHIFT and CTRL. SHIFT ensures that transformations are made from the center, and CTRL is used to constrain the movement of the mouse.


Enable to use the functionality associated with Microsoft Windows for SHIFT and CTRL. SHIFT constrains the movement of the mouse, and CTRL is used to duplicate objects, leaving the original behind.


Enable to create a subpath of a single object while keeping the object intact.


Enable to automatically close open objects once they are cut.


Lets you specify a nib size for the eraser tool. A larger nib size erases a greater area.


Enable to automatically reduce the nodes of an object that has been edited with the Eraser tool. The auto-reduce setting is found in the Toolbox Properties page for the Shape tool.


Enable to zoom out when you right-click with the Zoom tool.


Enable to open a list of magnification levels when you right-click with the Zoom tool.


Enable to zoom out when you right-click with the Pan tool.


Enable to open a list of magnification levels when you right-click with the Pan tool.


Enable to replace the Zoom flyout with an alternate one. This flyout includes the one-shot Pan tool.


Enable to make the Zoom tool operate relative to real-world distance. You specify the real-world distance by calibrating the rulers.


Opens the Calibrate Rulers dialog box, which lets you calibrate the Horizontal and Vertical rulers. You can calibrate rulers so that one inch in the real word equals one inch on screen.


Zoom Tool - Calibrate Rulers dialog box


Lets you specify a resolution for the horizontal ruler.


Lets you specify a resolution for the vertical ruler.


Displays the unit of measure in which you specify a resolution for the horizontal ruler.


Displays the unit of measure in which you specify a resolution for the vertical ruler.


Lets you specify a default Freehand smoothing value between 0 and 100 for drawing Freehand curves. A higher value produces a smoother curve.


Lets you specify how closely a bezier curve follows the edges of a bitmap traced using the autotracing feature. Low numbers produce a more accurate result.


Lets you specify whether a corner node is smooth or cusped for curves drawn using the Freehand tool or the autotracing feature. A node is more likely to be cusped if the value is lower.


Lets you specify whether a line is straight or curved for curves drawn using the Freehand tool or the autotracing feature. A line segment is more likely to be curved if the value is lower.


Lets you specify the Auto-join distance when drawing in Freehand or Bezier mode. CorelDRAW joins two end nodes if the distance between them is below the Auto-join threshold.


 Displays the unit of measure used for specifying the Freehand and Bezier tool defaults.


Lets you specify a default dimension style for dimension text.


Lets you specify the number of decimal places to use for dimensions.


Lets you specify the default unit for the decimal and fractional styles. This option is not available for U.S. Engineering and U.S. Architectural styles.


Lets you specify a default prefix for dimension text.


Lets you specify a default suffix for dimension text.


Lets you specify the default unit for the angle.


Enable to have the ends of connector lines snap to the closest object node when you move the object on the page. Enabling Snap To Objects (Layout menu) allows you to see the nodes when you move the cursor near them.


Enable to lock the ends of connector lines to the current object node, i.e., the node the connector originally snapped to when it was created. This ensures the connection is locked to the same node when you move one or several objects on the page. Enabling Snap to Objects (Layout menu) allows you to see the nodes when you move the cursor near them.


Lets you specify a threshold (one to 10 pixels) for line segments in a flow line. If a line segment is smaller than the threshold, the line segment is removed and the flow line is redrawn.


 Displays the unit of measure used for specifying the threshold of a straight line.


Lets you set a default roundness value between zero and 100 for all rectangles you draw using the Rectangle tool. For square corners, set the slider to zero; for full roundness, set the slider to 100.


Enable to set the Ellipse tool to draw ellipses.


Enable to set the Ellipse tool to draw pie shapes.


Enable to set the Ellipse tool to draw arcs.


Lets you specify the angle at which you want arcs or pie shapes to begin.


Lets you specify the angle at which you want arcs or pie shapes to end.


Enable to draw pie shapes and arcs in a clockwise direction. The beginning and ending points of pie shapes and arcs are determined by the angles specified in the Starting Angle and Ending Angle boxes.


Enable to draw pie shapes and arcs in a counterclockwise direction. The beginning and ending points of pie shapes and arcs are determined by the angles specified in the Starting Angle and Ending Angle boxes.


Enable to set the Polygon tool to draw polygons.


Enable to set the Polygon tool to draw stars.


Enable to set the Polygon tool to draw polygons as stars.


Lets you specify the number of points to use by default when drawing polygons, stars, and polygons as stars.


Lets you specify the sharpness level of stars and polygons as stars.


Displays a thumbnail image of the polygon, star, or polygon as a star based on the Polygon tool settings.


Enable to set the Spiral tool to draw symmetrical spirals by default.


Enable to set the Spiral tool to draw logarithmic spirals by default.


Displays a thumbnail image of the spiral, based on the Spiral tool settings.


Lets you specify the number of revolutions to use when drawing spirals.


Lets you specify a default expansion factor for increasing the distance between each revolution of a logarithmic spiral. Moving the slider to the right increases the distance between each revolution.


Lets you specify the default width in cells when drawing a grid.


Lets you specify the default height in cells when drawing a grid.


Lets you specify the number of columns the Mesh Tool creates on an object.


Lets you specify the number of rows the Mesh Tool creates on an object.


Opens the Styles page in the Options dialog box.


Link Manager


Enable to check URLs at specific intervals.


Lets you specify the interval time in minutes between URL checks.


 Unit of time used to measure the intervals between URL checks.


Enable to view large bitmaps within the Link Manager.


Enable to launch CorelDRAW with any of the following default options you choose.


 Enable to save the settings on the General page in the Options dialog box as the default settings for all documents you create.


Enable to save the settings on the Page, Size, Layout, Label, and Background pages in the Options dialog box as the default settings for all documents you create.


Enable to save the settings on the Grid page and the Rulers page in the Options dialog box as the default settings for all documents you create.


 Enable to save the preset guideline settings you specify on the Guidelines, Presets pages in the Options dialog box as the default settings for all new documents you create.


Enable to save the settings on the Styles page in the Options dialog box as the default settings for all documents you create.


Enable to save the settings on the Save page in the Options dialog box as the default settings for all documents you create.


Enable to save the settings on the Publish To Internet page in the Options dialog box as the default settings for new documents you create.


Lets you choose whether to display your drawing in Wireframe, Simple Wireframe, Draft, Normal, or Enhanced View.


Enable to automatically fill open curves with the default fill.


Enable to automatically inflate imported images to create a border for bitmap effects.


 Lets you choose a resolution at which to render drop shadows, bitmap extrusions, and interactive transparencies.


Lets you choose which properties you want to save with the selected style. You can save a property by enabling its check box.


Displays the font of the selected Artistic or Paragraph Text style.


Displays the font size of the selected Artistic or Paragraph Text style.


Opens the Format Text dialog box, which lets you specify text formatting settings for the selected text style.


Lets you choose a fill for a graphic or text style.


Displays information about the color model and component values for the fill.


Opens a fill dialog box, which lets you specify fill settings for the selected graphic or text style. The fill dialog box that opens depends on the fill type you choose from the Fill list box.


Displays the color and width of the outline for the selected graphic or text style.


Opens the Outline Pen dialog box, which lets you specify the outline settings for the selected graphic or text style.


Enable to preview an effect by placing the altered image across the full screen.


Enable to preview an effect by placing the altered image beside the original image.


Enable to preview an effect by placing the altered image in a window in the dialog box.


Enable to display the last used dialog, either On Screen or In Dialog.


Enable to display the last values used in the dialog.


Opens the Edit page in the Options dialog box, which lets you set your preferences for performing certain operations and displaying objects on the screen.


Opens the Display page in the Options dialog box, which allows you to specify display settings in CorelDRAW.


Opens the General page in the Options dialog box, which lets you specify general display settings for CorelDRAW.


Opens the Text page in the Options dialog box, which lets you set formatting and display preferences for text.


Opens the Font page in the Options dialog box, which lets you specify the fonts and symbols you want to display in CorelDRAW.


Opens the Memory page in the Options dialog box, which lets you adjust memory settings.


Enable to ensure that there are no conflicts, such as intersecting Internet objects, in your Web document before you publish it to the Internet.


Enable to ensure that text in your Web document is HTML-compatible before you publish it to the Internet.


Enable to ensure that externally linked bitmap files in your Web document can be found before you publish it to the Internet.


Enable to ensure that Internet objects in your Web document don't have transformations that may result in an unreliable published document before you publish the document to the Internet.


Enable to ensure that Internet objects aren't positioned off the pages in your Web document before you publish it to the Internet.


Enable to ensure that the appropriate link information is specified on the Java Applet and Embedded File property pages in the Object Properties dialog box before you publish the document to the Internet.


Enable to ensure that a CGI Script address is specified for pages in your Web document that contain preconfigured Internet objects, such as Java applets, submit buttons, and check boxes, before you publish the document to the Internet.


Lets you choose the type of HTML layout you want to use when you export your document to the Internet from the list.


Lets you specify the number of pixels text can be automatically nudged in order to avoid introducing rows or columns that are one or two pixels in size. The space to be nudged cannot contain graphics.


Lets you type a value that specifies the number of pixels that can occur in an empty cell before it's merged with an adjacent cell, in order to avoid splitting a single graphic that spans adjacent cells.


Lets you specify the amount of white space allowed in an image in order to make your published Web document simpler.


Enable to include CSS layout information in the style section of the HTML file.


Enable to create an external.CSS file to which the HTML file refers.


Lets you choose a color palette for your exported GIF images.


Enable to display your document's graphics in a Web browser using image interlacing.


Enable to keep bitmaps separate from other graphics in your Web document. Photographic bitmaps that contain more than 256 colors are exported to the JPEG image file format while other graphics are exported the GIF image file format.


Enable to maintain the links you created to external files in your source document through to your published Web document.


Enable to eliminate the stepping effect that may be apparent on rounded edges of objects in your Web document.


Enable to choose the Client image map type, which means that the code for the image map must reside on the user's computer.


Enable to choose the Server image map type, which means that the code for the image map must reside on the server.


Lets you publish the Client-Server or Server image maps used in your Web document in the NCSA format.


Lets you publish the Client-Server or Server image maps used in your Web document in the CERN format.


Lets you export all HTML-compatible text in your Web document as text, so that you can edit HTML text in a Web browser.


Lets you export all HTML-compatible text in your Web document as graphics without having to convert the HTML text to standard Paragraph text prior to export. Text exported as graphics cannot be edited in a Web browser.


Lets you create a Portable Font Resource file (.PFR) which contains compressed versions of the fonts used in your Web document and is downloaded onto systems that don't have fonts matching those in your document.


Lets you limit the use of the fonts compressed in the Portable Font Resource (.PFR) file to Web pages located in the listed domains, for example http://www.corel.com.


Enable to include a standard character set.


Enable to apply an underline to text that is assigned a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) in your Web document.


Enable to override the default normal hyperlink text color used in your Web browser with the color you choose from the Normal Link color picker.


Lets you choose a normal hyperlink color for text that is assigned a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) in your Web document.


Enable to override the default active hyperlink text color used in your Web browser with the color you choose from the Active Link color picker.


Lets you choose an active hyperlink color for text that is assigned a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) in your Web document.


Enable to override the default visited hyperlink text color used in your Web browser with the color you choose from the Visited Link color picker.


Lets you choose a visited hyperlink color for text that is assigned a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) in your Web document.


Settings dialog box


Lets you specify a value that the active control will use.


Displays the minimum value you can specify in the Full Value box.


Displays the maximum value you can specify in the Full Value box.


Displays the smallest increment you can specify in the Full Value box.


Lets you display or hide the Toolbox. A check mark beside the command name indicates that the Toolbox is displayed.


Attaches the selected blend to the path beneath the cursor.


Magnifies the area you click by a factor of two.


Magnifies the area you clicked by four times its actual size.


Magnifies the area you clicked by twice its actual size.


Magnifies the area you clicked to its actual size.


Reduces the magnification of the area you clicked to 75% of its actual size.


Reduces the magnification of the area you clicked to 50% of its actual size.


Reduces the magnification of the area you clicked to 25% of its actual size.


Reduces the magnification of the area you clicked to 10% of its actual size.


Opens the appropriate Toolbox page in the Options dialog box, which provides controls for adjusting the performance the selected tool.


Enable to create a two-color pattern from the selected object.


Enable to create a full-color pattern from the selected object.


Enable to create a low-resolution pattern.


Enable to create a medium-resolution pattern.


Enable to create a high-resolution pattern.


View menu


Displays only the outlines of objects in your drawing.


Displays bitmaps, extrusions, contours, and intermediate blend shapes in your drawing in monochrome color, and hides all fills.


Displays all fills except PostScript fills and high-resolution bitmaps.


Displays uniform fills, low-resolutions bitmaps, and lenses as solid colors, and displays fountain fills as a blend of the first and last color.


Displays the closest approximation to what a drawing will look like when printed.


Displays a fully detailed version of your drawing without any of the CorelDRAW interface. Depending on the view quality you specify in the Options dialog box, the preview uses the Normal or Enhanced view.


Lets you preview a selected object or all objects in a full-screen preview. A check mark beside the command indicates that previewing selected objects is enabled.


Lets you display or hide the Property Bar. A check mark beside the command indicates that the Property Bar is already displayed.


Lets you display or hide the Status Bar. A check mark beside the command indicates that the Status Bar is already displayed.


Lets you display or hide the ruler. A check mark beside the command indicates that the rulers are displayed.


Lets you display or hide the grid. A check mark beside the command indicates that the grid is displayed.


 Lets you display or hide guidelines. A check mark beside the command indicates that guidelines are displayed.


Lets you display or hide the bleed. A check mark beside the command indicates that the bleed is displayed.


Lets you display or hide the dotted line that identifies the portion of the Drawing Window that can be printed. A check mark beside the command indicates that the printable area is displayed.


Displays a patterned fill to show which objects are overprinted. A check mark beside the command indicates that overprinted objects are displayed with a patterned fill.


Lets you display or hide Paragraph text frame outlines. A check mark beside the command indicates that the frames are displayed.


Lets you add, delete, and move guidelines.


Lets you specify settings for the grid and rulers.


Lets you snap or unsnap objects to the grid.


Lets you snap or unsnap objects to guidelines.


Lets you snap or unsnap objects to other objects.


Grid and Ruler Setup dialog box


Grid


Enable to specify the number of grid lines (or dots) you want per unit of measure.


Enable to specify the precise amount of space you want between grid lines (or dots).


Lets you specify the number of vertical grid lines you want per unit of measure.


Lets you specify the number of horizontal grid lines you want per unit of measure.


Displays the unit of measure in which the horizontal grid frequency is specified.


Displays the unit of measure in which the vertical grid frequency is specified.


Displays the unit of measure in which the vertical grid spacing is specified.


Displays the unit of measure in which the horizontal grid spacing is specified.


Lets you specify the precise amount of space you want between horizontal lines.


Lets you specify the precise amount of space you want between vertical grid lines.


Lets you specify the precise amount of space you want between vertical grid lines.


Lets you specify the precise amount of space you want between horizontal grid lines.


Enable to display the grid.


Enable to have objects snap to the grid.


Enable to display the grid as lines.


Enable to display the grid as dots.


Enable to have objects snap to other objects.


Rulers


Lets you specify the unit of measure you want to use for the horizontal ruler.


Lets you specify the unit of measure you want to use for the vertical ruler.


Enable to use the same unit of measure for both the horizontal and vertical rulers.


Lets you specify the number of precision marks to show between each full unit tick on the rulers.


Lets you specify the number of precision marks to show between each full unit tick on the rulers.


Enable to display partial measurement units as fractions rather than decimals.


Lets you specify a location for the origin of the horizontal ruler on the Drawing Page.


Lets you specify a location for the origin of the vertical ruler on the Drawing Page.


Displays the unit of measure used to specify the location for the origin of the vertical ruler on the Drawing Page.


Displays the unit of measure used to specify the location for the origin of the horizontal ruler on the Drawing Page.


Enable to display the rulers.


Lets you change the drawing scale (the ratio of on-screen distance to real-world distance). If you are using pixles as the unit of measure, lets you set the resolution for the Drawing Page.


Edit Scale dialog box


Lets you choose a preset drawing scale.


Lets you specify the component of the drawing scale that represents the distance in a drawing.


Lets you choose the unit of measure you want to use to set the drawing scale.


Lets you specify the component of the drawing scale that refers to distances in the real world.


Guidelines Setup dialog box


Enable to have objects snap to guidelines.


Enable to display the guidelines.


Lets you choose a default color for standard guidelines.


Lets you choose a default color for preset guidelines.


Guidelines Setup dialog box - Horizontal


Lets you choose a horizontal guideline by its location.


Displays the location of the selected guideline, and lets you specify a new location.


Lets you choose a unit of measure in which to set the position of a guideline.


Adds a guideline at the specified position.


Moves the selected guideline to a specified position.


Removes the selected guideline.


Removes all horizontal guidelines from the active drawing.


Enable to display guidelines in the Drawing Window.


Enable to have objects automatically line up with guidelines when you draw or move them near the guidelines.


Displays the location of a selected guideline and lets you specify a new location.


Lets you choose a vertical guideline by its location.


Lets you choose a unit of measure in which to set the position of a guideline.


Adds a guideline at the specified position.


Removes all vertical guidelines from the active drawing.


Moves the selected guideline to a specified position.


Removes the selected guideline.


Enable to display guidelines in the Drawing Window.


Enable to have objects automatically line up with guidelines when you draw or move them near the guidelines.


Lets you choose a slanted guideline.


Lets you choose a slanted guideline.


Displays the selected guideline and lets you specify a new location.


Lets you choose a method for positioning a slanted guideline.


Lets you specify the horizontal position of a guideline's point of origin.


Lets you specify an angle for the guideline if you're using Angle And 1 Point to define your guideline. Lets you specify the horizontal position of a guideline's second point of origin if you're using 2 Points.


Lets you choose a unit of measure to set the position of a guideline.


Displays the unit of measure used to position the selected guideline.


Displays the unit of measure used to position the selected guideline.


Displays the unit of measure used to position the selected guideline.


Lets you specify the vertical position of a guideline's origin point.


Lets you specify the vertical position of a guideline's second origin point.


Lets you specify a guideline's angle.


Adds a guideline at the specified location.


Moves the selected guideline to a specified position.


Removes the selected guideline.


Removes all slanted guidelines from the active drawing.


Guidelines Setup dialog box - Presets


Corel presets page


Enable to choose preset guidelines.


Enable to define your own preset guidelines.


 Enable to display guidelines at one-inch margins.


Enable to display guidelines at the bleed area.


Enable to display guidelines at the page borders.


Enable to display guidelines around the printable area.


Enable to display guidelines that line up with three columns on a standard portrait page.


Enable to display guidelines as a grid.


Enable to show guidelines as a grid in the upper left corner of the Drawing Page only.


Applies the guideline presets you specify.


User Defined presets page


Enable to place preset guidelines on the left, right, top, and bottom margins of pages in your drawing.


Lets you specify where to place top margin guidelines in your drawing.


 Lets you specify where to place left margin guidelines in your drawing.


 Lets you specify where to place right margin guidelines in your drawing.


 Lets you specify where to place bottom margin guidelines in your drawing.


Enable to have the top and bottom margin guidelines the same distance from the edge of the page, and the left and right margin guidelines the same distance from the edge of the page.


Displays the unit of measure used to place the margin guidelines.


Displays the unit of measure used to place the margin guidelines.


Displays the unit of measure used to place the margin guidelines.


Displays the unit of measure used to place the margin guidelines.


Enable to place guidelines along columns in your drawing.


Lets you specify the number of columns you want to have in your drawing.


Lets you specify the number of columns you want to have in your drawing.


Lets you specify how far apart to place column guidelines in your drawing.


Lets you specify how far apart to place column guidelines in your drawing.


Displays the unit of measure used to place the column guidelines.


Enable to place guidelines in your drawing so that they resemble a grid.


Enable to place grid guidelines according to frequency.


Enable to place grid guidelines according to spacing.


Lets you specify the number of horizontal grid guidelines per unit of measure to place in your drawing.


Lets you specify the number of vertical grid guidelines per unit of measure to place in your drawing.


Displays the unit of measure used to place the grid guidelines.


Displays the unit of measure used to place the grid guidelines.


Lets you specify how far apart to place horizontal grid guidelines.


Lets you specify how far apart to place vertical grid guidelines.


Displays the unit of measure used to place the grid guidelines.


Displays the unit of measure used to place the grid guidelines.


Lets you specify how far apart to place horizontal grid guidelines.


Lets you specify how far apart to place vertical grid guidelines.


Zoom Tool Property Bar


 Zooms in by a factor of two.


Zooms out by a factor of two or to the previous level of magnification.


Displays objects in the drawing at their actual size.


Fits all selected objects in the Drawing Window.


Fits all objects in the Drawing Window.


Fits the entire Drawing Page inside the Drawing Window.


Fits the width of the Drawing Page inside the Drawing Window.


Fits the height of the Drawing Page inside the Drawing Window.


Opens the View Manager Docker window, which lets you adjust your view of your drawing or save any view of a specific Drawing Page.


Zoom Toolbar (features not already defined above, or in Tools, View Manager)


Zooms to an area you marquee select using the Zoom tool.


Lets you change your view by moving once around the Drawing Window, then returns automatically to the tool you were using before panning.


Creates a window with the same contents as the active Drawing Window. This lets you view an object from different vantage points.


Cascades all open windows in layers so that you can see each window's Title Bar.


Displays all open windows in horizontal rows.


Displays all open windows in vertical columns.


Arranges all minimized windows at the bottom left corner of the CorelDRAW Application Window.


Closes the active window.


Closes all open windows.


Clears the screen of any "debris" left over from earlier manipulations or to resume drawing after a display interruption.


Opens the Node Edit Docker window, which lets you modify curved objects.


Opens the Link Manager Docker window, which lets you embed, update, edit or refresh the links in your document.


Opens the Internet Bookmark Manager Docker window, which lets you view a list of all the bookmarks that you've assigned in the active drawing.


Opens the HTML Object Conflict Docker window, which lets you scan and resolve the active drawing's conflicts before publishing it to the Web.


Lets you add pre-drawn graphic images to a drawing.


Opens the Object Data Docker window, which lets you create a database to maintain and organize data about individual objects or groups of objects in a drawing.


Opens the Customize page of the Options dialog box, which lets you specify the display properties of a toolbar that you want displayed.


Opens the Dockers page of the Options dialog box.


Opens the Graphics and Text Style Docker window, in which you can create graphic and text styles and apply them to objects in your drawing.


Displays icons for the graphic and text styles in the active template.


Lets you choose a style to apply to the selected object.


Opens the Style Properties dialog box, which lets you change the formatting properties of a style in the active template.


Displays the graphic or text formatting properties you can apply to the selected style. Enable one or more of the check boxes to apply properties to the selected style.


Opens a menu of commands for working with graphic and text styles.


Applies the styles you specify in the Docker window to the selected object.


Opens the Load Styles From Template dialog box, from which you can choose a template to load.


Opens the Save Template dialog box, which lets you save the current style set, page layout settings, and contents as a template.


Saves the active template as the default template for all new drawings.


Enable to display the available styles as large icons in the Docker window.


Enable to display the available styles as small icons in the Docker window.


Enable to display the available styles in a list.


Enable to display the available styles in a table showing style name and type.


Finds objects in your drawing using the style you specify in the Docker window.


Lets you copy properties from an object in your drawing to a style in the Docker.


Lets you assign a shortcut key combination to the selected style.


Enable to display graphic styles in the Docker window.


Enable to display Artistic text styles in the Docker window.


Enable to display Paragraph text styles in the Docker window.


Enable to display only those styles you can apply to the selected object. For example, if you select a graphic object, CorelDRAW displays only graphic styles.


Creates a graphic style based on the default graphic style.


Creates an Artistic text style based on the default Artistic text style.


Creates a Paragraph text style based on the default Paragraph text style.


Deletes the selected style.


Lets you rename the selected style.


Lets you change the text, fill, and outline properties for the selected style.


Enable to view a thumbnail sketch of the selected template.


Displays a thumbnail sketch of the selected template.


Lets you choose the version of CorelDRAW you want to use to save the template.


Lets you choose the type of thumbnail you want to save with the template. When you want to load a template, you can view the thumbnail to help you find the template you want.


Enable to save page settings, objects, and styles in the template.


Lets you choose a style and apply it to the selected object.


Opens the Apply Styles dialog box, from which you can choose a style to apply to the selected object.


Opens the Save Style As dialog box, which lets you create a style based on the selected object's properties.


Reapplies the applied style to an object. By reverting to the applied style, you discard any changes to the object's properties made since you applied the style.


Displays all of the available styles for the selected object type.


Lets you specify a name for the new style.


Displays the object's properties, and lets you enable the ones you want to save with the style.


Opens the Color Styles Docker window, in which you can create color styles and apply them to objects in your drawing as well as create shades of a color style and link them under that color style.


Displays the parent and child color styles for each open drawing.


Opens the New Color Style dialog box, which lets you create a color style.


Opens the Create a New Child Color dialog box, which lets you to create a child color based on the selected color style.


Lets you specify the brightness value for a child color.


Displays the common hue value for both the parent color style and the new child color style.


Lets you specify the saturation value for a child color.


Displays the common ID value for both the parent color style and the new child color style.


Lets you specify the tint value for a child color.


Displays the parent color style swatch and name.


Displays the available colors based on the parent color style selected.


Lets you specify a name for the new child color.


Displays the child color swatch and name.


Displays the parent color style and previews the new child color style.


Opens either the Edit Color Style or the Edit Child Color dialog box, which let you change the color of a color style.


Opens the Create Shades dialog box, which lets you automatically create up to 20 child color styles from a selected color style.


Enable to create child color styles that are lighter than the parent.


Enable to create child color styles that are darker than the parent.


Enable to create both lighter and darker child color styles.


Displays the color style from which the child color styles will be created.


Displays the name of the parent color style.


Lets you specify the number of child color styles that you want to create. You can automatically create up to 20 child color styles.


Lets you set how similar the child color styles will be to the selected color style. Higher values (moving the slider to the right), create shades that are very similar; lower values (moving the slider to the left), create shades that are less similar.


Opens the Automatically Create Color Styles dialog box, which lets you create color styles from the selected objects in your drawing.


Lets you set the number of parent color styles created.


Enable to create color styles from the fill colors of the selected object.


Enable to create color styles from the outline colors of the selected object.


Enable to link similar colors together under a parent color style.


Enable to convert colors from a specific color-matching system to CMYK, so that they can be grouped under a parent color style.


Updates the preview window to show the new color styles to be created based on the settings you specify.


Displays the new color styles to be created based on the settings you specify.


Lets you make a selected color style the child of another color style. You cannot make a color style the child of a child color style.


Deletes the selected color style.


Lets you rename the selected color style.


Sorts the color styles under the selected folder or parent alphabetically.


Sorts the color styles in the selected folder and places color styles with children at the top of the list.


Adds the selected color style to the default palette.


Displays the parent and child color styles for each open drawing.


Opens the Artistic Media Docker window, which lets you apply Artistic Media strokes and spraylists to curve objects in your drawing.


Displays the most recently used Artistic Media strokes and spraylists.


Lets you choose a folder to display Artistic Media strokes and spraylists in the Docker window.


Opens the Browse For Folder dialog box, which lets you select another folder to access Artistic Media strokes and spraylists from the Docker window.


Displays the preset strokes, brush strokes, and spraylists available in the folder specified in the Docker window list box.


Applies the Artistic Media stroke or spraylist to the selected object on the Drawing Page.


Enable to apply an Artistic Media stroke or spraylist to a curve by selecting it from the Docker window. If you disable Auto Apply, you must first select the stroke or spraylist, and then click the Apply button. Artistic Media strokes and spraylists are automatically applied to the selected object when the button appears pressed.


Saves the selected object as a brush stroke or spraylist.


Opens a menu from which you can choose which Artistic Media strokes to display in the Docker window. You can also link to the Corel Web site, where you can download additional brush strokes.


Enable to display preset strokes in the Docker window.


Enable to display brush strokes in the Docker window.


Enable to display spraylists in the Docker window.


Links to the Corel Web site, where you can download additional brush strokes for use in your drawing.


Enable to create a brush stroke from the selected object. You can apply the new brush stroke to a curve using the Brush mode of the Artistic Media tool.


Enable to create a spraylist from the selected object. You can apply the new spraylist to a curve using the Object Sprayer mode of the Artistic Media tool.


Artistic Media Property Bar


Lets you draw curves using preset strokes.


Lets you apply brush strokes to a curve.


Lets you apply a series of objects to a curve.


Lets you draw curves as if you are using a calligraphic pen.


Lets you draw curves as if you are using a pressure-sensitive pen.


Lets you set a smoothing value between 0 and 100 for an Artistic Media stroke.


Lets you specify the maximum width of the curve.


Lets you specify an angle for the Calligraphic pen nib.


Lets you choose a preset stroke to apply to a curve.


Lets you choose a brush stroke to apply to a curve.


Saves a brush stroke or spraylist.


Deletes the selected Artistic Media stroke or spraylist.


Lets you specify the size of the sprayed object as a percentage of the original (top box), and the size of each successive object as a percentage of the preceding object (bottom box). For example, if you want the objects in the spray to decrease in size by increments of two percent, you can type "98" in the bottom box.


Lets you apply or disable incremental scaling for a spraylist. Incremental scaling is applied when the button appears pressed.


Lets you choose a spraylist to apply to a curve.


Saves a new spraylist or saves changes to a selected spraylist.


Lets you choose the order in which the objects in the playlist of a spraylist are sprayed along a curve.


Adds the selected object to a new or existing spraylist.


Lets you specify the number of objects you want placed at each spacing point (top box), and the distance between the centers of each object (bottom box).


Opens the Rotation dialog box, which lets you specify rotation angle and rotation increment settings.


Lets you specify the angle to which you want to rotate the objects in the spray.


Enable to rotate the objects incrementally to the angle specified in the Increment box.


Lets you specify the increment (in degrees) by which you want to rotate each successive object in the spray.


Enable to rotate objects in relation to the path.


Enable to rotate objects in relation to the page.


Opens the Offset dialog box, which lets you specify settings for offsetting the spray from the curve.


Enable to offset the objects from the curve by the distance specified in the Offset box.


Lets you specify the distance by which you want to offset the objects from the curve.


Lets you specify the position of the offset objects relative to the curve


Resets the settings of the selected spraylist to the saved settings. If you have changed the settings of the spraylist, you can choose to save the new settings.


Opens the Create Playlist dialog box, which lets you create a playlist from the spraylist.


Displays a list of all the objects saved to the spraylist.


Displays a list of the objects selected for the object spray.


Displays a preview of the object selected from the spraylist or playlist.


Moves the selected object up one place in the playlist.


Moves the selected object down one place in the playlist.


Reverses the order of the playlist.


Adds the object selected from the spraylist to the playlist.


Removes the selected object from the playlist.


Adds all the objects in the spraylist to the playlist.


Clears the playlist.


No related topics were found.


No topics were found.


 Lets you select objects and then move or resize them.


 Lets you manipulate nodes and paths to change the shape of objects.


 Holding down the mouse button on either of the tools shown opens the Zoom flyout.


 Holding down the mouse button on any of the six tools shown opens the Curve flyout.


 Holding down the mouse button on any of the five tools shown opens the Interactive Tools flyout.


 Lets you draw freehand lines and shapes by dragging the cursor across the drawing page.


 Lets you draw curves by placing nodes and shaping the line segments between the nodes.


 Lets you apply strokes or objects to a curve. The Artistic Media tool has five modes: Preset, Brush, Object Sprayer, Calligraphic, and Pressure-sensitive.


 Lets you draw curves as if you are using a pressure-sensitive pen.


 Lets you draw curves as if you are using a calligraphic pen.


 Lets you draw curves using preset strokes.


 Lets you apply a series of objects to a curve.


 Opens the Rotation dialog box, which lets you specify rotation angle and rotation increment settings.


 Opens the Offset dialog box, which lets you specify settings for offsetting the spray from the curve.


 Adds the selected object to a new or existing spraylist.


 Opens the Create Playlist dialog box, which lets you create a playlist from the spraylist.


 Lets you draw vertical, horizontal, slanted, and angular dimension lines, as well as callouts.


 Lets you draw vertical dimension lines.


 Lets you draw horizontal dimension lines.


 Lets you draw slanted dimension lines.


 Lets you draw angular dimension lines.


 Lets you draw callouts.


 Lets you connect two objects with a line.


 Lets you draw flow lines between objects.


 Lets you draw rectangles and squares.


 Lets you draw ellipses and circles.


 Holding down the mouse button on any of the three tools shown opens the Object flyout.


 Lets you draw polygons and stars.


 Lets you draw symmetrical and logarithmic spirals.


 Makes the spiral you want to draw with the Spiral tool symmetrical; i.e., the distance between each revolution is constant.


 Makes the spiral you want to draw with the Spiral tool logarithmic; i.e., the distance between each revolution increases towards the spiral's outer edge.


 Lets you draw a grid.


 Lets you apply a transparency to an object. Fill properties that you apply before the transparency are displayed through the transparency.


 Locks connector lines to the object nodes to which they are connected. If this button is disabled, the connector lines join two objects across the shortest possible distance.


 Lets you draw both horizontal and vertical dimension lines.


The drawing tools include the Rectangle tool, the Ellipse tool, the Polygon tool, the Spiral tool, and the Graph Paper tool.


 Lets you change the orientation and appearance of objects, and gives you access to the four Free Transform tools on the Property Bar.


 Lets you erase portions of an object without breaking any closed paths.


 Lets you type words directly in the Drawing Window.


 Holding down the mouse button on either of the two tools shown opens the Eyedropper flyout.


Lets you fill an object with a color that you select from an object in your drawing using the Eyedropper tool.


Lets you select a fill color from an object in your drawing.


 Holding down the mouse button on either of the two tools shown opens the Interactive Fill flyout.


 Lets you apply fills to the selected object.


 Lets you apply a mesh object to simple objects, curves, and bitmaps.


 Lets you apply a Push or Pull distortion, a Zipper distortion, or a Twister distortion to the selected object. Distortion tools are displayed on the Property Bar.


  Lets you create a series of concentric shapes radiating into, or out of an object. You can adjust a contour by using controls on the Property Bar.


 Lets you distort the shape of an object by applying an envelope to it and shaping the envelope.


 Lets you give objects a three-dimensional look. Using the controls on the Property Bar, you can apply vector and bitmap extrusions to objects.


 Lets you create the illusion of depth in a two-dimensional drawing. You can adjust properties such as feathering, opacity, edge style, and color.


 Lets you draw a polygon or star. You can draw a star when the button appears pressed.


 Lets you set the sharpness of stars and star-shaped polygons.


 Lets you specify the number of sides on a polygon or the number of points on a star you want to draw with the Polygon tool.


 Lets you specify an angle for the Calligraphic pen nib.


 Enable to display the unit of measure beside the dimension text. The Show Units For Dimension button is not available for U.S. Engineering and U.S. Architectural styles.


 Lets you choose where you want the dimension text placed, relative to the dimension line.


 Lets you to separate a subpath from an object to create a separate path.


 Lets you specify the direction of an arc or pie shape you want to draw with the Ellipse tool.


 Converts an arc or a pie shape to an ellipse.


 Converts an ellipse or arc to a pie shape.


 Converts an ellipse or pie shape to an arc.


 Converts objects to curve objects.


 Lets you specify the size of the area that you want to erase.


 Lets you create subpaths of a object instead of creating two separate objects.


 Lets you automatically close objects that are open after you cut them using the Knife tool.


 Snap points on objects act as points of attachment for connector lines, dimension lines, and, when Snap To Objects is enabled, other objects. All objects have snap points associated with them. The exact location of these snap points depends on the object. When Snap To Objects is enabled, every snap point on every object takes on a gravitational effect, attracting other objects you draw or move nearby.


 Text indicating the distance or angle measured by a dimension line. You can customize the style and position of dimension text.


 Lets you specify the number of revolutions in the spiral you want to draw with the Spiral tool.


 Lets you specify the factor for increasing the distance between each revolution of a logarithmic spiral you want to draw with the Spiral tool.


 Lets you specify the number of rows and columns in the grid you want to draw with the Graph Paper tool.


 Lets you apply brush strokes to a curve.


 Adds nodes to the selected curve or envelope.


 Deletes the selected node or nodes.


 Aligns selected nodes of an object and their associated control points.


 Breaks a curve into two or more subpaths at the selected nodes.


 Joins two selected end nodes of a single curve object.


 Displays eight stretching/scaling handles that let you stretch and scale selected parts of a curve.


 Displays eight rotating/skewing handles that let you rotate and skew selected parts of a curve.


 Closes an open path.


 Draws a line between two unconnected nodes. Each node must be at the end of a path.


 Changes the selected node to a cusp node.


 Changes the selected node to a smooth node.


 Changes the selected node to a symmetrical node.


 Changes the selected curve or envelope segment from curved to straight.


 Changes the selected curve or envelope segment from straight to curved.


Lets you break an object into separate objects. For example, when you cut a circle in two places, you create two separate pie-shaped objects. You can also set the Knife tool to break an object into subpaths rather than into separate objects.


 Holding down the mouse button on either of the four tools shown opens the Shape Edit flyout.


When dragging a fill color to an object, the cursor changes shape from [image] to [image] as you move over the object, to show where the color will be applied.


When dragging an outline color to an object, the cursor changes shape from [image] to [image] as you move over the object, to show where the color will be applied.


Lets you copy the mesh properties from another object you specify.


Lets you remove the mesh from an object.


Gives you quick access to the most commonly used outline styles, such as outline thickness, line pattern, Calligraphic pen effects, and arrowheads.


Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens the Outline flyout (shown below).


Lets you create and apply a custom outline color.


Lets you specify outline attributes.


Removes the outline from selected objects.


 Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens the Fill flyout (shown below). The Fill flyout provides preset fills, as well as various tools for setting uniform, fountain, texture, and pattern fills.


Lets you create and apply a uniform fill color.


Removes the fill from objects.


Lets you specify and apply a fountain fill.


 Enable to create a two-color pattern using two colors you choose.


Lets you specify and apply a pattern fill.


Enable to create a full-color pattern using lines and fills.


Enable to create a bitmap pattern.


Lets you specify and apply a texture fill.


Lets you apply a texture fill designed using the PostScript language.


Lets you apply a linear fountain fill, which displays a progression of colors in a straight line.


Lets you apply a radial fountain fill, which displays a progression of colors in a series of concentric circles that radiates from the center of the object.


Lets you apply a conical fountain fill, which displays a progression of colors in a circular path that radiates from the center of the object.


Lets you apply a square fountain fill, which displays a progression of colors in a series of concentric squares that radiates from the center of the object outwards.


A type of fountain transparency that shows a progression of transparencies in a straight line. You can apply custom or built-in linear transparencies that use a direct progression from one color to another or a cascade of different colors.


A type of fountain transparency that shows a progression of colors in a circular path that radiates from the center of the object. You can apply custom or built-in radial transparencies that use a direct progression from one color to another or a cascade of different colors.


A type of fountain transparency that shows a progression of colors in a series of concentric circles that radiates from the center of the object outward. You can apply custom or built-in conical transparencies that use a direct progression from one color to another or a cascade of different colors.


A type of fountain transparency that shows a progression of colors in a series of concentric squares that radiate from the center of the object outward. You can apply custom or built-in square transparencies that use a direct progression from one color to another or a cascade of different colors.


Opens the Save Texture As dialog box, in which you can add a texture to one of your libraries or modify an existing texture.


Deletes the selected texture from the library.


Add the new label style to the Label Style list.


Lets you lock and unlock the Steps box. The Steps box is unlocked when the button appears pressed.


Blends the intermediate fill colors, according to hue and saturation changes, along a straight line, beginning at the From color and continuing across the Color Wheel to the To color.


Blends the intermediate fill colors, according to hue and saturation changes, along a counterclockwise path around the Color Wheel.


Blends the intermediate fill colors, according to hue and saturation changes, along a clockwise path around the Color Wheel.


 Lets you choose or create a color for the start of the fountain fill's color progression.


Displays a Color Palette. Click the color you want or click the Others button to create a custom color.


Lets you apply fill and outline colors by clicking the left or right mouse button. You can also create your own color palettes with the colors you specify.


Lets you preview a custom fountain fill.


Lets you specify the blend settings for a two-color or custom fountain fill.


Lets you remove the fill or outline color from the selected object, leaving it transparent.


 Lets you set the start and end position of a fill, as well as set the angle, mid-point, and distribution of color.


Saves the current custom fountain fill. If you have created the fill, type a name in the Presets box. Custom preset fills are added to the list in alphabetical order.


Deletes the selected custom fountain fill from the Presets list.


Lets you specify a custom pattern tile width (top box) and height (bottom).


 Rotates and skews the pattern fill with the object.


 Lets you to size, rotate, skew, and position a pattern or texture fill.


Lets you specify the numbers of bands (steps) used to display a fountain fill.

When this box is locked, the fill prints with the number of steps specified in the Print Options dialog box and displays with the number of steps specified in the Options dialog box.


Lets you set the line (mid-point) between two colors in a fountain fill.


Lets you specify the angle (top box) at which a fill slants. You cannot specify an angle for radial fills.

Lets you specify the Edge Pad (bottom box), which determines how long the beginning and ending colors in a fill remain as solid colors before they start blending with the next color in the fountain fill. You cannot specify an edge pad for conical fills.


Lets you choose a dashed or dotted line style.


Lets you set the corner shape, which can affect the appearance of lines and curves, especially if the object has a particularly thick line weight or the object is particularly small.


Enable to draw mitered (pointed) corners.


Enable to draw rounded corners.


Enable to draw blunted (squared-off) corners.


Setting line caps determines the shape of the end of the line.


Enable to set squared-off (truncated) ends that are perpendicular to the path.


Enable to set the diameter of the cap equal to the width of the line. This causes the line to be slightly longer.


Enable to set square ends that extend half of the line width beyond the end of the line.


Displays a thumbnail image of the selected fountain fill. You can change the fill's orientation by dragging the pointer in the preview box. Hold down CTRL while dragging to constrain the angle of the arrow to 15-degree increments.


Displays a thumbnail image of the selected pattern. Click the preview box to display a list of available patterns.


Displays a thumbnail image of the selected pattern. Click the preview box to display a list of available patterns.


Displays a thumbnail image of the selected pattern. Click the preview box to display a list of available patterns.


Displays a thumbnail image of the currently selected pattern. Click the preview box to display a list of available patterns.


Depending on the color model selected, different boxes are displayed. For example, if you select CMYK, there will be four boxes, which represent the cyan, magenta, yellow and black component of the color.


Lets you choose a line-ending shape to apply to the start of an open path.


The nodes marked in red stretch the line-ending shape in one direction.


The nodes marked in red scale the line-ending shape evenly.


The nodes marked in red move the line-ending shape without changing its size or shape.


 Opens the Create A New Child Color dialog box, which lets you to create a child color based on the selected color style.


 Opens either the Edit Color Style or the Edit Child Color dialog box, which let you change the color of a color style.


 Opens the Create Shades dialog box, which lets you automatically create up to 20 child color styles from a selected color style.


 Opens the Automatically Create Color Styles dialog box, which lets you create color styles from the selected objects in your drawing.


 Lets you open an existing file or style template.


Saves the active drawing.


 Reverses the last action you performed.


 Restores changes reversed by the Undo command. It becomes available immediately after you click the Undo command.


 Begins a new file by creating a blank drawing page.


Go forward one page.


Go back one page.


Displays the active page. Click to display a dialog box in which you can specify the page you want to go to.


Controls how small or large a drawing appears on the screen. You can choose one of the preset magnification levels or type one of your own.


 Lets you choose a preset size for the Drawing Page.


Lets you specify the width (top box) and the height (bottom box).


Sets the Drawing Page so that its short end is horizontal.


Sets the Drawing Page so that its long end is horizontal.


Lets you set the ruler origin by dragging the ruler onto the Drawing Window.


Lets you magnify or reduce the view of your drawing.


Zooms in on your drawing by a factor of two.


Zooms out of your drawing by a factor of two or to the previous level of magnification.


Displays objects in the drawing at their actual size.


Fits all selected objects inside the Drawing Window.


Fits all objects in the Drawing Window.


Fits the entire Drawing Page inside the Drawing Window.


Fits the height of the Drawing Page inside the Drawing Window.


Fits the width of the Drawing Page inside the Drawing Window


 Zooms to an area you marquee select using the Zoom tool.


Lets you change your view by moving your drawing around in the Drawing Window.


Saves the current view and adds it to the list.


Deletes the view selected in the list.


Enables and disables the page information stored with a saved view.


Enables and disables the magnification level stored with a saved view.


 Snaps objects to the grid.


Snaps objects to guidelines.


Adds a page to your document.


Displays the last page of your document.


Displays the first page of your document.


Click the top button to apply the page size and orientation to the whole document. Click the bottom button to change the size or orientation of a single page in a multipage document.


Mirrors an object horizontally.


Mirrors an object vertically.


 Lets you move an object, relative to ruler coordinates, by specifying new values in the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) boxes.


 Lets you rotate an object around a fixed point, called the center of rotation.


 Lets you scale an object, or mirror an object vertically or horizontally.


 Lets you resize an object by scaling it along the horizontal and vertical axis simultaneously relative to its anchor point.


 Lets you slant the horizontal and vertical lines of an object simultaneously, relative to the object's anchor point.


 Enable to move an object a specified distance from its position in the Drawing Window.


Applies the transformation(s) to a copy of the selected object.


 Resets the settings of the selected spraylist to the saved settings. If you have changed the settings of the spraylist, you can choose to save the new settings.


 Lets you set the horizontal (top box) and vertical (bottom box) position of the object’s center of rotation.


 Lets you specify values (in degrees) to skew the object vertically and horizontally.


 Sizes or scales objects nonproportionally. Disable this button to maintain the ratio of height to width.


 Lets you select unfilled objects by clicking inside them. You can select unfilled objects in this way when the button appears pressed.


 Lets you position an object precisely using the Transformation Docker or the Property Bar.


 Lets you toggle between a square or circular nib shape when using the Eraser tool.


Lets you set the distance the selected object moves when you press one of the Arrow keys.


Lets you position text above the baseline or return the text to the baseline. Superscript is applied when the button appears pressed.


Lets you position text below the baseline or return the text to the baseline. Subscript is applied when the button appears pressed.


Lets you insert a Paragraph text frame inside an object.


Lets you insert Paragraph text from a Paragraph text frame to a new frame.


Lets you insert an object into Paragraph or Artistic text.


Lets you fit Artistic text to a path.


 Vertically skews each character, creating the impression that the text is standing upright on the path. The amount of skewing varies with the slope of the path.


 Horizontally skews each character, creating the impression that the text is turning in toward the screen. The amount of skewing varies with the slope of the path.


Aligns the baseline of the text with the path.


Aligns the ascender line of the text with the path.


Aligns the descender line of the text with the path.


Places the center of the text vertically on the path.


Lets you drag the text off the path.


 Places text on the other side of the path or returns text to its original position on the path. Text is placed on the other side of the path when the button appears pressed.


 Lets you add an underline to the selected text or remove it from text. Text is underlined when the button appears pressed.


 Lets you apply bold formatting to or remove it from the selected text. Bold formatting is applied when the button appears pressed.


 Lets you apply italic formatting to or remove it from the selected text. Italic formatting is applied when the button appears pressed.


 Decreases the indent of Paragraph text.


 Increases the indent of Paragraph text.


 Lets you add bullets or remove them from Paragraph text. Bullets are applied when the button appears pressed.


Lets you apply a drop cap to or remove it from the Paragraph text. A drop cap is applied when the button appears pressed.


Lets you display or hide nonprinting characters. Nonprinting characters are displayed when the button appears pressed.


Opens the Edit Text dialog box, which lets you apply formatting to Paragraph and Artistic text.


 Lets you adjust the horizontal space between text characters.


 Lets you adjust the vertical space between text characters.


Converts selected Artistic text, to Paragraph text, and vice-versa.


 Sets the angle of rotation for text characters. Positive values rotate text counterclockwise; negative values rotate text clockwise.


 Lets you specify the vertical distance between the text and the path.


 Lets you specify the distance by which you want to move the text along the path horizontally.


Lets you adjust the space between characters or words you select with the Shape tool.


Lets you adjust the space above and below characters or words you select with the Shape tool.


 The top button changes the default formatting properties for Artistic text when no text object is selected. The bottom button changes the default formatting properties for Paragraph text when no text object is selected.


 Lets you apply or remove a Paragraph Text Wrap style. You can choose from a variety of wrapping styles. Wrap Paragraph text is applied when the button appears pressed.


Copies the properties of the effect to another object.


Removes the effect from the object.


Lets you blend one object into another through a series of intermediate shapes. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout from which you can other tools that apply effects.


Applies a color progression that passes directly through the spectrum between the blend's start and end objects.


Applies a color progression that passes clockwise through the spectrum between the blend's start and end objects.


Applies a color progression that passes counterclockwise through the spectrum between the blend's start and end objects.


Sets the rate of object acceleration in the blend. Drag right to have objects get closer together as they approach the end object. Drag left to have objects get closer together as they approach the start object.


Sets the rate of color acceleration in the selected blend. Drag right to have colors move quicker through the spectrum as they approach the end object. Drag left to have colors move quicker through the spectrum as they approach the start object.


Enables and disables the acceleration of object size in the selected blend. When you enable this option, acceleration is reflected in terms of size, as well as object spacing and shape.


Lets you adjust the object and color acceleration of the selected blend.


Enables and disables the linking of color and object accelerations in the selected blend. When you enable this option, color acceleration automatically matches the rate you set for objects using the Blend Object Acceleration slider.


Lets you map the start and end nodes in a blend, split a blend, or fuse a split blend.


Lets you show the path to which the blend is fit or change the relationship between the blend and its path.


Lets you show the start or end object of a blend and select a new start or end object for the blend.


Sets the rotation of intermediate objects in a blend. You can set values between -360 and 360. Negative values rotate the shapes clockwise.


Rotates the intermediate objects in a blend around a point midway between the blend's start and end objects. The result is an arc-shaped blend. The amount of rotation depends on the setting in the Blend Direction box.


Lets you start a new path, show a path, and detach objects from a path.


Lets you specify a new start object or show the start of a blend.


Lets you specify a new end object or show the end of a blend.


The top button lets you specify the number of intermediate objects between the blend's start and end objects. The bottom button lets you specify the spacing between the intermediate objects for a blend that's fitted to a path.


Lets you specify the number of concentric objects you want to create. If you select the To Center option, CorelDRAW automatically places as many concentric objects as possible given the offset value.


Lets you specify the distance between concentric objects.


 Adds contour lines inside the outline of the selected object.


 Adds contour lines to the center of the selected object.


Adds contour lines outside the outline of the selected object.


Creates a color progression that passes through the color spectrum in a straight line from the original object's fill color to the last contour object's fill color.


Creates a color progression that passes through the color spectrum in a clockwise path from the original object's fill color to the last contour object's fill color.


Creates a color progression that passes through the color spectrum in a counterclockwise path from the original object's fill color to the last contour object's fill color.


Sets the color of the last contour line on the selected object.


Lets you change the number of concentric objects.


Shapes an envelope without limits. You can move envelope nodes freely and use control points to make precise adjustments.


Shapes an envelope by applying a single-arc curve to a segment of an envelope.


Shapes an envelope by applying a double-arc curve to a segment of an envelope.


Shapes an envelope by applying a straight line to a segment of an envelope.


Adds a rectangular envelope to the selected object. You can reshape the object, based on the shape you give the envelope.


Lets you keep the lines of an object straight or convert them to curves. Keeping lines straight is applied when the button appears pressed.


Changes the selected envelope segment from curved to straight. This adjusts the way the segment reacts when you edit it.


Changes the selected envelope segment from straight to curved. This adjusts the way the segment reacts when you edit it.


Adds additional nodes to the selected envelope. Envelope nodes let you make minute adjustments to give the envelope a more complex shape.


Deletes selected nodes from an envelope. Deleting nodes from an envelope simplifies the envelope's shape.


Changes the selected envelope node to a cusp node, which affects the node's control points. The control points of a cusp node move independently of each other.


Changes the selected node to a smooth node, which affects the node's control points. The control points of a smooth node move directly opposite each other, and you can vary the distance between the control points and the node independently.


Changes the selected node to a symmetrical node, which affects the node's control points. The control points of a symmetrical node move directly opposite each other, and they move an equal distance from the node.


Lets you apply a vector extrusion to an object.


Applies the fill of the control object to all of its extruded surfaces.


Lets you apply a color, other than that of the control object, to the extruded surfaces.


Lets you set the depth of an extrusion. The depth represents how far the extrusion recedes towards its vanishing point. You can only set the depth for a perspective extrusion.


Lets you specify new horizontal and vertical coordinates for an extrusion's vanishing point.


Lets you apply the extruded surfaces' fill to the beveled surfaces or choose a different color for the beveled surfaces. Beveled surfaces use the extruded surfaces' fill when the button appears pressed.


Lets you blend two colors along the length of the extruded surfaces.


Lets you add or remove a simulated light source. A light source is projected toward the selected extruded object when the button appears pressed.


Lets you apply a bitmap extrusion to an object.


 Provides additional controls that let you set lighting properties for the selected vector extrusion.


Provides controls that let you apply Point light to a bitmap extrusion.


Adds a Point light, which you can position to cast a light in a specific direction.


Removes the selected Point light from the bitmap extrusion.


Provides controls that let you apply Ambient light to a bitmap extrusion.


Provides additional controls that let you set bevel properties for the selected control object.


Provides additional controls that let you set bevel properties for the selected bitmap extrusion.


Provides additional controls that let you set a bevel for the control object interactively.


Provides additional controls that let you specify rotation values for the selected extrusion.


Provides additional controls that let you set color properties for the extruded surfaces of the selected object.


Fixes the contents of a transparency so that you can move the transparency without changing its appearance.


Switches the From and To colors in a Custom Color Map lens.


Opens the Fountain Transparency, Pattern Transparency, or Texture Transparency dialog box, which let you edit the transparency.


Move the slider to adjust the opacity of the transparency. Lower values produce a more opaque transparency; higher values produce a more transparent transparency.


Creates a two-color bitmap pattern, which includes the two colors that you choose.


Creates a full-color bitmap pattern, which is a regular color picture, comparable to an electronic photograph.


Creates a vector pattern, which is composed of lines and fills, instead of dots of color like a bitmap. These patterns are smoother and more complex than bitmap images and generally easier to manipulate.


Distorts the selected object either by pushing the object's nodes away from the center of the distortion or by pulling the object's nodes toward the center of the distortion.


Lets you apply a Zipper distortion to the selected object.


Lets you apply a Twister distortion to the selected object.


Lets you make the Zipper distortion random or return it to a uniform pattern. Random Zipper distortion is applied when the button appears pressed.


Lets you smoothen the points of the Zipper distortion or return the points to the distortion. Smooth Zipper distortion is applied when the button appears pressed.


Lets you emphasize the Zipper distortion in a specific area of the selected object. Local Distortion is applied when the button appears pressed.


Lets you position a selected object's distortion effect at the exact center of the object.


Twists the selected object in a clockwise direction.


Twists the selected object in a counterclockwise direction.


The start handle lets you change the center of the distortion. The end handle lets you change the intensity of the distortion. For Zipper distortions, the slider lets you adjust the number of points.


The start handle lets you change the perspective type. The end handle lets you change the angle of the drop shadow. The slider lets you change the opacity.


Locks and unlocks a layer to prevent or allow editing.


Switches to Layer Manager view, displaying lists of layers, but no objects or sublevels.


Displays and hides a layer.


Enables and disables printing of a layer.


Lets you create an object by joining objects at points where their paths intersect.


 Lets you reshape an object by removing the area overlapped by other objects.


Lets you create an object from the area where two or more objects overlap.


Separates combined objects, leaving the objects with their original shapes.


Adds a layer to your drawing.


Enable to allow editing across all the layers in your drawing.


 Displays or hides detailed information about objects such as fills, outlines, and shapes. Information is displayed when the appears pressed.


 Lets you create a database to maintain and organize information about individual objects or groups of objects in a drawing.


 Lets you size and position the top left corner of an image at an exact location on your drawing.


 Crops the bitmap down to the size of its bounding box.


 Lets you specify as many as 10 colors from a bitmap that you want to hide, and 10 colors that you want to show.


 Lets you resample the image size by increasing or decreasing the dimensions and resolution of a bitmap.


 Opens Corel PHOTO-PAINT, allowing you to edit a bitmap.


  Flips the response curve vertically.


  Flips the response curve horizontally.


 Lets you adjust the colors in your image using HSB (hue, saturation, and brightness) values.


 Lets you shift the colors in your image between CMY (cyan, magenta, and yellow) color values and RGB (red, green, and blue) values.


 Lets you pick up detail in a low-contrast drawing without significantly affecting the shadows or highlights.


 Lets you adjust the colors in your drawing using HSL (hue, saturation and lightness) values.


 Lets you specify the location of the light source relative to the bitmap (theoretically, in the center of the circle).


 Displays a two-dimensional model of the image and lets you drag the corner nodes to change the perspective of the image.


 The Preview window in the Perspective dialog box shows how dragging nodes affects the perspective of the bitmap.


Lets you select a color from a bitmap.You can then use the other controls in the Bitmap Color Mask Docker window to mask or show the color you select.


 Lets you set the center point in the Image Window from which the effect originates. The Set Center button is on when the button appears pressed.


 The 3D model shows how adjustments using the Vertical and Horizontal sliders affect the rotation and position of the bitmap.


  Lets you choose a dark color in the Image Window.


  Lets you choose a medium color in the Image Window.


  Lets you choose a highlighted color in the Image Window.


Lets you choose a replacement color for the image from the Image Window.


Lets you choose the color you want to replace in the image from the Image Window.


Shapes the response curve as you drag the curve by smoothing the distribution of values.


Shapes the response curve as you drag the curve by retaining straight line segments between the nodes of the response curve.


  Shapes the response curve as you drag the curve.


  Weighs corrections toward the midtones when you shape the response curve.


 Lets you impose the same value for multiple options of an effect or allows you to enter different values for each option. The lock is activated when the button appears pressed.


 Lets you specify the angle in which you want to apply the effect.


  Lets you specify the angle in which you want to apply the effect.


  Lets you choose colors in the Image Window to set as output values for the lightest image pixels.


  Lets you choose colors in the Image Window to set as input values for the lightest image pixels.


  Opens the Save Preset dialog box, which lets you save the current frame.


 Lets you access bitmap color masks saved on your computer.


 Lets you access a file stored on your computer.


 Embeds the selected bitmap into the CorelDRAW document.


 Updates the status of all out-of-date bitmaps.


 Launches the system default browser of the selected hyperlink, or launches the associated bitmap editor of the selected bitmap.


 Reruns the Docker window's starter thread to check the validity of all links.


Opens CorelTRACE, allowing you convert to a bitmap to a vector drawing.


 Lets you edit a color without affecting any of the other colors in the image.


  Mirrors the response curve axis.


 Opens the Select a Plug-in Folder dialog box, which lets you specify the location of the plug-in folder.


 Removes the selected bitmap plug-in from the list and from the Bitmaps menu.


 Displays the location of the folders that contain the bitmap plug-ins.


 Places a page curl on your drawing using the corner indicated on the button image.


 Lets you choose a color from the image to apply elsewhere in the drawing.


 Displays a hypergraphic as the hotspot. The cross-hatch pattern covers only the hypergraphic.


 Displays a hypergraphic's bounding box as the hotspot. The cross-hatch pattern extends to the hypergraphic's bounding box.


 Identifies all the hypergraphics that are in the active drawing. The hypergraphics are covered by a cross-hatch pattern.


Lets you choose a cross-hatch color for Internet objects when the Show Internet Objects button appears pressed.


 Lets you choose a fill color for a hypergraphic's background.


Lets you scroll to and select the conflicting object.


Lets you scroll down through the HTML object conflict list to select a later warning or error message that you want to fix.


Lets you scroll up through the HTML object conflict list to select an earlier warning or error message that you want to fix.


Opens the HTML Conflicts page of the Options dialog box, which lets you set the type of conflicts you want displayed.


Rescans the active page of the drawing to check for HTML object conflicts.


Rescans the entire drawing to check for HTML object conflicts.


Automatically repairs HTML object conflicts that don't need manual repair.


Scripting


Starts recording a script of all your operations in CorelDRAW.


Stops recording your script in CorelDRAW.


Plays the selected script.


 Lets you type words directly on the screen as Artistic text or create a Paragraph text frame and enter text in the frame. The Text tool button displays one of the icons shown above, depending on the Asian language version of Microsoft Windows installed.


 Enable to orient new or selected text left to right.


 Enable to orient new or selected text top to bottom.


3D Model (3DMF)

The 3DMF file format, developed by Apple Computer Inc., is one of the native file formats of QuickDRAW. This file format facilitates the exchange of three-dimensional data between applications, and supports Virtual Reality Modeling Language (VRML).

QuickDraw's 3DMF (3D metafile format) can contain any 3D information the user can create, including all types of geometries and objects, textures, lights, shaders, cameras, active renderers, material properties, hierarchical information and more. Both text and binary formats are supported and 3DMF files are supported across Mac, Windows, and Unix platforms.

Importing notes

When you import a 3DMF file into CorelDRAW the 3D editing controls appear on the toolbar. Controls appear that let you adjust the render settings, distant and ambient light, spot lights, point lights and more. When you finish making adjustments you click the Drawing Page to render the image. If you want to make more changes after rendering double-click the image to restore the editing controls. 3DMF images import onto the center of the Drawing Page. You are not given the option to place the image before import. Multi-importing of 3DMF files is supported in Corel PHOTO-PAINT and Corel VENTURA only. In these applications, you make changes in rotation, camera angle and light source in the Import 3D Model dialog box before importing the image. Once the 3D image has been imported and rendered, you are unable to make further modifications to the 3D element of the image.


Adobe Illustrator (AI)

The AI file format, developed by Adobe Systems for the Windows and Macintosh platforms, is a native file format of Adobe Illustrator. It is primarily vector based, although later versions, such as versions 6.0 and 7.0, support bitmap information. Files created by applications implementing the full AI specification can be large and complex and may be slow to render.

Versions supported

Corel applications provide full support for all AI file formats up to and including Adobe Illustrator 88, 1.1, 3.x, 4.x, 5.x, 6.0, and 7.0.

Importing notes

The AI file format is used as an alternative for those postscript file formats that don't import properly through the All Files (*.*) option.

Corel applications support the following features when importing .AI files:

•	Adobe Photoshop paths

•	Adobe Illustrator 7.0 files

•	CMYK fills

•	Pantone fills (if the Pantone color is one not supported by the Corel application the fill will imported as CMYK)

•	nested groups, filled open paths, locked objects, and locked object groups

•	text and vectors

•	bitmaps saved as an inline images

Corel applications cannot import .AI files containing bitmaps that are linked as .EPS files.

Exporting notes

Corel applications support the following features when exporting to the AI file format:

•	A maximum of 50 fountain steps

•	Pantone Process colors

•	Multiple layers (Adobe Illustrator versions 6.0 and 7.0)

•	Inline images (Adobe Illustrator versions 6.0 and 7.0) instead of linking images as EPS files.

•	Cropped bitmap support for (Adobe Illustrator versions 6.0 and 7.0)

•	PowerClip object bitmaps (Adobe Illustrator versions 6.0 and 7.0)

•	Bitmap pattern fills (Adobe Illustrator versions 6.0 and 7.0)

•	Texture fills (Adobe Illustrator versions 6.0 and 7.0)

•	No dependency on the Courier font

•	Nested groups

Adobe Illustrator and Corel applications differ in the way paths are wound and filled. Therefore, curves with multiple subpaths exported from Corel applications do not always fill properly in Adobe Illustrator. To facilitate a proper fill, enable the Simulate Complex Filled Curves check box in the Adobe Illustrator Export dialog box.

Enable the Simulate Outline Effects check box to render complex outlines as filled polygons. The resulting image has an increased number of nodes and looks closer to the original. Disable the Simulate Outline Effects check box to remove outline effects such as calligraphy and arrowheads in favor of outlines that are easier to edit. The removed outline effects are retained in the EPS portion of the AI file format.


Adobe Photoshop (PSD)

The PSD file format, developed by Adobe Systems for the Windows and Macintosh platforms, is a native file format of Adobe Photoshop. The PSD file format is bitmap based.

Versions supported

Versions 2.5 to 4.0 of the PSD file format can be imported into a Corel application. Only version 4.0 is supported for exporting to the PSD file format.

Corel applications support the following color depths when importing or exporting to the PSD file format:

•	1-bit Black & White

•	8-bit Grayscale

•	8-bit Grayscale Multi-Channel ( Export from Photo-paint only )

•	16-bit Grayscale

•	Duotone Multi-Channel ( Export from Photo-paint only )

•	4-bit Paletted

•	8-bit Paletted

•	24-bit RGB

•	24-bit RGB Multi-Channel ( Export from Photo-paint only )

•	24-bit LAB (Export from Photo-paint only)

•	24-bit LAB Multi-Channel (Export from Photo-paint only)

•	32-bit CMYK

•	32-bit CMYK Multi-Channel (Export from Photo-paint only)

•	48-bit RGB ( Doesn't support objects or channels on export ) (Export from Photo-paint only)

Notes

Duotone and multitone .PSD images are converted to grayscale when loaded into Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

The PSD file format also supports the following:

•	RLE compression

•	Maximum image size of 30,000 x 30,000 pixels

•	Channels (Export from Photo-paint only)

•	Objects (Export from Photo-paint only)

•	Masking information


Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF)

The PDF file format, developed by Adobe Systems, is the native file format of the Adobe Acrobat exchange system. It is a metafile format which allows a file saved in a single format to be opened, viewed, browsed, and printed on any of the major desktop computing platforms (DOS, Macintosh, Windows, and UNIX). It is based on Adobe PostScript, a page-description language used by laser printers and imagesetters; therefore, the PDF file format can describe any page, regardless of the composition of formatted text and graphics. In addition, PDF files are highly compressed making them optimal for online viewing and transportation via e-mail, the World Wide Web and intranets.

Versions supported

Corel applications provide full import support for PDF file formats up to and including version 3.01.

Importing notes

You can import a multipage .PDF file into a Corel application. Corel VENTURA only imports the first page of a PDF file. To import other single pages of a multipage document you need to use the Adobe Placeable Enhanced PDF Page file format.

Other notes

The PDF file format has the following features:

•	"Pre-rasterized" and compressed graphics. - Roughly 25% of size for vector graphics (with no loss of image quality) and anywhere from .5% to 75% of size for bitmap graphics (depending on settings). All PDF files are scalable (800%) and printable on postscript and non-postscript printers.

•	Embedded Type 1 and TrueType fonts (optional) - the type characters and instructions for kerning and manipulating fonts are embedded in the file so users don't need the font to view or process it. Simple changes are also possible.

•	Simplified postscript code - Many postscript files have graphic elements that need to be rasterized in RIP devices, sometimes without success. The simplified code of PDF files reduces the complexity of these elements.

•	Forms and indexing features - Indexes can be made across many documents stored on servers.

•	Sound and QuickTime files linkage- Makes Acrobat Exchange a complete presentation generator and driver.

•	Enabled hypertext-like linking - Interactive links between pages and views across documents.

•	Supports, CCITT Group 3, CCITT Group 4, LZW, and JPEG compression types


Adobe Placeable PDF Page (PDF)

The Adobe Placeable Enhanced PDF Page is used to import a single page from a multi-page PDF file. The PDF file format, a metafile, is a native file format of the Adobe Acrobat exchange system. It is based on Adobe PostScript which is a page-description language used by laser printers and imagesetters.

Importing notes

An Adobe Placeable Enhanced PDF file comes into a Corel application as an EPS (Encapsulated Postscript) file. Only the header information is displayed.


Adobe Type 1 Font (PFB)

PFB Files

A Printer Font Binary (PFB) file (i.e., "outline" files) has mathematical descriptions in the PostScript page description language for each character of the typeface. Applications and printers use PFB files to print fonts, and ATM uses them to smooth fonts (i.e., "rasterize") on-screen.

Type 1 Font Files

Most Type 1 fonts are single master fonts, which only permit style editing (e.g., Roman, italic, bold). A single master Type 1 font contains two files: a PFM file and a PFB file.

Some Type 1 fonts are also available in multiple master format. You can customize design elements of multiple master fonts such as weight, width, style, and optical size. A multiple master base font is the multiple master font itself, from which you create variations called multiple master instances. A multiple master base font is composed of a PFM file, a PFB file, and an MMM file. A multiple master instance is composed of a PFM file and a PSS file.


AutoCAD (DXF)

The DXF file format is a native file format of AutoCAD. It is vector based and supports up to 256 colors. It can also store three-dimensional objects.

Versions supported

Corel applications support version 12, 13, and 14 of the DXF file format.

Importing notes

When importing a 3-dimensional image, ensure that it is saved with the view which you want to use in the Corel application. Whenever possible, use polylines in DXF files rather than regular lines. This reduces the complexity of the file when it is imported into a Corel application.

Special characters in text strings:

•	If a character is referred to by number, the number must be three digits; i.e., character 65 is %065.

•	%010 is considered to be a carriage return and line feed.

•	Any non-standard character becomes a "?" in Corel applications, including the degrees symbol, the +/- tolerance symbol, and the circle dimensioning symbol.

Corel applications do not support the following when importing .DXF files:

•	Shape entities

•	Polylines including variable-width polylines, elevation (group 38), mesh M and N vertex counts (groups 71 and 72), smooth surface M and N densities (groups 73 and 74), and smooth surface type (group 75)

•	Special 3D shapes, such as cones, spheres, and torids

•	3D extrusion of circles, arcs, and text

•	3D extrusion of polylines with a specified width and/or dashed patterns

•	Invisible lines in 3D face entities

•	Automatic wireframes

•	Hidden lines removal

•	Extrusion direction assumed to be parallel to the z-axis

•	Binary DXF file format

•	Paper space entities within a model space

•	AutoCAD layers cannot be mapped to CorelDRAW layers

•	MLINE command

•	Objects created with AutoCAD 3rd party applications

•	DXF files greater than 30" in either X or Y direction are scaled to within a 10" size when imported

Other notes on importing .DXF files:

•	Corel tries to center the imported image in an 18x18 inch area. This size is not guaranteed though, especially with 3-D images. Drawings larger than 18x18 inches can be scaled to fit within these dimensions. You will see a dialog box that allows you to enter a scale factor. You may scale an image up or down as long as it is not larger than 18 x 18 inches.

•	Dashed lines in the .DXF file will be given a similar dashed line pattern in the Corel application.

•	If you have a problem with the scattering of "dimension entities" in your imported file, go back to your original drawing in AutoCAD and explode the dimension entity before creating the .DXF file.

•	The line width of a polyline is imported as the minimum line width which that polyline had in AutoCAD. The maximum line width is four inches. Variable line width information is not retained when the file is imported.

•	Curve resolution factor can be set to a value between 0.0 and 1.0 inches. The entered value can be very accurate, up to eight decimal places are accepted. While a setting of 0.0 results in the highest resolution, it also increases the file size greatly. A curve resolution of 0.004 inches is recommended.

•	Solid and trace entities are filled, provided the view is not 3D (i.e., they are filled on x-y axis view only).

•	A point is imported as an ellipse of minimum size. An extruded point is imported as a line segment with two nodes. PDMODE is not considered.

•	Files exported as "Entities only" may import into Corel applications incorrectly due to a lack of header information.

Exporting notes

When you export a drawing to the DXF file format it is saved in a vector format that can then be accepted by CAD/CAM programs and devices such as AutoCAD and certain computer-driven sign and glass cutters. Only the outlines of the objects are exported.

Corel applications do not support the following features when exporting to the DXF file format:

•	Calligraphic pen effects, dashed and dotted lines, or arrowheads. All line weights are converted to solid lines 0.003" thick.

•	Bitmaps

•	Fills. Texture fills are replaced with a solid gray fill. All objects except rectangles are broken into several segments when exported. For example, an ellipse will export as 4 quarter arcs. Because of this, all objects except rectangles will lose their fill. White fills will export as black.

•	Filled objects that have no outlines will have an outline appended to them in the .DXF export process.

•	The DXF file format does not support file compression so .DXF files can become quite large, if text is exported as curves.


AutoCAD Drawing (DWG)

The DWG file format is vector based and is a native of AutoCAD.

Versions supported

Corel applications support versions 12,13, and 14 of the DWG file formats.

Importing notes

The following features are supported when importing a .DWG file:

•	When a color depth is not specified, the DWG file format uses the default color depth option which is 256 colors.

•	Only one viewport is imported from a multi-viewport .DWG file.

•	AutoCAD ensures that colors from 1 to 7 remain the same when exporting to another system. The 7th color is either black or white depending on the background of the file.

Corel applications do not support the following features when importing .DWG files:

•	Control codes and special characters embedded in text shapes

•	The Mline command

•	The Tolerance command symbols

•	Body, Region and 3D solids

•	Elevation

•	Extended ASCII characters

•	Shape entities, e.g., symbols


CALS Compressed Bitmap (CAL)

The CAL file format supports a monochrome (1-bit) color depth. It is used as a data graphics exchange format for computer aided design and manufacturing, technical graphics, and image processing applications.

Version supported

Corel applications provide full support for Type I .CAL files.

Other notes

The CAL file format supports an unlimited image size and uses the CCITT 4 compression type during import and export.


Compuserve Bitmap (GIF)

The GIF file format, developed by CompuServe Inc., is bitmap based. It can be used to store multiple bitmaps in a file. The GIF file format is supported by the World Wide Web, MS-DOS, Macintosh, UNIX, Amiga, and other platforms.

Versions supported

Corel applications import versions 87A and 89A of the GIF file format, but export to version 89A only. Version 87A supports basic features and interlacing. The newer version, 89A, includes all the features found in 87A plus the ability to have transparent colors. Version 89A also includes comments and other data of the image file.

Importing notes

Corel applications support the following color depths when importing .GIF files:

•	1-bit black-and-white

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	16 color (4-bit) and 256 color (8-bit) paletted

Only the first frame is available when importing an animated .GIF file.

Exporting notes

•	Corel applications support the following color depths when exporting to the GIF file format:

•	1-bit Black-and-white

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	16 color (4-bit) and 256 color (8-bit) paletted

•	Masks are used to create transparent areas in files ( export from Corel PHOTO-PAINT only. Masks will not be saved in 1-bit black & white files.)

Other notes

The GIF file format supports a maximum image size of 64,535 pixels by 64,535 pixels and uses LZW compression.


Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM)

The CGM file format can contain both vectors and bitmaps but .CGM files usually contain one graphic type or the other - rarely both. The CGM file format normally stores information in ASCII format but can also store information in a binary format to produce smaller files. The CGM file format can be used in all applications. However, it is especially designed to work in vector graphics applications such as CorelDRAW.

Versions supported

Corel applications support all versions of compatible ANSI CGM file formats.

Importing notes

Corel's .CGM import filter imports vector graphics from such programs as Harvard Graphics, Lotus Freelance, and Arts & Letters. The filter also gives you access to graphics produced on mini and mainframe computers, as well as Clipart from vendors such as MGI and New Vision. The .CGM filter only accepts markers supported by the CGM file format standard. Private-use markers are ignored.

Text is editable, provided the file is exported by the originating program using the correct text options. The typeface you see may not correspond to the one used in the originating program. However, you can easily change this in the Corel application.

The following features are not supported by Corel's .CGM import filter:

•	Cropped Bitmaps

•	PostScript, full-color bitmap, two-color bitmap and texture fills

•	Interactive and Transparency Fills

•	Multiple layers

•	Multiple Pages

•	Bitmap Powerclips

•	Text fit to path

•	Lens effects

Exporting notes

Corel's .CGM export filter saves drawings in a vector format for use in desktop publishing programs, such as Corel VENTURA or Aldus PageMaker.

The .CGM export filter supports radial and linear fountain fills but not square or conical ones. PostScript textures are converted to solid gray fills.

The number of bands used to represent fountain fills in the exported file is determined by the Preview Fountain Steps setting on the Display tab of the Options dialog box, under Tools.


CorelDRAW (CDR)

The CDR file format is a native of CorelDRAW. It can contain both vectors and bitmaps.

Versions supported

CorelDRAW and Corel VENTURA can import versions 5 to 8.

Importing notes

The Import feature of CorelDRAW adds a .CDR file to the current drawing, unlike the Open feature which adds the .CDR file to a new page. An imported CorelDRAW file appears as a group of objects. Use the Ungroup command in the Arrange menu to manipulate individual objects within the imported graphic.

To import a .CDR file into another application such as Corel VENTURA, the .CDR file must be saved in CorelDRAW with the Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX) Data option enabled. Corel VENTURA can import CorelDRAW files without Presentation Exchange Data, only if CorelDRAW is installed on your computer system. The CMX file format does not maintain OLE and object links (e.g., links between blend objects in CorelDRAW).

Drop shadows created in CorelDRAW may appear with a white box around them when imported into Corel VENTURA and printed.

Exporting notes

To export a .CDR file into another application such as Corel VENTURA the Save Presentation Exchange Data option must be enabled. The .CDR file is saved in CMX file format (along with the .CDR format) for use in OLE operations. This option is found in the Save As dialog box and not in the Export dialog box.

You can't export a CorelDRAW file from Corel VENTURA.

Other notes

The CDR file format uses proprietary compression.


CorelDRAW Compressed (CDX)

The CDX file format is a native file format of Corel ArtShow. It can contain both vectors and bitmaps. Only CorelDRAW can read .CDX files.

Importing notes

When you import a .CDX file, it creates a temporary file in your windows system TEMP directory called CDRUNCOM.cdr. This is the uncompressed version of the file.

Other notes

The CDX file format uses an internal proprietary compression algorithm.


Corel CMX Compressed (CPX)

The CPX file format is a native file format of Corel ArtShow 5. It can contain both vectors and bitmaps.

Importing notes

When you import a .CPX file, it creates a temporary file in your system TEMP directory called CMXUNCOM.tmp. This is the uncompressed version of the .CPX file. To view this uncompressed file, change its extension to .CMX and import it.

Other notes

The CPX file format uses an internal proprietary compression algorithm.


Corel Image Map (HTM)

The Corel Image Map filter exports you image as an image map. An image Map allows you to associate links to separate web pages on your website by clicking on different areas of an image. This is a very useful tool because it makes navigation of your site easier for your visitors.

An image map consists of:

The IMAGE file -- An image in the GIF or JPG format

The MAP file -- A textfile which maps coordinates on the image to links on your web site.

THE MAP FILE

In general, a map file contains the coordinates of each region you wish to make active and their corresponding URL links. The geometric shapes in the imagemap are mapped-out using a program like Mapedit. Basically, this or any other GIF file is opened in Mapedit and the desired regions are outlined using the mouse. After a region is outlined, you are prompted to enter a URL link. When complete, a map file is generated with the [.map] file extension.

THE IMAGE MAP PROGRAM

Imagemap is a CGI program that resides on the web server. On the NYIC web servers, this program resides in the /cgi-bin directory.

Client-side and server side image maps

Client-side image maps do not require the presence of a server-side script in order to interpret the coordinates of the "hot" regions of your multi-clickable image. The client-side image map is much more efficient than the server-side image map and it allows the visitor to see the actual URL associated with the mapped regions in the status bar of their web browser.


Corel PHOTO-PAINT 7 and 8 (CPT)

The CPT file format, a native file format of Corel PHOTO-PAINT, is bitmap based. In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, masks, floating objects, and lenses are included when an image is saved as a .CPT file.

Corel applications can import and export .CPT files, including those that contain color and grayscale information.

Importing notes

Corel applications support the following color depths when importing .CPT files:

•	1-bit black-and-white

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale and 256 shade (8-bit) grayscale multichannel

•	16-bit grayscale

•	Duotone multichannel

•	16 color (4-bit) and 256 color (8-bit) paletted

•	24-bit RGB and 24-bit RGB multichannel

•	24-bit LAB and 24-bit LAB multichannel

•	32-bit CMYK and 32-bit CMYK multichannel

•	48-bit RGB

Corel applications support the import of channels, objects and masks.

Exporting notes

Corel applications support the following color depths when exporting to the CPT file format:

•	1-bit black-and-white

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	16 color (4-bit) and 256 color (8-bit) paletted

•	24-bit RGB

•	32-bit CMYK

Only Corel PHOTO-PAINT supports the following color depths when exporting to the .CPT file format:

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale multichannel

•	16-bit grayscale

•	Duotone multichannel

•	24-bit RGB multichannel

•	24-bit LAB multichannel

•	32-bit CMYK multichannel

•	48-bit RGB

Other notes

The CPT file format supports an unlimited image size when importing and exporting. Its compression type is mixed. The CPT file format supports Notes in the Open and Save/Export dialog boxes. For more information about version 6 of the CPT file format see, "Corel PHOTO-PAINT 6 (CPT)."


Corel PHOTO-PAINT 6 (CPT)

The CPT file format, a native file format of Corel PHOTO-PAINT, is bitmap based. The .CPT file format supports: objects, masks, and layers.

Importing notes

Corel applications support the following color depths when importing .CPT files:

•	1-bit Black-and-white

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	Duotone

•	16 color (4-bit) and 256 color (8-bit) paletted

•	24-bit RGB

•	32-bit CMYK

Exporting notes

The following color depths are supported when exporting to the .CPT file format:

•	1-bit Black-and-white

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	16 color (4-bit) paletted

•	256 color (8-bit) paletted

•	24-bit RGB

•	32-bit CMYK

Other notes

The CPT file format uses the following compression types: LZW, PackBits, Huffman, CCITT 3-1 DIM, CCITT 3-2 Dim and CCITT 4. The maximum image size that the filter supports is unlimited. For more information about versions 7 and 8 of the CPT file format see, "Corel PHOTO-PAINT 7 and 8 (CPT)."


Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX)

The CMX file format was originally developed to save files created in CorelDRAW with the data necessary to open and edit them in other Corel applications.

Versions supported

Corel applications support version 5 6, 7 and 8 of the CMX file format.


Corel WordPerfect Graphic (WPG)

The WPG file format is primarily a vector graphic format, but can store both bitmap and vector data (which may contain up to 256 colors chosen from a palette of more than one million colors). WordPerfect version 5 of the WPG file format can store either bitmap or vector image data (but not at the same time). WordPerfect version 5.1+ can store both bitmap and vector image data in the same file. It is also possible to store Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) code in a .WPG file.

Versions supported

Corel applications support version 1.0 and 2.0 when exporting to the WPG file format.

Importing notes

Corel applications can import graphics created in Corel WordPerfect.

Exporting notes

Options in the WPG Export dialog box control how colors in the file are exported. The 16 Color option matches colors to a standard set of 16 colors. Choosing this option usually yields acceptable results on a .VGA file display.

The 256 Colors option may yield a truer representation of your file. However, colors may appear as shades of gray, depending on the video adapter and driver used. If this happens, export the file using the 16 color option instead.

Dashed lines of any style and width open as solid lines in Corel WordPerfect and Corel Presentations. You can export text as editable text characters or curves.

Other notes

To accurately reproduce calligraphic outlines along with corner styles and line caps, enable the Calligraphic Text check box. The outlines export as a group of polygons that match the appearance of the outlines. However, this adds significantly to the size of the exported file.

Fountain fills tend to contain coarse banding, therefore, try using the 256 Colors option for images that have such fountain fills.


Crop Image

The Crop Image dialog box lets you select the exact area and size of the image you want to keep. Cropping cuts away selected areas on an image without affecting the resolution or dimensions of the areas that remain. Crop around a selection or border in your image to create irregularly-shaped bitmaps.


Resample Image

The Resample dialog box lets you add pixels to or subtract pixels from a bitmap image. Resampling changes the amount of information in an image and can involve changes to resolution or dimensions. You can resample the image down (downsample) which reduces the number of pixels, eliminates unusable detail and reduces the file size.


Desktop Color Separation (DCS)

The DCS file format, developed by QuarkXPress, is an extension of the standard Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file format. Generally, the DCS file format consists of five files. Four of the five files contain information about high-resolution color. This information is expressed in CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow and black) format. The fifth file, considered the master file, contains a PICT preview of the .DCS file. DCS files that are imported from Corel PHOTO-PAINT 6, however, can be saved in a single file.

Versions supported

Corel applications support versions 1.0 or 2.0 of the DCS file format and also support File Type Single or Multiple options.

Importing notes

Corel applications support all color depths when importing .DCS files; however, to import this type of file in Corel VENTURA, the Encapsulated Postscript filter should be used.

Exporting notes

Corel PHOTO-PAINT supports all color depths when exporting .DCS files, and supports masks that are created in 256 shade (8-bit) grayscale and 32-bit.

Other notes

Corel applications provide full support for a maximum .DCS file size of 4,294,967,295 x 4,294,967,295 pixels.


Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)

The EPS file format, developed by Adobe Systems Incorporated, stores high-resolution PostScript illustrations. An .EPS file is a series of codes and information that determine the output of an image.

The EPS file format usually contains two parts. The first part is the PostScript language description of the graphic that is read by RIP (Raster Image Processor) on PostScript output devices. The second part enables a preview of the bitmap image in WMF or TIF file format (PICT file format is used by the Macintosh platform). However, the preview option requires an image header. If there is no image header, a gray fill displays and lists the filename and the originating application name.

You can also import an EPS file using the PostScript Interpreted filter. This filter interprets the PostScript information and displays the objects in the PostScript file rather than displaying a bitmap header.

Version supported

Corel applications support version 3 of the EPS file format.

Importing notes

A drawing saved in EPS file format can be imported into Corel applications to be scaled and cropped.

Corel applications support the following color depths when importing .EPS files:

•	1-bit Black-and-white

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	16-bit grayscale

•	Duotone

•	16 color (4-bit) and 256 color (8-bit) paletted

•	24-bit RGB

•	32-bit CMYK

Corel applications such as CorelDRAW 9 and Corel VENTURA 9 import .EPS files in a "Placeable" or "Interpreted" header format. The applications display the "thumbnail" or preview version of the working file. Imported placeable graphics come into the program as a group of objects. The header file format is either .WMF or .TIF: black-and-white, 16 shade (4-bit) grayscale or color, or 256 shade (8-bit) grayscale or color. You can set the header resolution from 1 to 300 dots per inch (dpi). The default header resolution is 72 dpi. If the application importing the .EPS file has a limitation on the image header size, you might receive an error message stating that the file you're trying to bring in is too large. To keep the file size down, choose black-and-white and lower the header resolution before exporting the file. The setting determines the resolution of the header only, and has no impact on the print quality of your drawing. The EPS file format information remains attached to the header and is used when the image is printed to a PostScript printer. This is similar to how .EPS files are handled by many desktop publishing packages.

Exporting notes

On a PostScript printer, except for device limitations, graphics exported in EPS file format print from other programs exactly as how they do from current Corel applications.

Color headers are very useful when viewing placed .EPS files. If the application you are exporting to does not support color headers, try exporting with a mono header instead. You also have the option of exporting without a header.

Masks can be used to define a 'clipping path' when exporting an .EPS file from Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

Only Corel PHOTO-PAINT supports the following color depths when exporting to the .EPS:

•	1-bit black-and-white

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	16 color (4-bit) and 256 color (8-bit) paletted

•	24-bit RGB

•	32-bit CMYK (also supported by Corel DRAW and Corel VENTURA)

•	16-bit grayscale

•	Duotone

The necessary fonts must be installed in your computer so that the .EPS file prints correctly. Choose the Include Fonts option. The fonts cannot be installed if you export text as curves. If a font used in the file is not resident on the printer or has not been installed, either the text will print in Courier, or the drawing will not print.

Corel VENTURA lets you save a page as an EPS file.

Other notes

The EPS file format supports an unlimited image size during an import and export.

•	Some EPS files from outside sources may reference spot or user-defined colors that are not directly supported by some Corel applications. Abbreviated PANTONE color names (e.g., PANTONE Wm Red) can result in an unknown PANTONE color appearing in the Separations tab of the Print Options dialog box. This color will not separate properly and will yield an empty separation. You should either deselect the unknown color in the list before outputting separations, or save the .EPS file again using only colors recognized by the Corel application. Using PANTONE Spot colors in your EPS files will ensure that the colors will separate as anticipated.

•	Spot colors in .EPS files won't separate properly if converted to CMYK from the Print Options dialog box.

•	EPS file formats may not import properly using the All Files (*.*) file format. To import them, choose the EPS import file format.

Clipping paths in imported .EPS files do not display in Corel VENTURA. As a result, the image header in the file (if it has one) obscures the surrounding text on screen. The text, however, does print correctly. To see the clipping path on screen, re-import the file using the PostScript Interpreted filter. Right-click the image, click Picture, Convert Picture to Graphic Object(s).


Enhanced Windows Metafile (EMF)

The EMF file format was developed for Windows applications. Applications such as Corel VENTURA can read .EMF files. It is a metafile format used to import graphics from Windows applications. Corel VENTURA substitutes fonts missing from an .EMF file to similar fonts available on your computer.

Importing notes

Current Corel applications substitute fonts missing from an .EMF file to similar fonts available on your system.

Corel applications do not support the following features when importing .EMF files:

•	Multiple pages

•	hatch fills

Exporting notes

Corel applications do not support the following features when exporting to the EMF file format:

•	Multiple pages

•	Multiple layers

Exported .EMF files can become very large if your graphics contain a lot of curves or text. This can cause problems in Corel applications that impose limits on the size of imported files.

Text exports as individual characters.


Frame Vector Metafile (FMV)

The FMV file format was developed by Adobe FrameMaker. It can contain both vectors and bitmaps.

Version supported

Corel applications provide support for version 5.0 of the FMV file format during export.

Importing notes

Corel applications do not support the following features when importing .FMV files:

•	Multiple Pages

•	Text Fit to Path

•	Bitmap Powerclips

Exporting notes

Corel applications do not support the following features when exporting to the FMV file format:

•	Layers

•	Multiple Pages


GEM Files (GEM)

The GEM file format is a vector file format supported by programs such as GEM Draw. Objects in the .GEM file that have a solid or percentage fill of a particular color have a corresponding fill in Corel VENTURA. However, custom fills (i.e., grids, hatches, ball bearings, etc.) used in GEM programs are not supported. Objects containing such fills have a tinted fill color in Corel VENTURA that corresponds to the color of the pattern fill of the original .GEM file.

Importing notes

Corel applications import vector graphics created by programs such as GEM Draw. They also import .GEM files from earlier versions of Corel VENTURA.

The types of end styles supported by the GEM file format depend on the package that created the .GEM file. Corners of files that are created in GEM Draw do not import into Corel applications such as Corel VENTURA.

•	Round end caps on both ends of a line are successfully imported

•	A round end cap on only one end of a line are successfully imported

•	Lines with arrows are imported into the application with no end caps (no arrows)

Text in your .GEM file comes into the Corel application as editable text.

If a typeface from the imported file is not available on your computer, the missing typeface is replaced by the font on your computer that it most closely resembles.

Text in the imported file may not align exactly as in the original file. This is due to the differences in font sizes, and inter-character and inter-word spacing between the two programs. Underlined text from the GEM file format is not supported.

Unsupported keyboard characters appear as question marks.

Exporting notes

The following occur when .GEM files are exported:

•	Objects' fills and outlines, arrowheads, and segments in dotted and dashed lines are exported as separate polygons.

•	Colors in the exported file are matched to the 16 colors the GEM file format supports.

•	Fountain fills often appear quite coarse because of the limited color availability in the GEM file format

•	Texture fills are replaced by a solid gray fill.

•	Breaks sometimes occur where outlines come to a point. Whether this is noticeable (or even occurs) depends on the size of your objects, the thickness of the outline, and the angle at which the outline meets at the point.

•	Text is exported as curves and therefore cannot be edited.

•	The GEM file format limits the number of objects per file. This poses problems if the original file contains many complex objects.

Corel applications do not support the following features when exporting to the GEM file format:

•	Bitmaps

•	Bitmap pattern fills

•	PostScript Textures (converted to uniform mid-gray fills)

•	Dotted and dashed lines

•	Lenses

•	Layers

•	Multiple Pages

•	Vector Fills

•	Transparencies

Convert .GEM files to curves before exporting them to GEM drawing programs such as GEM Draw. You get smaller file sizes. Bezier curves are converted to line segments. Objects with more than 128 points (after conversion to segments) are broken into smaller objects which are then grouped.

Subdividing objects like this produces "clipping lines" that show in Wireframe view if you import the exported file. The lines do not appear in the printed output.

Select Polylines if you want to export curve objects as polylines rather than Bezier curves. Select this option if the application in which you intend to use the exported file does not support Bezier curve information.

Other notes

The GEM file format supports RLE compression and has a maximum picture size of 64,000 pixels by 64,000 pixels.


GEM Paint File (IMG)

The IMG file format was developed by Digital Research. It is bitmap based and is mainly used on the Atari ST platform. However, the .IMG file is also frequently found in the PC desktop publishing environment.

Importing notes

In versions 1 through 4 of Corel VENTURA, the IMG file format is used to import pictures. The .IMG files are normally smaller and therefore displayed quickly on screen.


GIF Animation (GIF)

The GIF file format, developed by CompuServe Inc., is bitmap based. It can be used to store multiple bitmaps in a file. When the multiiple images are displayed in rapid succession the file is called an animated .GIF file. Corel PHOTO-PAINT and animated GIF files

You can save movies you create in Corel PHOTO-PAINT as animated GIF files. Animated GIF images "move" when displayed on web pages.

The GIF file format is supported by the World Wide Web, MS-DOS, Macintosh, UNIX, Amiga, and other platforms.

Versions supported

Corel applications import versions 87A and 89A of the GIF file format, but export to version 89A only. Version 87A supports basic features and interlacing. The newer version, 89A, includes all the features found in 87A plus the ability to have transparent colors. Version 89A also includes comments and other data of the image file.

Importing notes

Corel applications support the following color depths when importing animated .GIF files:

•	1-bit black-and-white

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	16 color (4-bit)

•	256 color (8-bit) paletted

Exporting notes

•	Corel applications support the following color depths when exporting to the GIF file format:

•	1-bit Black-and-white

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	16 color (4-bit)

•	256 color (8-bit) paletted

•	Masks are used to create transparent areas in files (export from Photo-paint only.)

Other notes

The GIF file format supports a maximum image size of 64,535 pixels by 64,535 pixels and uses LZW compression.


HPGL Plotter File (PLT)

The PLT file format, developed by Hewlett-Packard is vector based. It is used in programs such as AutoCAD for printing drawings on plotters. Corel VENTURA and other Corel applications can interpret a SUBSET of the HPGL and HPGL/2 command set. A stepping factor of 1016 plotter units = 1 inch is used.

Versions supported

Corel applications support versions 1 and 2 of PLT file formats. However, some features of version 2 are not supported.

Importing notes

A Scale option is included for resizing the imported image. Use this option to import images larger than Corel's maximum page size.

The curve resolution factor can be set to a value between 0.0 and 1.0 inches. The value can be very accurate; up to eight decimal places are accepted. While a setting of 0.0 results in the highest resolution it also greatly increases file size. A curve resolution of 0.004 inches is recommended.

The PLT file format does not contain color information. Instead, the various objects in a .PLT file have certain pen numbers associated with them. When imported into a Corel application, each pen number is assigned a specific color. You can specify the color assigned to a particular pen. This makes it easy to match the original colors of the graphic.

The Pen Selection list contains 256 pens, although not all of the pens may be assigned. You can change the color assignments by choosing the pen and then choosing a new color for that pen from the Pen Color field. Choosing Custom colors brings up a color definition dialog box that allows you to define a custom color using RGB values. You can change the pen width assignments by choosing the pen and then choosing a new width for that pen from the Pen Width field.

You can change the pen velocity by choosing the pen and then choosing a new velocity for that pen from the Pen Velocity field. This is only useful for exporting .PLT files.

You can set a defined pen to the Unused option. You can also reset the current Pen Library pen settings back to the previously saved settings.

Only certain types of objects in the .PLT file are filled.

Corel applications support numerous dotted, dashed, and solid line types of the PLT file format. The pattern number of a certain line in a .PLT file is translated to a line type pattern.

The following occurs when .PLT files containing text are imported into Corel applications:

•	Text imports into a Corel application as editable text. The application that generates the file is capable of exporting text as text.

•	Once in the Corel application, text strings are assigned the default font, but can be subsequently assigned any typeface and size.

•	Imported text has no fill color, only an outline color. The fill color is based on its associated pen number in the original .PLT file.

Exporting notes

Only the outlines of objects are exported to the PLT file format.

During the export function the following occurs:

•	Dotted lines, dashed lines, and arrowheads are mapped to standard line types of the PLT file format.

•	Bezier curves are converted to line segments.

•	Outline thickness and calligraphic settings, are lost.

•	Outline colors are limited to eight: black, blue, red, green, magenta, yellow, cyan, and brown.


Hyper Text Markup Language (HTM)

Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) is the World Wide Web authoring standard. HTML is comprised of markup tags that define the structure and components of a document. The tags are used to tag text and integrate resources (such as images, sound, video, and animation) when creating a Web page.

HTML has changed radically over the last few years. The number of HTML tags has grown, allowing Web authors to greatly enhance the design of pages.

Importing notes

The HTM import filter can be installed during a custom installation (Import/Export File Types - Internet File Types). The HTM import filter is designed to simply extract as much editable information from a web document as possible. It makes an attempt to read as much as it can and bring objects into CorelDRAW in a manner similar to the original layout.

In CorelDRAW, imported .HTM files that exceed the boundaries of the drawing page continue down the workspace without a page break. If you want to export these files back to the internet, keep in mind that the Publish To Internet option ignores all objects that are not within the confines of the drawing page.

Exporting notes

HTML text frames in .HTM files often overlap, causing difficulties during export. As a solution, try exporting the .HTM file to the GIF or JPEG file format.


IBM PIF (PF)

The PF (Program Information Files) file format is a vector format used by IBM 3270 work stations. Corel applications save drawings in PF file format.

Version supported

Corel applications support version 1.0 of the PF import filter.

Importing notes

Corel applications do not support the following features when importing an .PF file:

•	Set Background Mix or Set Foreground Mix orders. Instead, the objects are overlaid in the order they are read in. Each has its own defined color where there is no overlap.

•	Call Segment orders.

•	Set Character Set.

•	Set Paper Color.

•	Set Pattern Symbol.

IBM PIF line types "1," "3," "4," and "6" become a "three-unit dash followed by a five-unit space" type of line. "2" and "5" become a "one-unit dash followed by a five-unit space" type of line. The translation of line types is not dependent on the contents of CORELDRW.DOT. These conversions are actually a non-alterable part of the PIF import filter.

When text strings are imported, the characters are assigned the Monospaced typeface. If for some reason this is not available, the text is assigned the Toronto typeface. If neither Monospaced or Toronto is available, the text is assigned the font that resides at the top of the font selection list. The text, spacing, and alignment attributes may then be changed as desired.

Exporting notes

The following occur when PF files are exported:

•	Colors are color-mapped to provide the best possible match to the PF file format's 16-color palette.

•	Because of the limited number of colors in PF, fountain fills usually look poor.

•	Texture fills are converted to solid gray fills.

Current Corel applications export the following outline effects as polygons, provided you enable the Calligraphic Text check box.

•	Objects created using the calligraphic pen

•	Line caps

•	Custom outline thickness

Corel applications do not support the following features when exporting to the PF file format:

•	PostScript Textures

•	Bitmaps

•	Two-color and Full-color pattern fills

•	Layers

•	Transparencies

Exporting text as text creates smaller files, and the text can be edited in the destination application. Fonts and spacing may not be maintained.

Select Polylines to export curve objects as polylines, when the application in which you intend to use the exported file does not support Bezier curves.

Other notes

Windows might confuse IBM .PF with its own .PF (Program Information Files). When this occurs, the error message “Security Privileges” appears. To solve this, rename the file with a “.PF” extension using a DOS Window.


Joint Photographics Experts Group Bitmaps (JPEG)
JPEG Bitmaps (JPG)

The JPG file format is an international standard for image compression developed by The Independent JPEG Group. It is bitmap based and is also known as JFIF (JPEG File Interchange Format).

Importing notes

Corel applications support the following color depths when importing .JPG files:

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	16 color (4-bit) and 256 color (8-bit) paletted

•	24-bit RGB

•	32-bit CMYK

Exporting notes

The .JPG file Quality feature helps you export a large file with high quality and a small file with low quality. You also have the option of saving your file as a progressive .JPG file. Keep in mind that some applications can not open progressive .JPG files. If you have difficulty opening your file in another application, resave your file without the progressive option. This file format is supported in Corel applications such as CorelDRAW, Corel PHOTO-PAINT and Corel VENTURA.

Corel applications support the following color depths when exporting to the .JPG file format:

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	16 color (4-bit) and 256 color (8-bit) paletted

•	24-bit RGB

•	32-bit CMYK

Other notes

The .JPG file supports a maximum image size of 64,000 pixels by 64,000 pixels and offers compression with almost no losses at ratios up to 20 to 1.


Kodak FlashPix Image (FPX)

The .FPX file is a bitmap image file format.

Importing notes

You can view the image you are importing and adjust various image settings. For example, you can adjust the amount of red, green and blue in the image, as well as the brightness, contrast, saturation, and sharpness of the image.

Corel applications support the following color depths when importing .FPX files:

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	24-bit RGB

Exporting notes

Corel applications support the following color depths when exporting to the FPX file format:

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	24-bit RGB

Only Corel PHOTO-PAINT supports masks where the masked area alone is exported.

Other notes

The FPX file format uses compression types such as, None, Single Color, JPEG Standard, JPEG Unspecified and, JPEG By Quality.


Kodak Photo CD Image (PCD)

Kodak Photo CD images are derived from 35-mm film negatives or slides that have been converted to digital format and stored on a compact disc (CD). The PCD file format is bitmap based.

Importing notes

When you import .PCD files, a dialog box appears prompting you to choose the desired file resolution and color. High resolutions require large amounts of disk space. The Image Size indicator will update to reflect the choices you have made regarding resolution and color. Click the Enhancement tab if you want to color correct the image before importing it.

The Color Correction Method GamutCD uses gamut mapping to enhance the color fidelity and tonal ranges of the CD image.

Set...	To...

Active Area	Specify an active area within the image in the view field. This ensures GamutCD will base its color correction on the area of the photo that you are going to use and helps cut out any black borders left over from the original scan.

Neutral Colors	Define neutral colors by clicking pure whites, blacks, and grays within the Active Area

White in Image	Maintain the good white elements in the photo. If you do not have a white, disable this option because gamut mapping will overbrighten your picture as it maps the lightest elements of your picture to white.

This option will assist GamutCD in enhancing the tonal range of your image and removing color cast. If your white is not pure white, you may wish to lower the 255 setting in the number box to the right.

Black in Image	Maintain the good black elements in the photo. If the image does not have blacks, disable this option because the gamut mapping will darken your picture as it maps the darkest elements of your picture to black.

This option will assist GamutCD in enhancing the tonal range of your image and removing color cast. If your black is not pure black, you may wish to raise the setting in the number box to the right from 0.

Fast Preview	See the effect of the GamutCD settings on the image

Best Preview	See the effect of the GamutCD settings on the image. This method is more accurate than fast preview but takes longer to build.

The Kodak Color Correction method lets you alter color tints, adjust brightness and color saturation, as well as make adjustments to the level of contrast.

Set...	To...

Remove Scene 	Turn off the Scene Balance Adjustment

Balance Adjustment 	Adjust the photo finisher applied at the time the original image was scanned and placed on the Photo CD disk.

Contrast 	Adjust contrast by preset amounts.

Show Out-Of-Gamut	Adjust extreme changes. The preview colors will display out-of-gamut pixels as pure red or pure blue.

Corel applications support the following color depths when importing .PCD files:

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	256 color (8-bit) paletted

•	24-bit RGB

Available import sizes are:

•	Base Over 64 [image] 64 x 96

•	Base Over 16 [image] 128 x 192

•	Base Over 4 [image] 256 x 384

•	Base 512 x 768

•	Base Times 4 [image] 1024 x 1536

•	Base Times 16 [image] 2048 x 3072

Other notes

Compression is proprietary.


Lotus Pic (PIC)

The Lotus PIC file format was created by Lotus 1-2-3 for use in Lotus Print Graph. It is vector based.

Version supported

Corel applications support version 1 of the PIC file format.

Importing notes

Enables the import of graphs created in Lotus 1-2-3. The colors contained in a .PIC file are translated to a standard set of eight colors. Text contained in the file is imported as editable text. Title text is imported as the Toronto typeface unless that typeface is not available. Any non-title text is imported as the Monospaced typeface.


Macintosh PICT (PCT)

The PCT file format was developed for the Macintosh by Apple Computer Inc. It is a native file format of QuickDraw. It can contain both vectors and bitmaps. The PCT file format is widely used in Macintosh applications where graphics are used.

Versions supported

Corel applications support versions 1 and 2 of the PCT import filter.

Importing notes

Objects that contain a fill and an outline open as a group of two objects. One object is the outline and the other is the fill.

Fills in PCT file formats are often bitmap patterns. Corel applications try to maintain these fills as bitmap patterns. Pattern outlines are converted to a solid color. Arrowheads and dashed lines are not supported from MacDraw II in current Corel applications.

Text in the .PCT file opens as editable text. If a typeface in the imported file is not available on your computer, it defaults to a font on your computer that it most closely resembles.

Text alignment may not match the original file because of the differences in font size, and inter-character and inter-word spacing between the two formats. Any misalignment is easily corrected. Unsupported characters appear as question marks.

The following text styles of the PCT file format are supported: bold, italic, outline, shadow, and any combination of these. Underlined text is not supported.

During a .PCT file import, features such as multiple layers and multiple pages are not supported.

Exporting notes

Corel applications export outline effects as polygons, provided you enable the Calligraphic Text check box. This maintains the exact image, but creates a larger file. Calligraphic effects and line caps appear as separate objects grouped with the line to which they are applied.

Filled objects with an outline are exported as a group of two objects. One object is the outline and the other is the fill.

Outlines on text are exported, provided the text is converted to curves prior to export. Text that has been converted to curves cannot be edited as text.

PostScript texture fills are exported as a gray fill.

Other notes

The colors available on the Macintosh are device dependent and vary with the type of view you use. If you have a view that uses 8-bit color, you are limited to a total of 256 colors. The colors of your file are matched as closely as possible. A view that uses 24-bit color displays colors that are virtually identical to the ones you use.

The PCT file format supports PackBits and JPEG compression.


MACPaint Bitmap (MAC)

This bitmap file format, developed by Apple Computer Inc., is supported by Macintosh platforms. The MAC file format is used mainly by Macintosh graphics applications to store black-and-white graphics and clipart.

Importing notes

Corel applications support a color depth of 1-bit black-and-white when importing a .MAC file.

Exporting notes

Corel applications support a color depth of 1-bit black-and-white when exporting to the MAC file format.

Other notes

The MAC file format supports a maximum image size of 576 x 720 pixels and RLE compression.


MET MetaFile (MET)

The MET file format is used to import graphics created in IBM's Presentation Manager for OS/2. It is used to exchange data between applications under OS/2.

This file format supports only basic drawing features such as solid outlines, solid fills, and both True Type and Type 1 fonts. Corel applications can only import .MET files.

Version supported

Corel applications support version 2 of the MET file format.


Micrografx 2.x, 3.x (DRW)

The DRW file format was developed by Micrografx, Inc. for Micrografx Designer. It can contain bitmaps and vectors.

Versions supported

The DRW file format supports graphic files created in Micrografx Designer 2.x or 3.x, into Corel applications such as CorelDRAW and Corel VENTURA.

Importing notes

Corel applications can't import gradient or fountain fills.

Exporting notes

When exporting from CorelDRAW 7 or 8 to the DRW file format, the objects are placed on the second layer. To access these objects you must enable the second layer to be current in the layer manager of Micrografx Designer. However, when you import these objects back into CorelDRAW 7 or 8, the objects import into the first layer.


Micrografx Designer 6.0 (DSF)

The DSF file format was developed by Micrografx, Inc. for Micrografx Designer. It can contain bitmaps and vectors.

Importing notes

The DSF file format does not support layers. All items are imported into Corel applications as a group on one layer. Bitmap fills of an image are ignored during import. Multiple pages are not supported. All items are imported on the same page.


NAP MetaFile (NAP)

The NAP file format is supported by PC and UNIX platforms and communications applications. This file format is mainly used to transfer graphic images between computers. It can contain bitmaps and vectors.

Importing notes

This file format supports only basic drawing features such as solid outlines, solid fills, and both True Type and Type 1 fonts.


OS/2 Bitmap (BMP)

The OS/2 file format, developed by Microsoft Corporation and IBM, is supported by Intel machines running OS/2, MS-DOS, Windows, and Windows NT. It is also supported by numerous applications, including non-OS/2 and non-PC applications.

Versions supported

Corel applications support Standard Version 1.3 and Enhanced Version 2.0 or later versions of the BMP file format.

Importing notes

Corel applications support the following color depths when importing .BMP files:

•	1-bit black-and-white

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	16 color (4-bit) and 256 color (8-bit) paletted

•	24-bit RGB

Exporting notes

Corel applications support the following color depths when exporting to the BMP file format:

•	1-bit black-and-white

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	16 color (4-bit) and 256 color (8-bit) paletted

•	24-bit RGB

Other notes

The BMP file format supports a maximum image size of 64,535 pixels by 64,535 pixels. OS/2 uses RLE compression.


PaintBrush (PCX)

The PCX file format is a bitmap file format and is used in cross-platform applications.

Versions supported

Corel applications support version 2.5, 2.8, and 3.0 of the PCX file format.

Importing notes

Corel applications support the following color depths when importing .PCX files:

•	1-bit Black and White

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	16 color (4-bit) and 256 color (8-bit) paletted

•	24-bit RGB

Exporting notes

Corel applications support the following color depths when exporting to the PCX file format:

•	1-bit Black and White

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	16 color (4-bit) and 256 color (8-bit) paletted

•	24-bit RGB

Other notes

The PCX file format supports a maximum image size of 64,535 x 64,535 pixels during import and export. It also supports RLE compression.


Picture Publisher 4 (PP4)

The PP4 file format was developed by Micrografx for Picture Publisher 4.

Importing notes

Corel applications support the following color depths when importing .PP4 files:

•	1-bit black-and-white

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale multichannel

•	16-bit grayscale

•	Duotone multichannel

•	16 color (4-bit) and 256 color (8-bit) paletted

•	24-bit RGB

•	24-bit RGB multichannel

•	24-bit LAB

•	24-bit LAB multichannel

•	32-bit CMYK

•	32-bit CMYK multichannel

•	48-bit RGB

Other notes

The PP4 file format supports LZW compression and a maximum image size of 65,535 x 65,535 pixels.


Picture Publisher 5.0 (PP5)
Picture Publisher 5 (PP5)

The PP5 file format was developed by Micrografx for Picture Publisher 5.

Importing notes

The .PP5 files support mono, color, and grayscale.

Corel applications support the following color depths are supported when importing .PP5 files:

•	1-bit black-and-white

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	16-bit grayscale

•	16 color (4-bit) and 256 color (8-bit) paletted

•	24-bit RGB

•	24-bit LAB

•	32-bit CMYK

•	48-bit RGB

Only Corel PHOTO-PAINT supports the following color depths when importing .PP5 files:

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale multichannel

•	Duotone multichannel

•	24-bit RGB multichannel

•	24-bit LAB multichannel

•	32-bit CMYK multichannel

Other notes

The PP5 file format supports LZW compression and a maximum image size of 4,294,967,295 x 4,294,967,295 pixels.


Portable Network Graphics (PNG)

The PNG (Portable Network Graphics format) file format is intended to provide a portable, well compressed, well-specified standard for lossless bitmap image files.

Version supported

Corel applications support version 1.0 of the PNG file format.

Importing notes

Corel applications support the following color depths when importing .PNG files:

•	1-bit black-and-white

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	16 color (4-bit) and 256 color (8-bit) paletted

•	24-bit RGB

Exporting notes

Corel applications support the following color depths when exporting to the PNG file format:

•	1-bit black-and-white

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	16 color (4-bit) and 256 color (8-bit) paletted

•	24-bit RGB

The PNG file format supports masks when exporting from Corel PHOTO-PAINT. Masks cannot be saved in 1-bit black-and-white and 256 color (8-bit) paletted.

Other notes

The PNG file format supports LZ77 compression and can import or export a maximum image size of 30,000 x 30,000 pixels.


PostScript Interpreted (PS, PRN, and EPS)

The PostScript Interpreted import filter can import PS, PRN, and EPS PostScript files. When you use this filter, the PostScript information is converted to objects in the Corel Application. The PostScript interpreted filter lets you import multiple pages. In contrast, the EPS filter is only used to import EPS PostScript files, and this filter displays the EPS bitmap header or, if there is no header, it displays a gray box.

Importing notes

The PS import filter converts RGB bitmaps into CMYK.

Font information is maintained only if the font was embedded in the original file prior to import.

Files that are too large may not import into Corel VENTURA due to memory limitations. This problem can be caused by complex gradient fills that increase the number of objects in the graphic.

EPS file formats (EPS placeable, PostScript Interpreted) may not import properly using the All Files file option. To import PostScript Interpreted files successfully, choose the PostScript Interpreted import file format.


Corel Raster Image (RAW)

The Corel Raster Image filter lets you open bitmap files that won't open with other filters. If you have a bitmap file which doesn't have any objects, a recoqnizable extension or doesn't "Auto-sense" in the Filter Manager ( import dialog ) you can use this filter to try to open the file. The filter does this by skipping the image header when reading the file. This is helpful because when a filter reads most bitmap files, the first chunk of data it finds is the header. Headers store attributes of the graphics data that may change from file to file , such as the height and width of the image and the number of colors it contains. If a format always stored images of the same size, type, and number of colors a header wouldn't be necessary -  the values for that format would simply be hard-coded into the filter. As it is, most bitmap file formats have headers, and your filter must know the internal structure of the header for each format it is to read.

If your image header is corrupted or is a non-standard format, a regular filter may not be able to read it. That's where the Corel Raster Image filter comes in. When you try to open a file, the filter displays a dialog in which you can specify any information you know about the file such as the image dimensions, header size, and color depth. You can use trial and error to determine missing information. If you enter incorrect information, the filter displays a message telling you the total image size you've specified and the total actual image size. "Image size" refers to the sum of the image dimensions and the header size (and the palette in a paletted image.) You can experiment with different values until you hit the ones that allow the image to open.

Other Raw Data Import dialog options

To open an image upside down enable Upside Down Data. If you think the image is an RGB image created in a Windows environment, enable Extra Channel. Windows RGB images have four channels instead of three. You can enable 8 Bits/Channel, 16 Bits/Channel, 8 Bit Mask or 16 Bit Mask depending on how many channels and what size mask you think the image has. You can also choose an image type and specify the image bit count (8 bits/pixel, 24 bits/pixel. etc.)

 Tip

•	Some file formats have standard header sizes, for example .BMP files all have 54 byte headers. Knowing these standard sizes means having to guess one less piece of information when trying to open files.


SCITEX CT Bitmap (SCT)

The SCT file format is used for importing 32-bit color and grayscale SCITEX images. SCITEX bitmaps are created from high-end scanners. The bitmaps are then processed for output by film recorders or high-end page layout programs. SCITEX is ideal for color-separated images because its native color depth is 32-bit CMYK.

Importing notes

Corel applications support the following color depths when importing .SCT files:

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	32-bit CMYK

Exporting notes

The .SCT file is saved in 32-bit color format or 256 shade (8-bit) grayscale.

Other notes

The SCT file format supports a maximum image size of 4,294,967,295 x 4,294,967,295 pixels.


ScodI (SCD)
SCODL (SCD)

The SCD (Scan Conversion Object Description Language) is a raster file format used by film recorders to make slides.


Targa Bitmap (TGA)

The TGA file format, developed by Truevision Inc., is bitmap based. It is commonly used to store digitized color photographs. TGA is supported by MS-DOS, Windows, UNIX, Atari, Amiga, and other platforms and applications. It is used widely in paint, graphics, and imaging applications.

Importing notes

Corel applications import .TGA files in the following variations:

•	uncompressed color-mapped images

•	uncompressed RGB images

•	RLE compressed color-mapped images

•	RLE compressed RGB images (types 1, 2, 9, and 10 as defined by AT&T Electronic Photography and Imaging Center)

•	Masks

Corel applications support the following color depths when importing .TGA files:

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	256 color (8-bit) paletted

•	24-bit RGB

Exporting notes

The type of .TGA file produced depends on the number of colors exported. For example, a 24-bit color .TGA file is exported as a RLE-compressed RGB bitmaps.

Masks can be exported from Corel PHOTO-PAINT only. They cannot be saved in 1-bit black-and-white and 256 color (8-bit) paletted.

Corel applications support the following color depths when exporting to the .TGA file format:

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	4-, 8- and 16-bit paletted

•	24-bit RGB

Other notes

The TGA file format supports RLE compression and supports a maximum image size of 64,535 x 64,535 pixels.


TIFF Bitmap (TIF)

The TIF file format is a standard file format used in most paint, imaging, and desktop publishing programs, and with digital scanners. The TIF file format is bitmap based, and is versatile and compatible with Macintosh and PC platforms. This file format is supported in Corel applications such as CorelDRAW, Corel PHOTO-PAINT and Corel VENTURA.

Versions supported

Current Corel applications include versions 4.2, 5.0 and 6.0 of the TIF file format.

Importing notes

Corel applications support the following color depths when importing .TIF files:

•	1-bit black-and-white

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	16-bit grayscale

•	16 color (4-bit) and 256 color (8-bit) paletted

•	24-bit RGB

•	24-bit LAB

•	32-bit CMYK

•	48-bit RGB

Exporting notes

Version 6.0 of the TIF file format is automatically used, when it is exported in CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow and black). Version 5.0 is used, when you export the .TIF file in 16-million colors. Version 4.2 is used when you export the .TIF file in 256 colors or less. There is no other way to specify a particular version of the TIF file format.

Corel applications support the following color depths when exporting to the TIF file format:

•	1-bit black-and-white

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	16 color (4-bit) and 256 color (8-bit) paletted

•	24-bit RGB

•	32-bit CMYK

Only Corel PHOTO-PAINT supports the following color depths when exporting to the TIF file format:

•	16-bit grayscale

•	48-bit RGB

•	Masks

Masks cannot be saved in the following color depths:

•	1-bit black-and-white

•	16-bit grayscale

•	48-bit RGB

Other notes

The TIF file format supports Notes in the Open and Save/Export dialog boxes.

The TIF file format can be compressed in various forms such as CCITT and Packbits 32773. For best results, try using LZW compression. However, you may notice additional loading time as the application decodes the file compression type. The TIF file format supports a maximum image size of 4,294,967,295 x 4,294,967,295 pixels.


True Type Font (TTF)

The TTF fonts print as bitmaps or vectors depending on the capabilities of your printer. True Type fonts print as they appear on screen and can be resized to any height.


Visio (VSD)

The VSD file format can contain bitmaps and vectors. It is currently not supported in Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

Version supported

Corel applications except for Corel PHOTO-PAINT support version 4.0 of the VSD import filter.


Wavelet Compressed Bitmap (WI)

This WI file format is used to store bitmap information at high compression levels.

Importing notes

Corel applications support the following color depths when importing .WI files:

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	24-bit RGB

Exporting notes

Corel applications support the following color depths when exporting to the WI file format:

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	24-bit RGB

Other notes

The WI file format supports Wavelet compression. It also supports a minimum image size of 16 pixels and a maximum of 2048 pixels.


Windows Bitmap (BMP)

The BMP file format was developed as a standard to be used across various platforms.

Importing notes

Corel applications support the following color depths when importing .BMP files:

•	1-bit black-and-white

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	16 color (4-bit) and 256 color (8-bit) paletted

•	24-bit RGB

Exporting notes

Corel applications support the following color depths when exporting to the BMP file format:

•	1-bit black-and-white

•	256 shade (8-bit) grayscale

•	16 color (4-bit) and 256 color (8-bit) paletted

•	24-bit RGB

Other notes

The BMP filter supports RLE compression and a maximum image size of 65,535 x 65,535 pixels.


Windows Metafile (WMF)

The WMF file format, developed by Microsoft Corporation, can contain vectors and bitmaps. It is supported by Windows and several Windows-based graphics applications up to a 24-bit color depth.

Importing notes

Corel VENTURA and CorelDRAW substitute fonts that are missing from a .WMF file to similar fonts available on your computer. The WMF file format does not support PANOSE font matching.

The WMF file format does not support rotated and skewed bitmaps.

There is no preview available for the .WMF file.

Exporting notes

The WMF file format is used to export graphics that are created in programs such as CorelDRAW and Corel VENTURA.

A header contains additional information such as sizing. Therefore, a .WMF file can be successfully exported to CorelDRAW if the header is included.

Text exports as individual characters. WMF files can be very large if your file contains a lot of curves or text. This can cause problems in programs such as Corel VENTURA, which imposes limits on the size of imported files.

The WMF file format is 16 bits while CorelDRAW is 32 bits. When exporting a .WMF file, the 32 bit numbers are converted to 16 bits. For example, lines that are 0.01388 inches and thinner appear hairline because there isn't enough precision in the WMF filter to specify these widths accurately. Straight lines, curved lines, and calligraphic lines are exported as rectangles if thicker than 0.014 inches. Lines that are thicker than 0.003 inches are exported as arrows. Dashed lines are always exported as rectangles.


Resource Color dialog box

The Resource Color dialog box is used for resource file formats, such as .ICO, .CUR, and .EXE, which are used to create icons and bitmaps for Windows 3.1, Windows NT, and Windows 95 interfaces. For more information, see the appropriate file format:

Windows 3.x/NT Icon Resource (ICO)

Windows 3.x/NT Cursor Resource (CUR)

Windows 3.x/NT Bitmap Resource (EXE)


Windows 3.x/NT Icon Resource (ICO)

The .ICO file is a resource file format used to create icons for Windows 3.1, Windows NT, and Windows 95 interfaces.

Importing notes

The ICO file format supports icon graphic elements found within executables. You can select a color for Transparent and Inverse masks.

Corel applications support the following color depths when importing .ICO files:

•	1-bit black-and-white

•	16 color (4-bit) paletted

•	256 color (8-bit) paletted

Other notes

The ICO file format supports a maximum image size of 32 x 32 pixels.


Windows 3.x/NT Cursor Resource (CUR)

The .CUR file is a resource file format that is used to create icons for Windows 3.1, Windows NT, and Windows 95 interfaces.

Importing notes

The CUR file format supports cursor graphic elements that are used in Windows pointers. You can select a color for Transparent and Inverse masks.

Corel applications support the following color depths when importing .CUR files:

•	1-bit black-and-white

•	16 color (4-bit) paletted

•	256 color (8-bit) paletted

Other notes

The CUR file format supports a maximum image size of 32 x 32 pixels.


Windows 3.x/NT Bitmap Resource (EXE)

The .EXE file format is a resource file format that is used to create bitmaps (e.g., dialog boxes) for Windows 3.1, Windows NT, and Windows 95 interfaces.

Importing notes

The EXE file format supports icon graphic elements found within executables. You can select a color for Transparent and Inverse masks.

Corel applications support the following color depths when importing .EXE files:

•	1-bit black-and-white

•	16 color (4-bit) paletted

•	256 color (8-bit) paletted

Other notes

The EXE file format supports a maximum image size of 32 x 32 pixels.


A metafile is a file format that can contain bitmaps, vector images, and text.


Glossary
2D (two-dimensional)

3D (three-dimensional)

A

Accelerator table

Additive color model

AI

Ambient lighting

Anchor point

Animation

Anti-aliasing

Arrow keys

Arrowhead

Artistic text

Ascender

Aspect ratio

Attributes

Auto-panning

AutoBackup

Autotrace

Axis

B

Backup

Baseline

Baseline shift

Bezier curve

Bit depth

Bitmap

Bitmap pattern

Bitmap texture

Black and white

Black point

Bleed

Blend

BMP

Bookmark

Brightness and Contrast filter

Browser

C

Calibrate

Calibration

Calibration bar

Calligraphic

Callout

Camera

Cap height

CDR

Center of rotation

CGI

CGM

Channel

Character code

Character properties

Character set

Characterization

Check box

Child color

Choke

Chromaticity

Cicero

Click

Client-side

Client application

Clipart

Clipboard

Clipping hole

Clipping range

Clone

Closed path

CMY

CMYK

CMYK255

Coaches

Color correction

Color depth

Color gamut

Color management

Color measurement device

Color mode

Color model

Color Matching System

Color profile

Color proof

Color Palette

Color space

Color separation

Color style

Color swatch

Color temperature

Color value

Colorimeter

Colorimetric

Command

Command button

Composite

Composite channel

Compound blend

Connector line

Constrain

Continuous tone

Contour

Contrast

Controls

Control object

Control path

Control point

CPT

Crop

Crop marks

Crosshairs

Curve object

Cusp node

D

Default printer

Default settings

Densitometer

Densitometer scale

Descender

Device-dependent color model

Device driver

Device-independent color model

Device profile

Dialog box

Didot

Digital image

Dimension line

Direction keys

Distortion

Dither

Dithered color

Dockable window

Dot gain

Double-click

Downloadable fonts

DPI

Draft view

Drag

Drawing Page

Drawing Window

Drive

Drop caps

Duotone

Dupont palette

E

Edge pad

Em

Embed

Embedded object

Embedded color profile

Emboss

Emulsion

En

End node

Enhanced view

Envelope

EPS

Extension

Externally linked bitmap

Extrude

F

Feedback sound

File compression

File preview

Fill

Film

Filter

Flow line

Folder

Font

Force justification

Force line breaks

Fountain fill

Four-color process

FOCOLTONE

Frame

Full-color pattern

Full-screen preview

G

Gamma

Gamut

Gamut alarm

Gamut mapping

Gaussian

Gaussian blur

Gaussian drop-off

GIF (Graphics Interchange Format)

Gradation

Graphic style

Gray component

Gray component replacement (GCR)

Grayscale

Grayscale image

Greeking

Grid

Group

Guidelines

Gutter

H

Halftone

Halftone screen

Handles

Hanging indent

Header

Hexachrome color

Hints

HLS

HSB

HTML

Hue

Hyperlink

I

Icon

Illustration gamut mapping

Image header

Image map

Image setter

Indent

Index control

Insertion point

Intensity

Intercharacter spacing

Interline spacing

Interparagraph spacing

Interword spacing

Interlacing

Interruptible Display

J

JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)

Justify

K

Kerning

Keyboard shortcuts

L

Landscape

Layer

Layout style

Lab

Leader tabs

Lens

Lights

Limitcheck error

Line art

Line style

Linear fountain fill

Linked object

Lino

Lossless

Lossy

LPI

Luminosity

M

Marquee box

Marquee-select

Master

Master layer

Maximize

Menu

Merge mode

Microsoft Internet Explorer palette

Minimize

Mirror

Mirror editing

Moire pattern

Monochrome

Multiple select

N

Navigator

NCSA

Negative

Nested group

Netscape Navigator palette

Nib

Nodes

Noise

Noise filters

Normal view

Nudge

O

Object

Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)

On-screen Color Palette

One-point perspective

Opacity

Open path

Open Prepress Interface (OPI)

Orientation

Out-of-gamut color

Outline

Overprint

P

Page border

Paint applications

Palette

Paletted color mode

Paper Color

Paragraph text

Parent color

Path

Path name

Pattern fill

PANTONE hexachrome palette

PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM

PANTONE process colors palette

PANTONE process colors palette

PCD

PCX

Photo CD

Photographic (gamut mapping)

Pica

Pitch

Pixel

PICT

Playlist

Point

Polygon

Portrait

Position

Positive

PostScript

PostScript textures

PowerClip

Preview Selected Only

Printable Page

Process color

Progressive

Proof

Property Bar

PSD

Pure color

R

Radial fountain fill

Range sensitivity

Rasterized image

Registration marks

Render

Resample

Resident fonts

Resolution

RGB

Rotate

Ruler crosshairs

Rulers

S

Sans serif

Saturation

Scale

Scanner

Scanning resolution

Screen angles

Screen frequency

Scroll

Segments

Selection box

Serif

Server application

Server-side

Service bureau

Simple Wireframe view

Size

Skew

Smooth node

Snap

Snap points

Source file

Spectral power distribution

Spectral signature

Spectrophotometer

Spot color

Spraylist

Spreads

Square fountain fill

Stacking order

Start node

Status Bar

Stretch

Style template

Styles

Subpaths

Subscript

Subtractive color model

Superscript

Swap disk

Swatch

Swatch book

Symbol

Symmetrical

T

Tab

TAC

Target object

Template

Text styles

Texture fill

TGA

Threshold

Thumbnail

Tick divisions

Tile

Tiling

Tints

TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)

Toggle

Tolerance

Tone curve

Toolbar

ToolTips

Toyo COLOR FINDER palette

Tracing

Transformation

Transparency

Transparency in Internet images

Trap

True color

TrueDoc (TM)

TrueType fonts

TRUMATCH

Two-color pattern

Two-point perspective

Type Assist

Typeface

U

Undercolor removal (UCR)

Ungroup

Uniform Colors (palette)

Uniform fill

URL

V

Vanishing point

Vector graphics

W

Weight

White point

Wireframe view

Wizard

Word spacing

Working page

WPG

WYSIWYG (what-you-see-is-what-you-get)

X

X-height

Y

YIQ

Z

Zoom


2D (two-dimensional) (definition)
2D (two-dimensional)

An object with two dimensions: width and height.


3D (three-dimensional) (definition)
3D (three-dimensional)

An object that exists in the dimensions of width, height, and depth.


Accelerator table (definition)
Accelerator table

Files that contain lists of shortcut keys. Shortcut keys are used to speed up, or "accelerate," editing tasks. Different tables are active depending on what you're doing. For example, when you highlight text the Text Editing accelerator table becomes active. If no text is selected, the Main accelerator table is active.


Additive color model (definition)
Additive Color Model

A color model that creates color by adding wavelengths of light. The most common color model, the RGB model, uses red, green, and blue wavelengths to produce a range of colors.


AI (definition)
AI

The filename extension of vector graphics files created using Adobe Illustrator.


Ambient lighting (definition)
Ambient lighting

The lighting in a room, including natural and artificial light sources. The quality and intensity of ambient light in your workspace affects the colors you see in color printouts, in scanning originals, and on your monitor. The brighter the ambient light, the fewer colors you see on your monitor. For accurate color reproduction, keep ambient light levels low and at a constant level.


Anchor point (definition)
Anchor point

The point that remains stationary when you stretch, scale, mirror, or skew an object. The nine anchor points correspond to the eight handles on the object's Selection box and the center of the Selection box, which is represented by an X.


Animation (definition)
Animation

Animation files support moving images. CorelDRAW supports four animation file types: GIF animation (.GIF), MPEG Animation (.MPG), Quick Time Movie (.MOV), and Video for Windows (.AVI).


Anti-aliasing (definition)
Anti-aliasing

A method of smoothing the curved and diagonal edges contained in bitmap images. Anti-aliasing partially fills intermediate pixels along those edges to smooth the transition between the edge and the surrounding image. Anti-aliasing reduces or eliminates jagged edges.


Arrow keys (definition)
Arrow keys

Direction keys that move or "nudge" selected objects in small increments. You can also use Arrow keys to position the cursor when you type or edit text onscreen or in a dialog box.


Arrowhead (definition)
Arrowhead

The shapes at the end of lines. They may be traditional arrow shapes or a variety of other shapes.


Artistic text (definition)
Artistic text

Text type created using the Text tool. Use Artistic text to add single lines of text, such as titles, or to apply graphic effects, such as fitting text to a path, creating extrusions and blends, and creating all other special effects. An Artistic text object can contain up to 32,000 characters. CorelDRAW automatically applies the default Artistic text style, which you can change using the Styles Manager.


Ascender (definition)
Ascender

The parts of lowercase letters that extend above the x-height. In the following graphic, (1) indicates the ascender and (2) indicates the x-height.


Aspect ratio (definition)
Aspect ratio

The ratio of the width of an image to its height (expressed mathematically as x:y). For example, the aspect ratio of an image that is 640 x 480 pixels is 4:3.


Attributes (definition)
Attributes

Characteristics of an object that define its appearance. Ellipses, for example, have specific fill, outline, and size attributes that can be edited. A text object has attributes, such as typeface, weight, and character spacing. Attributes are also called properties.


AutoBackup (definition)
AutoBackup

A feature in Corel applications that automatically creates a backup copy of a file while you work. You can set the time interval at which the file is saved, and set the directory in which backup files are stored. The backup file is named Autobackup_of_filename, where filename represents the name of the file you're working on. This file is deleted when you close the file and replaced with a backup file called Backup_of_filename. If you choose the Make Backup On Save option (as opposed to saving while you work), the file is automatically saved in the same folder as the original.


Auto-panning (definition)
Auto-panning

A feature that automatically scrolls the Drawing Window when you drag beyond its borders. You can enable or disable Auto-panning.


Autotrace (definition)
Autotrace

A feature in CorelDRAW that automatically generates a line drawing from an imported bitmap image.


Axis (definition)
Axis

A hypothetical linear path. The x, y, and z axes (width, height, and depth, respectively) define the coordinates of the axis in three-dimensional space. An object rotates on its axis. In CorelDRAW, an object's axes are parallel to its Selection box, a box that appears around an object or group when it is selected.


Backup (definition)
Backup

A file that is created each time you save a file in a Corel application. The backup file is named Backup_of_filename.  Although you can specify a different directory for backup files made while you work, backup files created when you save are always stored in the same directory as the original file.


Baseline (definition)
Baseline

The invisible, horizontal line on which all the letters of a line sit. In the following, (1) indicates the baseline.


Baseline shift (definition)
Baseline shift

A setting that raises or lowers the baseline of text. By shifting the baseline, you can create subscript or superscript effects.


Bezier curve (definition)
Bezier curve

A path defined by the position of the four control points that are located at the ends of the tangents of the vertices. The length and angle of the tangents describe how a path deviates from linear between its vertices.


Bit depth (definition)
Bit depth

The number of binary bits that define the shade or color of each pixel in an image. For example, a pixel in a black-and-white image has a depth of 1 bit, because it can only be white or black. The number of color values that a given bit depth can produce is equal to 2 to the power of the bit depth.


Bitmap (definition)
Bitmap

An image composed of grids of pixels or dots. Scanners and paint applications such as Corel PHOTO-PAINT generate bitmap images. CorelDRAW creates images using vector objects.


Bitmap pattern (definition)
Bitmap pattern

A bitmap pattern fill is a regular color picture like one you might get by scanning a photograph. They can vary widely in complexity. It is best to use simpler bitmaps for fill patterns, because complex bitmaps are memory-intensive and slow to draw. The complexity of a bitmap is determined by its size, resolution, and color depth.


Bitmap texture (definition)
Bitmap texture

Adjustable preset fills that are available from the Texture Fill dialog box. Bitmap textures include variable fills that look like clouds, water, gravel, minerals, and dozens of other substances. Bitmap textures display on your screen and print to virtually any type of printer.


Black and white (definition)
Black-and-White

A 1-bit color mode that stores images as two solid colors [image] black and white [image] with no gradations. This color mode is useful for line art and simple graphics.


Black point (definition)
Black point

A color printing term that describes the blackness level relative to either a 4-color or 3-color black. A 4-color black is produced by printing 100% cyan, 100% magenta, 100% yellow, and 100% black. A 3-color black is produced by printing 100% of only the CMY inks, and is therefore not as dark.


Bleed (definition)
Bleed

The part of the printed image that extends beyond the edge of the final page. The bleed ensures that the final image goes right to the edge of the paper after binding and trimming.


Blend (definition)
Blend

A special effect that is created by blending one object with another through a progression of shapes and colors. The following examples show a basic blend and a blend on a path. In both cases, the blended objects are the start and finish (i.e., bottom and top) objects in the progression.


BMP (definition)
BMP

The file extension for a Windows bitmap file. Although the .BMP file extension indicates the native bitmap format of Windows, it is also supported by many non-Windows and non-PC applications. A bitmap file stores virtually any type of bitmap data.


Bookmark (definition)
Bookmark

An indicator for marking an address on the Internet.


Brightness (definition)
Brightness

The amount of light that is transmitted or reflected from a given pixel. In the HSB color model, brightness is a measure of how much white a color contains. In this case, a brightness value of 0 produces black and a brightness value of 255 produces white.


Brightness and Contrast filter (definition)
Brightness, Contrast, and Intensity filter

A filter used to lighten or darken a picture (brightness) or to alter the distinction between light and dark areas (contrast). Intensity affects the brighter areas of a picture by making them brighter or darker.


Browser (definition)
Browser

Computer software that interprets HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) tags, displays Web pages, runs Java programs, and more. A browser can be used to view Web pages (HTML documents).


Calibrate (definition)
Calibrate

To adjust precisely for a particular function.


Calibration (definition)
Calibration

In color management, calibration is the process of tuning a color hardware device or color production system so that its output is always consistent and accurate. This process involves matching output from the device to manufacturers' standards or to a standard set by another device.

See also Characterization.


Calibration bar (definition)
Calibration bar

Strips of color printed with an illustration. The calibration bar is used as a reference to calibrate a monitor so that it displays colors the way they appear in the printed output.


Calligraphic (definition)
Calligraphic

An effect created with the Outline tool. Objects are given an outline that varies in thickness and gives curved objects a hand-drawn appearance.


callout (definition)
Callout

Lines used to point to components in a drawing. A callout line can consist of one or two segments.


Camera (definition)
Camera

A device that provides viewpoints for viewing 3D models and for renderings.


Cap height (definition)
Cap height

The distance from the baseline to the top of an uppercase character. In the following graphic, (1) indicates the cap height.


CDR (definition)
CDR

The filename extension of a vector-based native file format in CorelDRAW.


Center of rotation (definition)
Center of rotation

The point around which an object rotates. In the following graphic, (1) indicates the center of rotation.


CGI (definition)
CGI

The standard for the methods that Web servers and external programs and scripts use to communicate. CGI (Common Gateway Interface) is the command protocol between the server and a program. Imagemaps, forms, and index handling programs use CGI conventions.

If you are creating server-side image maps, you must have the image map CGI program on the server. Confirm with your server administrator that you can create server-side image maps.


CGM (definition)
CGM

The filename extension for Computer Graphics Metafile, a vector-based file format.


Channel (definition)
Channel (Color)

A channel is an 8-bit grayscale version of your image that functions like a plate used in the commercial printing process: each channel represents one level of color in your image. When all the channels are printed together, they produce the entire range of colors in the image.

For example, an RGB image comprises three channels (red, green, and blue). When all three channels are printed or displayed together, they create the entire range of colors in the image.


Character code (definition)
Character code

The number that corresponds to a character in a character set, such as the ASCII or ANSI character set.


Character properties (definition)
Character properties

Characteristics that determine the appearance of text, for example, typeface, style, and size.


Character set (definition)
Character set

The letters, punctuation marks, and special characters in a font. Accents and mathematical symbols are examples of special characters.


Characterization (definition)
Characterization

In color management, characterization is the process of defining a device's color characteristics in the form of an electronic device profile.

See also Device Profile.


Check box (definition)
Check box

A square box in a dialog box or Docker Window used to enable or disable an option. An option is enabled when an X or check mark appears in the check box, and it is disabled when the check box is empty. Click in a check box to enable or disable the option.


Child color (definition)
Child color

A color style created as a shade of another color style. For most of the available color models and palettes, child colors share the same hue as the parent but have different saturation and brightness levels. With the Pantone Matching System, Pantone Hexachrome, and UserInks palettes, child and parents share a common ID but have different tint levels.


Choke (definition)
Choke

In commercial printing, a form of trapping created by extending the background object into the foreground object.


Chromaticity (definition)
Chromaticity

In monitor calibration, chromaticity refers to the chroma (hue adjustment) of your monitor.


Cicero (definition)
Cicero

A unit of measurement equivalent to 12 didots. One inch equals 5.63 ciceros.


Click (definition)
Click

To press and release a mouse button.


Client application (definition)
Client application

An OLE (Object Linking and Embedding) application that contains OLE objects (e.g., pictures, charts, and text) that were created in other OLE-compatible applications. Not all OLE applications can be clients. For example, CorelDRAW can be a client or a server, but Corel PHOTO-PAINT can only be a server. If you are uncertain about whether an application is behaving as a client, check its documentation.


Client-side (definition)
Client-side image maps

Client-side image maps do not depend on the server to process the map information, but the user's browser must support image map display. It is always possible that your audience will not have a suitable browser to view the map.


Clipart (definition)
Clipart

Ready-made images that can be imported in Corel applications and edited if required. Corel applications offer thousands of Clipart images in many different formats. You can purchase additional images, including some in bitmap format, from commercial suppliers.


Clipboard (definition)
Clipboard

A temporary storage area that is used to hold cut or copied information. The Clipboard stores information until it is replaced by another object or selection that has been cut or copied.


Clipping hole (definition)
Clipping hole

A transparent hole in a curve object through which underlying objects are visible. You can create clipping holes by combining overlapping objects using the Combine command.


Clipping range (definition)
Clipping range

Sets a value range to which all colors redistribute when the effect is applied.


Clone (definition)
Clone

A copy of an object or an area of an image that is linked to the original object. Most changes made to the original object (the master) are automatically applied to its clones.

You can also clone a special effect that is applied to an object and apply it to other objects. Objects with a cloned effect take on all changes that are made to that effect in the master.


closed path (definition)
Closed path

A path that encloses an area because the path's start and end points are connected.


CMY (definition)
CMY

A color mode made up of cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y). This mode is used in the three-color printing process. In Corel applications, the CMY mode is the inverse of the RGB mode, with values ranging from 0 to 255. The CMY color mode is based on the CMY color model.


CMYK (definition)
CMYK

A color mode made up of cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K). In the CMYK color mode, color values are expressed as percentages, so a value of 100 for an ink means that it is applied at full saturation. Used in most full-color commercial printing, CMYK is like CMY, but the addition of black (K) allows for true blacks and a wider tonal range. The CMYK color mode is based on the CMYK color model.


CMYK255 (definition)
CMYK255

A subtractive color model created by assembling different densities of cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K) pigments on a surface. C, M, Y, and K values range from 0 to 255.

See also CMYK.


Color correction (definition)
Color correction

In color management, on-screen color correction is the process of making the RGB colors you see on your monitor match the colors that your CMYK printer will produce.

Printing color correction is the process of shifting printed colors so that the print output more closely resembles the original or intended design.


Color depth (definition)
Color depth

The number of colors that a file can support. A 1-bit file supports two colors (usually black and white), a 2-bit file supports four colors, a 4-bit file supports 16 colors, an 8-bit file supports 256 colors, and a 24-bit file supports 16 million colors. A grayscale image is an 8-bit file, with 256 increments, ranging from black to white. The higher the color depth supported by a file, the more space the file takes up on disk.


Color gamut (definition)
Color gamut

The range of colors that a device, such as a monitor or color printer, can produce or detect.


Colorimeter (definition)
Colorimeter

An instrument used to measure color values for device calibration. It is designed to "perceive" colors as the human eye perceives them.


Colorimetric (definition)
Colorimetric (gamut mapping)

See Illustration gamut mapping.


Color management (definition)
Color management

The process of ensuring that color is reproduced as accurately as possible by all the devices in your computer system. The major functions of electronic color management are gamut mapping, device characterization, and onscreen color correction. Color Management Profiles let you tune existing color profiles for your monitor, scanner, composite printer, separations printer and monitor's internal RBG. Color profiles are files that describe the color reproduction capabilities of color devices. Corel applications use color profiles to ensure accurate reproduction of color between scanners, monitors and printers.

Once the color profiles have been tuned with the Color Management Profiles, Corel applications can perform the following color management functions:

•	fine-tune scanned input based on your scanner's characteristics

•	ensure that on-screen simulation of printer colors is accurate

•	handle color printing and separation

•	regulate the conversion of one color model to another


Color Matching System (definition)
Color matching system

A color chart, printed in a swatchbook and stored as part of an application, that is used to specify colors for print publishing. Specifying colors from the swatchbook of a proprietary color matching system, such as the PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM, ensures predictable and consistent color reproduction.


color measurement device (definition)
Color measurement device

An instrument used in device calibration that captures colors and defines them numerically. This device can also be used to capture colors for use in your Corel applications. Color measurement devices include spectrophotometers, colorimeters, and densitometers.


Color mode (definition)
Color mode

A system that defines the number and kind of colors that make up a bitmap image. Black-and-White, Grayscale, RGB, CMYK, and Paletted are examples of popular color modes.


Color model (definition)
Color model

A simple color chart that defines the range of colors displayed in a color mode. RGB (red, green, blue), CMY (cyan, magenta, yellow), CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, black), HSB (Hue, Saturation, Brightness), HLS (Hue, Lightness, Saturation), and CIE L*a*b (Lab) are examples of popular color models.


Color Palette (definition)
Color Palette

A Color Palette is a collection of solid colors. In CorelDRAW and Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can use the on-screen Color Palette, the Select Color dialog box, or the Color Docker to choose colors for fills, outlines, and paper. You can use standard color collections like the Uniform Color Palette, customizable Color Palettes that you create and arrange, or color matching systems like the PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM.

See also On-screen Color Palette.


Color profile (definition)
Color profile

A color profile is a description of the color handling capabilities and characteristics of a device. Color profiles describe the color characteristics of color devices and its color spaces.


Color proof (definition)
Color proof

See Composite.


Color separation (definition)
Color separation

In commercial printing, the process of splitting colors in a composite image to produce a number of separate grayscale images, one for each primary color in the original image. In the case of a CMYK image, four separations (one for cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) must be made.


Color space (definition)
Color space

In electronic color management, a virtual representation of device or the color gamut of a color model. The boundaries and contours of a device's color space are mapped by color management software.

See also Color gamut.


Color style (definition)
Color style

A color setting you save and apply to objects in your drawing.


Color swatch (definition)
Color swatch

One of a series of solid-colored patches that is used as a sample when selecting color. A printed booklet of color swatches is called a swatchbook. Swatch also refers to the colors contained in the Color Palette.


Color temperature (definition)
Color temperature

In monitor calibration, color temperature is the color of light expressed as an absolute temperature (on the Kelvin scale). The white point of your monitor is defined in terms of color temperature. 6500° K is bluish white, like daylight, while 5000° K is a yellowish white, like an incandescent bulb.


color value (definition)
Color values (color components)

A set of numbers that defines a color in a color model. For example, in the RGB color model, color values of 255 for red (R) and zero for both green (G) and blue (B) result in the color red.


Command (definition)
Command

A word or control that initiates an action when selected or clicked. Commands can be accessed from a menu or by clicking buttons on a toolbar.


Command button (definition)
Command button

A button in a dialog box or toolbar that is used to carry out an action, such as resetting values or opening a dialog box.


Composite (definition)
Composite

In commercial printing, a preliminary output of a design that includes all image, line art, and text elements. Color composites are often printed on color PostScript printers to check the artwork before color separations are produced for four-color process printing. Also called a comprehensive, proof, or comp.


Composite channel (definition)
Composite channel

A channel that contains all color channels in the image.  You can manipulate all the colors simultaneously.


Compound blend (definition)
Compound blend

A blend created by blending the start or end object from one blend into a blend with another object.


Connector line (definition)
Connector line

A straight line that connects two objects in a drawing. Connector lines can be set to remain attached to the nodes you choose or to shift to the closest nodes on the two connected objects. You can reposition a connector line only by moving the objects it is attached to.


Constrain (definition)
Constrain

To restrict object movement to a particular plane, axis, or angle. The primary way of constraining is to hold down CTRL while transforming or creating an object.


Continuous tone (definition)
Continuous tone

An image represented by smooth graduated tones from one color to another, like in a photographic print. Continuous tone images must be converted into raster files before they can be reproduced on digital devices such as computer monitors.


Contour (definition)
Contour

A special effect created by adding evenly spaced concentric lines inside or outside the borders of an object. These lines use the same shape as the outline of the original object, but they are smaller or larger depending on where they are created.

The spaces between contour lines are filled with colors that follow a progression from the original object to the last shape created. If there is a difference in color between the contour lines and the outline of the original object, a second progression occurs. You can modify both color progressions to get the look you want.


Contrast (definition)
Contrast

The difference in tone between the dark and light areas of an image. Higher contrast values indicate greater differences between dark and light with fewer gradations between dark and light.


Controls (definition)
Controls

Tools that change a user's action into a signal understood by the computer and generate a response.


Control object (definition)
Control object

A term used in CorelDRAW to refer to the original object in an extrusion. Changes made to the control object control the appearance of the extruded surfaces.


Control path (definition)
Control path

A curve that determines the shape of an Artistic Media stroke. To change the shape of the curve, you must edit the control path.


Control point (definition)
Control point

Points that extend from nodes along curves that are being edited with the Shape tool. Control points determine the angle at which the curve passes through the node. Control points appear when you select a node or segment using the Shape tool.


CorelDRAW (definition)
CorelDRAW

A vector-based drawing application that lets you create professional artwork, from simple logos to intricate technical illustrations.


Corel TRACE (definition)
Corel TRACE

An application included in the CorelDRAW suite that traces bitmap images. The result is a vector graphic that you can import into CorelDRAW for editing.


Corel PHOTO-PAINT (definition)
Corel PHOTO-PAINT

A bitmap-based image editing and painting application that lets you retouch photographs, edit images and video files, and create original artwork. Corel PHOTO-PAINT provides special effects filters, painting, masking, and object handling tools.


CPT (definition)
CPT

The filename extension associated the native file format of Corel PHOTO-PAINT. .CPTs are bitmapped graphics that represent shapes as pixels arranged to form an image.

CorelDRAW can import and export files in .CPT format, including files that contain color and grayscale information.

In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, masks, floating objects, and lenses are saved with the image when you save in the .CPT format.


Crop (definition)
Crop

To reduce the visible area of an imported bitmap. When you crop a bitmap before you import it in CorelDRAW, the imported bitmap consists only of the area within the cropping frame. If you are not certain how much you want to crop, you can crop the bitmap more precisely in CorelDRAW using the Shape tool.


Crop marks (definition)
Crop marks

Alignment marks that appear at the four corners of a printed page. Crop marks make it easier to trim the paper to the proper size and appear only when the page size is smaller than the paper used by the printer.


Crosshairs (definition)
Crosshairs

The pair of intersecting lines that can be dragged from the spot where the rulers meet to set the ruler origin.


Curve object (definition)
Curve object

An object that can be any shape. Curve objects have nodes (the points on a path that determine its shape) and control points (points that extend from nodes to further define a path's shape) that you manipulate to change the object's shape. Curve objects can be drawn with the Freehand tool, Bezier tool, Spiral tool, and Natural Pen tool. You can also convert text and objects drawn with the Rectangle tool, Ellipse tool, and Polygon tool into curve objects by using the Convert To Curves command in the Arrange menu.


Cusp node (definition)
Cusp node

A node that lets you move the two control points independently. Moving one control point does not affect the other one. Use a cusp node to add a sharp bend to a curve.


Default printer (definition)
Default printer

The printing device that is used automatically when you choose the Print command. You can select only one default printer at a time.


Default settings (definition)
Default settings

Preset options built into an application. Each new document you open uses the default settings.


Densitometer (definition)
Densitometer

An instrument used to measure the density of tones in printed and photographic output for printer calibration.


Densitometer scale (definition)
Densitometer scale

Scales that are printed on each page of a color-separated image to help you gauge the accuracy, quality, and consistency of the output.


Descender (definition)
Descender

The parts of lowercase letters that extend below the baseline. In the following graphic, (1) indicates the baseline and (2) indicates the descender.


Device-dependent color model (definition)
Device-dependent color model

A color model that bases color values on the color characteristics of a specific device. For example, because CMYK is a device-dependent color model, CMYK color values used to produce an image on one device may produce different colors on another device.


Device driver (definition)
Device driver

An application that enables communication between a computer and a device, such as a mouse or printer. A mouse driver, for example, displays a cursor on the screen and translates clicks into actions.


Device-independent color model (definition)
Device-independent color model

A color model that bases color values on fixed standards rather than on the color characteristics of a specific device. For example, since Lab is a device-independent color model, Lab values remain constant, even if a file moves between devices.


Device profile (definition)
Device profile

In color management, a file that describes the color-producing characteristics of a device. Most color management software uses profiles that are in the ICC (International Color Consortium) format.

See also Characterization or ICC.


Dialog box (definition)
Dialog box

A window that is displayed when the application needs additional information to perform an action or command. For example, when you choose the Open command to open a file, the Open dialog box appears, prompting you to indicate a filename and location.


Didot (definition)
Didot

A unit of measurement equivalent to 1.07 U.S. points. One inch equals 67.567 didots.


Digital image (definition)
Digital image

An image comprised of discrete units or pixels (picture elements) that a computer can interpret. Each pixel has a single bit depth and tonal value.


Dimension line (definition)
Dimension line

A line that shows the size of objects or the distance between objects. Dimension lines are extremely useful for creating technical diagrams, floor plans, or any drawing where exact measurements and scale are important. A dimension line can be attached to an object so that when the object is moved, the dimension line moves with it.


Direction keys (definition)
Direction keys

Keyboard keys that let you navigate through documents quickly. Keyboard keys include the up, down, left, and right arrow keys, and the HOME, END, PAGE UP, and PAGE DOWN keys on the numeric keypad.

The arrow keys move selected objects in small steps (called nudging). They also move the insertion point (a vertical bar that indicates where text will be inserted) when you type or edit text on the screen or in a dialog box.

The HOME and END keys select the start and end nodes (the points at the end of lines and curved segments) on a curve object when you use the Shape tool. They also move the insertion point in a block of text to the beginning or end of a line.

Press the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN keys (make sure the NUM LOCK key is off) to move back or forward one page at a time.


Distortion

A lack of proportionality in an image that results from defects in the optical system.


Dithered color (definition)
Dithered color

Color that is simulated by putting dots of another color very close together. Windows uses dithering to display colors that the graphics adapter can't display.


Dither (definition)
Dithering

Randomization of pixels on devices or images that use a limited Color Palette to simulate continuous tone progressions. Screen dithering is a method of enhancing the display of monitors that are capable of 16-bit color or less. It works by averaging the depth of pixels in a given area to create additional colors or shades of gray. Image dithering is a method of enhancing the appearance of photographic images that use a limited Color Palette.


Dockable window (definition)
Docker Window

A type of window that attaches or "docks" to the side of the desktop, making some of the most popular commands and controls available at all times. You can layer the Docker Windows on top of each other on the desktop.


Document Page (definition)
Document Page

A Document Page is sometimes called a "page." You can access a document page in a multipage document by clicking on a page tab at the bottom-left corner of the Drawing Window.


Dot gain (definition)
Dot gain

The result of a printing press increasing the size of the dots that make up a bitmap when the image is printed. Dot gain can cause the overall image to appear darker than intended.


Double-click (definition)
Double-click

To press and release the left mouse button twice quickly in succession.


Downloadable fonts (definition)
Downloadable fonts

Fonts stored on disk that, unlike printer-resident fonts, must be transmitted to the printer before you can print your document.


DPI (definition)
Dots per inch (DPI)

A measure of a printer's resolution in dots per inch. Typical desktop laser printers print at 300 dpi. Image setters print at 1270 or 2540 dpi. Printers with higher dpi capabilities produce smoother and cleaner output. The term dpi is also used to measure scanning resolution and to indicate bitmap resolution.


Draft view (definition)
Draft view

Shows uniform fills and low-resolution bitmaps. This view displays lenses and fountain fills as colors.

Draft view also displays a unique pattern to represent each fill. The checker board pattern represents two color fills. The two-way arrow pattern represents full-color fills. The hatched line pattern represents the bitmap fill. The PS pattern represents the PostScript fill.

The view quality settings have no effect on the size of a drawing, only on how a drawing is displayed on the monitor.


Drag (definition)
Drag

To drag an object to a new location using the mouse. For example, you can drag an object from one document to another. You can also drag files from another application to import them.


Drawing Page (definition)
Drawing Page

The portion of the Drawing Window that appears on the printed page. This area is enclosed by a rectangle with a shadow effect. Although you can draw anywhere in the Drawing Window, only objects on the Drawing Page appear in your print jobs.


Drawing Window (definition)
Drawing Window

Contains a CorelDRAW drawing. You can draw anywhere in the Drawing Window, but only objects that appear on the Drawing Page (indicated by a rectangle with a drop shadow) print.


Drive (definition)
Drive

A device in a computer that spins disks that are used to store information. Personal computers usually have a fixed-disk drive labeled C: or D: (hard drives), and one or two floppy-disk drives labeled A: or B:. In addition, many computers have a CD-ROM drive labeled E: or F:.


drop caps (definition)
Drop cap

A Paragraph Text formatting option. The initial letter of a paragraph that is displayed inset into the body of the text. Drop caps often appear at the beginning of each chapter in a book.


Duotone (definition)
Duotone

An 8-bit color mode that displays images using 256 shades of up to four tones. An image in the Duotone color mode is simply a grayscale image that has been enhanced with one to four additional colors. Use the Duotone color mode to add a touch of color to grayscale images or to create interesting effects using tone curve settings. A duotone image can be monotone, duotone, tritone, or quadtone.


Dupont palette (definition)
DuPont palette

A standard color matching system for selecting DuPont high-performance automotive-quality paint colors. The 3368 paint chips of the SpectraMaster Solid Color Library can be used to accurately select ten types of paint worldwide.

The palette colors are based on the Lab color model . You view the colors on your monitor in RGB mode. These colors print in CMYK mode.


Edge pad (definition)
Edge pad

In fountain fills, determines how long the beginning and ending colors remain as solid colors before they start blending with the next color. Higher values allow the colors to remain solid longer before blending, causing the colors to spread more quickly. Lower values result in a smooth transformation between the two colors. The maximum setting is 45%. The edge pad option is not available for conical fills.


Em (definition)
Em

A unit of measurement used in typesetting that is as wide as the point size being used. There are approximately 72 points (pts) to an inch and 12 points to a pica.


Embed (definition)
Embed

To enclose an element, such as a bitmap image, in a document.


Embedded object (definition)
Embedded object

Information from a file created in one application (the server application) that has been inserted into a file in another application (the client application). For example, you can embed a graphic created in Corel PHOTO-PAINT in CorelDRAW.


Embedded color profile (definition)
Embedded color profile

Ensures accurate color reproduction between the input and the output device. When you open your file in a different application or view it on another monitor, you achieve color consistency when you use an embedded color profile. Corel supports ICC-embedded profiles, and TIFF and ESP formats.


Emboss (definition)
Emboss

The process of creating three-dimensional relief on a two-dimensional surface.

The Emboss effect filter evaluates tonal values and exaggerates edges between dark and light areas, darkens shadows, and brightens highlights to give the appearance of texture and greater depth.


Emulsion (definition)
Emulsion

The light-sensitive coating material on a piece of film.


En (definition)
En

A typesetting unit of measure equal to half the width of an em (which is as wide as the point size being used).


End node (definition)
End node

The small square that appears at the end of an open path when you select the path using the Shape tool. The end node is smaller than the start node.


Enhanced view (definition)
Enhanced view

One of the five view quality settings in CorelDRAW. These settings control the way a drawing is displayed on your monitor. Enhanced view uses 2X oversampling to ensure the best possible display quality.

The view quality settings have no effect on the size of a drawing, only on how the drawing is displayed on the monitor.


Envelope (definition)
Envelope

A feature that allows you to distort the shape of an object. Distortion is created by dragging nodes on an imaginary box (the envelope) which in turn distorts the object.


EPS (definition)
EPS

The filename extension for Encapsulated PostScript files. Corel applications can import and export .EPS files.


Extension (definition)
Extension

The characters that follow the period in a filename. These characters identify the type of information contained in the file (the file format). The .CPT extension, for example, indicates that the file contains a bitmap saved using Corel PHOTO-PAINT; the .CDR extension indicates that the file contains a vector graphic created using CorelDRAW.


Externally linked bitmap(definition)
Externally linked bitmap

A bitmap that is not embedded in a document, but is referenced by the application. A lower-resolution "placeholder" image is visible in the document.


Extrude (definition)
Extrude

A feature that lets you give objects a three-dimensional (3D) look by creating the illusion of depth. You can change the direction and depth of the extrude, the position of the vanishing point, its placement in 3D space, and its color.


Feedback sound (definition)
Feedback sound

CorelDRAW supports sounds through the operating system. These sounds are associated with certain user interface events. These events can be enabled or disabled in CorelDRAW. Although CorelDRAW registers events available for sound cues, it does not supply sounds. Instead, sounds are assigned to specific events through the operating system's Control Panel from the CorelDRAW sound events category.


File compression (definition)
File compression

Files are often stored in a compressed format to save space on your hard disk. Several compression techniques can be used, depending on the original file format. Generally, the more compressed a file is, the slower it is to read from or write to.

Compression can be lossless or lossy. Lossless compression retains all the original data through the compression and decompression processes. Lossless compression is recommended for storing text or numerical data, such as spreadsheets. Lossy compression loses some of the original data but, depending on your requirements, this loss may not make a difference in the final result of your work. Lossy compression can compress your original files to a much greater extent than lossless compression can, which makes it useful when disk space is at a premium.


File preview (definition)
File preview

In the Open and Import dialog boxes, a small bitmap representation that lets you preview the contents of a selected file. Also called a thumbnail.


Fill (definition)
Fill

Fills are colors, bitmaps, color gradients, or patterns that are applied to areas of your image.

In CorelDRAW, fills can be applied to any drawn object or curve. In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, fills can be applied to the contents of rectangles, polygons, etc., but are more often applied to portions of your bitmap image using the Fill tool.


Film (definition)
Film

In commercial printing, a photo-sensitive transparent sheet onto which images are transferred as either a positive or a negative. These sheets are then used by a commercial printer to create printing plates.


Filter (definition)
Filter

The name for an application that translates digital information from one form to another.

Import/Export filters convert files from one format to another. For example, to import a CorelDRAW image into Corel PHOTO-PAINT, the image must be converted from a vector image into a bitmap image. When you select a file format in the Export dialog box of CorelDRAW, you automatically activate the appropriate filter application to perform the translation.

Special Effects filters process image information and alter the image according to preset specifications to produce a special effect. For example, the Median filter in PHOTO-PAINT analyzes all the pixels in an area of your image and applies an average color across the area to create a smooth, slightly blurry effect with less detail.


Flow line (definition)
Flow line

A line with a right angle bend used to connect objects in flowcharts and organizational charts. Flow lines have only vertical and horizontal segments. If you connect two objects where one is above and to the left of the other, the Interactive Connector tool draws alternating vertical and horizontal line segments in a step-like fashion. Flow lines remain attached to the nodes you choose when the objects are moved.


FOCOLTONE (definition)
FOCOLTONE

A color system that provides a range of spot colors that are built with the process colors cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (CMYK). The FOCOLTONE colors are organized so that you can choose FOCOLTONE colors that have at least 10% of one process color in common with another FOCOLTONE color. FOCOLTONE minimizes the need for trapping and makes it a good Color Palette for color separations.


Folder (definition)
Folder

A named section of computer disk space used to store and organize documents, applications, and other files. For example, you can create a folder called "LOGOS" for storing logo designs. In Windows 3.x, folders are called directories.


Font (definition)
Font

A single style, weight, and size of a typeface, such as Times Roman bold, 10 point. Times Roman 18 point is a different font.


Force justification (definition)
Force justification

Stretches the last line of a paragraph to the right margin. Force justification is different from full justification. Full justification (also called justification) modifies the spacing between characters and words so that edges on both the left and right margins of a block of text are even.


Force line breaks (definition)
Force line breaks

You can force a line break in a paragraph by pressing SHIFT + ENTER. Force line breaks cause text to wrap to the following line without starting a new paragraph [image] unlike hard returns, which are created when you press ENTER.

No spacing is added between lines that are separated by a force line break. In effects such as a bulleted paragraph, a bullet doesn't appear on the line that follows. The next bullet appears when you press ENTER.


Fountain fill (definition)
Fountain fill

A complex fill that displays a progression between two colors that follow a linear, radial, conical, or square path. Fountain fills are also known as gradient or graduated fills. You can create a direct blend from one color to another or a cascade of different colors. You can also use preset fountain fills to create neon tubes, metal cylinders, and other effects.


Four-color process (definition)
Four-color process

A printing process that uses four semi-transparent inks (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) to produce the full range of colors in your artwork. The final colors, called process colors, are produced using four halftone screens [image] one for each CMYK color.


Frame (definition)
Frame or Paragraph text frame

The rectangle that contains a block of Paragraph text created using the Text tool.


Full-color pattern (definition)
Full-color pattern

A picture composed of lines and fills instead of dots of color. These pictures are smoother and more complex than bitmap images and are generally easier to manipulate.

You can choose a vector pattern from a variety of preset patterns that are included with CorelDRAW, or import any CorelDRAW file to use as a vector pattern. Unlike two-color and four-color bitmap patterns, there is no limit to the number of colors that can be included in a vector pattern.


Full-screen preview (definition)
Full-screen preview

A view option that displays a detailed version of your drawing without displaying any user interface elements (e.g., the Title Bar, Menu Bar, and Status Bar). You can switch to the preview screen by choosing Full-Screen Preview from the View menu or by pressing F9. Pressing any key returns you to the Drawing Window.


Gamma (definition)
Gamma

A measure of the overall contrast of an image. Gamma adjustments affect midtones, while maintaining overall contrast. Shadows and highlights are maintained.


Gamut (definition)
Gamut

See Color Gamut.


Gamut alarm (definition)
Gamut alarm

A color management tool that alerts you to the presence of colors in your artwork outside the range of colors that your printer is capable of printing. It does so by changing the out-of-gamut colors into a single solid color [image] the gamut alarm color.


Gamut mapping (definition)
Gamut mapping

The electronic assessment of the gamut of devices you use and the reassignment of out-of-gamut colors to other colors that can be reproduced. Colorimetric gamut mapping is used for spot colors and vector-based art, and photographic gamut mapping is used for bitmap art.

See also Color space.


Gaussian (definition)
Gaussian

Refers to gaussian distribution, which applies an effect using bell-shaped distribution curves rather than straight lines.


Gaussian blur (definition)
Gaussian blur

Blurs the image according to a bell-shaped distribution curve to spread pixel information outward.


Gaussian drop-off (definition)
Gaussian drop-off

A drop-off effect in the Boss or Glass effect filters. The "S"-shaped curve begins and ends with a round and gradual slope and has a steep section in the middle. The Gaussian drop-off results in a smooth and less noticeable transition between the bevel and the rest of the image.


GIF (Graphics Interchange Format) (definition)
GIF (GRAPHICS INTERCHANGE FORMAT)

Graphics Interchange Format. Originally developed by CompuServe, .GIF is a graphic file format designed to use a minimum of disk space and be easily read and exchanged between systems. This format is commonly used to publish images of 256 colors or less to the Internet.


Gradation (definition)
Gradation

A gradual change from one tint or color shade to another tint or color shade.


Graphic style (definition)
Graphic style

A set of fill and outline settings that simplifies the task of formatting objects in your drawings. When you apply a style to an object, all the settings of the style are applied to that object in one step.


Gray component (definition)
Gray component

In commercial full-color printing, the gray component of a CMY color represents the amount of gray that the color contains. Because all three CMY inks together produce black, any combination of all three inks can be treated as a shade of gray.

See also Gray Component Replacement (GCR).


Gray component replacement (GCR) (definition)
Gray Component Replacement (GCR)

In commercial full-color printing, GCR substitutes black ink (K) for some or all of the gray component of each color. This process reduces total area coverage (TAC) in CMYK output, and replaces expensive colored inks with less expensive black ink.

See also Gray component.


Grayscale (definition)
Grayscale

A color mode that displays images using 256 shades of gray. Each color is defined as a value between 0 and 255, where 0 is darkest (black) and 255 is lightest (white). In the RGB color mode, a grayscale value corresponds to equal amounts of all RGB colors; in CMYK, a grayscale value corresponds to zero C, M, and Y values, with a positive K value; in HSB, a grayscale value corresponds to zero H and S values, with a positive B value. The Grayscale color mode is based on the Grayscale color model.


Grayscale image (definition)
Grayscale image

An image that uses the grayscale color model, which can display up to 256 shades of gray ranging from white to black. Grayscale images, especially photographs, are commonly referred to as "black and white."


Greeking (definition)
Greeking

Represents text using either dummy type that has no meaning or a series of straight lines. Greeking increases screen drawing speed when text is too small to be legible on the screen. Greeking does not affect print quality.


Grid (definition)
Grid

A series of evenly spaced horizontal and vertical dots that are used to help draw and arrange objects. You can use the controls on the Grid and Ruler Setup dialog box to set the grid's parameters. For greater accuracy, you can also have objects in your illustration snap to the grid when you move, or draw them.


Group (definition)
Group

A set of objects which behave as one unit. Also refers to the Group command. Most operations you perform on a group apply equally to each of its components.


Guidelines (definition)
Guidelines

Lines that you can use to align objects. Guidelines can be horizontal, vertical, or slanted, and you can make them any color. You can also print guidelines.


Gutter (definition)
Gutter

The space between columns of Paragraph text.


Halftone (definition)
Halftone

An image that has been converted from a continuous tone image to a series of dots of various sizes to represent different tones (See Halftone screen). A photograph must be converted to a halftone before it can be printed on conventional devices and printing presses. Halftones are often referred to as PMTs. On laser printers that cannot print different sizes of dots, the halftone is produced by printing different numbers of dots in a given area.


Halftone screen (definition)
Halftone screen

A grid pattern that simulates the appearance of shading in a printed image by converting a continuous-tone image to an image composed of tiny dots of various sizes. The resolution of a halftone screen, or screen frequency, is expressed in lpi (lines per inch).


Handles (definition)
Handles

A set of eight black squares that appear at the corners and sides of an object when the object is selected. By dragging individual handles, you can scale, resize, or mirror the object. If you click a selected object, the handles change to arrows that let you rotate and skew the object. The following graphics display selection handles, skewing handles, and rotation handles.


Hanging indent (definition)
Hanging indent

A format applied to paragraph text in which the first line of text begins farther to the right than subsequent lines. Hanging indents are used for bibliographies, glossary terms, and bulleted and numbered lists.


Header (definition)
Header

An optional bitmap image that is created when you save a CorelDRAW file or export it in .EPS format. Including an image header lets you see a representation of the file contents when you open that file in a nonnative application, such as Corel VENTURA. The header, (also called a thumbnail), provides the preview in the File, Open dialog box.


Hexachrome color (definition)
Hexachrome color

A method for producing process colors using two additional inks (orange and green) to extend the range of the four traditional process inks (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black).


Hints (definition)
Hints

A method of defining exactly which pixels are turned on to improve the appearance of fonts at small point sizes and low screen or printer resolutions. Hinting is automatically applied to the TrueType and Adobe Type 1 fonts supplied with CorelDRAW.


HLS (definition)
Hue, Lightness, Saturation (HLS)

The HLS model is a variation of the HSB model and contains three components: hue, lightness, and saturation. Hue determines color (yellow, orange, red, etc.); lightness determines perceived intensity (lighter or darker color); and saturation determines color depth (from dull to intense). The circular visual selector defines the H value (0 to 360) and the S value (0 to 100); the vertical visual selector defines the L value (0 to 100).


HSB (definition)
Hue, Saturation, Brightness (HSB)

A color model that approximates the way the human eye perceives color. In the HSB model, color is defined by three components: hue, saturation, and brightness. Hue determines color (yellow, orange, red, etc.); brightness determines perceived intensity (lighter or darker color); and saturation determines color depth (from dull to intense). In the HSB color model, Hue (H) is expressed as a degree of rotation on a circular color wheel. Saturation (S) and brightness (B) are expressed as percentages of full intensity.


HTML (definition)
HTML

Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) is the World Wide Web authoring standard. HTML is comprised of markup tags that define the structure and components of a document. The tags are used to tag text and integrate resources (such as images, sound, video, and animation) when you create a Web page.


Hue (definition)
Hue

The property of a color that allows us to classify it by its name. For example, blue, green, and red are all hues.


Hyperlink (definition)
Hyperlink

An electronic link that provides access directly from one place in a document to another place in that document or to another document.


Icon (definition)
Icon

A pictorial representation of a tool, object, file, or other application item. An item is selected by clicking, or sometimes double-clicking, its icon. For example, double-clicking the CorelDRAW icon on your desktop starts CorelDRAW.


ICC (definition)
ICC

International Color Consortium (ICC) is an organization that sets standards for device characterization.

See also Device profile.


Illustration gamut mapping (definition)
Illustration gamut mapping

A technique in which only colors that fall outside the color gamut of the printing device you are using are remapped, ensuring that in-gamut colors maintain their original color characteristics. The illustration gamut mapping technique (also called colorimetric) is suited to vector graphics.

See also Photographic gamut mapping.


Image header (definition)
Image header

See Header.


Image map (definition)
Image map

A hypergraphic found in a HyperText Markup Language (HTML) document that contains clickable areas that link to Universal Resource Locator (URLs) on the World Wide Web (WWW). When you click one of the clickable areas (also called hot spots) in the image, the browser displays the HTML document named in the URL. An image map graphic is made up of a bitmap (the image) and a series of coordinates that describe the location of the hotspots on the bitmap (the map).


Image setter (definition)
Imagesetter

A generic term for printers that are capable of printing text and graphics (line art and photographs) on film or photographic paper at a resolution of 1200 dpi or greater.


Indent (definition)
Indent

A Paragraph text formatting option. An indent positions text a specific distance from the left or right frame borders. Indents are often used to indicate the beginning of a paragraph. You can indent an entire paragraph or only the first line.


Index control (definition)
Index control

A control that consists of a column list topped with category headers.


Insertion point (definition)
Insertion point

A vertical bar that indicates where text will be inserted when you type. The insertion point appears when you click the Drawing Window using  the Text tool, draw a frame using the Text tool, or open a dialog box that requires you to type information.


Intensity (definition)
Intensity

Intensity is a measure of the brightness of the light pixels in a bitmap image compared with the darker mid-tones and dark pixels. An increase in intensity increases the vividness of whites while maintaining true darks.


Intercharacter spacing (definition)
Intercharacter spacing

The amount of spacing between characters of text. Intercharacter spacing is also called letter spacing and kerning.


Interlacing (definition)
Interlacing

A method that lets you display an image onscreen, but at a low, blocky resolution, as soon as the image appears onscreen. As the image data loads, the image quality improves.


Interline spacing (definition)
Interline spacing

The amount of white space between the baseline of one line of text and the baseline of the adjacent line of text. Interline spacing is also called leading.


Interparagraph spacing (definition)
Interparagraph spacing

The amount of spacing between paragraphs. If the interparagraph spacing between two adjacent paragraphs differs, the larger of the two values applies.


Interruptible Display (definition)
Interruptible refresh

A feature in CorelDRAW that stops the screen during a redraw whenever the mouse button or a key is pressed. If you are working on a complex drawing, interruptible refresh can save time by allowing you to choose tools and commands without waiting for the screen to redraw completely. You can enable or disable Interruptible Refresh on the Display tab of the Options dialog box.


Interword spacing (definition)
Interword spacing

The amount of spacing between words. Increasing and decreasing interword spacing affects the readability and appearance of text.


JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) (definition)
JPEG (.JPG)

Established by the JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group), this format is an international standard for compressed photographic images. It offers compression with minimal loss of image quality. Because of their essentially lossless compression (20 to 1) and small file size, JPEG images are widely used in Internet publishing.


Justify (definition)
Justify

An alignment option for Paragraph text. Full justification (also called justification) modifies the spacing between characters and words so that the edges on the left and right margins of a block of text are even.


Kerning (definition)
Kerning

To adjust the spacing between two consecutive characters. With certain letter pairs, such as AV, moving the letters closer together improves their appearance on the printed page. You can kern text interactively using the Shape tool or manually by typing values in the Format Text dialog box.


Keyboard shortcut (definition)
Keyboard shortcut

A key or combination of keys that activates a command. Shortcuts give you quick access to commands that you use frequently. You can change built-in keyboard assignments or assign new key combinations to any command. You can also create sets of keyboard assignments to use with different types of operations.


Lab (definition)
Lab (CIE L*a*b)

A color model created by the Commission Internationale de l'Eclairage (CIE). It contains a luminance (or lightness) component (L) and two chromatic components: "a" (green to red) and "b" (blue to yellow). The Lab color mode is based on the Lab color model.


Landscape (definition)
Landscape

A page oriented so that the horizontal dimension of the page is greater than the vertical dimension.


Layer (definition)
Layer

One of a series of transparent planes on which you can place objects in a drawing. You can control how objects in your drawing overlay one another by moving the layer and the objects they contain. You can also lock layers and make them invisible and nonprintable. Use layers to help you organize different components of a complex drawing.


Layout style(definition)
Layout style

In CorelDRAW, layout styles determine the way a multipage document is organized for printing. CorelDRAW provides preset layout styles for several types of publications, including books, booklets, and tent cards.

In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, layout styles determine the way the images of your print job are placed on the printed page. For example, if you are printing a brochure, two images or animation frames may appear on one printed page.


Lens (definition)
Lens

Lets you change the appearance of objects and, more significantly, the way you perceive objects behind. You can apply lens to almost any closed shape that has been created using the drawing tools in CorelDRAW.


Lights (definition)
Lights

Light sources that can be added to a three-dimensional model (3D) model for rendering purposes. They simulate lighting, providing photographic realism and the appearance of 3D depth.


Limitcheck error (definition)
Limitcheck error

A PostScript printing error that occurs when a drawing contains too many line segments or when a bitmap is too large for the printer to reproduce.


Line art (definition)
Line art

In traditional graphic arts, an illustration that contains only black and white.


Line style (definition)
Line style

The collection of attributes that are assigned to an object's outline. You can assign custom line styles or choose presets that apply a solid, dashed, dotted, or dashed-and-dotted line style.


Linear fountain fill (definition)
Linear fill

A type of fountain fill that shows a progression of colors in a straight line. You can apply custom or preset linear fountain fills that use a direct progression from one color to another or a cascade of different colors.


Linked object (definition)
Linked object

Objects are considered to be linked in Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) when information from one file (the source file) is inserted in another file (the destination file). The source file is then linked to the destination file. Changes made to the information in the source file can be automatically or manually updated in the destination file.


Lino (definition)
Lino

Linotronic (Lino) is a line of PostScript image setters that is used for high-resolution printing. The term has come to mean any type of image setter used by service bureaus that output to film.


Lossless (definition)
Lossless

The maintenance of image quality of an image that has been compressed and decompressed. The process of compressing and decompressing often degrades image quality. A lossless image is one in which the image quality of a decompressed file appears nearly identical to the original.


Lossy (definition)
Lossy

A noticeable degradation to image quality as a result of file compression. Choosing a high quality compression often results in very little loss of perceptible information. The lower the quality of compression, the poorer the image quality will be when the image is decompressed.


LPI (definition)
lpi (lines per inch)

The screen frequency used for halftone screens for photos and tints. The density of dots on Photomultiplier Tubes (PMTs) and film output of continuous-tone images from imagesetters is measured in lpi.


Luminosity (definition)
Luminosity

A value that corresponds to the brightness of a color.


Margin (definition)
Margin

A margin is the space on a signature to the left of the leftmost page, to the right of the rightmost page, above the topmost page, or below the bottommost page. The printer or service bureau may specify a minimum margin size. You can adjust the margin size to accommodate the nonprintable area of the device to which you are printing.


Marquee box (definition)
Marquee box

A box with a dotted outline that appears when you click and drag diagonally to select multiple objects or nodes on a curve. CorelDRAW selects the objects that are enclosed in the marquee box when you release the mouse button.


Marquee-select (definition)
Marquee-select

A method of selecting objects or nodes using the Pick tool or Shape tool. To marquee select, you click and drag to enclose objects in a dotted rectangle called the marquee box.


Master (definition)
Master

An object that has been copied using the Clone command. Most changes you make to the Master object are automatically applied to the clone.


Master layer (definition)
Master layer

A layer that contains information that you want to appear on every page of a multipage document. For example, you can use a master layer to place a header or footer on every page.


Maximize (definition)
Maximize

To enlarge an application's window to full-screen size.


Menu (definition)
Menu

A list of commands that appears when you click a menu name in the Menu Bar.


Merge mode (definition)
Merge mode

Determines how the color of a transparency is combined with the color of objects that appear behind the transparency. The effect depends on the colors that are contained in the transparency and the object. CorelDRAW offers 19 merge modes.


Microsoft® Internet Explorer palette (definition)
Microsoft Internet Explorer palette

An 8-bit palette of 256 colors used by the Web browser Microsoft Internet Explorer. Using colors from this Color Palette ensures that your image colors display clearly on systems that use this browser.


Minimize (definition)
Minimize

To reduce an application's window to an icon in the task bar.


Mirror (definition)
Mirror

To flip an object horizontally, vertically, or diagonally.


Mirror editing (definition)
Mirror editing

A type of node editing that lets you maintain the symmetry of an object created using the Polygon tool. Each node of an object created using the Polygon tool is associated with other nodes. All the corner or point nodes are associated with each other, and all the side or interior nodes are associated with each other.

When you edit a node on an object created using the Polygon tool (e.g., move it or change it to a curve), all the associated nodes reflect this edit. For example, if you move a corner node toward the center of a pentagon, all the corner nodes also move toward the center.


Moire pattern (definition)
Moiré pattern

Undesirable wave patterns that are created by conflicting dot patterns in an image. A Moiré pattern is created when halftone screens of two different frequencies are superimposed on an image. For example, when you scan a halftone image, you see Moiré patterns on your monitor because the original halftone screen is different than the dots per inch (dpi) frequency of the scanned image.

Moiré patterns can be damaging when they occur in color separations. Set the screen angles and frequencies of your halftone screen correctly to avoid this problem.


Monochrome (definition)
Monochrome

An image that contains one color, usually black, on a background that uses a different color, usually white.


Multiple select (definition)
Multiple select

A method of selecting multiple objects using the Pick tool or multiple nodes using the Shape tool. Hold down SHIFT and click the objects or nodes you want to select.


Navigator (definition)
Navigator

Lets you move through your document quickly. Displayed in the bottom left corner of the Application Window, the Navigator shows the total number of pages in your drawing and the number of the page currently displayed. You can move to a page in your document by clicking and add blank pages without interrupting your work.

When your document contains one page, the Navigator looks like this:

When your document consists of multiple pages, the Navigator looks like this:


NCSA (definition)
NCSA

National Center for Supercomputing Applications developed a Web server system.

If you are creating an image map to be displayed on the World Wide Web you need to know whether the server you are using runs CERN or NCSA, because different codes are used in the map files. Contact your server administrator to learn whether you are using CERN or NCSA.


Negative (definition)
Negative

An image in which the values in the original are reversed so that black areas appear white, white areas appear black, and colors are represented by their complementary colors (as displayed on the color wheel).


Nested group (definition)
Nested group

The grouping of two or more groups that behaves as one object.


Netscape Navigator palette (definition)
Netscape Navigator palette

An 8-bit palette of 256 colors used by the Web browser Netscape Navigator. Using colors from this Color Palette ensures that your image colors display clearly on systems that use this browser.


Nib (definition)
Nib

The tip of a brush tool. You can set the size, shape, and transparency of a nib.


Nodes (definition)
Nodes

The square points at the end of lines and curve segments. You can change the shape of a line or curve by dragging one or more of its nodes.


Noise (definition)
Noise

In bitmap editing, random pixels on the surface of a bitmap, resembling static on a television screen.


Noise_filters (definition)
Noise filters

Filters in Corel PHOTO-PAINT and CorelDRAW used to add or remove unwanted information from an image.


Normal view (definition)
Normal view

One of five view-quality settings of CorelDraw. These settings control how your drawing appears on your monitor. Normal view shows all fills, all objects, and high-resolution bitmaps.

The view-quality settings have no effect on the size of a drawing, only on how the drawing is displayed on the monitor.


Nudge (definition)
Nudge

To move an object in increments.


Object (definition)
Object

A generic term for any item you create or place in a drawing. Objects include lines, shapes, graphics, and text.


Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)(definition)
Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)

A method of bringing data objects from one Windows application to another.


On-screen Color Palette (definition)
On-screen Color Palette

A toolbar that displays a series of color swatches. It is used to select colors for use in CorelDRAW and Corel PHOTO-PAINT. You can display multiple on-screen Color Palettes. They can be docked or left floating in the Application Window.


One-point perspective (definition)
One-point perspective

An effect created by lengthening or shortening one side of an object to create the impression that the object is receding from view in one direction. You can create one-point perspective by using the Add Perspective command in the Effects menu.


Opacity (definition)
Opacity

The opposite of transparency. If an area is 100% opaque, you cannot see through it. Levels under 100% increase the ability to see through objects.

See also Transparency.


open path (definition)
Open path

A line or curve whose start point and end point are not connected. If you apply a fill to an open path, it is not visible unless the path is closed.


Open Prepress Interface (OPI) (definition)
Open prepress interface (OPI)

A method that positions high-resolution bitmaps on the printed page by using low-resolution replicas.

Two images are created using a high-quality scanner. A high-resolution version (which is kept on file) and a low-resolution equivalent. The low-resolution image is imported into your documents and used for position only (FPO). Working with FPO images keeps your document size smaller and reduces the time needed to redraw the screen. When you send your artwork back to the service bureau for final imaging to film, your high-resolution files are positioned in place of the FPO images and the final product is a high-resolution output.


Orientation (definition)
Orientation

The direction in which a document is displayed on the page. A page oriented so that the horizontal dimension is greater than the vertical dimension has a landscape orientation. A page whose vertical dimension is greater than the horizontal dimension has a portrait orientation.


Out-of-gamut color (definition)
Out-of-gamut color

A color that is beyond the capabilities (outside the gamut) of a device. When you choose an out-of-gamut color, an in-gamut color button appears beside the color swatch in the Color window.

See also Color gamut.


outline (definition)
Outline

The line that defines the shape of an object. You can change outline attributes, including color, width, size, and shape, using the options in the Outline Tool flyout.


Overprint (definition)
Overprinting

Overprinting is a method of color trapping. Color trapping is necessary when you print on a color commercial press to avoid white gaps between adjoining colors caused by printing plates that are not aligned properly.

Normally, portions of an object that are obscured by another object are not printed. However, if the top object is set to overprint, the obscured portions of any underlying objects also print. This eliminates potential white gaps between different colors. Overprinting is best used when the top color is much darker than the underlying color; otherwise, an undesirable third color might result (e.g., red over yellow might result in an orange object).


Page border (definition)
Page border

In the Drawing Window, the page border is the rectangle with the drop shadow that represents the printable portion of a drawing. This area is also called the printable page. You can enable and disable the page border by using the Page Setup command in the Layout menu.


Paint applications (definition)
Paint applications

A generic term for computer illustration applications that store graphics as bitmaps. A bitmap is a graphic image format that represents shapes as a series of pixels, or dots, that are arranged to represent an image. Corel PHOTO-PAINT and Windows Paintbrush are examples of paint applications.


Palette (definition)
Palette

See Color Palette.


Paletted color mode (definition)
Paletted

An 8-bit color mode that displays images using up to 256 colors. You can convert a complex image to the paletted color mode to reduce file size and to more precisely control the colors used throughout the conversion process.


PANTONE hexachrome palette(definition)
PANTONE HEXACHROME palette

Colors that are available through the PANTONE HEXACHROME system, which is based on the CMYK color model but provides two additional inks, for a total of six inks, and a broader range of colors.


PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM (definition)
PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM Colors

A palette of spot colors that are available through the PANTONE Matching System (also known as PANTONE Spot Colors). Because spot colors correspond to solid inks and are not CMYK-based, each unique color applied to an object results in an additional color separation plate.

In CorelDRAW, you can use spot colors freely. In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can use spot colors only in CMYK images to affect duotones. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch.


PANTONE process colors palette(definition)
PANTONE process colors

Colors that are available through the PANTONE process color system, which is based on the CMYK color model. The first 2000 colors are two-color combinations; the remainder are three- and four-color combinations. Colors are based on CMYK and, therefore, do not add color separation plates. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch.


PANTONE process colors palette(definition)
PANTONE process colors palette

A palette of colors that are available through the PANTONE process color system, which is based on the CMYK color model. The first 2000 colors are two-color combinations; the remainder are three- and four-color combinations. Colors are based on CMYK and, therefore, can be printed without additional color separation plates.


Paper Color (definition)
Paper Color

A feature that lets you display an approximation of the paper color you plan to use when you print your document. The color you choose is for viewing only; it doesn't appear in printed copies of the document.


Paragraph text (definition)
Paragraph text

The text type you create when you use the Text tool. Use Paragraph text to add large blocks of text for ads, brochures, and other text-intensive projects. Paragraph formatting features let you flow text between frames and columns, create bulleted lists, set tabs and indents, and add drop caps. CorelDRAW automatically applies the default Paragraph text style, which you can change using the Styles Manager.


Parent color(definition)
Parent color

A color style that has one or more related shades [image] called "child colors" [image] grouped under it. For most of the available color models and palettes, child colors share the same hue as the parent but have different saturation and brightness levels. With the Pantone Matching System, Pantone Hexachrome, and UserInks palettes, child and parents share a common ID but have different tint levels.


Path (definition)
Path

The basic component from which objects are constructed. Paths can be open (e.g., a line or curve) or closed (e.g., a circle or polygon). They can also constitute a single line or curve segment or many joined segments.


Path name (definition)
Path name

The location of a folder or file on a computer. For example, Corel application files are stored in the path C:\COREL\ by default. This means that the files are stored in a folder called COREL on the C: drive.


Pattern fill (definition)
Pattern fill

Pattern fills are preset, symmetrical images that can be tiled. You can import bitmaps or vector graphics for use as pattern fills, or you can create simple two-color bitmap patterns. The effect you create is similar to that created by applying wallpaper to a wall. There are three types of pattern fills: two-color, full-color, and bitmap.


PCD (definition)
PCD

The filename extension for Eastman Kodak Photo-CD images.


PCX (definition)
PCX

The filename extension for bitmap files created by paint applications such as PC Paintbrush.


Photo CD (definition)
Photo CD

A process developed by the Eastman Kodak Company that converts 35-mm film negatives or slides to digital (RGB) format and stores them on a compact disc (CD).


Photographic (gamut mapping) (definition)
Photographic (gamut mapping)

A technique in which the entire range of image color is compressed to fit the color space of the destination device, maintaining smooth transitions between colors.

Photographic gamut mapping (also called photometric) is suited to photographs and continuous tone artwork.

See also Illustration gamut mapping.


Pica (definition)
Pica

A unit of measurement used primarily in typesetting. One pica equals 12 points (approximately 1/6 of an inch).


PICT (definition)
PICT

An image file format used frequently in applications that run on Macintosh computers. This file format can use up to four channels: red, green, blue, and alpha.


Pitch (definition)
Pitch

The aspect of an object's orientation that describes the angular deviation of an object along its vertical (top-to-bottom) axis.


Pixel (definition)
Pixel

Abbreviation for picture element. Pixels are dots on a computer or television screen that combine to form an image. Computer images are created as an array of pixels, each having a specific color.

See also Resolution.


Playlist (definition)
Playlist

The set of objects selected from a spraylist that you want to spray using the Object Sprayer.


Point (definition)
Point

A unit of measurement used primarily in typesetting to design type sizes. There are approximately 72 points (pts) to an inch and 12 points to a pica.


Polygon (definition)
Polygon

A shape with three or more sides. In CorelDRAW, you can create simple polygons (e.g., pentagons) or complex, multisided polygons (e.g., stars) using the Polygon tool. The examples shown below can all be created using the Polygon tool.


Portrait (definition)
Portrait

A page oriented so that the vertical dimension of the page is greater than the horizontal dimension.


Position (definition)
Position

Specifying the horizontal and vertical coordinates (using the rulers as a reference) to place an object.


Positive (definition)
Positive

A reproduction of an image in which dark, light, and color values are the same as in the original image.


PostScript (definition)
PostScript

A page-description language used to send instructions to a PostScript printer. All the objects in a print job are represented by lines of PostScript code that the printer uses to reproduce your work.


PostScript textures (definition)
PostScript textures

Types of pattern fill designed using the PostScript language. Some textures are extremely complicated and require several minutes or more to print or update on the screen. Therefore, PostScript fills are displayed as the letters, PS, rather than as the texture.


PowerClip (definition)
PowerClip

A feature that lets you place objects (called contents objects) inside other objects (called container objects). If the contents object is larger than the container object, the contents object is automatically cropped. Only the contents that fit inside the container object are visible.


Preview Selected Only (definition)
Preview selected only

A view option that, when used with the Full-Screen Preview command, displays a detailed version of selected objects without showing the user interface. When Preview Selected Only is disabled, Full-Screen Preview displays all objects on the current page.


Printable Page (definition)
Printable page

The portion of the Drawing Window that appears on the printed page. This area is enclosed by a rectangle with a drop shadow. Although you can draw anywhere in the Drawing Window, only objects on the printable page appear in your print jobs.


Process color (definition)
Process color

In commercial printing, colors that are produced from a blend of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. This is different from a spot color, which is a solid ink color printed individually (one printing plate is required for each spot color).


Progressive (definition)
Progressive

In JPEG images, a method of having the image appear onscreen in its entirety, at a low, blocky resolution. As the image data loads, the image quality progressively improves.


Proof (definition)
Proof

To print a trial version of a graphic to see how it will look when output in its final form. Laser printers are commonly used to proof monochrome artwork. Thermal color printers are commonly used to proof color artwork. High-quality proofing systems such as Chromalin (DuPont) or Matchprint (3M) can be used to proof color separations.


Property Bar (definition)
Property Bar

An on-screen area that displays tools that are used with the application. You can change what is displayed to suit your needs. For example, if you select the Text Tool, the Property Bar displays the default text settings and controls. You can also specify the Property Bar's contents, appearance, and location in the Application Window.


PSD (definition)
PSD

The file extension of a file in Adobe Photoshop format.


Pure color (definition)
Pure color

Any color that can be assumed by the individual pixels on a screen. On a monochrome screen, for example, there are only two pure colors: black and white. 24-bit cards display 16.7 million pure colors.


Radial fountain fill (definition)
Radial fill

A type of fountain fill that shows a progression of colors in a series of concentric circles that radiate from the center of the fill. You can apply custom or preset radial fountain fills that use either a direct progression from one color to another or a cascade of different colors.


Range sensitivity (definition)
Range sensitivity

A paletted color mode option that lets you specify a focus color for the paletted conversion. You can adjust the color and specify its' importance to guide converting.


Rasterized image (definition)
Rasterized image

An image that has been rendered into pixels. When you convert vector graphics files to bitmap files, you create rasterized images.


Registration marks (definition)
Registration marks

Cross hairs or other marks that are used to align the film produced from color separations. Corel applications automatically add registration marks outside the printable page when you print color separations to a PostScript printer. Registration marks can also be printed on non-PostScript printers.


Render (definition)
Render

The process of capturing a two-dimensional (2D) image from a three-dimensional (3D) model.


Resample (definition)
Resample

The process of changing the resolution or size of an image to change the number of pixels it contains. Upsampling increases the resolution, increasing the number of pixels; downsampling reduces the resolution, decreasing the number of pixels.


Resident fonts (definition)
Resident fonts

Typefaces permanently stored in the printer's memory.


Resolution (definition)
Resolution

The amount of detail and information that an image file contains, as well as the level of detail that an input, output or display device is capable of producing. When you work with bitmaps, resolution affects the quality of your final output and the file size.

Image resolution

Refers to the spacing of pixels in the image and is measured in pixels per inch (ppi) or dots per inch (dpi).

Output resolution

Refers to the number of dots per inch (dpi) that an output device, such as an imagesetter or laser printer, produces.


RGB (definition)
RGB

A color mode that contains three components: red (R), green (G), and blue (B). The RGB color mode is based on the RGB color model. In the RGB color mode, a value between 0 and 255 is assigned to each channel of red, green, and blue. An RGB color with the component values 0:25:118, for example, contains no red, some green, and more blue, resulting in a slightly greenish blue color. Monitors, scanners, and the human eye use RGB to produce or detect color.


Rotate (definition)
Rotate

To reposition and reorient an object by turning it around its center of rotation.


Ruler crosshairs (definition)
Ruler cross hairs

The pair of intersecting lines that can be dragged from the spot where the rulers meet. Used to set the 0,0 points on the rulers.


Rulers (definition)
Rulers

Measuring tools that are displayed on the left side and along the top of the Application Window. The rulers help you size and position the objects in your drawing.


Sans serif (definition)
Sans serif

A font or typeface that lacks serifs (the short strokes at the ends of individual letters). Helvetica and Arial are examples of sans serif fonts.


Saturation (definition)
Saturation

The purity or vividness of a color, expressed as the absence of white. A color that has 100% saturation contains no white. A color with 0% saturation is a shade of gray.


Scale (definition)
Scale

To change an object's horizontal and vertical dimensions or to maintain the aspect ratio. Scaling alters the object's dimensions by a specified percentage.


Scanner (definition)
Scanner

A device that converts images on paper, transparency, or film to digital form. Scanners produce bitmap or raster images.


Scanning resolution (definition)
Scanning resolution

Describes the density of information that a scanner can capture per inch, measured in pixels per inch (ppi) or dots per inch (dpi). Also called input resolution.


Screen angles (definition)
Screen angles

When printing color separations, the angles at which each of the four process colors are printed. Setting the screen angles and frequencies of your halftone screen correctly is critical to avoid undesirable moiré patterns.


Screen frequency (definition)
Screen frequency

Screen frequency, also called screen ruling and halftone frequency, is a measure of a halftone screen in lines per inch (lpi). Screen frequency is related to, but is not the same as, printer resolution.

A laser printer with a resolution of 300 dpi might produce an acceptable screen at 60 lpi. A high-resolution image setter may be capable of producing a 150 lpi screen.


Scroll (definition)
Scroll

To shift the view in the window to see portions of a document that are outside the current viewing area. You can scroll by using the scroll bars along the edges of the window.


Segments (definition)
Segments

Lines or curves between nodes in a curve object.


Selection box (definition)
Selection box

An invisible rectangle with eight visible handles that appears around any object you select using the Pick tool. By dragging individual handles on an object's Selection box (also called a Highlighting box), you can scale or stretch the object.

When you move or transform an object or mask, a dotted rectangle representing the Selection box appears in place of the object.


Serif (definition)
Serif

The short strokes at the ends of individual letters in fonts such as Times Roman and Bookman. Sans serif fonts such as Arial and Helvetica lack these strokes.


Server application (definition)
Server application

An OLE (Object Linking and Embedding) application used to create OLE objects (e.g., pictures, charts, and text). These OLE objects can be placed in other OLE applications. Not all OLE applications can be servers. For example, CorelDRAW can be a client or a server, but Corel PHOTO-PAINT can only be a server. If you are uncertain about whether an application is capable of performing as a server, check its documentation.


Server-side (definition)
Server-side

Server-side image maps are not dependent on a browser to process the map information, but the server must be able to recognize the code in the map file. NCSA and CERN use different codes, so you must know whether the server you are using runs CERN or NCSA. Contact your server administrator to find this information.

Image maps are graphics with clickable areas, also called hyperlinks, that are used on the World Wide Web (WWW).


Service bureau (definition)
Service bureau

In commercial printing, a commercial business that is separate from the printer and prepares documents and artwork for commercial printing. Generally, a service bureau can prepare halftones, separations, and proofs using high-resolution PostScript devices. When you use a service bureau, ask for their printer's color profile to help ensure color consistency.


Signature (definition)
Signature

One sheet as printed by press or output device, which contains several pages from a document. A signature is cut, folded, and possibly bound, to form a final document.


Simple Wireframe (definition)
Simple Wireframe view

One of the CorelDRAW five view-quality settings. These settings control the way drawings are displayed on your monitor. Simple Wireframe view shows objects as outlines, and hides fills, extrusions, contours, and intermediate blend shapes. Simple Wireframe view also shows monochrome bitmaps. Editing a drawing in Simple Wireframe view is faster because only the object outlines need to be refreshed.

The view-quality settings have no effect on the size of a drawing, only on how the drawing is displayed on the monitor.


size (definition)
Size

To change an object's horizontal and vertical dimensions while maintaining the aspect ratio (the ratio of height to width). Sizing changes the object's dimensions by specific values.


Skew (definition)
Skew

To slant an object.


Smooth node (definition)
Smooth node

A node where the control points are always opposite each other. When you move one of these control points, the other also moves. However, you can vary the distance between the control points and the node independently. Smooth nodes produce a smooth transition between line segments.


Snap (definition)
Snap

To force an object that is being drawn or moved to align automatically to a point on the grid, a guideline, or another object.


Snap points (definition)
Snap points

Snap points on objects act as points of attachment for connector lines, dimension lines, and when enabled to other objects. The location of these snap points depends on the object. When Snap to Objects is enabled, every point on every object takes on a gravitational effect, attracting other objects you draw or move nearby.


Source file (definition)
Source file

The file that contains information that is being embedded or linked using Object Linking and Embedding (OLE).


Spectral power distribution (definition)
Spectral power distribution

The power of each wavelength in a source of white light. Because white light consists of all wavelengths, we can create a spectral signature based on a measurement of each wavelength.


Spectral signature (definition)
Spectral signature

The power of each wavelength measured individually in a reflective or radiant object.


Spectrophotometer (definition)
Spectrophotometer

An instrument that measures the spectral reflectance of an object. Used for monitor and printer calibration. Also used to sample colors for use in graphics applications.


Spot color (definition)
Spot color

In commercial printing, a spot color uses a solid ink color and prints individually, one plate per spot color.

A spot color is different from a process color, in which each color is expressed as a combination of four separate inks.


Spraylist (definition)
Spraylist

A set of objects created and saved for use by the Object Sprayer. You can spray some or all the objects in the spraylist. The series of objects selected for the spray is called the playlist.


Spreads (definition)
Spread

A type of trap that is created by extending the foreground object into the background object. CorelDRAW provides an Overprint feature that lets you create a spread manually, and an Autotrapping feature that can create a spread automatically.


Square fountain fill (definition)
Square fill

A type of fountain fill that shows a progression of colors in a series of concentric squares that radiate from the center of the fill. You can apply custom or preset square fountain fills that use a direct progression from one color to another or a cascade of different colors.


Stacking order (definition)
Stacking order

The sequence in which objects are created in the Image Window. This order determines the relationship between objects and, therefore, the appearance of your image. The first object you create appears on the bottom; the last object appears on the top. You can use the Order commands to place the objects where you want them; however, the background object always appears on the bottom and cannot be reordered.


Start node (definition)
Start node

The large square that appears at the beginning of an open path when you select the path using the Shape tool. The start node is larger than the end node.


Status Bar (definition)
Status Bar

An on-screen display area that shows information about objects, ongoing operations, and mouse position. You can specify the contents, appearance, and location of the Status Bar in the Application Window.


Stretch (definition)
Stretch

To size an object horizontally or vertically. Stretching changes the size of an object in one direction only, as opposed to sizing, which maintains the aspect ratio (the ratio of height to width).


Style template (definition)
Style template

A collection of styles that work together to govern the appearance of a drawing. Each CorelDRAW drawing is based on a template. You can choose a preset template or create your own template.


Styles (definition)
Styles

A set of attributes that controls the appearance of a specific type of object. There are three style types: Graphic styles, Artistic text styles, and Paragraph text styles. You can use the styles in any CorelDRAW templates, or create and save your own styles.


Subpaths (definition)
Subpath

Paths that are part of one object. You can create an object that has several subpaths by using the Combine command in the Arrange menu.


Subscript (definition)
Subscript

Characters that are positioned below the baseline of the other characters in a line of text. In the following graphic, (1) indicates subscript text.


Subtractive color model (definition)
Subtractive color model

A color model, such as CMYK, that creates color by subtracting wavelengths of light reflected from an object. For example, a colored ink appears blue if it absorbs all colors except blue.


Superscript (definition)
Superscript

Characters that are positioned above the baseline of the other characters in a line of text. In the following graphic, (1) indicates superscript text.


Swap disk (definition)
Swap disk

Hard drive space used by applications to store temporary files not currently in use. Corel applications let you choose two swap disks. This artificially increases the amount of memory available in your computer.


Swatch (definition)
Swatch

One of a series of solid-colored patches used as a sample when selecting color. A printed booklet of swatches is called a swatchbook. Swatch also refers to the colors contained in the Color Palette.


Swatch book (definition)
Swatchbook

A book that contains printed patches of solid color that represent the collection of colors available from a color-matching system. It is used to compare and select colors and lets you see how the colors will print.


Symbol (definition)
Symbol

A preset curve object. Symbols are vector objects that can be edited like other objects.


Symmetrical (definition)
Symmetrical node

A node where the control points are always opposite each other. Symmetrical nodes produce the same curvature on both sides of the node. The distance between the node and each control point is always the same.


Tab (definition)
Tab

A set amount of space that is inserted in a line of text when you press TAB.


TAC (definition)
TAC

Total Area Coverage. In commercial full-color printing, TAC is a measure of the amount of ink applied by a printing press.

In the CMYK printing process, TAC can range from 400% (all inks at full intensity) to 0% (no inks or plain paper). However, commercial printers rarely allow a TAC higher than 300%.


Target (definition)
Target object

The object you select last in a weld, trim, or intersect operation. To weld, trim, or intersect objects, you must select a first object, then select a second object that will be the target of the operation. The second selected object is called the target object. You can also weld, trim, or intersect multiple objects with multiple target objects.


Template (definition)
Template

See Style template.


Text styles (definition)
Text styles or variations

Variations in a typeface or font. Some common styles include Roman (regular or normal), bold, italic, and bold italic.


Texture fill (definition)
Texture fill

A fractally generated fill, such as water, minerals, and clouds, that you can use to give your objects a natural appearance. Texture fills, unlike tiled bitmap fills, fill a designated area with one image instead of with a series of repeating images.


TGA (definition)
TGA

A bitmap image file format.


Threshold (definition)
Threshold

A level of tolerance for tonal variation in a bitmap image. For example, when you convert your image to the Black-and-White color mode, the threshold you set determines how many tonal values are converted to black and how many to white.


Thumbnail (definition)
Thumbnail

A miniature, low-resolution version of an image or illustration. A thumbnail is also called a header.

Including a thumbnail when you save a file lets you see a representation of the drawing before you open it in a different application, such as Corel VENTURA.  A thumbnail of the drawing is displayed in the Open dialog box of the other application and lets you verify that you have chosen the right file before you continue.


tick divisions (definition)
Tick divisions

Evenly spaced division marks found between markers (ticks) on the Horizontal and Vertical rulers. You can use the Rulers page in the Options dialog box to set six, eight, or 10 division marks between each tick.


TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) (definition)
TIFF

Tagged Image File Format. A file format developed for page-layout applications that is supported by all image-editing applications. TIFF files can save RGB, CMYK, and Lab color mode information, but not duotones.


Tile (definition)
Tile

To use multiple pages to print a drawing that is larger than the printer's paper size.


Tiling (definition)
Tiling

The technique of repeating a small image across a large surface. Tiling is often used to create a patterned background for World Wide Web pages.


Tints (definition)
Tints

Lighter shades of a spot color that are created by changing the percentage tint value in the Outline Color or the Uniform Fill dialog box.


Toggle (definition)
Toggle

Alternately enabling and disabling an application function.


Tolerance (definition)
Tolerance

The amount by which a color can differ from another color before the colors are considered the same.


Tone curve (definition)
Tone curve

A color grid that displays the dynamic ink curves used in duotone conversion. The horizontal plane, or x-axis, displays the 256 possible shades of gray in a grayscale image (0 is black; 256 is white). The vertical plane, or y-axis, illustrates the intensity of an ink (from 1 to 100%) that is applied to the corresponding grayscale values.


Toolbar (definition)
Toolbar

A group of buttons that provides quick access to a series of commands. In Corel applications, you can use any combination of the preset toolbars or create a toolbar that contains the buttons and button arrangements you find most efficient.


ToolTips (definition)
ToolTips

Online ToolTips display the name of an icon or buttons when the cursor rests over a button. ToolTips are also referred to as pop-up Help, Help balloons, and Help bubbles.


Toyo COLOR FINDER palette (definition)
TOYO COLOR FINDER palette

Colors that are available through the TOYO 88 Color Finder system. The range of colors includes colors created using TOYO process inks and colors reproduced using TOYO standard inks. These colors are defined using the Lab color mode and are converted to RGB for display and to CMYK for printing.


tracing (definition)
Tracing

Following the outline of a bitmap to turn it into a vector-based graphic that can be edited without distortion.


Leader tabs (definition)
Trailing Leader tabs

A row of characters placed between text objects to help the reader follow a line across white space. Trailing leaders are often used in tab stops, especially before text that is flush right, such as in a list or table of contents. The leaders character can be changed to any character. The following example shows a line in a table of contents.

Formatting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

A trailing leader tab automatically creates the dots that precede the number.


Transformation (definition)
Transformation

Changing an object's orientation or appearance without changing its basic shape. Types of transformations include positioning, rotating, scaling, mirroring, sizing, and skewing.


Transparency (definition)
Transparency

The ability to see through an item. The opposite of transparent is opaque. Setting lower levels of transparency causes higher levels of opacity and less visibility of the underlying items or image.


Transparency in Internet images (definition)
Transparent background

When creating Web pages, all bitmapped graphics are rectangular. Because this obscures the background color of the Web window, you need to create a transparent background. Saving a graphic as a .GIF file lets you specify one color in your inline graphic as a transparency color. Each pixel that has that color value is rendered transparent, allowing the background color of the Web browser to show through. Transparency cannot be achieved with HTML tags.


Trap (definition)
Trap

In commercial printing, the process of adding a slight overlap between adjacent areas of color to avoid gaps caused by registration errors. You can create a trap in Corel applications if you are printing color separations.


True color (definition)
True color

A term that refers to digital RGB color that is composed of 24-bits or 16.7 million colors.


TrueDoc (TM) (definition)
TrueDoc

A font technology that lets you save a font used in a drawing with the file. TrueDoc lets a user who does not have a particular font installed on their computer open the drawing and edit the text. Without TrueDoc, CorelDRAW converts the text to curves and the user cannot edit the text in the document.


TrueType fonts (definition)
TrueType fonts

Fonts that print as vectors or bitmaps, depending on the capabilities of your printer. TrueType fonts print the way they appear on the screen and can be resized to any height.


TRUMATCH (definition)
TRUMATCH Colors

A color-matching system for specifying process colors. The TRUMATCH color system is based on the CMYK color model; therefore, extra colors do not add additional color separation plates. Colors are organized by hue (red to violet), saturation (deep to pastel), and brightness (by adding or removing black).


Coaches (definition)
Tutors

Interactive Help tools that give you step-by-step instructions on selected features. You can have a Tutor apply a feature for you. You can access Tutors by clicking the CorelTUTOR button on the Toolbar or by clicking Help, CorelTUTOR.


Two-color pattern (definition)
Two-color pattern

A fill composed of repeating bitmap images. CorelDRAW provides a collection of two-color patterns to which you can add custom patterns.


Two-point perspective (definition)
Two-point perspective

An effect created by lengthening or shortening two adjacent sides of an object to create the impression that the object is receding from view in two directions. You can create two-point perspective by using the Add Perspective command in the Effects menu.


Type Assist (definition)
Type Assist

A feature that automatically displays the full form for abbreviations as you type. You can use Type Assist to capitalize words or to correct common spelling and typographic errors automatically. For example, Type Assist can replace "asap" with "as soon as possible" and "hte" with "the."


Typeface (definition)
Typeface

A set of numbers, letters, and symbols of a design, such as Avant Garde, Garamond, or Bookman. Most typefaces are available in different variations or type styles. Some common styles include Roman (regular or normal), bold, italic, and bold italic.


Undercolor removal (UCR) (definition)
Undercolor removal (UCR)

In color printing, a technique that reduces the amount of cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y) ink in shadows and neutral areas of an image by replacing them with an appropriate amount of black (K). This reduces the total area coverage (TAC) of the ink. TAC is defined as the sum of the dot percentages of all four inks (CMYK) that contribute to a printed color.

Another technique, called Gray Component Replacement (GCR), also substitutes black for CMY inks, but uses a greater color range.


Ungroup (definition)
Ungroup

A command that causes a set of objects that behave as one unit to behave as individual objects.


Uniform colors (palette)
Uniform colors palette

An independent palette (not based on a color-matching system or your image) that provides 256 colors that are uniformly spread between red, green, and blue.


Uniform fill (definition)
Uniform fill

A type of fill that is used to apply one solid color to your image.

In CorelDRAW and Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can choose Uniform fill colors from the on-screen Color Palette, Select Color dialog box, or Color Docker.

See also Fill.


URL (definition)
Uniform Resource Locator (URL)

A unique address that defines where a Web page is located on the Internet. The URL contains two main parts: the protocol and the destination. The protocol identifies the Internet resource with which you are working. The most common protocol on the Web is http://, which retrieves HTML documents from the World Wide Web (WWW). Others include gopher://, ftp://, and telnet://. The destination can be a filename, a folder name, or a computer name. An example of a URL is http://www.corel.com.


Vanishing point (definition)
Vanishing point

A marker that appears when you select an extrusion or an object to which perspective has been added. With an extrusion, the vanishing point marker indicates the depth (parallel extrusion) or the point at which the extruded surfaces would meet if extended (perspective extrusion). With the Perspective effect, the marker indicates the point (or points) at which the nonparallel lines would meet.

In both cases, the vanishing point is indicated by an X.


Vector graphics (definition)
Vector graphics

Images are stored as algebraic equations that define the lines and curves of the drawing. They can also include bitmap information. They are created in illustration applications, such as CorelDRAW, or bitmap tracing applications, such as Corel TRACE. Vector formats are not restricted to certain color depths.

Compare to bitmap images, which are created pixel-by-pixel in paint applications and by scanners.


visual selector (definition)
Visual selector

A graphic representation of a color model that includes an indicator for selecting colors.


Weight (definition)
Weight

The thickness of outlines you assign to objects by using the Outline tool. Weight is sometimes used to refer to different type styles (e.g., normal, light, or bold).


White point (definition)
White point

Describes the color of light (a shade of white) produced by the monitor when all electron guns are set to full intensity. White point lets you define the quality of "pure" white for the monitor, expressed as a temperature in degrees Kelvin (K).


Wireframe view (definition)
Wireframe view

A view setting that controls the way drawings are displayed on your computer screen. In Wireframe view, objects display in skeleton form without fills or outlines. Because the screen redraws faster in this view, you may want to use it when you edit complex drawings.

The view-quality settings have no effect on the size of a drawing, only on how the drawing is displayed on the monitor.


Wizard (definition)
Wizard

An automated assistant that helps you perform a task. The wizard asks you questions and then performs the appropriate actions based on your answers.


Word spacing (definition)
Word spacing

The space between words. Word spacing can be varied to increase or decrease the space between words.


Working page (definition)
Working page

In the Drawing Window, the rectangle with the drop shadow that represents the printable area of your drawing.


WPG (definition)
WPG

The filename extension for Corel WordPerfect graphics files that are in vector-graphic format. CorelDRAW can import and export these files. When you import or export this format, note that .WPG files can contain bitmaps as well as vector graphics.


WYSIWYG (what-you-see-is-what-you-get) (definition)
WYSIWYG

What-you-see-is-what-you-get. A term that describes an application's ability to provide an accurate on-screen representation of what an image or document will look like when it is printed.


X-height (definition)
X-height

The main body of a lowercase letter. The x-height is equal to the height of a lowercase x. In the following graphic, (1) indicates the x-height.


YIQ (definition)
YIQ

A color model used in television broadcast systems (North American video standard - NTSC). Colors are split into a luminance value (Y) and two chromaticity values (I and Q). On a color monitor, all three components are visible. On a monochrome monitor, only the Y component is visible. The square, two-dimensional visual selector defines the I and Q values, and the vertical visual selector defines the Y value. All values are scaled from 0 to 255.


Zoom (definition)
Zoom

To enlarge or reduce the viewing size of a document onscreen. Zooming has no effect on the document. Zooming is like moving toward or away from a picture to get a better viewing.


New features


Working with bitmaps


Overview: Working with bitmaps
Working with bitmaps

Bitmaps are graphics composed of dots called pixels. Bitmaps have a fixed resolution so a bitmap looks best when you display or print it at its original size. Enlarging the bitmap appears to enlarge each pixel because extra pixels are added, making the graphic look jagged and distorted. Reducing the size of the bitmap eliminates pixels and shrinks the bitmap.

Vectors are defined mathematically as a series of points joined by lines. Unlike bitmaps, vectors represent shapes as a series of lines and curves that you can resize without loss of quality. Graphical elements in a vector file are called objects. Each object is a self-contained entity with properties such as color, shape, outline, and size included in its definition. For more information about vectors, see "CorelDRAW Concepts".

Because a bitmap is a collection of arranged pixels, you cannot manipulate its parts individually. The color and shape appear continuous when viewed from a distance. However, CorelDRAW lets you manipulate bitmaps in different ways. You can crop bitmaps to decrease the visible area and reduce the size of files by linking bitmaps to your drawings. You can also trace bitmap images, which converts them to vector images that are easier to manipulate.

CorelDRAW also lets you change an image by manipulating colors, tones, and resampling. For example, you can hide or show bitmap colors, adjust image tone, or resample to change image size or resolution. You can inflate a bitmap to make an effect cover the entire image. You can convert an image from vectors to bitmaps, or from one color mode to another.

CorelDRAW provides special effects that you can apply to images. For example, you can create three-dimensional images, mimic artistic styles, blur or clear your images, and manipulate image colors, contours, noise, distortions, and sharpness. For more information on applying special effects to bitmaps, see "Applying special effects to bitmaps."

 More Detailed Information


Cropping bitmaps


Overview: Cropping bitmaps
Cropping bitmaps

Cropping a bitmap reduces the visible area of the bitmap. You can crop a bitmap before you import it or after you import it. You can also revert a cropped bitmap to its original form.

 Related Topics


Cropping a bitmap before importing

You can crop a bitmap before you import it. This lets you import only the area of a bitmap that you want to use, which decreases file size.

To crop a bitmap before you import it

1.	Click File, Import.

2.	Choose Crop from the list box to the left of the Options button.

3.	From the Look In list box, choose the drive and folder where the file is stored. Double-click on the folder to open it.

4.	In the Crop Image dialog box, do one of the following:

•	Drag a corner handle on the cropping frame [image] crops in two directions, horizontally and vertically.

•	Drag a side handle [image] crops in one direction, horizontally or vertically.

5.	Choose a unit type from the Units list.

6.	Click OK.

7.	Position the import placement start cursor where you choose and do one of the following:

•	Click [image] places the bitmap at its original size

•	Drag [image] places the bitmap proportionally at the size you choose

•	Hold down ALT, and drag [image] creates a non-proportional bitmap at the size you choose. Release the mouse button before you release ALT.

To recrop the bitmap

•	Click the Select All button in the Crop Image dialog box.

 Tip

•	Type values in the Top and Left or Width and Height boxes to make your cropping more precise.

 Related Topics


Cropping a bitmap after importing

After you import a bitmap, you can crop it using the Shape tool and node editing. Node editing is very powerful, allowing you to add nodes, remove nodes, and convert lines to curves to create effects. Then you can crop the image, literally removing the parts of the bitmap you have edited out. For more information on node editing, see "Drawing and shaping objects."

To crop a bitmap after you import it

1.	Open the Shape Edit flyout and click the Shape tool.

2.	Select the bitmap with the Shape tool.

3.	Drag the bitmaps' nodes to change the shape of the bitmap outline.

4.	Click on the Pick tool.

5.	Click Bitmaps, Crop Bitmap.

To allow only vertical or horizontal movement

•	Hold CTRL while dragging the node from its original location.

 Notes

•	After you crop a bitmap using the Crop Bitmap command, the bitmap cannot be returned to its original state.

•	You cannot crop externally linked bitmaps.

 Tips

•	You can also access the Crop Bitmap command by right-clicking the bitmap or choosing the Crop Bitmap button from the Property Bar.

•	You can multi-select nodes to drag by holding the SHIFT key while clicking on the nodes you want.

 Related Topics


Working with linked bitmaps


Overview: Working with linked bitmaps
Working with linked bitmaps

Instead of importing and embedding bitmaps in a drawing, you can link bitmaps to the drawing. When you link a bitmap, the document references the bitmap instead of actually attaching it. Changes you make to the original bitmap are applied to the bitmap in your drawing. Linking bitmaps is an advantage because it decreases file size.

If you later want to embed the bitmap in a drawing [image] for example, you want to send the file to someone who doesn't have access to the original bitmap files [image] you can resolve the links, which embeds the bitmaps in your drawing.

The Link Manager Docker acts as the repository for all the links in a CorelDRAW document, including all externally linked bitmaps, bookmarks, and hyperlinks. Using the Link Manager, you can check the status of links, update linked bitmaps from their original source file, and resolve links to permanently embed bitmaps into your drawing.

 Related Topics


Linking bitmaps

You can link bitmaps when you import them into CorelDRAW. When you link a bitmap, a thumbnail appears in the document. The thumbnail is a representation of the original image which resides in another location.

To link a bitmap to your drawing

1.	Click File, Import.

2.	Choose a file format from the Files of Type box.

3.	From the Look In list box, choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

4.	Double-click to open the folder.

5.	Select the file name.

6.	Enable the Link Bitmap Externally checkbox.

7.	Click the Import button.

8.	Position the import placement start cursor where you choose and do one of the following:

•	Click [image] places the bitmap at its original size

•	Drag [image] places the bitmap proportionally at the size you choose

•	Hold down ALT, and drag [image] creates a non-proportional bitmap at the size you choose. Release the mouse button before you release ALT.

 Related Topics


Overview: Understanding the Link Manager Docker
Understanding the Link Manager Docker

The Link Manager Docker helps you visualize links. It displays all the links within a CorelDRAW document and gives you information about each link in the Index control. The Index control is a columnar list with various, categorical headers. You can find the following headers in the Link Manager Docker:

•	Name [image] displays the name of the linked bitmap, bookmark, or hyperlink

•	Page [image] displays the location of the link in the document

•	Status [image] displays the progress of link validation

•	Type Icon [image] displays the file type of the link

By default, the Link Manager primarily sorts links according to page number. The secondary sort is alphabetical.

The Link Manager Docker displays the status of each link using four different icon images.

Icon	Status

Indicates a valid link

Indicates a broken link

Indicates a link that needs to be updated

Indicates a link that needs to be checked

 Note

You can perform a number of tasks using the Link Manager. For more information, see Using the Link Manager.

 Related Topics


Using the Link Manager

The Link Manager lets you monitor and control externally linked bitmaps, bookmarks, and Internet hyperlinks. It tells you which links are broken, provides a small thumbnail of each linked bitmap, shows where each bitmap is linked from, and which page in a document each bitmap is linked to.

The Link Manager lets you complete a variety of tasks:

•	Resolve [image] embeds the selected bitmap into the CorelDRAW document

•	Update [image] updates the status of all Out of Date bitmaps

•	Open [image] launches the system default browser of the selected hyperlink or launches the associated bitmap editor of the selected bitmap

•	Refresh [image] reruns the Docker's starter thread to check the validity of all links

To resolve a linked bitmap

1.	Click Tools, Link Manager.

2.	Select the bitmap in the Link Manager Docker.

3.	Click the Resolve button.

To edit a bitmap in its native application

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Open button.

To update a linked bitmap

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To resolve a linked bitmap" procedure.

2.	Click the Update button.

To refresh the list of links

1.	Click Tools, Link Manager.

2.	Click the Refresh button.

To select multiple links

•	Do one of the following:

•	Multiple sequential links [image] press SHIFT and click on the links

•	Multiple, non-sequential links [image] press CTRL and click on the links you want to select

 Notes

•	You can only update an out of date bitmap, a bitmap where the file has changed more recently than the link was made.

•	You can only resolve or refresh more than one link item at a time.

 Tips

•	You can also access the Link Manager by clicking Window, Dockers, Link Manager.

•	You can also update and resolve linked bitmaps from the Bitmaps menu.

 Related Topics


Setting the Link Manager Docker options

The Link Manager Docker automatically provides you with information about links in a document using the Index Control. You can control the information that the Link Manager Docker displays for you by customizing its format. For example, you can specify whether to have URL checking, and at what intervals, or whether to display large bitmaps.

To set the Link Manager Docker options

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace tree, double-click Customize, and click Link Manager.

3.	Do any of the following:

•	Enable URL checking check box [image] checks URLs at intervals you specify. Specify how often to check URLs by typing a minute value in the box.

•	Enable Display large bitmaps check box [image] displays large bitmaps

 Related Topics


Tracing bitmaps


Overview: Tracing bitmaps
Tracing bitmaps

Bitmaps are images composed of individual dots called pixels. The disadvantage of bitmaps is that their resolution is fixed. This means that image quality can deteriorate when you scale bitmaps to different sizes. You can, however, modify vector graphics without a loss of quality. You can create vector copies of bitmap images by tracing the bitmaps.

You can trace imported bitmaps in three ways: using CorelTRACE, using the Autotrace feature to trace automatically, or by using the Freehand or Bezier tools to trace manually.

CorelTRACE lets you automatically trace bitmaps and save them in a vector format suitable for CorelDRAW. You can launch CorelTRACE from CorelDRAW, trace a bitmap, and then return to CorelDRAW.

The Autotrace feature creates vector shapes from areas of a bitmap. You can trace an imported bitmap by clicking an area of high contrast in the bitmap using the Freehand tool. You can create an outline that matches the edge of contrasting colors in a bitmap tightly (producing many nodes along the path) or loosely (producing a less accurate path with fewer nodes).

The Freehand or Bezier tools let you trace images manually. You don't have to be an experienced draftsperson to trace a bitmap precisely. With CorelDRAW, you trace bitmaps in the same way you trace objects using tracing paper. By magnifying the areas you trace and adjusting the settings, you can trace quickly and still achieve accurate results.

 Related Topics


Tracing bitmaps using CorelTRACE

You can access CorelTRACE from CorelDRAW. Use CorelTRACE to trace complex bitmaps with precision.

You have the ability to save the CorelTRACE file to a separate file. Once you complete your tracing task, you can return the results to CorelDRAW.

To trace a bitmap using CorelTRACE

1.	Click Bitmaps, Trace Image.

2.	Trace your image using CorelTRACE functionality.

3.	Click File, Exit and Return to CorelDRAW.

 Note

•	If you modify an image in both CorelDRAW and CorelTRACE, closing CorelTRACE causes your changes in CorelDRAW to be overwritten by CorelTRACE.

 Tip

•	You can also access CorelTRACE by right-clicking on the bitmap, or selecting the bitmap and clicking the Trace Bitmap button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Tracing bitmaps automatically

The Autotrace feature lets you turn bitmaps into vector graphics that you can edit, scale, and print without distortion. Autotrace produces an approximation of a bitmap; traced bitmaps do not look the same as the original bitmap. You can lose many subtle details of bitmaps when you convert them to vector objects. For more complex bitmap tracing, see "Tracing bitmaps using CorelTRACE".

Many bitmaps cannot be autotraced. If the cursor changes to cross hairs with a thin straight line on the right side of the horizontal cross hair, you can use the Autotrace feature. If a wavy line accompanies the cross hairs, you cannot use the Autotrace feature. However, you can still trace all or part of the image manually.

You can change the way the tracing tools respond by changing their properties. For more information about changing the properties of tracing tools, see "Controlling the behavior of the Freehand and Bezier tools."

To trace a bitmap automatically

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Freehand tool or Bezier tool.

The pointer changes to the Autotrace pointer.

3.	Position the Autotrace pointer on the bitmap and click.

A closed curve object encloses the contours of the bitmap.

4.	Repeat step 3 until you have finished selecting areas of the bitmap.

5.	With the Pick tool, click outside one of the closed curves of the bitmap.

6.	Press DELETE to delete the bitmap and view your work.

 Related Topics


Tracing bitmaps manually

You can trace bitmaps manually using the Freehand or Bezier tool. Manual tracing is faster and easier than autotracing if the imported bitmap contains multiple subjects with no abrupt changes in brightness levels or colors from one pixel to the next.

To trace a bitmap manually

1.	Click a blank spot in the Drawing Window to ensure that the bitmap is not selected.

2.	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Freehand tool or the Bezier tool.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	With the Bezier tool, position the cursor anywhere along the outline of a closed area, then trace in a series of small joined segments. Place a node every time the angle of the curve changes to avoid the jaggedness that can occur when you trace large areas with a single sweep of the mouse.

•	With the Freehand tool, position the cursor anywhere along the outline of a closed area, then trace using a smooth motion the way you move a pencil on paper.

4.	Do one of the following:

•	Click each spot where the object curves or changes direction.

•	Use the Shape tool to manipulate the nodes and line segments to customize the trace.

 Note

•	If you make a mistake while tracing, you can erase portions of the curve before you release the mouse button by pressing SHIFT as you drag the mouse backward over the line you've just drawn. Once you release the mouse button, however, this erase method will not work.

 Tip

•	Switch to Wireframe view or Simple Wireframe view to see the paths more clearly.

 Related Topics


Coloring bitmaps


Overview: Coloring bitmaps
Coloring bitmaps

Some bitmaps are imported in CorelDRAW as monochrome bitmaps. Monochrome means that the pixels have only two colors: black and white. You can change the appearance of bitmaps by changing the colors of pixels or by applying halftone screens to them.

You can hide or show colors in a bitmap. Hiding colors lets objects or backgrounds show through a bitmap. Hiding a color can also alter the bitmaps' shape. For example, if you have a bitmap with the image of a person on a black background, you can hide the background. As a result, the bitmap appears to take on just the shape of the person.

You can select colors and change the tolerance of the colors you select. If you increase the tolerance, CorelDRAW shows or hides a broader range of colors. For example, if you hide baby blue and increase the tolerance, CorelDRAW may also hide powder blue and navy blue.

 Related Topics


Coloring monochrome bitmaps

You can change the color of pixels in a monochrome bitmap.

To color a monochrome bitmap

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click a color on the Color Palette with the right mouse button to change the color of the foreground (black) pixels.

3.	Click a color on the Color Palette with the left mouse button to change the color of the background (white) pixels.

 Related Topics


Applying a PostScript halftone screen to a bitmap

You can apply screens to bitmaps in a drawing if you plan to print to a PostScript printer. The screens create special effects or ensure clearer printing. The screen's effect on the bitmap is only apparent when you print the bitmap.

For information about setting your screen and screen angles, see "Setting the halftone screen frequency."

To apply a screen to a bitmap

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fill Color Dialog.

3.	Click the Fixed Palettes tab.

4.	Choose PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM from the Type list box.

5.	Click the Options button and choose PostScript Options.

6.	Choose an option from the Type list box to set the shape of the screen.

7.	Type a value in the Frequency box to set the number of lines (or other shape selected above) that appear in every inch of the screen.

8.	Type a value in the Angle box to set the angle of the lines (or other shapes) that appear on the screen.

 Related Topics


Hiding bitmap colors

Color bitmaps can slow the speed at which objects are rendered on the screen. Hiding some colors in a bitmap increases the redraw speed.

To hide a color in a bitmap

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Bitmap Color Mask.

3.	Enable the Hide Colors button.

4.	Enable the check box next to the color that you want to hide.

5.	Move the Tolerance slider to set the color tolerance for the color.

Higher levels remove a broader range of colors around the color you select. For example, if you select baby blue and increase the tolerance, CorelDRAW removes pastel blue, electric blue, and so on.

6.	Click the Color Selector.

7.	Point to the bitmap and click the color that you want to hide.

The color appears in the Bitmap Color Mask Docker.

8.	Click the Apply button.

 Related Topics


Displaying bitmap colors

You can display certain colors in a bitmap to change the bitmap's appearance or to see where a particular color has been applied.

To display a color in a bitmap

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Bitmap Color Mask.

3.	Enable the Show Colors button.

4.	Enable the check box next to the color you want to display.

5.	Move the Tolerance slider to set the color tolerance for the color.

Higher levels show a broader range of colors around the color you select. For example, if you select baby blue and increase the tolerance, CorelDRAW shows pastel blue, electric blue, and so on.

6.	Click the Color Selector.

7.	Point to the bitmap and click the color you want to display.

The color appears in the Bitmap Color Mask Docker.

8.	Click the Apply button.

 Related Topics


Opening, saving, and editing bitmap color masks

The Bitmap Color Mask Docker lets you mask as many as 10 colors in a bitmap. When you mask colors, you can edit them without altering the other colors in an image. You can also save bitmap color masks for future use.

To open a bitmap color mask

1.	Click Bitmaps, Bitmap Color Mask.

2.	Click the Open Mask button.

3.	In the Files of Type box, choose the file you want to open.

Bitmap color mask files have the extension .INI.

4.	From the Look In list box, choose the drive and folder where the file is stored. Double-click on the folder to open it.

5.	Double-click the file to open the bitmap color mask.

To change the color of the bitmap color mask

1.	Click Bitmaps, Bitmap Color Mask.

2.	Choose a color from the list of colors.

3.	Click Edit Color.

4.	Use the controls in the Select Color dialog box to edit the color.

5.	Click OK.

6.	Click the Apply button.

To save a bitmap color mask

1.	Click Bitmaps, Bitmap Color Mask.

2.	Click the Save Mask button.

3.	From the Look In list box, choose the drive and folder where you want to save the current color mask.

4.	Type a name for the file in the File Name box.

5.	Click Save.

 Tip

•	You can also access the Bitmap Color Mask Docker by clicking the Bitmap Color Mask Docker button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Adjusting the tones in images


Overview: Adjusting the tones in images
Adjusting the tones in images

The Color Adjustment effects control the relationship between the shadows, midtones, and highlights in objects in a drawing. You can also use these effects to adjust the brightness, intensity, lightness, and darkness of colors. The Color Adjustment effects let you restore the detail lost in shadows or highlights, correct underexposure or overexposure, and improve the quality of images.

Color adjustment effects use filters to change image colors. Filters are applications that perform conversion tasks. These filters do not work with objects that contain colors from the PANTONE Matching System.

Brightness-Contrast-Intensity

The Brightness-Contrast-Intensity effect lets you adjust the brightness, contrast, and intensity of the tones in a drawing using HSB values.

Color Balance

The Color Balance effect shifts drawing values between primary (RGB) and secondary (CMY) colors.

Deinterlace

The Deinterlace effect removes horizontal lines from scanned images to produce clearer results.

Desaturate

The Desaturate effect automatically reduces the saturation of each color to zero. It removes the hue component and converts each color to grayscale.

Gamma

The Gamma effect picks up details in low contrast drawings without significantly affecting the shadows or highlights.

Hue-Saturation-Lightness

The Hue-Saturation-Lightness effect adjusts the hue, saturation and lightness in images by using HLS values. This effect is useful for adjusting the intensity of hue, saturation, and lightness in colors.

Invert

The Invert effect makes a negative of an image by converting all color values to their opposites: black becomes white, blue becomes yellow, etc.

Level Equalization

The Level Equalization effect adjusts shadow, midtone, and highlighted areas by redistributing shades from darkest to lightest.

Local Equalization

The Local Equalization effect enhances the contrast near edges and reveals the details of light and dark areas of a bitmap.

Posterize

The Posterize effect converts color ranges in an image to solid blocks of color.

Replace Colors

The Replace Colors effect replaces one image color with another color.

Sample/Target Balance

The Sample/Target Balance effect adjusts color values in an image with sample colors taken directly from the image itself.

Selective Color

The Selective Color effect modifies colors by adjusting the percentage of the component process colors (CMYK values) in a color spectrum option (reds, yellows, greens, cyans, blues, magentas). It can also add process color to the grayscale tonal component of an image.

Tone Curve

The Tone Curve effect lets you correct colors precisely, by changing individual pixel values.

 Tip

•	For information about common controls used in the Color Adjustment effects, see "Using bitmap effects".

 Related Topics


Applying the Brightness-Contrast-Intensity effect

The Brightness-Contrast-Intensity effect uses HSB values to adjust the brightness, contrast, and intensity of the tones in a drawing.

To apply the Brightness-Contrast-Intensity effect

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Color Adjustment, Brightness-Contrast-Intensity.

3.	Move the following sliders:

•	Brightness [image] shifts all pixel values up or down the tonal range, lightening or darkening all colors equally

•	Contrast [image] adjusts the difference between light and dark colors

•	Intensity [image] brightens the light areas of the drawing or darkens the dark areas

 Note

•	Contrast and intensity usually go hand-in-hand because an increase in contrast sometimes washes out detail in shadows and highlights, and an increase in intensity can bring it back.

 Tip

•	You can also apply the Brightness-Contrast-Intensity effect by clicking the Adjusts Brightness, Contrast, and Intensity button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Applying the Color Balance effect

The Color Balance effect shifts the colors in a drawing between RGB and CMY color values. For example, if you want to tone down the blue color in a photo, you can select the area you want to adjust and shift the color values from blue to yellow.

To apply the Color Balance effect

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Color Adjustment, Color Balance.

3.	In the Range section, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Shadows [image] color corrects the shadow areas of the drawing

•	Midtones [image] color corrects the midtone areas of the drawing

•	Highlights [image] color corrects the highlight areas of the drawing

•	Preserve luminance [image] maintains the luminance level of the drawing under the effects of color correction, ensuring the drawing retains its original brightness level.

4.	Move the following Color Channel sliders to set color levels:

•	Cyan-Red [image] adds cyan or red to the drawing to correct color imbalance. Move the slider to the left to add cyan and to the right to add red.

•	Magenta-Green [image] adds magenta or green to the drawing to correct color imbalance. Move the slider to the left to add magenta and to the right to add green.

•	Yellow-Blue [image] adds yellow or blue to the drawing to correct color imbalance. Move the slider to the left to add yellow and to the right to add blue.

 Note

•	Disabling any of the first three options in the Range section means the color correction does not effect the specified area. Disabling the Perserve luminance check box means the color correction does affect the luminance level, i.e., the drawing is darkened.

 Tip

•	You can also apply the Color Balance effect by clicking the Balances Bitmap Colors button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Applying the Deinterlace effect

The Deinterlace effect removes horizontal lines from scanned images. You can also use this effect to remove interlaced lines from video captures.

To apply the Deinterlace effect

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Transform, Deinterlace.

3.	In the Scan Lines section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Even Lines [image] removes even lines

•	Odd Lines [image] removes odd lines

4.	In the Replacement Method section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Duplication [image] fills the spaces with copies of the adjacent lines of pixels

•	Interpolation [image] fills the spaces with colors created by averaging the surrounding pixels

 Related Topics


Applying the Desaturate effect

The Desaturate effect reduces the saturation of each color in an image to zero, thus removing the hue component and converting each color to its grayscale equivalent. This effect produces a grayscale image without changing the color mode.

To apply the Desaturate effect

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Color Adjustment, Desaturate.

 Related Topics


Applying the Gamma effect

Gamma is a method of tonal correction that takes the human eye's perception of neighboring values into account. For example, if you were to place a 10 percent gray circle on a black background and an identical gray circle on a white background, the circle surrounded by black appears lighter to the human eye than the circle surrounded by white, even though the brightness values are identical.

The Gamma effect lets you pick up detail in a low contrast drawing without significantly affecting the shadows or highlights. It affects all the values in the drawing but it is curve-based so that the changes are weighted toward the midtones.

To apply the Gamma effect

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Color Adjustment, Gamma.

3.	Move the Gamma slider to set a gamma curve value.

Higher values brighten midtones; lower values darken them.

 Tips

•	You can also apply the Gamma effect by clicking the Adjusts Gamma button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Applying the Hue-Saturation-Lightness effect

The Hue-Saturation-Lightness effect uses HLS values to adjust the colors in a drawing. Hue represents color, saturation represents color depth or richness, and lightness represents the overall percentage of white in an image.

To apply the Hue-Saturation-Lightness effect

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Color Adjustment, Hue-Saturation-Lightness.

3.	Enable a Channels button.

4.	Move the Hue slider to redistribute the colors in the drawing.

5.	Move the Saturation slider to set the strength of the colors.

A setting of -100 results in a grayscale (black-and-white) drawing. A setting of 100 produces vibrant, but unnatural colors.

6.	Move the Lightness slider to set the amount of white (positive values) or black (negative values).

7.	Repeat steps 3 through 6 for each channel button.

 Note

•	Enabling the Master button in the Hue/Saturation/Lightness box affects all the color channels in an image.

 Tips

•	You can compare the original colors and the new colors using the Before and After color ribbons.

•	You can also apply the Hue, Saturation & Lightness effect by clicking the Adjusts Hue, Saturation and Lightness button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Applying the Invert effect

The Invert effect makes a negative of a drawing by converting all color values to their opposites: black becomes white, blue becomes yellow, and so on.

To apply the Invert effect

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Transform, Invert.

 Related Topics


Applying the Level Equalization effect

The Level Equalization effect preserves detail in shadow or highlight areas that can be lost when you adjust the brightness, contrast, and intensity of an image's tone. Defining the start and end points of the tonal range allows you to redistribute the pixel values throughout the entire tonal range. A histogram displays the distribution of pixels according to brightness.

You can also use the Level Equalization effect to create color gradations on posterized images; to lighten or darken any combination of shadows, midtones, or highlights; to compress brightness values to printable limits; and to adjust the gamma curve (midtones).

To apply the Level Equalization effect

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Color Adjustment, Level Equalization.

3.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Set Input Values [image] sets the minimum values for the Input Value Clipping and the Output Range Compression

•	Set Output Values [image] sets the maximum values for the Input Value Clipping and the Output Range Compression

4.	Click one of the following eyedroppers:

•	Set Input Values Eyedropper tool [image] lets you choose a color for the input values

•	Set Output Values Eyedropper tool [image] lets you choose a color for the output values

5.	Click a color in the Drawing Window.

6.	Choose a color channel from the Channels list box.

7.	Enable the Auto-Adjust check box to automatically redistribute pixel values throughout the tonal range.

8.	Move the Gamma Adjustment slider to set the midtones.

9.	Do one of the following histogram sliders:

•	Input Value Clipping [image] sets a clipping range for the darkest and brightest pixels in the image

•	Output Range Compression [image] sets an output brightness value for the darkest and brightest pixels in the image

To adjust outlying pixel values

•	Click the Options button and set values in the Black Limit To and White Limit To boxes to adjust the percentage of outlying pixels on either end of the tonal range.

 Notes

•	Enabling the Automatically check box causes a percentage of the extreme brightness values to be ignored when the lightest and darkest pixels are identified in the histogram. Disabling the Automatically check box lets you set the amount of clipping by typing a value in the Display Clipping Percent box.

•	You can adjust each channel separately, or simultaneously in the composite channel.

 Tip

•	You can also adjust the input and output values of the shadows and highlights by typing precise values in the Input Value Clipping Boxes and the Output Range Compression boxes.

 Related Topics


Applying the Local Equalization effect

The Local Equalization effect enhances the contrast near edges and reveal details in both light and dark regions. This process can produce artificial contrast variations in the center of relatively uniform regions. You can correct this by expanding the region so that it is larger than any uniform area in the image.

To apply the Local Equalization effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Color Adjustment, Local Equalization.

3.	Move the following sliders:

•	Width [image] sets the width of the region around the pixels

•	Height [image] sets the height of the region around the pixels

4.	If you want to maintain equal proportions, enable the Lock button.

 Related Topics


Applying the Posterize effect

The Posterize effect converts color ranges in an image to solid blocks of color. This simplifies the image by removing tonal gradations, creating large areas of flat color.

To apply the Posterize effect

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Transform, Posterize.

3.	Move the Level slider to set the level at which posterization begins.

The slider values range from 2 to 32. A level of 2 results in drastic posterization; a level of 32 has no effect on most drawings.

 Related Topics


Applying the Replace Colors effect

 The Replace Colors effect replaces selected colors images. When you select the colors that you want to replace, a temporary color mask is created.

Depending on the range you set, you can use the Replace Colors effect to replace a single color or to shift from one color range to another in an image.

To apply the Replace Colors effect

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Color Adjustment, Replace Colors.

3.	Click the Old Color picker, and click the color that you want to replace.

4.	Click the New Color picker, and click a replacement color.

5.	In the Adjust section, move any of the following sliders:

•	Hue [image] sets the hue level of the new color

•	Saturation [image] sets the saturation level of the new color

•	Lightness [image] sets the lightness level of the new color

•	Range [image] sets the range of affected colors. A range of 1 affects only a single color; a range of 100 shifts most of the colors in the direction of the new color.

6.	To ignore all grayscale pixels when replacing colors, enable the Ignore Grayscale check box.

7.	To replace all colors that fall within the current range of the new color, enable the Single Destination Color check box.

 Note

•	Disabling the Ignore Grayscale check box replaces gray pixels based on saturation and lightness values alone.

 Tip

•	You can also use the Old Color Eyedropper tool and the New Color Eyedropper tool to choose the color you want to replace and the replacement color, respectively.

 Related Topics


Applying the Sample/Target Balance effect

The Sample/Target effect adjusts color values in an image with sample colors taken directly from the image itself. After you choose samples from the low-point (shadow), mid-point(midtone), and high-point (highlighted) ranges of color in your image, you choose the target colors for each range. The pixels in the image or image area with the same color as the sample colors adjust to display the corresponding target color.

To apply the Sample/Target Balance effect

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Color Adjustment, Sample/Target Balance.

3.	Choose a color channel from the Channel list box.

4.	Do one of the following:

•	Click the Low-Point Eyedropper tool and choose a point of dark color in the image.

•	Click the Mid-Point Eyedropper tool and choose a point of medium color in the image.

•	Click the High-Point Eyedropper tool and choose a point of highlighted color in the image.

5.	Double-click the color appearing in the Target column to access the specified color range.

6.	In the Select Color dialog box, choose a target color, and click OK.

All colors at or below the sample color's level of darkness are shifted in the direction of the target color.

7.	Enable the Clip Automatically check box to set the range of the histogram display and to ensure that all spikes in the histogram fit on the chart.

 Note

•	The color channels that appear in the Channels list box depend on the image's color mode. There is one composite channel and one channel for each color component.

 Tips

•	Type a value in the Clipping box to determine the percentage of brightness values that are ignored when identifying the light and dark colors in the histogram (when the Clip Automatically check box is disabled).

•	Enable the Always Adjust All Channels check box to adjust all color channels [image] even when you are viewing an individual color channel.

 Related Topics


Applying the Selective Color effect

The Selective Color effect adds or removes an absolute or relative percentage of the CMYK process color from the red, yellow, green, cyan, blue, and magenta color spectrums. You can also add color to the grayscale pixels in a color image.

Selective color modifications increase and decrease the percentage of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black pixels that make up each primary color in the color spectrum. For example, decreasing the percentage of magenta in the reds spectrum results in a color shift toward yellow. Increasing the percentage of magenta in the reds spectrum causes a color shift toward magenta and an increase in red. The extent of any color modification depends on the adjustment percentage method you select.

To apply the Selective Color effect

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Color Adjustment, Selective Color.

3.	In the Color Spectrum section, enable the button that corresponds to the color spectrum that you want to adjust.

4.	In the Adjustment Percentage section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Relative [image] adds or removes a percentage of the process color to or from the selected color spectrum. For example, adding 10% magenta to a 50% red pixel results in an adjustment of + 5%.

•	Absolute [image] adds or removes the absolute value of the process color to or from the selected color spectrum. For example, adding 10% magenta to a 50% red pixel results in an adjustment of + 60%.

5.	Move any of the following sliders:

•	Cyan [image] increases or decreases the percentage of cyan in the color spectrum

•	Magenta [image] increases or decreases the percentage of magenta in the color spectrum

•	Yellow [image] increases or decreases the percentage of yellow in the color spectrum

•	Black [image] increases or decreases the percentage of black inherent in the color spectrum

To add color to grayscale pixels

•	Enable the Shadows, Midtones, or Highlights button and enable the Absolute button in the Selective Color dialog box.

•	When you move the Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black sliders, the percentage of those colors increases or decreases for the selected color tones.

 Related Topics


Applying the Tone Curve effect

The Tone Curve effect corrects colors precisely, local control over individual pixel values.

You can pinpoint a problem area and produce a subtle or pronounced change in that area that dissipates [image] according to the tone curve [image] as you move away from the targeted area. The Tone Curve effect lets you take current pixel brightness values as input and change them to different values. The response curve represents the balance between shadows, midtones, and highlights.

To apply the Tone Curve effect

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Color Adjustment, Tone Curve.

3.	Choose a color channel from the Channels list box.

4.	Enable one of the following:

•	Curve [image] lets you shape the curve by clicking and dragging and smoothes the distribution of values.

•	Linear [image] lets you draw the curve by clicking and dragging but retains straight line segments between nodes.

•	Freehand [image] lets you draw the curve by clicking and dragging.

•	Gamma [image] lets you weigh corrections toward the midtones. If you select Gamma, you must move the Gamma slider to set a gamma curve value.

5.	Do any of the following:

•	Click the Options button to change the percentage of outlying pixels on either end of the tonal range.

•	Click the Smooth button to smooth a freehand curve.

•	Click and hold the Smooth button down to continuously smooth the tone curve.

•	Click the Null button to reset the Tone Curve.

•	Click the Horizontal Flip button or the Vertical Flip button to invert the tone curve.

•	Press ALT and right-click to change the resolution of the grid.

•	Click the Invert button to flip the axis of the graph.

6.	Click and drag the tone curve on the grid.

 Notes

•	Response curve files are saved with the extension .CRV.

•	Enable the Display All check box to view the tone curves for all of the image's channels at once.

•	Adjust each channel's response curve separately or simultaneously by working in the composite channel.

 Tips

•	You can undo your last action in the Tone Curve dialog box by pressing CTRL + Z.

•	You can press and hold CTRL to constrain the nodes to a vertical movement.

 Related Topics


Resampling and editing bitmaps


Overview: Resampling and editing bitmaps
Resampling and editing bitmaps

A resampled bitmap is a bitmap that has been changed in size or resolution. When you resample a bitmap, you can resize it, change its horizontal and vertical bitmap resolution, choose the processing quality, and correct bitmap distortion.

You can remove the jagged edges from the original image to create a smooth, clear bitmap. You can change the bitmap resolution and processing quality without affecting its size.

You may want to change a bitmap completely by editing it in Corel PHOTO PAINT. CorelDRAW gives you the ability to launch Corel PHOTO-PAINT to modify an image.

 Related Topics


Resampling bitmaps

You can resample bitmaps in two ways: by resizing it or by changing its resolution. Resolution is the amount of detail and information an image file contains. When you work with bitmaps, resolution affects both the quality of the final output and the file size.

You can resize the bitmap using absolute or percentage values. You can resize a bitmap while maintaining its original proportions. It is best to adjust bitmap width or height separately. In fact, if you want to maintain the integrity of the bitmap, you should never increase its size.

You can change the resolution of a bitmap in one of three ways: by changing the horizontal and vertical bitmap resolution, by choosing the processing quality of the resampled bitmap, or by correcting bitmap distortion when you resample.

To resample by changing the size of a bitmap

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Resample.

3.	Choose a unit of measurement from the Units list box.

4.	In the Image Size section, type values in the Width and Height boxes.

To resample by changing the resolution of a bitmap

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Maintain Original Size check box.

3.	Disable the Maintain Aspect Ratio and the Identical Values check boxes to enter different values for the Resolution.

4.	In the Resolution section, type values in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes.

If you enable the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box, typing one value adjusts the other value automatically.

5.	Enable the Anti-Alias check box to produce a smoother bitmap.

 Tip

•	You can also resample a bitmap by clicking the Resamples the Bitmap button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Editing bitmaps

CorelDRAW provides access to other applications to allow you to work quickly and efficiently. You can edit any bitmap after it has been imported in to CorelDRAW by using the Edit Bitmap option. This feature lets you edit a bitmap in Corel PHOTO-PAINT and then return to CorelDRAW.

To edit a bitmap

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Edit Bitmap.

3.	Edit the bitmap in Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

 Tip

•	You can also edit a bitmap by clicking the Edit Bitmap button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Inflating bitmaps


Overview: Inflating bitmaps
Inflating bitmaps

CorelDRAW automatically inflates a bitmap to ensure that the effect covers the entire image. Disabling the automatic inflate option truncates the effect on the image. For example, if you apply a Blur effect to a rectangle, the corners are cut off. You can also inflate a bitmap manually.

 Related Topics


Inflating bitmaps

You can inflate bitmaps automatically or manually. When you inflate bitmaps automatically, CorelDRAW adds a default border to the bitmap. You can set your own border size when you inflate a bitmap manually.

To enable the auto inflate bitmap option

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Inflate Bitmap, Auto Inflate Bitmap.

A check mark appears next to the Auto Inflate Bitmap indicating that the option is enabled. Repeat step 2 to disable the Auto Inflate Bitmap option.

To inflate a bitmap manually

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Inflate Bitmap, Manually Inflate Bitmap.

3.	Type a number representing the pixel amount to inflate in the Width and Height boxes or a percentage amount to inflate the bitmap in the Percentage boxes. Use the original bitmap size as reference.

4.	Enable the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box to inflate the bitmap proportionally.


Converting bitmaps


Overview: Converting bitmaps
Converting bitmaps

Converting is the process of changing something from one form to another. There are two types of conversions that you might want to do on an image: converting from a vector image to a bitmap and converting an image from one color mode to another.

When you convert a vector image to a bitmap, you can access and apply effects that were not available to vector images.

A color mode is a system that defines the number and kind of colors that make up a bitmap image. When you convert an image from one color mode to another, you can change the look of an image. You might also want to convert to a less memory-intensive color mode to decrease file size, for example converting to the Grayscale color mode.

You can select from Black and White (1-bit), Grayscale (8-bit), Duotone (8-bit), Paletted (8-bit), RGB color (24-bit), LAB color (24-bit) or CMYK color (32-bit) color modes. When converting a bitmap, the active color mode, the mode the image is currently using, appears dimmed.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Converting vectors to bitmaps


Overview: Converting vectors to bitmaps
Converting vectors to bitmaps

You can convert a vector image to a bitmap. Converting an image in this manner enables you to apply a variety of effects to a drawing.

 Related Topics


Converting vectors to bitmaps

You can convert vector objects created in CorelDRAW to bitmaps.

To convert a vector object to a bitmap

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Convert to Bitmap.

3.	From the Color list box, choose the color mode to be saved with the bitmap.

4.	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Anti-Aliasing [image] smoothes the edges of the bitmap

•	Dithered [image] improves the transition between colors

•	Transparent Background [image] makes the background of the bitmap transparent

•	Use Color Profile [image] applies the current color profile

5.	From the Resolution list box, choose a resolution value.

 Related Topics


Overview: Converting an image to a different color mode
Converting an image to a different color mode

CorelDRAW lets you convert an image to the following color modes: Black-and-White, Grayscale, Duotone, RGB, CMYK, or LAB. You can also convert a bitmap to the Paletted color mode. For information about Converting to Paletted color mode, see "Converting images to the Paletted color mode."

The Black-and White, Duotone and Paletted color modes share common controls. For information on how to use these common controls, see "Using bitmap effects".

Converting to the Black-and-White color mode

The Black-and-White color mode is a 1-bit color mode that stores images as two solid colors [image] usually black and white [image] with no gradations. This mode is useful for line art and simple graphics.

Converting to the Grayscale color mode

The Grayscale color mode uses 256 shades of gray to represent an image. Every pixel in a grayscale image has a brightness value ranging from 0, which is black, to 255, which is white. In some cases, you must convert an image to grayscale before you can convert it to other modes. For example, you must convert an image to the Grayscale color mode before you can convert it to the Duotone color mode.

Converting to the Duotone color mode

The Duotone color mode consists of the Grayscale color mode enhanced with one to four additional colors. The Duotone color mode adds color to grayscale images or creates effects using tone curve settings. A duotone image can be monotone, duotone, tritone, or quadtone, according to the number of additional colors.

Converting to the RGB Color color mode

The RGB Color color mode is a 24-bit color mode that uses percentages of three colors (red, green, and blue) to create colors. Each color has 100 levels of intensity, ranging from black to the color's full intensity. RGB Color is the most commonly used color mode.

You can use the RGB Color color mode to create high-quality photographic color bitmaps, and to print to an RGB or CMY printer.

Converting to the Lab Color color mode

The Lab Color color mode creates color based on luminance or lightness (L) and two chromatic components: "a" and "b." The "a" component consists of colors ranging from green to red and the "b" component consists of colors ranging from blue to yellow.

You can use the LAB Color color mode for working with Photo CD images or for editing the luminance and color values of an image independently. You can also use the Lab color mode to move images between systems and for printing to PostScript Level 2 printers.

Converting to the CMYK Color color mode

The CMYK Color color mode assigns each pixel in the original image a percentage value for each of the corresponding process inks. The lightest colors are assigned small percentage values and darker shades are assigned higher percentage values. You can use the CMYK Color color mode when you want to print an image that has process colors. The CMYK Color color mode is the standard mode for most full-color commercial printing.

Converting to the CMYK Color color mode is different from converting to other modes because it is used to produce full-color separations. The CMYK Color color mode is device-dependent, which means that its color space is based on the characteristics of a printer. If you convert an image to a device-dependent color mode such as CMYK Color, the color values used to produce the image might differ from one device to another.

 Related Topics


Converting bitmaps to the Black-and-White color mode

You can convert a bitmap to a 1-bit black-and-white bitmap. The Black-and-White color mode provides seven options: Line Art, Ordered, Halftone, Stucki, Jarvis, Floyd-Steinberg, and Cardinality-Distribution. Jarvis, Stucki, and Floyd-Steinberg are types of error-diffusion conversions. Error diffusion is best suited to photographic images.

Line Art

Line Art produces a high-contrast, black-and-white bitmap. You specify a value indicating all colors below that value turn black and all colors above that value turn white. No halftone is applied to the bitmap.

Ordered

Ordered organizes gray levels into repeating geometric patterns of black and white pixels. Solid colors are emphasized and image edges are hard. This option improves the quality of the displayed bitmap for monitors that have less than 256-color capabilities. Ordered approximates pixel values by using fixed dot patterns.

Halftone

Halftone creates different shades of gray by varying the pattern of black-and-white pixels in an image. Similar to a photograph, Halftone enables printing to a black-and-white laser printer.

Jarvis

Jarvis error diffusion applies the Jarvis algorithm to individual pixels.

Stucki

Stucki error diffusion applies the Stucki algorithm to individual pixels.

Floyd-Steinberg

Floyd-Steinberg error diffusion applies the Floyd-Steinberg algorithm to individual pixels.

Cardinality-Distribution

Cardinality-Distribution creates a textured look by applying cardinality calculation and distributing to each pixel.

To convert a bitmap to the Black-and-White color mode

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Mode, Black And White (1-bit).

3.	In the Conversion list box, choose a type of conversion from Line Art, Ordered, Halftone, Cardinality-Distribution, Jarvis, Stucki, or Floyd-Steinberg.

4.	If you choose Halftone, do all of the following:

•	Set a level of intensity using the Intensity slider.

•	Choose a screen type from the Screen Type list box.

•	Choose a unit from the list and type a value in the Lines per box to control the line frequency.

•	Type a value in the Degrees box to control the screen angle.

5.	If you choose Line Art, type a value in the Threshold box.

All colors with a grayscale value lower than this threshold value change to black; all colors with a grayscale value higher than the threshold value change to white.

6.	If you choose Ordered, Jarvis, Stucki, Floyd-Steinberg, or Cardinality-Distribution, set a level of intensity using the Intensity slider.

Higher Intensity values result in more and darker grayscale tones; lower intensity values result in less, lighter grayscale tones.

 Related Topics


Converting bitmaps to the Grayscale color mode

You can convert a bitmap to the Grayscale color mode. A grayscale bitmap uses a range of 0 to 255 shades of gray to produce a bitmap that resembles a traditional black-and-white photograph.

To convert a bitmap to the Grayscale color mode

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Mode, Grayscale (8-bit).

 Related Topics


Converting bitmaps to the Duotone color mode

A bitmap in the Duotone color mode is a grayscale image that has been enhanced with one to four additional colors.

Curve

When you convert a grayscale image to the Duotone color mode, the tone curve grid displays the dynamic ink curves that will be used throughout the conversion. The horizontal plane or x-axis displays the 256 possible shades of gray in a grayscale image (0 is black; 255 is white). The vertical plane or y-axis illustrates the intensity of an ink (from 1 to 100 percent) that is applied to the corresponding grayscale values.

Overprint

Once you adjust the tone curves for the duotone conversion, you can further customize the colors displaying your image by choosing Overprint colors. Overprint colors are the colors appearing on an image when two or more colors overlap. The Overprints displays all possible instances when the colors that you have chosen for your duotone conversion can overlap. Associated with each instance is the color produced by the overlap. You can also choose new Overprint colors.

To access the Duotone option you must first convert your bitmap to Grayscale. For more information, see "Converting bitmaps to the Grayscale color mode."

To convert a grayscale bitmap to the Duotone color mode

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Mode, Duotone (8-bit).

3.	From the Type list box, choose one of the following:

•	Monotone [image] creates a grayscale image that prints using a single ink

•	Duotone [image] creates a grayscale image that prints using two inks. In most cases, one ink is black and one is colored.

•	Tritone [image] creates a grayscale image that prints using three inks. In most cases, one ink is black and the others are colored.

•	Quadtone [image] creates a grayscale image that prints using four inks. In most cases, one ink is black and the others are colored.

The Type window displays the corresponding inks.

4.	Select an ink color from the Type window.

5.	Click the ink tone curve on the grid to create a node.

The node adjusts the percentage of color at that point on the curve.

6.	Position the cursor over the node that you want to edit.

A target icon appears when the node is in Edit mode.

7.	Drag the node to adjust the curve.

To save inks for duotone conversion

1.	In the Duotone dialog box, click the Save button.

2.	From the Save In list box, choose the drive where you want to store the duotone file.

3.	Double-click the folder in which you want to store the duotone file.

4.	Type a name for the file in the File Name box.

5.	Click the Save button.

To load inks for duotone conversion

1.	In the Duotone dialog box, click the Load button.

2.	From the Look In list box, choose the drive where the duotone file is stored.

3.	Double-click the folder where the duotone file is stored, and click the filename.

4.	Click the Open button.

To choose an ink color for duotone conversions

1.	In the Duotone dialog box, double-click an ink color.

2.	Choose a new color from one of the modes.

3.	Click OK.

4.	Click the tone curve line on the grid to create a node.

The node adjusts the percentage of color at that point on the curve.

5.	Position the cursor over the node that you want to edit.

A target icon appears when the node is in Edit mode.

6.	Drag the node to adjust the curve.

To specify how Overprint colors display onscreen

1.	In the Duotone dialog box, click the Overprint tab.

2.	Enable the Use Overprint check box.

3.	Double-click the color that you want to edit.

4.	In the Select Color dialog box, choose a new color from one of the modes.

You can verify the original color and the new color in the Reference Color and New Color boxes at the top of the Select Color dialog box.

To edit the settings of a duotone image

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Color Transform, Edit Duotone.

 Tips

•	Enable the Show All box to display all of the ink tone curves on the grid at once.

•	Click the Null button to return all ink tone curves to their default position on the grid.

 Related Topics


Converting bitmaps to the RGB Color color mode

The RGB Color color mode uses percentages of three colors (red, green, and blue) to create colors. Each color has 256 levels of intensity, ranging from zero to full intensity.

To convert a bitmap to the RGB Color color mode

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Mode, RGB Color (24-bit).

 Related Topics


Converting bitmaps to the Lab Color color mode

The Lab Color color mode creates bitmaps encompassing the color gamuts of both the CMYK and the RGB Color color modes.

To convert a bitmap to the LAB Colors color mode

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Mode, Lab Color (24-bit).

 Related Topics


Converting bitmaps to the CMYK Colors color mode

 The CMYK Color color mode lets you combine percentages of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black to produce virtually any color. Before you convert images to CMYK Color color mode, you must calibrate your system correctly.

To convert a bitmap to the CMYK Colors color mode

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Mode, CMYK Color (32-bit).

 Note

•	Any conversion involves some loss of information because converting shifts a bitmap to another color space. This is especially true when converting to CMYK, which is a smaller color space than RGB. The color of the RGB bitmap changes noticeably when you convert to CMYK and these changes cannot be recovered.

 Related Topics


Converting images to the Paletted color mode


Overview: Converting images to the Paletted color mode
Converting images to the Paletted color mode

The Paletted color mode is an 8-bit color mode that stores and displays images using up to 256 colors. Converting a complex image to the Paletted color mode reduces file size [image] especially important for Internet publications [image] and allows more precise control over the colors used throughout the conversion process.

When you convert an image to the Paletted color mode, you can choose from different color palette types. Choose a predefined palette or create your own customized palette based on the colors displayed in your image. For more precise control over the colors contained in the palette, you can specify the number of colors and the range sensitivity to apply throughout the conversion.

Smoothing

When you smooth an image, CorelDRAW analyzes the color differences around each pixel in the image and blends the color transitions where abrupt color changes occur. Smoothing creates a softly blurred image but helps produce a more accurate palette.

Dithering

Dithering enhances the appearance of photographic images by using a limited Color Palette. Dithering places pixels with specific colors or values relative to other pixels of a specific color. The relationship of one colored pixel to another helps to create the appearance of additional colors that do not exist in the Color Palette. There are two types of dithering: error diffusion and ordered dithering. Error diffusion scatters pixels irregularly, making edges and colors softer. Ordered dithering approximates color blends using fixed dot patterns; as a result, solid colors are emphasized and edges appear harder.

Range sensitivity

If you convert an image to the Paletted color mode using an optimized palette, you can specify a range sensitivity color. This color acts as a target color for the conversion, meaning more colors in the specified color's range are used in the conversion. You can determine the importance of the range sensitivity color and customize its appearance.

Batch conversion

You can convert multiple files to the Paletted color mode using batch conversion. You can specify which files to convert and preview each image before applying the conversion.

 Related Topics


Converting to Paletted color mode

You can convert images to the Paletted color mode by choosing one of ten palette types.

To convert a bitmap to the Paletted color mode

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Mode, Paletted (8-bit).

3.	In the Convert To Paletted dialog box, click the Options tab.

4.	From the Palette list box, choose a palette type.

•	Uniform [image] provides a range of 256 colors with equal parts of red, green, and blue

•	Standard VGA [image] provides the Standard VGA 16-color palette

•	Adaptive [image] samples the image and uses the first 256 colors to create the palette

•	Optimized [image] contains colors centered on the image's spectrum of colors. If you choose Optimized, you can enable the Color Range Sensitivity To check box and choose a color from the Color Palette

•	Black Body [image] contains colors that are based on temperature, e.g., black (cold), red, orange, yellow, and white (hot)

•	Grayscale [image] provides 256 shades of gray, ranging from black (0) to white (255)

•	System [image] contains the predefined palette of colors used by your operating system

•	Microsoft Internet Explorer [image] contains the predefined Microsoft Internet Explorer colors

•	Netscape Navigator [image] contains the predefined Netscape Navigator colors

•	Custom [image] allows you to add colors to create your own customized color palette. If you choose Custom, click the Open button beside the Palette list box, locate the custom palette in the Open Palette dialog box, and click Open.

5.	From the Dithering list box, choose a dithering option.

•	None [image] disables dithering

•	Ordered [image] approximates color blends using fixed dot patterns

•	Jarvis [image] approximates color blends by applying the error diffusion Jarvis algorithm to individual pixels

•	Stucki [image] approximates color blends by applying the error diffusion Stucki algorithm to individual pixels

•	Floyd-Steinberg [image] approximates color blends by applying the error diffusion Floyd-Steinberg algorithm to individual pixels

6.	Move the Dither Intensity slider to set the intensity of the conversion.

 Notes

•	You can preview the colors that are used to create the paletted image in the Preview window in the Convert To Paletted dialog box. Previewing lets you alter the conversion options before you permanently apply the effect to the image.

•	The Ordered dithering option applies more quickly than the Error Diffusion options (Jarvis, Stucki, and Floyd-Steinberg) but is less accurate.

 Related Topics


Saving, deleting, and loading conversion options for the paletted image

After you choose a palette and set the dithering and range sensitivity for the conversion, you can save your settings for future use. You can add and remove preset conversion options in the Convert To Paletted dialog box.

To save conversion options

1.	Click Bitmaps, Mode, Paletted (8-bit).

2.	Click the Add button.

3.	Type a name in the Save New Preset As box in the Save Preset dialog box.

The palette, dithering, smoothing, and color sensitivity options are saved as a preset that you can use in future CorelDRAW sessions.

To delete conversion options

1.	Click Image, Mode, Paletted (8-bit).

2.	Choose the conversion preset from the Preset list box.

3.	Click the Remove button.

To load preset conversion options

1.	Click Bitmaps, Mode, Paletted (8-bit).

2.	From the Presets list box, choose a preset conversion option.

The palette, dithering, smoothing, and color sensitivity options stored in the preset are applied to the current image.

To load a custom color palette

1.	Click Bitmaps, Mode, Paletted (8-bit).

2.	Click the Open button.

3.	In the Open Palette, choose the drive where the color palette is stored from the Look In box.

4.	Double-click the folder where the color palette is stored.

5.	Double-click the filename.

 Related Topics


Specifying range sensitivity for the paletted image

Specify range sensitivity to customize the palette you chose for the conversion. When you specify range sensitivity, you choose a color that acts as the focus color for the paletted conversion. You can also adjust the color and specify the importance of the color in the image that you are converting.

Because all conversions result in some loss of information, it's a good idea to preview the conversion before you close the Convert To Paletted dialog box. Previewing lets you alter the conversion options that you want to apply without permanently affecting the image.

To specify range sensitivity for the paletted image

1.	Click Bitmaps, Mode, Paletted (8-bit).

2.	Click the Options tab and, from the Palette list box, choose Optimized.

3.	Enable the Color Range Sensitivity To box.

4.	Do one of the following:

•	Click the Eyedropper tool and click a color on the image.

•	Click the Color Range Sensitivity To color picker, and choose a color.

•	Click the Other button at the bottom of the Color Range Sensitivity To color picker to see more colors or to create your own.

5.	Click the Range Sensitivity tab.

6.	Move any of the following sliders:

•	Importance [image] changes the default importance value to determines the emphasis placed on this color (and others related to it) in the conversion. Higher importance values mean that more shades of this color (and those related to it) are included in the color palette [image] to the point where other colors in the image are excluded. The conversion is concentrated on the areas of the image that are displayed in that color.

•	Lightness [image] adjusts the tolerance sensitivity of the conversion process to the lightness component of the range sensitivity color

•	A (Green Red Axis) [image] adjusts the tolerance sensitivity of the conversion process to the green/red component of the range sensitivity color

•	B (Blue Yellow Axis)-adjusts the tolerance sensitivity of the conversion process to the blue/yellow component of the range sensitivity color

7.	Click the Processed Palette tab to view the range of colors that you've chosen for your palette.

 Note

•	Range sensitivity is only available when you choose the Optimized palette type.

 Related Topics


Editing the processed Color Palette

After you choose a Color Palette for the image conversion, you can customize it by editing individual colors.

To edit the processed Color Palette

1.	Click Bitmaps, Mode, Paletted (8-bit).

2.	Click the Processed Palette tab.

3.	Click a color.

4.	Click the Edit button.

5.	Use the commands and controls in the Color Table to edit the selected color.

 Related Topics


Saving the processed palette

After you create and customize a palette for your conversion, you can save it as a custom palette file (.CPL) for use with other applications.

To save the processed palette

1.	Click Bitmaps, Mode, Paletted (8-bit).

2.	In the Convert To Paletted dialog box, choose a palette and set conversion and range sensitivity options.

3.	Click the Processed Palette tab to view the colors in your palette.

4.	Click the Save button.

5.	In the Save Palette As dialog box, choose the drive where you want to store your palette from the Save In box.

6.	Double-click the folder where you want to store your palette.

7.	Type a name in the File Name box.

8.	Click Save.

 Note

•	For more information about converting an image to the Paletted color mode, see "Converting to Paletted color mode" and "Specifying range sensitivity for the paletted image."

 Related Topics


Resetting the range sensitivity options

At any time throughout the conversion process you can reset the range sensitivity color and options that you've set. When you reset the range sensitivity color on the Options page, CorelDRAW resets to the color which appears most frequently in the image.

To reset the Color Palette

1.	Click Bitmaps, Mode, Paletted (8-bit).

2.	In the Convert To Paletted dialog box, click the Options tab.

3.	Click the Reset button.

 Note

•	The Reset button on the Options page is only available if you have set the color range sensitivity for an Optimized palette.

To reset range sensitivity options

1.	Click Bitmaps, Mode, Paletted (8-bit).

2.	In the Convert To Paletted dialog box, click the Range Sensitivity tab.

3.	Click the Reset button beside the range sensitivity option that you want to reset.

 Related Topics


Converting multiple images

You can convert multiple images to the Paletted color mode at once. Before you can convert the images, they must be open in CorelDRAW. All the images that you include in the batch are converted using the palette and conversion options that you specify on the Options page in the Convert To Paletted dialog box.

All the images you include in the batch are converted using the palette and conversion options that you specify on the Options page.

To convert multiple files

1.	Click Bitmaps, Mode, Paletted (8-bit).

2.	Click the Batch tab.

The name of the active file(s) in the Drawing Window appears in the right column on the Batch page with an asterisks(*) in front. The names of all other open files are listed in the left column.

3.	Select the files that you want to convert.

4.	Click the Add button.

The selected files move to the right column for conversion.

To preview an image in the batch conversion

•	Choose an image from the Preview Image list box, and enable the Preview button.

 Note

•	Batch conversion is not available if you choose Optimized from the Palette list box on the Options page in the Convert To Paletted dialog box.

 Tips

•	You can include all open files in the batch conversion by clicking the Add all button on the Batch page.

•	You can remove files from the batch by clicking the Remove button on the Batch page. The Remove all button removes all files from the batch.

 Related Topics


Applying special effects to bitmaps


Overview: Applying special effects to bitmaps
Applying special effects to bitmaps

You can enhance or customize bitmaps using special effects.

Effects filters are small applications that execute a preset series of commands to produce an effect on a bitmap. They automatically calculate the values and characteristics of every pixel in a bitmap and then alter the pixels according to new values. For example, if you apply the Motion Blur effect to a bitmap, the effect analyzes all pixel values then "smears" the values in a specified direction, creating the illusion of motion.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Using bitmap effects


Overview: Using bitmap effects
Using bitmap effects

The following chart displays common controls for using Color Adjustment effects, converting to different color modes, and applying bitmaps effects:

Control	Description

Enable to preview the effect on screen.

Enable to display a single, large Result window, or to disable the on-screen preview.

Enable to display Original and Result windows.

Enable to automatically update the preview as you make adjustments to the settings.

Shows a menu of other effects you can apply to your bitmap.

You can also pan around an image using the Pan tool that appears when you move your cursor over the Original window (or the Drawing Window if the On-Screen Preview button is enabled). Zoom in to an image by clicking in the window; right-click to zoom out.

 Related Topics


Setting the bitmaps effects options

The Options dialog box lets you set the way you see the preview of an effect. You can also choose to make the default options of the effect revert to the options you used the last time you applied the effect. You can also set the number of activities you can undo. These options apply to all bitmap effect dialog boxes.

To set the bitmap effects options

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Bitmap Effects.

3.	In the Initial Preview Method section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Full Screen [image] displays a preview of the effect onscreen

•	Before and After [image] displays the Original and Results windows in the effect dialog

•	Result Only [image] displays only the Results window in the effect dialog

•	Last Used [image] displays the last used dialog, either On Screen or In Dialog

4.	Enable the Prefill dialogs with last used values check box to display the previously entered effect settings.

To set the bitmap effects undo level

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Workspace, General.

3.	Type the number of undo levels in the Bitmap Effects box.


Applying 3D effects


Overview: Applying 3D effects
Applying 3D effects

CorelDRAW provides seven 3D effects to give your bitmaps the illusion of three-dimensional depth. The 3D effects include:

•	3D Rotate [image] rotates an image to any degree

•	Cylinder [image] compresses and expands image pixels in the shape of a cylinder

•	Emboss [image] creates a three-dimensional relief effect

•	Page Curl [image] creates the illusion that a corner of the paper has been rolled over another part of the image

•	Perspective [image] applies a three-dimensional look or holds the original size and shape

•	Pinch Punch [image] causes an image to appear as if it has been pulled out or pushed in from the center

•	Sphere [image] creates the illusion that an image is wrapped around the inside or outside of a sphere

 Related Topics


Applying the 3D Rotate effect to a bitmap

The 3D Rotate effect rotates an image horizontally and vertically. CorelDRAW applies the rotation as if the image were one side of a three-dimensional box.

To apply the 3D Rotate effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, 3D Effects, 3D Rotate.

3.	Change the Vertical and Horizontal values to rotate and position the 3D model.

4.	Enable the Best Fit check box to ensure that the bitmap stays within the boundary of the Drawing Page.

 Note

•	The 3D Rotate effect supports all color modes except the Black-and-White color mode.

 Related Topics


Applying the Cylinder effect to a bitmap

The Cylinder effect wraps an image along the inside or outside of a cylinder.

To apply the Cylinder effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, 3D Effects, Cylinder.

3.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Horizontal [image] shifts pixels from top to bottom

•	Vertical [image] shifts pixels from left to right

4.	Move the Percentage slider to set the direction of the wrapping.

Positive values expand pixels away from the center, wrapping the image around the cylinder's exterior. Negative values compress pixels towards the center, conforming the image to the interior of a cylinder.

 Note

•	The Cylinder effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Related Topics


Applying the Emboss effect to a bitmap

The Emboss effect creates a three-dimensional relief effect, which means that details in an image appear to become three-dimensional ridges and crevices on a flat surface. The Emboss effect has the most dramatic effect on bitmaps that have medium to high contrast.

You can use several effects in combination with the Emboss effect to produce photo-realistic effects.

To apply the Emboss effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, 3D Effects, Emboss.

3.	In the Emboss Color section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Original Color [image] suppresses the color in the bitmap area and outlines the bitmap with the colors in the original bitmap

•	Gray [image] suppresses the color in the bitmap area and outlines the bitmap with gray. This produces a gray bitmap with moderate, embossed highlights.

•	Black [image] suppresses the color in the bitmap area and outlines the bitmap with black. This produces a black bitmap with high-contrast, embossed highlights.

•	Other [image] suppresses the color in the bitmap area and outlines the bitmap with a color you choose from the color picker

4.	Move the Depth slider to control the depth of the embossing effect so that areas of the bitmap appear raised in relief.

5.	Move the Level slider to set the amount of background color that the relief contains.

6.	Type a value in the Direction box to indicate the direction of movement.

 Note

•	The Emboss effect supports all color modes except Paletted and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also use the Direction dial to indicate the direction of movement. Click on a point along the edge of the Direction dial to choose the location of the light source relative to the bitmap (theoretically in the center of the circle) used for the embossing effect.

 Related Topics


Applying the Page Curl effect to a bitmap

The Page Curl effect gives the impression that a corner of an image has rolled in on itself. You can select a corner of the bitmap, the orientation and size of the curl, and its transparency level. You select colors for the curl and for the background that becomes visible when the image curls away.

To apply the Page Curl effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, 3D Effects, Page Curl.

3.	Click a Page Corner button to select a corner.

4.	Do one of the following:

•	Click the Vertical button to begin the curl at the top or bottom edge of the image.

•	Click the Horizontal button to begin the curl at the left or right edge of the image.

5.	Move the Width % and Height % sliders to set the curl size.

Higher values result in a larger, wider curl; lower values result in a smaller, tighter curl.

6.	Click the color pickers to choose colors for the Curl and Background.

7.	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Opaque Curl [image] creates a curl with a solid color

•	Transparent Curl [image] lets the underlying image be visible through the curl

 Note

•	The Page Curl effect supports all color modes except Paletted and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also choose the Curl and Background colors by using the Eyedropper and clicking a color from the Drawing Window.

 Related Topics


Applying the Perspective effect to a bitmap

The Perspective effect gives an image the appearance of three-dimensional depth, as if the bitmap is receding into the distance.

There are two perspective modes: Perspective and Shear. Perspective applies a three-dimensional look to the bitmap according to the movement of the four nodes in the dialog box. Shear also applies perspective, but maintains the original size and shape of the bitmap.

To apply the Perspective effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, 3D Effects, Perspective.

3.	Enable one of the buttons in the Type section:

•	Perspective [image] lets you move two nodes at a time toward or away from each other

•	Shear [image] maintains the distance between the nodes, while allowing you to skew the bitmap

4.	Drag one of the nodes that appears in the Preview window.

The Preview window shows how dragging the nodes affects the perspective of the bitmap.

5.	Enable the Best Fit check box to ensure that the bitmap stays within the boundary of the Drawing Page.

 Note

•	The Perspective effect supports all color modes except Black-and-White.

 Related Topics


Applying the Pinch Punch effect to a bitmap

The Pinch Punch effect warps an image by either "pinching" the bitmap away from you or "punching" it toward you.

To apply the Pinch Punch effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, 3D Effects, Pinch Punch.

3.	Click the Set Center button.

4.	Position the cursor over the Drawing Window, and click to set a center point around which the pinch or punch originates.

5.	Move the Punch/Pinch (-/+) slider to set the intensity of the effect.

Positive values apply a Pinch effect; negative values apply a Punch effect.

 Note

•	The Pinch Punch effect supports all color modes except Black-and-White.

 Related Topics


Applying the Sphere effect to a bitmap

The Sphere effect makes an image appear as though it wraps around the inside or outside of a sphere.

To apply the Sphere effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, 3D Effects, Sphere.

3.	Move the Percentage slider to set the wrapping.

Negative values shrink central pixels, wrapping your image along the inside of a sphere. Positive values expand central pixels, wrapping your image along the outside of a sphere.

 Note

•	The Sphere effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Related Topics


Applying Art Strokes effects


Overview: Applying Art Strokes effects
Applying Art Strokes effects

CorelDRAW provides 14 Art Strokes effects that give images an organic, hand-painted look. You can use these effects to turn your images into pastel drawings, sponge paintings, watercolors, or to create textured backgrounds for your artwork. The Art Strokes effects are:

•	Charcoal [image] converts an image to a charcoal drawing

•	Conté Crayon [image] textures an image using a conté crayon

•	Crayon [image] scatters pixels in an image to produce the effect of a waxed crayon drawing

•	Cubist [image] groups similar colored pixels into squares to produce an image that resembles a Cubist painting

•	Impressionist [image] converts pixels to dabs of paint

•	Palette Knife [image] redistributes pixels to create the impression of a knife spreading paint on a canvas

•	Pastels [image] turns an image to a pastel drawing

•	Pen and Ink [image] transforms an image into a pen and ink drawing

•	Pointillist [image] analyzes the main colors in the image and converts them to small dots

•	Scraperboard [image] scatters and layers pixels in long strands to create the impression of an image scratched in paint

•	Sketch Pad [image] makes an image look like a pencil sketch

•	Watercolor [image] turns an image into a watercolor painting

•	Water Marker [image] reconstructs an image as an abstract color marker sketch

•	Wave Paper [image] makes an image look like a painting on textured wave paper

 Related Topics


Applying the Charcoal effect to a bitmap

The Charcoal effect converts an image to a charcoal drawing.

To apply the Charcoal effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Art Strokes, Charcoal.

3.	Move the Size slider to set the size of the charcoal.

4.	Move the Edge slider to set the emphasis of the image edges.

 Note

•	The Charcoal effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Related Topics


Applying the Conté Crayon effect to a bitmap

The Conté Crayon effect textures an image using a conté crayon.

To apply the Conté Crayon effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Art Strokes, Conté Crayon.

3.	Enable one of the following Conté Colors buttons:

•	Black [image] creates a black conté crayon drawing

•	White [image] creates a white conté crayon drawing

•	Sanguine [image] creates a sanguine conté crayon drawing

•	Sepia [image] creates a sepia conté crayon drawing

•	Bistré [image] creates a bistré conté crayon drawing

4.	Click the color picker, and choose a paper color.

5.	Move the Pressure slider to set the brush pressure.

6.	Move the Texture slider to set the amount of granularity.

 Note

•	The Conté Crayon effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

•	You can apply the Conté Color buttons cumulatively.

 Tips

•	You can also type values in the Pressure and Texture boxes to control the effect.

•	To choose a color for the paper, click the Eyedropper tool, and choose a color from the Image Window.

 Related Topics


Applying the Crayon effect to a bitmap

The Crayon effect scatters pixels in an image, making it appear as though it is drawn using wax crayon.

To apply the Crayon effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Art Strokes, Crayon.

3.	Move the Size slider to set the crayon size.

4.	Move the Outline slider to set the crayon outline detail.

 Note

•	The Crayon effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Related Topics


Applying the Cubist effect to a bitmap

The Cubist effect groups similarly colored pixels into squares, creating an image that resembles a Cubist painting.

To apply the Cubist effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Art Strokes, Cubist.

3.	Move the Size slider to set the size of the squares.

4.	Move the Brightness slider to set the amount of light in the image.

5.	Click the Paper color picker, and choose a color.

 Note

•	The Cubist effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also choose a color for the paper by clicking the Eyedropper tool and choosing a color from the Drawing Window.

 Related Topics


Applying the Impressionist effect to a bitmap

The Impressionist effect gives an image the look of an Impressionist painting by converting it to dabs of solid color.

To apply the Impressionist effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Art Strokes, Impressionist.

3.	Move the Horizontal and Vertical sliders to set the number of pixels that are displaced horizontally and vertically.

Increasing the value increases the effect of blurring on the original bitmap to the point where the bitmap can become unrecognizable. The range (between 1 and 100) is measured in pixel displacement. For example, a setting of 10 for the vertical displacement diffuses the bitmap over a 10-pixel vertical region.

4.	Enable the Lock button to set the horizontal value equal to the vertical value.

The Lock button is enabled when it appears depressed.

 Note

•	The Impressionist effect supports all color modes except Black-and-White.

 Related Topics


Applying the Palette Knife effect to a bitmap

The Palette Knife effect creates an image that looks as though a knife has spread paint on a canvas.

To apply the Palette Knife effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Art Strokes, Palette Knife.

3.	Move the Blade Size slider to set the size of the brushstrokes.

4.	Move the Soft Edge slider to set the amount of smudging.

5.	Click the Angle dial to specify the direction of the brushstrokes.

 Note

•	The Palette Knife effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tips

•	You can also type a value in the Angle box to specify the direction of the brushstrokes.

•	You can also type values in the Blade Size and Soft Edge boxes to control the effect.

 Related Topics


Applying the Pastels effect to a bitmap

The Pastels effect creates an image that looks as though it has been created using pastel crayons.

To apply the Pastels effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Art Strokes, Pastels.

3.	In the Pastel type section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Soft [image] creates the image with gentle or pale pastel shades

•	Oil [image] creates the image to resemble an image made with oil pastels

4.	Move the Stroke size indicator to set the thickness of each line.

5.	Move the Hue variation indicator to set the colors in the image.

 Note

•	The Pastels effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Related Topics


Applying the Pen and Ink effect to a bitmap

The Pen and Ink effect creates an image that looks like a Black-and-White ink drawing.

To apply the Pen and Ink effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Art Strokes, Pen and Ink.

3.	Enable one of the following Style buttons:

•	Crosshatch [image] shades the image using intersecting diagonal lines

•	Stippling [image] shades the image using ink dots

4.	Move the Density slider to set the density of the strokes or dots.

5.	Move the Ink Pools slider to set the amount of ink in the drawing.

 Note

•	The Pen and Ink effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also set the density and ink amount by typing values in the Density and Ink Pools boxes.

 Related Topics


Applying the Pointillist effect to a bitmap

The Pointillist effect creates an image that looks as though it has been created using a vast number of dots.

To apply the Pointillist effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Art Strokes, Pointillist.

3.	Move the Size indicator to set the point size.

4.	Move the Brightness indicator to set the colors in your image.

 Note

•	The Pointillist effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also type values in the Size and Brightness boxes to control the effect.

 Related Topics


Applying the Scraperboard effect to a bitmap

The Scraperboard effect creates an image that looks as though it has been scratched through paint. Your scratching can reveal a color or white background.

To apply the Scraperboard effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Art Strokes, Scraperboard.

3.	In the Scrape to section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Color [image] scratches the image to reveal color

•	White [image] scratches the image to reveal white

4.	Move the Density slider to set the density of the brushstrokes.

5.	Move the Size slider to set the size of the brushstrokes.

 Note

•	The Scraperboard effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also type values in the Density and Size boxes to control the effect.

 Related Topics


Applying the Sketch Pad effect to a bitmap

The Sketch Pad effect creates an image that looks as though it is a pencil sketch.

To apply the Sketch Pad effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Art Strokes, Sketch Pad.

3.	In the Pencil Type section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Graphite [image] creates a black-and-white image, emphasizing black lines

•	Color [image] creates a colored image, emphasizing colored lines

4.	Move the Style slider to set the placement of the pixels.

5.	Move the Lead slider to set the pencil type.

6.	Move the Outline slider to set the intensity of the contours.

 Note

•	The Sketch Pad effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also type values in the Style, Outline, and Pressure boxes to control the effect.

 Related Topics


Applying the Watercolor effect to a bitmap

The Watercolor effect creates an image that looks as though it is a watercolor painting.

To apply the Watercolors effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Art Strokes, Watercolors.

3.	Move the Brush Size slider to set the size of the brushstroke.

4.	Move the Granulation slider to set the granularity of the brushstroke.

5.	Move the Water slider to set the amount of water in the brushstroke.

6.	Move the Bleed slider to set the bleed rate of the brushstroke.

7.	Move the Brightness slider to set the amount of light in the image.

 Note

•	The Watercolor effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also type values in the Brush Size, Granulation, Water, Bleed, and Brightness boxes to control the effect.

 Related Topics


Applying the Water Marker effect to a bitmap

The Water Marker effect creates an image that looks like an abstract sketch created using color marker.

To apply the Water Marker effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Art Strokes, Water Marker.

3.	In the Variations section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Default [image] creates brushstrokes in a default pattern

•	Order [image] creates brushstrokes in an ordered pattern

•	Random [image] creates brushstrokes in a random pattern

4.	Move the Color Variation slider to set the contrast between the brushstrokes.

5.	Move the Size slider to set the water marker nib size.

 Note

•	The Water Marker effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also type a value in the Color Variation and Size boxes to set the contrast between the brushstrokes.

 Related Topics


Applying the Wave Paper effect to a bitmap

The Wave Paper effect creates an image that looks as though it is painted on textured wave paper.

To apply the Wave Paper effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Art Strokes, Wave Paper.

3.	In the Brush color section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Color [image] creates the image using color paints

•	Black & White [image] creates the image using only black and white paints

4.	Move the Brush Pressure indicator to set the pressure exerted on the strokes.

 Note

•	The Wave Paper effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also type a value in the Brush Pressure box to set the brushstroke pressure.

 Related Topics


Applying Blur effects


Overview: Applying Blur effects
Applying Blur effects

CorelDRAW provides nine Blur effects. These effects let you alter the pixels in bitmaps to soften, smooth, blend, or create motion effects. The Blur effects are:

•	Directional Smooth [image] smoothes the regions of gradual change in an image while preserving the edge detail and texture

•	Gaussion Blur [image] produces a hazy effect, blurring an image according to a gaussian distribution

•	Jaggy Despeckle [image] scatters colors in an image, creating a soft, blurred effect with minimal distortion

•	Low Pass [image] removes sharp edges and detail from an image, leaving smooth gradients and low-frequency areas

•	Motion Blur [image] creates the illusion of movement in an image

•	Radial Blur [image] creates a blurring effect that radiates outward from a central point in an image

•	Smooth, [image] tones down differences between adjacent pixels, resulting in only a slight loss of detail

•	Soften [image] smoothes and tones down the harsh edges in images without losing important image detail

•	Zoom [image] blurs pixels outward from a center point in an image

 Related Topics


Applying the Directional Smooth effect to a bitmap

The Directional Smooth effect applies a subtle amount of blurring to an image. It analyzes pixels with similar tonal values to determine the direction in which to apply the greatest amount of smoothing.

To apply the Directional Smooth effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Blur, Directional Smooth.

3.	Move the Percentage slider to set the intensity of the effect.

 Note

•	The Directional Smooth effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also set the intensity of the effect by typing a value in the Percentage box.

 Related Topics


Applying the Gaussian Blur effect to a bitmap

The Gaussion Blur effect produces a hazy effect, blurring the bitmap according to a gaussian distribution. This effect can improve the quality of bitmaps with sharp edges.

To apply the Gaussian Blur effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Blur, Gaussian.

3.	Move the Radius slider to set the intensity of the effect.

Higher values result in a more blurred bitmap.

 Note

•	The Gaussian Blur effect supports all color modes except Paletted and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also set the intensity of the effect by typing a value in the Radius box.

 Related Topics


Applying the Jaggy Despeckle effect to a bitmap

The Jaggy Despeckle effect applies a soft, blurring effect to an image. It is especially effective on high-contrast images.

To apply the Jaggy Despeckle effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Blur, Jaggy Despeckle.

3.	Move the following sliders:

•	Width [image] specifies the number of neighboring pixels (left and right) to affect

•	Height [image] specifies the number neighboring pixels (top and bottom) to affect

 Note

•	The Jaggy Despeckle effect supports all color modes except Paletted and Black-and-White.

 Tips

•	Set identical width and height values by enabling the Symmetric check box.

•	You can also set the intensity of the effect by typing values in the Width and Height boxes.

 Related Topics


Applying the Low Pass effect to a bitmap

The Low Pass effect removes sharp edges and detail from an image.

To apply the Low Pass effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Blur, Low Pass.

3.	Move the Percentage slider to set the intensity of the effect.

Higher settings reduce harsh transitions between shadows and highlights.

4.	Move the Radius slider to set the number of pixels that are successively selected and evaluated when you apply the effect.

 Notes

•	The Low Pass effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

•	High Percentage and Radius settings can erase important detail.

 Tip

•	You can also set the intensity and range of the effect by typing values in the Percentage and Radius boxes.

 Related Topics


Applying the Motion Blur effect to a bitmap

The Motion Blur effect creates the illusion of movement in an image.

To apply the Motion Blur effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Blur, Motion Blur.

3.	Move the Distance slider to set the intensity of the blur effect.

4.	Choose an angle by clicking on a point along the edge of the Direction dial.

5.	In the Off-Imaging Sampling section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Ignore Pixels Outside Image [image] ignores pixels that fall outside the image

•	Use Paper Color [image] starts the blurring with the paper color

•	Sample Nearest Edge Pixel [image] starts the blurring with the colors at the edge of the image

 Note

•	The Motion Blur effect supports all color modes except Paletted and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also indicate the direction and angle of movement by typing values in the Direction box.

 Related Topics


Applying the Radial Blur effect to a bitmap

The Radial Blur effect creates an image with a blurred effect that radiates out from a central point. The center point is protected from change, and the effect becomes more prevalent as you move away from the center point.

To apply the Radial Blur effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Blur, Radial Blur.

3.	Click the Set Center button.

4.	Click on the bitmap to set a center point around which the radial blur originates.

5.	Move the Amount slider to set the intensity of the effect.

 Notes

•	The Radial Blur effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

•	If you preview the Radial Blur effect in the Radial Blur dialog box, clicking inside the preview window sets the center point around which the image is blurred.

•	If you want to zoom in on the image, you must disable the Set Center button.

 Tip

•	You can also set the intensity of the effect by typing a value in the Amount box.

 Related Topics


Applying the Smooth effect to a bitmap

The Smooth effect tones down differences between adjacent pixels. It smoothes the image and results in only a slight loss of detail. The Smooth effect is subtle; you might have to zoom in to see its impact. You can apply this effect several times.

To apply the Smooth effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Blur, Smooth.

3.	Move the Percentage slider to set the intensity of the smoothing effect.

 Note

•	The Smooth effect supports all color modes except Paletted and Black-and-White.

 Related Topics


Applying the Soften effect to a bitmap

The Soften effect slightly blurs an image while retaining a high level of detail.

To apply the Soften effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Blur, Soften.

3.	Move the Percentage slider to set the intensity of the softening.

 Note

•	The Soften effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also set the intensity of the effect by typing a value in the Percentage box.

 Related Topics


Applying the Zoom effect to a bitmap

The Zoom effect blurs pixels outward from a center point. The pixels closest to the center point blur the least. You can control the amount of blurring.

To apply the Zoom effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Blur, Zoom.

3.	Click the Set Center button.

4.	Click in the Drawing Window to set a center point around which the zoom blur originates.

5.	Move the Amount slider to set the intensity of the effect.

 Note

•	The Zoom effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and White.

 Tip

•	You can also set the intensity of the effect by typing a value in the Amount box.

 Related Topics


Applying Color Transform effects


Overview: Applying Color Transform effects
Applying Color Transform effects

CorelDRAW provides four Color Transform effects that let you change the colors in an image. The Color Transform effects are:

•	Bit Planes [image] reduces an image to basic RGB color components and emphasizes tonal changes

•	Halftone [image] gives an image the look of a color halftone.

•	Psychedelic [image] changes the colors in a bitmap to bright, electric colors

•	Solarize [image] transforms colors in an image to look like those of a photographic negative

 Related Topics


Applying the Bit Planes effect to a bitmap

The Bit Planes effect reduces the colors in an image to basic RGB color components and displays tonal changes in the image using solid colors. The Bit Planes effect is useful for analyzing image gradients.

To apply the Bit Planes effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Color Transform, Bit Planes.

3.	Move the Red, Green, and Blue sliders to set the intensity of the effect for the different color planes.

Higher values produce coarser changes; lower values produce displays with more tonal changes and gradations.

 Notes

•	The Bit Planes effect supports all color modes except Black-and-White.

•	At the highest settings, an image shows large, flat areas where the image is brightest and darkest. At the lowest settings, the image shows the finest levels of tone variation.

 Tips

•	You can also set the sensitivity of the effect by typing values in the Red, Green, and Blue boxes.

•	Set equal values in each box by enabling the Apply To All Planes check box.

 Related Topics


Applying the Halftone effect to a bitmap

The Halftone effect gives an image the look of a color halftone. A color halftone is an image that has been converted from a continuous tone image to a series of dots of various sizes that represent different tones.

To apply the Halftone effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Color Transform, Halftone.

3.	Move the Max Dot Radius slider to set the maximum radius of a halftone dot.

4.	,Move the following Channel sliders to determine how colors mix:

•	Cyan [image] specifies the angle of the cyan color screen

•	Magenta [image] specifies the angle of the magenta color screen

•	Yellow [image] specifies the angle of the yellow color screen

•	Black [image] specifies the angle of the black color screen

 Note

•	The Halftone effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, Lab, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also set the radius and channel angles by typing values in the Max Dot Radius and Channels boxes.

 Related Topics


Applying the Psychedelic effect to a bitmap

The Psychedelic effect changes the colors in a bitmap to bright, electric colors such as orange, hot pink, cyan, and lime green. Low values result in interesting effects.

To apply the Psychedelic effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Color Transform, Psychedelic.

3.	Move the Level slider to set the intensity of the effect.

Higher values result in a radical change; lower values result in a subtle change.

 Note

•	The Psychedelic effect supports all color modes except Paletted and Black-and-White.

 Related Topics


Applying the Solarize effect to a bitmap

Solarization is a darkroom technique that uses a sudden flash of light to darken unfilled areas of a print. The Solarize effect transforms colors so that they look like colors in a photographic negative. This effect is more pronounced when applied to color bitmaps.

To apply the Solarize effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Color Transform, Solarize.

3.	Move the Level slider to set the intensity of bitmap solarization.

Higher values apply more light to the bitmap; lower values apply less light.

 Note

•	The Solarize effect supports all color modes except Black-and-White.

 Related Topics


Applying Contour effects


Overview: Applying Contour effects
Applying Contour effects

CorelDRAW provides three Contour effects which let you detect and accentuate the edges of images. You can set the level of edge detection, choose the type of edges, and define the color of the edges. The Contour effects are:

•	Edge Detect [image] detects the edges of items in an image and converts them to lines on a single-color background

•	Find Edges [image] locates edges in an image and lets you convert these edges to soft or solid lines

•	Trace Contour [image] traces image elements using a 16-color palette

 Related Topics


Applying the Edge Detect effect to a bitmap

The Edge Detect effect finds the edges of elements in an image, then converts them to lines on a background of a single color. This lets you to add different outline effects to a bitmap. For best results, use the Edge Detect effect on high-contrast bitmaps that include text.

To apply the Edge Detect effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Contour, Edge Detect.

3.	From the Background Color section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	White [image] applies a white fill to all areas of the bitmap that are not a part of the outlined bitmap

•	Black [image] applies a black fill to all areas of the bitmap that are not a part of the outlined bitmap

•	Other [image] applies a color that you specify using a Color Palette to all areas of the bitmap that are not a part of the outlined bitmap

4.	Move the Sensitivity slider to determine the amount of edge enhancement.

 Note

•	The Edge Detect effect supports all color modes except Paletted and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also choose a background color using the Eyedropper and selecting a color from the image.

 Related Topics


Applying the Find Edges effect

The Find Edges effect detects the edges of objects and converts them to soft or solid lines. The Find Edges effect is useful for high-contrast images, such as images that contain text.

To apply the Find Edges effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Contour, Find Edges.

3.	Enable one of the following Edge Type buttons:

•	Soft [image] creates a smooth, blurred outline

•	Solid [image] creates a sharp, crisp outline

4.	Move the Level slider to determine the intensity of the effect.

 Note

•	The Find Edges effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Related Topics


Applying the Trace Contours effect

The Trace Contour effect highlights the edges of the objects in an image. For best results, use this effect on high-contrast images such as images that contain text.

To apply the Trace Contours effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Contour, Trace Contour.

3.	Move the Level slider to set the threshold brightness.

Brightness values range from 1 to 255.

4.	Click one of the following Edge Type buttons:

•	Lower [image] traces colors with brightness values below the threshold

•	Upper [image] traces colors with brightness values above the threshold

 Note

•	The Trace Contour effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also set the threshold level by typing a value in the Level box.

 Related Topics


Applying Creative effects


Overview: Applying Creative effects
Applying Creative effects

CorelDRAW provides 14 Creative effects. These effects transform images into a variety of shapes and textures. You can use marbles, candy, crystals, fabric, glass, game pieces, frames, whirlpools, or raindrops. The Creative effects are:

•	Crafts [image] uses the shapes of traditional craft items such as puzzles, gears, marbles, candy, ceramic tiles, and poker chips as the framework for effects

•	Crystallize [image] transforms an image into crystal fragments

•	Fabric [image] transforms an image using different textiles

•	Frame [image] frames an image using a preset frame or another image

•	Glass Block [image] makes an image look like it is viewed through thick, glass blocks

•	Kid's Play [image] transforms an image into fun shapes such as lite pegs and building blocks, or uses primary art methods such as finger paint and paint-by-numbers

•	Mosaic [image] breaks an image into unequal, elliptical pieces to create the appearance of a mosaic painting

•	Particles [image] adds bubble and star particles to an image

•	Scatter [image] distorts an image by scattering pixels

•	Smoked Glass [image] applies a transparent, colored tint to an image

•	Stained Glass [image] transforms an image into fragments and creates edges between the glass pieces

•	Vignette [image] frames an image

•	Vortex [image] produces a whirlpool around the center point of an image

•	Weather [image] applies atmospheric conditions such as snow or rain to an image

 Related Topics


Applying the Crafts effect to a bitmap

The Crafts effect uses the shapes of traditional craft items as the framework for effects.

To apply the Crafts effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Creative, Crafts.

3.	From the Style list box, choose one of the following styles:

•	Puzzle [image] creates a pattern using puzzle pieces

•	Gears [image] creates a pattern using gears

•	Marble [image] creates a pattern using marbles

•	Candy [image] creates a pattern using hard, round candy

•	Ceramic Tile [image] creates a pattern using ceramic tiles

•	Poker Chips [image] creates a pattern using poker chips

4.	Move the Size slider to set the size of the craft pieces.

5.	Move the Complete slider to set the percentage of the image that will be affected.

6.	Move the Brightness slider to set the amount of light in the effect.

7.	Click the Rotation dial to set the angle of the craft pieces.

 Note

•	The Crafts effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also set size, percentage, brightness, and rotation values by typing them in the Size, Complete, Brightness, and Rotation boxes.

 Related Topics


Applying the Crystallize effect to a bitmap

The Crystallize effect breaks an image into crystal fragments.

To apply the Crystallize effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Creative, Crystallize.

3.	Move the Size slider to set the size of the crystal fragments.

 Note

•	The Crystallize effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also set the size value by typing it in the Size box.

 Related Topics


Applying the Fabric effect to a bitmap

The Fabric effect transforms an image by using different textiles such as needle-point designs, rug-hooks, and quilts.

To apply the Fabric effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Creative, Fabric.

3.	From the Style list box, choose one of the following styles:

•	Needlepoint [image] creates a needlepoint design

•	Rug Hooking [image] creates a rug-hooking design

•	Quilt [image] creates a quilt design

•	Strings [image] creates a design using string spools

•	Ribbons [image] creates a design using ribbons

•	Tissue Collage [image] creates a design using a tissue collage

4.	Move the Size slider to set the size of the fabric items.

5.	Move the Complete slider to set the percentage of the image to affect.

6.	Move the Brightness slider to set the amount of light in the effect.

7.	Click the Rotation dial to set the angle of the image.

 Note

•	The Fabric effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also set size, percentage, brightness, and rotation values by typing them in the Size, Complete, Brightness, and Rotation boxes.

 Related Topics


Applying the Frame effect to a bitmap

The Frame filter lets you frame your image using a preset frame or another image.

To open a frame

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Creative, Frame.

3.	Click the Select tab.

4.	Click in the Select Frame list to select a file.

5.	Click the Load button to the right of the selected file.

6.	Choose the drive where the file is stored from the Look In list box. Double-click the folder in which the file is stored.

7.	Double-click the filename.

To load a preset frame style

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Creative, Frame.

3.	Choose a style from the Presets list box.

To customize a frame

1.	Follow steps 1 to 6 from the "To open a frame" procedure.

2.	Click the Modify tab.

3.	Click the Color picker, and click a color from the frame.

4.	Move any of the following sliders:

•	Opacity [image] sets the opacity of the frame

•	Blur [image] sets the blurring of the frame

•	Horizontal [image] sets the horizontal frame size

•	Vertical [image] sets the vertical frame size

5.	Click the Rotate dial to specify the degree to which you want to rotate the frame.

6.	Enable any of the following buttons:

•	Flip Horizontal [image] mirrors the frame horizontally

•	Flip Vertical [image] mirrors the frame vertically

•	Align [image] creates a center point for the frame

•	Re-Center [image] centers the frame in the document

To save customized frame settings as a preset style

1.	Customize the frame settings.

2.	Click the Save Preset button.

3.	Type a filename for the new style in the Save As box.

 Note

•	The Frame effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Related Topics


Applying the Glass Block effect to a bitmap

The Glass Block effect makes an image look like it is viewed through thick, glass blocks.

To apply the Glass Block effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Creative, Glass Block.

3.	Move the following sliders to set the dimensions of the glass blocks:

•	Block width [image] specifies the width of the glass blocks

•	Block height [image] specifies the height of the glass blocks

 Note

•	The Glass Block effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, and Black-and-White.

 Tips

•	You can also set block dimensions by typing values in the Block width and Block height boxes.

•	Enable the Square Blocks button to set identical values in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes.

•	For best results, use mid-range block sizes.

 Related Topics


Applying the Kid's Play effect to a bitmap

The Kid's Play effect transforms an image into fun shapes such as lite pegs and building blocks. You can also use primary art methods such as finger paint and paint by numbers.

To apply the Kid's Play effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Creative, Kid's Play.

3.	From the Game list box, choose one of the following fun shapes:

•	Lite Pegs [image] creates a pattern using lite pegs

•	Building Blocks [image] creates a pattern using building blocks

•	Finger Paint [image] creates a pattern using finger paint

•	Paint By Numbers [image] creates a pattern using the paint by number method

4.	Move the Size slider to set the intensity of the effect.

5.	Move the Complete slider to set the percentage of the image to affect.

6.	Move the Brightness slider to set the amount of light in the effect.

7.	Click the Rotation dial to set the angle of the effect.

 Note

•	The Kid's Play effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also set intensity, percentage, brightness, and rotation values by typing them in the Size, Complete, Brightness, and Rotation boxes.

 Related Topics


Applying the Mosaic effect to a bitmap

The Mosaic effect divides an image into colored segments.

To apply the Mosaic effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Creative, Mosaic.

3.	Move the Size slider to set the size of the colored pieces.

4.	In the Background Color color picker, choose a background color from the choice of colors.

5.	Enable the Vignette check box if you want to create a frame around the mosaic.

 Note

•	The Mosaic effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also choose a background color using the Eyedropper tool. and choosing a color from the image.

 Related Topics


Applying the Particles effect to a bitmap

The Particles effect adds bubble and star particles to an image. You can create a fine dust or use bigger fragments.

To apply the Particles effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Creative, Particles.

3.	Enable one of the following Style buttons:

•	Stars [image] adds T-shaped stars to the image

•	Bubbles [image] adds bubbles to the image

4.	Move any of the following sliders:

•	Size [image] sets the size of the particles

•	Density [image] sets the density of the particles

•	Coloration [image] sets the amount of color in the particles

•	Transparency [image] sets the degree to which you can see through the particles

5.	Click the Angle dial to set the direction of the light.

 Note

•	The Particles effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also specify size, density, color, transparency, and angle by typing values in the Size, Density, Coloration, Transparency, and Angle boxes.

 Related Topics


Applying the Scatter effect to a bitmap

The Scatter effect distorts images by scattering pixels.

To apply the Scatter effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Creative, Scatter.

3.	Move the Horizontal slider to scatter pixels from left to right.

4.	Move the Vertical slider to scatter pixels from top to bottom.

 Note

•	The Scatter effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	Maintain equal horizontal and vertical values by enabling the Symmetric check box.

 Related Topics


Applying the Smoked Glass effect to a bitmap

The Smoked Glass effect places a colored tint over an image like a sheet of colored glass.

To apply the Smoked Glass effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Creative, Smoked Glass.

3.	Move the Tint slider to set the opacity of the effect.

4.	Move the Blurring slider to set the level of blur.

5.	Click the color picker, and choose a color for the tint.

 Note

•	The Smoked Glass effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also choose a color for the tint by clicking the Eyedropper tool, and choosing a color from the Drawing Window.

 Related Topics


Applying the Stained Glass effect to a bitmap

The Stained Glass effect is similar to the Crystallize effect; however, this effect lets you create edges between the glass pieces and control the thickness and color of these edges.

To apply the Stained Glass effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Creative, Stained Glass.

3.	Move the Size slider to set the size of the stained glass fragments.

4.	Move the Light Intensity slider to set the amount of light in the effect.

5.	Click the Solder Color color picker, and choose a color for the edges.

6.	Type a value in the Solder Width box to set the width of the edges.

7.	If you want to create three-dimensional lighting, enable the 3D Lighting check box.

 Note

•	The Stained Glass effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tips

•	You can also choose a color for the border by clicking the Eyedropper tool, and choosing a color from the Drawing Window.

 Related Topics


Applying the Vignette effect

The Vignette effect creates a frame around a bitmap. A frame can have a soft or hard edge, can be one of four shapes, and can be any color. Use a frame to create nostalgic effects or to give an old photo an elliptical frame.

To apply the Vignette effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Creative, Vignette.

3.	In the Color section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Black [image] applies a black frame around the bitmap

•	White [image] applies a white frame around the bitmap

•	Other [image] applies a frame around the bitmap using the color you specify using the color picker

4.	In the Shape section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Ellipse [image] applies an ellipse shape to the bitmap

•	Circle [image] applies a circle frame to the bitmap

•	Rectangle [image] applies a rectangular frame to the bitmap

•	Square [image] applies a square frame to the bitmap

5.	Move the Offset slider to set the size of the center of the frame.

6.	Move the Fade slider to set the transition between the frame and the bitmap.

Higher values result in a greater fading along the edges of the frame; lower values result in no fading.

 Note

•	The Vignette effect supports all color modes except Paletted and Black-and White.

 Tip

•	You can also specify offset and fade by typing values in the Offset and Fade boxes.

 Related Topics


Applying the Vortex effect to a bitmap

The Vortex effect creates a swirling whirlpool around a center point that you specify.

To apply the Vortex effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Creative, Vortex.

3.	Enable the Set Center button.

4.	Click on the bitmap to set a center point around which the vortex originates.

5.	From the Style list box, choose one of the following:

•	Brushed [image] uses a regular brushstroke to create the vortex

•	Layered [image] uses a layered brushstroke to create the vortex

•	Thick [image] uses a wide brushstroke to create the vortex

•	Thin [image] uses a slender brushstroke to create the vortex

6.	Move the Inner Direction dial to set the direction of the central pixels.

7.	Move the Outer Direction dial to set the direction of the peripheral pixels.

8.	Move the Size slider to set the stroke width.

 Note

•	The Vortex effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also set the size or direction of the pixels by typing values in the Size, Inner Direction, and Outer Direction boxes.

 Related Topics


Applying the Weather effect to a bitmap

The Weather effect applies atmospheric conditions such as snow, rain, fog, or wind to an image.

To apply the Weather effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Creative, Weather.

3.	In the Forecast section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Snow [image] creates a snow effect

•	Rain [image] creates a rain effect

•	Fog [image] creates a fog effect

4.	Move the Size slider to set the size of the effect.

5.	Move the Strength slider to set the intensity of the effect.

6.	Set the direction of the effect by moving the Direction Dial.

7.	If you want to randomly alter the pixel placement, click the Randomize button.

 Note

•	The Weather effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also specify size, intensity, direction, and randomness by typing values in the Size, Strength, Direction, and Randomize boxes.

 Related Topics


Applying Distort effects


Overview: Applying Distort effects
Applying Distort effects

CorelDRAW provides ten Distort effects that transform the appearance of an image without adding depth. The Distort effects are:

•	Blocks [image] breaks an image into puzzle-like pieces or blocks that resemble a jigsaw puzzle

•	Displace [image] alters an image using a displacement map

•	Offset [image] shifts an image according to specific values

•	Pixelate [image] adds a block-like appearance to an image

•	Ripple [image] warps an image by adding a wave

•	Swirl [image] rotates an image in a swirling pattern

•	Tile [image] reduces the dimensions of an image and reproduces it as a series of tiles on a grid

•	Wet Paint [image] gives an image a freshly painted look

•	Whirlpool [image] applies a fluid, swirling pattern across an image

•	Wind [image] blurs an image in a specific direction, creating the effect of wind blowing across an image

 Related Topics


Applying the Blocks effect to a bitmap

The Blocks effect breaks an image into block or puzzle-like pieces.

To apply the Blocks effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Distort, Blocks.

3.	In the Undefined Areas section, choose one of the following from the list box:

•	Original Image [image] fills the empty area with the original image

•	Inverse Image [image] fills the empty area with a negative of the original image. For example, blues change to yellow etc.

•	Black [image] fills the empty area with black

•	White [image] fills the empty area with white

•	Other [image] fills the empty area with the color you choose from the color picker

4.	Adjust the following sliders to set the dimensions of the puzzle pieces:

•	Block Width [image] specifies the width of each puzzle piece

•	Block Height [image] specifies the height of each puzzle piece

•	Max. Offset (%) slider [image] sets the distance between pieces

 Notes

•	The Blocks effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, and Black-and-White.

•	If an image contains objects that are not merged with the background, you must enable the Lock Object Transparency button in the Objects Docker Window before you can access the Fill Empty Area With options in the Blocks dialog box.

 Tips

•	You can also specify the dimensions of the blocks by typing values in the Block Width and Block Height boxes.

•	Enable the Lock button button to set identical values in the Block Width and Block Height boxes.

•	You can also fill the empty area with a color you choose from the image using the Eyedropper tool.

 Related Topics


Applying the Displace effect to a bitmap

The Displace effect evaluates the color value of pixels in two images and then shifts the active image according to the values of the displacement map. A displacement map is an image that maps the way pixels in the original image change when you apply the Displace effect. Values from the displacement map appear as forms, colors, and warp patterns in an image.

To apply the Displace effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Distort, Displace.

3.	Click the Load button.

4.	Choose a bitmap image to use as a displacement map and click Open.

5.	In the Scale Mode section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Tile [image] repeats the displacement image to cover the image area

•	Stretch To Fit [image] uses a single map stretched over the entire image area

6.	In the Undefined Areas list box, choose one of the following:

•	Repeat Edges [image] stretches the edges of the image to fill in exposed areas

•	Wrap Around [image] fills the exposed areas with the opposite side of the image

7.	Move the following sliders to set the amount of displacement:

•	Horizontal [image] shifts images horizontally, from left to right

•	Vertical [image] shifts images vertically, from top to bottom

 Notes

•	The Displace effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can only choose the Repeat Edges and Wrap Around options in the Undefined Areas section if you merge all objects with the image background.

•	You can also set the horizontal and vertical values by typing values in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes.

 Related Topics


Applying the Offset effect to a bitmap

The Offset effect shifts an entire bitmap according to values you specify. When the bitmap shifts, an empty area results. You can fill the empty area or another part of the bitmap with another color.

To apply the Offset effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Distort, Offset.

3.	Move the Horizontal and Vertical sliders to control the amount of bitmap shifting along the horizontal and vertical planes.

Enable the Shift value as % of dimensions check box to set the sliders.

4.	In the Undefined Areas section, select one of the following options:

•	Wrap Around [image] wraps another part of the bitmap around the edges of the window when shifted, creating a tiling effect. This option lets you check the edges of a bitmap you want to tile for use as a custom texture, wallpaper for a Web page, or your Windows desktop.

•	Repeat Edges [image] fills the space left by the shifted bitmap with the color currently appearing along the edge of the bitmap. Produces a stretched effect.

•	Color [image] fills the exposed areas with the color you choose from the color picker.

 Note

•	The Offset effect supports all color modes except Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also set the horizontal and vertical values by typing values in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes.

•	You can also fill the exposed areas with a color you choose from the image using the Eyedropper tool.

 Related Topics


Applying the Pixelate effect to a bitmap

The Pixelate effect divides a bitmap into square, rectangular, or circular cells. You can use the Square or Rectangular options to create a blocky, exaggerated digital appearance, or the Circular option to create a spider web effect.

To apply the Pixelate effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Distort, Pixelate.

3.	In the Pixelate Mode section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Square [image] maintains equal Height and Width settings for the blocks

•	Rectangular [image] lets you set Height and Width settings for the blocks individually

•	Radial [image] builds pixels from a center point in a radial pattern. Click the Set Center button to specify a center point.

4.	Move the Width and Height sliders to set the width and height of the pixel blocks.

The effects of pixel-block size depend on the size of the bitmap. A value of 10 in a small bitmap produces large pixel blocks. A value of 10 in a large bitmap produces small pixel blocks.

5.	Move the Opacity slider to set the transparency of the pixels.

Higher values result in a blocky appearance; lower values result in a more transparent appearance.

 Note

•	The Pixelate effect supports all color modes except Paletted and Black-and-White.

 Related Topics


Applying the Ripple effect to a bitmap

The Ripple effect distorts an image by adding a wave. The strength of the first wave sets the warping of the image, while adding an additional perpendicular wave increases the distortion.

To apply the Ripple effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Distort, Ripple.

3.	In the Primary Wave section, move the following sliders:

•	Period [image] sets the span of the wave

•	Amplitude [image] sets the height of the wave

4.	If you want to create a perpendicular wave, enable the Perpendicular Wave check box.

5.	Move the Perpendicular Wave Amplitude slider to set the intensity of the perpendicular wave.

6.	If you want to create waves with jagged edges, enable the Distort Ripple check box.

7.	Click the Angle Dial to set the angle of the wave.

 Note

•	The Ripple effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also specify the span, height, intensity, and angle by typing values in the Period, Amplitude, Perpendicular Wave Amplitude, and Angle boxes.

 Related Topics


Applying the Swirl effect to a bitmap

The Swirl effect distorts a bitmap according to the direction and angle you select.

To apply the Swirl effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Distort, Swirl.

3.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Clockwise [image] sets the direction of the rotation clockwise

•	Counter-Clockwise [image] sets the direction of the rotation counter-clockwise

4.	Click the Set Center button.

5.	Position the cursor over the bitmap, and click to set the center point around which the image swirls.

6.	Move the Whole Rotations slider to set the number of rotations that the swirl completes.

Lower values result in a swirling effect; higher values result in a concentric, whirlpool effect

7.	Move the Additional Degrees slider to set additional degrees of rotation more precisely. For example, a value of 90 rotates the bitmap an additional quarter turn.

 Note

•	The Swirl effect supports all color modes except Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also set the number of rotations and degrees by typing values in the Whole Rotations and Additional Degrees boxes.

 Related Topics


Applying the Tile effect to a bitmap

The Tile effect reproduces an image as a series of tiles and is especially useful for previewing tiled backgrounds for Web pages.

To apply the Tile effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Distort, Tile.

3.	Move the Horizontal Tiles slider to set the number of tile columns.

4.	Move the Vertical Tiles slider to set the number of tile rows.

 Note

•	The Tile effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, and Black-and-White.

 Tips

•	Enable the Lock button to set equal values in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes.

•	You can also set the number of rows and columns by typing values in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes.

 Related Topics


Applying the Wet Paint effect to a bitmap

The Wet Paint effect creates the illusion that a bitmap is a painting that is still wet. You can create illusions ranging from subtle changes in the luminescence of colors to wet paint dripping down the image.

Try applying successive combinations of positive and negative wetness values to the same bitmap to produce some interesting effects.

To apply the Wet Paint effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Distort, Wet Paint.

3.	Move the Percent slider to set the size of the drips.

Higher values result in larger, longer drips; lower values result in more subtle drips.

4.	Move the Wetness slider to determine which colors drip.

Negative values cause the darker colors to drip; positive values cause the light colors to drip. The value you select also determines the range of light and dark pixels that drip. If you choose a lower value (e.g., -5 or 5) fewer colors drip, but if you use a higher value, more colors drip, making the effect more pronounced.

 Note

•	The Wet Paint effect supports all color modes except Paletted and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also specify the drip size and wetness by typing values in the Percent and Wetness boxes.

 Related Topics


Applying the Whirlpool effect to a bitmap

The Whirlpool effect applies a fluid, swirling pattern across an image. You can use a preset whirlpool style or you can create custom styles by setting the smear length, spacing, twist, and streak detail of the whirlpool effect. You can save custom whirlpool styles for future use.

To apply the Whirlpool effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Distort, Whirlpool.

3.	Move the Spacing slider to set the distance between the swirls.

4.	Move the Smear Length slider to set the length of fluid streamlines.

5.	Move the Twist slider to set the whirl method.

Higher values make the fluid flow around the swirls like whirlpools; low values make the fluid flow out of the whirls like fountains.

6.	Move the Streak Detail slider to set the level of smearing.

7.	Do one of the following:

•	Enable the Warp check box [image] distorts the shape of the image

•	Disable the Warp check box [image] retains the original shape of elements in the image

To save a customized whirlpool style

1.	Create or customize a whirlpool effect using the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Add button.

3.	Type a filename.

To use a preset whirlpool style

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To apply the Whirlpool effect" procedure.

2.	Choose a preset style from the Style list box.

To remove a customized or preset whirlpool style

1.	Select the whirlpool effect from the Styles list box.

2.	Click the Remove button.

 Notes

•	The Whirlpool effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

•	The Whirlpool effect is memory-intensive and can take some time to apply.

 Tip

•	You can also type values in the Spacing, Smear Length, Twist, and Streak Detail boxes to control the effect.

 Related Topics


Applying the Wind effect to a bitmap

The Wind effect creates the effect of wind blowing across an image.

To apply the Wind effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Distort, Wind.

3.	Move the Strength slider to set the intensity of the wind.

4.	Move the Opacity slider to set the transparency of the effect.

Higher values produce visible distortion and blurring; lower values produce a more subtle effect

5.	Click the Angle dial to set the direction of the wind.

 Note

•	The Wind effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also set the effect by typing values in the Direction, Strength, and Opacity boxes.

 Related Topics


Applying Noise effects


Overview: Applying Noise effects
Applying Noise effects

CorelDRAW provides eight noise effects that create, control, and eliminate noise. Noise refers to the graininess of a bitmap, when random pixels on the surface of a bitmap resemble static on a television screen. The Noise effects are:

•	Add Noise [image] creates a granular effect that adds texture to a flat or overly blended bitmap

•	Diffuse [image] distributes an image's pixels to fill in blank spaces and remove noise

•	Dust and Scratch [image] reduces image noise by averaging pixel values

•	Maximum [image] removes noise by adjusting a pixel's color value based on the maximum color values of its neighboring pixels

•	Median [image] removes noise and detail by averaging the color values of the pixels in an image

•	Minimum [image] removes noise by adjusting a pixel's color value based on the minimum color values of its neighboring pixels

•	Remove Moiré [image] removes undesired wave patterns that occur when halftone screens of two different frequencies are superimposed in the same image

•	Remove Noise [image] softens a bitmap and reduces the speckled effect caused by scanning or capturing images from video

 Related Topics


Applying the Add Noise effect to a bitmap

The Add Noise effect creates a granular effect that adds texture to a flat or overly blended bitmap.

To apply the Add Noise effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Noise, Add Noise.

3.	In the Noise Type section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Gaussian [image] prioritizes colors along a Gaussian curve. Most colors added by the effect closely resemble the original colors. Use this option to increase light and dark pixels and produce a more pronounced effect.

•	Spike [image] uses colors that are distributed around a narrow curve (spike). Use this option to produce a thinner, lighter-colored grain.

•	Uniform [image] results in an overall granular appearance. Use this option to apply noise randomly.

4.	Move the Level slider to set the intensity of the noise.

Higher values (set by moving the slider to the right) increase the intensity of the effect.

5.	Move the Density slider to set the amount of noise pixels per inch.

Higher values (set by moving the slider to the right) increase the intensity of the effect.

6.	Enable one of the following Color Mode buttons:

•	Intensity [image] adds a significant amount of noise

•	Random [image] creates noise using random-colored pixels

•	Single [image] creates noise using the color you choose from the color picker

7.	To add a randomly colored noise texture, enable the Color Noise check box.

 Note

•	The Add Noise effect supports all color modes except Paletted and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also adjust the intensity and the amount of noise pixels per inch by typing values in the Level and Density boxes.

•	You can also choose a color for the noise, click the Eyedropper tool, and choose a color from the image.

 Related Topics


Applying the Diffuse effect to a bitmap

The Diffuse effect removes noise by spreading out the pixels in an image to fill in blank spaces.

To apply the Diffuse effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Noise, Diffuse.

3.	Move the Level slider to set the intensity of the effect.

 Note

•	The Diffuse effect supports all color modes except Paletted and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also set the intensity of the effect by typing a value in the Level box.

 Related Topics


Applying the Dust and Scratch effect to a bitmap

The Dust And Scratch effect reduces the amount of noise in an image. You can use this effect to eliminate dust and scratch faults.

To apply the Dust and Scratch effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Noise, Dust and Scratch.

3.	Move the Threshold slider to reduce image noise.

4.	Move the Radius slider to set the range of pixels used to produce the effect.

 Tip

•	You can also set the threshold and radius by typing values in the Threshold and Radius boxes.

 Related Topics


Applying the Maximum effect to a bitmap

The Maximum effect removes noise by adjusting the color value of a pixel based on the maximum color values of its neighboring pixels. This effect causes a mild blurring effect if applied in large percentages or if applied more than once to a bitmap.

To apply the Maximum effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Noise, Maximum.

3.	Move the Percentage slider to set the intensity of the effect.

4.	Move the Radius slider to specify the number of pixels that are successively selected and evaluated when you apply the effect.

 Note

•	The Maximum effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also set the intensity and scope of the effect by typing values in the Percentage and Radius boxes.

 Related Topics


Applying the Median effect to a bitmap

The Median effect removes noise and detail by averaging the color values of the pixels in an image.

To apply the Median effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Noise, Median.

3.	Move the Radius slider to determine the number of pixels that are successively selected and evaluated when you apply the effect.

 Note

•	The Median effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also specify the number of pixels to evaluate by typing a value in the Radius box.

 Related Topics


Applying the Minimum effect to a bitmap

The Minimum effect removes noise by darkening the pixels in an image. If you apply this effect at a high intensity, you can lose important image detail.

To apply the Minimum effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Noise, Minimum.

3.	Move the Percentage slider to set the intensity of the effect.

4.	Move the Radius slider to determine the number of pixels that are successively selected and evaluated when you apply the effect.

 Note

•	The Minimum effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also set the percentage and radius by typing values in the Percentage and Radius boxes.

 Related Topics


Applying the Remove Moiré effect to a bitmap

The Remove Moiré effect removes patterned noise that can occur in a scanned halftone image.

To apply the Remove Moiré effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Noise, Remove Moiré.

3.	Move the Amount slider to determine the amount of noise to remove.

4.	In the Quality section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Better [image] applies a high-quality effect but at a slightly slower speed

•	Faster [image] applies a lower quality result but at a slightly faster speed

5.	Type a value for the output dots per inch(dpi) in the Output box.

 Notes

•	The Remove Moiré effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

•	For best results, scan the original image using a resolution of 300 dpi and set the output resolution to 200 dpi in the Remove Moiré dialog box. The output dpi should be approximately two-thirds of the original dpi.

 Tip

•	You can also set the amount of noise and output by typing values in the Amount and Output boxes.

 Related Topics


Applying the Remove Noise effect to a bitmap

The Remove Noise effect softens the bitmap's appearance and reduces the speckled effect that can occur during the scanning or video capturing process. The Remove Noise effect compares each pixel to surrounding pixels and calculates an average. This effect removes each pixel with a brightness value that exceeds the average, based on the threshold you set.

To apply the Remove Noise effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Noise, Remove Noise.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Enable the Auto check box [image] automatically calculates the noise reduction level required to improve bitmap quality

•	Disable the Auto check box [image] sets the threshold manually. Move the Threshold slider to determine the level (the pixel value) at which to remove noise. Higher values cause less noise removal; lower values cause greater noise removal.

 Note

•	The Remove Noise effect supports all color modes except Paletted and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also set the threshold by typing a value in the Threshold box.

 Related Topics


Applying Sharpen effects


Overview: Applying Sharpen effects
Applying Sharpen effects

CorelDRAW provides five effects that sharpen the pixels of an image to focus and enhance edges. The Sharpen effects are:

•	Adaptive Unsharp [image] accentuates edge detail by analyzing the values of neighboring pixels

•	Directional Sharpen [image] analyzes pixels near an edge to determine the direction in which to apply the greatest amount of sharpening

•	High Pass [image] removes low-frequency areas and shading

•	Sharpen [image] accentuates the edges in the image by increasing the contrast between their adjacent pixels

•	Unsharp Mask [image] accentuates edge detail and sharpens some smooth areas in an image

 Related Topics


Applying the Adaptive Unsharp effect to a bitmap

The Adaptive Unsharp effect accentuates edge detail by analyzing the values of neighboring pixels. This effect preserves most image detail but its effect is apparent in high-resolution images.

To apply the Adaptive Unsharp effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Sharpen, Adaptive Unsharp.

3.	Move the Percentage slider to specify the degree of sharpening.

 Note

•	The Adaptive Unsharp effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also set the degree of sharpening by typing a value in the Percentage box.

 Related Topics


Applying the Directional Sharpen effect to a bitmap

The Directional Sharpen effect analyzes pixels near an edge to determine the direction in which to apply the greatest amount of sharpening. This effect enhances the edges of an image without creating a grainy effect.

To apply the Directional Sharpen effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Sharpen, Directional Sharpen.

3.	Move the Percentage slider to determine the degree of sharpening.

 Note

•	The Directional Sharpen effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also set the degree of sharpening by typing a value in the Percentage box.

 Related Topics


Applying the High Pass effect to a bitmap

The High Pass effect removes image detail by emphasizing the highlights and luminous areas of an image.

To apply the High Pass effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Sharpen, High Pass.

3.	Move the Percentage slider to set the intensity of the effect.

Higher values remove most of the image detail, leaving only the edge details clearly visible; lower values emphasize highlights only.

4.	Move the Radius slider to specify how far colors bleed outward from the edges.

 Note

•	The High Pass effect supports all color modes except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit Grayscale, Paletted, and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also set the intensity and bleed distance by typing values in the Percentage and Radius boxes.

 Related Topics


Applying the Sharpen effect to a bitmap

The Sharpen effect accentuates the edges of a bitmap by finding the edges and increasing the contrast between adjacent or background pixels.

To apply the Sharpen effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Sharpen, Sharpen.

3.	Move the Edge Level(%) slider to set the intensity for the tracing form edges in the bitmap.

4.	Move the Threshold slider to determine how much of the bitmap remains after edge detection.

5.	If you want to apply the effect to a pixel's intensity value, enable the Preserve Colors check box.

 Note

•	The Sharpen effect supports all color modes except Paletted and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also specify the intensity of edges and amount of bitmap to retain by typing values in the Edge Level and Threshold boxes.

 Related Topics


Applying the Unsharp Mask effect to a bitmap

The Unsharp Mask effect accentuates edge detail and focuses blurred areas in an image.

To apply the Unsharp Mask effect

1.	Select the bitmap with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Bitmaps, Sharpen, Unsharp Mask.

3.	Move the Percentage slider to determine the degree of edge accentuation and the degree of sharpening applied to smooth areas in a bitmap.

4.	Move the Radius slider to control the number of pixels that are successively selected and evaluated.

5.	Move the Threshold slider to determine how much of the bitmap remains after edge detection.

 Note

•	The Unsharp Mask effect supports all color modes except Paletted and Black-and-White.

 Tip

•	You can also specify the degree of sharpening, the number of pixels to evaluate, and the amount of the bitmap remaining by typing values in the Percentage, Radius, and Threshold boxes.

 Related Topics


Using plug-in filters


Overview: Using plug-in filters
Using plug-in filters

CorelDRAW supports effects and enhancement filters created by other companies. These filters are called plug-ins because they "plug in" to the application platform. You can access these plug-ins from CorelDRAW. When you install them, they appear at the bottom of the Bitmaps menu.

For more information about the plug-in filters included with CorelDRAW, see the appropriate Help file included with each filter. You can view a Help file by clicking the Help button in the dialog box that appears when you access a plug-in filter.

 Related Topics


Adding plug-in filters

You can add plug-in filters created by other companies.

To add a plug-in filter

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Workspace, Plug-Ins.

3.	Click the Add button.

4.	Type in the drive and folder that contains the filters.

 Note

•	The Options dialog box does not show the files in the folder. You must know the folder before you use the Options dialog box.

 Tip

•	You can also select a folder by clicking the Browse button.

 Related Topics


Enabling and disabling plug-in filters

You can enable or disable plug-in filters that have been added to the list of plug-in filters.

To enable a plug-in filter

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Workspace, Plug-Ins.

3.	Enable the check box to the left of the plug-in in the list.

To disable a plug-in filter

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Workspace, Plug-Ins.

3.	Disable the check box to the left of the plug-in in the list.

 Related Topics


Removing plug-in filters

You can remove plug-in filters from CorelDRAW.

To remove a plug-in filter

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Workspace, Plug-Ins.

3.	Choose the directory that contains the plug-in you want to remove.

4.	Click the Remove button.

 Note

•	The dialog box does not show the files in the directory. You must know the directory before you use the Options dialog box.

 Related Topics


Printing


Overview: Printing
Printing

Corel provides extensive printing options designed for both desktop and commercial printing. You can size, position, order, and orient the pages of a print job. You can also preview a print job to see how it will appear on output. Many printing features are not required to print simple documents on a desktop printing device. For basic printing instructions, see "Setting up a print job."

If you are using a PostScript printing device and are having trouble printing, see "Using PostScript to optimize a print job." You can also resolve certain problems by adjusting settings, as explained in "Fine-tuning a print job." Unless you are having trouble printing, you should not adjust these settings.

If you plan to print a document on a commercial printing press, see "Commercial printing."

 More Detailed Information


Setting up a print job


Overview: Setting up a print job
Setting up a print job

You must select and properly configure the appropriate printing device driver before you print. Consult the printing device manufacturer instructions, the Windows documentation, or the service bureau or printing shop that will be printing the work to find out the best way to set up the printing device driver.

When setting up a printing device, it is important that you know the size of paper on which you are printing. If the print job is larger than the paper on which you are printing, you can "tile" the work so that it is spread across several pieces of paper or media. You can then assemble the separate pages to create a single sheet.

You can control which parts of a document to print. You can print specific pages, objects, or layers. You can also choose to print more than one open document at a time.

Collating is useful when you are printing multipage documents. You can specify the number of copies you want to print and whether you want them collated. If you enable the Collate check box, a complete copy of each document is printed before the next copy is printed. If collating is disabled, all copies of the first page are printed before copies of the second page are printed, and so on.

Before printing a document, you can use Preflight to help reduce errors. Preflight analyses a print job before printing, and generates a report that states the things to be aware of before printing and proposes a solution.

 Related Topics


Printing a document

When your printing device is properly configured, you can often print a document without changing any of the default settings.

To print a document

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Print button.

 Related Topics


Selecting and configuring a printing device

Printing device installation is controlled by Windows. Every type of printing device has different properties. For information about installing and setting up a printing device, refer to the printing device manufacturer documentation and the Windows documentation.

If you try to print with an orientation different from that specified in the device properties, a message prompts you to adjust the printing device paper orientation. Disable this warning to adjust paper orientation automatically.

To select a printing device

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Choose a printing device from the Name list box:

•	If the device driver you require is not listed, install it following the usual Windows procedure.

•	If you are proofing or printing a job in-house, choose the device driver for the local printing device.

•	If you are sending a file to a service bureau, choose the device driver that is specified by the service bureau.

To set the printing device properties

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Properties button.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Set only the Paper Size, Orientation, Tray, and Resolution when printing to a PostScript device. Leave all other options at their default settings and set them from the Print dialog box instead.

•	Set all relevant options when printing to a non-PostScript device.

To disable the Page Orientation Prompt

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories double-click Global, and click Printing.

3.	Choose Page Orientation Prompt from the Option list.

4.	From the Setting list, choose one of the following:

•	Off [image] Always Match Orientation

•	Off [image] Don't Change Orientation

 Related Topics


Selecting a PPD file

For improved compatibility with third-party prepress software, you can choose a PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file. A PPD file describes the capabilities and features of your PostScript printer. PPD files are available from your printer manufacturer.

To select a PPD file

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Enable the Use PPD check box.

4.	Choose the drive where the file is stored from the Look In list box.

5.	Double-click the folder in which the file is stored.

6.	Double-click the file name.

 Note

•	If you choose to use a PPD file, Corel generates all of the PostScript. If you choose not to use a PPD file, Windows generates some of the PostScript; however, this may cause problems on output.

 Related Topics


Using a printing device color profile

A printing device color profile helps to ensure accurate color reproduction. This feature can be enabled or disabled when you print.

To enable the current printing device color profile

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Misc tab.

3.	Enable the Use Color Profile check box.

To choose a printing device color profile

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Set Profiles button.

3.	Choose a color profile from one of the following list boxes:

•	Composite Printer [image] if you are not printing color separations

•	Separations Printer [image] if you are printing color separations

 Related Topics


Printing multiple copies

You can print multiple copies of the same document. If you are printing a document with many pages, you may want to collate the copies.

Collating allows you to print one full set of the selected pages before printing the second full set.

To print multiple copies

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Type the number of copies in the Number Of Copies box.

4.	Enable the Collate check box to collate the copies.

 Related Topics


Specifying the pages to print

You can set up a print job so that either all or only some pages print.

To print all pages

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Enable the Current Document button.

To print only the current page

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Enable the Current Page button.

To print specific pages

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Enable the Pages button.

4.	From the Pages list box choose one of the following:

•	Even And Odd

•	Odd Pages

•	Even Pages

5.	In the Pages box, type the pages to print.

•	A dash (-) between numbers defines a range of sequential pages (for example, 1-5 prints pages 1 to 5).

•	A comma (,) between numbers defines a series of nonsequential pages (for example, 1, 5 prints pages 1 and 5 only).

•	Any combination of dashes and commas is supported (for example, 1-3, 5, 7, 10-12 prints pages: 1 to 3, 5, 7, and 10 to 12).

 Related Topics


Specifying the documents to print

When more than one document is open, you can choose which document to print, or print more than one open document at a time. When you select more than one open document, the selected documents are printed together as a single print job.

To specify the documents to print

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Enable the Documents button in the Print Range box.

4.	Enable the check boxes for the documents that you want to print.

 Related Topics


Specifying the objects or layers to print

You can set up a print job so that every object, or only the selected objects in a drawing print. You can also prevent layers in a drawing from printing to exclude them from the final work. For example, the guidelines layer does not print by default, but you can print the guidelines by changing the appropriate setting.

To print only selected objects

1.	Select the objects.

2.	Click File, Print.

3.	Enable the Selection button.

To print only vectors, bitmaps, or text

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Misc tab.

3.	In the Proofing Options section enable one or a combination of the following check boxes:

•	Print Vectors

•	Print Bitmaps

•	Print Text

To print only selected layers

1.	Click Tools, Object Manager.

2.	Enable the Printable option (the picture of a printer) for each layer you want to print.

3.	If you do not want to print a layer, disable the Printable option.

 Note

•	If you want to print text only in black instead of in color, enable the Print All Text In Black check box.

 Related Topics


Printing large print jobs as tiles

If the print job is larger than your printer paper, you can choose to print it as tiles. Portions of each page of the print job are printed on separate sheets of paper or media that you can assemble into one large sheet or media.

To print large print jobs as tiles

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Layout tab.

3.	Enable the Print Tiled Pages check box.

4.	Type a value or a percentage of the page size in the Tile Overlap boxes to specify by how much you want the tiles to overlap.

To print large print jobs as tiles from the Print Preview window

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click Settings, Layout.

3.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from the previous procedure.

 Related Topics


Using printing styles

A print style is a set of saved printing options. Each print style is a separate file. This lets you move a print style from one machine to another, back up a print style, and keep document specific styles in the same folder as the document file.

To select a print style

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	From the Print Style list box, choose one of the following:

•	CorelDRAW Version 9

•	Corel PHOTO-PAINT 9 Defaults

•	Browse

To create a print style

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	In the Print dialog box, set the printing options.

4.	Click the General tab.

5.	Click the Save As button.

6.	Choose the drive where you want to save the file in the Save In list box.

7.	Double-click the folder in which you want to save the file.

8.	Type a name for the style in the File Name box.

 Note

•	When you save a print style, a dialog box opens that includes a section called Settings To Include. The settings in this section correspond to the printing options you have already selected. You can specify which settings to include in a print style in this dialog box.

To edit a print style

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Choose a print style from the Print Style list box.

4.	Follow steps 3 to 8 from the previous procedure.

To delete a print style

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Choose a print style from the Print Style list box.

3.	Click File, Delete Print Style.

 Note

•	If you close the Print dialog box before you print, all of the changes you have made to the print options are discarded. If you do not want to lose these changes and you need to close the dialog box (that is, you need to change the work before you print), save the settings as a print style, or click the Apply button before you click the Cancel button.

 Tip

•	You can also select, edit, save, and delete print styles from the Print Preview window.

 Related Topics


Using Preflight

Preflight analyzes the current print job and produces a summary of print errors and possible print problems. Preflight is especially helpful when you are sending files to a service bureau. Using Preflight, the service bureau can find potential problems before generating output.

The Issues tab in the Print dialog box opens up the Preflight page. The Issues tab heading changes depending on the number of issues in a print job. For example, if you have three issues the tab reads 3 Issues. If you have no issues, the tab heading reads No Issues. The icon on the tab heading also changes depending on the severity of the issue(s) identified. The icons represent:

•	no-severity

•	low-severity

•	medium-severity

•	high-severity

Every issue that Preflight detects includes a summary of the issue and a suggestion on how to resolve the issue. By default, Preflight checks for all printing issues. Disable the check boxes of the issues you do not want Preflight to check.

To view a Preflight report

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Issues tab.

 Note

•	If you have a large or complex file, Preflight will take time to analyze the file.

To disable specific issues

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	From the list, choose an issue to disable.

3.	Enable the Don't Check For This Issue In The Future check box.

4.	Click the Apply button.

To enable Preflight issues

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To view a Preflight report" procedure.

2.	Click the Preflight Settings button.

3.	Enable the check boxes for issues you want Preflight to check.

 Tip

•	You can also change Preflight settings from the Options dialog box by clicking Tools, Options, and clicking Global, Printing, Preflight Warnings in the list of categories.

 Related Topics


Using imposition layouts


Overview: Using imposition layouts
Using imposition layouts

Imposition layouts let you print more than one page of a document on each sheet of paper. This is useful when you are creating documents such as magazines, books, and other multipage documents for printing on a commercial printing press. You can use the built-in imposition capabilities instead of using third-party imposition software.

You can also use imposition layouts for other documents that involve cutting or folding, such as mailing labels, business cards, pamphlets, or greeting cards. Imposition layouts can also be used to print multiple thumbnails of a document on one page.

You can choose a preset imposition layout or create your own imposition layout. The preset imposition layouts include:

Full Page

Places one document page on the front of each sheet. Full Page is the default layout.

Double Sided Full Page

Places one document page on the front of the sheet, and the next document page on the back of the sheet.

Booklet

Places two document pages on each side of the sheet. Each sheet is folded in the center, with folded sheets placed inside one another. The sheets are ordered for saddle stitch binding.

Book

Places two document pages on each side of a sheet. The pages are ordered for perfect binding, where each sheet is cut down the center and the cut pages are stacked on top of one another.

A x D (N-UP)

Places pages in sequential order on a grid of "A" pages across by "D" pages down. The layout is scaled to fit on the printed sheet if necessary.

Tri-Fold Card

Places multiple pages together to form a panel of a three-panel accordion folded card.

Tent Card

Creates a card that is printed on both sides and folded horizontally to stand upright.

Top-Fold Card

Creates a card that is printed on one side and folded horizontally to stand upright.

Side-Fold Card

Creates a card that is printed on one side and folded to open like a book.

 Related Topics


Choosing imposition layouts

The default imposition layout reflects the layout of the document you are printing. The layout you choose does not affect the original document, only the way it is printed. For example, if you have a four-page document set up as a full page in a Full Page layout, but would like to print it as a top-fold, or side-fold card, you can choose the appropriate card style and size in the Print dialog box.

When you use an imposition layout, if the total width, height, gutters and margins are larger than the space available on the page size, the document pages will normally be scaled down to fit. If you do not want document pages to be scaled down you can change the page size in printer properties, or you can choose to maintain document page size, in the Print Preview window. This causes the layout to be cropped at the edge of the signature, instead of scaling down the document pages. Preflight can also notify you if the document pages are being scaled to fit the layout. For more information on Preflight and Preflight settings see, "Using Preflight."

To choose an imposition layout

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Layout tab.

3.	Choose an imposition layout from the Imposition Layout list box.

To maintain document page size

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click the Imposition Layout tool.

3.	On the Property Bar, click the Maintain Document Page Size button.

 Related Topics


Creating, editing, and deleting imposition layouts

You can create, edit, and delete custom imposition layouts in the Print Preview window. When creating an imposition layout it is useful to have a "folding dummy." A folding dummy is a sheet of paper that you have folded and labeled where your document pages should appear. If you send a print job to a service bureau or commercial printer, they may provide a folding dummy for your print job. If you create, edit, or delete a custom imposition layout, keep in mind the following terminology:

•	A Document Page is sometimes called a "page." This is one page in a document file, what the reader views as a single file.

•	A Signature is one sheet as printed by the press or output device, that contains several pages from a document. A signature may be cut, folded, and possibly bound, to form a final document.

To create an imposition layout

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click the Imposition Layout tool.

3.	In the Pages Across/Down boxes, type the number of pages to include on each printed page.

4.	Click each numbered box in the Print Preview window, and choose the following:

•	The page number [image] determines which page of the document is printed in that position.

•	The angle [image] determines whether the page is printed top up (0 degrees) or top down (180 degrees).

5.	If you are printing on both sides of the paper, enable the Double Sided Layout button.

6.	Click the Imposition Layout tabs at the bottom of the Print Preview window to view each side of a double-side layout.

7.	Type a name for the imposition layout in the Save As box.

 Note

•	When you enable the Double Sided Layout option and you are printing on a nonduplex printing device, a wizard automatically provides instructions on how to insert the paper into the printing device.

To edit an imposition layout

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	On the Property Bar, choose an imposition layout from the Imposition Layout list box.

3.	Make changes to the layout.

4.	On the Property Bar, click the Plus button (+).

5.	Type a name in the Save As box.

To delete an imposition layout

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	On the Property Bar, choose an imposition layout from the Imposition Layout list box.

3.	Click the Delete Imposition Layout button (-).

 Related Topics


Using binding methods

When creating a custom imposition layout, you must choose a binding style in the Print Preview window. You can choose from three preset binding methods or you can customize a binding method. When you choose a preset binding method all but the first signature are automatically arranged. When you choose to customize a binding method you can layout each signature. The following three preset binding methods are:

•	Perfect Binding [image] is a method of binding books, where individual pages are cut apart and glued at the spine. For example, a telephone book is typically bound using this method.

You can also use Perfect Binding if you want your pages printed in sequence, such as when printing thumbnails. An example of this, is if you are printing four document pages per signature, the first signature contains pages 1 to 4, the second signature contains pages 5 to 8, and so on.

•	Saddle Binding [image] is a method where sheets are folded and inserted into one another. An example of a saddle stitched document is a glossy magazine that is stapled at the spine.

•	Collate Cut Binding [image] is a method where all signatures forming a copy of the document are collated and stacked together. The pages are cut to form a number of stacks, which are in turn stacked on top of one another. For example, for a 32 page document printed with four pages per signature, the first signature contains pages 1, 8, 16, and 24. The second signature contains pages 2, 9, 17, 25, and so on.

To choose a preset binding method

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click the Imposition Layout tool.

3.	On the Property Bar, click one of the following buttons:

•	Perfect Binding

•	Saddle Binding

•	Collate Cut Binding

 Related Topics


Using the custom binding method

When you use the custom binding method, you can individually arrange the pages that are printed on each signature. To use the custom binding method, you must begin by setting the number of signatures that are used to print the document. You can then set the number of pages for each signature, and specify which document page should print at each position.

To use the custom binding method

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click the Imposition Layout tool.

3.	On the Property Bar, choose Custom Binding.

4.	On the Property Bar, type a number in the Number Of Signatures box.

To select a signature

1.	Follow all the steps from the previous procedure.

2.	On the bottom of the Print Preview window, click a Signature tab.

 Related Topics


Setting the page group rate

When you use saddle binding, you can group pages into one or more separate saddle pieces. Normally, all the pages are printed as part of one saddle-stitched unit. However, some books are created by binding a number of pieces that are each arranged as an independent saddle-stitched section. If you are creating such a document, you can specify the number of pages that should be grouped to form each saddle-stitched piece.

To set the page group rate

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click the Imposition Layout tool.

3.	On the Property Bar, click the Saddle Binding button.

4.	On the Property Bar, type a number in the Pages Per Group box.

 Related Topics


Arranging the pages on a signature

You can arrange pages on a signature automatically using two options. Sequential Auto-ordering arranges the pages left to right, top to bottom, in reading order. Cloned Auto-ordering places the same page at each location on a signature. This is useful for creating business cards, where the same card is printed at each location on a signature. When you arrange the pages automatically on a signature, you can choose the angle of the image. You can also arrange the pages by clicking on a page, and typing a page number. The angle determines whether the page is printed top up (0 degrees) or top down (180 degrees).

To arrange the page using Sequential Auto-Ordering

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click the Imposition Layout tool.

3.	In the Pages Across/Down boxes, type the number of pages to include on each printed page.

4.	Click on a page in the Print Preview window.

5.	On the Property Bar, click the Sequential Auto-Ordering button.

6.	Type a page number in the Page Sequence Number box.

7.	Choose an angle from the Page Rotation list box.

To arrange the page using Cloned Auto-Ordering

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click on a sheet in the Print Preview window.

3.	On the Property Bar, click the Cloned Auto-Ordering button.

4.	Type a page number in the Page Sequence Number box.

5.	Choose an angle from the Page Rotation list box.

To manually arrange the page order

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To arrange the page using Sequential Auto Ordering" procedure.

2.	Type a page number.

3.	Choose an angle from the Page Rotation list box.

 Related Topics


Changing gutter size

If you have more than one page across or down, you can adjust the size of the gutters between pages. You can choose the automatic gutter spacing option, which sizes gutters so that the document pages fill the entire available space in the layout. You can have all horizontal and all vertical gutters the same width, or you can adjust the width of each gutter.

To choose automatic gutter spacing

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click the Imposition Layout tool.

3.	In the Pages Across/Down boxes, type the number of pages to include on each printed page.

4.	Click the space between any two pages (horizontally and vertically.)

5.	On the Property Bar, click the Auto Gutter Spacing button.

To apply equal horizontal and vertical gutter sizes

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	On the Property Bar, click the Equal Gutters button.

3.	On the Property Bar, type a value in the Gutter Size box.

To change individual gutter sizes

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To choose automatic gutter spacing" procedure.

2.	On the Property Bar, disable both of the following:

•	Auto Gutter Spacing

•	Equal Gutters

3.	On the Property Bar, type a value in the Gutter Size box.

 Related Topics


Setting cut and fold marks

When you click the space between two pages (horizontally and vertically), you can mark the location where cut and fold marks are placed. If you send a job to a commercial printer, these marks guide where a document is trimmed and folded.

To set cut and fold marks

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click the Imposition Layout tool.

3.	In the Pages Across/Down boxes, type the number of pages to include on each printed page.

4.	In the Print Preview window, choose a gutter by clicking on the space between two pages (horizontally and vertically.)

5.	On the Property Bar, click one or both of the following:

•	Cut location [image] positions where the document is cut.

•	Fold location [image] positions where document is folded.

 Note

•	To set cut and fold marks in the Print Preview window, you must enable the Crop/Fold Marks check box in the Prepress tab of the Print dialog box.

 Related Topics


Adjusting margin sizes

When printing on a desktop printer, you may need to adjust the margins to accommodate the nonprintable area of the printer. If the margin size is smaller than the nonprintable area, the edges of some pages or some printer's marks may be clipped by your printer. You can compare the location of the margins to the nonprintable area of your printer by clicking "Non-Printable Area" from the View menu in Print Preview.

When preparing a job for commercial press, the service bureau may request minimum margin sizes, such as for page grippers, and printers' marks.

To adjust margin size

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click the Imposition Layout tool.

3.	In the Pages Across/Down boxes, type the number of pages to include on each printed page.

4.	In the Print Preview window, click a margin.

5.	On the Property Bar, type values in the Top/Left margin boxes.

 Related Topics


Previewing, sizing, and positioning a print job


Overview: Previewing, sizing, and positioning a print job
Previewing, sizing, and positioning a print job

The Print Preview window lets you view your work as it will appear when printed. It shows you the position and size of the print job on the paper. You can also view printing devices marks such as crop or fold marks and color calibration bars.

If you are using a Full Page or Manual imposition layout, you can change the position and size of the print job on the printed page. If you are printing bitmaps, use caution when sizing print jobs. Enlarging bitmaps may cause the output to appear jagged or pixelated.

You can also view a Mini Preview from the Print dialog box. The Mini Preview window lets you see how a document appears before it is printed, but does not let you change settings.

 Related Topics


Previewing a print job

Print Preview lets you view what the work will look like when printed. You can choose to preview a print job by choosing Print Preview from the File menu. You can move from page to page, and magnify the page being previewed. You can also view how the color separations will appear when printed.

To preview a print job

•	Click File, Print Preview.

To move from page to page in the Print Preview window

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Below the Print Preview window, do one of the following:

•	Click the button pointing left [image] the button flips back through the pages

•	Click the button pointing right [image] the button flips forward through the pages

 Note

•	The arrow buttons are accessible only when print options are set for more than one page, not when print options are set to print the current page only.

 Tip

•	The Go To dialog box also lets you move from page to page. To open the Go To dialog box, click View, Go To.

To print the page being previewed

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click File, Print This Sheet Now.

To magnify the page being previewed

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click View, Zoom.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Enable one of the preset zoom level buttons.

•	Enable the Percent button and type a value in the Percent box.

 Tip

•	You can also zoom in on a portion of the Print Preview by using the Zoom tool.

To preview individual color separations

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click View, Preview Separations, Separations.

3.	Click the appropriate tab at the bottom of the Print Preview window to view each color separation.

 Notes

•	You can view individual color separations only when you have enabled the Print Separations check box in the Print Options dialog box.

•	The Auto (Simulate Output) preview type in the View menu automatically sets the preview type to the settings that match the printing device driver. For example, if you are printing to a black-and-white printing device, the preview is grayscale.

•	The Auto (Simulate Output) preview type is enabled by default. If you change the preview settings, then Auto (Simulate Output) is disabled. You can revert to the automatic settings by enabling Auto (Simulate Output).

 Related Topics


Previewing a job from the Mini Preview window

You can preview a print job from the Mini Preview window accessed from the Print dialog box. However, the Mini Preview window does not let you change any settings from its window. The Mini Preview window is useful for quickly viewing a document before it is printed.

To preview a print job in the Mini Preview window

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Mini Preview button at the top right of the dialog box.

To move from page to page in the Mini Preview window

•	Click one of the following arrow buttons below the Mini Preview window:

•	Forward End button [image] takes you to the first page

•	Back End button [image] takes you to the last page

To preview a specific page in the Mini Preview window

•	Choose a page from the Page list box below the Mini Preview window.

 Related Topics


Customizing a print preview

You can increase the speed of a print preview by hiding the images. You can also specify a color or grayscale preview. Displaying individual color separations in grayscale instead of color can be helpful when you are studying color distribution. Yellow is particularly difficult to see against a white background. Even magenta and cyan, if used sparsely, are easier to see when displayed in grayscale.

To hide the print job

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click View, Show Image.

 Notes

•	If a check mark appears beside the Show Image command, the command is enabled.

•	When Show Image is disabled, the print job is represented by a bounding box that you can use to position and size the job.

To specify a color or grayscale Print Preview

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Click View, Preview Color, Color.

•	Click View, Preview Color, Grayscale.

 Related Topics


Sizing a print job

You can alter the size of each page of the print job, leaving the original unaffected. The height-to-width ratio of a print job is called its "aspect."

To size the print job

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click the Pick tool.

3.	Click the Print Preview window.

4.	On the Property Bar, type values in the following boxes:

•	Width [image] lets you set the width of a page in the Print Preview window

•	Height [image] lets you set the height of a page in the Print Preview window

 Tip

•	You can also size each page of a print job by dragging the handles in the Print Preview window.

To fit the print job to the page

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Layout tab.

3.	Enable the Fit To Page button.

 Related Topics


Positioning a print job

You can alter the position of each page on the printed page, leaving the original unaffected. If you select the Manual Imposition Layout, you can place several pages on a single sheet of paper. Each page can be sized and positioned.

To position a page on the printed page

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click the Pick tool.

3.	Click the Print Preview window.

4.	Type values in the following boxes on the Property Bar:

•	Top Corner Position [image] specifies the distance from the top of the printable area

•	Left Corner Position [image] specifies the distance from the left side of the printable area

 Tip

•	You can also position each page by dragging the "X" in the center of the image to the desired position.

To customize the position of a page on the printed page

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Mini Preview button at the top right of the Print dialog box.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Enable the Reposition Images To button.

5.	Choose Custom from the Reposition Images To list box.

6.	Click the flyout arrow below the Reposition Images To list box to choose the page to position.

7.	Position the page by typing values in the following boxes:

•	Position

•	Size

•	Scale Factor

•	# Of Tiles

 Note

•	The # Of Tiles box is activated only when you enable the Print Tiled Pages check box, otherwise, it is dimmed.

To automatically position a page on the printed page

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose a position from the Reposition Images To list box.

 Related Topics


Using PostScript to optimize a print job


Overview: Using PostScript to optimize a print job
Using PostScript to optimize a print job

PostScript is a page description language that sends printing instructions to a PostScript device. All the elements in a print job (for example, curves and text) are represented by lines of PostScript code that the printing device uses to produce the document.

PostScript is not the only method for sending printing instructions, and some printing devices are not compatible with PostScript. However, there are several functions that are unavailable when you do not use PostScript. For example, you cannot adjust halftone screens.

There are three levels of PostScript. PostScript 1, the first PostScript language, has certain limitations (these are described below). PostScript 2 greatly reduces potential printing errors. PostScript 3, the latest version of PostScript, is faster than previous versions which have been largely eliminated in PostScript 2 or PostScript 3.

Limitations of PostScript 1

Certain problems may arise when you use PostScript 1:

•	If a print job contains complex vector objects, a PostScript 1 printing device may not be able to print it. To create vector curves, a PostScript device prints a series of short straight lines called segments (any straight line between two nodes is considered a segment.) PostScript 1 devices cannot print vector graphics with more than 1500 segments. This limits the allowable number of nodes in any vector object to approximately 500.

•	If you use a complex fill (for example, a texture fill, or a PostScript fill) in an object, the allowable number of nodes is reduced to approximately 300.

•	If you fill a text object with a texture fill, a PostScript 1 device may not be able to print it.

•	If you use a texture fill in an object with any subpaths (for example, a donut made from a circle within a circle), a PostScript 1 device cannot print it.

There are several ways to work around these limitations:

•	Break up complex graphics into several less complex graphics. (This may not be possible if you are using complicated line attributes or complex fills.)

•	Avoid using complex fills on graphics that are not large enough to warrant intricate detail.

•	Avoid using complex fills with complex outlines, or using complex fills in text.

•	Limit the number of nodes per object.

•	Use the PostScript features designed to reduce complexity and warn you of potential printing problems.

 Related Topics


Using PostScript 2 or 3

PostScript 2 and 3 are more advanced PostScript languages than PostScript 1. Using a PostScript 2 or 3 printing device can reduce printing errors and let you use features that are unavailable when you use a PostScript 1 printing device. If you try to use PostScript 2 or 3 options and are not using a PostScript 2 or 3 device, the print job does not print properly. If you are not certain whether you are printing on a PostScript 2 or 3 device, do not enable these options.

PostScript 2 and 3 let you use JPEG compression to compress the bitmaps in a print job and make the file smaller. Also, PostScript 2 and 3 use a faster method to render vector graphics.

To use PostScript 2 or 3

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the PostScript tab.

3.	Choose Level 2 or PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box.

To compress bitmaps

1.	Follow all of the steps from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Use JPEG Compression check box.

3.	Move the Quality Factor slider to the right to increase compression and reduce the quality of the bitmaps.

 Note

•	You can only compress bitmaps in .PRN or .PS files.

 Tip

•	You can access the Print dialog box from the Print Preview window by clicking the Options button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Printing complex print jobs

Complex graphics can often cause a PostScript 1 print job to fail. To ensure that your print jobs print properly, you can test for complex vector graphics and reduce curve complexity by increasing flatness. Curve flatness determines how smooth a curve appears when printed. As the flatness increases, curves begin to appear as connected straight lines.

To test for complex vector graphics

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Issues tab.

3.	Click the Preflight Settings button.

4.	Enable one or a combination of the following check boxes:

•	Text With Texture Fills (PS Level 1 Only)

•	Bitmaps In Complex Clipping Paths (PS Level 1 Only)

•	Texture Fills In Complex Objects (PS Level 1 Only)

•	Complex Clipping Regions (PS Level 1 Only)

•	Objects With Outline Having Many Nodes (PS Level 1 Only)

•	Objects With Outline And Fill Having Many Nodes (PS Level 1 Only)

To reduce curve complexity by increasing flatness

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the PostScript tab.

3.	Type a value in the Set Flatness To box.

4.	Enable the Auto Increase Flatness check box. Use increments of two if you want the printing device to increase the flatness of an object that is too complex.

 Note

•	When the Auto Increase Flatness option is enabled, the maximum allowable flatness value is defined by the value in the Set Flatness To box, plus 10. If a curve is still too complex when the flatness value exceeds this limit, the printing device skips the problematic curve. If the printing device skips a curve, it does not appear in the final output. You are not informed while you print that this has happened. For this reason, it is important to inspect proofs before you publish the work.

 Tip

•	If you are having problems with complex objects, leave the value at 1.00 and enable the Auto Increase Flatness check box. If this does not achieve the required results, increase the flatness by two (3.0) and try again.

To reduce curve complexity by limiting control points

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the PostScript tab.

3.	Type a value in the Maximum Points Per Curve box.

 Note

•	Reducing the number of points per curve helps alleviate printing problems caused by curves that are too complex. A lower number of points per curve does not reduce quality, but does increase printing time.

 Tip

•	You can access the Print dialog box from the Print Preview window by clicking the Options button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Including PDF marks

PDF is a file format that preserves fonts, images, graphics, and formatting of an original application file. When creating a PDF file from a PostScript file, you can include PDF marks such as hyperlinks and bookmarks. Hyperlinks are links or URLs to other pages or the Internet. Bookmarks are links to other pages in the file represented by text.

You can also choose to display a full screen, the current page, or only the thumbnails on startup. For information about how to set hyperlinks and bookmarks, see "Publishing PDF documents."

To include hyperlinks

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the PostScript tab.

3.	Enable the Include Hyperlinks check box in the PDF Marks section.

To include bookmarks

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Include Bookmarks check box in the PDF Marks section.

To display PDF marks

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To include hyperlinks" procedure.

2.	 From the On Start, Display list box, choose one of the following:

•	Full Screen [image] displays a full screen of a page

•	Page Only [image] displays the current page

•	Thumbnails [image] displays the current page and all thumbnails in the document

 Related Topics


Font and spot color warnings

When a print job contains too many fonts, it may not print properly. When a print job contains too many spot colors, you are creating a large number of plates. This increases file size and ultimately the cost of the print job. You can set the PostScript options to warn you when a print job contains more than a set number of fonts or spot colors. You can change the number of fonts and spot colors that trigger the warnings by changing the Spot Color Separations Warning and the Fonts Warning Threshold settings.

To set the Spot Color Separations Warning option

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories double-click Global, and click Printing.

3.	Choose Spot Color Separations Warning from the Option list.

4.	From the Setting list, choose one of the following:

•	If Any Spot Colors Are Used

•	If More Than 1 Spot Color Used

•	If More Than 2 Spot Colors Used

•	If More Than 3 Spot Colors Used

To set the Fonts Warning Threshold option

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose Fonts Warning Threshold from the Option list.

3.	Choose a number between 1 and 50 from the Setting list.

 Tip

•	Spot color and font warnings can also be accessed from the Print Preview window. To do this, click Settings, Printing Preferences, and make the required changes in the Special Settings section.

 Related Topics


Optimizing fountain fills for printing

You can optimize the printing of fountain fills in two ways. First, you can test for and correct fountain fill banding. Banding is the appearance of stripes across a fountain fill and occurs when a fountain fill does not contain enough steps. Second, you can reduce the complexity of fountain fills to decrease printing time.

By enabling both the Auto Increase Fountain Steps and Optimize Fountain Fills options, you can increase the number of fountain steps that require more steps, and reduce the number of steps in fountain fills that are too complex.

These options are available only for PostScript devices.

To test fountain fills for banding

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Issues tab.

3.	Click the Preflight Settings button.

4.	Enable the Banded Fountain Fill check box.

To automatically increase fountain steps

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the PostScript tab.

3.	Enable the Auto Increase Fountain Steps check box.

To optimize fountain fills to reduce complexity

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To test fountain fills for banding" procedure.

2.	Enable the Optimize Fountain Fills check box.

 Notes

•	The Auto Increase option increases the number of steps used to render fountain fills. This may increase printing time, but ensures the best possible rendering of fountain fills.

•	Testing fountain fills for banding only applies to linear fountain fills.

 Related Topics


Downloading Type 1 fonts

By default, the printing device driver downloads Type 1 fonts to the printing device. When you disable the Download Type 1 Fonts option, fonts are printed as graphics (either curves or bitmaps). This may be useful when the file contains many fonts that would take an unacceptably long time to download, or would fail to download because of their file size.

To download Type 1 fonts

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the PostScript tab.

3.	Enable the Download Type 1 Fonts check box.

 Notes

•	The Download Type 1 Fonts option is available only for PostScript devices.

•	When you enable the Download Type 1 Fonts check box, by default the Convert True Type To Type 1 check box is also enabled. This ensures that True Type fonts are converted to Type 1 fonts so that they can be downloaded. Disable this option only if the output device has difficulty interpreting Type 1 fonts.

 Related Topics


Setting bitmap font options

Bitmap versions of TrueType fonts look better in small point sizes and print faster than regular fonts. Because bitmap fonts consume a lot of PostScript memory, you may need to limit the number of bitmap fonts in a print job to avoid a PostScript printing error.

A bitmap version of a font is created in a PostScript printing device's memory if the font meets the following criteria:

•	The printed character size is no larger than the bitmap font size threshold. The default is 75 pixels, which corresponds to 18 points at 300 dpi, 9 points at 600 dpi, and 4.5 points at 1200 dpi. You can change the bitmap font size threshold (see below.)

•	The text is not scaled or skewed.

•	The text does not have an outline or a fill other than a uniform fill.

•	The text does not have any applied nonlinear transformations.

•	The document is not being printed using the Sizing options or Fit To Page option in the Print dialog box.

To limit the number of bitmap fonts created

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing.

3.	Choose Bitmap Font Limit from the Option list.

4.	Type a value between 0 and 100 in the Setting list.

To set the bitmap font size threshold

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing.

3.	Choose Bitmap Font Size Threshold from the Option list.

4.	Choose a value between 0 and 1000 from the Setting list.

 Related Topics


Printing color bitmaps

You can output color bitmaps as CMYK, RGB, or grayscale. PostScript output typically uses the CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) color model to print bitmaps. If you are printing color bitmaps to an RGB (red, green, and blue) or CMY (cyan, magenta, and yellow) printing device, choose RGB from the Output Color Bitmaps As list box.

RGB devices receive RGB values instead of CMYK values. CMY printing devices convert RGB to CMY (three-color model to three-color model) more easily than CMYK to CMY (four-color model to three-color model).

To output color bitmaps as RGB

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Misc tab.

3.	Choose RGB from the Output Color Bitmaps As list box.

To output color bitmaps as CMYK

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose CMYK from the Output Color Bitmaps As list box.

To output color bitmaps as Grayscale

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To output color bitmaps as RGB" procedure.

2.	Choose Grayscale from the Output Color Bitmaps As list box.

 Note

•	The RGB option is available for PostScript devices only.

 Tip

•	You can access the Print dialog box from the Print Preview window by clicking the Options button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Fine-tuning a print job


Overview: Fine-tuning a print job
Fine-tuning a print job

Several problems can occur when you are printing fonts or bitmaps. The options described in this section can help to resolve the problem. If you are having trouble printing, try to determine what part of the print job is causing the problem. For example, the fonts may not be printing properly, or a bitmap may not print. Then look for a topic that relates to the type of problem.

The Driver Compatibility page in the Printing Preferences dialog box contains many of the options you can use to fine-tune a print job. This dialog box lets you set options and view device capabilities for each printing device driver.

 Related Topics


Setting the number of fountain steps in a print job

You can specify the number of steps in the fountain fills in a print job. A low number of steps prints faster, but the transition blend between shades may be rather coarse, causing banding. A higher value results in a smoother blend, but the printing time is longer.

To specify fountain steps in a print job

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Misc tab.

3.	Type a value in the Fountain Steps box.

 Notes

•	You can assign a custom fountain fill to an object in a Corel application. A custom fountain fill overrides the settings in the Print dialog box.

•	Fountain steps set in the Options dialog box affect only the way fountain fills display, not how they print.

 Related Topics


Printing bitmaps in small chunks

You can determine whether bitmaps are sent to non-PostScript printing devices all at once or in smaller blocks (below 64 K), called chunks. Usually, the driver tells the application which method it can or cannot handle. If you find that bitmaps do not print as expected, try forcing them to be printed in smaller chunks.

If you are already printing bitmaps as chunks, you can specify the degree to which each chunk overlaps adjacent chunks. This overlap reduces the grid pattern that can appear on some printing devices when bitmaps are printed as chunks.

To print bitmaps in chunks

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click Settings, Printing Preferences.

3.	In the list of categories, click General, Driver Compatibility.

4.	Choose a non-PostScript printing device driver from the Printer list box.

5.	Enable the Output Bitmaps In 64K Chunks check box in the Settings Specific To This Driver section.

To set bitmap chunk overlap pixels

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing.

3.	Choose Bitmap Chunk Overlap Pixels from the Option list.

4.	Choose a number of pixels by which each bitmap chunk overlaps the next from the Setting list.

 Note

•	The options in the Settings Specific To This Driver section are available only when you choose a non-PostScript printing device from the Printer list box. Otherwise, they are dimmed.

 Related Topics


Printing color print jobs in black or grayscale

When you print color work on a black-and-white printing device, you can specify whether you want solid colors converted to solid black or a shade of gray that approximates its hue.

To print color print jobs in black or grayscale

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Misc tab.

3.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	All Colors As Black

•	All Colors As Grayscale

 Related Topics


Outputting color bitmaps

Using color management helps ensure accurate color reproduction. The Print feature lets you choose to output color bitmaps as CMYK, RGB, or grayscale. You can only output bitmaps as CMYK when you have chosen a PostScript printer. If you are printing to a non-PostScript printer, you can only output color bitmaps as RGB or grayscale. Outputting color bitmaps as CMYK or RGB increases file size while outputting color bitmaps as grayscale decreases file size.

To output bitmaps as CMYK

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Choose a PostScript printer from the Name list box.

4.	Click the Misc tab.

5.	Choose CMYK from the Output Color Bitmaps As list box.

To output bitmaps as RGB

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Misc tab.

3.	Choose RGB from the Output Color Bitmaps As list box.

To output bitmaps as grayscale

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose Grayscale from the Output Color Bitmaps As list box.

 Related Topics


Downsampling bitmaps from the Print dialog box

You can reduce file size by downsampling bitmaps. Bitmaps are made up of pixels. When you downsample a bitmap, the number of pixels per line decreases. The decrease in pixels per line results in a decrease in file size. You can downsample color, grayscale, or monochrome bitmaps.

To downsample color bitmaps

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Misc tab.

3.	Enable the Color check box from the Bitmap Downsampling section.

4.	Type a number in the box to the right of the Color box.

To downsample grayscale bitmaps

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Grayscale check box from the Bitmap Downsampling section.

3.	Type a number in the box to the right of the Grayscale box.

To downsample monochrome bitmaps

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To downsample color bitmaps" procedure.

2.	Enable the Monochrome check box from the Bitmap Downsampling section.

3.	Type a number in the box to the right of the Monochrome box.

 Note

•	Downsampling color, grayscale or monochrome bitmaps are affected only when their resolution is higher than the resolution enabled in the Bitmap Downsampling section.

 Related Topics


Rasterizing pages

If you have a complex print job, you may want to rasterize each page. Rasterizing lets you convert each page to a bitmap. You can rasterize a page to improve print speed when proofing or to resolve printing problems with problematic non-PostScript printer drivers.

To rasterize a page

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Misc tab.

3.	Enable the Rasterize Entire Page check box.

4.	Type a number in the box to the right of the Rasterize Entire Page check box.

 Related Topics


Controlling printer bands

Some non-PostScript printing devices cannot hold a full page in memory and must print the page in multiple passes, or "bands." The default setting lets the printing device driver split the page into bands before sending it to the printing device. If this proves too slow, or you encounter problems, you can split a print job into bands before it is sent to the printer driver.

To split a print job into bands before it is sent to the printer driver

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click Settings, Printing Preferences.

3.	In the list of categories, click General, Driver Compatibility.

4.	Choose a non-PostScript printing device driver from the Printer list box.

5.	Enable the Send Bands To Driver check box.

 Notes

•	The options in the Settings Specific To This Driver section are available only when you have selected a non-PostScript printing device from the Printer list box. Otherwise, they are dimmed.

•	This Send Bands To Driver check box is available only in Windows 95 and Windows 98.

 Related Topics


Controlling fill clipping

Any fill other than a uniform fill requires clipping when an object is not rectangular, because these fills are sent to printing devices as bitmaps, and bitmaps are rectangular. Clipping removes portions of a fill that should not be visible. The default setting for clipping is controlled by the driver, because this usually means faster processing. If you encounter a problem printing nonuniform fills, switch control over clipping to the software.

This option applies to non-PostScript printing devices only.

To assign control over fill clipping

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click Settings, Printing Preferences.

3.	In the list of categories, click General, Driver Compatibility.

4.	Choose a non-PostScript printing device from the Printer list box.

5.	Enable the Use Software Clipping For Fills check box.

 Note

•	The options in the Settings Specific To This Driver section are available only when you have selected a non-PostScript printing device from the Printer list box. Otherwise, they are dimmed.

 Related Topics


Specifying the text output method for non-PostScript printing devices

When you print to a non-PostScript printing device, text is sent using the appropriate font whenever possible. However, it may sometimes be better to send text as graphics (not using the font) because text objects can be incorrectly printed over by graphics.

To print text as graphics

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click Settings, Printing Preferences.

3.	From the list select Driver Compatibility.

4.	Choose a non-PostScript printing device driver from the Printer list box.

5.	Enable the All Text As Graphics check box.

 Note

•	The options in the Settings Specific To This Driver box are available only when you select a non-PostScript printing device from the Printer list box.

 Related Topics


Using print merge


Overview: Using print merge
Using print merge

Print merge lets you print the same document many times using different text each time. For example, if you are printing invitations, you can personalize each invitation by merging in different names.

Print merge works by combining a specially formatted text file with a CorelDRAW file. The CorelDRAW file must contain text to replace with words from the text file during the print merge. Each time the CorelDRAW file is printed, words from the text file are substituted with the printed version.

 Related Topics


Preparing a drawing for print merge

To use a print merge in a drawing, you must insert the text to replace when you perform the print merge. Each character/word of text to replace must be a separate text object.

To prepare a drawing for print merge

1.	Create a drawing in CorelDRAW that contains at least one text object.

When performing a print merge, keep the following in mind:

•	Each text object to be replaced must be unique.

•	Text must be Artistic text, not Paragraph text.

•	Allow enough space for the substitute text. For instance, "Name" does not take up much room, but, when "San Francisco" is substituted, more space is required.

•	The substituted text takes on the same attributes (typeface, point size, spacing, etc.) and alignment (left, right, center) as the original text.

•	Any transformations applied to the original text (except Blend, Extrude, and Fit To Path) are applied to the substituted text.

•	The text in each text object in the drawing must be identical to the corresponding text in the .TXT file. This includes capital letters, spaces, line breaks, blank lines.

 Related Topics


Preparing a text file for print merge

To perform a print merge, you must create an ANSI text file (.TXT) that contains the information you want to merge with the drawing.

To prepare a text file for print merge

1.	Open a new text file.

2.	On the first line, indicate the number of pieces of text to replace. The example in step 4 indicates that there are three pieces of text in the drawing to replace with text from the text file.

3.	Starting on the second line, type the text exactly as it appears in each text object in the drawing. This includes capital letters, spaces, line breaks, blank lines, etc. The text must end with a character, blank spaces or lines after the text prevent the merge from working.

4.	Add back slashes (\) before and after each piece of text. The text can be entered on separate lines, as in the example below:

3

\Name\

\Date\

\Instructor\

Or, you can type text on the same line as in the following example:

3

\Name\\Date\\Instructor\

5.	Type the text to substitute for the text. Because back slashes serve as markers to indicate the beginning and end of text, you cannot use them in the text to be substituted. There must be an entry for each piece of text. The text file should look like this:

3

\Name\

\Date\

\Instructor\

\Jon von Wolf\

\18 August 1995\

\Mr. Donald Smith\

\Katie MacBear\

\18 August 1995\

\Ms. Maria Santana\

Or, if you are using the linear approach, like this:

3

\Name\\Date\\Instructor\

\Chris van Wolf\\18 August 1995\\Mr. Donald Smith\

\Kelly MacBear\\18 August 1995\\Ms. Maria Santana\

6.	Save the file as an ANSI text file (.TXT extension.)

 Related Topics


Merging a text file with a drawing

When you are preparing to merge, remember that CorelDRAW neither saves nor displays the results of the merge. It prints them directly, in sequence. Therefore, check both the text file and the drawing for mistakes before merging. Also, make sure there's enough space in the drawing to accommodate the text you plan to substitute. The print merge command is no longer available by default, but can be customized.

To add Print Merge to the File menu

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Menus.

3.	Double-click File & Layout, File.

4.	Choose Print Merge from the Commands List box.

5.	Choose File From the Main Menu list box.

6.	Click the Add button.

To merge a text file with a drawing

1.	Open the text file, verifying that it has been properly prepared, then close it. CorelDRAW needs to access the text file to do a print merge, but cannot do so while it is open.

2.	Open the CorelDRAW file. Verify that it has been properly prepared.

3.	Click File, Print Merge.

4.	Choose the text file.

 Related Topics


Commercial printing


Overview: Commercial printing
Commercial printing

If you use commercial printing for your print jobs, you most likely deal with a service bureau or a printing shop. These two businesses can be separate or affiliated. Some larger establishments may offer both services. The service bureau takes your file and converts it directly to film or to plates. The printing shop uses the film from a service bureau to make printing plates.

Film can be created using a camera or an imagesetter. Creating film with a camera usually requires camera-ready output that you have created on a PostScript laser printing device. Producing film in this way may save money, but do not try to produce complex color material using laser printed output because desktop printing devices are not precise enough.

An imagesetter creates film directly from a file. There are several different types of files that a service bureau may be able to use. For more information, see "Preparing a print job for a commercial press" and ask the service bureau about your options.

The service bureau should provide you with either overlay proofs, blueprints, or laminate proofs made from the film. The type of proof you require depends on the complexity of the print job. Once you are satisfied with the proofs, the film is imposed, the plates are burned, and the printing plates are mounted on the press.

If the service bureau and printing shop are separate, you must ensure that the service bureau provides the film in the form that the printing shop requires (for example, positive or negative film, emulsion up or down, etc.). Also, make sure that the printing shop has proofs of the final product and instructions about the print job (for example, number of copies, type and size of paper). These proofs and your instructions serve as a contract between you and the printing shop.

The press operators set up and adjust the press so that the printed output matches the contract proofs as closely as possible. When color quality and accuracy are crucial, you may be asked to be present at printing time to approve any color adjustments.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Preparing a print job for a commercial press


Overview: Preparing a print job for a commercial press
Preparing a print job for a commercial press

When you prepare a print job for commercial printing, you can send camera-ready paper output or the work on disk. If you are creating a file to send to an imagesetter or a platesetter, speak with the service bureau about the best file format and printing device settings to use.

If you are creating a file, the service bureau needs either a PostScript file or a native file from the application you are using. Always provide a final printout of the work to the service bureau, even if it is only a black-and-white representation. This helps them identify and assess any potential problems.

You can use the Prepare For Service Bureau wizard to guide you through the process of sending a file to the service bureau.

Print to file

You can exercise full control over prepress settings and save the print job in a .PRN or .PS file. This file is sent directly to an output device by the service bureau.

The service bureau can often verify or fix a .PRN or .PS file using a Raster Image Processor (RIP), or Adobe Distiller, depending on the software. Be sure to review and confirm all settings with them to avoid unnecessary delays in your printing job.

Include a sheet with all the prepress settings that you have specified. You can create this sheet automatically by enabling the Print Job Information Sheet check box in the Print dialog box or the service bureau may have an order form that outlines all the essential prepress settings.

Native file format

If you prefer not to prepare .PS files, service bureaus equipped with the application in which you created your work can take the original files (for example, CorelDRAW files) and apply the required prepress settings. Some service bureaus may actually prefer to handle the prepress settings themselves. Because it is important to include the fonts used in the original files, CorelDRAW uses TrueDoc, which allows you to include your fonts inside Corel applications before sending them to the service bureau.

Using a bleed to extend images to the edge of the page

Most printing presses cannot print images to the edge of the paper. If you plan for certain areas of the print job to extend to the edge of the page, you need to print on paper that is larger than the size you ultimately want. This larger paper can then be trimmed so that the image extends to the paper's edge. When you use this method it is wise to allow for a "bleed." A bleed is the amount that images extend past the edge of the final page size. By bleeding images, you allow for a margin of error during the printing and trimming processes.

Printers' marks

Printers' marks provide information about how the work should be printed. You can place printers' marks in a .PS file. The available printers' marks are crop marks, registration marks, color calibration bars, densitometer scales, page numbers, and file information. Printers' marks can be selected on the Prepress tab in the Print dialog box.

 Related Topics


Using the Prepare For Service Bureau wizard

The Prepare For Service Bureau wizard guides you through the process of preparing a file for output at a service bureau. The Wizard simplifies different processes such as creating PostScript and PDF files, gathering different pieces required for output of a document, and copying the original document, any embedded image files and fonts to a user-defined location, such as a removable Zip or Syquest cartridge.

The wizard is most effective when the service bureau provides you with a service bureau profile. The profile is created using a separate wizard called the Service Bureau Profiler. The service bureau can include all the information you need to set up the print job so that it prints properly. The profile is a file with the a .CSP extension. When you start the Prepare For Service Bureau wizard, you can choose from a profile provided by the service bureau or let CorelDRAW generate a profile by gathering all files associated with a document.

To gather all files associated with a document

1.	Click File, Prepare For Service Bureau.

2.	Enable the Gather All Files Associated With This Document button.

To choose a profile

1.	Click File, Prepare For Service Bureau.

2.	Enable the Choose A Profile Provided By Your Service Bureau button.

 Notes

•	To create a service bureau profile you need the Service Bureau Profiler utility. This utility can be downloaded from Corel's Web page located at http://www.corel.com.

•	The PDF file settings created by the service bureau are identical to the PDF For Prepress style settings. For information about the PDF For Prepress style settings, see "Choosing a PDF style."

 Related Topics


Printing to a file

Printing to a file is required when you want to send the .PRN or .PS file to a service bureau to be printed on an imagesetter. The Print To File feature lets you choose between sending a file to a Macintosh system, sending a single file, sending pages as separate files, or sending plates as separate files.

If you choose Pages To Separate Files, each page of a Corel document is printed as an individual file. If you choose Plates To Separate Files, each plate is printed as an individual file. Make sure you select the appropriate printing device driver when you print to file, and consider the following:

•	When you are preparing a file for printing on an imagesetter or a platesetter, the page size of the print job (that is, the size of the film or plate on which the document is imaged) must be larger than the page size of the document to allow for printers' marks.

•	If you are printing to a PostScript 2 or 3 printing device, you can make the print job smaller by using JPEG compression to compress bitmaps.

•	If your PostScript file is to be trapped or imposed by a service bureau, the .PS file must conform to the Document Structuring Convention (DSC). In this case, enable the Conform To DSC setting. If you are unsure about which settings to choose, consult the service bureau.

To print to a file

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Enable the Print To File check box.

4.	Click the flyout arrow to the right of the Print To File check box, and enable one of the following:

•	For Mac

•	Single File

•	Pages To Separate Files

•	Plates To Separate Files

 Note

•	PostScript files created using the Print To File option contain two Control-D (^D) characters that prevent the PostScript file from printing on any PostScript device controlled by Macintosh computers. Choose the For Mac option from the Print To File flyout arrow, to remove the ^D characters from the files.

To compress bitmaps in a .PRN or .PS file

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the PostScript tab.

3.	Choose Level 2 or PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box.

4.	Enable the Use JPEG Compression check box.

5.	Move the Quality Factor slider to the right to increase compression and reduce the quality of the bitmaps.

To conform to DSC

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Conform To DSC check box.

 Related Topics


Printing negative film

An imagesetter produces images on film that may need to be produced as negatives depending on which printing device you are using. Consult the service bureau or printing shop to determine whether you can produce images on film. You can set up the print job to produce negative images, but, if the equipment of the service bureau also produces negatives, the result is positive film. Do not choose negative film if you are printing to a desktop printing device.

To print a negative

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click the Invert button.

 Related Topics


Printing film with the emulsion down

Emulsion is the coating of light-sensitive material on film. Usually, print jobs printed on a laser printing device are printed with the emulsion up. Other types of reproduction may call for either emulsion up or down. Printing with the emulsion down produces a backward image.

To specify film with the emulsion down

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click the Mirror button.

 Related Topics


Setting a bleed limit

When you use a bleed to extend the print job to the edge of the page, you must set a bleed limit. A bleed limit determines how far an image can extend beyond the crop marks. Usually, a bleed limit of .125 to .25 inches is sufficient. Any object extending beyond that uses memory needlessly and may cause problems when you print multiple pages with bleeds on a single sheet of paper.

A bleed requires that the paper you are printing on is larger than the size of paper you ultimately want, and the print job must extend beyond the edge of the final paper size.

Consult the service bureau or printing shop to determine the appropriate bleed limit for the print job.

To set a bleed limit

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Layout tab.

3.	Enable the Bleed Limit check box.

4.	Type a bleed limit in the Bleed Limit box.

 Related Topics


Printing crop/fold marks and registration marks

Crop/fold marks are printed at the corners of the page and represent the size of the paper. Crop/fold marks can be used as guides for trimming the paper.

If you are printing multiple pages per sheet (for example, two rows by two columns) you can enable the Exterior Only option to print the crop/fold marks on the outside edge of the page. Enabling this feature ensures that all crop/fold marks are removed after the cropping process. If you disable this option, crop marks are placed around each row and column.

Registration marks print on each sheet of a color separation. Registration marks are required to line up the film for proofing the printing plates on a color press. For more information, see "Creating color separations." You can select from several different registration mark styles.

To see crop marks and registration marks, the paper you are printing on must be larger by 0.5 inches on all sides, than the page size of the document you are printing.

To print crop/fold marks

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Prepress tab.

3.	Enable the Crop/Fold Marks check box.

To print exterior crop/fold marks only

1.	Follow all the steps from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Exterior Only check box.

To print composite crop/fold marks

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing.

3.	Choose Composite Crop Marks from the Option list.

4.	Choose Output In CMYK from the Setting list.

To print registration marks

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Prepress tab.

3.	Enable the Print Registration Marks button.

4.	Choose a registration mark style from the Style list box.

 Related Topics


Printing color calibration bars and densitometer scales

Color calibration bars are color scales that print on each sheet of a color separation. Calibration bars are required to ensure accurate color reproduction (see "Creating color separations"). To see calibration bars, the page size of the print job must be larger than the page size of the work you are printing.

A densitometer scale is a series of gray boxes ranging from light to dark. These boxes are required to test the density of halftone images (for more information see "Working with bitmaps and halftone screens.") You can position the densitometer scale anywhere on the page. You can also customize the levels of gray that appear in each of the seven squares on the densitometer scale.

To print color calibration bars

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Prepress tab.

3.	Enable the Color Calibration Bar check box.

To print a densitometer scale

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Densitometer Scales check box.

3.	To customize the levels of gray in one of the densitometer scale squares, choose the appropriate number from the Densities list (the top of the list is the lightest box) and type a new density for that square.

To position a densitometer scale

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Prepress tab.

3.	Enable the Densitometer Scales check box.

4.	Click File, Print Preview.

5.	Drag the Densitometer Scale to its new position, in the Print Preview window.

 Note

•	It is best to position the densitometer scale outside the final printed area.

 Related Topics


Printing page numbers and file information

Page numbers are useful when collating material that does not include page numbers in the document or when the page numbers in the document do not correspond to the actual number of pages.

File information includes the work's color profile, the halftone settings, the name of the file, the date and time the work was created, and the plate number (useful when printing color separations.) When you enable the Print File Information check box, you can specify a job name (also called a slug line) included with the file information.

To see page numbers and file information, the paper on which you are printing must be larger than the page size of the document you are printing. However, you can print file information inside the document's page by enabling the Position Within Page option.

To print page numbers

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Prepress tab.

3.	Enable the Print Page Numbers check box.

To print file information

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Print File Information check box.

3.	Enable the Position Within Page check box to display file information on the document's page.

4.	Type a job name in the Job Name/Slug Line box.

 Related Topics


Positioning printers' marks

You can change the position of printers' marks by changing the position of the Marks Alignment Rectangle in the Print Preview window.

To change the position of printers' marks

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click the Marks Placement tool.

3.	On the Property Bar, type values in the Marks Alignment Rectangle boxes.

 Tip

•	You can also change the position of printers' marks by dragging the bounding box in the Print Preview window.

 Related Topics


Printing a job information sheet

Including a job information sheet that describes the print job helps the service bureau or print shop to deal more effectively with any problems.

To print a job information sheet with the print job

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Misc tab.

3.	Enable the Print Job Information Sheet check box.

4.	Click the Info Settings button.

5.	Specify any of the following:

•	the categories of information to include

•	the save or print job information

 Related Topics


Working with bitmaps and halftone screens


Overview: Working with bitmaps and halftone screens
Working with bitmaps and halftone screens

When the document you are sending to the service bureau or print shop contains bitmaps (for example, scanned images or photographs), you must set up halftone screens for the bitmaps.

Halftones

Commercial printing presses cannot produce true shading but can create the illusion of shading, by printing images made up of tiny dots. In conventional screening, the size of the dots determines the different levels of shading (that is, the bigger the dots, the darker the shade). In Stochastic screening, the frequency of the dots determines the different levels of shading (the more dots in an area, the darker the shade). A halftone screen is necessary to convert images with true shading to images made up of tiny dots.

Originally, a halftone screen was an opaque screen with thousands of tiny holes. An image with shading was photographed through this screen using special photographic paper or film. The resulting image consisted entirely of dots. This image was then used to create printing plates.

Now, however, you can create halftone images without using screens or cameras. To ensure that the bitmaps print correctly, you must set the halftone screen frequency and bitmap resolution correctly.

Halftone screen frequency

The halftone screen frequency determines the number of dots used to create the image. The screen frequency is measured in lines per inch (LPI). This measurement refers to the number of rows of dots per inch.

When you choose a screen frequency, remember that the higher the frequency, the sharper the image. However, there are limits to screen frequency; these are determined by the type of printing press on which you are printing and the type of paper you are using. In general, a screen frequency of 85 LPI works on newsprint, and a frequency of 133 LPI works on bond and glossy paper. If possible, consult the service bureau or printing shop to find out which screen frequency you should use.

Bitmap resolution

When you create a halftone image, the bitmap resolution, measured in dots per inch (DPI), should be no more than twice the halftone screen frequency. For example, if you use a 150 LPI screen, the bitmap should have a resolution of at least 300 DPI. A larger file size results in slower print jobs, with no improvement in bitmap quality.

 Related Topics


Setting the halftone screen frequency

If you are printing halftone images, the default settings should be used after selecting the proper printing device. There are cases when you may need to set the screen frequency properly. Consult the service bureau to determine the appropriate screen settings.

To set the screen frequency

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the PostScript tab.

3.	Choose a value (in lines per inch) from the Screen Frequency list box.

 Notes

•	When the screen frequency is set to Default, the image is printed using the default screen frequency of the output device.

•	The screen frequency setting is available only for PostScript devices.

•	Consult the service bureau for the optimum setting for the job.

 Related Topics


Overview: Using Open Prepress Interface
Using Open Prepress Interface

Corel offers Open Prepress Interface (OPI) support. OPI allows you to include high-resolution scanned images in the work without dramatically increasing the file size. To accomplish this, the service bureau scans the images on a high-end scanner. They keep the high-resolution version of the scans and give you low-resolution equivalents. You import the low-resolution images into the document, using them for position only (FPO). Working with FPO images keeps the document size smaller and speeds up screen redrawing time. When you send the print job back to the service bureau for final imaging to film, the high-resolution images are automatically substituted.

 Notes

•	If you do not import FPO images correctly, they are not replaced at print time.

•	You can only scale, crop, rotate, mirror, and clip FPO images. You cannot apply any other effects.

 Related Topics


Maintaining OPI and DCS links

Open Prepress Interface (OPI) lets you use low-resolution images as placeholders for the high-resolution images that appear in the final work. To use OPI links, you must enable the Link To High Resolution File For Output using the OPI check box when importing the .TIF (or .CT) files, unless you are using a .EPS file as a placeholder. These images become known as OPI images. When the service bureau receives the print file, the OPI server substitutes the high-resolution images for the low-resolution images. If there are no OPI images in the file, the Maintain OPI Links option is not available at print time.

When you import the bitmaps correctly, the Maintain OPI Links option is enabled automatically. To proof a file that contains OPI images on a device that does not have the high-resolution files (for example, the desktop printing device), disable the Maintain OPI Links option.

The service bureau may also send you a Desktop Color Separation (DCS) file to act as the low-resolution placeholder. If they do this, make sure you find out whether the service bureau wants you to let them resolve the DCS links. If they want to resolve the links themselves, then you must disable the Resolve DCS Links setting.

To maintain OPI links

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the PostScript tab.

3.	Enable the Maintain OPI Links check box.

To let the Service bureau resolve DCS links

1.	Follow all of the steps from the previous procedure.

2.	Disable the Resolve DCS Links check box.

 Notes

•	Maintain OPI links is available for PostScript devices only.

•	You can reduce your work time by using OPI and print management server solutions such as, Imation Color Central. The OPI solution releases your workstation instantly while the file is being processed by the server. Low-resolution samples can be automatically created from the high-resolution originals and can be placed in CorelDRAW. These files contain their own OPI comments which the Imation Color Central server recognizes when it receives the job, and then substitutes the low-resolution version of the file for the high-resolution version.

 Related Topics


Creating color separations


Overview: Creating color separations
Creating color separations

When you send color work to a service bureau or printing shop, either you or the service bureau must create color separations.

Color separations are necessary because a typical printing press applies only one color of ink at a time to a sheet of paper. A color separation is created by first isolating each color element in a print job. Each color element is then used to create a sheet of film or plate. Each sheet of film or plate is used to apply one color of ink to the sheet of paper.

Printing presses produce color using either process color or spot colors. The number of colors you plan to use is the main factor in deciding which method to use.

Process color

If the project requires full color (for example, it contains scans of color photographs), you must use process color. Process color is a method of producing virtually any color using only four ink colors: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (CMYK). The final colors are produced by mixing percentages of these four inks. Process color requires only four color separations.

Corel now supports Pantone Hexachrome, a new type of printing process that increases the range of printable colors. Pantone Hexachrome uses six different ink colors (cyan, magenta, yellow, black, orange, and green) to produce full color. To use Pantone Hexachrome color effectively, use the Pantone Hexachrome color palette. Pantone Hexachrome color is sometimes called high-fidelity color. Talk to the service bureau about whether you should use Pantone Hexachrome color.

Spot color

If the project makes use of only one, two, or three colors (including black) you should probably use spot colors, such as those offered by PANTONE. Spot colors use a different ink for each color, and each color requires its own color separation. If your budget is limited, consider the following:

•	obtaining a two-color look by printing on colored paper and using only one spot color

•	using tints (percentages) of spot colors to create shadows or highlights, thus giving the impression of a broader color range

Both process and spot color

Some projects require both process and spot colors. For example, a marketing brochure may require the use of a spot color to faithfully render the corporate color and the use of process color to reproduce scans of photographs. Each additional spot color requires extra film, plates, ink, and a five or six color printing press that add to the cost of printing.

A word about palettes

You can work on different elements of the document from different palettes and color models. Ultimately, however, all colors must be printed with process and spot color inks. Colors defined in the RGB or HSB models are translated automatically into CMYK (process color) when printing. As for spot colors, you can convert them to CMYK at printing time. For more information, see "Working with color."

 Note

•	Pay close attention to the number of colors used, especially when you are importing clipart. Make sure you only use the colors available in the method you have chosen (that is, process color or spot color).

 Related Topics


Printing color separations

When printing color separations to a file, you can create a .PRN file that includes all separations, one separation only, or any combination of separations, depending on the complexity of the print job.

Generally, you should be able to save all color separation information in one .PS file. However, if the print job contains special effects and several color separations (for example, CMYK and a number of spot colors), saving all color separation information in one .PS file may result in an unacceptably large file. In this case, create a .PS file for each separation. Include the separation name in the filename for easier file identification.

When printing color separations, you can produce a sheet of paper or film even when there is nothing on it (for example, there may be only yellow and black on a page but the cyan and magenta plates are printed anyway). Usually, you would leave this option disabled to avoid wasting costly film. However, there may be instances when you want to force plates that are blank to print.

To print color separations

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Separations tab.

3.	Enable the Print Separations check box.

To print color separations from the Print Preview window

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Enable the Enable Color Separations button.

To use Pantone Hexachrome process color

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To print color separations" procedure.

2.	Enable the Hexachrome Plates check box.

3.	If you are printing on a device that uses high solid ink density, then enable the High Solid Ink Density check box.

To select specific color separations

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To print color separations" procedure.

2.	Enable the check boxes for the color separations to be printed in the Color Separations list box at the bottom of the dialog box.

 Note

•	If you are printing on a device that uses high solid ink density, enable the High Solid Ink Density check box. However, this option works only when you are using the Hexachrome color palette. Consult the service bureau to determine whether you need to enable this option.

 Tip

•	To print separations in color, enable the Print Separations In Color check box.

 Related Topics


Converting spot colors to process colors

If a document contains spot colors but you want to use process color, you can convert the spot colors to process colors. If you do not convert the colors, each spot color is printed on a different color separation. Changing the spot colors to process colors when you print does not affect the document, only the way it is printed.

FOCOLTONE, TOYO, and DIC colors are now treated as spot colors by default. You can treat any of these color palettes as process colors if you prefer.

To convert spot colors to process colors

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Separations tab.

3.	Enable the Print Separations check box.

4.	Enable the Convert Spot Colors To CMYK check box.

To treat FOCOLTONE, TOYO, and DIC colors as process colors

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Global, Color Management, and click General.

3.	Disable any of the following check boxes:

•	Treat FOCOLTONE Colors As Spot Inks

•	Treat TOYO Colors As Spot Inks

•	Treat DIC Colors As Spot Inks

 Related Topics


Ensuring predictable color when printing

Accurate and consistent color rendition from device to device is essential when printing in color. All components of a computer system (scanner, monitor, and printing device) must exchange color information in a manner that ensures a predictable result.

For the colors on screen to approximate the colors on the printed page, enable the color correction options. For more information, see "Working with color."

To simulate the color output of a printing press on a composite printing device

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories double-click Global, Color Management, and click General.

3.	Enable the Composite Printer Simulates Color Output Of Separations Printer check box.

 Related Topics


Overview: Printing color halftones
Printing color halftones

If you are printing process color halftones, you must use a halftone screen for each different color separation. For more information, see "Working with bitmaps and halftone screens."

Screen angle

Because each halftone screen consists of a regular pattern of shapes, it creates a pattern on the printed image. When the separations are combined, the patterns created by each separate halftone screen interact. This interaction can create an undesirable effect, called a moiré pattern.

In most cases, moiré patterns can be avoided by using the default settings. However, Pantone colors and duotones, made up of spot colors and combined with other inks, may cause printing problems. Consult your service bureau for further consultation.

When you print color separations, the screen angles are set automatically. If you change these settings incorrectly, the print job may not print properly.

Screen technology

When setting up advanced separation settings, in most instances the default settings should be used. However, if you are using an Imagesetter, the screen technology should be set to match the type of imagesetter the service bureau uses. Consult the service bureau to determine the correct setting.

Halftone type

The halftone type refers to the type of dot used to create the halftone. Typically, a halftone screen consists of rows of evenly spaced round or diamond-shaped dots. However, it is possible to use halftone screens with dots that are shaped differently. In fact, halftone screens can even use straight lines instead of dots to create an image. You can experiment with different halftone types to create interesting effects.

 Related Topics


Customizing a halftone screen

Use default settings when setting halftone screens to print color separations. Otherwise, screens can be improperly set and result in undesirable moiré patterns and poor color reproduction. Consult the service bureau before changing any of these settings.

To customize a halftone screen

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Separations tab.

3.	Enable the Print Separations check box.

4.	Enable the Use Advanced Settings check box.

5.	Click the Advanced button.

6.	Change any of the following settings:

•	Screening Technology

•	Halftone Type (for example, Line or Diamond)

•	Printing Device or Imagesetter Resolution

•	Screen Frequency and Angle of any or all of the color separations

 Tip

•	You can set the screen frequency, screen angle, and overprint options for spot colors as well as process colors. For example, if you have a fountain fill made up of two spot colors, you can set one to print at 45 degrees and the other at 90 degrees.

 Related Topics


Color trapping


Overview: Color trapping
Color trapping

Color trapping is necessary to compensate for poor color registration that occurs when the printing plates used to print each color, called color separations, are not aligned perfectly. Poor registration causes unintentional white slivers to appear between adjoining colors. Trapping is accomplished by intentionally overlapping colors so that minor problems with alignment are not noticed.

The print job needs color trapping when two colors touch. Many service bureaus prefer to create color traps themselves by using specialized trapping programs. Consult the service bureau about trapping if you are unfamiliar with the process.

Color trapping is achieved by overprinting. Usually, portions of an object that are obscured by another object are not printed. However, if the top object is set to overprint, the obscured portions of any underlying objects print anyway, causing an overlap. This makes white gaps between different colors unlikely. Overprinting works best when the top color is much darker than the underlying color; otherwise, an undesirable third color may result (for example, red over yellow may result in an orange object).

Depending on the color trapping options you choose, overprinting may affect only an object's outline or fill. This means that if an object with a red outline is set to overprint only its outline, any portions of another object obscured by the first object's outline are printed. The overlap creates a color trap.

 Note

•	Although CorelDRAW is capable of basic trapping, specialized trapping applications such as Imation TrapWise can provide you with a more complete trapping solution.

 Related Topics


Color trapping by overprinting selected objects

You can set specific objects to overprint before you open the Print dialog box. You can overprint each object's fill, outline, or both.

The Overprint Fill option causes obscured portions of objects to print when they are under the overprinted object's fill. The Overprint Outline option causes obscured portions of objects to print when they are under the overprinted object's outline. When setting the outline thickness, keep in mind that the outline straddles the path that defines the object's shape. Therefore, an outline of 0.30 points creates a trap of 0.15 points.

You can also choose to preserve overprint settings in a document. If you have deliberately set overprints in a document, you can enable the Preserve Overprints check box to ensure that the service bureau or print shop does not alter overprint settings. You can also choose to preserve overprint settings if you do not want to trap objects in a document.

To trap by overprinting selected objects

1.	Using the Pick tool right-click the object that requires color trapping and click Overprint.

2.	Click one or both of the following options:

•	Overprint Fill

•	Overprint Outline

To preserve document overprints

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Separations tab.

3.	Enable the Print Separations check box.

4.	Enable the Preserve Document Overprints check box.

 Related Topics


Color trapping by overprinting selected color separations

You can overprint specific color separations. You can specify whether you want to overprint graphics, text, or both. When you set a light color to overprint, dark colors that are usually obscured by the lighter color are printed and show through. Therefore, it is best not to overprint a light color separation.

To trap by overprinting selected color separations

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Separations tab.

3.	Enable the Print Separations check box.

4.	Enable the Use Advanced Settings check box.

5.	Click the Advanced button.

6.	Choose the color separation to overprint from the Screen Technology list.

7.	Click the Overprint Graphics icon in the Overprint column to overprint graphics on the separation. The graphic appears darker when the separation is set to overprint.

8.	Click the Overprint Text icon in the Overprint column to overprint text on the separation.

 Related Topics


Color trapping automatically

There are two methods for color trapping automatically: always overprinting black and auto-spreading.

Always overprinting black creates a color trap by causing any object that contains 95% black or more to overprint any underlying objects. This option is useful for artwork containing a lot of black text, but it should be used with caution on artwork with a high graphics content. If the service bureau recommends a black threshold value other than 95%, adjust the threshold.

Auto-spreading creates color trapping by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as the object's fill and having it overprint underlying objects. Auto-spreading is created for all objects in the file that meet three conditions:

•	They do not already have an outline.

•	They are filled with a uniform fill.

•	They have not already been designated to overprint.

To trap by always overprinting black

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Separations tab.

3.	Enable the Print Separations check box.

4.	Enable the Always Overprint Black check box.

To set the Overprint Black threshold

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing.

3.	Choose Overprint Black Threshold from the Option list.

4.	Choose a number between 0 and 100 from the Setting list.

The number you choose represents the percentage of black above which black objects overprint.

To trap by auto-spreading

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To trap by always overprinting black" procedure.

2.	Enable the Auto-Spreading check box.

3.	Type a value in the Maximum box.

The amount of spread assigned to an object depends on the maximum trap value and the object's color. The lighter the color, the greater the percentage of the maximum trap value. The darker the color, the smaller the percentage of the maximum trap value.

4.	Enable the Fixed Width check box to fix the spread width.

The Maximum box changes to the Width box when you enable the Fixed Width check box. The value in this box determines the fixed width of the color spread.

5.	Type a value in the Text Above box.

This value represents the minimum size to which auto-spreading is applied. If you set this value too low, small text may be rendered illegible when auto-spreading is applied.

 Related Topics


Working with text


Overview: Working with text
Working with text

CorelDRAW lets you apply word-processing features to text. Using the Text tool, you can create Artistic text and Paragraph text. Artistic text is best when you're working with short lines of text because you can apply a large range of effects. For larger bodies of text that have greater formatting requirements, you should create Paragraph text.

After adding text to documents, you can change the text type (e.g., from Paragraph text to Artistic text) or convert Artistic text to curves. Before you start any task, you must select the text. You can enhance text by embedding graphics, and adding symbols and special characters. CorelDRAW lets you edit text in the Drawing Window and the Edit Text dialog box.

Some formatting features apply to both Artistic text and Paragraph text. For example, spacing text and applying bold formatting. Other formatting features apply only to Paragraph text. For example, adding columns and drop caps.

Managing Paragraph text frames can involve basic tasks, such as moving frames, or more involved tasks, such as linking frames to direct the flow of text.

You can create effects by fitting Artistic text to a path. You can also customize this effect. For example, you can change the distance between the text and path.

While working with text, you can use the writing tools to verify grammar and spelling, replace a word with a synonym, create a user word list for the writing tools to use, or generate a count of text elements.

You may need to open a document containing fonts that aren't installed on your system. You can substitute these missing fonts for fonts that are available on your system. You can accept the PANOSE suggestions or choose a font.

By changing the default text preferences that control how text and text features are displayed, you may find working with text more efficient.

 More Detailed Information


Adding, converting, and selecting text


Overview: Adding, converting, and selecting text
Adding, converting, and selecting text

In CorelDRAW, you create both Paragraph text and Artistic text with the Text tool. Clicking in the Drawing Window and typing, creates Artistic text. Adding a Paragraph text frame first and typing text in the frame, creates Paragraph text. You can think of Paragraph text frames as containers that hold text.

There are two types of Paragraph text frames: fixed-sized and automatically sized. When you add a frame of a fixed size, the size of the frame you draw doesn't change. If you type more text than the frame can hold, the frame size doesn't change, and the text is cut off. If you choose to add a frame that sizes automatically, the frame size adjusts vertically according to the amount of text you type.

After you create a text object you can convert the text type. For example, you can convert Artistic text to Paragraph text and vice versa.

When you're working with Artistic text, you can modify the shape of characters. Before you do this, you must convert the text to curves. By converting, you can transform characters to single line and curve objects. Then you can use the Shape tool to add, delete, or move the nodes comprising a character to alter its shape.

Before performing any operation to text, you need to select the text. The tool you use to select a character, line, or paragraph varies with the operation.

When you select a text object, eight selection handles and an X appears in the center of the object. By clicking the center X, you can transform, apply special effects, and make global formatting changes to whole text objects. For information about transforming text, see "Transforming objects." For information about what special effects you can apply to text, see "Creating special effects."

 Notes

•	You can add Asian characters when you're running one of the following versions of Windows 95, Windows 98, or Windows NT Workstation 4: Korean, Chinese simplified, Chinese traditional, or Japanese. When you're running CorelDRAW on the Arabic, Hebrew, or English BiDi enabled version of Windows 95, Windows 98, or Windows NT 4, you can add bidirectional text. For more information, see the Reference section of the online Help.

•	You can also add text using the Clipboard. When you use the Special Paste command, you can insert text as Paragraph text, as Artistic text, or as an OLE object, provided the originating application is OLE compliant and it is open. For information about importing, see "Importing, exporting, and OLE."

 Related Topics


Adding Paragraph text

You can add Paragraph text to a drawing by adding a frame. You can add a Paragraph text frame that maintains its size or one that adjusts vertically as you type.

To add Paragraph text in fixed-sized frames

1.	Click the Text tool.

2.	Click anywhere in the Drawing Window and drag away (in any direction) from this point to size the Paragraph text frame.

The frame is created when you release the mouse button. The text cursor appears at the top left corner of the frame if your default alignment is set to Left or None.

3.	Type in the Paragraph text frame.

 Note

•	You can automatically adjust the size of text to fill the frame. For more information, see "Fitting text to a Paragraph text frame."

To add Paragraph text in automatically-sized frames

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Text, and click Paragraph.

3.	Enable the Expand And Shrink Paragraph Text Frames To Fit Text check box.

4.	Click OK.

5.	 Follow all of the steps from the previous procedure.

 Related Topics


Adding Artistic text

You can add Artistic text to a drawing to add short lines of text to a document, especially if you plan to work with special effects.

To add Artistic text

1.	Click the Text tool.

2.	Click anywhere in the Drawing Window, and type.

 Related Topics


Converting Artistic text to Paragraph text and vice versa

You can convert from one text type to another.

To convert Paragraph text to Artistic text

1.	Select the Paragraph text frame with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Text, Convert To Artistic Text.

To convert Artistic text to Paragraph text

1.	Select the Artistic text with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Text, Convert To Paragraph Text.

 Notes

•	If you convert Paragraph text to Artistic text, you lose attributes that are specific to Paragraph text, such as columns, tabs, and drop caps.

•	You cannot convert Paragraph text to Artistic text when: the frame containing the Paragraph text is linked to another frame, the Paragraph text has special effects applied to it, or the Paragraph text overflows the frame that contains it.

•	If the Paragraph text overflows the frame, you can change the font size so that the text fits the frame exactly. For more information, see "Fitting text to a Paragraph text frame."

 Tip

•	You can also convert one text type to another using the Convert Text button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Converting Artistic text to curves

You can convert Artistic text to curves to manipulate individual nodes to change the shape of characters.

To convert Artistic text to curves

1.	Select the Artistic text with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Convert To Curves.

3.	Open the Shape Edit Flyout, and click the Shape tool.

4.	Shape the text.

 Notes

•	Converting text to curves ensures that the appearance of the fonts used in your drawing are not compromised when another user views your file.

•	After you convert Artistic text to curves, text commands are no longer available. The converted object will print as curves using your printer fonts.

•	For more information about using the Shape tool to shape, modify, and delete nodes, see "Drawing and shaping objects."

 Tip

•	You can also convert text to curves using the Convert To Curves button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Selecting Paragraph and Artistic text

You can select characters or paragraphs within a line of Artistic text or a Paragraph text frame. You can also select text with the Shape tool to manipulate characters individually.

To select specific characters

1.	Click the Text tool.

2.	Click at the beginning or end of a word or sentence in the Artistic text or Paragraph text frame.

3.	 Drag the cursor across the text you want to select.

To select a whole text object

1.	Click the Text tool.

2.	Click the text object.

 Note

•	When you're changing the font of the whole text object, you need to select the text with the Pick tool.

 Tips

•	Select multiple text objects by holding down SHIFT as you click with the Text tool.

•	You can also select whole text objects using the Pick tool.

To select single characters

1.	Open the Shape Edit flyout, and click the Shape tool.

2.	Select the text.

Character nodes appear next to each character.

3.	Click the node to the left of a character to select it.

 Tip

•	Select multiple nodes by holding down SHIFT as you click with the Shape tool.

 Related Topics


Adding graphics, symbols, and special characters


Overview: Adding graphics, symbols, and special characters
Adding graphics, symbols, and special characters

Enhance text by adding special characters and symbols, or embedding graphics.

You can add special characters and symbols to text as a text object or as a graphic object. When you add symbols and special characters to text, CorelDRAW treats them as text. When you add them as graphic objects, CorelDRAW treats special characters and symbols as curves. Consequently, the symbol is a separate graphic object, that you can edit as you would other graphic objects or use to create background patterns for a document.

When you tile symbols, each symbol within the pattern is a separate object to which you can apply effects. You can change the spacing between the rows and columns in which the symbols are arranged.

Additionally, you can change objects, such as company logos or modified letter shapes, into symbol characters and add them to the symbol sets in the Symbols And Special Characters Docker window. The object you use can be any size. CorelDRAW resizes it to match the proportions of other symbols in the set. Symbols you create appear at the end of the pattern list.

When you embed a graphic object or bitmap into Artistic text and Paragraph text, it's treated as a text character. As a result, you can apply formatting options according to the type of text into which you embed the graphic object.

 Related Topics


Adding symbols and special characters to a document

You can add a symbol as a text object or as a graphic object.

To add a symbol or a special character as a text object

1.	Select the text (Artistic text or Paragraph text frame) with the Text tool.

2.	Place the insertion point where you want to add the symbol.

3.	Click Window, Dockers, Symbols And Special Characters.

4.	Choose a symbol category from the list box.

5.	Double-click a symbol in the Sample window.

 Tip

•	You can type a value in the Size box to change the symbol height.

To add a symbol and special characters as a graphic object

1.	Follow steps 3 to 5 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click a symbol in the Sample window, and drag it to the Drawing Page.

 Notes

•	You can make more symbol fonts available by adding them during a custom installation of CorelDRAW.

•	You can change the default outline and fill properties of symbols and special characters that you add as graphic objects. For more information about styles, see "Working with styles."

 Tip

•	You can also choose a symbol by typing its index number in the Number (#) box. The CorelDRAW Libraries Catalog list index numbers.

 Related Topics


Embedding graphic objects in text

You can embed graphics into Artistic text or Paragraph text. You can also remove an embedded object from text. The object returns to its original state.

To embed graphic objects in text

1.	Select the graphic object with the Pick tool.

2.	Hold down the right mouse button, and drag the graphic object to its desired location in the text.

The cursor changes to an insert in text cursor.

3.	Click one of the following:

•	Move Into Text [image] to move the graphic object from the Drawing Window into the frame

•	Copy Into Text [image] to copy the graphic object into the frame

 Notes

•	You must save the file as a version 8 or 9 file to preserve the graphic object in text.

•	You can apply special effects to the graphic object (for example, envelope, blend, and distortion) before you embed it in text.

 Tip

•	You can also drag an embedded graphic from one frame to another. For more information, see "Editing by dragging in the Drawing Window."

To remove an embedded object from the Paragraph text frame

1.	Select the object from the text using the Text tool.

2.	Hold down the right mouse button, and drag the graphic object to the Drawing Window.

3.	Click Move Here.

 Tip

•	You can also copy the object to the Drawing Window by clicking Copy Here.

 Related Topics


Creating a pattern using symbols

You can create background patterns by tiling symbols.

To create a pattern using symbols

1.	Click View, Dockers, Symbols.

2.	Choose a symbol category from the list box.

3.	Choose a symbol from the Sample window.

4.	Enable the Tile check box.

5.	Drag the symbol to the Drawing Page.

To change the row and column spacing

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Tile Options button.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Type values in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes to specify the spacing between symbols.

•	Enable the Identical Values check box to maintain equal spacing around a symbol.

4.	Click OK.

5.	Drag the symbol to the Drawing Page.

 Related Topics


Adding symbols and special characters to a symbol set

You can add objects, such as company logos or modified letter shapes, to the symbol sets in the Symbols And Special Characters Docker window.

To add a symbol

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Tools, Create, Symbol.

3.	Type a name for a new symbol category, or choose an existing category from the list box.

 Notes

•	To add a symbol or special character to a symbol set, the object must have a closed path. If the object contains multiple objects, you must combine all the objects. For more information, see "Combining two or more objects." In addition, you must use TrueType fonts to create symbols.

 Related Topics


Editing text


Overview: Editing text
Editing text

You can edit Artistic text and Paragraph text directly in the Drawing Window or in the Edit Text dialog box.

When working with small bodies of text, you might find editing text directly in the Drawing window more convenient. You can edit Artistic and Paragraph text by dragging it.

For large bodies of text, you may want to edit in the Edit Text dialog box, which lets you find and replace text and provides access to writing tools and formatting options. In cases where perspective, envelope, or extrude effects have been applied to Artistic text, you must use the Edit Text dialog box. For more information about perspective, envelope, and extrude, see "Creating special effects."

In addition, if you use the Edit Text dialog box frequently, you may want to change your default settings to display it automatically when you click the Text tool. You can also use the Microsoft Intellimouse to scroll through the Edit Text dialog box.

 Related Topics


Editing by dragging in the Drawing Window

You can change your default settings and edit a line of Artistic text or Paragraph text by dragging in the Drawing Window. You can drag Artistic text to a Paragraph text frame, and you can drag Paragraph text between frames.

To edit text by dragging in the Drawing Window

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Text.

3.	Enable the Drag And Drop Text Editing check box.

4.	Using the Text tool, select the text you want to move.

5.	Hold down the right mouse button, and drag the text to its new location.

6.	Click one of the following:

•	Move Here

•	Copy Here

 Note

•	You can drag an embedded graphic in a Paragraph text frame to another frame. For more information, see "Embedding graphic objects in text."

 Related Topics


Editing text in the Edit Text dialog box

You can edit text in the Edit Text dialog box.

To type or edit text in the Edit Text dialog box

1.	Select the text with the Text tool.

2.	Click Text, Edit Text.

3.	Type your changes as required.

 Notes

•	You can only edit Artistic text that hasn't been converted to curves.

•	The Edit Text dialog box doesn't display changes you make to spacing.

 Related Topics


Finding and replacing text characters in the Edit Text dialog box

You can search a document to find text you want to edit. You can also find and replace text.

To find text characters

1.	In the Edit Text dialog box, click the Options button, and click Find Text.

2.	Type the text you want to find in the Find What box.

3.	Enable the Match Case check box to find the exact case of the text you specified, if required.

4.	Click the Find Next button.

CorelDRAW finds the first text block that contains the characters you specified.

 Tip

•	You can also find text characters in the Drawing Window by clicking Edit, Find And Replace, Find Text.

To find and replace text characters

1.	In the Edit Text dialog box, click the Options button, and click Replace Text.

2.	Type the text you want to find in the Find What box.

3.	Type the replacement text in the Replace With box.

4.	Enable the Match Case check box to find the exact case of the text you specified in the Find What and Replace With boxes, if required.

5.	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Replace [image] replaces the first occurrence of the text specified in the Find What box

•	Replace All [image] replaces all occurrences of the text specified in the Find What box

•	Find Next [image] finds the next occurrence of the text specified in the Find What box

 Tip

•	You can also find and replace text characters in the Drawing Window by clicking Edit, Find And Replace, Replace Text.

 Related Topics


Displaying the Edit Text dialog box automatically

You can change your default settings so that the Edit Text dialog box displays automatically when text is selected and you click the Text tool, when you select text using the Text tool, or when you click a blank space in the Drawing Window with the Text tool.

To display the Edit Text dialog box automatically

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Text.

3.	Disable the Edit Text On Screen check box.

 Related Topics


Scrolling in the Edit Text dialog box using Intellimouse

You can use the Microsoft IntelliMouse to scroll through the Edit Text dialog box.

To scroll in the Edit Text dialog box using Intellimouse

1.	Click the wheel button.

2.	Point the mouse in the direction you want to scroll.

To increase the panning rate, move the cursor away from the origin mark.

3.	Click the wheel button to stop scrolling.

 Tip

•	You can also scroll by turning the wheel button.

 Related Topics


Formatting text


Overview: Formatting text
Formatting text

There are formatting properties you can apply to Artistic text and Paragraph text. You can adjust the spacing between characters, words, and lines, as well as enhance text by shifting and rotating characters.

 Note

•	You can customize toolbars by adding buttons for the commands and options you use most frequently. For more information, see "Customizing toolbars."

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Applying character properties


Overview: Applying character properties
Applying character properties

You may want to enhance Artistic text and Paragraph text by modifying its character properties, applying lines to text, and changing the text case. You can change the font type and size of text, and apply bold and italic formatting.

You can accent text by underlining and overscoring (placing a line above the text) it. The strikethrough feature lets you indicate text you may want to remove. By changing the line properties of underlines, overscores, and strikethroughs, you can further emphasize text.

If your document includes scientific notation, you can make text subscript or superscript. You also can change the case of text. For example, you can change lowercase text to title case without deleting or replacing characters.

 Related Topics


Changing the font type and size

You can change the font type for specific characters or the whole text object. You can also increase or decrease the size of text.

To change the font for specific characters

1.	Select the text with the Text tool.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Font tab.

4.	Choose a font type from the Font list box.

To change the font for the whole text object

1.	Select the text with the Pick tool.

2.	Follow steps 2 to 4 from the previous procedure.

 Tip

•	You can also type a name in the Font list box.

To change the font size

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Type a value in the Size box.

 Note

•	If someone else plans to view your file, each font you use in your document must also be installed on their machine. Otherwise, CorelDRAW substitutes the font using PANOSE. (For more information about PANOSE, see "Substituting unavailable fonts." To avoid this problem, you can save the font with the document by enabling the Embed Fonts Using TrueDoc in the Save Drawing dialog box. Click File, Save As, and enable the Embed Fonts Using TrueDoc check box.

 Tip

•	You can also change the font type and size using the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Applying bold and italic formatting

You can apply bold and italic formatting to text.

To apply bold formatting

1.	Select the text.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Font tab.

4.	Choose Bold from the Style list box.

 Tip

•	You can also use the Bold button on the Property Bar to apply bold formatting.

To apply italic formatting

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose Italic from the Style list box.

 Note

•	Because some fonts do not support bold and italic properties, they are not always available.

 Tip

•	You can also use the Italic button on the Property Bar to apply italic formatting.

 Related Topics


Adding, modifying, and removing underline, overscore, and strikethrough formatting

You can apply underlines, overscores, and strikethroughs to text.

To underline text

1.	Select the text.

2.	Click Text, Format text.

3.	Click the Font tab.

4.	Choose a line style from the Underline list box.

 Tip

•	You can also underline text by clicking the Underline button on the Property Bar.

To overscore text

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose a line style from the Overscore list box.

To strikethrough text

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To underline text" procedure.

2.	Choose a line style from the Strikethrough list box.

To remove underline, overscore, or strikethrough

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To underline text" procedure.

2.	Choose None from the Underline, Overscore, or Strikethrough list box.

 Related Topics


Changing underline, overscore, and strikethrough line properties

You can change the thickness of underlines, overscores and strikethroughs. You can also change the distance between text and a line.

To change the thickness of a line

1.	Select the text to which underline, overscore, or stikethrough formatting is applied.

2.	Click Text, Format text.

3.	Click the Font tab.

4.	Click the Edit button next to the line type (Underline, Overscore, or Strikethrough).

5.	Type a value in the Thickness box to specify the line width.

To change distance between the line and text

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Type a value in the Baseline Shift box.

3.	Choose a unit value from the Units list box.

 Related Topics


Making text superscript or subscript

You can make text appear in superscript or subscript.

To make text superscript

1.	Select the text.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Font tab.

4.	Choose Superscript from the Position list box.

To make text subscript

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose Subscript from the Position list box.

 Tips

•	You can also make text superscript by using the Shape tool to click the Superscript button on the Property Bar.

•	You can also make text subscript by using the Shape tool to click the Subscript button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Changing text case

You can change text case without retyping the text.

To change text case

1.	Select the text you want to change with the Text tool.

2.	Click Text, Change Case.

3.	Enable one of the following text case buttons:

•	Sentence Case [image] capitalizes the initial letter of the first word in each sentence

•	Lowercase [image] makes all text small letters

•	Uppercase [image] capitalizes all letters

•	Title Case [image] capitalizes the initial letter of each word

•	Toggle Case [image] reverses the case; all capital letters become lowercase and all lowercase letters become uppercase

To make text small caps

1.	Select the text.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Font tab.

4.	Choose Small Caps from the Uppercase list box.

 Related Topics


Specifying text spacing


Overview: Specifying text spacing
Specifying text spacing

By changing the spacing of Artistic text and Paragraph text, you can enhance the text and make it more readable. You can change the spacing between characters, words, and lines. When you space characters manually, you can change default settings to display or hide character outlines. You can also align Artistic text horizontally.

You can change the space between all characters, all words, or characters and words proportionately. You can also kern specific characters. Kerning balances the optical space with other letters in a word or line. Kerning differs from spacing in that it affects only the white space between the specified characters.

Changing the line spacing for Artistic text applies the spacing to lines of text with a carriage return between them. For Paragraph text, the space applies to lines of text within the same paragraph. You can also change the spacing before and after paragraphs for Artistic text and Paragraph text.

Setting a value for character outlines determines whether CorelDRAW shows the outlines of characters you're spacing manually. If the number of characters selected is less than or equal to the value you specify, CorelDRAW displays their outlines as you space them.

Aligning Artistic text is different from aligning Paragraph text. When you align Paragraph text, you align text with respect to the frame. For more information, see "Aligning Paragraph text horizontally." However, when you align Artistic text, it is aligned with the point you first clicked when you entered the text. If characters have not been shifted horizontally, applying No Alignment produces the same result as applying Left Alignment.

 Note

•	Options available for specifying text spacing depend on the tool you use to select the text. Selecting with the Text tool or the Pick tool lets you adjust spacing between characters, words, lines, and paragraphs. Selecting with the Text tool also lets you adjust kerning between a range of characters. Selecting with the Shape tool lets you specify horizontal and vertical spacing with precise values using the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Changing character and word spacing

You can change the spacing between characters, words, and paragraphs with precision for both Artistic text and Paragraph text.

To change the spacing between characters

1.	Select the text.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Space tab.

4.	 In the Character box, type a value for the amount of space you want to insert between individual characters.

This value represents a percentage of the space character (the space inserted when you press SPACEBAR). The maximum percentage value is 2000; the minimum percentage value is -100.

 Tip

•	You can change the spacing of all characters in a Paragraph text frame, or selected paragraphs. To change spacing in the entire frame, select the frame with the Pick tool. To change specific paragraphs only, select the paragraphs with the Text tool.

To change spacing between words

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Word box, type a value for the amount of space you want to insert between words.

This value represents a percentage of the space character (the space inserted when you press SPACEBAR). The maximum percentage value is 2000; the minimum percentage value is 0.

To change spacing between words and characters

1.	Open the Shape Edit flyout, and click the Shape tool.

2.	Select the text.

3.	Drag the Interactive Horizontal Spacing arrow right to increase, or left to decrease the spacing.

 Tip

•	You can also change the spacing of selected characters by holding down CTRL and dragging character nodes with the Shape tool.

 Related Topics


Using range kerning

You can adjust the spacing between a selected series of letters to improve their appearance on the printed page.

To use range kerning

1.	Using the Text tool, select two or more characters of Paragraph text or Artistic text.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Font tab.

4.	Type a value in the Range Kerning box.

This value represents a percentage of the space character (the space inserted when you press SPACEBAR). The maximum percentage value is 1000; the minimum percentage value is -100.

 Tip

•	You can also use the Pick tool for Paragraph text.

 Related Topics


Changing the spacing between lines

You can change the space between all lines. In Paragraph text frames, you can adjust the spacing before and after paragraphs.

To change spacing between lines

1.	Select the text.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Space tab.

4.	Choose a unit of measurement from the list box beside the Line box.

This value represents a percentage of the character height. The maximum percentage value is 2000; the minimum percentage value is 0.

5.	Type a value for the amount of space you want to add between the lines of text in the Line box.

To change the amount of space before a paragraph

1.	Select the Paragraph text frame or paragraph.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Space tab.

4.	Type a value in the Before Paragraph box to specify the amount of space you want before each paragraph.

This value represents a percentage of character height for the chosen font.

To change the amount of space after a paragraph

1.	Select the Paragraph text frame or paragraph.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Space tab.

4.	Type a value in the After Paragraph box to specify the amount of space you want after each paragraph.

This value represents a percentage of character height for the chosen font.

 Note

•	When you change line spacing for Artistic text, the spacing applies to lines of text with a carriage return between them. For Paragraph text, the space applies to lines of text within the same paragraph.

 Related Topics


Displaying character outlines when spacing

You can specify a value to determine if CorelDRAW displays or hides character outlines when you space characters manually.

To specify a display value for character outlines for manual kerning

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Text.

3.	Type a value in the Display box.

 Related Topics


Aligning Artistic text horizontally

You can align Artistic text horizontally from the point you click when you enter text.

To align Artistic text horizontally

1.	Select Artistic text with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Align tab.

4.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	No Alignment [image] applies no justification

•	Left Alignment [image] aligns text along the left margin

•	Center Alignment [image] aligns text between the left and right margins

•	Right Alignment [image] aligns text along the right margin

•	Full Alignment [image] aligns text evenly along the left and right margins

•	Force Full Alignment [image] aligns text evenly along the left and right margins and stretches the last line to the right margin

 Note

•	You can align Artistic text horizontally only.

 Tip

•	You can also align text using the alignment buttons on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Shifting and rotating characters


Overview: Shifting and rotating characters
Shifting and rotating characters

Shifting individual and multiple Artistic text and Paragraph text objects vertically and horizontally can add an interesting effect to text. You can also rotate characters.

You can return characters you've shifted horizontally to the baseline and maintain a vertical shift or rotation. You can also remove vertical shifts and rotations.

 Related Topics


Shifting characters horizontally and vertically

You can shift characters horizontally and vertically. When you shift characters, you move them from the baseline.

To shift a character horizontally

1.	Select a text character.

2.	Click Text, Format text.

3.	Click the Align tab.

4.	Type a value in the Horizontal box.

To shift a character vertically

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Type a value in the Vertical box.

 Tip

•	You can also shift characters with the Shape tool by typing values in the Horizontal Shift box and Vertical Shift box on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Rotating characters

You can rotate Artistic text and Paragraph text characters.

To rotate a character

1.	Select a character.

2.	Click Text, Format text.

3.	Click the Align tab.

4.	Type a value in the Rotation box.

 Tip

•	You can also rotate characters with the Shape tool by typing a value in the Angle of Rotation box on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Straightening shifted and rotated characters

You can straighten text characters that you've angled, shifted horizontally, and shifted vertically. You can remove the vertical shift only by returning characters to the baseline.

To remove the rotation or shift

1.	Select the text with the Text tool.

2.	Click Text, Straighten Text.

To return a character to the baseline

1.	Open the Shape Edit flyout, and click the Shape tool.

2.	Select the node to the left of the character.

3.	Click Text, Align To Baseline.

 Related Topics


Formatting Paragraph text


Overview: Formatting Paragraph text
Formatting Paragraph text

Formatting Paragraph text makes it more readable and effective. You can add columns, tabs, indents, bullets, and drop caps. You can also change the vertical and horizontal alignment, and automatically hyphenate text.

 Note

•	Paragraph text frames are also referred to as "frames."

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Adding columns to Paragraph text frames


Overview: Adding columns to Paragraph text frames
Adding columns to Paragraph text frames

Columns are an effective way to lay out text-intensive documents, such as newspapers, magazines, and newsletters. You can create columns of equal or varying widths and gutters. When you add, edit, or delete columns, you can maintain the width of the Paragraph text frame and resize the columns or you can maintain the width of the columns and resize the frame.

 Notes

•	When you import text with column formatting, CorelDRAW maintains the column formatting.

•	You can change the vertical alignment of text in columns. For more information, see "Aligning Paragraph text vertically."

 Related Topics


Adding and editing columns of equal widths

You can create columns of equal or varying widths and spacing. When you're adding and removing columns, you can fix the frame width or the column width.

To add columns of equal widths

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the Paragraph text frame to which you want to add columns.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Frames And Columns tab.

4.	Type a value in the Number Of Columns box.

5.	Enable the Equal Column Width button to create columns and gutters of equal widths.

To maintain the current frame width while adding or deleting columns

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Maintain Current Frame Width button.

3.	Follow steps 4 and 5 from the previous procedure.

You can add or delete columns, and the column widths adjust to fit the width of the frame.

To maintain the current column width while adding or deleting columns

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To add columns of equal widths" procedure.

2.	Enable the Automatically Adjust Frame Width button.

3.	Follow steps 4 and 5 from the "To add columns of equal widths" procedure.

You can add or delete columns, and the current column width remains fixed while the width of the frame adjusts automatically.

 Tips

•	Edit the frame, column, or gutter width by dragging the borders with the Text tool.

•	Edit the columns and gutters proportionately by dragging a side selection handle with the Text tool.

 Related Topics


Adding columns of varying widths

You can create columns of varying widths and spacing in Paragraph text frames.

To add columns of varying widths

1.	Select a Paragraph text frame.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Frames And Columns tab.

4.	Type a value in the Number Of Columns check box.

5.	Disable the Equal Column Width check box.

6.	Type a value in the Width box beside each column # (number).

7.	Type a value in the Gutter box to indicate the amount of space you want between the columns.

 Tips

•	Edit the frame or column width by dragging the border with the Text tool.

•	Edit the gutter width by dragging the border with the Text tool, however you also change the width of the adjacent column.

 Related Topics


Adjusting paragraph alignment


Overview: Adjusting paragraph alignment
Adjusting paragraph alignment

Aligning Paragraph text, lines up text according to the Paragraph text frame. You can horizontally align all paragraphs, or a select few within a Paragraph text frame. Furthermore, you can vertically align all paragraphs in the columns of a selected Paragraph text frame.

 Related Topics


Aligning Paragraph text horizontally

You can horizontally align all paragraphs, or select a few within a Paragraph text frame.

To align Paragraph text horizontally

1.	Select the Paragraph text or frame.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Align tab.

4.	Enable an alignment button.

 Tips

•	You can also align all columns vertically within a frame.

•	You can align multiple Paragraph text frames using the Align And Distribute command. For more information, see "Aligning objects horizontally and vertically."

 Related Topics


Aligning Paragraph text vertically

You can adjust the vertical alignment of Paragraph text.

To align Paragraph text vertically

1.	Select the Paragraph text frame with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Frames And Columns tab.

4.	Choose an option from the Vertical Justification list box.

 Tip

•	You can also align columns vertically in a Paragraph text frame.

 Related Topics


Applying drop caps to paragraphs


Overview: Applying drop caps to paragraphs
Applying drop caps to paragraphs

Drop caps are an effective way to attract a reader's eye to the beginning of a chapter or paragraph. Applying drop caps to paragraphs enlarges the initial letter and insets it into the body of text.

You can customize a drop cap by changing its settings. For example, you can change the distance between a drop cap letter and the body text.

 Related Topics


Adding and removing drop caps

You can create an eye-catching chapter or paragraph by adding a drop cap. You can also remove the drop cap without deleting it.

To add a drop cap

1.	Select the Paragraph text frame or paragraphs.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Effects tab.

4.	Choose Drop Cap from the Effect Type list box.

5.	Click one of the following:

•	Dropped [image] wraps text around the dropped letter

•	Hanging Indent [image] offsets the initial letter away from the body of text

To remove a drop cap

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose None from the Effect Type list box.

 Note

•	You can draw more attention to a drop cap, change the font or color or by adding a border. For more information, see "Filling and outlining objects."

 Tips

•	You can also add a drop cap by clicking the Show/Hide Drop Cap button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Changing drop cap settings

You can specify the number of lines that appear beside a drop cap. You can also specify the distance between the drop cap letter and the body of text.

To specify the number of lines that appear beside the drop cap letter

1.	Select the Paragraph text frame or paragraph.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Effects tab.

4.	Choose Drop Cap from the Effect Type list box.

5.	Type a value in the Dropped Lines box.

To specify the distance between the drop cap letter and the body of text

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Type a value in the Distance From Text box.

 Related Topics


Applying tabs to paragraphs


Overview: Applying tabs to paragraphs
Applying tabs to paragraphs

You can add tabs to indent Paragraph text. You can delete all or some of the default tab stops and set your own. You can also change the tab alignment.

In addition, you can set trailing leader tabs. A leader tab automatically creates dots that precede the tab. Often leadered tabs are used in tables and lists, such as tables of contents and indexes. You can customize a trailing leader tab by changing the character or the space between the characters.

 Related Topics


Adding and removing tabs

You can add and remove tabs from Paragraph text frames.

To add a tab

1.	Select the Paragraph text frame or paragraph.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Tabs tab.

4.	Click the Add Tab button.

A row is added to the bottom of the list.

5.	Click the new cell in the Tabs column, and type a value.

To remove a tab

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the cell in the Tab column you want to remove.

3.	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Delete Tab [image] removes that tab

•	Delete All [image] removes all of the tabs

 Tip

•	When you select frames with the Text tool, you can add and remove tabs using the Horizontal ruler.

 Related Topics


Changing tab settings

You can set tabs at regular intervals and change the tab alignment. For example, you can change the default alignment from left to right.

To set tabs at regular intervals

1.	Select the Paragraph text frame or paragraph with the Text tool.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Tabs tab.

4.	Type a value in the box beside the Set Tabs Every button.

5.	Click the Set Tabs Every button to add the tabs.

To change the alignment of tabs

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Double-click the cell in the Alignment column.

3.	Choose an alignment option from the list box.

 Tip

•	When you select frames with the Text tool, you can change the alignment of tabs using the Horizontal ruler.

 Related Topics


Setting trailing leader tabs

You can add trailing leader tabs to Paragraph text. You can also change the character used and adjust the space between characters.

To add tabs with a trailing leader character

1.	Select the Paragraph text frame or paragraph with the Text tool.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Tabs tab.

4.	Click the cell in the Leadered column to enable the check box.

To change the trailing leader character

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Type a character in the first Character box.

To decrease or increase space between trailing leader characters

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To add tabs with a trailing leader character" procedure.

2.	Type a value from 0 to 10 in the Spacing box.

Lower values decrease and higher values increase the spacing between leader characters.

 Related Topics


Specifying paragraph indentation


Overview: Specifying paragraph indentation
Specifying paragraph indentation

You can change the space between a Paragraph text frame and its text by indenting. You can indent an entire paragraph, the first line of a paragraph, all but the first line of a paragraph (a hanging indent), or indent from the right side of the frame.

You can also remove an indent without deleting or retyping.

 Related Topics


Adding indents

You can indent the first line of a paragraph, all but the first line, or the entire paragraph. You can also right indent a paragraph.

To indent the first line of a paragraph

1.	Select the Paragraph text frame or paragraph with the Text tool.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Align tab.

4.	Type a value in the First Line box.

To create a hanging indent

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Type a value in the Left box.

To indent an entire paragraph

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To indent the first line of a paragraph" procedure.

2.	Type the same value in the First Line box and the Left box.

To right indent a paragraph

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To indent the first line of a paragraph" procedure.

2.	Type a value in the Right box.

 Tip

•	You can also increase and decrease indents by clicking the Increase Indent button or Decrease Indent button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Removing indents

You can remove indents without deleting.

To remove indents

1.	Select the Paragraph text frame or paragraph with the Text tool.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Align tab.

4.	Type 0 in the First Line, Right, and Left boxes.

 Related Topics


Adding bullets to paragraphs


Overview: Adding bullets to paragraphs
Adding bullets to paragraphs

You can use bulleted lists to present nonsequential, parallel pieces of information in a consistent format. To create several bulleted lists, you can use one of the predefined Paragraph text bullet styles to format them consistently. You can customize bullets by changing the size, position, and spacing of bullets. You can make your own bullets by adding symbols to a symbol set. For more information, see "Adding symbols to a symbol set."

 Related Topics


Adding and removing bullets

You can add bullets that text wraps text around. You can also offset a bullet from text to create a hanging indent. You can remove a bullet without deleting your text.

To add a bullet that text wraps around

1.	Select the Paragraph text frame or paragraph with the Text tool.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Effects tab.

4.	Choose Bullet from the Effect Type list box.

5.	Choose a font from the Font list box.

6.	Choose a symbol from the Sample window.

You can also choose a bullet by entering its index number in the Symbol # box. Index numbers are listed in the Symbol and Clipart Libraries Catalog.

7.	Click the Bulleted button.

To add a bullet with a hanging indent

1.	Follow steps 1 to 6 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click Hanging Indent in the Indents section.

3.	Type a value in the Position box.

 Tip

•	You can also add a bullet with a hanging indent by clicking the Show/Hide Bullet button on the Property Bar.

To remove a bullet

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To add a bullet that text wraps around" procedure.

2.	Choose None from the Effect Type list box.

 Related Topics


Customizing bullets

You can customize the appearance of a bullet by changing its size, position, and spacing.

To change the bullet size

1.	Select the Paragraph text frame or paragraph with the Text tool.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Effects tab.

4.	Choose Bullet from the Effect Type list box.

5.	Type a value in the Size box.

To raise or lower the position of a bullet

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Type a value in the Baseline Shift box.

Negative values lower the position of the bullet; positive values raise it.

To change the space between the bullet and text

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To change the bullet size" procedure.

2.	Click the Align tab.

3.	Type a value for the amount of space you want between the bullet and the text in the First Line box.

4.	Type the same value that you specified in step 3 in the Left box.

The space between the frame and the text changes. As a result, the spacing between the bullet and the text changes.

 Related Topics


Hyphenating text


Overview: Hyphenating text
Hyphenating text

Hyphenation can be useful when you work with columns or have limited space for text. By enabling hyphenation, CorelDRAW automatically divides words at the end of lines instead of wrapping them to the next line. You can apply hyphenation to a Paragraph text frame or to selected paragraphs within a frame.

By customizing the hyphenation settings, you can control when hyphenation occurs. For example, you can specify a character requirement and whether hyphenation occurs in words with capital letters.

 Related Topics


Applying hyphenation to Paragraph text

You can apply automatic hyphenation for selected paragraphs in a Paragraph text frame or for all paragraphs in the document.

To set automatic hyphenation for all paragraphs in the document

1.	Click the bottom Default Style To Edit button on the Property Bar.

Default Paragraph Text appears in the Style list box.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Space tab.

4.	Enable the Use Automatic Hyphenation check box.

5.	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Apply [image] applies the formatting and keeps the Format Text dialog box open

•	OK [image] applies the formatting and closes the Format Text dialog box

6.	Enable the Paragraph text check box.

7.	Disable the Artistic text check box.

The existing text in your document remains unaffected. Only subsequent frames you create will use automatic hyphenation.

To set automatic hyphenation for selected Paragraph text

1.	Select the Paragraph text frame or paragraph with the Text tool.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Space tab.

4.	Enable the Use Automatic Hyphenation check box.

 Related Topics


Specifying hyphenation settings

You can customize hyphenation settings by applying hyphenation to words containing capital letters and specifying the minimum number of characters required in a word for hyphenation to occur. You can also specify the minimum number of letters before and after a hyphen, as well as the distance from the right margin that CorelDRAW starts hyphenating words (also called the hot zone).

To hyphenate words containing capital letters

1.	Select the Paragraph text frame or paragraph with the Text tool.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Space tab.

4.	Enable the Use Automatic Hyphenation check box.

5.	Click the Hyphenation Settings button.

6.	Enable the Break Capitalized check box to hyphenate words with initial or all capital letters.

To specify the minimum number of characters a word requires for hyphenation

1.	Select the Paragraph text frame or paragraph with the Text tool.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click the Space tab.

4.	Enable the Use Automatic Hyphenation check box.

5.	Click the Hyphenation Settings button.

6.	Type a value in the Minimum Word Length box.

To specify the minimum number of characters before a hyphen

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the previous procedure.

2.	Type a value in the Minimum Characters Before box.

To specify the minimum number of characters after a hyphen

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the "To specify the minimum number of characters a word requires for hyphenation" procedure.

2.	Type a value in the Minimum Characters After box.

To specify the hot zone for hyphenation

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To specify the minimum number of characters a word requires for hyphenation" procedure.

2.	Click the Hyphenation Settings button in the Hyphenation section.

3.	Type a value in the Hot Zone box to specify the distance from the right margin that you want CorelDRAW to start hyphenating words.

 Related Topics


Managing Paragraph text frames


Overview: Managing Paragraph text frames
Managing Paragraph text frames

Managing Paragraph text frames helps you use them more effectively. CorelDRAW treats frames similarly to other objects in a drawing, so you can size and move a frame like any object. Fitting text to a frame, increases or decreases the point size of text so that it fits the frame exactly. You can hide and show the frame outline, specify the minimum number of characters in a line, as well as hide and show spacing arrows. You can hide spacing arrows if you don't plan to adjust the spacing between words, characters, and lines of text.

You can break frames apart to create paragraphs in separate frames. You can continue to break frames apart to the character level. You can also combine frames. When working with Paragraph text, you can drag text out of a frame to create a new frame.

By inserting Paragraph text frames inside graphic objects, you can use objects as containers for text and change the shape of frames. Inserting a frame inside an object positions the frame inside of the object's outline. You can also separate a frame from an object and the frame will retain the shape of the object. You can also change the shape of text by wrapping frames around objects. Additionally, you can wrap Paragraph text around Artistic text and Paragraph text frames. You can wrap text using contour or square wrapping styles. The contour wrapping styles follow the curve of the object. The square wrapping styles following the bounding box of the object. Furthermore, you can link frames to direct the flow of text between frames.

 Note

•	Paragraph text frames are also referred to as "frames."

 Related Topics


Sizing Paragraph text frames

You can size a Paragraph text frame independent of its text, or you can size a frame and its text together.

To increase or decrease the frame size independent of its text

1.	Using the Pick tool, click anywhere in or on the border of the frame.

2.	Drag any selection handle outward to increase, or inward to decrease the size of the frame.

To size Paragraph text and its frame

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Text, and click Paragraph.

3.	Disable the Expand And Shrink Paragraph Text Frames To Fit Text check box.

4.	Click OK.

5.	Click anywhere in or on the border of a Paragraph text frame with the Pick tool.

6.	Hold down ALT, and drag one of the corner selection handles to resize the frame and the text simultaneously.

The text maintains the shape of the original font, but the font size changes.

 Note

•	To size a frame with columns of varying widths, you must drag the side selection handles to resize the frame. Dragging the frame border adjusts the width of that column.

 Tips

•	If you're resizing the frame with the Text tool, you can also drag the frame border to resize the frame.

•	You can also use the Pick tool to resize a frame.

 Related Topics


Moving Paragraph text frames

You can move Paragraph text frames in a drawing.

To move a frame using the Text tool

1.	Using the Text tool, click the X in the center of the frame.

The cursor changes to a four-way cursor.

2.	Drag the Paragraph text frame outline to a new location.

 Tip

•	You can also move a frame using the Pick tool.

 Related Topics


Fitting text to a Paragraph text frame

You can have CorelDRAW adjust the point size of text so that the text fits the Paragraph text frame exactly.

To fit text to a Paragraph text frame

1.	Select the frame with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Text, Fit Text To Frame.

 Note

•	If you fit text to linked frames, CorelDRAW adjusts the size of text in all the linked frames. For more information about linking frames, see "Linking Paragraph text frames together."

 Related Topics


Showing and hiding Paragraph text frame outlines

You can hide or show Paragraph text frame outlines.

To show or hide Paragraph text frame outlines

•	Click View, Text Frames.

If a check mark appears beside the Text Frames command name, frame outlines are displayed. If no check mark appears, frame outlines are hidden.

 Related Topics


Specifying the minimum number of characters per line

You can specify the minimum number of characters permitted in each line of a Paragraph text frame. For example, when you set the minimum width to five, each line must have at least five characters to appear.

To specify the minimum number of characters per line

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Text.

3.	Type a value in the Minimum Line Width box.

 Related Topics


Showing and hiding interactive spacing arrows

You can show or hide the Interactive Horizontal Spacing and Interactive Vertical Spacing arrows when you select a Paragraph text frame.

To show the interactive spacing arrows

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Text.

3.	Enable the Show Selection Handles While Editing check box.

To hide the interactive spacing arrows

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Disable the Show Selection Handles While Editing check box.

 Related Topics


Breaking apart Paragraph text frames

You can break Paragraph text into the following subcomponents: columns, paragraphs, bullets, lines, words, and characters. Every time you break apart a frame, the subcomponents are placed in separate frames. For example, You can break apart a frame containing multiple words, with each frame containing one word from that line.

To break apart a Paragraph text frame

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Break Apart.

 Note

•	To break apart a frame to the next component, repeat the above procedure.

 Related Topics


Combining Paragraph text frames

You can combine two or more Paragraph text frames to create one frame.

To combine Paragraph text frames

1.	Hold down SHIFT and select the frames with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Combine.

 Notes

•	The text in the first frame you select appears first in the combined frame.

•	You can't combine frames with envelopes or when text is fitted to a curve.

•	If you select the frame with columns first, the combined frame will have columns.

 Related Topics


Dragging text from a Paragraph text frame to create a frame

You can drag text out of a Paragraph text frame to create a frame.

To drag text into a new frame

1.	Using the Text tool, select the Paragraph text.

2.	Hold down the right-mouse button, and drag the text to the Drawing Window.

The cursor changes to a text from frame cursor.

3.	Click one of the following:

•	Copy [image] copies the text to the frame

•	Move [image] moves the text to the frame

 Tip

•	You can also drag text from a frame to another existing frame. For more information, see "Editing by dragging in the Drawing Window."

 Related Topics


Inserting Paragraph text frames inside objects

You can insert a Paragraph text frame inside an object.

To insert text inside an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Text tool.

3.	Drag the cursor over the object's outline.

4.	Click the object when the cursor changes to an insert in object cursor.

A frame appears inside the object.

5.	Type inside the frame.

 Tip

•	You can also apply an envelope to a Paragraph text frame. For more information about envelopes, see "Creating envelopes."

 Related Topics


Separating a Paragraph text frame from an object

You can separate a Paragraph text frame from an object.

To separate a Paragraph text frame from an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Separate.

3.	Click the outline of the frame, and drag it to a new location.

 Related Topics


Wrapping Paragraph text around objects

You can wrap Paragraph text around objects so that the text follows the shape of the object. You can also wrap text so that it follows the object's bounding box. You can also adjust the space between text and the object.

To wrap Paragraph text around an object so that it follows the object's shape

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	On the Property Bar, click the Wrap Paragraph Text button, and click one of the following Contour wrapping styles:

•	Text Flows Left [image] wraps text around the left side of the object

•	Text Flows Right [image] wraps text around the right side of the object

•	Straddle Text [image] wraps text around all sides of the object

3.	Click OK.

4.	Click the Text tool, and create a Paragraph text frame on top of the object.

5.	Type in the Paragraph text frame.

The text flows around the object, leaving the space occupied by the object blank.

To wrap Paragraph text around an object so that it follows the object's bounding box

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	On the Property Bar, click the Wrap Paragraph Text button, and click one of the following Square wrapping styles:

•	Text Flows Left [image] wraps text around the left side of the object

•	Text Flows Right [image] wraps text around the right side of the object

•	Straddle Text [image] wraps text around all sides of the object

•	Above/Below [image] wraps text above and below the object

3.	Follow steps 3 to 5 from the previous procedure.

 Tip

•	You can wrap existing Paragraph text around an object by applying the wrapping style to the object, and dragging the frame on the object.

To change the amount of space between the text and an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	On the Property Bar, click the Wrap Paragraph Text button.

3.	Type a value in Text Wrap Offset box.

To remove wrapping styles

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click None.

 Tip

•	You can also remove the text wrap by disabling the Wrap Paragraph Text button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Wrapping Pargraph text around text
Wrapping Paragraph text around text

You can wrap Paragraph text around Artistic text or a Paragraph text frame. The wrapping styles let you follow text's shape or the text's bounding box.

To wrap Paragraph text around text so that it follows the text's shape

1.	Select the text with the Pick tool.

2.	On the Property Bar, click the Wrap Paragraph Text button, and click one of the following Contour wrapping styles:

•	Text Flows Left [image] wraps text around the left side of the frame or Artistic text

•	Text Flows Right [image] wraps text around the right side of the frame or Artistic text

•	Straddle Text [image] wraps text around all sides of the frame or Artistic text

3.	Click OK.

4.	Click the Text tool, and create a Paragraph text frame on top of the text.

5.	Type in the Paragraph text frame.

The text in the Paragraph text frame flows around the text, leaving the space occupied by the object blank.

To wrap Paragraph text around text so that it follows the text's bounding box

1.	Select the frame with the Pick tool.

2.	On the Property Bar, click the Wrap Paragraph Text button, and click one of the following Square wrapping styles:

•	Text Flows Left [image] wraps text around the left side of the frame or Artistic text

•	Text Flows Right [image] wraps text around the right side of the frame or Artistic text

•	Straddle Text [image] wraps text around all sides of the frame or Artistic text

•	Above/Below [image] wraps text above and below the frame or Artistic text

3.	Follow steps 3 to 5 from the previous procedure.

 Related Topics


Linking Paragraph text frames


Overview: Linking Paragraph text frames
Linking Paragraph text frames

Linking Paragraph text frames directs the flow of text from one frame to the other, if the amount of text exceeds the original frame. When you shrink or enlarge a linked frame, or change the size of the text, the amount of text in the next frame adjusts automatically. You can remove links or change the direction of flow.

You can also link a frame to an open or closed path object. When you link a frame to an open path (i.e., a line), the text flows onto the line. When you link a frame to an object with a closed path (e.g., a rectangle), a Paragraph text frame is inserted and the text flows inside the object. You can also link to frames and objects across pages. When the linked frame is on a different page, the page number appears beside the blue arrow.

You can change your settings so that Paragraph text formatting is applied to all linked frames, selected frames, or all selected and subsequently created frames.

After linking frames, you can redirect the flow. By selecting the frame or object, a blue arrow indicates the direction of the text flow. (You can change your settings to hide and display direction arrows.) When you're changing the flow, it's important to remember that text flows from the bottom of the frame or object. Therefore, you must select the bottom [image] text flow tab of the frame or object whose text flow you want to change, then select the frame or object into which you want the flow to continue.

You can also remove the link. When you have only two linked frames and you remove the link, the text flows into the remaining frame. When you remove a link between frames or objects and you have a series of links, the text flows into the next frame or object.


Linking Paragraph text frames together

You can link two or more Paragraph text frames to allow text to flow between them.

To link Paragraph text frames

1.	Select the starting frame with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the [image] text flow tab at the bottom of the frame.

If there is too much text in the frame, the text flow tab contains an arrow [image].

The cursor changes shape.

3.	Click inside the frame to which you want to create a link.

The [image] text flow tab and a blue line indicate that the frame is linked.

 Note

•	You can create and link Paragraph text frames before you type text into the starting frame.

 Tips

•	You can also use the text flow tab at the top of a frame to link to another frame.

 Related Topics


Linking a Paragraph text frame to an object

You can link a Paragraph text frame to an open path  or closed path object.

To link a Paragraph text frame to an object

1.	Select the text frame with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the [image] text flow tab at the bottom of the frame.

If there is too much text in the frame, the text flow tab contains an arrow [image].

The cursor changes shape.

3.	Click the object to which you want to link.

The [image] text flow tab and a blue line indicate that the frame is linked to the object.

 Note

•	If the text exceeds the open or closed path, you can link it to another frame or object.

 Tip

•	You can also insert a frame inside an object with a closed path, then link to other objects and frames. For more information, see "Inserting Paragraph text frames inside objects."

 Related Topics


Linking frames and objects on different pages

You can link Paragraph text frames and objects that on different pages.

To link frames on different pages

1.	Select the starting frame with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the [image] text flow tab at the bottom of the Paragraph text frame.

If there is too much text in the frame, the tab contains an arrow [image].

3.	Using the Navigator, click the Page tab that contains the second frame.

4.	Select the frame into which you want to continue the text flow.

The [image] text flow tab and a dashed blue line indicate that the frame is linked. The page number to which the frame is linked also appears.

To link a frame to an object on a different page

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the frame from which you want the text to flow.

2.	Follow steps 2 and 3 from the previous procedure.

3.	Select the object into which you want to continue the text flow.

 Related Topics


Changing the text flow to a different Paragraph text frame or object

You can redirect the flow of text to different Paragraph text frame or object.

To change text flow to a different frame

1.	Using the Pick tool, click the [image] text flow tab at the bottom of the frame whose link you want to change.

2.	Select the frame into which you want the text flow to continue.

To change text flow to a different object

1.	Using the Pick tool, click the [image] text flow tab at the bottom of the object whose link you want to change.

2.	Select the object into which you want the text flow to continue.

 Related Topics


Hiding and showing link flow indicators

You can hide or show the arrows that indicate the direction of the text flow.

To hide the link flow indicators

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Text, and click Paragraph.

3.	Click one of the following buttons:

•	To All Linked Frames [image] applies the same text formatting to all connected frames

•	To Selected Frames Only [image] applies the same text formatting only to selected frames

•	To Selected And Subsequent Frames [image] applies the same text formatting only to selected and succeeding linked frames

4.	Disable the Show Linking Of Text Frame check box.

To show the link flow indicators

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Show Linking Of Text Frame check box.

 Related Topics


Specifying link options for frames

You can apply formatting to all linked Paragraph text frames, selected frames, or selected and subsequently created frames.

To choose Paragraph text frame formatting options

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Text, and click Paragraph.

3.	Click one of the following buttons:

•	To All Linked Frames [image] applies the same text formatting to all connected frames

•	To Selected Frames Only [image] applies the same text formatting only to selected frames

•	To Selected And Subsequent Frames [image] applies the same text formatting only to selected and succeeding linked frames

 Note

•	The link options affect only the formatting attributes that you can apply to frames (e.g., columns, drop caps, indents, and tabs), as well as general formatting attributes (e.g., font type, size, and weight); color doesn't apply. You must apply color to the text in each linked frame or to the text object separately.

 Related Topics


Removing links between frames or objects

You can remove links between Paragraph text frames and objects. You can also delete the frame or object.

To remove links between frames or object

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the frames or object you want to separate.

2.	Click Arrange, Separate.

To delete a linked Paragraph text frame or object

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the frame or object you want to delete.

2.	Click Edit, Delete.

 Related Topics


Fitting text to a path


Overview: Fitting text to a path
Fitting text to a path

You can position Artistic text along the path of an open object (e.g., a line) or closed object (e.g., a square). Once you've fit text to a path, you can

•	specify the orientation of characters relative to the path. This allows you to create the impression that letters are standing upright. You can also rotate individual characters to follow the contours of the path.

•	adjust the spacing between the text and path

•	specify the vertical position and vertical orientation of the text using the characters' baseline, ascender, descender, or center point

•	specify the horizontal position of text along the path

•	position text to the opposite side of the path

CorelDRAW treats text fitted to a path as one object. You can also separate the text from the object. When you separate a text from a curved or closed path, the text retains the shape of the object to which it was fitted. Straightening reverts text to its original appearance.

 Related Topics


Fitting text to a path

You can fit Artistic text to open and closed paths.

To fit text to a path using the Fit Text To Path command

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the path.

2.	Click Text, Fit Text To Path.

3.	Type along the path.

To fit text to a path interactively

1.	Select the path to which you want to fit the text.

2.	Click the Text tool.

3.	Drag the cursor over the path.

4.	Click the path when the cursor changes to the fit to path cursor.

5.	Type along the path.

 Note

•	You can't fit text to the path of another text object.

 Tip

•	To edit Artistic text on a path directly, double-click the text with the Text tool.

 Related Topics


Adjusting the orientation of text fitted to a path

You can create interesting effects by changing the orientation of characters on the path.

To adjust the orientation of text fitted to a path

1.	Select the text fitted to a path with the Pick tool.

2.	Choose an option from the Text Orientation list box on the Property Bar.

 Tip

•	You can also adjust the orientation by holding down CTRL and selecting the text with the Pick tool. Hold down CTRL and drag the selection handles to change the orientation.

 Related Topics


Adjusting the distance between the text and path

You can adjust the distance between the text and the path to which its fit.

To adjust the distance between the text and path

1.	Select the text fitted to a path with the Pick tool.

2.	Type a value in the Distance From Path box on the Property Bar.

3.	Press ENTER.

 Tip

•	You can also adjust the horizontal spacing of text fitted to a path by clicking text with the Shape tool, and dragging the Interactive Horizontal Spacing arrows.

 Related Topics


Specifying the vertical alignment of text fitted to a path

You can specify the vertical alignment of the text relative to the path.

To specify the vertical alignment of text

1.	Select the text fitted to a path with the Pick tool.

2.	Choose one of the following from the Vertical Placement list box on the Property Bar:

•	Baseline

•	Ascender

•	Descender

•	Center

•	Variable

 Tip

•	You can also edit Artistic text or Paragraph text fitted to paths directly in the Drawing Window.

 Related Topics


Changing the horizontal position of text fitted to a path

You can change the horizontal position of the text relative to the path. You also can change the horizontal position of text according to the start node, end node, or center of the open path to which its fit. For text fit to a closed path, you can change the quadrant to which the text is fit.

To change the horizontal position of text fitted to a path

1.	Select the text fitted to a path with the Pick tool.

2.	Type a value in the Horizontal Offset box on the Property Bar.

3.	Press ENTER.

 Tip

•	You can also change the horizontal position of text along a path by dragging character nodes with the Shape tool.

To change the horizontal position of text fitted to an open path

1.	Select the text fitted to an open path with the Pick tool.

2.	Choose an option from the Text Placement list box on the Property Bar.

To change the quadrant of text fitted to a close path

1.	Select the text fitted to a closed path with the Pick tool.

2.	Choose an option from the Text Placement list box on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Positioning text on the opposite side of the path

You can position text so that it appears on the opposite side of the path.

To position text on the opposite side of the path

1.	Select the text fitted to a path with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Place On Other Side button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Removing text from a path

You can separate Artistic text from an open path or closed path. The text and graphic object become two objects, allowing you to select and manipulate each individually. You can also straighten separated text to return it to its original appearance.

To separate text from a path

1.	Select the text fitted to a path with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Separate.

To straighten text

1.	Select the text fitted to a path with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Text, Straighten Text.

 Related Topics


Using the writing tools


Overview: Using the writing tools
Using the writing tools

The writing tools help you correct spelling and grammatical errors in documents, as well as find alternative words.

There are two tools you can use to verify spelling [image] the automatic spell checker and the Spell Checker that you access through the Text menu. The automatic spell check is controlled with the right-mouse button and indicates errors as you type.

Grammatik verifies the spelling, grammar, punctuation, and style. You can change the rules and style Grammatik uses to check documents.

CorelDRAW sometimes indicates that a word is incorrect because the word isn't in the word lists it's consulting. By adding these words to user word lists, CorelDRAW recognizes them words the next time it checks the document.

By adding words to Type Assist, you can replace abbreviations and words you often mistype.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Using the automatic spell checker


Overview: Using the automatic spell checker
Using the automatic spell checker

You can create text in a drawing and automatically spell check the text as you type. A red wavy underline identifies misspelled text. You can change the settings so that CorelDRAW spell checks all Paragraph text frames, or only selected frames. The automatic spell checker is controlled with the right-mouse button.

You may decide to ignore the indicated errors. You can change the settings to have CorelDRAW indicate ignored errors by underlining them with a blue wavy line.

By adding corrections to Type Assist, misspelled words are added to a list with the correct spelling beside them. The next time you type the misspelled word, Type Assist correct the word automatically.

The automatic spell checker creates a suggestion list for misspelled words that you can use to help you correct the word. You can set the maximum number of spell checking suggestions CorelDRAW displays.

 Note

•	You can use the Spell Checker to check the whole document at once. For more information, see "Working with the Spell Checker."

 Related Topics


Spell checking a document automatically

You can spell check the document as you type. You can also spell check all or selected Paragraph text frames.

To enable automatic spell checking

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Text, and click Spelling.

3.	Enable the Perform Automatic Spell Checking check box.

To show errors in all Paragraph text frames

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Show Errors In All Text Frames button.

To show errors in selected Paragraph text frames

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To enable automatic spell checking" procedure.

2.	Enable the Show Errors In Selected Text Frame Only button.

 Related Topics


Ignoring spelling errors

You can ignore the spelling suggestions CorelDRAW offers. You can change the settings and have CorelDRAW indicate ignored errors with a blue wavy line. You can also remove the option that ignores spelling errors.

To ignore an error during a spell check

•	Right-click the misspelled word, and choose Ignore All.

To indicate errors you ignore during the spell check

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Text, and click Spelling.

3.	Enable the Show Errors Which Have Been Ignored check box.

To remove the ignore flag

•	Right-click the ignored error, and click Unignore All.

 Related Topics


Adding your corrections to Type Assist automatically

You can add misspelled words and their corrections to Type Assist automatically.

To add corrections to Type Assist automatically

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Text, and click Spelling.

3.	Enable the Add Corrections To Type Assist check box.

 Note

•	Choosing an alternate word when the Add Corrections To Type Assist check box is enabled adds the correction to Type Assist.

 Related Topics


Specifying the maximum number of spell checking suggestions

You can specify the maximum number of spelling suggestions CorelDRAW displays.

To specify the maximum number of spell checking suggestions

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Text, and click Spelling.

3.	Type a value in the Display Spelling Suggestions box.

 Tip

•	You can a maximum of 10 spelling suggestions.

 Related Topics


Working with the Spell Checker


Overview: Working with the Spell Checker
Working with the Spell Checker

The Spell Checker lets you check a whole document, a paragraph, a word, or specified text. You can use the Spell Checker to insert corrections, or you can edit text manually by interrupting the spell check and typing corrections directly in the Drawing Window.

During a spell checking session, the Spell Checker may not recognize some words and indicate them as errors. You can add these words to user word lists so that they aren't indicated in future sessions.

By setting options, you can determine how the Spell Checker verifies the document. For example, you can have the Spell Checker verify only new and modified text after you've spell checked the document, or recheck the whole document.

Additionally, you can change the language the Spell Checker uses to verify documents.

 Related Topics


Using the Spell Checker

You can spell check the entire document, part of the document, or selected text.

To spell check the whole document

1.	Click a blank space in the Drawing Window to deselect any objects.

2.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Spell Check.

The misspelled word appears in the Not Found box. The most likely correction appears in the Replace With box. A list of other possible replacements appear in the Replacements box.

3.	Choose the correct word from the Replacements list to display it in the Replace With box, if required.

If necessary, type your own correction in the Replace With box, and press ENTER.

4.	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Replace [image] replaces the highlighted word in your document with the word in the Replace With box

•	Auto Replace [image] replaces all instances of the same error in your document with the word in the Replace With box

•	Skip Once [image] overlooks this occurrence of the word, during this spell check, and moves to the next word

•	Skip All [image] overlooks all occurrences of this word during this spell check

To spell check part of the document

1.	Select a text object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Spell Check.

3.	Choose an option from the Check list box.

4.	Click the Start or the Resume button.

To spell check selected text

1.	Select the specific word or words with the Text tool.

2.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Spell Check.

 Note

•	The Spell Checker can't correct words used in the wrong context. For example, if you type "she had too apples" instead of "she had two apples," the Spell Checker doesn't indicate that the word "too" is an error.

 Tips

•	You can spell check the whole document after it has already been verified by choosing Document from the Check list box.

 Related Topics


Correcting misspelled words manually

You can correct misspelled words by typing in the Drawing Window.

To correct text manually in the Drawing Window during a spell check

1.	Click the Text tool.

2.	Click a blank space in the Drawing Window to deselect any objects.

3.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Spell Check.

Any misspelled words are highlighted in the document.

4.	Select the highlighted text, and type the correction in the Drawing Window.

5.	Click the Resume button to continue with the spell check.

 Related Topics


Adding words to a word list during a spell check

You can add words that the Spell Checker doesn't recognize to a user word list, so that they will be recognized in future spell checks. For more information about user word lists, see "Working with user word lists."

To add a word to a user word list during a spell check

1.	Click the Text tool.

2.	Click a blank space in the Drawing Window to deselect any objects.

3.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Spell Check.

4.	Click the Add button when the Spell Checker stops on a word it doesn't recognize.

 Related Topics


Specifying options for the Spell Checker

You can specify options in the Spell Checker to determine how it verifies the document.

To specify spell check options

1.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Spell Checker.

2.	Click the Options button, and click any of the following:

•	Auto Start [image] starts the Spell Checker as soon as you open it

•	Beep on Misspelled [image] makes CorelDRAW beep when the Spell Checker finds misspelled words

•	Recheck All Text [image] rechecks the entire text, not just new or modified text, after you have spell checked the document

•	Check Words With Numbers [image] checks any text containing numbers

•	Check Duplicate Words [image] checks for duplicate words positioned side-by-side

•	Check Irregular Capitalization [image] checks any irregular capitalization

•	Prompt Before Auto Replacement [image] asks you before the Spell Checker automatically replaces text

•	Show Phonetic Suggestions [image] displays a list of words that sound like the word in the Replace With (or Insert Word) box

A check mark appears beside enabled options.

 Related Topics


Changing the spell check language

You can change the default spell checking language the Spell Checker uses.

To change the spell check language

1.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Spell Check.

2.	Click the Options button, and click Language.

3.	Choose a language from the Current Language list.

 Note

•	You can change only to a language that is installed on the computer.

To save a language as the default spell check language

1.	Follow all the steps from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Save As Default Writing Tool Language check box.

 Related Topics


Working with Grammatik


Overview: Working with Grammatik
Working with Grammatik

Grammatik checks documents for spelling, grammar, and punctuation errors. By typing in the Drawing Window, you can edit documents manually. By setting options, you can control how Grammatik functions. For example, you can have Grammatik start proofreading as soon as you open the dialog box. You can use Grammatik to replace passive sentences with active sentences or add words it doesn't recognize to a user word list. When a passive sentence doesn't have a subject, you can specify the subject for Grammatik to use. You can also change the default language Grammatik uses to check documents.

Grammatik bases its checks on a style. Styles are comprised of grammar rules, writing styles, and levels of formality. You can change the grammar checking style, and as a result, change the interpretation of these elements.

You can also edit grammar checking styles by removing or adding grammar rules which those styles contain. You can also create, edit, and restore grammar checking styles.

You can have Grammatik analyze the grammatical structure of your writing and your writing style to determine its level of readability. You can use this information to decide how to correct possible errors and refine your writing style.

Grammatik can assign a part of speech to each word or group of words in a sentence (e.g., subject, verb, or subordinate clause) and display it in a parse tree. You can also analyze the parts of speech (e.g., conjunction, abbreviation, or preposition) of a selected sentence.

In addition, you can generate and view three statistical summaries: Basic Counts, Flagged List, and Readability Report. For Basic Counts, Grammatik provides a count of paragraphs, sentences, words (as well as their levels of complexity), and syllables. It also provides counts for the average number of syllables per word, words per sentence, and sentences per paragraph. You can use the Basic Counts report to determine if you use many long words in your writing.

The Flagged summary provides a list of the types of errors flagged in the document. It also lists the number of times each error was flagged. Flagged summaries can be useful for identifying the types of grammar problems that appear frequently in your writing.

The Readability summary estimates the skill level required for a reader to understand your document. Grammatik analyzes readability by comparing your document with a comparison document, then generates a Readability report. You can choose a Grammatik comparison document or add a comparison document. Grammatik evaluates a document according to a readability formula, which is dependent on the language you select, the level of difficulty required to read the document, how often you use the passive voice, the length and complexity of sentence structure, and the complexity of words.

 Related Topics


Using Grammatik

You can use Grammatik to check your whole document, part of a document, or specific text.

To use Grammatik to check the whole document

1.	Select the text with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Grammatik.

3.	Choose Document from the Check list box.

Suggestions for corrections appear in the Replacements box. The sentence with the suggested correction appears in the New Sentence box.

4.	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Replace [image] replaces the highlighted text in your document with the highlighted correction in the Replacements box

•	Skip Once [image] overlooks the highlighted text during this grammar check and moves to the next error

•	Skip All [image] overlooks all occurrences of the highlighted text during this grammar check

•	Auto Replace [image] replaces all instances of the same error in your document with the word in the Replacements box

To use Grammatik to check part of a document

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose an option from the Check list box.

3.	Click the Start or the Resume button.

To use Grammatik to check specific text

1.	Select the specific word or words with the Text tool.

2.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Grammatik.

 Related Topics


Editing grammar errors manually

You can edit errors by typing in the Drawing Window.

To edit grammar errors manually

1.	Click the Text tool.

2.	Select the text with the Pick tool.

3.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Grammatik.

4.	Select the highlighted text, and type the correction in the Drawing Window.

5.	Click the Resume button to continue with the grammar check.

 Related Topics


Specifying options for Grammatik

You can determine the way in which Grammatik works by specifying options.

To specify options for Grammatik

1.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Grammatik.

2.	Click the Options button.

3.	Click one of the following options:

•	Auto Start [image] begins proofreading as soon as you open Grammatik

•	Prompt Before Auto Replacement [image] displays a prompt before Grammatik inserts an automatic replacement

•	Suggest Spelling Replacements [image] displays suggestions for replacements automatically

A check mark appears beside the enabled options.

 Related Topics


Replacing passive sentences with active sentences

You can enable the passive voice grammar rule and replace passive sentences with active sentences. When a passive sentence doesn't contain a subject, you can add the subject for Grammatik to use in the replacement sentence.

To enable the passive voice rule

1.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Grammatik.

2.	Click the Options button, and click Checking Styles.

3.	Click the Edit button.

4.	Enable the Passive Voice check box in the Rule classes list.

5.	Click one of the following:

•	Save [image] edits the grammar checking style

•	Save As [image] creates a grammar checking style

To replace a passive sentence with an active sentence

1.	Select the text with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Grammatik.

3.	Choose Document from the Check list box.

4.	Choose the replacement text from the Replacement box.

5.	Click the Replace button.

To specify a subject

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Double-click <Subject> in the Replacements box.

3.	Type a subject in the New Subject box.

4.	Click OK.

5.	Click the Replace button.

 Note

•	Grammatik flags passive sentences when the Passive Voice rule is enabled. For more information about rules, see "Creating and editing grammar checking styles."

 Related Topics


Adding words to a word list during a grammar check

You can add words Grammatik doesn't recognize to a user word list.

To add a word to a user word list during a grammar check

1.	Select the text with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Grammatik.

3.	Click the Add button when Grammatik stops on a word it doesn't recognize.

 Related Topics


Changing the grammar checking language

You can change the language Grammatik uses to check a document and save it as the default language.

To change the grammar checking language

1.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Grammatik.

2.	Click the Options button, and click Language.

3.	Choose a language from the Language list.

To save a language as the default grammar check language

1.	Follow all the steps from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Save As Default Writing Tool Language check box.

 Related Topics


Changing the grammar checking style

You can change the grammar checking style Grammatik uses to check a document. By disabling and enabling rules, you can remove the rule options the style uses or add a rule you want the style to use.

To change the grammar checking style

1.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Grammatik.

2.	Click the Options button, and click Checking Styles.

3.	Choose one of the following options from the Checking Style list box.

•	Fiction [image] allows for artistic writing. The level of formality is Informal

•	Advertising [image] emphasizes mechanics and grammatical accuracy rather than style. The level of formality is Informal

•	Documentation Or Speech [image] targets a general, non-scientific audience and challenges jargon and special terminology. The level of formality is Standard

•	Technical Or Scientific [image] targets scientific publications containing long, complex noun phrases and a technical vocabulary. The level of formality is Formal

•	Informal Memo Or Letter [image] allows industry-specific jargon and is designed for less formal memos and letters. The level of formality is Informal

•	Formal Memo Or Letter [image] targets correspondence, meeting minutes, and legal documents which require a formal tone and a strict interpretation of grammar and style rules. The level of formality is Formal

•	Student Composition [image] targets longer documents. The level of formality is Formal

•	Spelling Plus [image] verifies spelling and simple rules such as punctuation and capitalization. The level of formality is Standard

•	Quick Check [image] targets most types of documents written for a general audience, such as general correspondence, informal reports, essays, and speeches. The level of formality is Standard

•	Very Strict [image] targets correspondence, meeting minutes, and legal documents which require a formal tone and a strict interpretation of grammar and style rules. The level of formality is Formal

4.	Click the Resume button.

To disable a rule during a proofreading session

1.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Grammatik.

2.	Click the Turn Off button when Grammatik displays an error you don't want it to indicate.

To enable a rule class during a proofreading session

1.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Grammatik.

2.	Click the Options button, and enable the Turn On Rules check box.

3.	Enable the check boxes beside the rules you want in the Rules list.

 Note

•	The Turn On Rules option is available only when you disable a rule during a proofreading session.

 Related Topics


Creating and editing grammar checking styles

You can create and edit grammar checking styles by adding and removing rules, changing the consecutive elements settings, and changing the level of formality.

To customize the rules of a grammar checking style

1.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Grammatik.

2.	Click the Options button, and click Checking Styles.

3.	Choose a checking style from the list box.

4.	Click the Edit button.

5.	Do one of the following:

•	Enable the check boxes beside the rules in the Rule Classes list you want to apply .

•	Disable the check boxes beside the rules in the Rule Classes list you don't want to apply.

6.	Do one of the following:

•	Click Save to save the changes to the checking style.

•	Click Save As to save create a new checking style. Type the name of the new style in the Custom Style Name box.

To change the maximum allowed settings

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Rule Classes list, enable the Consecutive Elements check box.

3.	Type a value in any of the following boxes:

•	Consecutive Nouns [image] specifies the number of consecutive nouns allowed

•	Consecutive Prepositional Phrases [image] specifies the number of consecutive prepositional phrases allowed

•	Long Sentence Length [image] specifies the maximum number of words allowed in a sentence

•	Spell Numbers Below Or Equal To [image] specifies the range of numbers to be spelled out. Set this value to zero if you don't want figures to be flagged as errors

•	Words Allowed In Split Infinitive [image] specifies the number of words allowed in a split infinitive

4.	Follow step 6 from the previous procedure.

To set the formality level

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To customize the rules of a grammar checking style" procedure.

2.	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Informal [image] allows relaxed usage of the language and colloquial expressions

•	Standard [image] allows moderate, everyday language

•	Formal [image] uses strict rules of diction and language usage

3.	Follow step 6 from the "To customize the rules of a grammar checking style" procedure.

 Note

•	When you save an edited default checking style, an asterisk (*) appears beside the style name.

 Related Topics


Restoring an edited grammar checking style

You can restore an edited predefined grammar checking style to its original settings.

To restore an edited checking style

1.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Grammatik.

2.	Click the Options button, and click Checking Styles.

3.	Choose the checking style you want to restore from the list.

4.	Click the Edit button.

5.	Click the Restore button.

6.	Click the Save button.

 Tip

•	You can identify an edited checking style by the asterisk (*) that appears beside its name.

 Related Topics


Deleting a grammar checking style

You may want to remove a grammar checking style that you no longer require.

To delete a checking style

1.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Grammatik.

2.	Click the Options button, and click Checking Styles.

3.	Choose the checking style you want to delete from the list.

 Note

•	You can delete only grammar checking styles that you create.

 Related Topics


Using Grammatik to analyze writing style

You can have Grammatik analyze the grammatical structure of your writing and your writing style to determine the level of readability.

To analyze text

1.	Using the Text tool, place the cursor in the sentence you want to analyze.

2.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Grammatik.

3.	Click the Options button.

4.	Click Analysis.

5.	 Click one of the following:

•	Parse Tree [image] analyzes the parts of sentence you selected

•	Parts Of Speech [image] identifies the parts of speech in the sentence you selected

•	Basic Counts [image] counts the text elements

•	Flagged [image] displays the number and types of flagged grammar issues

•	Readability [image] analyzes the readability of the text

 Related Topics


Analyzing parts of speech

You can have Grammatik analyze the parts of speech of a sentence and view the report.

The following table lists the abbreviations that identify parts of speech.

Abbreviation	Meaning

3v	Third person, present form of a verb

<>	Punctuation

abrv	Abbreviation

adj	Adjective

adv	Adverb

aux	Auxiliary verb

bv	Base verb, comes after to in an infinitive, or after a modal

.cj	Conjunction

c/s	Comparative or superlative forms of adjectives or adverbs

det	Determiner

ij	Interjection

inf	Infinitive

mod	Modal

num	Number

pn	Plural noun

poss	Possessive noun

ppt	Past participle

prep	Preposition

pres-p	Present participle

prn	Pronoun

pv	Past tense of a verb

sn	Singular noun

To analyze parts of speech

1.	Using the Text tool, place the cursor in the sentence you want to analyze.

2.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Grammatik.

3.	Click the Options button.

4.	Click Analysis.

5.	Click Parts Of Speech.

Note

•	The Parts Of Speech dialog box automatically updates as new errors are found.

 Related Topics


Analyzing parts of a sentence

You can analyze a sentence by having Grammatik assign a sentence part to each word or group of words. View the assignments by using a parse tree.

The following table lists the abbreviations that identify the parts of a sentence.

Abbreviation	Meaning

adv	Adverb

cj	Conjunction

direct object	Direct object

ij	Interjection

indirect object	Indirect object

main clause	Main clause

phrasal	Phrasal

prep phr	Prepositional phrase

relative clause	Relative clause

rel prn	Relative pronoun

subject	Subject

subordinate clause	Subordinate clause, referred to as "Clause #Subord."

that clause	A specialized subordinate clause starting with "that"

verb or verb phrase	Verb or verb phrase. Verb is used for a single word; verb phrase is used when several words make up the verb

wh- clause	Subordinate clause starting with "when," "how," "why," or "where"

To view a parse tree

1.	Place the Insertion point in the sentence you want to analyze with the Text tool.

2.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Grammatik.

3.	Click the Options button.

4.	Click Analysis.

5.	Click Parse Tree.

 Related Topics


Displaying basic text elements and flagged counts

You can generate a count of the basic text elements used. You can also generate a count of the types of errors flagged.

To view a basic word count

1.	Place the Insertion point in the sentence you want to analyze with the Text tool.

2.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Grammatik.

3.	Click the Options button.

4.	Click Analysis.

5.	Click Basic Counts.

To view a list of the types of errors flagged

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Flagged option.

 Related Topics


Testing the readability of a document

You can have Grammatik estimate the amount of skill required for a reader to understand a document. Grammatik does this by comparing your document with a comparison document. You can change the comparison document Grammatik uses, or add a new comparison document.

To test the readability of a document

1.	Using the Text tool,  place the Insertion point in the sentence you want to analyze.

2.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Grammatik.

3.	Click the Options button.

4.	Click Analysis.

5.	Click Readability.

To change the comparison document

1.	Follow all the steps from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose a comparison document from the Comparison Document list box.

To add a comparison document

1.	Open the document you want to use as a comparison document.

2.	Follow the steps from the "To test the readability of a document" procedure.

3.	Click the Add Document button.

 Note

•	You can add custom comparison documents to the list of comparison documents only one at a time.

 Tip

•	Use the Compare Documents feature to track your writing progress by comparing one version of the document to the next revision.

 Related Topics


Working with user word lists


Overview: Working with user word lists
Working with user word lists

User word lists are personal vocabulary lists which you create by adding words or phrases that you commonly misspell, or words which the Spell Checker and Grammatik don't recognize. When the Spell Checker and Grammatik detect an unknown word or phrase, they treat the word or phrase like an error. By adding such words and phrases to user word lists, the writing tools will recognize them as being correct.

The Spell Checker and Grammatik scan two types of word lists [image] user word lists and main word lists. You can have up to ten lists of each type active when you use the writing tools. CorelDRAW first scans the document user word lists. If the word or phrase is not found there, CorelDRAW scans the active word lists in the order in which they are displayed. If you write a document in another language, you can create and use a word list for that language and enable it. Alternative words appear in the Replacements or Suggestions list box in the Spell Checker and Grammatik.

In addition, you can customize user words lists. For example, you can add a word you want the Spell Checker and Grammatik to skip.

You can also disable or remove a user word list from the Spell Checker and Grammatik.

 Note

•	Each document has its own user word list to which you can add words and phrases that pertain to that document. You can create and use multiple user word lists when you spell check or grammar check a document. If more than one word list is activated, the document user word list is the first list the program scans.

 Related Topics


Creating and activating user word lists

You can create a user word list and add words to it or add words to an existing list. You can enable a user word list so the writing tools use it to verify documents. You can also select a user word list for another language.

To create a user word list

1.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Grammatik or Spell Check.

2.	Click the Options button, and click User Word Lists.

3.	Click the Add List button.

4.	Choose the drive and folder where you want to store the file, and type a name in the File Name box.

5.	Click the Open button.

To add a word to a user word list

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Word Lists list, enable the check box next to the user word list to which you want to add a word.

3.	Click the Add Entry button when Grammatik stops on a word you want to add.

To enable a user word list

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To create a user word list" procedure.

2.	In the Word Lists list box, enable the check box next to the word list.

To select a user word list for another language

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To create a user word list" procedure.

2.	Choose a language from the Language list box.

 Related Topics


Customizing user word lists

You can also add a list of alternative words or phrases for the Spell Checker and Grammatik to display. You can add words and phrases you want the writing tools to replace or skip. If a user word list contains an error, you can edit the list or delete the entry.

To add a list of alternative words to a user word list

1.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Grammatik or Spell Check.

2.	Click the Options button, and click User Word Lists.

3.	In the Word Lists list, enable the check box next to the word list you want to edit, if there are multiple word lists.

4.	Type the word or phrase you want to replace in the Word/Phrase box, and type its replacement in the Replace With box.

5.	Click the Add Entry button.

6.	Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each alternative word.

To add a replacement word to a user word list

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Type the word or phrase you want to replace in the Word/Phrase box, and type its replacement in the Replace With box.

3.	Click the Add Entry button.

To add a word you want to skip to a user word list

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To add a list of alternative words to a user word list" procedure.

2.	Type the word or phrase you want to skip in the Word/Phrase box.

3.	Click the Add Entry button.

To edit a word or phrase in a user word list

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To add a list of alternative words to a user word list" procedure.

2.	Select the word or phrase you want to edit in the box located at the bottom of the User Word Lists dialog box.

3.	Edit the word or phrase in the Replace With box.

4.	Click the Replace Entry button.

To delete a word from a user word list

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To add a list of alternative words to a user word list" procedure.

2.	Choose the word or phrase you want to delete in the box located at the bottom of the User Word Lists dialog box.

3.	Click the Delete Entry button.

 Related Topics


Disabling and removing user word lists

You can disable or remove a user word list from the Grammatik or Spell Checker dialog box.

To disable a user word list

1.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Grammatik or Spell Check.

2.	Click the Options button, and click User Word Lists.

3.	In the Word Lists list, disable the check box next to the word list you want to disable.

To remove a user word list

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose the user word list from the Word Lists list box.

3.	Click the Remove List button.

 Note

•	Removing a user word list does not delete it.

 Related Topics


Using Type Assist


Overview: Using Type Assist
Using Type Assist

Using Type Assist, you can correct capitalization errors automatically and create shortcuts to frequently used words and phrases. For example, you can store the phrase "for your information" under the abbreviation "FYI" so that each time you type "FYI" followed by a space, it is replaced with the phrase.

 Related Topics


Customizing Type Assist

You can use Type Assist to replace text and punctuation marks and change letter case automatically. You can also undo a Type Assist correction.

To customize Type Assist

1.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Type Assist.

2.	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Capitalize First Letter Of Sentences

•	Change Straight Quotes To Typographic Quotes

•	Correct Two Initial, Consecutive Capitals

•	Capitalize Names of Days

•	Replace Text While Typing, and type the text in the Replace box. Type the replacement text in the With box, and click the Add button

 Notes

•	The Correct Two Initial, Consecutive Capitals option doesn't make a change when a capital letter is followed by a space or period, or if a word contains other capital letters.

•	You can change the text case instead of enabling the Capitalize First Letter Of Sentences check box to change selected text to sentence case. For more information, see "Changing text case."

To undo a Type Assist correction

•	Click Edit, Undo Typing.


Using the Thesaurus


Overview: Using the Thesaurus
Using the Thesaurus

The Thesaurus displays a list of synonyms, antonyms, definitions, and examples of usage of words for which you request alternatives. Alternatives for a selected word are displayed in the Replacements list and definitions and examples of selected words are displayed in the Definitions list.

You can change the settings of the Thesaurus to control how it operates. For example, you can display a list of definitions for word. You can also specify the language the Thesaurus uses.

You can customize the Thesaurus look-up options to specify what types of alternative words appear when you look up a word.

 Related Topics


Looking for alternative phrasing

You can use the Thesaurus to find alternative words or phrases. You can also use the Thesaurus to replace a word with a synonym.

To use the Thesaurus

1.	Select the text with the Text tool.

2.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Thesaurus.

The selected word and its part of speech appears in the Replacements box. The definitions appear in the Definitions list.

3.	Double-click a word in the Replacements box to display the list of its definitions in the Definitions For list.

4.	Click the word you want to use as the replacement text.

5.	Click the Replace button.

 Tip

•	You can display a list of synonyms for a word by double-clicking it.

 Related Topics


Customizing Thesaurus settings

You can customize Thesaurus settings.

To customize Thesaurus settings

1.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Thesaurus.

2.	Click the Options button.

3.	Enable any of the following options:

•	Auto Look Up [image] enables the Thesaurus as soon as you open the dialog box

•	Auto Close [image] closes the Thesaurus when you click the Replace button

•	Show Definitions [image] displays definitions for words

•	Spelling Assist [image] displays spelling suggestions when you type a word the Thesaurus doesn't recognize

A check mark appears beside the enabled options.

 Related Topics


Changing the Thesaurus language

You can change the default language the Thesaurus uses.

To change the Thesaurus language

1.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Thesaurus.

2.	Click the Options button.

3.	Enable Language, and choose the language you want to use from the Current Language list box.

A check mark appears beside the enabled options.

 Related Topics


Customizing Thesaurus look-up options

You can customize the Thesaurus look-up options to specify what types of alternative words appear when you look up a word.

To customize Thesaurus look-up options

1.	Click Text, Writing Tools, Thesaurus.

2.	Click the Options button.

3.	Enable any of the following options:

•	Synonyms [image] looks up words with the same meaning

•	Related Words [image] looks up words with a similar meaning

•	Antonyms [image] looks up words with opposite meanings

•	Words For One Definition [image] displays words for one definition of a word at a time

A check mark appears beside enabled options.

4.	Select a word or type a word in the Replace With box.

5.	Click the Look Up button.

 Tip

•	You can also look up a word by double-clicking it in the Thesaurus dialog box.

 Related Topics


Checking statistics


Overview: Checking statistics
Checking statistics

You can check text statistics to count text elements, including the number of lines, words, characters, and the names of the fonts and styles used. You can either display statistics for selected text objects or for the entire document. If no text objects are selected, all text elements in the document, including tab and space characters, are counted.

 Related Topics


Checking statistics in a document

You can count text for an entire document or selected text.

To count text elements for an entire document

1.	Click a blank space in the Drawing Window to deselect any objects.

2.	Click Text, Text Statistics.

To count text elements for selected text

1.	Using the Pick tool, select a text object [image] either a line of Artistic text or a Paragraph text frame.

2.	Click Text, Text Statistics.

3.	Enable the Show Style Statistics check box to display information about the styles used.


Substituting unavailable fonts


Overview: Substituting unavailable fonts
Substituting unavailable fonts

When you open a file that contains a font that is not installed on your computer, PANOSE provides you with a list of fonts you can use to substitute the font. You can accept the suggestion, or choose another font. You can make the substitution for the current document only, or make it permanent.

Rather than substituting missing fonts each time you open a document containing missing fonts, you can set up a list of matches for uninstalled fonts. This list is saved for all subsequent documents when you exit CorelDRAW.

Additionally, if you use CorelDRAW to import documents from Macintosh programs, you can add to or change the table to match Windows font names to Macintosh font names.

 Related Topics


Changing font substitutions

You can change the font substitution by replacing the substitute font. You can make this font substitution temporary or permanent for that document.

To change a font substitution

1.	Open the file.

If the document contains fonts that are not installed on your computer, the PANOSE Font Matching Results dialog box appears.

2.	Choose the Missing Font and Substituted Font match you want to change.

3.	Choose a new font from the Substituted Font list box.

4.	Click OK.

5.	PANOSE Font Matching asks you if you want to save the changes to the Font Matches Exceptions file; choose the option that best suits your needs.

To change a font substitution for a document temporarily

•	In the PANOSE Font Matching Results dialog box, click the Temporary option.

To change a font substitution for a document permanently

•	In the PANOSE Font Matching Results dialog box, click the Permanent option.

 Note

•	When you choose the Permanent option, you are given the choice to make the change in the Exceptions file. Making this change means the font substitution will be permanent for all documents.

 Related Topics


Building a list of matches for missing fonts

You can build a list of matches for uninstalled fonts.

To build a list of matches for missing fonts

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Text, and click Fonts.

3.	Click the PANOSE Font Matching button.

4.	Click Exceptions in the PANOSE Font Matching Preferences dialog box to change the default substitution font.

5.	Click the Add button.

6.	Type the name of the font to replace in the Missing Font box.

7.	Choose a font that is installed on your computer from the Substituted Font list.

 Note

•	Accurately map fonts that have a different font family but look similar by editing the Alternate Spellings list.

 Related Topics


Matching a Windows font to a Macintosh font

You can specify the Windows equivalents for Macintosh fonts contained in a document.

To match a Windows font to a Macintosh font

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories double-click Text, and click Fonts.

3.	Click the PANOSE Font Matching button.

4.	Click the Spelling button.

5.	Click the Add button.

6.	Choose a Windows font name from the Windows Name box.

7.	Type the Macintosh spelling for the font in the Macintosh Name box.

 Note

•	The PANOSE Font Matching feature works only with .CDR and .CDT files. It will not work with text that you copy from the Clipboard.

 Related Topics


Setting preferences


Overview: Setting preferences
Setting preferences

When you're creating text, you can change the settings. You can change the appearance of text on-screen and adjust the increment used to change the font size through the keypad. You can also specify a text unit of measurement, change how CorelDRAW displays fonts and symbols, and change the Clipboard settings.

Greeking text increases the redraw speed by representing text with lines. You specify the maximum text size, and text below that value is greeked. Make text readable again by reducing the greeking value or by using Zoom. Greeking does not affect the printed text.

You can also change the on-screen appearance of text by smoothing characters. Anti-aliasing fills jagged pixels with intermediate color or shades of gray to increase clarity.

You can can increase or decrease the text point size using the keypad. By default, the size changes by increments of one point. You can change the default point size setting.

By default, the setting for text units of measurement is points. You can change this setting for the current and all subsequent documents you create.

When you're creating text, you can change how CorelDRAW displays fonts and symbols. For example, you can display only fonts used in the active document or display only TrueType symbols. You can also determine what nonprinting characters CorelDRAW displays in the Drawing Window and the Edit Text dialog box.

Changing the Clipboard settings affects how CorelDRAW transfers text to the Clipboard. You can specify whether text is copied or cut to the Clipboard as text or as curves. You can also specify whether calligraphic pen outlines transfer to the Clipboard or export using any of the vector graphics export filters. However, some export filters retain calligraphic outlines regardless of the setting selected.

 Related Topics


Changing the appearance of text on-screen

You can greek text to make text below a specified font size appear as lines. You can also smooth text by filling in jagged pixels.

To specify the size of text to greek

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Text.

3.	Type a value in the in the Greek Text Below box.

This specifies the number of pixels at which you want to start greeking text.

To smooth edges of screen fonts

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Smooth Edges Of Screen Fonts check box.

 Related Topics


Specifying the increment used to size text

You can specify the increment CorelDRAW uses to size text the keypad.

To specify the increment used to size text

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Text.

3.	Type a value in the Keyboard Text Increment box.

 Note

•	By holding down CTRL and pressing 8 and 2 on the keypad, you can increase and decrease the font size.

 Related Topics


Changing the default text unit of measurement

You can change the unit of measurement used for text, which affects the current and all subsequent documents you create in CorelDRAW.

To specify default text units

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Text.

3.	From the Default Text Units list box, choose the units of measurement you want to work with when formatting text.

 Related Topics


Choosing font and symbol display options

You can specify the symbol and font types displayed in the font lists on the Text toolbar and Property Bar. You can also show samples in the font lists, show only the fonts used in the active document, and specify a value to determine the number of most recently used fonts displayed in the font lists. You can also specify the symbol and font groupings for the Symbols And Special Characters Docker window.

To customize the contents of the font lists

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Text, and click Fonts.

3.	In the Font List Contents section, enable any of the following check boxes for the font and symbol groupings you want to display in the font list in the Text toolbar and Property Bar:

•	Show TrueType Fonts

•	Show Type 1 Fonts

•	Show TrueType Symbols

•	Show Type 1 Symbols

To show font samples in the font lists

1.	Follow all of the steps from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Show Font Sample In Drop Down Fonts Lists check box.

To show only the fonts used in the active document

1.	Follow all of the steps from the "To customize the contents of the font lists" procedure.

2.	Enable the Show Document Fonts Only check box.

To specify a value for the number of most recently used fonts displayed in the font lists

1.	Follow all of the steps from the "To customize the contents of the font lists" procedure.

2.	Type a value in the Display The Most Recently Used Fonts box.

To specify the contents of the symbols and special characters list

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Symbol List Contents section, enable any of the following check boxes for the symbol and font groupings you want to display in the Symbols And Special Characters Docker window:

•	Show TrueType Fonts

•	Show Type 1 Fonts

•	Show TrueType Symbols

•	Show Type 1 Symbols

 Related Topics


Displaying and specifying options for nonprinting characters

You can specify which nonprinting characters are displayed in the Drawing Window and the Edit Text dialog box.

To display nonprinting characters while editing in the Edit Text dialog box

1.	Using the Pick tool, select a text object [image] a line of Artistic text or a Paragraph text frame.

2.	Click Text, Edit Text.

3.	Click the Non-printing Characters button to display soft returns, hard returns, tabs, and spaces in the Edit Text dialog box.

To display or hide the nonprinting characters in the Drawing Window

1.	Select the text with the Text tool.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Enable the Non-printing Characters button on the Property Bar to display nonprinting characters.

•	Disable the Non-printing Characters button on the Property Bar to hide nonprinting characters.

To specify which nonprinting characters are displayed

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Text.

3.	Enable or disable the following check boxes in the Non-printing Character box:

•	Soft Returns

•	Hard Returns

•	Tabs

•	Spaces

 Related Topics


Setting Clipboard options

You can specify whether to copy or cut text to the Clipboard as text or as curves. You can also specify whether to transfer calligraphic pen outlines to the Clipboard or to export them using any of the vector graphics export filters.

To paste text to the Clipboard as text

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Text.

3.	Enable the Text In Metafile check box.

To paste text to the Clipboard as curve objects

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Disable the Text In Metafile check box.

To paste text from the Clipboard as calligraphic text

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To paste text to the Clipboard as text" procedure.

2.	Enable the Calligraphic Text check box.

 Related Topics


Customizing Corel applications


Overview: Customizing Corel applications
Customizing Corel applications

Corel applications have several customization features that let you create your own workspace. You can define shortcut keys, arrange menus, and set viewing options for Color Palettes. You can customize toolbars, the Property Bar, and the Status Bar, by changing their appearance, contents, and placement. You can also customize your import/export filters, file associations, and set system sounds. These settings are adjusted using the Options dialog box.

In addition, you can save your customization as part of your workspace settings. You can access your custom settings by loading your saved workspace.

Corel online Help is based on the application's default settings. When you customize the toolbars, the Property Bar, and the Status Bar, the Help topics associated with them do not reflect your changes.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Customizing workspace settings


Overview: Customizing workspace settings
Customizing workspace settings

Corel applications let you customize your workspace settings. You can set up your screen the way you want, choose options in the Options dialog box, and then create a custom workspace to save your settings. You can customize the tools and operations that you use most, such as menus and shortcut keys. You can access your custom settings by loading your saved workspace. You can create different workspace environments for different users or projects. For information about creating and deleting custom workspaces, see "Using multiple Workspaces."

 Related Topics


Choosing CorelDRAW startup options

You can choose what startup option is executed when CorelDRAW opens. You can choose to open a new graphic, open the last edited document, start CorelTUTOR, or another option. By default, the Welcome to CorelDRAW screen is displayed on startup.

To choose CorelDRAW startup options

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Workspace, General.

3.	From the On CorelDRAW! Start-up list box, choose one of the following options:

•	Welcome Screen [image] opens the Welcome to CorelDRAW screen, which lets you start a new graphic, open the last drawing you edited, open a graphic, start a new graphic with the template of your choice, launch CorelTUTOR, launch nothing upon opening CorelDRAW, or preview new features

•	Start A New Document [image] opens a new document

•	Open An Existing Document [image] opens the Open Drawing dialog box

•	Open the Last Edited Document [image] opens the most recent document edited in CorelDRAW

•	Select A Template [image] opens the Template wizard

•	Start CorelTUTOR [image] launches the CorelTUTOR

•	Nothing [image] launches CorelDRAW with no Welcome screen and no document

 Note

•	If you disable the Show This Welcome Screen At Startup check box on the Welcome to CorelDRAW screen, CorelDRAW remembers the option you chose, and it becomes the new startup option.

 Related Topics


Changing the position of a dialog box

You can change a dialog box's position on screen. The default setting places dialog boxes in the center of the screen; however, you can move a dialog box to another position when it is open. You can customize this setting so that the next time you access the dialog box, it appears in its previous location.

To change the position of a dialog box

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Workspace, General.

3.	Disable the Center Dialog Boxes When Displayed check box.

 Related Topics


Customizing keyboard shortcuts


Overview: Customizing keyboard shortcuts
Customizing keyboard shortcuts

Assigning keyboard shortcuts to the commands or tools that you use most often lets you work quickly and efficiently. For example, pressing CTRL + S saves your work, just as clicking File, Save does. Although Corel applications already have preset keyboard shortcuts, you can change these or add your own shortcuts to customize any Corel application to suit your working style.

In addition to assigning your own shortcuts, you can print, save, and load keyboard shortcut configurations to use with particular projects. You can also edit and remove keyboard shortcuts or restore the shortcuts to the default configuration.

 Related Topics


Assigning and deleting keyboard shortcuts

You can assign and delete keyboard shortcuts, overwrite existing ones, as well as reset them to the default setting. You can also view existing shortcuts.

When you change keyboard shortcuts, the changes are saved in a file called an accelerator table. Corel applications come with two accelerator tables which can be customized to suit your work habits:

•	Main table [image] contains all non-text related shortcut keys

•	Text Editing table [image] contains all text-related shortcut keys

To assign a keyboard shortcut to a command

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Shortcut Keys.

3.	From the Table list box, choose the accelerator table where you want to make your changes.

4.	In the Commands list, double-click a folder to view the available commands.

5.	From the Commands list, choose the command to which you want to assign a keyboard shortcut.

6.	In the Press New Shortcut Key box, type the key combination that you want to assign to the command.

7.	Enable the Delete Conflicts check box.

8.	Click the Assign button.

 Note

•	The Current Shortcut Keys list contains all the shortcut keys assigned to the selected command.

To avoid assigning the same keyboard shortcut to a command

1.	Follow steps 1 to 7 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Navigate To Conflict check box.

3.	Click the Assign button.

To overwrite an existing keyboard shortcut

1.	Follow steps 1 to 7 from the "To assign a keyboard shortcut to a command" procedure.

2.	Disable the Navigate To Conflict check box.

3.	Click the Assign button.

To delete a keyboard shortcut

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To assign a keyboard shortcut to a command" procedure.

2.	From the Commands list, choose the command from which you want to remove a keyboard shortcut.

3.	Choose the keyboard shortcut that you want to remove from the Current Shortcut Keys list box.

4.	Click the Delete button.

 Note

•	You cannot change the following keyboard shortcuts: F1, ALT + F6, ALT + TAB, ALT + ESC, CTRL + ESC, and CTRL + /.

To reset keyboard shortcuts

•	Click the Reset button.

To view existing keyboard shortcuts

•	Click the View All button.

 Related Topics


Assigning keyboard shortcuts to text styles

You can assign keyboard shortcuts to text styles, such as a bulleted list or indented paragraph. This allows you to work more quickly and efficiently when formatting your document. You can delete these keyboard shortcuts, overwrite existing ones, or reset them to the default setting. You can also view all existing shortcuts.

To assign a keyboard shortcut to a text style

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Shortcut Keys.

3.	From the Table list box, choose the accelerator table where you want to make your changes.

4.	In the Commands list, double-click the Apply Styles folder.

5.	Choose a text style from the list.

6.	In the Press New Shortcut key box, type the key combination that you want to assign to the text style.

7.	Enable the Delete Conflicts check box.

8.	Click the Assign button.

 Notes

•	Corel applications include two accelerator tables: Main (active when you're in regular drawing mode) and Text Editing (active when you're in text mode).

•	The Current Shortcut Keys list box contains all the shortcut keys assigned to the selected command.

To avoid assigning the same keyboard shortcut

1.	Follow steps 1 to 7 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Navigate to Conflict check box.

3.	Click the Assign button.

To overwrite an existing keyboard shortcut

1.	Follow steps 1 to 7 from the "To assign a keyboard shortcut to a text style" procedure.

2.	Disable the Navigate to Conflicts check box.

3.	Click the Assign button.

To delete a keyboard shortcut

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To assign a keyboard shortcut to a text style" procedure.

2.	From the Commands list, choose the command from which you want to remove a keyboard shortcut.

3.	Choose the keyboard shortcut that you want to remove from the Current Shortcut Keys list box.

4.	Click the Delete button.

 Note

•	You cannot change the following keyboard shortcuts: F1, ALT + F6, ALT + TAB, ALT + ESC, CTRL + ESC, and CTRL + /.

To reset keyboard shortcuts

•	Click the Reset button.

To view existing keyboard shortcuts

•	Click the View All button.

 Related Topics


Printing keyboard shortcuts

You can print a list of keyboard shortcuts using the Shortcut Keys page in the Options dialog box.

To print keyboard shortcuts

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Shortcut Keys.

3.	Click the View All button.

4.	Click the Print button.

 Related Topics


Saving keyboard shortcuts in a format readable by other programs

You can save a list of the keyboard shortcuts in a file format that applications such as word processors or spreadsheets can open.

To save shortcut keys in a format readable by other programs

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Shortcut Keys.

3.	Click the View All button.

4.	Click the Export To CSV button.

5.	From the Save In list box, choose the drive in which you want to save the file.

6.	Double-click the folder in which you want to save the file.

7.	Type a filename in the File Name box.

8.	Click the Save button.

 Related Topics


Customizing menus


Overview: Customizing menus
Customizing menus

Corel customization features let you modify the Menu Bar and the menus it contains. You can add commands to existing menus or add new menus to the Menu Bar. You can also remove menu commands or entire menus. To give you easy access to the functions you use most often, you can change the order of menus and menu commands. For further customization, you can rename and restore menus and menu commands, as well as change their shortcuts. This applies to the Menu Bar menus as well as pop-up menus that you access by right-clicking.

Corel online Help is based on the application's default settings. When you customize menus and menu commands, the Help topics associated with them do not change to reflect your changes.

 Related Topics


Changing the order of menus

You can use the Menus page in the Options dialog box to change the order of menus on the Menu Bar, as well as restore default settings.

To change the order of menus

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Menus.

3.	Choose Main Menu from the Menu list box.

4.	Choose a menu from the Menu list.

5.	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Up [image] moves the menu up in the list

•	Down [image] moves the menu down in the list

 Note

•	Moving a menu down in the list moves it to the right on the Menu Bar. Moving a menu up in the list moves it to the left on the Menu Bar.

 Tip

•	You can also drag the menu to change its order.

To restore the order of menus

•	Click the Reset button.

 Related Topics


Changing the order of menu commands

You can use the Menus page in the Options dialog box to change the order of menu commands, as well as restore default settings.

To change the order of menu commands

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Menus.

3.	In the Menu list, double-click the menu that contains the menu command.

4.	Click the name of the menu command.

5.	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Up [image] moves the menu command up in the list

•	Down [image] moves the menu command down in the list

 Tip

•	You can also drag the menu command to change its order.

To restore the order of menu commands

•	Click the Reset button.

 Related Topics


Adding, removing, and renaming menus

You can customize your work environment by choosing which menus appear on the Menu Bar. You can do this by adding, removing, and renaming menus.

To add a menu to the Menu Bar

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Menus.

3.	Choose Main Menu from the Menu list box.

4.	From the Menu list, choose the menu beside which you want to add a new menu on the Menu Bar.

5.	Click the Add Menu button.

6.	Type a name for the new menu.

 Note

•	The new menu appears below the chosen menu in the dialog box, but appears to the right of the chosen menu in the Menu Bar.

To remove a menu from the Menu Bar

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	From the Menu list, choose the menu you want to remove.

3.	Click the Remove button.

To rename a menu on the Menu Bar

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To add a menu to the Menu Bar" procedure.

2.	From the Menu list, choose the menu you want to rename.

3.	Click the menu again.

4.	Type the new name.

 Tip

•	You can click the Reset button to reset the menus on the Menu Bar to the default settings.

 Related Topics


Adding, removing, and renaming menu commands

You can customize your work environment by choosing which commands appear in the menus. You can do this by adding, removing, and renaming commands. You can also determine a command's placement in a menu.

To add a menu command to a menu

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Menus.

3.	In the Menu list, click the name of the menu to which you want to add a command.

4.	In the Commands list, double-click the folder that contains the menu command you want to add.

5.	In the Commands list, click the menu command that you want to add.

6.	Click the Add button.

To remove a menu command from a menu

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Menu list, double-click the name of the menu from which you want to remove a menu command.

3.	Click the menu command that you want to remove.

4.	Click the Remove button.

To rename a menu command

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To add a menu command to a menu" procedure.

2.	In the Menu list, double-click the menu containing the menu command you want to rename.

3.	Click the menu command again.

4.	Type the new menu command name.

 Notes

•	You can click the Reset button at any time to reset the menu commands to the default settings.

•	You can drag a menu command from one box to another to add or remove it.

 Related Topics


Adding and removing menu command separators

You can add or remove a menu command separator [image] the horizontal line in a menu that distinguishes one group of menu commands from another.

To add a menu command separator

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Menus.

3.	In the Menu list, double-click the name of the menu to which you want to add a separator.

4.	Click the menu command below which you want the separator to appear.

5.	Click the Separator button.

To remove a menu command separator

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Menu list, double-click the name of the menu from which you want to remove a separator.

3.	Click the separator you want to remove.

4.	Click the Remove button.

 Tip

•	You can click the Reset button to reset the Main Menu to the default settings.

 Related Topics


Changing menu and menu command shortcuts

You can change the shortcuts used to access application menus and menu commands.

To change a menu shortcut

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Menus.

3.	In the Menu list, click the menu to which you want to change the shortcut.

4.	Click the name of the menu again.

5.	Insert an ampersand (&) before the letter you want to use as the shortcut.

6.	Remove all other ampersands from the menu name.

To change a menu command shortcut

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Menus.

3.	In the Menu list, double-click the menu containing the menu command to which you want to change the shortcut.

4.	Click the name of the menu command.

5.	Click the menu command again.

6.	Insert an ampersand (&) before the letter you want to use as the shortcut.

7.	Remove all other ampersands from the menu command name.

 Notes

•	Be sure the shortcut letter you choose is not already being used in the same menu.

•	Clicking the Reset button restores the original menu settings.

 Related Topics


Customizing a Color Palette


Overview: Customizing a Color Palette
Customizing a Color Palette

As with many Corel application components, manipulating Color Palettes couldn't be easier. For example, by clicking and dragging, you can display, hide, and move a Color Palette. You can also dock a Color Palette at the top, bottom, or side of the Application Window, or drag it onto the work area to create a floating Color Palette.

For quick access to menu commands, you can set the right mouse button menu of a Color Palette, to view either a pop-up menu, or set the outline color.

You customize Color Palettes by choosing the contents, color, and arrangement. You also can resize color swatches, view a Color Palette in multiple (up to seven) rows, and adjust the width of a Color Palette's border.

For information about customizing a Color Palette, such as opening, creating, editing, saving, and deleting a custom Color Palette, see "Customizing Color Palettes."

 Related Topics


Setting the right mouse button menu of a Color Palette

Setting the right mouse button options lets you choose whether to view a pop-up menu, or set the outline color, when you right-click a Color Palette.

To set the Pop-Up Menu option

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Color Palette.

3.	Enable the Pop-Up Menu button.

To set the Outline Color option

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Set Outline Color button.

 Tip

•	If you enable the Set Outline Color button, you can still view the pop-up menu by right-clicking a color swatch for one second and then releasing, or by right-clicking anywhere on the border of a Color Palette.

 Related Topics


Changing the border width of a Color Palette

You can choose to enlarge or reduce the space between the color swatches on a Color Palette, by adjusting its border width.

To enlarge the border width of a Color Palette

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Color Palette.

3.	Enable the Wide Borders check box.

To reduce the border width of a Color Palette

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Disable the Wide Borders check box.

 Related Topics


Resizing color swatches

You can change the appearance of a Color Palette by increasing or decreasing the size of the color swatches.

To view large color swatches

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In this list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Color Palette.

3.	Enable the Large Swatches check box.

To view small color swatches

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Disable the Large Swatches check box.

 Related Topics


Hiding or viewing the No Color Well

You can choose to view or hide the No Color Well.

To view the No Color Well

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Color Palette.

3.	Enable the Show "No Color" Well check box.

To hide the No Color Well

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Disable the Show "No Color" Well check box.

 Note

•	On the Color Palette, the No Color Well is represented by an "X".

 Related Topics


Changing the number of Color Palette rows when docked

You can choose how many rows are displayed when a Color Palette is docked.

To change the number of Color Palette rows

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Color Palette.

3.	Enter the number of rows in the Maximum Palette Rows When Docked box.

 Related Topics


Customizing toolbars


Overview: Customizing toolbars
Customizing toolbars

You have complete control over the position and content of toolbars. Using the mouse, you can resize or move toolbars anywhere inside the work area, and choose which toolbars you want displayed in the Application Window. You can add, remove, and rearrange toolbar commands (except in the Toolbox). You can also create your own custom toolbars containing the commands you use most often.

In addition, you can change the appearance of toolbar buttons. You can choose to view text on the toolbar button in place of an image, edit the text that appears on the toolbar button, as well as edit the actual images.

 Related Topics


Moving and resizing a toolbar

You can move a toolbar anywhere on screen. Placing it inside the Application Window creates a floating toolbar with a Title Bar. Placing it on any of the four sides of the Application Window docks the toolbar, making it part of the window border.

You can also resize a floating toolbar, but not a docked toolbar.

To move a toolbar

•	Click the toolbar's border, and drag it to a new position.

When you drag the toolbar onto the work area, it becomes a floating toolbar.

To dock a toolbar

•	Click the toolbar's border, and drag it toward the edge of the Application Window until it changes shape.

To resize a floating toolbar

1.	Place the cursor on the edge of the toolbar.

2.	Using the two-directional arrow, drag the edge of the toolbar to resize it.

 Tip

•	Double-clicking the toolbar when it is floating docks it in its last docked position.

 Related Topics


Viewing a toolbar

The toolbars that come with your Corel application give you access to a variety of frequently used commands and functions. You can choose which toolbars you want displayed in the Application Window. This includes any of the custom toolbars you have made.

To view a toolbar

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Customize.

3.	In the Toolbars list, enable the check box next to the toolbar that you want to display.

 Related Topics


Viewing or hiding titles on floating toolbars

You can choose whether or not to view titles on floating toolbars. It is useful to view them so you always know which toolbar you are viewing, especially if you are making any changes to that toolbar.

To view titles on floating toolbars

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Customize.

3.	Enable the Show Titles On Floating Toolbars check box.

To hide titles on floating toolbars

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Disable the Show Titles On Floating Toolbars check box.

 Related Topics


Resizing toolbar buttons and button borders

You can change the size of toolbar buttons and the borders surrounding the buttons on toolbars.

To resize toolbar buttons

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Customize.

3.	In the Size section, move the Button slider to adjust the size of the buttons.

To resize toolbar button borders

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Size section, move the Border slider to adjust the size of the borders.

 Related Topics


Restoring built-in toolbars

If you alter the configuration of a built-in toolbar, you can restore it to its original setting.

To restore the original configuration of a built-in toolbar

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Customize.

3.	In the Toolbars list, click the name of the toolbar you want to reset.

4.	Click the Reset button.

 Related Topics


Creating and deleting a custom toolbar

You can create custom toolbars that contain the commands you use most often. These toolbars can be used for several different projects within the same application. You can delete custom toolbars at any time, unlike the predefined toolbars provided with the application.

To create a custom toolbar

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Customize.

3.	Click the New button.

4.	Type a name for the new toolbar.

To delete a custom toolbar

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	From the Toolbars list, click the toolbar that you want to delete.

3.	Click the Delete button.

 Related Topics


Renaming a custom toolbar

You can change the name of custom toolbars at any time, but you cannot change the names of the predefined toolbars provided with the application.

To rename a custom toolbar

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Customize.

3.	In the Toolbars list, click the name of the toolbar you want to rename.

4.	Click the toolbar name again.

5.	Type a new name for the toolbar.

 Related Topics


Adding toolbar items to a custom toolbar

You can add toolbar items to customize toolbars. You cannot add toolbar items to the Toolbox or to any of its flyouts.

To add a toolbar item to a custom toolbar

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Customize.

3.	In the Toolbars list, enable the toolbar to which you want to add a toolbar item.

4.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Toolbars.

5.	In the Commands list, double-click the folder that contains the toolbar item you want to add.

6.	Click the toolbar item you want to add to the toolbar.

7.	Drag the toolbar item icon to the desired toolbar in the Application Window.

 Note

•	You must be on the Toolbars page to add toolbar items to a toolbar.

 Related Topics


Removing toolbar items from a custom toolbar

You can remove toolbar items from custom toolbars, but you cannot remove toolbar items from the Toolbox or from any of its flyouts.

To remove a toolbar item from a custom toolbar

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Customize.

3.	In the Toolbars list, enable the toolbar from which you want to remove a toolbar item.

4.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Toolbars.

5.	Drag the toolbar item icon you want to remove from the toolbar to the Application Window.

 Note

•	You must be on the Toolbars page to remove toolbar items from a toolbar.

 Related Topics


Rearranging toolbar items on a custom toolbar

You can rearrange the order of toolbar items on a custom toolbar to best suit your needs.

To rearrange toolbar items

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Customize.

3.	In the Toolbars list, enable the toolbar on which you want to rearrange toolbar items.

4.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Toolbars.

5.	Drag the toolbar item icon to a new position.

 Note

•	You must be on the Toolbars page to rearrange toolbar items on a toolbar.

 Related Topics


Moving and copying toolbar items from a custom toolbar

You can move and copy toolbar items from a custom toolbar.

To move a toolbar item to another toolbar

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Customize.

3.	In the Toolbars list, enable the toolbar from which you want to move a toolbar item.

4.	In the Toolbars list, enable the toolbar to which you want to move a toolbar item.

5.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Toolbars.

6.	Drag the toolbar item icon from one toolbar to the other.

To copy a toolbar item to another toolbar

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Toolbars list, enable the toolbar from which you are copying a toolbar item.

3.	In the Toolbars list, enable the toolbar to which you are copying a toolbar item.

4.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Toolbars.

5.	Hold down CTRL and drag the toolbar item icon from one toolbar to another.

 Notes

•	You create a new toolbar when you drag a toolbar icon from the Toolbars page in the Options dialog box, to the Application Window.

•	You must be on the Toolbars page to move and copy toolbar items.

 Related Topics


Changing the appearance of all toolbar buttons

You can change the appearance of toolbar buttons so that text is displayed instead of images. You can choose to have both the image and text on the toolbar button. You can also restore default toolbar button settings. Changing any of the default settings on the Customize page of the Options dialog box, alters the appearance of all the toolbars in the application.

To view text instead of images on toolbars

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Customize.

3.	In the Default Button Appearance section, enable the Text Only button.

To view images instead of text on toolbars

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Default Button Appearance section, enable the Image Only button.

To view text below the image on toolbars

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To view text instead of images on toolbars" procedure.

2.	In the Default Button Appearance section, enable the Text Below Image button.

 Related Topics


Changing the appearance of individual toolbar buttons

You can customize the appearance of individual toolbar buttons on specific toolbars, instead of changing the appearance of all toolbar buttons.

To view text instead of images on a toolbar button

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Toolbars.

3.	On the toolbar outside of the Options dialog box, right-click the toolbar button you want to change, and click Text Button.

To view images instead of text on a toolbar button

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	On the toolbar outside of the Options dialog box, right-click the toolbar button you want to change, and click Image Button.

 Note

•	You can only change the appearance of individual toolbar buttons through the Toolbars page of the Options dialog box.

 Related Topics


Editing and restoring toolbar buttons

You can further customize toolbar buttons by editing the images of individual toolbar buttons. You can also restore the images to the default setting.

To edit toolbar button images

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Toolbars.

3.	On the toolbar outside of the Options dialog box, right-click the toolbar button you want to edit, and click Properties.

4.	Use the controls to change the appearance of the bitmap.

To restore toolbar button images

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	On the toolbar outside of the Options dialog box, right-click the toolbar button you want to restore, and click Properties.

3.	Click the Restore Defaults button.

 Note

•	You can only change the appearance of individual toolbar buttons through the Toolbars page of the Options dialog box.

 Related Topics


Customizing the Property Bar


Overview: Customizing the Property Bar
Customizing the Property Bar

You have complete control over the placement and content of the Property Bar. Using the mouse, you can resize a Property Bar, move it anywhere inside the Application Window, or dock it to the Application Window. You can also customize a Property Bar by adding or removing toolbar items, or by rearranging the toolbar items.

 Related Topics


Moving and resizing the Property Bar

You can move the Property Bar anywhere on screen. Placing it inside the Application Window creates a floating Property Bar with a Title Bar. Placing it on any of the four sides of the Application Window docks it, making it part of the window border. You can also change the size of the Property Bar when it is floating, but not when it is docked.

To move the Property Bar

•	Click the Property Bar's border, and drag it to a new position.

 Note

•	Dragging the Property Bar onto the work area creates a floating toolbar.

To dock the Property Bar

•	Click the Property Bar's border, and drag it toward the edge of the Application Window until it changes shape.

To resize a floating Property Bar

1.	Place the cursor on the edge of the Property Bar.

2.	Using the two-directional arrow, drag the edge of the Property Bar to resize it.

 Tip

•	Double-clicking the Property Bar when it is floating docks it to its last docked position.

 Related Topics


Setting up a custom Property Bar

You can customize what appears on the Property Bar when you have different items selected. For example, when you select the Rectangle tool, the Property Bar displays the default settings and controls related to the Rectangle tool. You can add, move, and remove toolbar items from a Property Bar as needed.

To add a toolbar item to a Property Bar

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Toolbars.

3.	Choose the Property Bar you want to customize from the Property Bars list box.

4.	In the Commands list, double-click the folder containing the toolbar item you want to add to the Property Bar.

5.	Click the toolbar item you want to add to the Property Bar.

6.	Drag the toolbar item icon to the Property Bar.

To rearrange toolbar items on a Property Bar

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	From the Property Bars list box, choose the Property Bar on which you want to move a toolbar item.

3.	Drag the toolbar item icon to a new position.

To remove a toolbar item from a Property Bar

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To add a toolbar item to a Property Bar" procedure.

2.	From the Property Bars list box, choose the Property Bar from which you want to remove a toolbar item.

3.	Drag the toolbar item icon off the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Customizing the Status Bar


Overview: Customizing the Status Bar
Customizing the Status Bar

The Status Bar gives you up-to-date information about your working environment, such as the colors used for fills and outlines, and the position of your cursor. You can customize the Status Bar to suit your needs. For instance, you can change its position, size, and contents. You can also choose whether to display or hide it, or add and remove its contents.

 Related Topics


Moving, resizing, and restoring the Status Bar

You can move the Status Bar to the top or bottom of the Application Window. You can resize a Status Bar or a Status Bar item, and reset it to its previous settings.

To move the Status Bar

1.	Right-click the Status Bar, and click Position.

2.	Choose one of the following options:

•	Top [image] places the Status Bar at the top of the Application Window

•	Bottom [image] places the Status Bar at the bottom of the Application Window

To resize the Status Bar

1.	Right-click the Status Bar, and click Size.

2.	Choose one of the following options:

•	One Line [image] changes the Status Bar to one line

•	Two Lines [image] changes the Status Bar to two lines

To resize a Status Bar item

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Toolbars.

3.	On the Status Bar, click the Status Bar item you want to resize.

4.	Position the cursor on the edge of the highlighted box.

5.	Drag to resize the item.

To reset the Status Bar

•	Right-click the Status Bar, and click Reset Status Bar.

 Tip

•	You can also access the Toolbars page of the Options dialog box by right-clicking the Status Bar and clicking Customize.

 Related Topics


Hiding or displaying the Status Bar

When displayed, the Status Bar provides useful information, however, if you want to see more of the Application Window, you can hide the Status Bar.

To display the Status Bar

1.	Click Window, Toolbars.

2.	In the Toolbars list, enable the Status Bar check box.

To hide the Status Bar

1.	Click Window, Toolbars.

2.	In the Toolbars list, disable the Status Bar check box.

 Tip

•	You can also right-click the Status Bar, and click Hide Status Bar.

 Related Topics


Changing the contents of the Status Bar

You can customize the Status Bar to display the information you want, by adding and removing toolbar items.

To add toolbar items to the Status Bar

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Customize, and click Toolbars.

3.	In the Commands list, double-click the Status Bar folder.

4.	Click the toolbar item you want to add to the Status Bar.

5.	Drag the toolbar item icon to the Status Bar.

To remove toolbar items from the Status Bar

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Drag the toolbar item icon off the Status Bar.

 Tip

•	You can also access the Toolbars page by right-clicking the Status Bar and clicking Customize.

 Related Topics


Customizing filters


Overview: Customizing filters
Customizing filters

Import/export filters are used to convert files from one format to another. You can customize filter settings by adding or removing filters so that only the filters you need are loaded.

 Related Topics


Adding and removing filters

You can customize filters using the Filters page in the Options dialog box. Filters are organized in three categories: Raster, Vector, and Text.

To add a filter

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters.

3.	From the Available File Types list, double-click the type of filter you want to add.

4.	Click the name of the filter you want to add.

5.	Click the Add button.

To remove a filter

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the List Of Active Filters list, click the filter you want to remove.

3.	Click the Remove button.

 Related Topics


Changing the order of the list of filters

You can change the order of the filters listed in the List Of Active Filters list.

To change the order of the list of filters

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters.

3.	In the List Of Active Filters list, click the filter you want to move.

4.	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Move Up [image] moves the filter up the list

•	Move Down [image] moves the filter down the list

 Related Topics


Resetting filters to default settings

If you change your mind about some filters you added or removed, you can reset the filters to their previous settings.

To reset the filters

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters.

3.	Click the Reset button.

 Related Topics


Customizing file associations


Overview: Customizing file associations
Customizing file associations

You can associate many file types with Corel applications. When you double-click a file of a type you have associated with a Corel application, the application launches and opens the file.

 Related Topics


Associating a file type with CorelDRAW

When you double-click a file you have associated with CorelDRAW, CorelDRAW launches and the file opens.

To associate a file type with CorelDRAW

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Global, Filters, and Associate.

3.	In the Associated File Extensions With CorelDRAW 9 list, enable the check box of the file type you want to associate.

To break a file type association with CorelDRAW

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Associate File Extensions With CorelDRAW 9 list, disable the check box of the file type for which you want to break the association.

 Related Topics


Resetting file associations to default settings

You can reset the file associations to their previous settings.

To reset file associations

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Global, Filters, and click Associate.

3.	Click the Reset button.

 Related Topics


Customizing feedback sounds


Overview: Customizing feedback sounds
Customizing feedback sounds

CorelDRAW supports sounds through the Operating System. These sounds are associated with certain user interface events. These events can be enabled or disabled through the Tools, Options, Workspace, General setting. Though CorelDRAW registers events available for sound cues, it does not supply any sounds. You can assign sounds to specific events through your Operating System's Control Panel, from the CorelDRAW sound events category.

 Related Topics


Assigning feedback sounds

You can assign feedback sounds to specific events through your Operating System's Control Panel.

To assign feedback sounds

1.	Click the Windows Start button, Settings, and Control Panel.

2.	Double-click Sounds.

3.	In the Events list, scroll to CorelDRAW 9.

4.	Click the event you want.

5.	In the Name list box, enter the sound you want.

 Note

•	For more information about feedback sounds, consult your Operating System's Help File.

 Related Topics


Enabling and disabling feedback sounds

You can choose to enable or disable feedback sounds for specific events.

To enable feedback sounds

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click General.

3.	Enable the Enable Sounds check box.

 Note

•	The Enable Sounds check box is enabled by default.

To disable feedback sounds

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Disable the Enable Sounds check box.

 Note

•	When you enable or disable sounds, you must restart CorelDRAW for this feature to take effect.

 Related Topics


Reference


Using the command line in Windows


Overview: Using the command line in Windows
Using the command line in Windows

The CorelDRAW application may be started from the Start, Run command line in Windows 95 and
Windows NT 4.0. The command line may be used to provide the following options upon startup:

•	display the Help window

•	minimize the application

•	suppress the splash screen

•	load files

•	restore factory defaults


Displaying command line Help

This procedure allows you to view the CorelDRAW Help. Although the Help window opens to this particular topic, you can navigate the rest of the Help system through the Contents tab.

To display command line Help

1.	Click Start, Run in Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0.

2.	Type the pathname for the Coreldrw.exe followed by /h, /H, /?, -h, -H, or -?

e.g., c:\draw8\programs\coreldrw /h

 Related Topics


Starting the application in a minimized state

If you want the application to startup but remain in a minimized state on the Taskbar, the following procedure is used.

To start the application in a minimized state

1.	Click Start, Run in Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0.

2.	Type the pathname for the Coreldrw.exe followed by /min or -min

e.g., c:\draw8\programs\coreldrw /min

 Note

•	The application will display the splash screen then reduce to a minimized state

 Related Topics


Suppressing the splash screen

Upon startup the application will display a splash screen by default. The splash screen monitors the progress of the startup process and provides information on copyright and registration. The following procedure may be performed if you do not wish to display the splash screen.

To suppress the splash screen

1.	Click Start, Run in Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0.

2.	Type the pathname for the Coreldrw.exe followed by /nosplash or -nosplash

e.g., c:\draw8\programs\coreldrw /nosplash

 Related Topics


Loading a file

A Welcome Screen is displayed by default when the CorelDRAW application is started. The Welcome Screen provides you with six options, one of which is opening an existing graphic. You can skip this screen and load the graphic directly from the command line as outlined in the procedure below.

To load a file

1.	Click Start, Run in Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0.

2.	Type the pathname for the Coreldrw.exe followed by the pathname for desired file

e.g., c:\draw8\programs\coreldrw c:\corel\draw8\samples\camera.cdr

 Note

•	More than one file may be opened at a time by appending the pathname(s) to the end of the same command line e.g. c:\draw8\programs\coreldrw c:\corel\draw8\samples\camera.cdr c:\corel\draw8\samples\test.cdr

 Related Topics


Restoring factory defaults for Workspace Manager

This procedure provides the same result as pressing F8 while starting the CorelDRAW application. You will be asked to verify that you want to overwrite the current workspace with the factory default.

To restore factory defaults for the Workspace Manager

1.	Click Start, Run in Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0.

2.	Type the pathname for the Coreldrw.exe followed by /factory or -factory

e.g., c:\draw8\programs\coreldrw /factory

 Related Topics


Using the command line in DOS


Overview: Using the command line in DOS
Using the command line in DOS

The CorelDRAW application may be started from the DOS environment. The following startup options are available:

•	display this Help window

•	minimize the application

•	suppress the splash screen

•	load files

•	restore factory defaults


Displaying command line Help from DOS

This command allows you to view the CorelDRAW Help. Although the Help window opens to this particular topic, you can navigate the rest of the Help system through the Contents tab.

To display command line Help

1.	Ensure that you are working from within the directory where the Coreldrw.exe file resides.

2.	Type Coreldrw followed by /h, /H, /?, -h, -H, or -?

e.g.,coreldrw /h

 Related Topics


Starting the application in a minimized state from DOS

If you want the application to startup but remain in a minimized state on the Taskbar, the following procedure is used.

To start the application in a minimized state

1.	Ensure that you are working from within the directory where the Coreldrw.exe file resides.

2.	Type Coreldrw followed by /min or -min

e.g., coreldrw /min

 Note

•	The application will display the splash screen then reduce to a minimized state

 Related Topics


Suppressing the splash screen from DOS

Upon startup the application will display a splash screen by default. The splash screen monitors the progress of the startup process and provides information on copyright and registration. The following procedure may be performed if you do not wish to display the splash screen.

To suppress the splash screen

1.	Ensure that you are working from within the directory where the Coreldrw.exe file resides.

2.	Type Coreldrw followed by /nosplash or -nosplash

e.g., coreldrw /nosplash

 Related Topics


Loading a file from DOS

A Welcome Screen is displayed by default when the CorelDRAW application is started. The Welcome Screen provides you with six options, one of which is opening an existing graphic. You can skip this screen and load the graphic directly from the command line as outlined in the procedure below.

To load a file

1.	Ensure that you are working from within the directory where the Coreldrw.exe file resides.

2.	Type Coreldrw followed by the pathname for desired file

e.g., coreldrw c:\corel\draw8\samples\camera.cdr

 Note

•	More than one file may be opened at a time by appending the pathname(s) to the end of the same command line e.g. coreldrw c:\corel\draw8\samples\camera.cdr c:\corel\draw8\samples\test.cdr

 Related Topics


Restoring factory defaults from DOS

This procedure provides the same result as pressing F8 while starting the CorelDRAW application. You will be asked to verify that you want to overwrite the current workspace with the factory default.

To restore factory defaults for the Workspace Manager

1.	Ensure that you are working from within the directory where the Coreldrw.exe file resides.

2.	Type Coreldrw followed by /factory or -factory

e.g., coreldrw /factory

 Related Topics


Working with color


Overview: Working with color
Working with color

It is important to understand how color is communicated by your scanner, monitor, and printer in order to achieve a consistent and accurate reproduction of the colors you desire. A basic understanding of the color spaces and color management of your equipment helps you achieve the precise color you want for your project. Color management is the process of ensuring that the final colors you see in your project are as close to, or as accurate a reproduction of the ones you want no matter which devices you use.

We all see color differently. Color is subjective to the human eye. Each device that interacts with your project's file: the scanner, monitor, and printer may have a different color space. For example, a color that is visible to the human eye may not be reproducible by your printer.

Because there are so many color variations, a precise method for defining each color is required. For example, once you find the perfect shade of light orange, you need to be able to reproduce that color and possibly tell others how to do the same. A color model defines that perfect shade of light orange by breaking it down into precise components that allow you to accurately transmit the information to other people and to the electronic devices you use to create projects. A color model is a system used to organize and define colors according to a set of basic properties which are reproducible.

Color models

There are many different color models that define colors, for example, HSB, RGB, CMYK, and CIE Lab color models. The RGB and CMYK color models are only two of a number of models developed to suit a variety of digital design and desktop publishing applications. It is not necessary to be familiar with all these models, but it is helpful to be familiar with a few of the more widely used ones.

HSB model

Without any light or a viewer, objects all around us are colorless. Color only occurs in our minds after our visual sensory system has seen the wavelengths that give objects their color. Based on how people perceive color, the HSB color model defines color in three attributes:

•	Hue (H)

•	Saturation (S)

•	Brightness (B)

Hue (H) is the name we give a color in everyday language. Hues form the Color Wheel. The hue of a lemon is yellow, that of a strawberry is red. Saturation (S) refers to vividness of the color or how much color concentration does the object contain. The figurine does not contain very much yellow when compared to the yellow saturation of lemon. Colors can be separated into bright or dark colors when their Brightness (B) is compared. Brightness refers to adding or removing whiteness from a color. The mask is bright and lighter then the dark yellow lemon.

RGB model

The millions of colors your monitor produces can all be described as amounts of red, green, and blue. These three color components form the basis for the RGB (Red, Green, and Blue) color model. Each of the three colors is assigned a numeric value between 0 and 255. The RGB model is based on colors of light, and higher RGB values correspond to the presence of greater quantities of white light. Consequently, higher RGB values result in lighter colors. When all three color components are at the maximum value, the resulting color is white light. Because the RGB model creates colors by adding light, it is called an additive color model. Monitors and scanners can employ the additive color model because they emit light. They emit particles of red, green, and blue light and create the illusion of millions of different colors.

0	One of the limitations of the RGB model is that it is device dependent. This means that not only are there color variations between monitors and scanners by different manufacturers but there are color variations between identical devices from the same manufacturer. All monitors drift over time and display colors differently making it imperative to regularly calibrate your monitor and the other electronic devices you use to create your projects. The RGB model cannot be a color standard because its color results are not 100 percent repeatable.

CMYK model

The colors you see on your monitor are reproduced on paper using pigments instead of light. Printers render colors on paper and other mediums through reflected light. The most common method of reproducing color images on paper is by combining cyan, magenta, yellow, and black pigments. These four colors are the color components of the CMYK (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and black) color model. Each color of the CMYK color model is described as a percentage (from 0 to 100). Pigments produce color by reflecting certain wavelengths of light while absorbing others. Darker pigments absorb more light. Because the CMYK color model is based on pigment colors, higher percentages of pigment result in darker colors. In theory, when 100 percent cyan, 100 percent magenta, and 100 percent yellow are combined, the resulting color is black. In reality, a muddy brown is produced so black pigment must be added to the color model and to the printing process, to compensate for the color limitations. The CMYK color model is called a subtractive color model because it creates colors by absorbing light. The CMYK model cannot be a color standard because its color results are not 100 percent repeatable as it is a device dependent color model.

CIE Lab model

A great deal of color research has been accomplished in order to acquire a color model that is device independent and repeatable. In 1931 La Commision Internationale de L'Eclairage (CIE) defined a device-independent color model, based on how the human eye perceives color. The CIE Lab model incorporates the theory that a color cannot be both green and red at the same time nor can it be yellow and blue at the same time. As such, single values are used to describe the green/red and blue/yellow components of any color. Lab stands for the three values this model uses to define color [image] a lightness value (L) which can range from 0 to 100 and two chromaticity ranges: green to red (a) and blue to yellow (b). The two chromaticity values can range from +120 to -120. Lab (sometimes called L*a*b*) provides a system for defining color that bases color values on widely accepted standards rather than on individual color-producing devices.

Reproducing colors accurately

Each piece of equipment you use, from scanners to printers, to create your project, has a specific range of colors that it can reproduce. This is referred to as a device gamut. If you don't take these differences into account, the colors you see on your monitor may not match the colors on the printed page. For more information, see "Reproducing colors accurately."

 More Detailed Information


Choosing colors


Overview: Choosing colors
Choosing colors

You are able to display multiple on-screen Color Palettes. The quickest way to choose a color is by using the on-screen Color Palettes. However, none of the on-screen Color Palettes contain quite the right color, you can use one of the following methods of choosing colors. Each method offers different ways of finding the perfect color. The method you choose should be based on how you prefer to work.

Choosing a color by a color model

The color models offer a visual representation of the full spectrum of colors. You can change the color by manipulating the controls associated with the color model. For example, when you use the default color viewer, which is the HSB color model, you can change the hue (the color) by moving a slider.

Choosing a color by blending

The color blender allows you to combine colors. The color blender displays a grid of colors that it creates from the four base colors you select.

Choosing a color using color harmonies

Color harmonies are most useful when you're selecting several colors for a project. By using color harmonies, you are guaranteed that the colors you choose look good together. Color harmonies work by superimposing a shape, such as a rectangle or a triangle, over a Color Wheel. You can also manipulate the superimposed shape (the rectangle, triangle, or pentagon.) As you move the black spot on the shape around the wheel, the other circles also move. The colors at each corner are always complementary, contrasting, or harmonious, depending on the shape you select. The color harmonies now allow you to select the color model you prefer to use. You can choose from several different color models, including the RGB or CMYK models.

Choosing a color from a color palette

You have the ability to display multiple on-screen Color Palettes, and keep them floating, or dock them to any edge of the Application Window.

There are two types of color palettes from which you can choose colors: fixed color palettes and custom color palettes. Don't confuse these types of color palettes with the ability to have multiple on-screen Color Palettes. On-screen Color Palettes are used to display and select colors from both fixed and custom color palettes. To open multiple on-screen Color Palettes, use the Color Palette Browser and enable the on-screen Color Palettes name check box. You can explore the new PANTONE metallic color palettes. We feature the PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM and PANTONE Pastel Colors, which can be printed on coated or uncoated paper.

Fixed color palettes are provided by third-party manufacturers and are most useful when accompanied by a color swatch book. A swatch book is a collection of color samples that shows exactly what each color looks like when printed. The best reason for using a color from a fixed color palette is seeing exactly how that color appears when it's printed correctly. Swatch books are available at most art supply stores or directly from a swatch book manufacturer.

Several fixed color palettes are collections of spot color inks. If you select a color from one of these palettes, be aware that each color requires its own color separation. Spot color palettes have a tint control slider, which allows you to choose the percentage of ink density you desire for that color. For more information about spot colors and color separations, see "Creating color separations."

Custom color palettes are collections of colors you have chosen to save as a color palette file (.CPL extension).You have the ability to copy a color swatch by dragging a color swatch from any palette into your custom palettes. There is no limit to the number of custom palettes you can create. For more information, see "Customizing Color Palettes." Any on-screen Color Palette can be selected to be the default on-screen Color Palette. The default Color Palette is used in all of the color pickers.

Choosing a color from the Color Docker window

The Color Docker window can be docked to any edge of the Application Window or float as a separate window. You can also change the appearance and size of the Color Docker window. With the Color Docker window open, you can access other tools and windows.

 Related Topics


Choosing a color from the on-screen Color Palette

The quickest way to add colors to an object is by clicking on a color swatch within any of the on-screen Color Palettes. One feature that is unique to all on-screen Color Palettes, is that they let you augment the current color of an object with a new color. For example, you can add some red to a yellow object to create an orange object. Spot colors in the on-screen Color Palette are marked by a dot in the bottom-left corner of the color swatch.

To choose the fill or outline color of an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Click a color in the on-screen Color Palette to change the fill color.

•	Right-click a color in the on-screen Color Palette to change the outline color.

To augment the current fill or outline color of an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Hold down CTRL, and click a color in the on-screen Color Palette to change the fill color.

•	Hold down CTRL, and right-click a color in the on-screen Color Palette to change the outline color.

3.	Repeat step 2 to add more color.

 Tips

•	You can also change the fill or outline color of an object by dragging the color swatch from the on-screen Color Palette to the outline or fill of the object.

•	You can also augment the current fill or outline color of an object by holding down CTRL and dragging the color swatch from the on-screen Color Palette to the outline or fill of the object.

•	Hold down the mouse on a color swatch to view a grid of neighboring colors.

 Related Topics


Choosing a color from the color viewer

The default color viewer is based on the HSB color model. You can select different color models, e.g., CMYK, RGB, Lab, or grayscale for the color you're choosing, but the color viewer remains based on the HSB model. You can select other color viewers if you don't want to use the HSB color viewer. You may want to add the color you chose into a custom palette. For more information see "Editing an existing Custom Palette."

To choose the fill or outline color of an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click the Uniform Fill button to change the fill color.

•	Open the Outline Tool flyout and click the Outline Color Dialog button to change the outline color.

3.	Click the Models Tab.

4.	Hold down the mouse button on the Models list box to display the color model list.

5.	Hold down the mouse button on the Options, select Color Viewers to display and select the color model from the color viewer list.

6.	Do one of the following:

•	Drag the small box in the color selection area to the color you want to use.

•	Move the color slider up or down to change the range of colors displayed in the color selection area on the left.

•	Use the name list box, and select a color by name.

To use an alternate color viewer

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Hold down the mouse button on the Models list box to display the color model list.

3.	Hold down the mouse button on the Options button, and select Color Viewers to display the color viewer list.

4.	Click an alternate color viewer.

Each color viewer lets you use a slider and a color selection area to choose a color.

To change the model of the color being selected

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To choose the fill or outline color of an object" procedure.

2.	Choose another model of the color from the Model list box.

 Tip

•	Sometimes when selecting a color you choose an out of gamut color and an in gamut button appears to the left of the new selected color. Clicking the in gamut button selects the closest in gamut color.

 Related Topics


Choosing a color by blending other colors

You can only blend colors that are in your default on-screen Color Palette. If you want to blend other colors, change the default on-screen Color Palette. You can increase or decrease the number of blended color swatches displayed by changing the color grids' cell size. You can select multiple colors from the Color Blend area to add to your custom palettes. For more information see "Customizing Color Palettes."

To choose the fill or outline color of an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click the Uniform Fill button to change the fill color.

•	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click the Outline Color Dialog button to change the outline color.

3.	Click the Mixers tab.

4.	Click the Options button, and select Mixers, Color Blend.

5.	Click each of the four color pickers, and choose a color from each of the four color pickers.

6.	In the color selection area, click the color you want to choose.

To change the color grid cell size

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Slide the Size Slider to select the grid cell size you want to use.

 Tip

•	When selecting a color you choose an out of gamut color. An in gamut button then appears to the left of the new selected color. Clicking the in gamut button selects the closest in gamut color.

 Related Topics


Choosing a color using color harmonies

Each option in the Hues list box corresponds to a shape that is superimposed on the Color Wheel. Each row in the color grid below begins with the color underneath one of the points on the shape superimposed on the Color Wheel. Since color harmonies are most useful when you are selecting several colors, try using color harmonies when working with custom palettes. For more information see "Adding or deleting multiple colors in a Custom Palette."

To choose the uniform fill or outline color of an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Open the Fill tool flyout and click the Uniform Fill button to change the fill color.

•	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click the Outline Color Dialog button to change the outline color.

3.	Click the Mixers tab.

4.	Do one of the following:

•	Drag the black circle around the Color Wheel to change the color swatches below the wheel.

•	Click on a spot on the Color Wheel and the black point will move there.

5.	From the color grid below the Color Wheel, click the color swatch you want to use.

To change the relationship between the colors on the Color Wheel

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose a hue option from the Hues list box.

 Tip

•	Each hue option corresponds to a different configuration of points on the Color Wheel. Experiment to find the configuration that provides the color set you prefer.

To change the appearance of colors in the color swatches

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To choose the uniform fill or outline color of an object" procedure.

2.	Choose a color variation option from the Variations list box.

3.	To change the number of swatches in the color grid, do one of the following:

•	Type a number in the Number box.

•	Move the size Slider.

 Tip

•	Sometimes when selecting a color you choose an out of gamut color and an in gamut button appears to the left of the new selected color. Clicking the in gamut button selects the closest in gamut color.

 Related Topics


Choosing a color from a fixed color palette

Fixed color palettes are provided by third-party manufacturers and work best when accompanied by a color swatch book. It is recommended that you use Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Internet Explorer fixed color palettes if you will be creating information for these mediums. The PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM, Focoltone, TOYO COLOR FINDER, and DIC fixed color palettes are all spot colors. If you create color separations when you print, each color from these palettes requires a separate printing plate. This can significantly increase the cost of your print job. If you want to use these colors but you don't want to use spot colors, convert the spot colors to process colors when you print. For more information, see "Choosing General Color Settings." You are able to drag colors from the fixed palettes to your custom palettes. The colors within a fixed palette cannot be altered.

To choose the uniform fill or outline color of an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click the Uniform Fill button to change the fill color.

•	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click the Outline Color Dialog button to change the outline color.

3.	Click the Fixed Palettes tab.

4.	Choose a palette from the Palette list box.

5.	Click the color scroll bar to change the range of colors displayed in the color selection area on the left.

6.	Do one of the following:

•	Scroll the color scroll bar to the color swatch you want to select.

•	Click on the name list box arrow and scroll down to the color name you want to select.

•	Type in the color name in the name list box.

•	Hold down the mouse button on a color swatch and select a color from the neighborhood color picker.

To hide or display the names of the colors

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Options button, and enable or disable Show Color Names.

 Notes

•	If the selected color is within a fixed palette that supports tints, then change the tint by moving the tint slider or by typing a number in the Tint number box.

•	The neighborhood color picker for Fixed Palettes shows the same color with different ink densities. The neighborhood color picker for Custom Palettes shows colors that are closest to the chosen color by Hue and Lightness.

 Related Topics


Choosing a color from a custom color palette

A custom color palette can include colors from any color model or fixed color palette. Custom color palettes should be saved as a color palette file (.CPL extension.) The User Defined Inks are all custom spot colors. If you create color separations when printing, each color from this palette will require a separate printing plate. If you don't want to use spot colors, convert the spot colors to process colors when printing. For more information see "Creating color separations."

To choose the uniform fill or outline color of an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click the Uniform Fill button to change the fill color, or press SHIFT + F11.

•	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click the Outline Color Dialog button to change the outline color, or press SHIFT + F12.

3.	Click the Custom Palettes tab.

4.	Choose a palette from the Palette list box.

5.	Do one of the following:

•	Scroll the color scroll bar to the color swatch you want to select.

•	Click the name list box arrow and scroll down to the color name you want to select.

•	Type in the color name in the Name list box.

•	Hold down the mouse button on a color swatch and select a color from the neighborhood color picker.

6.	Click the color swatch you want to use.

To display or hide the names of the colors

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Options button and enable or disable Show Color Names.

 Notes

•	The Palette list box displays only the currently open custom palettes and palettes inside the Custom\Palettes folder. Open another palette through the Palette list box by choosing Open Palette and specifying the folder and filename.

•	The neighborhood color picker for Custom Palettes shows colors that are the closest to the chosen color swatch by Hue and Lightness.

 Related Topics


Choosing a color by setting numeric values

You can select a color by entering the values of its color components. The color components you can change depend on the color model being used to define the color. You can select a color by entering the values of its color components only while in the Models or Mixers areas.

To choose the uniform fill or outline color of an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click the Uniform Fill button to change the fill color.

•	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click the Outline Color Dialog button to change the outline color.

3.	Click the Options button and select the a color model.

4.	Type values in the color value boxes.

 Notes

The color model you choose will determine the color values you can change. For example, if you choose RGB, then the color values are Red, Green, and Blue. If you choose HSB, then the values are Hue, Saturation, and Brightness.

You can type in numeric values only for the Models and Mixers areas. You can not change any of the numeric values within the Fixed or Custom Palette areas. The range of acceptable values varies from color model to color model.

 Tips

•	You can also change the color model and numeric color values of an object by selecting it with the Interactive Fill tool, then changing the color component values on the Property Bar.

•	You are not able to select a color by entering the values of its color components for Fixed or Custom Palette. You are able to view the color component values in different color models.

 Related Topics


Choosing the default fill and outline colors

You can change the default outline and fill colors by choosing a color when no object is selected. A dialog box prompts you to select the type of object for which you want to change the default color.

To choose the default fill or outline color

1.	Ensure that no object is selected.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click the Uniform Fill button to change the fill color.

•	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click the Outline Color Dialog button to change the outline color.

3.	Enable any or all of the following check boxes:

•	Graphic

•	Artistic Text

•	Paragraph Text

 Tip

•	You can also enable the Don't Show Me Again check box.

 Related Topics


Choosing a color from the Color Docker window

The Color Docker window can be docked to any edge of the Application Window or float as a separate window. You can also change the appearance and size of the Color Docker window. The Color Docker window allows you access other tools and windows while the Color Docker window remains open. The Color Docker window displays primarily the HSB Hue based color space. You can view the colors expressed as numerical values in other color spaces.

To choose a from the Color Docker window

1.	Click Window, Dockers, Colors.

2.	Select your object.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Drag the small box in the color selection area to the color you want to use.

•	Move the color slider up or down to change the range of colors displayed in the color selection area.

•	Type numeric values in the color space spin boxes.

4.	Do one of the following:

•	Click the Fill button to select the color as the Fill color.

•	Click the Outline button to select the color as the Outline color.

To view the color in another color space

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	From the list box at the top of the Color Docker window select the color space you want to see the colors numerical expressed as.

 Note

•	The color selection area displays the default HSB Hue based color space. If you do choose Greyscale, you will see a different color space and the numerical value available is Lightness (L).

 Tip

•	You can see the Fill and Outline colors and their numeric values on the bottom of the Application window.

 Related Topics


Working with Multiple On-Screen Color Palettes


Overview: Working with Multiple On-Screen Color Palettes
Working with Multiple On-Screen Color Palettes

Multiple on-screen Color Palettes provide quick access to numerous palettes and to the colors you use most. You can display any fixed or custom color palette as an on-screen Color Palette. On-screen Color Palettes can be docked to any edge of the Application Window or float as a separate window. You can change the appearance and size of one or all multiple on-screen Color Palettes. The advantage of having access to multiple on-screen Color Palettes is that it gives you the ability to create a custom palette by dragging color swatches from any palette to your custom palette. This does not remove the color swatch from the source palette, but rather copies the color swatch onto your custom palette.

 Related Topics


Accessing On-Screen Color Palettes

This procedure explains how to access different on-screen Color Palettes. For information on changing individual colors, see "Customizing Color Palettes." Spot colors in the on-screen Color Palette are marked by a dot in the bottom left corner of the color swatch.

To access an On-Screen Color Palette

•	Click Window, Color Palettes, click on the on-screen Color Palette you want to display.

To open an On-Screen Color Palette

1.	Click Window, Color Palettes, click Color Palette Browser.

2.	To open a palette enable the check box beside the palette(s) in the Color Palette Browser Docker Window.

To open an On-Screen Color Palette that is not in the Color Palettes Browser Docker Window

1.	Do one of the following:

•	Click Window, Color Palette, and click Color Palette Browser Docker Window.

•	Click Window, Color Palette, and Open Palette.

2.	Click Open at the bottom of the Color Palettes Browser Docker Window.

3.	Select the Palette you wish to open.

To close an On-Screen Color Palette

•	Do one of the following:

•	Disable the check box beside the palette in the Color Palettes Browser Docker Window.

•	Right-click the on-screen Color Palette's title bar to hide it.

 Note

•	Any docked on-screen Color Palette can be identified by placing the cursor over a color swatch and its name will appear beneath in a tip box. Floating on-screen Color Palettes display their name in their Title Bar.

 Related Topics


Changing the Default On-Screen Color Palette

The Default on-screen Color Palette is the color palette that you will see in any of the drop down color pickers. You can select any Color Palette to be the Default on-screen Color Palette.

To choose a different default On-Screen Color Palette

•	Right-click, hold and release on a color swatch of the on-screen Color Palette you want as your default on-screen Color Palette, and click Set As Default Palette.

 Related Topics


Changing the position and size of an On-Screen Color Palette

You can float the on-screen Color Palette in the Application Window or dock the on-screen Color Palette and change its size.

To undock the on-screen Color Palette

•	Do one of the following:

•	Hold down the mouse button on the border of the on-screen Color Palette and drag it away from the edge of the Application Window.

•	Double Click on the border of the on-screen Color Palette.

To dock the On-Screen Color Palette

•	Do one of the following:

•	Drag the title bar of the on-screen Color Palette to any edge of the Application Window.

•	Double click on the title bar to return the Floating on-screen Palette.

To specify the number of rows in a docked On-Screen Color Palette

1.	Right-click the on-screen Color Palette, and click Properties.

2.	Type a value in the Maximum palette Rows When Docked box.

 Related Topics


Customizing the On-Screen Color Palette

You are able to customize the appearance and behavior of the on-screen Color Palette to match the way you work. You can choose to work with large color swatch boxes and display or hide the No Color color swatch. If you have difficulty right-clicking on the gray area of the on-screen Color Palette to access the pop-up menu, you can set the right mouse button to display the pop-up menu.

To use large swatches

1.	Right-click the on-screen Color Palette, and click Properties.

2.	Enable the Large Swatches check box.

To display a No Color color swatch

1.	Right-click the on-screen Color Palette, and click Properties.

2.	Enable the Show No Color well check box.

To change the behavior of the right mouse button

1.	Right-click the on-screen Color Palette, and click Properties.

2.	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Display Pop-Up Menu

•	Set Outline Color

 Tips

•	The Pop up menu can still be shown, using the right mouse key to click and release.

 Related Topics


Customizing Color Palettes


Overview: Customizing Color Palettes
Customizing Color Palettes

Custom Color Palettes are collections of colors that you save as a color palette file (.CPL file extension.) These palettes can contain both spot colors and colors created using any color model. Many previously created custom palettes are available to you in the Palette folder or you can create new palettes from scratch. Custom palettes are useful when you repeatedly select the same colors or when you want to work with a set of colors that look good together. There are three ways to customize a palette: create a custom palette using the Palette Editor, use the "New Palette From Selection" command, or "New Palette From Document" command.

 Related Topics


Creating custom palettes

When you create a custom palette, the palette is empty and ready for you to choose the colors you want to include in it. You can create a custom palette that includes all the colors from the object that you selected or from the current document.

To create a custom palette

1.	Click Window, Color Palette, Palette Editor.

2.	Click the New button.

3.	Specify a palette filename (.CPL file extension.)

4.	Include a description of the palette in the Description box.

5.	Click Save.

To create a new palette from Selection

1.	Click Window, Color Palettes, Create Palette From Selection.

2.	Specify a palette filename (.CPL file extension.)

3.	Include a description of the palette in the Description box.

4.	Click Save.

To create a new palette from a document

1.	Click Window, Color Palettes, Create Palette From Document.

2.	Specify a palette filename (.CPL file extension.)

3.	Include a description of the palette in the Description box.

4.	Click Save.

 Notes

•	The description you write in the Description box becomes the name of the new custom palette. If you do not write in a description, the filename is displayed as the palette name.

•	Select your objects before using the New Palette From Selection command.

•	A document must be open before using the New Palette From Document command.

 Related Topics


Editing an existing Custom Palette

There are five commands you can use to edit your custom palettes: Edit Color, Add Color, Delete Color, Sort Colors, and Reset Palette. Your palette does not need to be open in order to edit it. Palettes that are currently open appear in the Palette list box. Remember to save before you exit the Palette Editor or your changes will be lost.

To edit an unopened custom palette

1.	Click Window, Color Palettes, Palette Editor.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Click the Open button.

•	Choose Open Palette from the list box at the top of the Palette Editor dialog box.

3.	Click palette filename you want to open.

4.	Select the modifying command you wish to use.

To edit an open palette that is currently open

1.	Click Window, Color Palettes, Palette Editor.

2.	Choose the palette from the list box at the top of the Palette Editor dialog box.

3.	Click Edit Color.

To edit a color within your palette

1.	Click Window, Color Palettes, Palette Editor.

2.	Choose the palette from the list box at the top of the Palette Editor dialog box.

3.	Click Edit Color.

4.	Edit the color in the Select Color dialog box.

5.	Click OK to change colors.

To add a color within your palette

1.	Click Window, Color Palettes, Palette Editor.

2.	Choose the palette from the list box at the top of the Palette Editor dialog box.

3.	Click Add Color.

4.	Select a new color in the Select Color dialog box.

5.	Click Add To Palette.

To delete a color within your palette

1.	Click Window, Color Palettes, Palette Editor.

2.	Choose the palette from the list box at the top of the Palette Editor dialog box.

3.	Select the color you wish to delete from your palette.

4.	Click Delete Color.

To sort colors within your palette

1.	Click Window, Color Palettes, Palette Editor.

2.	Choose the palette from the list box at the top of the Palette Editor dialog box.

3.	Click Sort Colors and click the method you wish use to sort your colors.

To reset the palette you are currently editing

•	Click Reset Palette if you want to cancel the changes you have made to your palette since the last time you saved changes.

 Related Topics


Saving a custom palette

Save the changes you make to a custom palette before exiting or your changes are lost.

To save a palette with a new filename

1.	Click Window, Color Palettes, Palette Editor.

2.	Click the Save As button.

3.	Specify a folder and palette filename.

 Related Topics


Adding or deleting multiple colors in a Custom Palette

The methods for choosing colors in the Palette Editor are identical to the methods available in the Uniform Fill dialog box. Select multiple colors from the Blend area, Fixed and Custom Palettes. For information about choosing a color, see "Choosing colors".

To add multiple colors to a custom palette

1.	Click Window, Color Palettes, Palette Editor.

2.	Choose the palette from the list box at the top of the Palette Editor dialog box.

3.	Click Add Color.

4.	In Select Color dialog box, do one of the following:

•	Position the cursor over the first color swatch you want to choose, hold down SHIFT, and click the color swatches you want to add to the palette.

•	Position the cursor over the first color swatch you want to choose, hold down CTRL, and click the color swatches that you want to add to the palette.

5.	Click Add To Palette.

To delete multiple colors from a custom palette

1.	Click Window, Color Palettes, Palette Editor.

2.	Choose the palette from the list box at the top of the Palette Editor dialog box.

3.	In the color selection area, do one of the following:

•	Position the cursor over the first color swatch you want to delete, hold down SHIFT, and click the color swatches you want to delete from the palette.

•	Position the cursor over the first color swatch you want to delete, hold down CTRL, and click the color swatches you want to delete from the palette.

4.	Click the Delete Color button.

 Tips

•	Click the Reset Palette button to return the palette to the state it was in before you began making changes.

•	You can move individual colors by dragging them to a new position in the palette area.

 Related Topics


Naming colors in a custom palette

Naming colors helps you to keep track of, or quickly locate, colors in a custom palette.

To name a color

1.	Click Window, Color Palettes, Palette Editor.

2.	Choose the palette from the list box at the top of the Palette Editor dialog box.

3.	Choose a color in the palette dialog.

4.	Type a name in the Name box.

 Related Topics


Reproducing colors accurately


Overview: Reproducing colors accurately
Reproducing colors accurately

Each piece of equipment you use to create a project has a specific range of colors it can reproduce. This is referred to as a device gamut. For example, a monitor displays a different range of colors, or color gamut, than the color gamut that reproduced on a printing press. It is important that the colors your customer requests are the colors you provide in your final product, be it in a magazine, or a newspaper, or on television or the Internet.

This means that your document might include colors that appear properly on your monitor but can't be reproduced on paper. Different monitors, scanners, printers, and other types of equipment all have slightly different color gamuts. Different color gamuts can occur even between similar models of equipment from the same manufacturer. For colors to be accurately translated from device to device, you need to account for the differences between the color gamuts of each device.

Using a Color Management System

A color management system (CMS) can minimize the differences in color gamuts. Without a CMS, each application you use generates its own color profile, this means that your output colors may not be consistent. A CMS:

•	provides device profiles (scanner, monitor, printer) to map the color spaces between these devices

•	can convert from one color model to another color model (for example, from RGB to CMYK)

•	provides accurate on-screen or print previews of colors when printed to allow color corrections

Without color management system, it is not possible to accurately achieve color consistency throughout the publishing process which involves the use of different devices or systems. Enabling color correction causes on-screen colors to look duller than they did before color correction was enabled.

Choosing Color Profiles

Profiles, or ICC Color Profiles, are files in a format defined by the International Color Consortium. They describe the color characteristics of color devices and color spaces. Color management software, such as the software in CorelDRAW, uses ICC profiles to transform colors from device to device, and from one color space to another. Having the right profiles is important to getting good color.

Corel software ships with many pre-defined profiles for scanners, monitors, and printers that you can choose to load into your system. Many device manufacturers have ICC Color Profiles available for you to download. Work with profiles that most closely match the devices you have on your system. When you first install your software, generic device profiles will be selected for you to use.

There are 5 profiles you can set to manage color. Use the Monitor profile when displaying documents to your monitor. Use the Scanner profile when scanning images from a scanner device. Use the Composite Printer profile when printing to a local or networked color printer. Use the Separations Printer profile to define CMYK colors in your documents and when creating color separation for printing. Use the Internal RGB profile to define RGB colors in your documents. Changing any of these profile will influence the colors you see and get from the software.

The quickest approach for setting profiles is to set the Monitor profile to the profile for your monitor, and the Composite Printer profile to the profile for your local printer. If you have a special RGB color space you need to work in, you can change the Internal RGB profile to that color space. If you are scanning and have a profile for your scanner, choose your scanner's profile from the scanner list.

Using Embedded color profiles

Embedded color profiles take into account the different color gamuts that exist and provide cross-platform communication of the different color spaces. A color profile is a description of a device's color handling capabilities and characteristics. An embedded color profile is a color profile, attached to or embedded into a color document. It describes the color space of the colors contained within the document. Corel supports ICC-embedded profiles. This allows the same color profile to be communicated across platforms, and ensures accurate color management throughout the publishing process. Embedded color profiles ensure accurate color reproduction between the input (scanner) and the output (printer) device. The ability to embed ICC profiles into many file formats, including CorelDRAW .CPT and .CDR formats, allows for consistent color spaces between all applications that support ICC profiles. TIFF and .EPS formats are supported by CorelDRAW.

Use Color profiles to correct on-screen colors so each color displays as accurately as possible based on its color values. Color profiles can display colors on screen as they will appear when they are printed. Proper color profiles can also warn you when a selected color is outside your printer's color gamut. Accurate color profiles of your scanner, monitor, and printer make it possible for colors to be corrected so the color you see on the screen matches the color in the final output.

Setting the General color settings

The General color settings page contains several additional controls for color behavior. The first three check boxes let you control how colors from some special palettes are separated when printing to color separations. With the check boxes enabled, colors from these palettes separate into their own individual printing plates.

The next group of check boxes control several functions. Enabling "Show CMYK in percentages" causes the screen display of CMYK values to fall into the range of 0 to 100. Disabling this option causes CMYK values to display within the range 0 to 255. "Map spot colors into CMYK gamut" is a useful option which allows you to avoid making additional color separation plates for any spot colors contained in your document. Spot colors separate into the basic C, M, Y, and K printing plates for the printing process. "Composite printer simulates color output of separations printer" is useful for previewing on a local printer what the document will look like when printed on a printing press as color separations. It does this by using the color profiles of both the local printer and the separations printer.

The "Rendering Intent" drop down list, controls the method the color management system uses when it converts colors between spaces that are different sizes or different gamuts. The problem is what to do with colors in one space that are not part of the other space? How do you pick a color in the smaller space to represent the starting color in the larger space? There are three ways to do this. The Rendering Intent option lets you control the method used.

If you choose Saturation, a matching color is chosen so that the saturation component is maximized. It emphasizes saturation in colors, and may cause noticeable shifts in out-of-gamut colors. This is the best for vector graphics (lines, text, and solid colored objects.)

If you choose Perceptual, a matching color is chosen so that it and all colors that are like it, all have the same relationship to each other in the new color space. There is no abrupt changes between colors, but all colors are somewhat different in the new color space. It shifts all the colors in an image so the range of colors lies within the color gamut. This ensures that the relationship between colors is unchanged. This technique works extremely well for bitmaps and photographic-like images

If you choose Automatic, the application chooses for you on an object-by-object basis: vector objects will use Saturation, and bitmap objects will use Perceptual. Automatic is the default mode.

Calibrating your equipment

It is equally important that you calibrate your devices before working on a project in order to achieve color consistency. Calibration refers to the process of building a profile for your monitor, so its particular color characteristics are captured for use by a color management system. After calibrating your monitor, you know what its color space limits are and what colors you expect it to produce.

Calibrating your monitor

All monitors respond differently to the same electronic information. Two identical monitors from the same manufacturer respond differently and display slightly different colors on screen when provided with the identical color file. This is due to a number of factors such as monitor age, ambient lighting, or monitor settings. To achieve consistent color reproduction, it is recommended that you calibrate your monitor and be aware of factors that can affect your monitor's performance.

The following are recommendations to aid you in achieving accurate color reproduction in your projects.

•	Warm up your monitor for up to one hour before beginning calibration.

•	Clean your monitor screen before beginning calibration.

•	Manually adjust your monitor controls and tape them down so they are not accidentally readjusted after system calibration.

•	Calibrate your monitor on a regular basis, especially if it is an older monitor because phosphors fade over time.

•	Have consistent lighting. Each type of lighting, fluorescent, incandescent, and natural, will affect the colors you see displayed on your monitor. Avoid natural light as much as possible since this changes constantly throughout the day. Consider having grid diffusers installed over fluorescent lighting.

•	Use a neutral background on your monitor and for your work area to avoid influencing your perception of colors.

•	Take breaks. Give your eyes a rest throughout your work period. Take the time to look away from your monitor to avoid eye strain and fatigue.

•	If you view your work on more then one monitor, make sure they are all set at the same white point.

•	Use monitor profile building software to build a profile for your monitor.

Calibrating your scanner

Perform scanner calibration every month or so, depending on use. Scanner bulbs change color with age, affecting the color of your scans. Keep the glass clean to improve scanning quality.

There are several tools available for scanner calibration. All of them use the same basic technique: place a known source image on the scanner, scan the image, and look at the colors recorded. Knowing what the values, the colors should be and comparing them to the colors scanned, build a profile that corrects the scanner to produce the right colors. Refer to the accessories that came with your software or your scanner for more information. After you have made your profile, you set it as your Scanner profile.

Calibrating your printer

Color from printers can vary widely, from day to day, from printer to printer, and from one set of inks or color sheets to another. Colors are influenced by the paper used. Inkjet printers, for example, take a wide variety of papers: plain copy paper, coated paper, glossy paper, and many other types of paper. The interaction between the inks and the paper affects the resulting colors. To insure accurate color, create a profile for each combination of media (inks, paper, etc.), and update the profiles as conditions change. Printers age with time, and this, too, can cause colors to shift. Updating profiles periodically will ensure your printer colors are as accurate as possible.

Given all the warnings above, you can still get decent color behavior from a stock or pre-made color profile for your printer. The general behavior of the printer and inks will be captured in such a profile, and the differences due to age and paper will be ignored.

To make a profile for your printer, use a third party printer or output profile-making tools. You need a device to "read" the colors produced by your printer. There are several profile making tools available that let you scan the printer output on a calibrated scanner. The end result is a printer profile that you can use as your Composite Printer profile.

 Related Topics


Correcting color

Color correction adjusts screen colors to display them as accurately as possible. If you only correct the display colors, then the on-screen colors are adjusted according to your monitor's color profile. If you display colors as they will print, then the on-screen colors are adjusted according to your monitor and your printer's color profiles. The color matching mode determines how colors are adjusted when corrections are necessary.

To color correct display colors

1.	Click Tools, Color Management.

2.	Enable the Calibrate Colors For Display check box.

 Note

•	This check box must be enabled in order to use color management.

To display colors as they will print

1.	Follow steps 1 to 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Display Simulated Printer Colors check box.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Click the Simulate Composite Printer button to display colors as they will print on a composite printer.

•	Click the Simulate Separations Printer button to display colors as they will print on a printer that uses color separations.

To change the color matching mode

1.	Follow step 1 from the "To color correct display colors" procedure.

2.	In the list of categories, click General.

3.	Choose one of the following from the Color Matching Mode list box:

•	Saturation

•	Perceptual

•	Automatic

 Note

•	You won't see the effects of changing the color mode on screen if color correction is not enabled.

 Related Topics


Viewing out-of-gamut colors

When enabled, the gamut alarm overlays out-of-gamut colors with a warning color.

To enable the gamut alarm

1.	Click Tools, Color Management.

2.	Enable the Highlight Colors Out Of Printer Gamut check box.

To change the warning color

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose a color from the Warning Color picker.

3.	Move the transparency slider to set the transparency of the warning color.

To view out-of-gamut colors in the Palette Editor

1.	Click Window, Color Palettes, Palette Editor.

2.	Click on one of the following:

•	Edit Color

•	Add Color

3.	In the Select Color dialog box, click Options, Gamut Alarm.

 Related Topics


Setting color profiles

Setting color profiles properly is required for accurate color reproduction. When you are setting up a color profile, use the provided profile. If color profiles are not available, obtain a professionally created profile from the manufacturer of the device. Color profiles are often available through the Internet.

To set the appropriate color profiles

1.	Click Tools, Color Management, and click Profiles in the list of categories.

2.	Choose a profile from the Monitor, Scanner, Composite Printer, Separations Printer and Internal RGB list boxes.

 Notes

•	Many of the supplied printer color profiles were created using ColorBlind color management software. For more information regarding ColorBlind and color profiles, contact Color Solutions, Inc. at http://www.color.com.

•	If you are sending your file off to a print shop, ask for a profile for their printer.

 Related Topics


Choosing General Color Settings

The General color settings page in the Options dialog box contains additional controls for color behavior. The first three check boxes let you control how colors from some special palettes are separated when printing to color separations. Map spot colors into CMYK gamut if you want to avoid additional color separation plates for any spot colors contained in your document. Spot colors require their own individual printing plates and add additional costs to the printing process. For more information see "Creating color separations." The next set of checkboxes control the behavior of CMYK color space. The Rendering Intent list box controls the method the color management system uses when it converts colors between spaces that are different sizes.

To treat FOCOLTONE, TOYO and DIC colors as spot inks

1.	Click Tools, Color Management, and click Profiles.

2.	Enable the color palette check box you want as spot inks.

To control the behavior of CMYK color space

1.	Click Tools, Color Management, and click Profiles.

2.	Enable the CMYK behavior check box you want to control.

To select the method of color space conversion

1.	Click Tools, Color Management, and click Profiles.

2.	Click one of the following methods of color space conversion from the Rendering Intent list box:

•	Automatic

•	Perceptual

•	Saturation

 Notes

•	Saturation works well for vector graphics (lines, text, and solid colored objects.)

•	Perceptual works well for bitmaps and photographic-like images.

 Related Topics


Reference


Using Digimarc Digital Watermarking


Overview: Using Digimarc digital watermarking
Using Digimarc digital watermarking

CorelDRAW and Corel PHOTO-PAINT include the PictureMarc plugin from Digimarc, which allows you to embed and read digital watermarks in an image. These watermarks let you embed information that communicates copyrights and authorship and provide a persistent identity which travels with the image wherever it goes. The watermarks are not apparent to the viewer of an image.

A Digimarc watermark carries a unique Creator ID and image attributes. The Creator ID is assigned when you subscribe to Digimarc's online service. The information that is associated with your Creator ID includes contact details, such as your name, phone number, address, email and Web addresses, and specialty.

A Digimarc watermark is a small amount of random noise added to the luminance component of the pixels in your image. At high magnification, you might notice seemingly random changes in the brightness of a pixel. These changes are not enough to harm the visual integrity of your image, but they carry information that survives normal edits, printing, and scanning.

Digimarc watermarks do not prevent someone from using your images or infringing your copyrights. But they do communicate that you are claiming copyrights and provide a mechanism for interested parties to contact you about the use of the images or about licensing details.

When you open an image in CorelDRAW or Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can check whether it has a watermark. If a watermark is present, a copyright symbol appears on the Title Bar. You can obtain information about the watermark by reading the embedded message and by linking to the contact profile of the creator of the image in Digimarc's database.

For more information about Digimarc, see http://www.digimarc.com.


Embedding a watermark

Before you can embed a watermark in an image, you must obtain a Creator ID from the Digimarc Web site. You can then specify the image use and durability attributes. The image use attributes do not affect the display of the image, but inform users about whether there are restrictions on the use of the image or whether they can use the image royalty-free. Also, you can indicate whether the image is intended for an adult audience only.

The durability attribute determines the resistance of the watermark to image changes [image] the higher the durability value, the more edits and transformations the watermark survives.

To get a Creator ID

1.	Do one of the following:

•	In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, click Effects, Digimarc, Embed Watermark.

•	In CorelDRAW, click Bitmaps, Plugins, Digimarc, Embed Watermark.

2.	Click the Personalize button.

3.	Do one of the following to obtain a Creator ID:

•	In the Personalize Creator ID dialog box, click the Register button, and follow the instructions on the Digimarc Web site.

•	Dial the Digimarc phone number.

4.	In the Personalize Creator ID dialog box, type your Creator ID in the Creator ID box.

To embed a watermark

1.	Follow step 1 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Copyright Year(s) box, type the year, or years, to be included in the copyright information.

3.	In the Image Attributes section, enable the check boxes for the image attributes that apply to the image.

4.	Choose an option from the Target Output list box, depending on whether the image is intended for print or online distribution.

5.	Type a value from 1 to 4 in the Watermark Durability box.

 Notes

•	In the Copyright Year(s) box, you cannot enter a year before 1922 or after the current year. To enter several years, separate them by a comma.

•	If the image resolution is not suitable for the target output you choose, an error message appears, asking you to readjust the resolution.

•	You can enable the Verify check box to get confirmation that the watermark has been embedded and to view the information that is available to viewers when they detect the watermark.

 Tip

•	You can also adjust the watermark durability by dragging the slider at the bottom of the Embed Watermark dialog box.

 Related Topics


Detecting a watermark

You can check whether an image has an embedded watermark. If a watermark is present, you can obtain information about the content and intended use of the image, and how to contact its author.

To detect a watermark

1.	Do one of the following:

•	In Corel PHOTO-PAINT click Effects, Digimarc, Read Watermark.

•	In CorelDRAW click Bitmaps, Plugins, Digimarc, Read Watermark.

2.	To find out more about the creator or distributor of the image, do one of the following:

•	Click the Web Lookup button to go to the page of contact details.

•	Launch a Web browser and go to the URL.

•	Call the Digimarc fax-back service at the listed fax number.

 Tip

•	In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can detect a watermark by clicking File, Export, Detect Watermark. If you're working with a file format other than Corel PHOTO-PAINT (.CPT), you can also detect a watermark by enabling the Check for Watermark check box in the Open An Image dialog box before opening the image.

 Related Topics


Welcome to CorelDRAW


Overview: Welcome to CorelDRAW
Welcome to CorelDRAW

CorelDRAW is a comprehensive vector-based drawing program that makes it easy to create professional artwork [image] from simple logos to intricate technical illustrations. CorelDRAW provides tools and effects that let you work efficiently to produce high-quality graphics. You can also deliver your artwork to a service bureau for printing or publishing your document to the Internet.

Before you begin using CorelDRAW, there are some areas with which you should become more familiar. To assist you in using the application, CorelDRAW provides several types of Help. When using CorelDRAW, you may find it useful to know the difference between vectors and bitmaps. Furthermore, getting to know the various controls that appear in the application lets you work more effectively. Corel also provides several support services that can assist you with the application.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Overview: About Corel Corporation
About Corel Corporation

Corel Corporation is recognized internationally as a world leader in the development of PC-based graphics and business application software. CorelDRAW is now available in more than 17 languages and has won more than 215 international awards from major trade publications.

We pride ourselves on delivering high-quality graphics, productivity, and business application software by actively seeking your input. We use this feedback and respond quickly to you, the users of Corel products worldwide.

For more information about Corel and our products, visit our web site at http://www.corel.com

We want your feedback

If you have any comments about the CorelDRAW documentation, you can email them to drawdoc@corel.ca or mail them to the address below. Unfortunately, we may not be able to respond to your message personally.

Graphics Software Documentation Manager
Corel Corporation
1600 Carling Avenue
Ottawa, Ontario, Canada
K1Z 8R7

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Using Help


Overview: Using Help
Using Help

CorelDRAW features a variety of electronic resources that provide on-screen assistance as you need it. The main form of assistance is the online Help, which, apart from a minimum of graphics, is an electronic version of the CorelDRAW manual. You can find information in online Help by double-clicking specially coded words, phrases, or icons that display the topic. Context-sensitive Help is accessible from anywhere within CorelDRAW. You can access context-sensitive Help from the menus, dialog boxes, Docker windows, Property Bars, and all other toolbars in CorelDRAW. ToolTips describe individual features in the application, whereas the CorelDRAW tutorial guides you through basic tutorial procedures as you complete a range of tasks. The Online Hints window provides you with information about the tool you're using, or the possible tasks or actions you can perform.

 Related Topics


Accessing online Help

Online Help connects you to an overview or a procedural topic when you choose a topic from the table of contents or the index. You can also search for a topic using keywords that describe a feature or task.

To access online Help

1.	Click Help, Help Topics.

2.	Double-click a topic.

To access an online Help topic using a word search

1.	Click Help, Help Topics.

2.	Click the Index tab.

3.	Type a word in the search box, and click the Search button.

4.	Choose a topic from the list, and click the Display button.

 Related Topics


Printing online Help

You can print entire sections of the online Help or only specific topics.

To print an entire section

1.	Click Help, Help Topics.

2.	Click a book, and click the Print Topics button.

To print a topic

1.	Click Help, Help Topics.

2.	Click a topic, and click the Print Topic button.

 Tip

•	You can also print an individual topic by clicking the Print button in the CorelDRAW Help window.

 Related Topics


Accessing context-sensitive Help

The most common ways to access context-sensitive Help are as follows:

To get help on ...	Do this ...

Dialog boxes	Click the Help button, or press F1.

Menu commands	Click the Help button on the Standard toolbar, click a menu, and click a command.

Or, press F1 when a command is highlighted.

Tools and controls	Click the Help button on the Standard toolbar, and click the item for which you want help.

Or, click Help, What's This?

 Tip

•	Use the Status Bar at the bottom of the Application Window to familiarize yourself with the tools. The Status Bar displays details of what buttons, controls, and menu commands do as you move the mouse cursor over them.

 Related Topics


Accessing ToolTips

ToolTips identify the icons and buttons that correspond to various features in CorelDRAW, such as toolbars, the Property Bar, and tool flyouts.

To access ToolTips

•	Position the cursor over an icon or a button.

 Related Topics


Accessing Online Tutors

CorelTUTOR guides you through a series of practical lessons that give you a general idea of the application's major capabilities. Although intended mainly for novices, the tutorial also offers helpful information for advanced users, and explores concepts that are common to many CorelDRAW operations.

To access Tutors

•	Click Help, CorelTUTOR.

 Related Topics


Accessing Online Hints

The Online Hints relay information that applies to the action you're performing with the active tool. When you select a different tool, the Online Hints window provides information about the new tool and its options.

To access Hints

•	Click Help, Hints.

 Related Topics


CorelDRAW concepts


Overview: CorelDRAW concepts
CorelDRAW concepts

Computer imaging applications are based on creating either vector graphics or bitmap images. This section presents the basic concepts of a vector-based program, like CorelDRAW, and outlines the differences between vector images and bitmap images, such as ones you work with in Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

If you haven't worked with drawing applications before, or if you've worked solely with paint or photo-editing (i.e., bitmap images) applications, you'll find this section especially informative.

 Related Topics


Overview: What is a vector image?
What is a vector image?

Vector images, also called object-oriented or draw images, are defined mathematically as a series of points joined by lines. Graphical elements in a vector file are called objects. Each object is a self-contained entity, with properties such as color, shape, outline, size, and position on the screen included in its definition.

Since each object is a self-contained entity, you can move and change its properties over and over again while maintaining its original clarity and crispness without affecting other objects in the drawing. These characteristics make vector-based applications ideal for illustration, in which the design process often requires individual objects to be created and manipulated.

Vector-based drawings are resolution independent. This means that they appear at the maximum resolution of the output device, such as your printer or monitor. As a result, the image quality of your drawing is a higher quality resolution if you print from a 600 dots per inch (dpi) printer than from a 300-dpi printer.

CorelDRAW allows you to incorporate bitmaps into your drawings and to export bitmaps you create. For simple drawings, you can use the Autotrace command or the Freehand tool to trace around the outline manually. For more information, see "Tracing bitmaps."

 Related Topics


Overview: What is a bitmap image?
What is a bitmap image?

Photo-editing applications like Corel PHOTO-PAINT work with bitmap images. When you work with bitmap images, you can refine small details, make drastic changes, and intensify effects.

Bitmap images, also called raster or paint images, are made of individual dots, called pixels (picture elements), that are arranged and colored differently to form a pattern. When you zoom in, you can see the individual squares that make up the total image. Increasing the size of a bitmap has the effect of increasing individual pixels, making lines and shapes appear jagged.

However, the color and shape of a bitmap image appear continuous when viewed from a greater distance. Because each pixel is colored individually, you can create photorealistic effects, such as shadowing and intensifying color.

Reducing the size of a bitmap distorts the original image, because pixels are removed to reduce the overall image size. Also, because a bitmap image is created as a collection of arranged pixels, its parts cannot be manipulated (e.g., moved) individually.

You can open vector-based CorelDRAW files, which have been saved as CPT file format, directly in Corel PHOTO-PAINT. Corel PHOTO-PAINT automatically creates a bitmapped version of the original.

 Related Topics


Exploring the work area


Overview: Exploring the work area
Exploring the work area

The large white portion of the CorelDRAW Application Window is the Drawing Window. The rectangle in the center with the drop shadow is the Drawing Page. Usually, only the part of your drawing that falls within the Drawing Page is printed. You can use the remaining space, called the Desktop layer, in the Drawing Window to keep your tools and pieces of your drawing handy. For more information about the Desktop layer, see "Using layers to organize your drawing."

The CorelDRAW Toolbox contains tools for creating, filling, and modifying objects interactively. The drawing tools let you design a variety of objects for your drawing, and the shaping tools let you modify your drawing. The Toolbox also contains tools that let you apply a number of effects interactively.

Futhermore, the Toolbox contains flyouts which are toolbars that are accessible through one tool in the Toolbox. A small black arrow at the bottom right corner of a tool indicates that it is a flyout grouped with other tools. You can separate flyouts from the Toolbox to display them as separate toolbars.

The toolbars contain buttons that represent commands. Some are shortcuts to menu commands; others are commands that are available only as toolbar buttons.

The Property Bar, whose appearance is similar to a toolbar, provides you with quick access to frequently used functions that are relevant to the active tool or the task you're currently performing. For example, when you click the Text tool, the Property Bar contains only text-related commands.

A Docker window contains the same type of controls as a dialog box, such as command buttons, options, and list boxes. However, unlike most dialog boxes, you can keep Docker windows open while working on a document to access the operations you use most frequently, or to experiment with different effects. Docker windows can be docked to any edge of the Application window, or you can undock them. Furthermore, you can minimize Docker windows so they don't use up valuable screen real estate.

With CorelDRAW you have the ability to create multiple workspaces. A workspace is a configuration of settings you specify which you can save and reapply. If several people are using a single version of CorelDRAW, or if you find you need different settings for different tasks, you can use workspaces to save the settings for each user or task.

 Note

•	The toolbars are optimized for 800 x 600 resolution. If you are working at a lower resolution, portions of toolbars may appear cut off.

 Related Topics


Using the Toolbox

This table describes all of the tools in the CorelDRAW Toolbox.

Tool...	Description...

The Pick tool lets you select and transform objects.

The Shape tool lets you edit the shape of objects.

The Knife tool lets you cut through objects.

The Eraser tool lets you remove areas of your drawing.

The Free Transform tools lets you transform your object by using the Free Rotation, Angle Reflection, Scale, and Skew tools.

The Zoom tool lets you change the magnification level in the Drawing Window.

The Pan tool lets you move the display of the Drawing Window.

The Freehand tool lets you draw lines and curves.

The Bezier tool lets you draw curves using a connect-the-dots style of drawing.

The Artistic Media tool provides access to the Brush, Sprayer, Calligraphic, and Pressure tools.

The Dimension tool lets you draw vertical, horizontal, slanted, or angular dimension lines.

The Connector tool lets you join two objects with a line.

The Flow Chart tool lets you join two objects with a flow chart line.

The Rectangle tool lets you draw rectangles and squares.

The Ellipse tool lets you draw ellipses and circles.

The Polygon tool lets you draw polygons and stars.

The Spiral tool lets you draw symmetrical and logarithmic spirals.

The Graph Paper tool lets you draw a grid of lines similar to that on graph paper.

The Text tool lets you type words directly on the screen as Artistic Text or as Paragraph Text.

The Interactive Fill tool lets you apply various fills using the mouse.

The Interactive Mesh tool lets you apply a mesh grid to an object using the mouse.

The Interactive Transparency tool lets you apply transparencies to objects using the mouse.

The Interactive Blend tool lets you blend two objects.

The Interactive Distortion tool lets you apply a Push or Pull distortion, a Zipper distortion, or a Twister distortion to an object.

The Interactive Envelope tool lets you distort an object by dragging the nodes of the envelope that is placed on top of the object.

The Interactive Extrude tool lets you apply a third dimension to objects.

The Interactive Drop Shadow tool lets you apply a drop shadow to an object.

The Interactive Contour tool lets you apply a contour to an object.

The Eyedropper tool lets you select a fill from an object on the Drawing Window using the mouse.

The Paintbucket tool lets you fill an object on the Drawing Window after selecting a fill using the Eyedropper tool.

The Outline Tool opens a flyout that lets you set the outline properties.

The Fill Tool opens a flyout that lets you set the fill properties.

 Related Topics


Accessing flyouts

You can access multiple tools from a flyout on the Toolbox. You can also display the flyout as a toolbar by separating it from the Toolbox.

To access flyouts

•	Place the cursor on the tool, and hold down the mouse button.

 Tip

•	You can also access flyouts by clicking the arrow on the tool.

To display a flyout as a separate toolbar

•	Click outside the buttons area on the flyout, and drag the flyout from its host toolbar.

 Tip

•	You can return the flyout to the Toolbox by closing the flyout.

 Related Topics


Using the Property Bar

You can customize your work area by displaying, hiding, or docking the Property Bar.

To display the Property Bar

1.	Click Window, Toolbars.

2.	Enable the Property Bar check box.

To hide the Property Bar

1.	Click Window, Toolbars.

2.	Disable the Property Bar check box.

To dock the Property Bar

•	Drag the Title Bar of the Property Bar toward the menus at the top of the Application Window or to any of the other sides.

 Tip

•	You can also customize the Property Bar. For more information, see "Customizing the Property Bar."

 Related Topics


Using toolbars

You can customize your work area by displaying, hiding, sizing, or docking the toolbars. You can also dock a toolbar to any side of your screen.

To display toolbars

1.	Click Window, Toolbars.

2.	Enable the check boxes beside the toolbars you want to display.

To hide toolbars

1.	Click Window, Toolbars.

2.	Disable the check boxes beside the toolbars you want to hide.

To dock toolbars

•	Drag the Title Bar of the toolbar that you want to dock toward the menus at the top of the Application Window or to any of the other sides.

To size floating toolbars

1.	Position the cursor over one of the toolbar's edges and wait until it becomes a two-sided arrow.

2.	Drag until the toolbar is the shape you want.

 Note

•	You can size only floating toolbars. When you dock a toolbar, it becomes horizontal when placed on the top or bottom side of the Application Window or vertical when placed on the left or right side.

 Related Topics


Using Docker windows

The following lists common actions you can perform on a Docker window:

To ...	Do this ...

Open a Docker window	Click Window, Dockers, and click the Docker window you want to open.

Collapse a Docker window	Click the arrow button at the corner of the Docker window.

Undock a Docker window	Drag the top of the Docker window away from the edge of the Application Window.

Dock a Docker window	Drag the Docker window to the edge of the Application Window.

Close a Docker window	Click the "X" button at the corner of the Docker window.

Separate Docker windows	Undock the Docker windows, and drag a tab from the list of Dockers.

 Related Topics


Using multiple Workspaces

You can create multiple Workspaces for specific users or specific tasks and then apply them when required. You can also delete workspaces when they are no longer needed. For more information about using workspaces, see "Customizing workspace settings."

To create a Workspace

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the New button.

3.	Type the name of the Workspace in the Name Of New Workspace box.

4.	From the Base New Workspace On list box, choose an existing Workspace on which to base the new Workspace.

5.	Type a description of the Workspace in the Description Of New Workspace box, if you want to include a description of the Workspace.

 Note

•	The description that you type in the Description Of New Workspace box appears in the list of available workspaces.

 Tip

•	You can enable the Set As Current Workspace check box to apply the new workspace immediately.

To choose a Workspace

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Choose a workspace from the Workspaces Available list.

3.	Click the Set As Current button.

 Tip

•	You can choose from several preset Workspaces. Each preset Workspace is designed to provide a working environment tailored to your requirements. For example, if you are using a low-resolution monitor setting, you can use the preset workspace designed for such a setting.

To delete a Workspace

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Choose a Workspace from the Workspaces Available list.

3.	Click the Delete button.

 Related Topics


Corel services and support


Overview: Corel services and support
Corel services and support

Corel is committed to providing customers with high-quality technical support. The following sections describe the variety of support services available.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Before calling Corel Technical Support


Overview: Before calling Corel Technical Support
Before calling Corel Technical Support

Before calling Corel Technical Support, please have the following information available. This information assists the Technical Support representative to help you more quickly and efficiently:

•	A brief description of the problem, including the exact text of any error messages received, and the steps to recreate the problem.

•	The type of computer, monitor, pointing device (e.g., mouse, tablet), printer, and video card (display adapter) in use.

•	The version of Microsoft Windows and the Corel product in use. Choose the About Windows 95 command from the Help menu in Windows Explorer to find which version of Windows you are running.

•	A list of any programs loaded into RAM (e.g., Terminate and Stay Resident programs). Check the Startup folder in the Programs menu to determine if you are running any other programs.

 Note

•	For more information on getting Technical Support, to go the Technical Support Help found under the Help menu.

 Related Topics


Telephone technical support options


Overview: Telephone technical support options
Telephone technical support options

CorelDRAW users can use complimentary and fee-based telephone technical support options. Complete information about these options, including phone numbers, is available in the Technical Support online Help file. This online Help file explains the various levels of support available to you and your organization.

Classic services

Classic Service is designed to address the technical support needs of CorelDRAW such as a technical understanding of new product features and basic installation and configuration issues.

Basic services

Corel offers the following technical support options, most of which are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. These services are useful if you prefer not to pay for support or encounter problems during off-hours.

Priority services

Priority service is a fee-based service for users that require the help of second-level technicians. Priority Service may be purchased by the minute, by the incident, or on a term basis. Options range from core business hour access for individual users, to around-the-clock access for multiuser environments.

 Related Topics


Other CorelDRAW support options


Overview: Other CorelDRAW support options
Other CorelDRAW support options

Corel offers the following technical support options, most of which are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. These services are useful if you prefer not to pay for support or if you encounter problems during off-hours.

Interactive Voice Answering Network (IVAN )

The Interactive Voice Answering Network contains answers to commonly asked questions about Corel products and is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. It is regularly updated with the latest information, tips, and tricks. You can also request that IVAN solutions be faxed to you. There is no charge for this service beyond the cost of the telephone call. To call IVAN dial (613) 728-7070.

Automated FAX on Demand

Technical Support maintains an automated FAX on Demand system of numbered documents that contain up-to-date information about common issues, tips, and tricks. This service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

To use this service call:

(613) 728-0826, extension 3080

You will be asked for a document number and your fax number. The document you request is automatically sent to you. To fax a catalog of documents to yourself, call the Automated FAX on Demand system number and request document 2000.

Bulletin Board System (BBS)

If you have a modem and communications software package, you can access the Corel BBS. You can download files, including printer drivers, troubleshooting information, and utilities. You can also transfer problem files to Customer Support through the BBS. For an explanation of how to access and use the BBS, call:

European BBS (++353)-1-7082700

North American BBS (613) 728-4752

 Related Topics


CompuServe

Interact with other users and Corel technicians to obtain product information and support. CompuServe is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, including holidays. Corel representatives will respond from 8:30 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. Eastern Standard Time, from Monday to Friday, excluding holidays.

If you have a CompuServe membership, you can access Corel technical information by entering one of the following at the CompuServe prompt:

•	GO COREL (for English)

•	GO CORELGER (for German)

•	GO CORELFR (for French)

•	GO CORELNL (for Dutch)

•	GO CORELSCAN (for Scandinavian)

 Related Topics


Technical Support on the World Wide Web

The World Wide Web address for Corel products on the Internet is http://www.corel.com. At this location, you can quickly search Corel's Searchable Knowledge Base. From the database you can read, print, or download documents that contain answers to many of your technical questions or problems. This site also contains files you can download.

AnswerPerfect

Customers can now submit support incidents (questions) by email to Corel's web site at a price of $14.95 U.S. per incident, payable by credit card for English language products only. Corel is committed to responding to AnswerPerfect support incidents within one business day.

File Transfer Protocol (FTP)

You can download updates, patches, and utilities by accessing our anonymous FTP site at ftp.corel.com.

 Note

•	The terms of Corel technical support offerings are subject to change without notice.

 Related Topics


Customer Service


Overview: Customer Service
Customer Service

Corel Customer Service can promptly and accurately provide you with information about Corel product features, specifications, pricing, availability, and services. You can access Customer Service support through the following avenues.

World Wide Web

You can access general customer service and product information through the World Wide Web at http://www.corel.com/support.

Mail, fax, email

You can send specific customer service questions to Corel Customer Service representatives by mail, fax, and email.

Corel Corporation
Corel Customer Service
1600 Carling Avenue
Ottawa, Ontario
Canada
K1Z 8R7

Fax: 1-613-761-9176 or 1-613-761-1295

Email: custserv2@corel.ca

Telephone

You can also telephone Corel Customer Service centers with your questions.

In North America, you can reach Corel Customer Service by calling our 1-800-772-6735 toll-free line. The hours of opertation are 9:00 a.m. to 9:00 p.m., Eastern Time, Monday through Friday, and from 10:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. on Saturday.

Corel customers residing outside North America can contact Corel Customer Service representatives in Dublin, Ireland on a toll line at 353-1-706-3916 or by calling a local authorized Corel Customer Service Partner.

To view a listing of Corel's International Customer Service telephone numbers refer to the online Technical Support Help file under the Help menu or visit our web site at http://www.corel.com/support.

 Related Topics


Creating special effects


Overview: Creating special effects
Creating special effects

The special effects in CorelDRAW let you alter the appearance of objects. You can distort objects, add new elements to objects, and change the relationship between objects.

By blending two objects, you create a series of intermediate objects that show a transition in color, shape, and size. Three distortion effects let you change the shape of objects: Push and Pull, Zipper, and Twister. You can also change the shape of an object by applying an envelope to it then shaping the envelope. The object conforms to the shape of the envelope. By extruding an object, CorelDRAW adds surfaces to make it appear three-dimensional. Adding one and two-point perspective lets you create the illusion of depth and distance. You can create the illusion of depth between objects by adding drop shadows. You can apply transparencies, which are grayscale masks, to objects. Transparencies are applied on top of the object's current fill, therefore the object's color show through the transparency. The lenses in CorelDRAW let you change the appearance of objects you view through them. You can contour an object, creating the effect created by contour lines on a topographical map. When you create PowerClip objects, you place an object inside another object. One object becomes the contents; the other object becomes the container.

You can apply effects to both Paragraph text and Artistic text. However, some effects are exclusive to Artistic text and others to Paragraph text because CorelDRAW treats the two text types differently.

Effects you can apply to Paragraph text frames include applying envelopes, drop shadows, and PowerClip objects.

Effects you can apply to Artistic text include extrusions, blends, contours, distortions, envelopes, lenses, PowerClip objects, perspectives, and drop shadows.

 More Detailed Information


Blending Objects


Overview: Blending Objects
Blending Objects

You can create a number of different blends, including straight-line blends and compound blends, among others. When you've created a blend, you change its intermediate objects. For example, you can set the number of steps and distance between intermediate objects. You can also change the entire blend. For example, you can change the start or end object, split the blend, or change the blend path.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Creating blends


Overview: Creating blends
Creating blends

CorelDRAW offers a variety of features for creating interesting blend effects, such as straight-line blends, blending along a path, compound blends, and copying and cloning blends.

Straight-line blends

The intermediate objects, in a straight-line blend, show a progression in shape and size between the original objects. The outline and fill colors of the intermediate objects progress on a straight-line path across the color spectrum. Special fills (i.e., fountain, pattern, and texture fills) show a progression between the objects' fills. The intermediate objects' outlines show a gradual progressions between different thickness and formats.

Blending along a path

By fitting a blend to a path or drawing a path freehand while you're blending objects, the objects follow the shape of the path. By default, the intermediate objects take on the original objects' horizontal and vertical orientation and are attached to the path at their respective centers of rotation.

Compound blends

Adding one or more objects to a blend creates a compound blend. To create a compound blend, you need two components: an existing blend and an object. You can connect the object at the blend's start or end object, but not at one of its intermediate objects. The object where you connect is shared between the two branches of the compound blend but maintains its relationship (that is, start or end object) with both.

Copying and cloning blends

You can also create new blends by copying or cloning a blend's settings to two selected objects. The objects take on all of the blend-related settings, except for their outline and fill attributes. With cloned blends, changes made to the original blend (also called the master) are also applied to the clone.

 Related Topics


Creating a straight-line blend

You can create a blend in which the intermediate objects progress in size, shape, and color from the start object to the end object along a straight line.

To create a straight-line blend

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Blend tool.

2.	Drag the end handle of one of the objects you want to blend over the other object you want to blend.

The end handle appears after you start dragging the object.

 Tip

•	By pressing ESC when you're dragging the Interactive Blend tool, you return the object to its state prior to dragging.

 Related Topics


Blending objects along a path

You can create a blend in which the intermediate objects progress along an existing path and stretch the objects along the full length of the path. You can also blend along a path you draw freehand.

To blend objects along a path

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Blend tool.

2.	Drag the end handle of one of the objects you want to blend over the other object you want to blend.

The end handle appears after you start dragging the object. This creates a straight-line blend between the two objects.

3.	Right-click the blend with the Pick tool.

4.	Drag the blend over the path.

5.	Click Fit Blend To Path.

To stretch the blend along the entire path

1.	Follow all of the steps from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Miscellaneous Blend Options button on the Property Bar.

3.	Enable the Blend Along Full Path check box.

To blend objects along a freehand path

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Blend tool.

2.	Hold down ALT, and draw a freehand path from one of the objects you want to blend to the other object you want to blend.

 Tip

•	By pressing ESC when you're dragging the Interactive Blend tool, you return the object to its state prior to dragging.

 Related Topics


Creating compound blends

You can create a compound blend by adding one or more objects to a blend's start or end object. The object you add becomes the end object of that component of the compound blend.

To create a compound blend

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Blend tool.

2.	Drag the end handle of the object you want to add over the blend's start or end object.

The end handle appears after you start dragging the object.

 Note

•	You can also create a compound blend by splitting a blend. For more information, see "Splitting a blend."

 Tip

•	By pressing ESC when you're dragging the Interactive Blend tool, you return the object to its state prior to dragging.

 Related Topics


Copying and cloning blends

You can copy and clone blend settings and apply them to two selected objects to create a blend.

To copy a blend

1.	Hold down SHIFT, and using the Pick tool, select the two objects to which you want to copy a blend.

2.	Click Effects, Copy, Blend From.

3.	Using the horizontal pointer that appears, select the blend you want to copy.

 Note

•	You can use the Copy Blend Properties button on the Property Bar when you want to copy the blend properties from one blend to another.

To clone a blend

1.	Hold down SHIFT and using the Pick tool, select the two objects to which you want to clone a blend.

2.	Click Effects, Clone, Blend From.

3.	Using the horizontal pointer that appears, select the blend you want to clone.

 Related Topics


Modifying the intermediate objects of a blend


Overview: Modifying the intermediate objects of a blend
Modifying the intermediate objects of a blend

You can alter the appearance of a blend by adjusting the space between intermediate objects, rotating them, setting their color progression, or accelerate their fills and outlines, you alter the appearance.

You can control the spacing between intermediate objects by setting the distance between objects, or by specifying the number of intermediate objects in the blend. When you're working with a blend that's fit to a path, you can specify the exact distance between the intermediate objects.

When you rotate a blend's intermediate objects, the rotation progresses counterclockwise around the centers of rotation of the intermediate objects. Looping, rotates the intermediate objects around a point halfway between the objects' centers of rotation.

By setting the color progression of intermediate objects, you determine the way outline and fill colors progress between the start and end objects of a blend. CorelDRAW provides a straight, clockwise, or counterclockwise path through the color spectrum.

In a basic blend, the intermediate objects are spaced evenly as they progress between the start and end objects. Similarly, the intermediate colors progress evenly between these objects. You can change object and color progressions so that they appear to accelerate toward the start or end object. For example when you accelerate objects in one direction, they get closer together as they progress in that direction.

By mapping nodes, you control the way the start object is transformed into the end object. As a result, you have greater control over the appearance of the intermediate blend objects.

 Related Topics


Setting the number of intermediate objects in a blend

You can specify the number of intermediate objects (steps) in a blend. The number of intermediate objects you specify determines the amount of space between the objects.

To set the number of steps in a blend

1.	Select the blend with the Pick tool.

2.	Enable the top portion of the Use Steps Or Fixed Spacing For Blend button on the Property Bar.

The button is enabled when it appears pressed.

3.	Type a value in the top portion of the Number Of Steps Or Offset Between Blend Shapes box on the Property Bar.

4.	Press ENTER.

 Tip

•	Higher numbers create less space.

 Related Topics


Setting the distance between the intermediate objects blended along a path

You can specify the distance between the intermediate objects that are blended along a path.

To set the distance between intermediate objects blended along a path

1.	Select the blend along a path with the Pick tool.

2.	Enable the bottom portion of the Use Steps Or Fixed Spacing For Blend button on the Property Bar.

The button is enabled when it appears pressed.

3.	Type a value in the bottom portion of the Number Of Steps Or Offset Between Shapes box on the Property Bar.

4.	Press ENTER.

 Related Topics


Rotating the intermediate objects in a blend

You can rotate the intermediate objects in a blend as they progress between the start and end objects. By default, objects are attached to the path by their centers of rotation. You can change the default by looping the intermediate objects to rotate them halfway between the start and end objects' centers of rotation.

You can also rotate intermediate objects that are blended along a path.

To rotate the intermediate objects of a straight-line blend

1.	Select the blend with the Pick tool.

2.	Type the degree to which you want to rotate the intermediate objects in the Blend Direction box on the Property Bar.

3.	Press ENTER.

 Note

•	Negative numbers rotate the objects clockwise.

To loop the intermediate object of a straight-line blend

1.	Follow all of the steps from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Loop button on the Property Bar.

The button is enabled when it appears pressed.

 Note

•	You can enter degree values between -360 and 360. Negative numbers rotate the objects clockwise.

To rotate intermediate objects that are blended along a path

1.	Select the blend along a path with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Miscellaneous Blend Options button on the Property Bar.

3.	Enable the Rotate All Objects check box.

 Related Topics


Setting the color progression for the intermediate objects in a blend

You can determine how the outline and fill colors of the intermediate objects in a blend progress through the color spectrum from the start object to the end object. You can choose from a straight, clockwise, or counterclockwise path through the color spectrum.

To set the color progression for intermediate objects

1.	Select the blend with the Pick tool.

2.	Enable one of the following buttons on the Property Bar to indicate the type of color progression you want:

•	Direct Blend

•	Clockwise Blend

•	Counterclockwise Blend

The button is enabled when it appears pressed.

 Note

•	You can set the color progression for any blend that uses uniform or fountain fills. You can't create color progressions using bitmap, texture, vector pattern, PostScript, or transparent fills.

 Related Topics


Accelerating the intermediate objects' distance, fills and outlines, and size

You can change the distance between intermediate objects as they progress between the start and end objects. You can also change the progression of the outline and fill colors, as well as the progression of the size of intermediate objects. You can link the rates of color and object acceleration so that they accelerate at the same rate.

To accelerate the distance between intermediate objects

1.	Select the blend with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Object And Color Acceleration button on the Property Bar.

3.	Move the Object Acceleration slider to set the direction and rate of object acceleration.

To accelerate the colors of intermediate objects

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Move the Color Acceleration slider to set the direction and rate of color acceleration.

To accelerate the size of intermediate objects

1.	Select the blend with the Pick tool.

2.	Enable the Accelerate Sizing For Blend button on the Property Bar.

The button is enabled when it appears pressed.

To link the rates of color and object acceleration

1.	Select the blend with the Pick tool.

2.	Enable the Link Blend Accelerations button on the Property Bar.

The button is enabled when it appears pressed.

 Related Topics


Mapping nodes to set the progression of objects in a blend

You can specify which nodes CorelDRAW treats as the first node on start and end object's first nodes. These nodes determines how the intermediate objects are transformed from the start object to become the end object.

To change a blend's appearance by mapping nodes

1.	Select the blend with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Miscellaneous Blend Options button on the Property Bar.

3.	Click the Map Nodes button.

4.	Using the curved pointer that appears, select a node (hollow black square) on the end object and select a node on the start object.

 Related Topics


Editing blends


Overview: Editing blends
Editing blends

Editing blends lets you customize their appearance. You can manipulate a blend's intermediate objects and change its path. You can also work with the individual components of a blend by separating it.

You can edit blends by selecting changing the start and end objects of a blend. By reversing a blend's direction, the blend progresses from the end object to the start object. You can also split blends to create a compound blend or fuse the components of a compound blend to create a single blend. When you split a blend, the object you choose to split the blend becomes the end object for one component in the blend and the start object for the other.

When you blend an object along a path, you can select the path and apply the blend to new path. You can also remove a blend from its path. When you remove a blend from its path, the start and end objects remain stationary and the intermediate objects revert to their original, straight-line path.

You can separate a blend into four possible components: the start object, the end object, the intermediate objects, and the path (if the objects were blended along a path). You can also clear a blend by removing the intermediate objects and leaving the start and end objects.

 Related Topics


Selecting the start and end objects of a blend

You can identify and select a blend's start and end objects.

To select the start object in a blend

1.	Select the blend with the Pick tool.

2.	On the Property Bar, click the Start And End Object Properties button, and click Show Start.

To select the end object in a blend

1.	Select the blend with the Pick tool.

2.	On the Property Bar, click the Start And End Object Properties button, and click Show End.

 Related Topics


Changing the blend direction and start and end objects

You can change a blend's start and end object without having to reblend. CorelDRAW automatically redirects the blend, using the same settings as the original blend. By changing the direction of a blend, the blend progresses from the end object to the start object.

To change a blend's start object

1.	Select the blend with the Pick tool.

2.	On the Property Bar, click the Start And End Object Properties button, and click New Start.

3.	Using the horizontal pointer that appears, click the new start object.

 Note

•	The new start object must be layered behind the selected blend's end object. For information about the stacking order of objects, see "Changing the order of objects."

To change a blend's end object

1.	Select the blend with the Pick tool.

2.	On the Property Bar, click the Start And End Object Properties button, and click New End.

3.	Using the horizontal pointer that appears, click the new end object.

 Note

•	The new end object must be layered in front of the selected blend's start object. For information about the stacking order of objects, see "Changing the order of objects."

To reverse the direction of a blend

1.	Select the blend with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Order, Reverse Order.

 Related Topics


Splitting a blend

You can split a blend to create a compound blend. The object you choose to split the blend becomes the end object for one component in the blend and the start object for the other. Thus, the original blend is split into two components. For more information about compound blends, see "Creating compound blends."

To split a blend

1.	Select the blend with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Miscellaneous Options button, on the Property Bar.

3.	Click the Split button.

4.	Using the curved pointer that appears, click the intermediate object at which you want to split the blend.

 Notes

•	You can't split a blend using the intermediate object that is immediately adjacent to the start or end object.

•	You can change the appearance of one component of a compound blend without affecting the other component.

 Tip

•	You can also select a component of a compound blend by a holding down CTRL and clicking any of its intermediate objects.

 Related Topics


Fusing a blend

You can fuse the components of a split or a compound blend to create a single blend.

To fuse the start object in a split or compound blend

1.	Hold down CTRL, and select the end component of the blend with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Miscellaneous Options button, on the Property Bar.

3.	Click the Fuse Start button.

To fuse the end object in a split or compound blend

1.	Hold down CTRL, and select the start component of the blend with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Miscellaneous Options button, on the Property Bar.

3.	Click the Fuse End button.

 Note

•	If the selected blend and at least two of the compound blend's components share the same start or end object, a curved pointer appears. Use this pointer to click the intermediate object in the component blend that you want to fuse.

 Related Topics


Selecting the blend path

You can identify and select the path along which objects are blended.

To select the blend path

1.	Select the blend with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Path Properties button on the Property Bar, and click Show Path.

 Related Topics


Changing the blend path

You can apply a blend to a different path. The blend retains all of its settings as it follows the shape of the new path.

To change the blend path

1.	Select the blend with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Path Properties button on the Property Bar, and click New Path.

3.	Using the curved pointer that appears, select the path to which you want to apply the blend.

 Note

•	The new path to which you want to apply the selected blend must already be drawn.

 Related Topics


Removing a blend from a path

You can detach a blend from its path.

To remove a blend from a path

1.	Select the blend with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Path Properties button on the Property Bar, and click Detach From Path.

 Note

•	You can select and detach a component of a compound blend by holding down CTRL while you select the component. For more information about compound blends, see "Creating compound blends."

 Related Topics


Separating and removing a blend

You can break a blend into four possible components: the start object, the end object, the intermediate objects, and the path (if the objects were blended along a path). You can also remove the intermediate objects from a blend, leaving its start and end objects.

To separate blended objects

1.	Select the blend with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Separate.

 Tip

•	You can ungroup the intermediate objects by selecting the group with the Pick tool and clicking Arrange, Ungroup.

To remove a blend

1.	Select the blend with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Clear Blend.

 Tip

•	You can also click the Clear Blend button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Distorting Objects


Overview: Distorting Objects
Distorting Objects

The interactive distortion tools let you apply interesting effects to objects. You can push or pull the nodes of objects you're distorting away from or towards their centers. By applying a zipper, you can create a jagged, pointy outlines. You can also edit the effects of the Zipper distortion. You can also twist objects. By twisting an object, you wind the object around itself into a shape that resembles a coil.

Additionally, there are modifications which you can apply to all of the distortions which let you distort and customized them further. For example, you can change the center of a distortion.

 Note

•	You can apply each type of distortion effect to any object you create using CorelDRAW, including shapes, lines, curves, and Artistic text.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Creating Push and Pull distortions


Overview: Creating Push and Pull distortions
Creating Push and Pull distortions

When you apply a Push distortion to an object, the object's nodes are forced towards its center thereby rounding the object. The Pull distortion draws an object's nodes away from its center, making the object pointy.

When you create a Push or Pull distortion you like, you can copy it and apply it to other selected objects. If you don't like the distortion, you can remove it without deleting the object.

 Related Topics


Applying and removing a Push distortion

You can apply a Push distortion to any object you create. If you don't like the distorted object, you can remove the Push distortion.

To apply a Push distortion

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Distortion tool.

2.	Enable the Push And Pull Distortion button on the Property Bar.

The button is enabled when it appears pressed.

3.	Select the object to which you want to apply the distortion, and drag the mouse to the right.

 Notes

•	The point at which you click the object determines the center of the distortion.

•	By pressing ESC when you're dragging the Interactive Distortion tool, you return the object to its state prior to dragging.

 Tip

•	You can also create a Push distortion by typing a value (from -200 to -1) in the Push And Pull Distortion Amplitude box on the Property Bar.

To remove a Push distortion

1.	Select the distorted object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Clear Distortion.

 Tip

•	You can also remove a distortion by clicking the Clear Distortion button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Applying and removing a Pull distortion

You can apply a Pull distortion to any object you create. If you don't like the distorted object, you can remove the Pull distortion.

To apply a Pull distortion

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Distortion tool.

2.	Enable the Push And Pull Distortion button on the Property Bar.

The button is enabled when it appears pressed.

3.	Select the object to which you want to apply the distortion, and drag the mouse to the left.

 Notes

•	The point at which you click the object determines the center of the distortion.

•	By pressing ESC when you're dragging the Interactive Distortion tool, you return the object to its state prior to dragging.

 Tip

•	You can also create a Pull distortion by typing a value (from 1 to 200) in the Push And Pull Distortion Amplitude box on the Property Bar.

To remove a Pull distortion

1.	Select the distorted object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Clear Distortion.

 Tip

•	You can also remove a distortion by clicking the Clear Distortion button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Copying Push and Pull distortions

You can copy Push and Pull distortions and apply them to selected objects.

To copy a Push or Pull distortion

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Distortion tool.

2.	Select the object to which you want to copy the distortion.

3.	Click Effects, Copy Effect, Distortion From.

4.	Using the horizontal pointer that appears, select the distortion you want to copy.

 Tip

•	You can also use the Copy Distortion Properties button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Creating Zipper distortions


Overview: Creating Zipper distortions
Creating Zipper distortions

When you apply a Zipper distortion to an object, you create a series of points above and below the object's original outline. The outline follows these points to create a zipper effect. You can also create a random Zipper distortion, where the horizontal and vertical points follow a haphazard course.

When you create a Zipper distortion you like, you can copy it and apply it to selected objects. If you don't like the distortion, you can remove it without deleting the object.

 Related Topics


Applying and removing a Zipper distortion

You can apply a Zipper distortion to an object. If you don't like the distorted object, you can remove the Zipper distortion.

To apply a Zipper distortion

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Distortion tool.

2.	Enable the Zipper Distortion button on the Property Bar.

The button is enabled when it appears pressed.

3.	Select the object to which you want to apply the distortion.

4.	Drag the end handle to determine the amplitude of the zipper effect.

The point at which you click the object determines the center of the distortion.

5.	In the Drawing Window, move the slider to determine the zipper frequency.

 Note

•	By pressing ESC when you're dragging the Interactive Distortion tool, you return the object to its state prior to dragging.

 Tip

•	You can also adjust the amplitude of the zipper effect by typing a value in the Zipper Distortion Amplitude box on the Property Bar. You can type values from 0 to 100. Higher values produce a more pronounced zipper distortion.

To remove a Zipper distortion

1.	Select the distorted object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Clear Distortion.

 Tip

•	You can remove a distortion by clicking the Clear Distortion button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Applying a random Zipper distortion

You can apply the Zipper distortion to an object randomly. You can also return the random Zipper distortion to a uniform pattern.

To apply a random Zipper distortion

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Distortion tool.

2.	Enable the Zipper Distortion button on the Property Bar.

The button is enabled when it appears pressed.

3.	Select the object to which you want to apply the distortion.

4.	Drag the end handle to determine the amplitude of the zipper effect.

5.	Enable the Random Distortion button on the Property Bar.

To return the Zipper distortion to a uniform pattern

•	Disable the Random Distortion button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Copying Zipper distortions

You can copy a Zipper distortion and apply it to a selected object.

To copy a Zipper distortion

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Distortion tool.

2.	Select the object to which you want to copy the distortion.

3.	Click Effects, Copy Effect, Distortion From.

4.	Using the horizontal pointer that appears, select the distortion you want to copy.

 Tip

•	You can also use the Copy Distortion Properties button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Editing Zipper distortions


Overview: Editing Zipper distortions
Editing Zipper distortions

When you're working with Zipper distortions, you can customize the effect by rounding the zipper's points, adjusting the number of points per line segment, and emphasizing the distortion in a given area of the object.

 Related Topics


Rounding the points of a Zipper distortion

You can round the points of a Zipper distortion.

To round the points of a Zipper distortion

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Distortion tool.

2.	Select the object whose zipper points you want to round.

3.	Enable the Zipper Distortion button on the Property Bar.

The button is enabled when it appears pressed.

4.	Enable the Smooth Distortion button on the Property Bar.

 Note

•	To return to a pointed Zipper distortion, disable the Smooth Distortion button.

 Related Topics


Changing the number of zipper points

You can change the number of zipper points per line segment.

To change the number of zipper points

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Distortion tool.

2.	Select the object to which a Zipper distortion is applied.

3.	Enable the Zipper Distortion button on the Property Bar.

4.	Type a value in the Zipper Distortion Frequency box on the Property Bar.

 Tip

•	Higher values produce a greater zipper frequency.

 Related Topics


Emphasizing a Zipper distortion in a specific area

You can emphasize a Zipper distortion in a specific area of an object.

To emphasize a Zipper distortion in a specific area of an object

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Distortion tool.

2.	Select the object whose zipper distortion you want to localize.

3.	Ensure that the Zipper Distortion button is enabled on the Property Bar.

The button is enabled when it appears pressed.

4.	Enable the Local Distortion button on the Property Bar.

5.	Drag the reposition handle to the area of the object where you want the zipper distortion to be more pronounced.

 Related Topics


Creating Twister distortions


Overview: Creating Twister distortions
Creating Twister distortions

The Twister distortion turns an object around itself. When you apply a Twister distortion to an object, the point at which you click becomes the center of the distortion, which can be also identified by a diamond-shaped handle. The center is fixed while one end of the object is wound around this fixed point. A dashed line, the Horizontal Line Of Origin, extends from the center of the object. This line measures the amount of Twister distortion in degrees you apply as you drag the rotation handle in either a clockwise or counterclockwise direction. One full rotation is 359 degrees.

CorelDRAW also lets you adjust the rotation of Twister distortions. For example, you can change the number of degrees you've rotated an object, as well as the direction of the rotation.

When you create a Twister distortion you like, you can copy it and apply it to other selected objects. If you don't like the distortion, you can remove it without deleting the object.

 Related Topics


Applying and removing a Twister distortion

You can apply a Twister distortion to an object. If you don't like the effect, you can remove the Twister distortion.

To apply a Twister distortion

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Distortion tool.

2.	Enable the Twister Distortion button on the Property Bar.

The button is enabled when it appears pressed.

3.	Select the object to which you want to apply the distortion, and drag the mouse to the right along the x-axis, and up slightly along the y-axis to apply a small amount of distortion.

 Note

•	After you complete one full rotation (359 degrees), the Number Of Rotations box counts one and the Degrees box resumes counting from zero.

To remove a Twister distortion

1.	Select the distorted object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Clear Distortion.

 Tip

•	You can remove a distortion by clicking the Clear Distortion button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Adjusting the rotation of a Twister distortion

You can adjust the number of degrees, as well as the number of complete rotations you've applied to an object. You can also rotate the object clockwise or counterclockwise.

To change the number of degrees the object is rotated

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Distortion tool.

2.	Select the object with the Twister distortion.

3.	Type a value in the Additional Degrees box on the Property Bar.

To change the number of complete rotations

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Type a value in the Complete Rotations box on the Property Bar.

To rotate the Twister distortion clockwise

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To change the number of degrees the object is rotated" procedure.

2.	Click the Clockwise button on the Property Bar.

To rotate the Twister distortion counterclockwise

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To change the number of degrees the object is rotated" procedure.

2.	Click the Counterclockwise button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Copying Twister distortions

You can copy a Twister distortion and apply it to a selected object.

To copy a Twister distortion

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Distortion tool.

2.	Select the object to which you want to copy the distortion.

3.	Click Effects, Copy Effect, Distortion From.

4.	Using the horizontal pointer that appears, select the distortion you want to copy.

 Tip

•	You can also use the Copy Distortion Properties button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Modifying distortions


Overview: Modifying distortions
Modifying distortions

When you're working with Push and Pull, Zipper, and Twister distortions, you can change the effect by moving the center of the distortion. You can also apply a different distortion to a distorted object. For example, you can apply a Twister distortion to an object to which you've applied a Zipper distortion.

 Related Topics


Changing the center of a distortion

You can change the center of a distortion. You can also return the reposition handle to center of the distortion.

To change the center of a distortion

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Distortion tool.

2.	Select the distorted object.

3.	Ensure that the appropriate distortion button is enabled on the Property Bar.

The button is enabled when it appears pressed.

4.	Drag the diamond-shaped position handle to a new location.

The distortion effect updates as you drag the reposition handle.

To center the reposition handle of a distortion

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Distortion tool.

2.	Select the distorted object.

3.	Ensure that the appropriate distortion button is enabled on the Property Bar.

The button is enabled when it appears pressed.

4.	Click the Center Distortion button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Applying a new distortion

You can apply a new distortion to a distorted object.

To apply a new distortion to a distorted object

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Distortion tool.

2.	Select the distorted object.

3.	Click the Add New button on the Property Bar.

4.	Enable the distortion button you want to apply on the Property Bar.

The button is enabled when it appears pressed.

5.	Apply the distortion effect to the object.

 Related Topics


Working with envelopes


Overview: Working with envelopes
Working with envelopes

Envelopes provide a powerful and simple way to shape objects. When you apply an envelope to an object, the envelope surrounds the object and appears as a dotted red line with a series of squares at points along its path. By dragging the nodes in any direction, you shape the envelope. In turn, as the envelope changes shape, the associated object automatically reshapes to conform to the envelope.

Additionally, you can continue to shape an envelope and the object it surrounds by editing the envelope. For example, you can change an envelope's line segments from lines to curves.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Creating envelopes


Overview: Creating envelopes
Creating envelopes

You can distort the shape of an object by applying an envelope to it and shaping the envelope. You can apply a basic or a preset envelope. You can also copy an envelope from an object in your drawing and apply it to another object.

By removing an envelope from an object, you return the object to its shape prior to applying the envelope.

 Related Topics


Applying and removing envelopes

You can apply an envelope to an object to shape the object. You can also apply an envelope to an object with an envelope. Remove envelopes one at a time, starting with the one you applied most recently.

To apply an envelope

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Envelope tool.

2.	Select the object to which you want to apply an envelope.

3.	Click one of the following buttons on the Property Bar to indicate the editing mode you want:

•	Straight Line

•	Single Arc

•	Double Arc

•	Unconstrained

4.	Drag a node to change the shape of the envelope.

5.	Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the envelope is the shape you want.

Notes

•	You can apply envelopes to Paragraph text frames and Artistic text.

•	By pressing ESC when you're dragging the Interactive Envelope tool, you return the object to its state prior to dragging.

To apply an envelope with an envelope

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Envelope tool.

2.	Select the object to which you want to apply another envelope.

3.	Click the Add New Envelope button on the Property Bar.

4.	Follow steps 3 to 5 from the previous procedure.

To remove an envelope

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the object that has the envelope you want to remove.

2.	Click Effects, Clear Envelope.

 Note

•	Before clearing an envelope, you have to remove any effects that were applied to the object after you applied the envelope.

 Tip

•	You can also remove an envelope with the Interactive Envelope tool by clicking the Clear Envelope button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Applying preset envelopes

You can apply preset envelopes of various shapes.

To apply a preset envelope

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Envelope tool.

3.	Enable the Keep Lines button on the Property Bar to prevent CorelDRAW from changing the object's straight lines to curves when you apply the envelope.

4.	Click the Add Preset button on the Property Bar, and choose the envelope shape you want to apply.

 Notes

•	By pressing ESC when you're dragging the Interactive Envelope tool, you return the object to its state prior to dragging.

•	You can adjust the shape of a preset envelope after you apply it to an object.

 Related Topics


Copying an envelope

You can copy an envelope from one object and apply it to another object.

To copy an envelope

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the object to which you want to copy the envelope.

2.	Click Effects, Copy, Envelope From.

3.	Using the horizontal pointer that appears, select the object that has the envelope you want to copy.

 Notes

•	If you've applied an effect to the object since you applied the envelope, you won't be able to copy the envelope.

•	You can apply the same envelope effect to several different objects.

 Tip

•	You can also copy an envelope using the Copy Envelope Properties button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Editing envelopes


Overview: Editing envelopes
Editing envelopes

After you've applied an envelope to an object, you can edit the envelope in a variety of ways [image] you can change its editing mode, apply a new mapping mode, convert envelope segments from lines to curves and vice versa, and edit an envelope's node. You can add, remove, move, or change the shape of envelope nodes.

The editing modes control the shape of the envelope itself. Three of these modes [image] Straight Line, Single Arc, and Double Arc [image] let you drag a node or control point horizontally or vertically to change the shape of one side of the envelope. The fourth mode, Unconstrained, lets you drag a node in any direction to make more dramatic changes. In addition, the Unconstrained mode has control points for each node, which let you make precise adjustments to get the exact envelope shape you want.

By applying a new mapping mode, you change how CorelDRAW fits the object to the envelope, not the shape of the envelope itself. There are four mapping modes: Horizontal, Original, Putty, and Vertical. A fifth mode, Text, appears if you're using the envelope to reshape Paragraph text.

As with object segments, envelope segments can be converted from curves to straight lines or from straight lines to curves. By changing the segment's type, you change the way the envelope reacts when it's edited.

When you add nodes to an envelope, you can make minute adjustments to give the envelope a more complex shape. You can simplify the envelope's shape by removing nodes.

The most basic method of editing an envelope is to move its nodes. For example, you can move adjacent nodes an equal distance in the same direction.

You can change a node's type, which changes the way the envelope segments on either side pass through the node. Changing the node type changes the shape of the envelope, which in turn changes the effect the envelope has on the object.

 Related Topics


Changing the editing mode of an envelope

You can continue to shape an envelope by changing its editing mode.

To shape an envelope

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Envelope tool.

2.	Select the object that has the envelope you want to edit.

3.	On the Property Bar, click one of the following buttons to choose an editing mode:

•	Envelope Straight Line Mode

•	Envelope Single Arc Mode

•	Envelope Double Arc Mode

•	Envelope Unconstrained Mode

4.	Drag the nodes (or the nodes' control points) to attain the desired envelope shape.

 Related Topics


Changing the mapping mode of an envelope

You can change the mapping mode of an envelope to adjust the way the object fits to the envelope.

To change the mapping mode

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Envelope tool.

2.	Select the object that has the envelope you want to edit.

3.	Choose one of the following mapping options from the Mapping Mode list box on the Property Bar:

•	Horizontal Mode [image] stretches the object to fit the basic dimensions of the envelope, then compresses it horizontally to fit the shape of the envelope

•	Original Mode [image] maps the corner handles on the object's selection box to the envelope's corner nodes. The other nodes are mapped linearly along the edge of the object's selection box. The nodes' control points are taken into consideration during mapping

•	Putty Mode [image] maps the corner handles on the object's selection box to the envelope's corner nodes only. The other nodes are ignored

•	Vertical Mode [image] stretches the object to fit the basic dimensions of the envelope, then compresses it vertically to fit the shape of the envelope

4.	Select the object you selected in step 1.

5.	Edit the envelope until it is the shape you want.

 Note

•	You can't change the mapping mode for Paragraph text.

 Related Topics


Changing a segment of an envelope

You can change a segment of an envelope from a straight line to a curve or vice versa.

To change an envelope segment to a straight line or curve

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Envelope tool.

2.	Select the segment you want to change.

3.	Click one of the following buttons on the Property Bar:

•	Convert Curve To Line

•	Convert Line To Curve

 Note

•	You must use the Unconstrained envelope editing mode to change the envelope segment type.

 Related Topics


Adding and removing envelope nodes

You can add nodes to and remove nodes from envelopes to help shape the envelope.

To add a node to an envelope

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Envelope tool.

2.	Select the object that has the envelope you want to edit.

3.	Click the Unconstrained button on the Property Bar.

4.	Double-click the envelope at the point where you want to add a node.

 Tip

•	You can also click the envelope where you want to add a node and click the Plus button on the Property Bar.

To remove a node from an envelope

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Double-click a node to remove it from the envelope.

 Tip

•	You can also select the node and click the Minus button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Moving envelope nodes

You can move several envelope nodes at the same time provided you're using the Unconstrained editing mode. You can also move opposite nodes an equal distance in the same direction when you're using an editing mode other than Unconstrained.

To move several envelope nodes at once

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Envelope tool.

2.	Select the object that has the envelope you want to edit.

3.	Click the Unconstrained button on the Property Bar.

4.	Marquee select the nodes you want to move.

5.	Drag any of the selected nodes.

Each of the selected nodes move the same distance and direction as the node you drag.

 Note

•	CorelDRAW reshapes the selected object after you reshape its envelope.

 Tip

•	You can limit node movement horizontally or vertically in the Unconstrained editing mode by holding down CTRL as you drag.

To move nodes on opposite sides of the object an equal distance in the same direction

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click one of the following buttons on the Property Bar:

•	Envelope Straight Line Mode

•	Envelope Single Arc Mode

•	Envelope Double Arc Mode

3.	Hold down CTRL as you drag a node.

 Tip

•	You can move nodes on opposite sides an equal distance in the opposite direction by holding down SHIFT as you drag.

 Related Topics


Changing the envelope node type

You can change the envelope node type.

To change an envelope node type

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Envelope tool.

2.	Select the object that has the envelope you want to edit.

3.	Click the Unconstrained button on the Property Bar.

4.	Click the node you want to change.

5.	Click one of the following buttons on the Property Bar:

•	Make Node A Cusp

•	Make Node Smooth

•	Make Node Symmetrical

 Note

•	For more information about cusp, smooth, and symmetrical nodes, see "Drawing and shaping objects."

 Related Topics


Extruding objects


Overview: Extruding objects
Extruding objects

Applying extrusions gives a two-dimensional object the illusion of depth. There are two types of extrusions [image] vector and bitmap.

For vector extrusions, CorelDRAW projects points from the object and joins them to create extruded surfaces. These surfaces are projected toward a vanishing point, adding depth to the original object so that it appears three-dimensional. However, the vanishing points for Back Parallel and Front Parallel extrusions are infinite, therefore the extruded surfaces can never converge.

After you've created a vector extrusion, you can edit it, apply fills to all or various extruded surfaces, and add light sources to enhance the effect of the extrusion.

You can also apply bitmap extrusions to objects you create in CorelDRAW. Applying bitmap extrusions lets you work with objects in three dimensions. Once you've created a bitmap extrusion, you can apply bevels, Ambient and Point lights, and texture fills. By rendering bitmap extrusions, CorelDRAW creates a two-dimensional bitmap.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Creating vector extrusions


Overview: Creating vector extrusions
Creating vector extrusions

You can apply a basic vector extrusion to objects to make them appear three-dimensional. You can also apply a bevel to an object and to an vector extrusion, as well as copy and clone an object's extrusion attributes to another object.

Beveling creates the illusion that an object's edges are cut at an angle other than 90 degrees. You specify the appropriate angle and depth values for the size of the object being cut. The illusion itself is created through the addition of objects on top of the control object (the object you extruded). These objects work together to give the object a three-dimensional look.

You can create vector extrusions by copying and cloning. Copying transfers an object's extrusion attributes to a selected object. The selected object takes on all vector extrusion-related settings, while its fill and outline attributes remain unaffected. The two extruded objects have no connection and can be edited independently.

Cloning also transfers an object's vector extrusion attributes to a selected object. The selected object takes on all vector extrusion-related settings, while its fill and outline settings remain unaffected. With clones, however, changes made to the original extruded object (also called the master) afterward are also applied to the clone. Additionally, you can't edit the cloned object's extrusion settings; any changes must be made to the master object.

 Related Topics


Applying basic vector extrusions

You can apply a vector extrusion to an object to give it the illusion of depth.

To apply a basic vector extrusion

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Extrude tool.

2.	Select the object you want to extrude.

A small arrow appears below the cursor to indicate that you can extrude the object.

3.	Click the Vector Extrusion Mode button on the Property Bar.

4.	Drag the vanishing point marker (represented by "X") to set the depth and direction of the extrusion.

The vanishing point marker appears after you begin to drag.

5.	Choose an extrusion type from the Extrusion Type list box on the Property Bar.

6.	Choose a vanishing point option from the Depth box on the Property Bar.

 Note

•	By pressing ESC when you're dragging the Interactive Extrude tool, you return the object to its state prior to dragging.

 Tips

•	You can place the vanishing point at a precise coordinate by typing values in the X and Y boxes on the Property Bar.

•	If you're creating a perspective extrusion, you can also set the depth by typing a value in the Depth box on the Property Bar or by dragging the slider in the Drawing Window.

 Related Topics


Applying beveled vector extrusions

You can apply beveled edges to an object or a vector extrusion.

To apply a bevel to a vector extrusion

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the extrusion.

2.	Click the Bevels button on the Property Bar.

3.	Enable the Use Bevel check box.

4.	Type a value in the Bevel Depth box to specify how deep you want the bevel.

You can specify values from 0.001 to 1980 inches (or the equivalent in other units of measurement).

5.	Type a value in the Bevel Angle box to specify the angle at which you want to cut the bevel edge.

You can specify values from 1.0 (a nearly straight bevel) to 89.0 degrees (a high-angle bevel).

 Tip

•	You can also set the bevel depth and angle using the Interactive Display box.

To apply a bevel to an object

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Extrude tool.

2.	Select the object to which you want to apply a bevel.

3.	Click the Bevels button on the Property Bar.

4.	Enable the Use Bevel check box.

5.	Enable the Show Bevel Only check box.

 Note

•	By pressing ESC when you're dragging the Interactive Extrude tool, you return the object to its state prior to dragging.

 Related Topics


Copying and cloning a vector extrusions

You can copy and clone an object's extrusion attributes and transfer them to another object.

To copy a vector extrusion

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the object to which you want to copy an extrusion.

2.	Click Effects, Copy Effect, Extrude From.

3.	Using the horizontal pointer that appears, select the extrusion you want to copy.

 Tip

•	You can also use the Copy Extrude Properties button on the Property Bar.

To clone a vector extrusion

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the object to which you want to clone an extrusion.

2.	Click Effects, Clone Effect, Extrude From.

3.	Using the horizontal pointer that appears, select the extrusion you want to clone.

 Note

•	The selected object's fill and outline settings remain unaffected.

 Related Topics


Editing vector extrusions


Overview: Editing vector extrusions
Editing vector extrusions

After you've applied a vector extrusion to an object, you can select the various components and edit them. You can also edit a vector extrusion by shaping the control object, changing the depth of the extruded surfaces, and by the rotating the vector extrusion. You can also change the vector extrusion type, as well as move, lock, copy, and share an extrusion's vanishing point. You may also want to control the facet size used when CorelDRAW renders and prints illustrations containing extrusions.

Extruded surfaces form a dynamically linked group with the original object (also called the control object). When you change the shape of the control object, the extruded surfaces automatically reflect these changes. For example, if you extrude a polygon, and use the Shape tool to make the polygon a star, the extruded surfaces change to reflect the control object's new shape.

By changing the vector extrusion type, you determine the position of the extruded surfaces relative to the control object, as well as the position of the vanishing point.

You can move a vector extrusion's vanishing point without changing the extrusion type. You can also lock a vanishing point to the page or to the control object. When you lock the vanishing point to the page, it remains fixed in its position relative to the page. When you move the control object, the vanishing point maintains its position. The vector extrusion is redrawn based on the control object's new position.

Further, you can copy and share vanishing points. When you copy a vector extrusion's vanishing point to another object, a new vanishing point is created on top of the existing vanishing point. As a result, both objects appear to recede toward the same point. The two vanishing points can be edited independently. When you share a vanishing point, the vector extrusions all use one vanishing point. Changes to the vanishing point's position affect all the extrusions that share that point.

Facet size represents the minimum size of the polygonal surfaces used to create the extrusions. Each facet consists of a unique color, therefore, smaller facets create smoother color transitions and larger facets create blockier color transitions on lighted extrusions.

When you're editing your drawing, you may want to separate the various extruded surfaces or decide to clear them completely.

 Related Topics


Selecting vector extrusions

You can select the entire vector extrusion, the control object (the original object), the extruded surfaces, and the beveled surfaces.

To select an entire vector extrusion

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2.	Click any of the extrusion's extruded surfaces.

To select a vector extrusion's control object

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2.	Click the control object.

To select an extruded surface

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2.	Hold down CTRL, and click an extruded surface.

To select a beveled surface

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2.	Hold down CTRL, and click a beveled surface.

 Note

•	You must separate the extrusion before you can select the components. For more information see, "Separating vector extrusions."

 Related Topics


Changing the shape of an extrusion's control object

You can change the shape of a vector extrusion's control object.

To change the shape of the control object of an extrusion

1.	Open the Shape Edit Flyout, and click the Shape tool.

2.	Select the control object.

3.	Click and drag the object's nodes one at a time to change its shape.

When you release the mouse button, the extruded surfaces reshape to reflect your changes.

 Notes

•	You can't use the Shape tool to edit a control object in all cases. Perspective extrusions that have been rotated using the rotation tools on the Property Bar and extrusions that have been altered using the Add Perspective or Envelope effects can't be edited. You need to clear the effect before you shape the control object for these extrusions. For more information about shaping objects, see "Drawing and shaping objects."

•	You can use the controls in the Format Text dialog box to format the extruded text. Double-click the text nodes on the object using the Shape tool to access the dialog box.

 Related Topics


Setting the depth of a vector extrusion

You can adjust the depth of an vector extrusion.

To set the depth of a vector extrusion

1.	Select the extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Type a value in the Depth box on the Property Bar.

3.	Press ENTER.

 Related Topics


Rotating vector extrusions

You can rotate a vector extrusion using precise values.

To rotate a vector extrusion

1.	Select the extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Extrude Rotation button on the Property Bar.

3.	Type a value in the X-Axis Percentage box to rotate the extrusion along the x-axis.

4.	Type a value in the Y-Axis Percentage box to rotate the extrusion along the y-axis.

5.	Type a value in the Z-Axis Percentage box to rotate the extrusion along the z-axis.

 Note

•	The Rotation feature does not apply to Front Parallel and Back Parallel extrusions types.

 Related Topics


Changing the extrusion type

You can specify the vector extrusion type to change the vanishing point to which the extruded surfaces project.

To change an extrusion type

1.	Select the extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Choose an extrusion type from the Extrusion Type list box on the Property Bar.

 Note

•	The vanishing points for Back Parallel and Front Parallel extrusions are infinite, therefore the extruded surfaces can never converge.

 Related Topics


Moving an extrusion's vanishing point

You can change the depth of a parallel extrusion and you can control the perspective of a perspective extrusion by moving the vanishing point.

To move an extrusion's vanishing point

1.	Select the extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Type horizontal and vertical coordinates (relative to the 0,0 point on the rulers) in the Vanishing Point Coordinate boxes on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Locking an extrusion's vanishing point

You can lock a vector extrusion's vanishing point to the page or to the control object.

To lock an extrusion's vanishing point

1.	Using the Pick tool, select an extrusion by clicking an extruded surface.

2.	Choose one of the following from the Vanishing Point Properties list box on the Property Bar:

•	VP Locked To Object

•	VP Locked To Page

 Note

•	By default, all new extrusions use the VP Locked To Object setting.

 Related Topics


Copying and sharing vanishing points

You can copy a vanishing point to another object or have multiple vector extrusions share the same vanishing point.

To copy the vanishing point from one extrusion to another

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the extrusion to which you want to copy a vanishing point.

2.	Choose Copy VP From from the Vanishing Point Properties list box on the Property Bar.

3.	Select the extruded object from which you want to copy the vanishing point.

 Note

•	You can edit the two vanishing points independently.

To have extrusions share one vanishing point

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the extrusion with the vanishing point you want to change.

2.	Choose Shared Vanishing Point from the Vanishing Point Properties list box on the Property Bar.

3.	Select the extrusion that has the vanishing point you want shared.

 Related Topics


Increasing the printing speed of vector extrusions

You can control the facet size used when CorelDRAW renders and prints illustrations containing extrusions. You can also save the facet size with your document.

To increase the printing speed of vector extrusions

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Workspace, Edit.

3.	In the Minimum Extrude Facet Size box, type a value between 0.001 inches and 36 inches (or equivalent) to set the facet size used when CorelDRAW renders and prints extrusions.

 Note

•	For best results, set the minimum extrude facet size to a value from 0.001 and 0.5 inches. A higher value (0.5 inches) will reduce screen refresh time. For high-quality output, decrease the facet size when you are ready to print your illustration.

To save the facet size with your document

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Save Facet Size With Document check box.

 Related Topics


Separating vector extrusions

You can separate the components of a vector extrusion. By separating the components you can select and edit them. For more information, see "Selecting vector extrusions."

To separate a vector extrusion

1.	Select the extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Separate.

 Related Topics


Clearing vector extrusions

You can remove the extruded surfaces from the control object.

To clear a vector extrusion

1.	Select the extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Clear Extrude.

 Tip

•	You can also click the Clear Extrude button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Filling vector extrusions


Overview: Filling vector extrusions
Filling vector extrusions

You can apply fills to an entire vector extrusion, the extruded surfaces, or to the beveled surfaces of a vector extrusion. You can apply uniform fills, fountain fills, two-color and full-color patterns, texture fills, and bitmap pattern fills to extrusions.

Additionally, you can apply the control object's fill to the extruded surfaces. You can cover each surface individually with the fill or drape the fill so it covers the object like a blanket and doesn't break the fill's pattern or texture.

 Related Topics


Applying fills to extruded and beveled surfaces

You can apply the control object's fill to the extruded surfaces. You can drape the control object's fill so that it covers the entire extrusion seamlessly. You can also apply the extrusion's fill or a different fill to beveled surfaces.

To apply a control object's fill to extruded surfaces

1.	Select the extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Color button on the Property Bar.

3.	Enable the Use Object Fill button.

The button is enabled when it appears pressed.

To drape the fill

1.	Follow all of the steps from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Draped Fills check box.

To apply an extrusion's fill to beveled surfaces

1.	Follow all of the steps from the "To apply a control object's fill to extruded surfaces" procedure.

2.	Enable the Use Extrude Fill For Bevel button.

The button is enabled when it appears pressed.

To apply a different fill to beveled surfaces

1.	Follow all of the steps from the "To apply a control object's fill to extruded surfaces" procedure.

2.	Disable the Use Extrude Fill For Bevel button.

The button is disabled when it appears raised.

3.	Open the Bevel Color picker, and click a color.

 Related Topics


Applying solid fills to extruded and beveled surfaces

You can apply any solid color to an object's extruded or beveled surfaces without affecting the color of the control object. You can also use the extruded surfaces' fill for beveled objects.

To apply a solid fill color to extruded surfaces

1.	Select the extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Color button on the Property Bar.

3.	Click the Use Solid Color button.

4.	Open the color picker, and click a color.

To apply the extrude fill to beveled surfaces

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Use Extrude Fill For Bevel button.

The button is enabled when it appears pressed.

To apply a different solid fill to beveled surfaces

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To apply a solid fill color to extruded surfaces" procedure.

2.	Disable the Use Extrude Fill For Bevel button.

The button is disabled when it appears raised.

3.	Open the Bevel Color picker, and click a color.

 Related Topics


Applying gradient fills to extruded and beveled surfaces

You can apply a gradient fill [image] a fill that shows a progression between two colors [image] to an object's extruded or beveled surfaces without affecting the control object. You can also apply a solid fill to an object's beveled surfaces.

To apply a gradient fill to extruded and beveled surfaces

1.	Select the extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Color button on the Property Bar.

3.	Enable the Use Color Shading button.

The button is enabled when it appears pressed.

4.	Open the Solid/Shade From Extrude Color picker, and click the color you want at the start of the gradient fill's color progression.

5.	Enable the Use Extrude Fill For Bevel button on the Property Bar.

The button is enabled when it appears pressed.

6.	Click the Shade To Extrude Color picker, and click the color you want at the end of the gradient fill's color progression.

To apply a gradient fill to an object's beveled surfaces

1.	Follow all of the steps from the previous procedure.

2.	Disable the Use Extrude Fill For Bevel button.

The button is disabled when it appears raised.

To apply a solid fill to an object's bevel surfaces.

1.	Follow all of the steps from the "To apply a gradient fill to extruded and beveled surfaces" procedure.

2.	Open the Bevel Color picker, and click a color.

 Related Topics


Lighting vector extrusions


Overview: Lighting vector extrusions
Lighting vector extrusions

Light sources enhance the three-dimensional effect created with vector extrusions as well as the effect of the fill you apply. CorelDRAW produces the lighting effect by creating and applying simulated white light sources. You can add up to three light sources that you can project toward the extruded object from different with varying intensity.

You can control the amount of light (also called intensity) originating from the selected light source. Creating multiple light sources with high intensity settings, for example, causes extruded surfaces to appear very light in color.

Light sources always strike the control object directly and affect extruded surfaces to a lesser degree. Therefore, if the control object is partially hidden from view because it has been rotated, the change in light source direction or intensity may not be readily apparent.

 Related Topics


Applying light sources to and removing them from vector extrusions

You can enhance an extrusion's effect and fill attributes by applying as many as three light sources. You can also remove applied light sources.

To apply light sources to a vector extrusion

1.	Select the extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Lighting button on the Property Bar.

3.	Enable up to three of the Light buttons.

The lights appear as numbered circles in the Preview window. A Light button is enabled when the button appears pressed.

4.	Drag the numbered circles in the Preview box to position the lights.

To remove a light source from a vector extrusion

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Disable the Light button (#1, #2, or #3) that corresponds to the light you want to remove.

A Light button is disabled when the button appears raised.

 Related Topics


Adjusting the intensity of a light source

You can darken and brighten the fill colors in a vector extrusion by adjusting the intensity of the light sources. You can have CorelDRAW combine the light and dark shades (brightness and saturation) precisely to create a more realistic extrusion or use a more basic shading process.

To adjust the intensity level of a light source

1.	Select the extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Lighting button on the Property Bar.

3.	In the Preview box, click the light (represented by a numbered circle) you want to adjust.

4.	Move the Intensity slider to set the desired level of light intensity.

To make shading appear more realistic

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Use Full Color Range check box.

To use a basic shading process

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To adjust the intensity level of a light source" procedure.

2.	Disable the Use Full Color Range check box.

 Related Topics


Creating bitmap extrusions


Overview: Creating bitmap extrusions
Creating bitmap extrusions

Applying a bitmap extrusion to an object lets you work with the object in three dimensions. You can simulate the effect of beveling tools by applying bevels edges [image] beveled edges changes the corner shape of the object. You can specify the angle and the depth of the bevel for the front face of the object, the back face, or both.

Rendering captures a view of your three-dimensional object and saves it as a two-dimensional bitmap. If you don't like the effect, you can remove the bitmap extrusion.

 Related Topics


Applying, rendering, and removing bitmap extrusions

You can apply a bitmap extrusion to an object and render it. If you don't like the effect you created, you can remove the bitmap extrusion.

To apply a bitmap extrusion

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Extrude tool.

2.	Select the object.

3.	Click the Bitmap Extrusion Mode button on the Property Bar.

To render a bitmap extrusion

•	Click outside the bounding box of the bitmap extrusion.

 Note

•	You can change the resolution of a bitmap extrusion. For more information, see "Changing the rendering resolution of drop shadows."

To remove a bitmap extrusion

1.	Select the rendered bitmap extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Edit, Undo Bitmap Extrude Command.

 Related Topics


Applying beveled bitmap extrusions

You can apply preset beveled edges to the front face of object, the back face, or both. You can also specify the height and width of a bevel.

To apply a beveled edge

1.	Select the bitmap extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Front Bevel list box on the Property Bar, and choose a bevel for the front of the extrusion.

3.	Click Back Bevel list box on the Property Bar, and choose a bevel for the back of the extrusion.

To change the bevel width

1.	Select the bitmap extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Bevels button on the Property Bar.

3.	Type a value in the Bevel Width box.

4.	Press ENTER.

To change the bevel height

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Type a value in the Bevel Height box.

3.	Press ENTER.

 Related Topics


Editing bitmap extrusions


Overview: Editing bitmap extrusions
Editing bitmap extrusions

After you've applied a bitmap extrusion to an object, you can select the rendered object to edit it. You can also change the position of bitmap extrusions with or without rendering them.

When you apply a bitmap extrusion, a bounding box surrounds the object. You can use the bounding box to size and stretch the bitmap. Furthermore, you can rotate and change the depth of bitmap extrusions.

 Related Topics


Editing rendered bitmap extrusions

You can make changes to a rendered bitmap extrusion any time.

To select a rendered a bitmap extrusion

•	Double-click the bitmap extrusion with the Pick tool.

 Related Topics


Positioning bitmap extrusions

You can position a bitmap extrusion without rendering it. You can also move a rendered bitmap extrusion.

To position a bitmap extrusion without rendering it

1.	Select the bitmap extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Type a value in the X Object(s) Position box on the Property Bar.

3.	Type a value in the Y Object(s) Position box on the Property Bar.

4.	Press ENTER.

To position a rendered bitmap extrusion

1.	Select the bitmap extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Drag the bitmap extrusion to a new location.

 Related Topics


Sizing and stretching bitmap extrusions

You can size bitmap extrusions proportionately or you can stretch bitmap extrusions. You can also fit the bitmap to the bounding box, if the bounding box is too large for the extrusion or if the bounding box is limiting the view of the extrusion.

To size a bitmap extrusion proportionately

1.	Select the bitmap extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Drag one of the corner selection handles on the bounding box.

To stretch a bitmap extrusion

1.	Select the bitmap extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Drag one of the middle selection handles on the bounding box.

 Tip

•	You can also type values in the Object(s) Size boxes on the Property Bar.

To fit a bitmap extrusion to its bounding box

1.	Double-click the bitmap extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Fit To View button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Setting the depth of a bitmap extrusion

You can set the depth of a bitmap extrusion.

To change the depth of a bitmap extrusion

1.	Click the bitmap extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Type a value in the Extrude Depth box on the Property Bar.

3.	Press ENTER.

 Related Topics


Rotating bitmap extrusions

You can rotate bitmap extrusions by specifying values or by using rotation handles.

To rotate a bitmap extrusion using the Property Bar

1.	Select the bitmap extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Extrude Rotation button on the Property Bar.

3.	Type a value in the X-Axis Percentage box to rotate the extrusion along the x-axis.

4.	Type a value in the Y-Axis Percentage box to rotate the extrusion along the y-axis.

5.	Type a value in the Z-Axis Percentage box to rotate the extrusion along the z-axis.

6.	Press ENTER.

To rotate a bitmap extrusion interactively

1.	Double-click the bitmap extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Double-click the bitmap extrusion to make the rotation handles appear.

3.	Drag the rotation handles to rotate the object.

 Related Topics


Filling bitmap extrusions


Overview: Filling bitmap extrusions
Filling bitmap extrusions

You can change the fill of bitmap extrusions by applying texture fills. Texture fills are random, fractally generated fills that you can use to give your objects a natural appearance. Texture fills significantly increase the size of your file and the time it takes to print. Therefore, you may want to use these fills sparingly, especially with larger objects.

 Related Topics


Adding texture fills to bitmap extrusions

You can apply a texture fill to a bitmap extrusion.

To add a texture fill to a bitmap extrusion

1.	Select the bitmap extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Choose a pattern from the Texture list box on the Property Bar.


Lighting bitmap extrusions


Overview: Lighting bitmap extrusions
Lighting bitmap extrusions

You can use lighting to enhance the realism and effects of bitmap extrusions. The same object rendered using different light can provide strikingly different results. For example, rendering without light is like taking a photograph without a flash. Conversely, too much lighting washes out subtle effects.

When you first create a bitmap extrusion, there is no lighting. You can add as many lights as you want, but as the number of lights increases, so does the time it takes to render your final illustration. You can choose from several different types of lights to create the effect you want.

Ambient

Ambient light is uniform. It has no specific origin and casts no shadows. It is the equivalent of daylight in a real-world scene. Ambient light radiates in every direction, has no position, and no source of origin.

Point

A Point light is a special object that casts light in all directions.

 Related Topics


Applying Ambient light to bitmap extrusions

You can apply Ambient light to a bitmap extrusion. Ambient light is the equivalent of environmental light.

To apply Ambient light to a bitmap extrusion

1.	Select the bitmap extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Ambient button on the Property Bar.

3.	Enable the On check box.

4.	Click a color, and click OK.

5.	Move the Brightness slider left or right to decrease or increase the intensity of the light.

 Note

•	For deeper shadows and high contrast with lit areas, use a lower Ambient light value. As you increase the brightness of Ambient light, the intensity of shadows and other effects generated by other light setting decreases. This flattens the image. To rely exclusively on the other light setting, set Ambient light to zero. For example, to create the dramatic effect of a spot light on a theater stage, you would use no Ambient light.

 Tip

•	You can also type a value in the Brightness box.

 Related Topics


Applying Point light to a bitmap extrusion

You can apply a Point light to a bitmap extrusion. You can position the light to project it toward the object from any direction. You can also change the intensity and color of a Point light. If you don't like the lighting effect, you can remove it.

To apply Point light to a bitmap extrusion

1.	Select the bitmap extrusion with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Point Light button on the Property Bar.

3.	Click the Add Light button.

The light source appears in the center of the black-filled circle in the Preview window.

4.	Click the Apply button.

To position a Point light

1.	Follow sets 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Drag the light source from the center of the black circle to another area of the Preview window.

3.	Click the Apply button.

To change the intensity of the light source

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To apply Point light to a bitmap extrusion" procedure.

2.	Click the Point light in the Preview window.

3.	Move the Brightness slider to the left or right to decrease or increase the intensity.

 Tip

•	You can also type a value in the Brightness box.

To change the color of a Point light

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To apply Point light to a bitmap extrusion" procedure.

2.	Click the Point light in the Preview window.

3.	Click the Color button.

4.	Click a color, and click OK.

5.	Click the Apply button.

To remove a Point light

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To apply Point light to a bitmap extrusion" procedure.

2.	Click the Point light in the in the Preview window.

3.	Click the Remove Light button.

 Related Topics


Working with drop shadows


Overview: Working with drop shadows
Working with drop shadows

By adding drop shadows, you create the illusion of depth between objects. You can add drop shadows to most objects (or groups of objects) you create using CorelDRAW, including Artistic text, Paragraph text, and bitmap images. However, you cannot add drop shadows to link groups such as blended objects, contoured objects, beveled objects, extruded objects, or other drop shadows.

Additionally, you can edit drop shadows to customize their effects. For example, you can change the color of a drop shadow.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Creating drop shadows


Overview: Creating drop shadows
Creating drop shadows

When you apply a drop shadow to an object, you create a linked group. The object to which you applied the drop shadow is the control object. Changes you make to the control object are reflected in the drop shadow. For example, if you change the size of the of the control object, the size drop shadow changes to reflect the control object's size. However, you can separate the drop shadow, which is a bitmap, and the control object to make them separate objects.

By copying or cloning, you can apply drop shadows to other objects. Copying a drop shadow transfers the drop shadow's attributes to another selected object. Cloning also transfers a drop shadow's attributes to a selected object; however, changes made to the original drop shadow (also called the master) are applied to the clone. Additionally, you can't edit the cloned drop shadow's settings; any changes must be made to the master drop shadow.

If you don't like a drop shadow effect that you've added, you can remove it from the object. You can also remove the object and keep the drop shadow.

 Related Topics


Adding and removing a drop shadow

You can add a drop shadow to most objects you create in CorelDRAW. You can also remove a drop shadow from an object or remove the object and keep the drop shadow.

To add a drop shadow to an object

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Drop Shadow tool.

2.	Select the object to which you want to apply a drop shadow, and do one of the following:

•	Position the cursor over the center of the object to create a Flat perspective

•	Position the cursor over the right side of the object to create a Right perspective

•	Position the cursor over the left side of the object to create a Left perspective

•	Position the cursor over the bottom of the object to create a Bottom perspective

3.	Drag the end fill handle to position the drop shadow.

 Note

•	For a list of objects to which you can't apply a drop shadow, see "Working with drop shadows."

•	An object must have a fill before you apply the drop shadow for the drop shadow to be visible.

 Tip

•	By pressing ESC when you're dragging the Interactive Drop Shadow tool, you return the object to its state prior to dragging.

To remove a drop shadow from an object

1.	Click the drop shadow with the Pick tool.

Clicking the drop shadow selects both the drop shadow and its parent object. If you click the object, the drop shadow won't be included in your selection.

2.	Click Effects, Clear Drop Shadow.

 Tip

•	You can also remove a drop shadow from an object using the Clear Drop Shadow button on the Property Bar.

To remove an object but not its drop shadow

1.	Select an object's drop shadow with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Separate.

3.	Select the object.

4.	Click Edit, Delete.

 Related Topics


Copying and cloning a drop shadow

You can transfer a drop shadow's attributes to other objects by copying and cloning.

To copy a drop shadow from one object to another

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the object to which you want to copy a drop shadow.

2.	Click Effects, Copy Effect, Drop Shadow From.

3.	Using the horizontal pointer that appears, select the drop shadow that you want to copy.

 Tip

•	You can also use the Copy Drop Shadow Properties button on the Property Bar.

To clone a drop shadow from one object to another

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the object to which you want to clone a drop shadow.

2.	Click Effects, Clone Effect, Drop Shadow From.

3.	Using the horizontal pointer that appears, select the drop shadow that you want to clone.

 Note

•	If you modify the original drop shadow, the clone drop shadow will also change. You can't edit the cloned drop shadow's settings; you must change the master drop shadow.

 Related Topics


Editing drop shadows


Overview: Editing drop shadows
Editing drop shadows

By editing a drop shadow, you can customize the effect. You can adjust the horizontal and vertical distance between control objects and drop shadows. You can change the color of drop shadows, make them fade, and change the level of opacity. You can also change the feathering properties and the perspective of drop shadows. Furthermore, drop shadows are bitmaps that are rendered. You can change the rendering resolution.

 Related Topics


Changing the offset of drop shadows

You can change the distance between a drop shadow and its control object.

To change the amount a drop shadow is offset from a control object

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Drop Shadow tool.

2.	Select the drop shadow.

3.	On the Property Bar, type a value in the X box to change the horizontal offset.

4.	On the Property Bar, type a value in the Y box to change the vertical offset.

 Note

•	You can only change the offset for drop shadows if the perspective type is Flat. For information about changing the perspective type, see "Changing the perspective of drop shadows."

 Related Topics


Changing the color of a drop shadow

You can change the color of a drop shadow.

To change the color of a drop shadow

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Drop Shadow tool.

2.	Select the drop shadow.

3.	Click the Drop Shadow Color picker on the Property Bar, and click a color.

 Tip

•	You can also change the drop shadow's color using the Interactive Drop Shadow tool by dragging a color from the Color Palette to the end fill handle.

 Related Topics


Adjusting the opacity of a drop shadow

You can adjust the opacity of a drop shadow.

To adjust the opacity of a drop shadow interactively

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Drop Shadow tool.

2.	Select the object whose drop shadow opacity you want to adjust.

3.	Move the slider to adjust the opacity of the drop shadow.

Moving the slider towards the drop shadow's anchor decreases the drop shadow's intensity. Moving the slider towards the end fill handle increases the drop shadow's intensity.

To adjust the opacity of a drop shadow using the Property Bar

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Drop Shadow tool.

2.	Select the object whose drop shadow opacity you want to adjust.

3.	Type a value in the Drop Shadow Opacity box on the Property Bar.

You can type values between 0 and 100. Low values create a less opaque drop shadow, while high values create a more opaque drop shadow.

 Related Topics


Modifying the feathering properties of a drop shadow

You can change a drop shadow's feathering edge style, the feathering direction, as well as the level of feathering.

To change the feathering edge style of a drop shadow

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Drop Shadow tool.

2.	Select the drop shadow.

3.	Choose an edge style from the Drop Shadow Feathering Edges list box on the Property Bar.

 Note

•	You must choose a feathering direction other than Average to change the edge style type.

To change the feathering direction

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose a feathering direction from the Drop Shadow Direction list box on the Property Bar.

To change the feathering intensity

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To change the feathering edge style of a drop shadow" procedure.

2.	Type the value you want in the Drop Shadow Feathering box on the Property Bar.

You can type values between 0 and 100. Low values create a more subtle feathering effect, while high values create a more pronounced effect.

 Related Topics


Changing the perspective of drop shadows

You can change the perspective of a drop shadow. The perspective type and drop shadow angle work in tandem.

To change the perspective type of a drop shadow

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Drop Shadow tool.

2.	Select the drop shadow.

3.	On the Property Bar, choose a perspective type from the Drop Shadow Perspective Type list box.

 Tip

•	You can also change the perspective of a drop shadow by dragging the start handle using the Interactive Drop Shadow tool.

To change the angle of a drop shadow

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Type a value in the Drop Shadow Angle box on the Property Bar.

 Tip

•	You can also change the angle of the drop shadow by dragging the end handle with the Interactive Drop Shadow tool.

 Related Topics


Fading the drop shadow

You can change the fade level of a drop shadow.

To fade a drop shadow

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Drop Shadow tool.

2.	Select the drop shadow.

3.	Move the Drop Shadow Fade slider on the Property Bar.

 Note

•	You can't change the fade level of a drop shadow which has a Flat perspective.

 Tip

•	Moving the slider to the left makes the drop shadow more faint. Moving the slider to the right makes the drop shadow's color more solid.

 Related Topics


Changing the rendering resolution of drop shadows

You can change the resolution by which bitmaps are rendered.

To change the rendering resolution of a drop shadow

1.	Click Tool, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Document, General.

3.	Type a value in the Resolution box.

 Related Topics


Working with transparencies


Overview: Working with transparencies
Working with transparencies

When you apply a transparency to an object, it appears as though you're applying a fill. However, a transparency is a grayscale bitmap, which acts as a grayscale mask, that you apply on top of the object's current fill. Since a transparency is applied on top of an object, the object's color shows through the transparency. You can use fountain, uniform, texture, and pattern fill types to create your transparency.

Additionally, you can edit transparencies. For example, you can change the fill type or change the level of opacity which is determined by the grayscale level you specify.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Creating transparencies


Overview: Creating transparencies
Creating transparencies

When you apply a transparency to an object, you're creating a grayscale mask using the uniform, fountain, texture, or pattern fill type, which is applied on top of the object. By positioning a transparent object on top of another object, you simulate a lens.

A Uniform transparency is filled with a solid color. The color is consistent throughout the object to which it's applied.

A Fountain transparency flows smoothly from one color to another. The transparency can flow in a straight line across the object (linear), in concentric circles from the center of the object out (radial), in rays from the center of the object out (conical), or in concentric squares from the center of the object out (square).

A Texture transparency is a random, fractally generated transparency that you can use to give your objects a natural appearance. Transparency handles let you control the block of fractal texture that controls the transparency of the object.

A Pattern transparency is a pregenerated, symmetrical image that is repeated over and over, making it extremely useful for creating tiles. You can fill an object completely with one image, but you would more often use a series of repeated images to form a tiled fill. The effect is similar to applying wallpaper to a wall.

 Related Topics


Applying uniform transparencies

You can apply a solid color transparency to an object.

To apply a uniform transparency

1.	Select the object with the Interactive Transparency tool.

2.	Choose Uniform from the Transparency Type list box on the Property Bar.

3.	Click a color from the Color Palette.

 Notes

•	You can edit the transparency by clicking the Edit Transparency button on the Property Bar. This opens the Uniform Transparency dialog box which is similar to the Uniform Fill dialog box. For more information, see "Applying a uniform fill."

•	By pressing ESC when you're dragging the Interactive Transparency tool, you return the object to its state prior to dragging.

•	You can remove the transparency by clicking the Clear Transparency button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Applying fountain transparencies

You can apply a fountain transparency to an object.

To apply a fountain transparency

1.	Select the object with the Interactive Transparency tool.

2.	Choose Fountain from the Transparency Type list box on the Property Bar.

3.	Enable one of the following buttons that represents the type of fountain transparency you want to apply:

•	linear

•	radial

•	conical

•	square

4.	Click the object where you want the transparency to start, and drag to where you want the transparency to end.

 Notes

•	You can edit the transparency by clicking the Edit Transparency button on the Property Bar. This opens the Fountain Transparency dialog box which is similar to the Fountain Fill dialog box. For more information, see "Customizing fountain fills."

•	By pressing ESC when you're dragging the Interactive Transparency tool, you return the object to its state prior to dragging.

•	You can remove the transparency by clicking the Clear Transparency button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Applying textured transparencies

You can apply a textured transparency to an object.

To apply a textured transparency

1.	Select the object with the Interactive Transparency tool.

2.	Choose Texture from the Transparency Type list box on the Property Bar.

3.	Choose a sample containing textures from the Texture Library list box on the Property Bar.

4.	Click the First Transparency Picker on the Property Bar and click a texture.

 Notes

•	By pressing ESC when you're dragging the Interactive Transparency tool, you return the object to its state prior to dragging.

•	Texture transparencies add significantly to the size of your file and the time it takes to print. You may want to use these transparencies sparingly, especially with large objects with texture transparencies.

•	Three transparency handles let you control the block of fractal texture that controls the transparency of the object. One handle moves the entire fractal and the other two scale, skew and rotate it. For more information see, "Customizing pattern and texture fills."

•	You can edit the transparency by clicking the Edit Transparency button on the Property Bar. This opens the Texture Transparency dialog box which is similar to the Texture Fill dialog box. For more information, see "Customizing pattern and texture fills."

•	You can remove the transparency by clicking the Clear Transparency button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Applying pattern transparencies

You can apply a pattern transparency to an object.

To apply a pattern transparency

1.	Select the object with the Interactive Transparency tool.

2.	Choose Pattern from the Transparency Type list box on the Property Bar.

3.	Click one of the following buttons on the Property Bar:

•	Two-color Bitmap Pattern Tranparency

•	Full-color Pattern Transparency

•	Bitmap Pattern Transparency

4.	Click the First Transparency Picker on the Property Bar and click a pattern.

 Notes

•	By pressing ESC when you're dragging the Interactive Transparency tool, you return the object to its state prior to dragging.

•	You can remove the transparency by clicking the Clear Transparency button on the Property Bar.

•	You can import bitmaps or vector graphics to use as pattern transparencies, and you can create simple two-color bitmap pattern transparencies.

•	You can edit the transparency by clicking the Edit Transparency button on the Property Bar. This opens the Pattern Transparency dialog box which is similar to the Pattern Fill dialog box. For more information, see "Customizing pattern and texture fills."

 Related Topics


Copying transparencies

You can copy a transparency to another object.

To copy a transparency

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the object to which you want to copy the transparency.

2.	Click Effects, Copy, Lens From.

3.	Using the horizontal pointer that appears, select the object from which you want to copy the transparency.

 Note

•	The object's color attributes are not copied.

 Tip

•	You can also use the Copy Transparency Properties button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Editing transparencies


Overview: Editing transparencies
Editing transparencies

After you've created a transparent object, you may want to edit its attributes. By adjusting the grayscale level of the transparency, you can change its opacity. You can freeze the contents of a transparency to create a bitmap. Once frozen, the contents of the object no longer interact with other objects on the screen. For example, when you move the frozen transparency, its contents doesn't change.

By applying merge modes, you can determine how the color of a transparency is combined with the color of objects that appear behind the transparency. Merge modes are available for fountain, pattern, and texture transparencies.

 Note

•	You can change the resolution by which transparencies are rendered. For more information, see "Changing the rendering resolution of drop shadows."

 Related Topics


Adjusting the opacity of a transparency

You can adjust the opacity of a transparency.

To adjust the opacity of a uniform transparency

1.	Select the uniform transparency with Interactive Transparency tool.

2.	Move the Starting Transparency slider on the Property Bar.

To adjust the opacity of a fountain transparency

1.	Select the fountain transparency with Interactive Transparency tool.

2.	Move the Transparency Midpoint slider on the Property Bar.

To adjust the opacity of a textured or pattern transparency

1.	Select the textured or pattern transparency with Interactive Transparency tool.

2.	Move the Starting Transparency slider on the Property Bar to change the opacity of the starting color.

3.	Move the Ending Transparency slider on the Property Bar to change the opacity of the ending color.

 Tips

•	Lower values (less than 20) produce a more opaque effect. Higher values (over 80) produce a more transparent effect.

•	You can also type values in the Starting Transparency and Ending Transparency boxes on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Freezing a transparency

You can fix the contents of a transparency by freezing it.

To freeze a transparency

1.	Select the object with the Interactive Transparency tool.

2.	Click the Freeze button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Applying merge modes to transparencies

You can apply a merge mode to a transparency to determine how the color of a transparency is combined with the color of objects that appear behind the transparency.

To apply merge modes

1.	Using the Interactive Transparency tool, click the fountain, textured, or pattern transparency.

2.	Choose one of the following merge modes from the Transparency Operation list box on the Property Bar.

•	Normal [image] applies the transparency color on top of the base color

•	Add [image] adds the values of the transparency color and the base color

•	Subtract [image] adds the values of the transparency color and the base color together, then subtracts 255

•	Difference [image] subtracts the transparency color from the base color and multiplies by 255. If the transparency color value is 0, the result will always be 255

•	Multiply [image] multiplies the base color by the transparency color, then divides by 255. This has a darkening effect unless you are applying color to white. Multiplying black with any color results in black. Multiplying white with any color leaves the color unchanged

•	Divide [image] divides the base color by the transparency color, or vice versa, depending on which color has the higher value

•	If Lighter [image] replaces any base pixels that are a darker color with the transparency color. Base pixels that are lighter than the transparency color are not affected

•	If Darker [image] replaces any base pixels that are a lighter color with the transparency color. Base pixels that are darker than the transparency color are not affected

•	Texturize [image] converts the transparency color to grayscale, then multiplies the grayscale value by the base color

•	Hue [image] uses the hue of the transparency color as well as the saturation and lightness of the base color. If you are adding color to a grayscale image, there will be no change because the colors are desaturated

•	Saturation [image] uses the lightness and hue of the base color and the saturation of the transparency color

•	Lightness [image] uses the hue and saturation of the base color and the lightness of the transparency color

•	Invert [image] uses the transparency color's complementary color. If a transparency color value is 127, there will be no change because the color value falls in the center of the Color Wheel

•	Logical AND [image] converts the transparency and base colors to binary values, then applies the Boolean algebraic formula AND to these values

•	Logical OR [image] converts the transparency and base colors to binary values, then applies the Boolean algebraic formula OR to these values

•	Logical XOR [image] converts the transparency and base colors to binary values, then applies the Boolean algebraic formula XOR to these values

•	Red [image] applies the transparency color to the red channel of RGB images

•	Green [image] applies the transparency color to the green channel of RGB images

•	Blue [image] applies the transparency color to the blue channel of RGB images

 Related Topics


Contouring Objects


Overview: Contouring Objects
Contouring Objects

When you apply contour lines to an object, you add a series of concentric lines or "steps" that radiate inside or outside of the object's borders. You create an effect like that created by contour lines on a topographical map. You can apply contours to any object you create using CorelDRAW, including shapes, lines, and curves. In addition, you'll find that you can create an array of interesting effects by applying contours to Artistic text.

Once you've created a contoured object you like, you can copy or clone its attributes to another object. When you copy a contour, the object to which you copied the contour takes on all contour-related settings of the original object, however the outline and fill attributes remain unaffected. The two objects have no connection and can be edited independently.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Creating contoured objects


Overview: Creating contoured objects
Creating contoured objects

When you add contour lines to an object, you create lines that progress to the center, to the inside, or to the outside of an object. You can specify the number of evenly spaced lines contour lines that are added to the object, as well as the distance between these lines. However, when you're working with contours that progress to the center or to the inside of an object, the number of steps you set is limited by the offset and the size of the object. For example, if you set an offset value of 0.1 and a steps value of 3, CorelDRAW will add three contour lines spaced 0.1 inches apart inside the original object. If the object is too small to accommodate your settings, CorelDRAW inserts the maximum number of steps that fit between the object's outline and center.

You can also create a contour by copying or cloning a contoured object's settings to another object. By copying a contour, you transfer all contour-related settings to the other object; its outline and fill attributes remain unaffected. The two objects have no connection and can be edited independently.

When you clone a contour, you transfer all contour-related settings; its outline and fill attributes remain unaffected. However, changes made to the original contour (also called the master) are applied to the clone. In addition, you can't edit the clone's contour settings; any changes must be made to the master object.

 Related Topics


Contouring to the center of an object

You can add contour lines that progress to the center of the selected object.

To contour to the center of an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Contour tool.

3.	Drag the start handle to the center of the object.

When you can't drag the handle any further, you've reached the center of the object.

4.	Move the slider to change the number of contour steps.

 Notes

•	Use the Contour Offset box on the Property Bar to specify the distance between contour lines. This automatically adjusts the number of contour steps.

•	You can change a contour to a center contour by selecting the contour and clicking the To Center button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Contouring to the inside of an object

You can add evenly spaced contour lines inside the selected object.

To contour inside an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Contour tool.

3.	Drag the start handle towards the center of the object.

The distance you drag the start handle determines the contour's final step.

4.	Move the slider to change the number of contour steps.

 Notes

•	The slider may disappear if there isn't much distance between the concentric shapes. You can use the Zoom tool to magnify the contoured object and make adjustments.

•	By pressing ESC when you're dragging the Interactive Contour tool, you return the object to its state prior to dragging.

•	You can type a value in the Contour Steps box on the Property Bar to change the number of concentric lines in a contour.

•	You can type in the Contour Offset box on the Property Bar to change the distance between concentric lines.

•	You can change a contour to an inside contour by selecting the contour and clicking the Inside button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Contouring to the outside of an object

You can add contour lines outside the selected object.

To contour outside of an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Contour tool.

3.	Drag the start handle away from the object.

The distance you drag the start handle determines the contour's final step.

4.	Move the slider to change the number of contour steps.

 Notes

•	By pressing ESC when you're dragging the Interactive Contour tool, you return the object to its state prior to dragging.

•	You can type a value in the Contour Steps box on the Property Bar to change the number of concentric lines in a contour.

•	You can type in the Contour Offset box on the Property Bar to change the distance between concentric lines.

•	You can change a contour to an outside contour by selecting the contour and clicking the Outside button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Copying and cloning contours

You can transfer an object's contour attributes by copying or cloning it.

To copy a contour

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the object to which you want to copy the contour.

2.	Click Effects, Copy Effect, Contour From.

3.	Using the horizontal pointer that appears, select the contour you want to copy.

 Tip

•	You can also use the Copy Contour Properties button on the Property Bar.

To clone a contour

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the object to which you want to clone the contour.

2.	Click Effects, Clone Effect, Contour From.

3.	Using the horizontal pointer that appears, select the contour you want to clone.

 Related Topics


Editing contoured objects


Overview: Editing contoured objects
Editing contoured objects

When you're working with a contoured object, you can change the fill and outline colors assigned to the concentric objects. You can also change the progression of colors between the original object's fill and outline colors and the final contour line's fill and outline colors. The color progression can follow a straight, clockwise, or counterclockwise path through the color spectrum.

When you apply contour lines to an object, the object becomes attached to these lines. In this state, all changes you make to the original object (e.g., shaping it) also affect the contour lines. By separating the original object from its contour lines, you can then make changes to the original object without altering the contour lines.

After you separate a contoured object, you are left with two units: the original object and its contour lines group. You can further separate the contour lines into a series of objects and edit them individually.

 Related Topics


Setting color progressions in a contoured object

You can change both the outline and fill colors of a contoured object. You can also set the color progression of the outline and fill colors of a contoured object. When you apply a contour to an object with a fountain fill, you can change the end fountain fill color, which is applied to the last concentric shape.

To set the outline color in a contoured object

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Contour tool.

2.	Select the contoured object.

3.	Click the Outline Color picker on the Property Bar, and click the color you want at the end of the outline progression.

To set the fill color in a contoured object

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Fill Color picker on the Property Bar, and click the color you want at the end of the fill progression.

If the original object has a fountain fill, a second color picker appears. Use this control to have a fountain fill at the end of the fill progression.

 Notes

•	You can change the outline and fill colors of the original object just as you would with any other object you create using CorelDRAW. See "Filling Objects" or "Outlining objects."

•	You can change the color of the last concentric shape using the Interactive Contour tool by dragging a color from the Color Palette to the end fill handle.

To specify how the outline and fill colors progress through the color spectrum

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To set the outline color in a contoured object" procedure.

2.	Click one of the following buttons on the Property Bar:

•	Linear Contour Colors

•	Clockwise Contour Colors

•	Counterclockwise Contour Colors

To change the end fountain fill color applied to the last concentric shape

1.	Open the Interactive Tools flyout, and click the Interactive Contour tool.

2.	Select the contoured object with a fountain fill.

3.	Click the End Fountain Fill Color picker on the Property Bar, and click a color.

 Related Topics


Separating an object from its contour

You can separate an object from its contour lines. You can also ungroup the contour lines to make a series of objects.

To separate an object from its contour lines

1.	Select a contoured object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Separate.

The contoured object is now two units: the original object and the group of contour lines.

To ungroup the contour lines

1.	Follow steps 1 to 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Select the contour lines with the Pick tool.

3.	Click Arrange, Ungroup.

 Tip

•	You can also ungroup contour lines by clicking the Ungroup button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Using lenses


Overview: Using lenses
Using lenses

When you apply a lens to an object, you change the way you perceive the objects behind it. You can choose amongst several types of lenses, each producing distinctive results. These results range from color alteration (as produced by heat map, inverting, and brightening lenses, for example) to distortion (as produced by magnifying and fish eye lenses). In each case, the lens changes the way you perceive the objects behind it, not the actual properties and attributes of those objects.

After you create a lens object, you can edit it to modify how you perceive the objects behind it.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Creating lenses


Overview: Creating lenses
Creating lenses

You can apply lenses to any closed-path object you create using CorelDRAW. For example, you can apply lenses to rectangles or objects you draw with the Freehand tool and Artistic Media tools. You can also apply lenses to open-ended lines and curves, such as Paragraph text and Artistic text. Additionally, you can create lenses using objects imported from other applications, such as bitmaps. Once you create a lens you like, you can copy it to other objects in your drawing.

You can choose from the following lens types: Transparency, Magnify, Brighten, Invert, Color Limit, Color Add, Tinted Grayscale, Heat Map, Custom Color Map, Wireframe, and Fish Eye.

Transparency lens

When you apply a Transparency lens to an object, the object takes on the appearance of a piece of tinted film or glass. A Transparency lens can be any color. When you place the lens over other objects, these objects take on the lens tint. You can set the lens' level of transparency.

Magnify lens

A Magnify lens creates an effect similar to that produced by a magnifying glass. The Magnify lens overrides the original object's fill (if any), so that the object appears transparent. Objects beneath the lens appear magnified by the amount you specify.

Brighten lens

A Brighten lens adds brightness or darkness to the objects underneath the lens. You can set the rate of brightness or darkness created by the lens.

Invert lens

An Invert lens causes all colors underneath it to appear as their complementary CMYK colors. Complementary colors are colors that appear opposite one another on the Color Wheel. For example, when an Invert lens is applied to a photo bitmap, the result simulates a photographic negative.

Color Limit lens

A Color Limit lens works much like a color filter lens on a camera, allowing only black and the lens color itself to show through. White and light colors in objects beneath the lens are converted to the lens color. For example, if you place a green Color Limit lens over a bitmap, all colors except green and black are filtered out within the lens area.

Color Add lens

The Color Add lens simulates an additive light model. Imagine shining three spotlights [image] one red, one blue, and one green [image] on a black background. Where the three spotlights combine, the result is white light. The intermediate colors are magenta, cyan, and yellow. When you create a Color Add lens, the colors of the objects beneath the lens are added to the color of the lens as if you were mixing colors of light.

You can specify a rate to control the extent of color addition. You can also choose the color you want to add to the lens.

Tinted Grayscale lens

The Tinted Grayscale lens changes the colors of objects underneath it to their grayscale equivalents. The lens color becomes the darkest color in any object under the lens. All other colors in the object become lighter shades of the lens' color. You'll find Tinted Grayscale lenses particularly effective for creating sepia-tone effects. For example, if you place a brown grayscale lens over a color photograph, the photograph takes on a sepia-tone look. You can also turn a color photograph into a black-and-white photograph by placing a black grayscale lens over the photograph.

Heat Map lens

The Heat Map lens creates the effect of an infrared image. This lens uses a limited Color Palette of white, yellow, orange, red, blue, violet, and cyan to illustrate the "heat" levels of colors in objects underneath the lens. By adjusting the palette, you control which colors are "hot" and which colors are "cool". Hot colors beneath the lens appear as red or orange, while cool colors appear as violet or cyan.

Custom Color Map lens

The Custom Color Map lens changes all the colors of objects behind it to a color range between any two colors you select. In addition to defining the range's start and end colors, you choose the progression between the two colors. The progression can follow a direct, forward, or reverse route through the color spectrum. Areas of the lens that do not cover other objects are filled with the color at the end of the color map.

Wireframe lens

Objects behind the Wireframe lens display with the outline or fill color you choose. For example, if you set red for the outline and blue for the fill, all objects (or parts of objects) behind the lens appear to have red outlines and blue fills. Objects with no fill remain unchanged when viewed through the lens.

Fish Eye lens

The Fish Eye lens distorts and either magnifies or shrinks the objects behind it, depending on the percentage value you specify.

 Notes

•	When you apply a lens fill to an object, the object's fill properties are lost.

•	You cannot apply lenses to objects that already have extrude, contour, or blend effects applied to them. If you apply a lens to a group, the lens applies separately to each of the group's component objects (as long as they fit the requirements above).

 Related Topics


Creating a Transparency lens

You can apply a Transparency lens to an object. The lens object takes on the appearance of a piece of tinted film or glass.

To create a Transparency lens

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Lens.

3.	Choose Transparency from the list box in the Lens Docker window.

4.	Type a percentage value from 0 to 100 in the Rate box to specify the rate of transparency.

As you increase the value, the object becomes more transparent. At 100%, the lens fill disappears.

5.	Open the color picker, and click a color.

6.	Click the Apply button.

 Related Topics


Creating a Magnify lens

You can apply a Magnification lens to an object. The lens object magnifies objects underneath it.

To create a Magnify lens

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Lens.

3.	Choose Magnify from the list box in the Lens Docker window.

4.	Type a value from 0.1 to 100.0 in the Amount box to indicate the amount of magnification you want.

5.	Click the Apply button.

 Related Topics


Creating a Brighten lens

You can apply a Brighten lens to an object. The lens object brightens or darkens objects underneath it.

To create a Brighten lens

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Lens.

3.	Choose Brighten from the list box in the Lens Docker window.

4.	Type a percentage value from -100 to 100 in the Rate box.

Values between 0 and 100% increase the level of brightness. Values between 0 and -100% increase the level of darkness.

5.	Click the Apply button.

 Note

•	You'll find the Brighten lens particularly effective for applying brightness or darkness to a bitmap image.

 Related Topics


Creating an Invert lens

You can apply an Invert lens to an object. The lens object makes all color behind it appear as their complementary CMYK colors.

To create an Invert lens

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Lens.

3.	Choose Invert from the list box in the Lens Docker window.

4.	Click the Apply button.

 Related Topics


Creating a Color Limit lens

You can apply a Color Limit lens to an object. The lens object filters out all colors except black and the lens color you specify.

To create a Color Limit lens

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Lens.

3.	Choose Color Limit from the list box in the Lens Docker window.

4.	Type a percentage value from 0 to 100 in the Rate box to indicate the filter strength you want.

5.	Open the color picker, and click a color.

6.	Click the Apply button.

 Related Topics


Creating a Color Add lens

You can apply a Color Add lens to an object. The color of the object behind the lens object is added to the lens color.

To create a Color Add lens

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Lens.

3.	Choose Color Add from the list box in the Lens Docker window.

4.	Type a percentage value from 0 to 100 in the Rate box to indicate the rate of color addition.

A rate of 0% results in no color addition and the lens appears to have no fill. A rate of 100% represents maximum color addition.

5.	Open the color picker, and click a color.

6.	Click the Apply button.

 Note

•	Since white light contains all colors of the spectrum, creating a colored lens and placing it over a white object or a white page turns the lens white. Adding a color to white light produces white light. To see the effects, the background or object beneath the lens cannot be white.

 Related Topics


Creating a Tinted Grayscale lens

You can apply a Tinted Grayscale lens to an object. The lens object changes the colors of objects behind it to their grayscale equivalents.

To create a Tinted Grayscale lens

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Lens.

3.	Choose Tinted Grayscale from the list box in the Lens Docker window.

4.	Open the color picker, and click a color.

5.	Click the Apply button.

 Note

•	Colors under the lens are mapped from the lens color to an equivalent tonal color of the lens. For example, a blue lens over a light-colored object creates light blue. Accordingly, the same lens over a dark colored object creates dark blue.

 Related Topics


Creating a Heat Map lens

You can apply a Heat Map lens to an object. The lens object uses a specified color palette to illustrate the "heat" levels of objects' colors behind it.

To create a Heat Map lens

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Lens.

3.	Choose Heat Map from the list box in the Lens Docker.

4.	Type a percentage value from 0 to 100 in the Palette Rotation box to indicate the amount you want to rotate the Heat Map palette.

A value of 0 or 100 causes cool colors under the lens to change to white and cyan. A value of 50 causes cool colors to appear as red tones.

5.	Click the Apply button.

 Related Topics


Creating a Custom Color Map lens

You can apply a Custom Color Map lens to an object. The lens objects applies a specified color range to the objects behind it.

To create a Custom Color Map lens

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Lens.

3.	Choose Custom Color Map from the list box in the Lens Docker window.

4.	From the second list box, choose the type of Custom Color Map lens you want.

You can choose a Direct Palette, Reverse Rainbow, or Forward Rainbow lens.

5.	Open the From color picker, and click the color you want at the start of the color map.

6.	Open the To color picker, and click the color you want at the end of the color map.

7.	Click the Apply button.

 Tip

•	You can switch the From and To colors by clicking the Switch button.

 Related Topics


Creating a Wireframe lens

You can apply a Wireframe lens to an object. The lens object displays the objects underneath it with the fill and outline you specify.

To create a Wireframe lens

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Lens.

3.	Choose Wireframe from the list box in the Lens Docker window.

4.	 Enable the Outline check box.

5.	Click the Outline color picker, and click the outline color you want.

6.	Enable the Fill check box.

7.	Click the Fill color picker, and click the fill color you want.

8.	Click the Apply button.

To maintain the outline or fill of the object

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Disable one of the following check boxes:

•	Outline [image] maintains the object's outline

•	Fill [image] maintains the object's fill

3.	Enable the Remove Face check box.

 Related Topics


Creating a Fish Eye lens

You can apply a Fish Eye lens to an object. The lens object distorts and either magnifies or shrinks objects underneath it.

To create a Fish Eye lens

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Lens.

3.	Choose Fish Eye from the list box in the Lens Docker window.

4.	Type a value from -1000 to 1000 in the Rate box to indicate the percentage by which you want the lens to distort the underlying objects.

Positive values distort and magnify objects by increasing amounts as their rate settings progress from 1 to 1000. Negative values shrink and distort objects by increasing amounts as their rate settings progress from -1 to -1000. A rate of 0 results in no change to the appearance of objects behind the lens.

5.	Click the Apply button.

 Related Topics


Copying lenses

You can copy lens attributes to another object. The lens type and any rotation, rate, or magnification settings are copied to the selected object.

To copy a lens from one object to another

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the object to which you want to copy the lens.

2.	Click Effects, Copy Effect, Lens From.

3.	Using the horizontal pointer that appears, select the object from which you want to copy the lens.

 Related Topics


Editing lenses


Overview: Editing lenses
Editing lenses

When you're working with a lens, you may want to change how it perceives objects beneath it. You can change the viewpoint of a lens, determine if it displays white space, and freeze its contents.

By changing the viewpoint of a lens, you can display any portion of a drawing through the lens without moving it. The viewpoint represents the center point of what is being viewed through the lens. This point is indicated by an "X" in the Drawing Window. You can position the lens anywhere in the drawing, but it always shows the area around its viewpoint marker. For example, you can use the viewpoint marker on a Magnify lens to enlarge part of a map without obscuring any part of the map.

You can have CorelDRAW display a lens only where it overlaps other objects. As a result, the lens effect is not seen where the lens object covers blank space in the Drawing Window.

You can fix the contents of a lens by freezing it. You can then move the lens without changing what's displayed through the lens. Changes you make to the objects seen through the lens have no effect on the lens contents.

 Related Topics


Moving a lens' viewpoint

You can display any portion of a drawing through a lens without having to move the lens itself.

To move a lens' viewpoint

1.	Select the lens with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Lens.

3.	Enable the Viewpoint check box in the Lens Docker window.

At this point, the Edit button appears to the right of the check box.

4.	Click the Edit button to display the viewpoint marker (represented by an "X") in the Drawing Window.

5.	Drag the viewpoint marker to the desired position.

6.	Click the End button.

7.	Click the Apply button.

 Related Topics


Displaying a lens only where it covers other objects

You can show a lens only where it covers other objects.

To display a lens only where it covers other objects

1.	Select the lens with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Lens.

3.	Enable the Remove Face check box.

4.	Click the Apply button.

 Notes

•	The Remove Face option is available for color-altering lenses only and isn't available for Fish Eye and Magnify lenses.

•	You can make a lens invisible by removing the outline from the lens object. For more information, see "Outlining objects."

 Related Topics


Freezing a lens' current view

You can fix the contents of a lens by freezing it. You can remove the freeze from a lens.

To freeze a lens's current view

1.	Select the lens with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Lens.

3.	Enable the Frozen check box.

4.	Click the Apply button.

To undo the Frozen effect

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Disable the Frozen check box.

3.	Click the Apply button.

 Note

•	Frozen lenses redraw more quickly than non-frozen lenses.

 Related Topics


Adding perspective to objects


Overview: Adding perspective to objects
Adding perspective to objects

Adding perspective to objects creates the illusion of distance and depth. Although objects are two-dimensional, applying one and two-point perspective adds another dimension to your drawing. By creating one-point perspective, you can make an object look like it's receding from view in one direction. By creating two-point perspective, on the other hand, you can make the object look like it's receding from view in two directions.

After you add perspective to an object, you can further edit it to create the illusion you want.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Creating perspective


Overview: Creating perspective
Creating perspective

Perspective is created by shortening one or two sides of an object. For one-point perspective, you shorten one side of an object so that it appears to recede in one direction. By shortening two sides, you get two-point perspective in which the object appears to recede in two directions.

Once you add perspective to an object, you drag the nodes at the corners of the object's grid box to simulate the effect of one-point or two-point perspective.

As you drag a node, you'll notice an "X" (or two, if you're working with two-point perspective) that moves as the node moves. This symbol indicates the vanishing point. If you drag the node so that it meets another node or the vanishing point marker, the grid box reverts back to its original shape. You can also make adjustments to the perspective by dragging the vanishing point marker.

When you've created a perspective you like, you can copy and apply it to one or more objects in your drawing. You can copy perspective to any object you've created using CorelDRAW, except Paragraph text.

Removing the perspective effect from objects restores the object to its original state.

 Note

•	You can add perspective to any object (or group of objects) you create using CorelDRAW, including Artistic text. However, you can't apply perspective to Paragraph text or bitmap images.

 Related Topics


Applying one-point and two-point perspective to objects

You can create a three-dimensional effect on a two-dimensional page by applying perspective to objects.

To add a one-point perspective effect to an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Add Perspective.

A grid box with four nodes (at the corners) appears around the object. The Shape tool is now selected.

3.	Hold down CTRL, and drag one of the nodes horizontally or vertically.

By holding down CTRL, you constrain the node's motion to its horizontal or vertical axes to create a one-point perspective.

 Tip

•	Hold down CTRL + SHIFT as you drag to move opposing nodes the same distance in opposite directions.

To add a two-point perspective effect to an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Add Perspective.

3.	Drag one of the grid box nodes diagonally toward or away from the object's center.

4.	Repeat step 3 using the other nodes until you create the perspective effect you want.

 Related Topics


Copying an object's perspective

You can copy the perspective effect from one object to another.

To copy an object's perspective effect

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the object to which you want to copy the perspective effect.

2.	Click Effects, Copy Effect, Perspective From.

3.	Using the horizontal pointer that appears, select the object with the perspective you want to copy.

 Note

•	You can only copy an object's perspective if perspective is the most recent effect applied.

 Related Topics


Removing an object's perspective

You can remove the perspective effect applied to an object.

To remove an object's perspective effect

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, Clear Perspective.

 Tip

•	If you've applied an effect to the object since you applied perspective, you need to clear that effect before clearing perspective.

 Related Topics


Editing an object's perspective


Overview: Editing an object's perspective
Editing an object's perspective

When you're working with an object's perspective, you may want to edit it by moving nodes or changing the vanishing point.

 Related Topics


Moving nodes to adjust an object's perspective

You can adjust an object's one-point or two-point perspective by moving its nodes.

To edit a one-point perspective effect by moving nodes

1.	Open the Shape Edit Flyout, and click the Shape tool.

2.	Select the object.

3.	Drag the appropriate nodes to adjust the perspective.

 Tip

•	Hold down CTRL + SHIFT to move opposing nodes the same distance in opposite directions.

To edit a two-point perspective effect by moving nodes

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Drag the nodes horizontally toward or away from the center point.

 Related Topics


Moving an object's vanishing point to change its perspective

You can move an object's vanishing point to change its perspective.

To edit an object's perspective effect by moving a vanishing point

1.	Open the Shape Edit Flyout, and click the Shape tool.

2.	Select the object.

3.	Drag the vanishing point marker or markers (represented by "X") to create the desired perspective effect.

 Related Topics


Working with PowerClip


Overview: Working with Powerclip
Working with Powerclip

When you PowerClip objects, you put one object inside another object or group of objects. One object becomes the contents, while the other becomes the container. You can create a container from any object you create using CorelDRAW, including shapes, lines, curves, Artistic text, and groups. A contents object can be any object you create using CorelDRAW or import from another program.

After you create a PowerClip object, you can edit it to change the way the contents and container objects interact.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Creating a PowerClip object


Overview: Creating a PowerClip object
Creating a PowerClip object

When you're creating PowerClip object, you may want to compare the container object to a window. Just as a window's frame represents the limits of what you can see, a container object lets you see only the portion of a contents object (or group of objects) that fits inside the container's boundaries. If the size of the contents object exceeds that of its container, CorelDRAW automatically crops the contents object. You see only the portion of the contents object that fits inside the container.

You'll find the PowerClip feature particularly useful for placing photo files (like bitmaps) inside containers of different shapes. You can create more complex PowerClip effects by placing a container object into another container object to produce a nested PowerClip object. Nested PowerClip objects can have up to five editable levels.

Additionally, you can copy the contents of a PowerClip object to another PowerClip object.

 Related Topics


Applying a PowerClip

You can create a PowerClip object by placing an object inside another object. You can create a nested PowerClip object by adding the PowerClip object to another object in the Drawing Window. This object becomes the container object.

To create a PowerClip object

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the object you want to use as the contents.

2.	Click Effects, PowerClip, Place Inside Container.

3.	Using the horizontal pointer that appears, select the object you want to use as the container.

The contents object is placed inside the container object. The contents and container now become a single unit.

 Tip

•	You can also create a PowerClip object using the Object Manger. For more information, see "Creating PowerClip objects using the Object Manager."

To create nested PowerClip objects

1.	Follow all of the steps in the previous procedure.

2.	Select the PowerClip object.

3.	Click Effects, PowerClip, Place Inside Container.

4.	Using the horizontal pointer that appears, select the object you want to use as the container.

 Note

•	A nested PowerClip object can have up to five nested levels.

 Related Topics


Copying the contents of a PowerClip object

You can copy the contents of a PowerClip object to another PowerClip object.

To copy the contents of a PowerClip

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the object to which you want to copy the contents of a PowerClip object.

2.	Click Effects, Copy Effect, PowerClip From.

3.	Using the horizontal pointer that appears, select the PowerClip object that contains the contents you want to copy.

 Related Topics


Editing a PowerClip object


Overview: Editing a PowerClip object
Editing a PowerClip object

When you're working with PowerClip objects, you may want to offset the contents object from the center of the container, edit the contents object, lock or unlock the contents, or extract the contents of a PowerClip object.

By default, CorelDRAW automatically centers PowerClip contents objects inside their containers. However, you can change the default so that contents objects are offset from the center of the container.

When you edit the contents object, CorelDRAW temporarily separates the contents and container objects. You can then edit the contents of the PowerClip object, for example, by changing its fill and outline properties, without altering the container object.

When you lock or unlock the contents of a PowerClip object, you control the interaction between the contents and container objects. When a contents object is locked to its container object, both objects undergo the same changes. For example, when a PowerClip object is moved, rotated, or resized, both the contents and container objects are affected in the same way. When the contents object is unlocked, it's locked to the page and remains stationary even if you move or rotate its container.

By extracting the contents from a PowerClip object, the container and contents objects return to being separate objects.

 Related Topics


Changing the default placement of a PowerClip object

You can change the default placement of a contents object.

To change the default placement of a contents object

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Workspace, Edit.

3.	Disable the Auto-center New PowerClip Contents check box.

4.	Position the object you want to become the contents over the container.

5.	Click Effects, PowerClip, Place Inside Container.

6.	Using the horizontal pointer that appears, select the object you want to use as the container.

 Notes

•	If the contents and container objects do not overlap, the contents won't appear in the PowerClip object.

•	This setting applies to all documents, not just the active document.

 Related Topics


Editing the contents of a PowerClip object

You can edit the contents of a PowerClip object without affecting its container.

To edit the contents of a PowerClip object

1.	Select the PowerClip object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, PowerClip, Edit Contents.

3.	Make the desired changes to the contents object or add new objects as needed.

4.	Click Effects, PowerClip, Finish Editing This Level.

 Note

•	During editing, the container object appears in Wireframe mode and can't be selected.

 Tip

•	You can also edit the contents of a PowerClip object using the Object Manager. For more information, see "Creating PowerClip objects using the Object Manager."

 Related Topics


Locking and unlocking a PowerClip object

You can lock or unlock the contents of a PowerClip object.

To lock the contents and container objects

•	Right-click the PowerClip object, and click Lock Contents To PowerClip.

When enabled, a check mark appears beside the command name.

 Tip

•	You can also lock the PowerClip's contents and edit it's container using the Object Manager. For more information, see "Creating PowerClip objects using the Object Manager."

To unlock the contents from the container object

•	Right-click the PowerClip object, and click Lock Contents To PowerClip.

When disabled, no check mark appears beside the command name.

 Notes

•	When you unlock the contents object, it's locked to the page.

•	Disabling the Lock Contents To PowerClip command is useful for repositioning the container over its contents.

 Related Topics


Extracting the contents of a PowerClip object

You can remove the contents from a PowerClip object.

To extract the contents of a PowerClip object

1.	Select the PowerClip object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Effects, PowerClip, Extract Contents.

 Note

•	If you created nested PowerClip objects and want to extract all contents objects in succession, you'll need to use perform this task for each nested level.

 Tip

•	You can also extract the PowerClip's contents using the Object Manager. For more information, see "Creating PowerClip objects using the Object Manager."

 Related Topics


Filling and outlining objects


Overview: Filling and outlining objects
Filling and outlining objects

When you add an object to a drawing, CorelDRAW gives it a default outline attribute, a default fill attribute, or both. The object's outline is the line that surrounds the object. The fill is the color or pattern contained in the object. You can change these attributes using the Outline and Fill flyout tools. For information about changing the default fill and outline see, "Changing a default style."

With CorelDRAW you can apply a fill and outline to objects. Text objects are closed objects, so you can specify a fill and an outline. Normally, text objects are filled but have no outline properties. You can assign additional properties to text, including font and style, point size, and inter-line spacing. For more information see, "Working with text."

 More Detailed Information


Filling objects


Overview: Filling objects
Filling objects

You can change the appearance of an object by using a fill. To fill an object, you apply colors or patterns inside its borders. If you leave an object without a fill or remove its fill, the object is transparent. CorelDRAW includes Uniform fills, Fountain fills, Pattern fills, Texture fills, and PostScript fills. You can apply fills to specific objects or set defaults so that every object you draw has the same fill. You can also customize Fountain fills, Pattern fills, and Texture fills. You can also apply a mesh fill to an object.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Working with basic fills


Overview: Working with basic fills
Working with basic fills

CorelDRAW lets you apply uniform fills, which are even-colored and solid. You can choose from color models, palettes, and color mixers to fill objects with solid colors. The default display is the CMYK color model and the custom Color Palette. By setting the Fill Open Curves option, you can apply a fill to any curve object. You can also make an object transparent by removing its fill.

 Related Topics


Applying a uniform fill

You can apply uniform fills using the Uniform Fill dialog box, the Interactive Fill tool, or the on-screen Color Palette. The Uniform Fill dialog box lets you exercise more control over the fill. The other on-screen methods let you apply color more quickly and easily. You can also mix colors in a solid fill by using the Interactive Fill tool in conjunction with the on-screen Color Palette. To select a color from a specific color model, see "Working with color."

To apply a uniform fill using the Uniform Fill dialog box

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fill Color Dialog.

3.	Choose a color model from the Model list box.

4.	Click a color from the Color Bar and from the visual selector.

 Tip

•	You can also enter the color components of a color in the appropriate boxes.

To apply a uniform fill using the Interactive Fill tool

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Fill tool.

3.	On the Property Bar, choose Uniform Fill from the Fill Type list box.

4.	Choose a color model from the Uniform Fill Type list box.

5.	Adjust the color by typing values in the appropriate boxes, then press ENTER.

To apply a uniform fill using the Color Palette

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the color you want from the on-screen Color Palette.

 Tips

•	You can also drag a color from the Color Palette to any object. As the mouse pointer moves over the object, it changes shape to show where the color will be applied. Holding down SHIFT while you drag over an object applies only the fill attributes to the object.

•	You can display multiple Color Palettes on-screen to access swatches quickly.

To mix a color using the Color Palette

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Hold down CTRL, and click a color from the Color Palette. Release the mouse button before releasing CTRL.

 Related Topics


Managing fills

CorelDRAW lets you copy and paste fill and outline colors from one object to another using the Eyedropper and Paintbucket tools.

To copy a fill or outline to another object

1.	Open the Eyedropper flyout, and click the Eyedropper tool.

2.	Click one of the following buttons to set the selection area:

•	Fill/Outline [image] lets you select the fill or outline

•	1X1 [image] lets you select the color in a 1X1 area

•	3X3 [image] lets you select the color in a 3X3 area

•	5X5 [image] lets you select the color in a 5X5 area

•	Selection [image] lets you marquee select an area

3.	Click on the object whose fill you want to copy.

4.	Open the Eyedropper flyout, and click the Paintbucket tool.

5.	Select the object I which you want to paste the fill.

 Notes

•	Fills that are copied may not be representative of the original fill. In some cases, the closest equivalent RGB colors appear when you paste a fill.

•	If you select the Paintbucket tool before you choose a color with the Eyedropper tool, the default is no fill.

 Tip

•	You can switch from the Eyedropper tool to the Paintbucket tool by holding down the SHIFT key.

 Related Topics


Setting the Fill Open Curves option

CorelDRAW lets you fill open curves. By enabling and disabling the Fill Open Curves option you can define the default fill for curves.

To enable the Fill Open Curves setting

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Document, and click General.

3.	Enable the Fill Open Curves check box.

To disable the Fill Open Curves setting

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Disable the Fill Open Curves check box.

 Related Topics


Removing fills

You can remove an object's fill so that objects behind it show through.

To remove an object's fill using the Color Palette

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click No Color on the Color Palette.

To remove an object's fill using the Fill Tool flyout

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click No Fill.

 Related Topics


Working with fountain fills


Overview: Working with fountain fills
Working with fountain fills

A fountain fill causes two or more colors to flow into each other smoothly, letting you add depth and color to your drawing. The fill can flow in a straight line across the object (Linear), in concentric circles from the center of the object (Radial), in rays from the center of the object (Conical), or in concentric squares from the center of the object (Square).

There are two types of fountain fills: two-color and custom. Two-color fountain fills have a direct blend from one color to another. Custom fills let you create a cascade of many colors. You can customize fountain fills by changing the direction of the fill, adding intermediate colors, or changing the angle of the fill.

 Related Topics


Applying a two-color fountain fill

A fountain fill [image] also known as a gradient fill or a ramp fill [image] is a progression of colors through the Color Wheel that follows a linear, radial, conical, or square path. CorelDRAW provides preset fountain fills that you can use to simulate the appearance of neon tubes, metal cylinders, and other real-life objects.

To apply a two-color fountain fill using the Fountain Fill dialog box

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fountain Fill Dialog.

3.	In the Color Blend section, enable the Two Color button.

4.	From the Type list box, choose one of the following fountain fill types:

•	Linear

•	Radial

•	Conical

•	Square

5.	Open the From color picker, and click the color you want at the start of the color progression.

6.	Open the To color picker, and click the color you want at the end of the color progression.

7.	Move the Mid-Point slider to set the mid-point between the two colors.

8.	Click one of the following buttons to set the direction:

•	Direct [image] determines the intermediate fill colors according to hue and saturation changes along a straight line, beginning at the From color and continuing across the Color Wheel to the To color

•	Clockwise Color Path [image] blends colors along a clockwise path around the Color Wheel

•	Counterclockwise Color Path [image] blends colors along a counterclockwise path around the Color Wheel

 Tips

•	You can see how your fill appears in the Preview window of the Fountain Fill dialog box.

•	The Color Wheel displays the fountain fill direction.

To apply a fountain fill using the Interactive Fill tool

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Fill tool.

3.	On the Property Bar, choose Fountain Fill from the Fill Type list box.

4.	On the Property Bar, click one of the following buttons:

•	Linear

•	Radial

•	Conical

•	Square

5.	Click the First Fill picker, and click a color on the palette.

6.	Click the Last Fill picker, and click a color on the palette.

To apply a preset fountain fill

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fountain Fill Dialog.

3.	Choose a preset fountain fill from the Presets list box.

 Related Topics


Creating and saving custom fountain fills

You can customize fountain fills by adding intermediate colors. You can also specify where you want the intermediate colors to appear by moving the markers that appear above the Preview Ribbon, or by entering a value in the Position box. You can add as many as 99 intermediate colors to a fountain fill. You can also save the fill to use it again.

To create a custom fountain fill

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fountain Fill Dialog.

3.	In the Color Blend section, enable the Custom button.

4.	Double-click the Preview Ribbon to add a color marker.

5.	Type a placement value for the marker in the Position box.

6.	Do one of the following to select a color:

•	Click a color from the Color Palette to assign to the marker.

•	Click the Others button and create a custom color.

7.	Repeat steps 4 to 6 until you achieve the desired effect.

 Tip

•	You can move existing markers by dragging them along the Preview Ribbon and delete them by double-clicking.

To create a custom fountain fill using the Interactive Fill tool

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Fill tool.

3.	On the Property Bar, choose Fountain Fill from the Fill Type list box.

4.	Click one of the following button on the Property Bar:

•	linear

•	radial

•	conical

•	square

5.	Drag a color from the Color Palette to any spot along the line that appears inside the object.

As the mouse pointer moves over the line that represents the fill's direction, a plus sign appears to indicate where the color is applied.

6.	Move existing colors by dragging them along the vector inside the object and delete them by right-clicking the color.

 Tip

•	You can also adjust the color position for custom fountain fills by using the Node Position box on the Property Bar.

To save a custom fountain fill

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fountain Fill Dialog.

3.	Type a name for the new fountain fill in the Presets box.

4.	Click the Add button to save the custom fountain fill.

New patterns are added to the pattern list and placed in alphabetical order.

To remove a custom fountain fill

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Select the preset that you want to remove from the list.

3.	Click the Delete button.

 Related Topics


Customizing fountain fills


Overview: Customizing fountain fills
Customizing fountain fills

Customizing fountain fills can affect how they appear on screen and how they print. There are a number of ways to determine how fountain fills print and display. You can improve the appearance of fountain fills by controlling the printing, by adjusting the overall quality of the fountain fill, or by changing the default display.

Printing proofs of a drawing with fountain fills can take less time if you reduce the number of steps the printer uses to create them. For information about setting fountain fill steps for printing see, "Printing."

You can also change a fountain fill's color, center point, mid-point, angle, direction, and edge pad. These options vary depending on the type of fountain fill.

 Related Topics


Changing a fountain fill's quality

When you create a fountain fill, the space required to blend the colors is divided by the number of fountain steps displayed in the Steps box. By default, CorelDRAW displays each object with the same number of fountain steps, making small objects seem more detailed than larger ones. Unlocking the Steps option overrides all other settings. You can then increase the number of steps used in larger objects, making them appear the same as fills displayed in smaller objects. The number of steps specified in the Fountain Fill dialog box overrides the number of steps in the Options and Print dialog boxes.

To change the quality of a fountain fill

1.	Select a fountain fill object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fountain Fill Dialog.

3.	To unlock the Steps box, click the Padlock icon that appears to the right of the Steps box.

4.	Type a value in the Steps box to change the number of steps used to display and print the fountain fill.

To change the quality of a fountain fill using the Property Bar

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Fill tool.

2.	Select a fountain fill.

3.	On the Property Bar, click the Fountain Step Lock/Unlock button to unlock the Steps box. (The Steps box is unlocked when the button appears pressed.)

4.	Type a value in the Fountain Step box to change the number of steps used to display and print the fountain fill.

 Note

•	When the Steps box is locked, the fill prints with the number of steps specified in the Print dialog box and displays on screen with the number of steps specified in the Options dialog box.

To change the default display of fountain fills

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Workspace, Display.

3.	Type the number of steps in the Preview Fountain Steps box.

 Related Topics


Changing colors in a two-color fountain fill

Once you have created a two-color fountain fill, you can change the appearance of a two-color fountain fill without altering its pattern. You can change its appearance by changing the colors used to create the fountain fill. When using the Fountain Fill dialog box, you can preview your fill in the Preview window.

To change the colors of a two-color fountain fill

1.	Select a two-color fountain fill with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fountain Fill Dialog.

3.	Open the From color picker, and click a color for the start of the fountain fill's color progression.

4.	Open the To color picker, and click a color for the end of the fountain fill's color progression.

 Tip

•	You can click the Other button to create or choose a custom color.

To change the colors of a two-color fountain fill using the Interactive Fill tool

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Fill tool.

2.	Select a two-color fountain fill.

3.	To change the color used for the start of the color progression, do one of the following:

•	Drag a color from the Color Palette to the start fill handle that appears at the beginning of the fountain fill.

•	Click the First Fill picker on the Property Bar, and click a color on the palette.

4.	To change the color used for the end of the color progression, do one of the following:

•	Drag a color from the Color Palette to the end fill handle box that appears at the end of the fountain fill.

•	Click the Last Fill picker on the Property Bar, then click a color on the palette.

To mix colors in a two-color Fountain Fill using the mouse

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Hold down CTRL, and click a color from the on-screen Color Palette. Release the mouse button before releasing CTRL.

You can apply a mix to a single color swatch by holding down CTRL and dragging a color from the Color Palette to a color swatch.

 Note

•	To change the color of custom fountain fills see, "Creating and saving custom fountain fills."

 Related Topics


Changing a fountain fill's center point

Offsetting the center point horizontally or vertically lets you alter the appearance of the fountain fill. Most fountain fills radiate from a point that appears in the center of the fill. Radial and square fountain fills progress in a series of concentric circles or squares from the center of the object outward. Conical fountain fills progress in a circular path from the center of the object outward. Linear fountain fills do not have a center point.

To change the center point

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fountain Fill Dialog.

3.	Choose the type of fountain fill you want from the Type list box.

You can choose a radial, conical, or square fountain fill.

4.	Type a value in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes.

 Note

•	Negative values shift the center point to the left; positive values shift the center point to the right. For example, a value of -50% places the center point on the left edge of the object; a value of 50% places the center point on the right edge.

To change the center point using the mouse

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Fill tool.

2.	Select a fountain fill object.

3.	Drag the start point of the vector inside the object to change the center of the fill.

 Related Topics


Changing a fountain fill's mid-point

The mid-point is an imaginary line between two colors in a fountain fill. The value of the mid-point represents its position in relation to two fountain fill colors. By changing this value, you can set the point at which two colors in a fountain fill converge.

For example, in a two-color fountain fill using the colors black and white, a value of 50 positions the mid-point in the center of the fill so that half of the fill is black and half is white. Increasing the mid-point value to 99 results in a fountain fill dominated by black. Decreasing the mid-point value to 1 results in a fountain fill dominated by white.

To change the mid-point

1.	Using the Pick tool, select a two-color fountain fill object.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fountain Fill Dialog.

3.	Move the Mid-point slider to change the start and end color proportions.

To change the mid-point using the Interactive Fill tool

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Fill tool.

2.	Select a two-color fountain fill object.

3.	Move the Fountain Fill MidPoint slider on the Property Bar.

To change the mid-point using the mouse

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Drag the mid-point slider that appears inside the object.

 Related Topics


Changing a fountain fill's angle

You can change the angle of linear, conical, and square fountain fills. Changing the angle of gradation affects the slant of the fountain fill. Radial fountain fills progress in a series of concentric circles, so you can't change their angle.

To change the angle

1.	Using the Pick tool, select a fountain fill object.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fountain Fill Dialog.

3.	Type a value in the Angle box.

To change the angle using the Interactive Fill tool

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Fill tool.

2.	Select a fountain fill.

3.	On the Property Bar, type a value in the top portion of the Fountain Fill Angle and Edge Pad box, and press ENTER.

 Note

•	Positive values rotate the fill counterclockwise; negative values rotate it clockwise.

To change the angle using the mouse

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Drag one of the end point handles of the vector inside the object in a circular direction.

 Related Topics


Changing a fountain fill's edge pad

 You can change the edge pad of linear, radial, and square fountain fills. The edge pad value determines how long the beginning and end colors remain solid before they start blending with the next color in the fountain fill. Conical fountain fills progress in rays, so you can't change their edge pad.

To change the fountain fill edge pad

1.	Using the Pick tool, select a fountain fill object.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fountain Fill Dialog.

3.	Type a value in the Edge Pad box to set the amount of the fill taken up by the progression's beginning and end colors.

To change the edge pad using the Interactive Fill tool

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Fill tool.

2.	Select a fountain fill object.

3.	On the Property Bar, type a value in the bottom portion of the Fountain Fill Angle and Edge Pad box, and press ENTER.

 Note

•	Higher values let the colors remain solid longer before blending, causing the colors to spread more quickly. Lower values result in a smooth transformation between the two colors.

To change the edge pad using the mouse

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Drag one of the end point handles of the vector inside the object in an inward or outward direction.

 Related Topics


Working with PostScript textures


Overview: Working with PostScript textures
Working with PostScript textures

A PostScript texture is a texture fill designed using PostScript language. Some textures are very complex, and large objects that contain PostScript texture fills may take time to print or to update on screen. Therefore, CorelDRAW represents PostScript fills on screen with the letters "PS," rather than the actual texture (unless you are in Enhanced view). You can enable or disable the Show PostScript fills to display the fill.

For more information on viewing PostScript fill see, "Setting the view quality."

 Related Topics


Applying a PostScript texture pattern

PostScript textures are fills that you can change by altering a set of variables. These patterns don't appear on screen. Instead, you see a pattern that contains the letters "PS" (unless you are in Enhanced view).

You can use the PostScript Texture dialog box or the Interactive Fill tool to apply PostScript texture fills. The PostScript Texture dialog box lets you choose a texture, adjust options, and view the effects in the Preview window. PostScript textures created in CorelDRAW can be exported in Encapsulated PostScript (.EPS) format for use in other applications. For more information see "Importing, exporting, and OLE."

To apply a PostScript texture fill

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click PostScript Fill Dialog.

3.	Choose a texture from the list.

4.	In the Parameters section, adjust the various settings to customize the texture as required.

5.	Enable the Preview Fill check box to preview the texture with the current settings.

6.	Click the Refresh button to update the image.

To apply a PostScript texture fill using the Interactive Fill tool

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Fill tool.

3.	On the Property Bar, choose PostScript Fill from the Fill Type list box.

4.	Choose a texture from the PostScript Fill Textures list box.

 Note

•	The settings listed in the Parameters section of the PostScript Texture dialog box vary depending on the type of PostScript texture fill you choose.


Working with pattern fills


Overview: Working with pattern fills
Working with pattern fills

In CorelDRAW you can choose from a two-color, full-color, or bitmap pattern fill. A two-color pattern is a simple picture composed of only "on" and "off" pixels. The only colors included in the bitmap are the two that you assign. A full-color pattern is a picture composed of lines and fills, instead of dots of color like a bitmap. These vector graphics are smoother and more complex than bitmap images and are easier to manipulate. A bitmap pattern is a regular color picture (like you might get with an electronic photograph). These bitmaps vary in complexity, and it is best to use less complex bitmaps for fill patterns, because complex ones are memory-intensive and slow to display. The complexity of a bitmap is determined by its size, resolution, and bit depth.

CorelDRAW provides preset pattern fills. You can also create a pattern using the Bitmap Pattern Editor, or import your own 1-bit bitmap.

 Related Topics


Applying a two-color pattern fill

You can fill an object with a pattern composed of repeating bitmap images. CorelDRAW provides a collection of black-and-white bitmap patterns that you can use as is or customize. You can set the foreground and background of a pattern and change the size of the tiles. Using the Interactive Fill tool in conjunction with the Property Bar, you can apply two-color pattern fills quickly, as well as mix the colors in the pattern.

To apply a two-color pattern fill

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Pattern Fill Dialog.

3.	Enable the 2-color button.

4.	Click the Pattern picker, and click the pattern.

5.	Open the Front color picker, and click a color for the bitmap pattern's foreground.

6.	Open the Back color picker, and click a color for the bitmap pattern's background.

To apply a two-color pattern fill using the Interactive Fill tool

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Fill tool.

3.	On the Property Bar, choose Pattern Fill from the Fill Type list box.

4.	Click the Two-color Bitmap Pattern Fill button.

5.	Click the First Fill picker, and click a pattern you want from the list.

6.	Open the Front Color picker, and click a color for the bitmap pattern's foreground.

7.	Open the Back Color picker, and click a color for the bitmap pattern's background.

To mix colors in a two-color pattern fill using the Color Palette

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Fill tool.

2.	Select a two-color pattern fill.

3.	Hold down CTRL, and click a color on the Color Palette. Release the mouse button before you release CTRL.

 Related Topics


Applying a full-color pattern fill

You can fill objects with a pattern composed of repeating vector images. CorelDRAW provides a large selection of full-color pattern fills that you can use.

To apply a full-color pattern fill

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Pattern Fill Dialog.

3.	Enable the Full Color button.

4.	Click the Pattern picker, and click a pattern from the list.

To apply a full-color pattern fill using the Interactive Fill tool

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Fill tool.

3.	On the Property Bar, choose Pattern Fill from the Fill Type list box.

4.	Click the Full-color Pattern Fill button.

5.	Click the First Fill picker, and click a pattern from the list.

 Related Topics


Applying a bitmap pattern fill

You can fill objects with a pattern composed of repeating bitmap images. CorelDRAW provides a large selection of bitmap pattern fills that you can use as is or customize.

To apply a bitmap pattern fill

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Pattern Fill Dialog.

3.	Enable the Bitmap button.

4.	Click the Pattern picker, and click a pattern from the list.

To apply a bitmap pattern fill using the Interactive Fill tool

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Fill tool.

3.	On the Property Bar, choose Pattern Fill from the Fill Type list box.

4.	Click the Bitmap Pattern Fill button.

5.	Click the First Fill picker, and click a pattern from the list.

 Related Topics


Creating a two-color pattern fill

You can create your own pattern from scratch. New patterns are added to the end of the list of preset patterns.

To create a two-color pattern fill

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Pattern Fill Dialog.

3.	Enable the 2-color button.

4.	Click the Create button.

5.	To set the resolution of a pattern, enable one of the following Bitmap Size buttons:

•	16 X 16 [image] changes the resolution of the Edit Grid to 16 x 16 squares

•	32 X 32 [image] changes the resolution of the Edit Grid to 32 x 32 squares

•	64 X 64 [image] changes the resolution of the Edit Grid to 64 x 64 squares

6.	To determine how many squares in the drawing area are filled when you click with the mouse, enable one of the following buttons:

•	1 X 1 [image] changes the pen size to a 1-grid square

•	2 X 2 [image] changes the pen size to a 2 x 2 square

•	4 X 4 [image] changes the pen size to a 4 x 4 square

•	8 X 8 [image] changes the pen size to an 8 x 8 square

7.	To create a pattern, do one or both of the following:

•	Click with the left mouse button over the grid to fill squares.

•	Click with the right mouse button over the grid to erase squares.

 Related Topics


Creating a pattern fill using the Create Pattern command

You can create two-color and full-color pattern fills based on an area in your drawing using the Create Pattern command. CorelDRAW lets you marquee select an area, which then becomes a pattern fill.

To create a two-color pattern using the Create Pattern command

1.	Click Tools, Create, Pattern.

2.	Enable the Two-Color button.

3.	Specify a resolution by enabling one of the following buttons:

•	Low [image] creates a low-resolution, two-color pattern

•	Medium [image] creates a medium-resolution, two-color pattern

•	High [image] creates a high-resolution, two-color pattern

4.	Click OK. The cursor changes to cross hairs.

5.	Drag a marquee box around the graphic or area of the graphic that you want to make into a pattern.

The new pattern appears at the bottom of the Pattern picker list.

To create a full-color pattern using the Create Pattern command

1.	Click Tools, Create, Pattern.

2.	Enable the Full Color button.

3.	Click OK. The cursor changes to cross hairs.

4.	Drag a marquee box around the graphic or area of the graphic that you want to make into a pattern.

5.	Click OK in the Create Pattern message box.

6.	Type a name for the pattern in the File Name box, and click the Save button.

The new pattern appears at the bottom of the Pattern picker list.

 Note

•	You can also access the Create Pattern dialog box by clicking the Select Pattern button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Importing pattern fills

You can import a graphic to use as a pattern fill. Imported patterns are added to the end of the list of preset patterns. The graphic is then tiled to form a pattern in a path to which it is applied.

To create a pattern fill from an imported image

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Pattern Fill Dialog.

3.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Two-Color

•	Full Color

•	Bitmap

4.	Click the Load button.

5.	Choose the file that you want to import from the Import dialog box, and click Import.

 Related Topics


Removing a pattern fill

You may want to remove a pattern fill to conserve disk space or to shorten the list of two-color, full-color, or bitmap pattern fills.

To remove a pattern fill

1.	Select a pattern filled object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Pattern Fill Dialog.

3.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Two-color

•	Full-color

•	Bitmap

4.	Click the Pattern picker, and click the pattern you want to remove from the list.

5.	Click the Delete button.

 Related Topics


Working with texture fills


Overview: Working with texture fills
Working with texture fills

A texture fill is a random, fractally-generated fill that you can use to give your objects a natural appearance. Texture fills increase the size of a file and the time it takes to print. Therefore, you may want to use these fills sparingly, especially with larger objects.

You can use colors from any color model or palette for texture fills. Since texture fills can only hold RGB colors, however, this can cause a color shift when you display or print the files.

Corel TEXTURE

Corel TEXTURE lets you design bitmap texture fills and modify preset textures. You can recreate the natural textures of wood, clouds, stone, ripples, waves, and wrinkles, or create artificial patterns such as checkers, dots, lines, and swirls. Corel TEXTURE lets you control lighting, design, color combinations, and gradations. The Texture wizard guides you through the process, or you can start with a blank texture.

 Related Topics


Applying a texture fill

Texture fills are fills that look like clouds, water, gravel, minerals, and other natural and artificial substances. CorelDRAW provides preset textures, and each texture has a set of options that you can change. The Texture Fill dialog box and the Interactive Fill tool let you apply texture fills and create custom textures.

To apply a texture fill

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Texture Fill Dialog.

3.	Choose the library containing the texture you want from the Texture Library list box.

4.	Choose a texture from the Texture list box.

The Preview window in the dialog box displays the fill attributes that are assigned to the selected object.

5.	Adjust the style options to customize the texture as required.

6.	Click the Options button to adjust the bitmap resolution and texture size.

 Tip

•	Click the Preview button to see the results of your modifications.

To apply a texture fill using the Interactive Fill tool

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Fill tool.

3.	On the Property Bar, choose Texture Fill from the Fill Type list box.

4.	Choose the library containing the texture from the Texture Library list.

5.	Click the First Fill picker, and click a texture from the list.

6.	Click the Texture Options button to adjust the bitmap resolution and texture size limit.

7.	Click the Regenerate Texture button to regenerate the texture fill.

 Related Topics


Creating, saving, and deleting custom texture fills

When you create a custom texture fill, you can save it to use it again. You can't save or overwrite textures in the Styles library. You can, however, modify a texture in the Styles library and save it to another library.

To create a custom texture fill

1.	Select a texture fill with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Texture Fill Dialog.

3.	 Modify the texture settings in the Texture Style Name section. Use the Preview button to view your changes before saving a custom texture fill.

To save a custom texture fill

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Add button.

3.	Type a name in the Texture Name box.

4.	Do one of the following to specify the Library Name:

•	From the Library Name List, choose a sample library in which you want to save the texture.

•	Type the name of a new library in the Library Name box.

To delete a custom texture fill

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To create a custom texture fill" procedure.

2.	Select a Texture Library from the list.

3.	Select the Texture you want to delete from the Texture List box.

4.	Click the Delete button.

 Related Topics


Customizing pattern and texture fills


Overview: Customizing pattern and texture fills
Customizing pattern and texture fills

You can rotate, skew, adjust the tile size, and change the center of the pattern or texture to create a custom fill. You can adjust the pattern or texture fill using the on-screen fill tiling vector. The Transform Fill With Object option lets you perform transform an object and fill simultaneously.

 Related Topics


Changing a fill's tile size

You can change the dimensions of the pattern or texture tile used to fill an object. Decreasing the size of a pattern or texture tile, increases the pattern or texture density. You can resize a pattern fill or texture fill manually using the tiling handles, or more precisely, using the dialog box.

To change the size of pattern tiles

1.	Select the pattern fill with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Pattern Fill Dialog.

3.	In the Size section, type a value in the Width and Height box.

To change the size of pattern tiles using the Interactive Fill tool

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Fill tool.

2.	Select the pattern fill.

3.	On the Property Bar, type a value in the top and bottom portion of the Edit Tiling of Pattern box, and press ENTER.

 Tip

•	To change the size of pattern tiles quickly, enable the Small (25% of width and height or 4x4), Medium (50% of width and height or 2x2), or Large (100% of width and height or 1 tile) buttons on the Property Bar.

To change the size of texture tiles

1.	Select the texture fill with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Texture Fill Dialog.

3.	Click the Tiling button.

4.	In the Size section, type a value in the Width and Height box.

To change the tile size interactively

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Fill tool.

2.	Select the pattern or texture fill.

3.	To size the pattern, drag the square handles of the tiling vector.

 Related Topics


Setting a fill's tile origin

Setting the tile origin in a pattern fill or texture fill, lets you specify exactly where the patterns or textures begin. When you adjust the horizontal or vertical position of the first pattern or texture, relative to the top of the object, your adjustments affect the rest of the tile. The Preview window in the dialog boxes reflects the changes of any offset.

To set the tile origin of a pattern

1.	Select the pattern fill with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Pattern Fill Dialog.

3.	In the Origin section, type a value in the X box to set the amount of horizontal offset.

4.	In the Origin section, type a value in the Y box to set the amount of vertical offset.

To set the tile origin of a texture

1.	Select the texture fill with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Texture Fill Dialog.

3.	Click the Tiling button.

4.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from the previous procedure.

 Note

•	Increasing the value in the X box moves the tile to the right; decreasing the value moves the tile to the left. Increasing the value in the Y box moves the tile down; decreasing the value moves the tile up.

To set the tile origin interactively

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Fill tool.

2.	Select the pattern or texture fill.

3.	Drag the center handle of the tiling vector that appears on the object to the location that you want to set as the origin.

 Related Topics


Rotating a fill

You can rotate a pattern fill or texture fill to change the appearance of the tile. You can rotate a pattern or texture fill using the Interactive Fill tool or by adjusting the rotation settings in the dialog boxes.

To rotate a pattern fill

1.	Select the pattern fill with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Pattern Fill Dialog.

3.	In the Transform section, type an angle value in the Rotate box.

To rotate a texture fill

1.	Select the texture fill with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Texture Fill Dialog.

3.	Click the Tiling button.

4.	In the Transform section, type an angle value in the Rotate box.

To rotate a pattern or texture fill using the Interactive Fill tool

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Fill tool.

2.	Select the pattern or texture fill.

3.	Drag the circular rotation handle on the tiling vector and rotate the pattern in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

 Related Topics


Skewing a fill

You can skew or slant a pattern fill or texture fill. CorelDRAW lets you skew a pattern or texture fill using the Interactive Fill tool or by adjusting the settings in the dialog boxes.

To skew a pattern fill

1.	Select the pattern fill with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Pattern Fill Dialog.

3.	In the Transform section, type an angle value in the Skew box.

To skew a texture fill

1.	Select the texture fill with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Texture Fill Dialog.

3.	Click the Tiling button.

4.	In the Transform section, type an angle value in the Skew box.

To skew a pattern or texture fill using the Interactive Fill tool

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Fill tool.

2.	Select the pattern or texture fill.

3.	To skew, drag one of the square skew handles on the tiling vector.

 Related Topics


Setting the transform fill option

The Transform Fill With Object option lets you rotate, scale and skew a pattern or texture fill while transforming an object.

To set the pattern Transform Fill With Object option

1.	Select the pattern fill with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Pattern Fill Dialog.

3.	Enable the Transform Fill With Object check box.

To set the texture Transform Fill With Object option

1.	Select the texture fill with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Texture Fill Dialog.

3.	Click the Tiling button.

4.	Enable the Transform Fill With Object check box.

To set the Transform Fill With Object option using the Property Bar

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Fill tool.

2.	Select the pattern or texture fill.

3.	On the Property Bar, click the Transform Fill With Object button.

 Related Topics


Offsetting tiles of a fill

Offsetting the tiles in a pattern fill or texture fill, lets you specify exactly where the patterns or textures begin. When you adjust the horizontal or vertical position of the first pattern or texture, relative to the top of the object, your adjustment affects the rest of the pattern or texture. The Preview window reflects the changes of any offset.

To offset rows or columns of pattern tiles

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Pattern Fill Dialog.

3.	In the Row or column offset section, do one of the following:

•	To offset rows, enable the Row button.

•	To offset columns, enable the Column button.

4.	Type the amount of offset in the % Of Tile Size box.

To offset rows or columns of texture tiles

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Texture Fill Dialog.

3.	Click the Tiling button.

4.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from the previous procedure.

 Related Topics


Creating Mesh Fill objects


Overview: Creating Mesh Fill objects
Creating Mesh Fill objects

Using a mesh object lets you create unique effects by adjusting many of the fill properties. You can define the mesh object by specifying a grid and its intersecting points. Unique effects result from manipulating the nodes that comprise the grid. Using the node editing features of CorelDRAW you can also modify the node type, reduce the number of nodes, or add and remove nodes from the mesh object.

 Related Topics


Creating a mesh object

You can create a mesh object that meets your needs. Using the Interactive Mesh Fill tool you can apply a mesh object to simple objects, curves, and bitmaps. When you apply a mesh to an object the object is converted to a mesh fill object.

To create a mesh object

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Mesh Fill tool.

2.	On the Property Bar, type the number of columns in the top portion of the Grid Size box, and press ENTER.

3.	On the Property Bar, type the number of rows in the bottom portion of the Grid Size box, and press ENTER.

4.	Using the shape cursor, adjust the nodes in the grid to create the desired mesh.

 Notes

•	You can apply a mesh fill to closed objects only.

•	When an object is complex you need to PowerClip the objects into a grid mesh. For more information see "Working with PowerClip."

 Related Topics


Editing a mesh object

Using the Interactive Mesh Fill tool you can edit the grid by adding and removing nodes.

To add a node to a mesh object

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Mesh Fill tool.

2.	Select the mesh fill object.

3.	Click on a grid line where you want to add a node.

4.	Hold down SHIFT, and double-click using the shape cursor.

To add an intersection point to a mesh object

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click on the mesh where you want to add an intersection node.

3.	Click the Add Node(s) button on the Property Bar.

 Tip

•	You can also double-click in a mesh to add intersection nodes.

To remove nodes to a mesh object

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To add a node to a mesh object" procedure.

2.	Click on the node or intersection node that you want to delete.

3.	Click the Delete Node(s) button on the Property Bar.

 Tip

•	You can also double-click a node or intersection node to delete it.

 Related Topics


Copying a mesh

You can copy a mesh from one object to another in the Drawing Window.

To copy a mesh from another object

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Mesh Fill tool.

2.	Select the object you want to copy a mesh to.

3.	Click the Copy Mesh Fill Properties From button on the Property Bar

4.	Select the object that you want to copy the mesh from.

 Note

•	CorelDRAW copies the number of rows and columns as well as the intersection point colors to the new object. When you copy a mesh CorelDRAW tries to duplicate the mesh as closely as possible.

 Related Topics


Adding color to a mesh object

You can add color to individual nodes or to patch in a mesh object.

To add color to an intersection node in a mesh object

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Mesh Fill tool.

2.	Select an intersection node.

3.	Click a color from the Color Palette.

To mix a color in a mesh object

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Mesh Fill tool.

2.	Hold down CTRL and click a color from the Color Palette.

 Tips

•	You can also drag a color from the on-screen Color Palette on to an intersection node.

•	You can also marquee select nodes to apply a color to an entire area of the mesh. For more information, see "Selecting nodes and segments."

To add color to a patch in a mesh object

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Mesh Fill tool.

2.	Drag a color from the Color Palette to a patch in the mesh object.

 Related Topics


Shaping and adjusting a mesh object

You can shape a mesh object to create unique fill effect. You can modify the appearance of the mesh by adjusting the position of the nodes and intersection nodes. You can also transform a mesh object using the transformation tools. For more information see, "Transforming objects."

To shape a mesh by the intersection node

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Mesh Fill tool.

2.	Using the shape cursor, select an intersection node on the outline of the object.

3.	Drag the node to a new location.

To adjust a node vertically

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Mesh Fill tool.

2.	Using the shape cursor, select a node on a vertical grid line.

3.	Drag the node vertically.

To adjust a node horizontally

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Mesh Fill tool.

2.	Using the shape cursor, select a node on a horizontal grid line.

3.	Drag the node horizontally.

To adjust an intersection node

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Mesh Fill tool.

2.	Using the shape cursor, select an intersection node.

3.	Drag the node to a new position.

 Notes

•	When you drag intersection points from inside the mesh towards the outside of the object no fill is applied.

•	If the mesh object contains color, adjusting the intersection nodes within the mesh blends the colors.

•	You can also set the outline properties for a mesh object. For more information see, "Outlining objects."

 Tip

•	You can also marquee select nodes to shape an entire area of the mesh.

 Related Topics


Changing the node and segment type

Using the node and segment properties you can change the type nodes or segments that make up the mesh grid. You can also adjust the curve smoothness slider to reduce the amount of nodes between the intersection points.

To change the node type

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Mesh Fill tool.

2.	Using the shape cursor, select a node.

3.	Enable one of the following buttons on the Property Bar:

•	Cusp [image] makes the node a cusp node which have independent control points. A curve that passes through a cusp node can bend at a sharp angle.

•	Smooth [image] makes a node smooth which have control points always directly opposite each other. Smooth nodes produce a smooth transition between line segments.

•	Symmetrical [image] makes a symmetrical node which have control points always directly opposite each other. Also, the control points are always equal lengths. Symmetrical nodes produce the same curvature on both sides of the node.

To change the segment type

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Mesh Fill tool.

2.	Using the shape cursor, select a node.

3.	Enable one of the following buttons on the Property Bar:

•	Convert Curve To Line [image] makes a segment straight

•	Convert Line To Curve [image] makes a segment curved

To change the curve smoothness

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Mesh Fill tool.

2.	Using the shape cursor, marquee select the intersection nodes.

3.	Click the Curve Smoothing box on the Property Bar, and adjust the Smoothness slider.

 Note

•	Moving the slider to the right, reduces the number of nodes between intersection points.

 Related Topics


Removing a mesh

You can remove a mesh from an object. When you remove a mesh the object remains a curve and has all the same properties as other curve objects.

To remove a mesh

1.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Mesh Fill tool.

2.	Select a mesh fill object.

3.	Click the Clear Mesh button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Outlining objects


Overview: Outlining objects
Outlining objects

You can change the size, shape, and color of outlines. Lines or objects with open paths can have ends that are rounded, square, cropped, or tipped with arrowheads and other line-ending shapes. Objects with closed paths (e.g., squares and polygons) do not have end-points, but you can choose from pointed, rounded, or truncated corners.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Working with outlines


Overview: Working with outlines
Working with outlines

An outline is the area that surrounds an object. When you create an object, CorelDRAW gives it a default outline that is a black solid fill. You can specify the outline's color as well as set its width and style.

 Related Topics


Applying outline colors

You can change the color of an outline to create a contrast to the object's fill color. Applying an outline using the Outline Color dialog box lets you exercise more control over the outline color. Applying an outline using the Outline Pen dialog box lets you set the outline thickness, style and corner shape. To color an outline quickly you can use the on-screen Color Palette. To select a color from a specific color model, see "Working with color."

To apply an outline color using the Outline Color dialog box

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Color Dialog.

3.	Choose a color model from the Model list.

4.	Click a color from the Color Bar and from the visual selector.

 Tip

•	You can also enter the color components of a color on the Property Bar.

To apply an outline color using the Outline Pen dialog box

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen Dialog.

3.	Open the Color picker, and click a color in the Color Palette.

 Tip

•	You can also click the Other button to create or choose a custom color.

To apply an outline color using the Color Palette

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Right-click a color from the Color Palette.

 Note

•	You can also drag a color from the Color Palette to the object's edge. As the mouse pointer moves over the object, it changes shape to show where the color will be applied.

 Related Topics


Converting outlines to objects

You can convert an outline to an object which lets you apply a fill to an outline. When you use thick outlines, the fill can continue through to the outer edge of the object, including the outline. When an outline is converted, it acquires all the properties of any object.

To convert an outline to an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Convert Outline To Object.

 Notes

•	You can only convert objects that have an outline.

•	If the Behind Fill option is enabled, the outline object appears behind the original object.

 Related Topics


Adjusting an outline's width

The width of an outline determines the thickness of the line in points. Changing the thickness of an object's outline changes the appearance of the object.

To adjust the outline width

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen Dialog.

3.	Type the new line width in the Width box.

To adjust the outline width using the Interactive Fill tool

1.	Click the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Interactive Fill flyout, and click the Interactive Fill tool.

3.	On the Property Bar, type a width in the Outline Width list.

 Tip

•	A number of preset outline widths are also available from the Outline Tool flyout. Options include: Hairline, 1/2 Point, 2 Point (Thin), 8 Point (Medium), 16 Point (Medium-Thick), and 24 Point (Thick).

 Related Topics


Setting the corner shape

Setting the corner shape changes the appearance of lines and curves, especially if the object has a very thick line weight or the object is particularly small.

To set an object's corner shape

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen Dialog.

3.	Enable one of the following Corner Style buttons:

•	Mitered Corners

•	Beveled Corners

•	Rounded Corners

 Related Topics


Setting the line cap style

The line cap style affects the appearance of the endpoints of open paths. Setting the line cap shape to Rounded or Extended makes the line slightly longer.

To set an object's line cap style

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen Dialog.

3.	Enable one of the following Line Caps Style buttons:

•	Square Line Caps

•	Rounded Line Caps

•	Extended Square Line Caps

 Related Topics


Choosing and editing a line style

CorelDRAW comes with many different line styles. Line styles are preset lines that have different attributes, such as dotted lines, or dashed lines. Applying a line style does not change the shape of the line or the amount of space it occupies. You can edit an existing line style to meet your needs.

To choose a line style

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen Dialog.

3.	Choose a line style from the Line Style selector.

 Tip

•	You can also choose a line style from the Outline Style Selector on the Property Bar.

To edit a line style

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen Dialog.

3.	Click the Edit Style button.

4.	Adjust the line end by moving the bar to the right.

5.	Click the squares to turn dots on or off.

6.	Click the Add button to add the line style to the bottom of the list.

7.	Click the Replace button to replace a style that was previously added to the list.

 Related Topics


Creating calligraphic outlines

You can give an object a hand-drawn look using Calligraphy settings. By adjusting these settings, you can vary the thickness of an object's outline.

To create a calligraphic outline

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen Dialog.

3.	Enable one of the Corner Style buttons. The first and third options make the nib square; the second option makes it round.

4.	Type a value in the Stretch box.

Reducing the value makes square nibs rectangular and round nibs oval, creating more pronounced calligraphic effects.

5.	Type a value in the Angle box.

The angle controls the orientation of the pen in relation to the drawing surface.

 Tips

•	You can also adjust the Stretch and Angle values by dragging in the Preview box.

•	You can also modify line widths after creating the calligraphic outline by changing the value in the Width box.

 Related Topics


Using the Behind Fill option

Use the Behind Fill option to apply an outline to a stylized font such as a script font. Normally, outlines are applied after the fill is applied. Half of the outline lies inside the object, while the other half lies outside the object. When you enable the Behind Fill check box, the outline is drawn first, then the fill is placed on top of the outline. Consequently, half of the outline is covered by the fill.

To enable the Behind Fill option

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen Dialog.

3.	Enable the Behind Fill check box.

 Related Topics


Using the Scaling With Image option

Scaling an image specifies whether the thickness of the object's outline remains the same or changes in proportion to the object's size. If the Scale With Image check box is enabled, the outline thickness increases when you enlarge the object (by scaling or stretching) and decreases when you make the object smaller.

To enable the Scale With Image option

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen Dialog.

3.	Enable the Scale With Image check box.

 Related Topics


Setting the miter limit

When two lines meet at a sharp angle and form a spike that extends beyond the intersection of the lines, the miter limit controls when the application switches from a mitered (pointed) join to a beveled (squared-off) joint.

To set the miter limit

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Workspace, Edit.

3.	Type a value from 5 and 45 degrees in the Miter Limit box.

 Note

•	Any corner that is less than the Miter Limit will have a beveled (squared-off) point. Corner joints above the limit will come to a mitered (sharp) point. This limit prevents corners from extending far beyond the actual corner at small angles, such as when a text character comes to a spike, for example, in the letter "M."

 Related Topics


Removing outlines

You can remove an object's outline quickly using the Color Palette or the Outline Tool flyout.

To remove an object's outline using the Color Palette

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Right-click No Color on the Color Palette.

To remove an object's outline using the Outline Tool flyout

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click No Outline.

 Related Topics


Applying and editing line-ending shapes


Overview: Applying and editing line-ending shapes
Applying and editing line-ending shapes

Line-ending shapes let you design the start or end point of a curve object.You can apply, edit, or create arrowheads using the Edit Arrowhead dialog box. New line-ending shapes are added to the top of the list of line styles.

 Related Topics


Applying line-ending shapes

You can apply arrowheads and other line-ending shapes to the ends of an open path.

To apply line-ending shapes using the Outline Pen dialog box

1.	Select a line or curve with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen Dialog.

3.	Click the left Arrowhead selector, and choose the shape you want for the start of the line.

4.	Click the right Arrowhead selector, and choose the shape you want for the end of the line.

To apply line-ending shapes using the Property Bar

1.	Select a line or curve with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Start Arrowhead selector on the Property Bar, and choose the shape you want for the start of the line.

3.	Click the End Arrowhead selector on the Property Bar, and choose the shape you want for the end of the line.

Use the Outline Style selector to select another outline style.

 Related Topics


Switching line-ending shapes

If you change the direction of a line or curve, you can switch arrowheads from one end of the line to the other. You can also remove the arrowheads from the end of a line or curve.

To switch arrowheads from one end of the line to another

1.	Select a line or curve with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen Dialog.

3.	Click one of the Arrowhead selectors, and choose the shape you want for the line.

4.	Click Options, Swap.

To remove an arrowhead

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click Options, None.

 Related Topics


Creating line-ending shapes

You can create your arrowhead or other line-ending shape. New arrows appear on the Property Bar, at the bottom of the arrowhead list in the Outline Pen dialog box.

The arrow you create can be any size [image] you can adjust the size later using the Edit Arrowhead dialog box. The number of arrowheads is limited to 100. If you already have this many and want to create new ones, you must first delete some of the existing ones. If the arrowhead consists of more than one object, you must combine all objects using the Combine or Weld command.

To create arrowheads and other line-ending shapes using the Create Arrow command

1.	Draw an arrowhead.

The arrowhead shape assumes the fill and outline attributes of the line to which it is applied.

2.	Click the arrowhead shape with the Pick tool.

3.	Click Tools, Create, Arrow.

The new arrowhead appears at the bottom of the Arrowhead selector.

To create arrowheads using the Outline Pen dialog box

1.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen Dialog.

2.	In the arrowhead section, click Options, New.

3.	Drag the side handles along the arrowhead's box to stretch vertically or horizontally, or drag the corner handles to change the size of the arrowhead.

4.	Drag the hollow nodes along the arrowhead's outline.

 Tip

•	To get a closer view of the arrowhead, enable the 4X Zoom check box.

 Related Topics


Editing line-ending shapes

When you apply an arrowhead to a path, its size is determined by the thickness of the path's outline. When you increase the thickness, the arrowhead size increases proportionately. To create a larger arrowhead without changing the outline of the path to stretch the arrowhead. You can also adjust the arrowhead's position relative to the end of the path, center the arrowhead, or flip it horizontally or vertically.

To stretch an arrowhead or line-ending shape

1.	Select a line or curve with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen Dialog.

3.	Under the arrowhead you want to edit, click Options, Edit.

4.	Drag the side handles along the arrowhead's box to stretch vertically or horizontally, or drag the corner handles to change the size of the arrowhead.

To move an arrowhead or line-ending shape

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Drag the hollow nodes along the arrowhead's outline.

To center an arrowhead or line-ending shape

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To stretch an arrowhead or line-ending shape" procedure.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Click the Center In X button to center the arrowhead vertically on the line. The letter "X" refers to the horizontal axis.

•	Click the Center In Y button to center the arrowhead horizontally on the line. The letter "Y" refers to the vertical axis.

To flip an arrowhead

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To stretch an arrowhead or line-ending shape" procedure.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Click the Reflect In X button to flip the arrowhead vertically on the line. The letter "X" refers to the horizontal axis.

•	Click the Reflect In Y button to flip the arrowhead horizontally on the line. The letter "Y" refers to the vertical axis.

 Related Topics


Deleting line-ending shapes

You can delete arrowheads or line-ending shapes.

To delete arrowheads or line-ending shapes

1.	Select a line or curve with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen Dialog.

3.	Choose an arrowhead or line-ending shape.

4.	Under the arrowhead that you want to edit, click Options, Delete.

 Related Topics


Importing, exporting, and OLE


Overview: Importing, exporting, and OLE
Importing, exporting, and OLE

Importing/exporting and OLE (Object Linking and Embedding) are both ways of exchanging information between applications. The difference between them is the method by which the information is exchanged. When you import or export a file, it must be converted to a format that can be understood by the application in which it is to be placed. This means that you must have a special filter installed on your computer for each different file format. When you use OLE, you don't need to worry about filters or file formats. As long as all the applications involved support OLE, information can be freely exchanged.

 More Detailed Information


Importing and exporting files


Overview: Importing and exporting files
Importing and exporting files (page 1 of 2)

The Import and Export filters are translators that stand between applications, accommodating a two-way communication channel.

File formats

Data in a computer file can be stored using several methods. The method that any one file uses is known as its file format. Different types of files, such as bitmap, vector, sound, text, etc., use different formats. Formats are frequently referred to by the extension that is added to the file when saving it in that format, e.g., .CDR, .BMP, .TIF, .EPS, .JPG, etc.

Sort Type

If you want to sort the extension in the Files Of Type or Save As Type list box, Sort Type specifies the sorting order of these files.

MRU list

The File Name list box has a Most Recently Used (MRU) list box. At first the MRU list will be empty. Once you select a file and perform the Open/Save operation, the selected file is saved into the MRU list. The MRU list can contain no more than five items at a time.

Native file formats

When you save a file in a graphics application, the file is saved in the native file format, or the proprietary format created specifically for the application. For example, the Corel PHOTO-PAINT native file format is .CPT. CorelDRAW has two native file formats: .CDR and .CMX. These are different from generic formats, like .TXT, which are not associated with any specific application.

Color depth

Color depth (also called bit depth) refers to the number of colors that can be supported in a file. To determine the number of color values a given bit depth can produce calculate 2 raised to the power of the bit depth. For example, an 8-bit depth produces 2 to the power of 8, or 256, colors. A grayscale image is an 8-bit file, with 256 increments between black and white. Files that support a higher color depth are larger.

When you save or export a file, you can often specify the image's color depth. If you have only a few colors in your original image, saving to a higher color depth (e.g., 16 color to 256 color) should produce an image whose colors are very similar to the original image. However, if your original image has many colors, and you convert it to a lower color depth (e.g., 24-bit color to 256-color), the file creates a palette of colors and uses combinations of these colors to simulate the original color in the image. The colors in the palette depend on the colors in the original image.

Different applications support different color depths. As well, some file formats support only certain numbers of colors. When choosing a file format to use when saving a file, you should consider any color limitations of the file format and the application you'll be using with the file. For example, the .GIF format, used commonly for Internet graphics, only supports up to 256 colors. The native Corel file formats (.CDR, .CMX, .CPT) support all color depths.

 Notes

•	Whenever you are exchanging information with another application, ensure that you have the correct filter installed. When you custom install your Corel application, make sure you add the filter you need to the list of active filters.

•	A file format that supports a large number of colors may not necessarily support all color depths that are below its maximum bit depth. For example, a format may support 24-bit color, but not black and white.

•	Sort Type, Default does not sort file extensions. It is a order read from an INI file.

 Click here to see the next page.

 Related Topics


Importing and exporting files (page 2 of 2)

Import/Export filters

To move files from one program to another you often have to convert the files to a format that the receiving program can read. Import/Export filters are programs that do such conversions. For example, to import a CorelDRAW image into Corel PHOTO-PAINT, the image must be converted from a vector file into bitmap format. When you select a file format in the Export dialog box of CorelDRAW, you are automatically activating the appropriate filter program to take care of the translation.

Corel applications contain filters for the file formats that you can import and export. Some example of filters provided with Corel applications are .TIF, .GIF. and .BMP.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Importing and opening files


Overview: Importing and opening files
Importing and opening files

The Import and Open commands let you open files in different formats. Both the Import and Open Drawing dialog boxes let you choose the drive and folder where the file is stored. To display only those files with the extension you have specified, you can choose that extension from the Files Of Type list box.

Import dialog box options

The Import dialog box contains options that let you: control how bitmaps are imported, import a portion of an image, resample an image, suppress filter dialogs, detect watermarks, combine multi-layer bitmaps, apply an embedded ICC profile, maintain layers and pages, and extract an embedded ICC profile.

When you import a bitmap, you can choose to link the bitmap externally or link to the high resolution file for output using OPI (Open Prepress Interface.) Enabling the Link To High Resolution File For Output Using OPI option lets you insert a low-resolution version of a .TIF or .CT bitmap while maintaining a link to the high resolution original. OPI is a method that positions high-resolution bitmaps on the printed page by using low-resolution replicas. A high-resolution version is kept on file and a low-resolution equivalent is created. The low-resolution image is imported into your document and used for position only (FPO). Working with FPO images keeps your document size smaller and reduces the time needed to redraw the screen. When you send your artwork back to the service bureau for final imaging to film, your high-resolution files are positioned in place of the FPO images. The final product is a high-resolution output. You can size, rotate, move, or PowerClip the imported low-resolution image, however, you cannot apply effects from the Effects or Bitmaps menu to the image.

Enabling the Link Bitmap Externally option lets you import the selected bitmap and maintain a link to the original. This means that any changes that are made to the source file can be updated in the imported image.

Choosing Resample from list box to the right of the Files Of Type list box brings up the Resample dialog box that lets you add pixels to or subtract pixels from a bitmap image. Resampling changes the amount of information in an image and can involve changes to resolution or dimensions. You can resample the image down (downsample) which reduces the number of pixels, eliminates unusable detail and reduces the file size.

Choosing Crop from the list box brings up the Crop Image dialog box that lets you select the exact area and size of the image you want to keep.

Enabling the Check For Watermark option alerts you when an image is encoded with a Digimarc watermark. The presence of a Digimarc watermark indicates that there is a copyright claim on the file. The watermarks provide a mechanism for you to contact the creator about the image or one like it.

Enabling the Suppress Filter Dialog option lets you bypass the dialog box that contains import options for the selected filter. Instead, the Filter Manager uses the default settings. Only some filters, such as the .PCD filter, produce dialogs.

Enabling the Combine Multi-Layer Bitmap option lets you import bitmaps that contain multiple layers. This means that when you import a multi-layer .CPT or .PSD file all the multiple bitmap layers will not be grouped together, but will be flattened into a single bitmap.

Enabling the Apply Embedded ICC Profile option lets you apply an embedded International Color Consortium (.ICC) profile to your imported file. The ICC has defined a standard format for color profiles. Corel's color management system uses these ICC profiles. Embedding an ICC profile ensures color consistency when transporting files between applications. Corel is able to support the embedding of ICC profiles in CPT, CDR, TIFF, JPEG, PICT and EPS files.

Enabling the Maintain Layers And Pages option lets you open the selected file and maintain the pages and layers contained in the file. The Corel .CMX file format gives you this option.

Enabling the Extract Embedded ICC Profile option lets you save an embedded International Color Consortium (.ICC) from a selected file, to the color directory where the application was installed. The file will have the same name as the original file, but will be saved with Image Color Matching (.ICM) extension.

 Related Topics


Overview: Open dialog box vector files option
Open dialog box vector files option

The Open dialog box contains the option that lets you open the vector file formats that support multiple pages and layers. These vector formats give you the option to maintain the pages and layers when you import the file. Also you will have the option to embed or extract a ICC profile.

Enabling the Maintain Layers And Pages option lets you open the selected file and maintain the pages and layers contained in the file. The Corel .CMX file format gives you this option.

Enabling the Apply Embedded ICC Profile option lets you apply an embedded International Color Consortium (.ICC) profile to your imported file. The ICC has defined a standard format for color profiles. Corel's color management system uses these ICC profiles. Embedding an ICC profile ensures color consistency when transporting files between applications. Corel is able to support the embedding of ICC profiles in CPT, CDR, TIFF, JPEG, PICT and EPS files.

Enabling the Extract Embedded ICC Profile option lets you save a embedded International Color Consortium (.ICC) from a selected file, to the color directory where the application was installed. The file will have the same name as the original file, but will be saved with Image Color Matching (.ICM) extension. The ICC has defined a standard format for color profiles. Corel's color management system uses these ICC profiles.

 Related Topics


Importing bitmap files

You can import bitmap files using the Import command. When you import a bitmap image, CorelDRAW gives you the option to link the original to the imported image. Other bitmap options include detecting watermarks, resampling, combining multi-layer bitmaps, suppressing filter dialog, applying and extracting embedded ICC profiles, maintaining layers and pages, and cropping the image as you open it.

To import a bitmap file

1.	Click File, Import.

2.	Choose the drive and folder of the file you want to import from the Look In list box.

3.	Click the filename.

4.	Choose a bitmap filter from the Files Of Type list box.

5.	Click the Import button.

To link a bitmap externally

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To import a bitmap file" procedure.

2.	Enable the Link Bitmap Externally check box.

To link to a high-resolution file for OPI (only available for .TIF or .CT files)

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To import a bitmap file" procedure.

2.	Choose .TIF or .CT from the Files Of Type list box.

3.	Enable the Link To High Resolution File For Output Using OPI check box.

To resample an image while importing

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To import a bitmap file" procedure.

2.	Choose Resample from the list box that appears beside the Files Of Type list box.

3.	Click the Import button.

4.	Do one of the following:

•	Type values to the size you want in the Width and Height boxes.

•	Type the percentage by which you want to downsample the image in the Percentage boxes.

5.	Choose a unit type from the Units list box.

6.	In the Resolution section, change the values in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes to alter the resolution of the imported image.

To crop an image while importing

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To import a bitmap file" procedure.

2.	Choose Crop from the list box that appears beside the Files Of Type list box.

3.	Click the Import button.

4.	Do one of the following:

•	Type a value in the Top box to specify the number of pixels (or the unit of measurement displayed in the Units box) that you want to remove from the top of the image. Then type a value in the Left box to specify the number of pixels you want to remove from the left edge of the image.

•	Type a value in the Width box to specify the width of the area of the image you want to keep and type a value in the Height box to specify the height of the area you want to keep then drag the selection box in the Preview window to move the selection area.

5.	Choose a unit type from the Units list box.

To check for watermark while importing

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To import a bitmap file" procedure.

2.	Enable the Check For Watermark check box.

To suppress filter dialog while importing

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To import a bitmap file" procedure.

2.	Enable the Suppress Filter Dialog check box.

To combine a multi-layer bitmap while importing

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To import a bitmap file" procedure.

2.	Enable the Combine Multi-Layer Bitmap check box. The multi-layer bitmap check box will remain disabled until you select a bitmap file type that contains multiple layers (i.e., .CPT, .PSD file).

To maintain layers and pages while importing

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To import a bitmap file" procedure.

2.	Enable the Maintain Layers and Pages check box.

To apply an embedded ICC profile while importing

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To import a bitmap file" procedure.

2.	Enable the Apply Embedded ICC Profile check box.

To extract an embedded ICC profile while importing

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To import a bitmap file" procedure.

2.	Enable the Extract Embedded ICC Profile check box.

 Notes

•	When you import 16-color bitmaps in CorelDRAW, they are automatically converted to 256 colors.

•	You can only choose lower values for the width, height and resolution.

•	If you are importing a low resolution .TIF or .CT file created using OPI (Open Prepress Interface), you must enable the Link To High Resolution File For Output Using OPI check box.

 Tips

•	Enable the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box to maintain the original ratio of height to width or the Identical Values check box to keep the Horizontal and Vertical resolution values the same.

 Related Topics


Opening vector files

When you Import a vector file you are given the option of maintaining layers and pages information contained within the image. Other options include being able to extract and apply an Embedded ICC Profile while importing image.

The vector file format is effective because it allows you to import and view vector based images without any loss in original quality or format.

To maintain layers and pages when importing

1	Click File, Import.

2.	Choose the drive and folder where the file is restored from the Look In list box.

3.	Click a filename from the list.

4.	Choose a vector filter from the Files Of Type box.

5	Enable the Maintain Layers And Pages When Importing check box.

To apply an embedded ICC profile while importing

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To maintain layers and pages when importing" procedure.

2.	Enable the Apply Embedded ICC Profile check box.

To extract an embedded ICC profile while importing

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To maintain layers and pages when importing" procedure.

2.	Enable the Extract Embedded ICC Profile check box.

 Related Topics


Adding clipart

CorelDRAW comes with a large selection of ready-to-use clipart images and symbols that can be added to your drawing. If you want to browse through the collection of clipart, you can either look through the Clipart manual, or use the Scrapbook. The Scrapbook is a Property Bar window that lets you browse the folders that store the extensive collections of clipart.

To add clipart from the CD-ROM

1.	Place the CD-ROM in your CD-ROM drive.

2.	Click File, Open.

3.	Choose CorelDRAW (CDR) from the Files Of Type list box.

4.	Choose the CD-ROM drive from the Look In list box.

5.	Double-click the Clipart folder.

6.	Double-click a category.

The category name appears at the top of each page in the Clipart manual.

7.	Enable the Preview button to see a thumbnail version of the image before you open it.

8.	Click a filename and click the Open button.

 Related Topics


Exporting and saving files in nonnative file formats


Overview: Exporting and saving files in nonnative file formats
Exporting and saving files in nonnative file formats

If you want to save a file in a nonnative format, you must use the Export or Save As command to convert it to that file format. Both the Export and Save As Drawing dialog boxes let you choose the drive and folder where you wish to store your file. In CorelDRAW, use the Save As command to access the vector filters. Use the Export command to access the bitmap filters, the RTF format, and word-processing file formats, in addition to the vector filters. The Export dialog box lets you choose to export files as compressed or uncompressed for file formats that support this feature.

Save As files dialog box options

The Save As Drawing dialog box gives you options such as saving files in previous CorelDRAW versions or with different thumbnail formats. You also can control no white space, special characters, choose to embed fonts using TrueDoc, or embed an ICC profile.

Enabling the Embed Fonts Using TrueDoc check box ensures that the fonts in a drawing can be viewed on a system that does not have those fonts installed on it.

Enabling the No White Space, Special Characters check box allows you to replace white space in filenames with an underscore. Other special characters will be replaced by characters suitable for Web-based filenames.

Enabling the Embed ICC Profile check box allows you to save an embedded Internal Color Consortium (.ICC) profile as part of your file. The ICC has defined a standard format for color profiles. Corel's color management system uses these ICC profiles. By embedding an ICC profile to the file, it ensures color consistency when transporting files between applications. Corel is able to support embedded ICC profiles in CPT, CDR, TIFF, JPEG, PICT, and EPS file formats.

Exporting files dialog box options

The Export dialog box contains options that let you suppress filter dialog and choose to export files as compressed or uncompressed. It also lets you use the Export command to access the bitmap filters, the RTF format, and word-processing file formats, in addition to the vector filters. You can also embed an ICC profile, and control no white space, special characters in your filename.

Enabling the Suppress Filter Dialog check box allows you to bypass the dialog box that contains import options for the selected filter. Instead, the Filter manager uses the default settings.

Enabling the No White Space, Special Characters check box allows you to replace white space in filenames with an underscore. Other special characters will be replaced by characters suitable for web based file names.

Enabling the Embed ICC Profile check box allows you to save a embedded Internal Color Consortium (.ICC) profile as part of your file. The ICC has defined a standard format for color profiles. Corel's color management system uses these ICC profiles. By embedding an ICC profile to the file, it ensures color consistency when transporting files between applications. Corel is able to support embedded ICC profiles in CPT, CDR, TIFF, JPEG, PICT, and EPS file formats.

Choosing Compression type lets you choose to export files as compressed or uncompressed for file formats that support this feature.

 Related Topics


Exporting images in nonnative file formats

When you export or convert your image to another file format, you can open it directly in a destination application that supports that file format.

To export a file

1.	Open the file you want to export.

2.	Click File, Export.

3.	Choose an export format from the Files Of list box.

4.	Type a filename in the File Name list box.

The file extension for the format you've chosen is appended to your filename automatically.

5.	Click the Export button.

6.	Choose the options you want if a dialog box for the export format opens.

To suppress a filter while exporting

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To export a file" procedure.

2.	Enable the Suppress Filter check box.

3.	Click the Export button.

4.	Choose the options you want if a dialog box for the export format opens.

To choose no white spaces, special characters while exporting

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To export a file" procedure.

2.	Enable the No White Spaces, Special Characters check box.

3.	Click the Export button.

4.	Choose the options you want if a dialog box for the export format opens.

To embed an ICC profile while exporting

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To export a file" procedure.

2.	Enable the Embed ICC Profile check box.

3.	Click the Export button.

4.	Choose the options you want if a dialog box for the export format opens.

To choose a compression type while exporting

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To export a file" procedure.

2.	Choose a Compression type for file, if file format supports this feature.

3.	Click the Export button.

4.	Choose the options you want if a dialog box for the export format opens.

 Note

•	To use your CorelDRAW graphic in an application that supports object linking and embedding, consider linking the graphic to that application instead of exporting it. This way, if you change the graphic, CorelDRAW automatically updates the graphic in the other application when you save the source file in CorelDRAW. For more information on linking files see Linking OLE objects.

 Related Topics


Exporting selected objects and pages

In CorelDRAW, you can select specific objects in a document you want to export. You can also choose to export the current page only in a multipage-global document.

To export selected objects

1.	Select the objects in your drawing that you want to export.

2.	Click File, Export.

3.	In the Export dialog box, enable the Selected Only check box.

To export the current page in a multipage-global document

1.	Click File, Export.

2.	In the Export dialog box, enable the Export This Page Only check box (only available with certain file formats).

 Related Topics


Working with Kodak Photo CDs


Overview: Working with Kodak Photo CDs
Working with Kodak Photo CDs

When you open or import a Photo CD image, you can specify the resolution of the image and the image type, and you can correct color. A Photo CD (PCD) image is read only, which means that you cannot export to a PCD image.

Image Resolution

You can set the resolution of an image. Changing resolution to a higher setting requires more memory to load the image and makes the loading process longer.

Image type

Image type affects the quality of the printed image, and the amount of memory that is used in processing it. It is important to choose an Image type that meets your end requirements.

•	Choose 256 grayscale (8-bit) to create duotones and to print to a black-and-white laser printer.

•	Choose 256 colors (8-bit) to create nonphotographic images and to print to a low-end color printer (or if the system's memory is low).

•	Choose 24-bit color to create high-quality photographic color images, to print to an RGB or CMY printer, and to print color separations.

For more information about the options included in the Image Type dialog box, use the What's This? online Help button.

Color correction

Color correction is available to you when you open a Photo CD image. This option will let you manually adjust the color tints, brightness, saturation and contrast of your image.

You can change the tonal range in the image by using the brightness, contrast, and saturation sliders. The brightness slider shifts all pixel values up or down the tonal range. Changing the brightness lightens or darkens all colors equally. The contrast slider sets the distance between the lightest and darkest pixels. Increasing the saturation strengthens the purity of your images color. You can also alter the amount of red, green, and blue tint in an image by moving the slider for each color.

 Related Topics


Opening Photo CD Images

The PCD dialog box lets you specify resolution, image type, and apply color correction to a Kodak Photo CD image before you import it into CorelDRAW or Corel PHOTO-PAINT. The PCD dialog box opens only if you disable Suppress Filter Dialog check box in the Import An Image From Disk dialog box.

To open a Photo CD image

1.	Do one of the following:

•	Click File, Open.

•	Click File, Import.

2.	Choose the drive and folder of the file you want to open or import from the Look In list box.

3.	Click the filename, then click the Open button.

To choose the resolution of an image

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To open a Photo CD image" procedure.

2.	Choose the resolution you want for your image from the Resolution list box.

To choose the image type

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To open a Photo CD image" procedure.

2.	Choose the image type you want from the Image Type list box.

To adjust color in a Kodak Photo CD image

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To open a Photo CD image" procedure.

2.	Do any of the following:

•	Choose the amount you want the Red, Green, and Blue tint adjusted in your image, by adjusting their individual sliders.

•	Choose the brightness level you want in your image, by adjusting the Brightness slider.

•	Choose the degree of saturation you want in your image, by adjusting the Saturation slider.

•	Choose the degree of contrast you want in your image, by adjusting the Contrast slider.

 Notes

•	The scene balance adjustment is made by the photofinisher at the time the original image is scanned and placed on the Photo CD disk. Enable the Subtract Scene Balance check box to remove the adjustments.

•	A monitor's gamut is the range of color it can display. Enable the Show Colors Out Of Gamut check box, so the out-of-gamut pixels are rendered as pure red or pure blue. By doing this, you can identify out-of-gamut areas of the image and adjust accordingly.


Working with Encapsulated Postscript


Overview: Working with Encapsulated Postscript
Working with Encapsulated Postscript

When you export with a Encapsulated Postscript (.EPS) file format, you can specify an image header, user name, trapping, maintain a OPI link, set fountain steps, as well as apply color management to your .EPS image before exporting it. You can also create an optional bitmap image (thumbnail), which you can use to preview the image when you import or open it. You can also specify settings for exporting text, compatibility, bounding boxes, and compressing your bitmap image. The .EPS file format is supported by most illustrations and page-layout applications.

Image Header

Image Header lets you choose options that you can apply to your .EPS file before you export it.

You can include a bitmap or vector preview included in the file header. The preview is used as the thumbnail image in the Preview window when you open or import the image. You can choose between a vector (WMF) or a bitmap (TIFF) preview format when you are exporting your file. You can also set the color depth and resolution of an image. A higher resolution setting requires more memory to load the image and makes the loading process longer.

Color Management

Color management lets you export your file with the colors defined in the current printer's profile, or you can use a Composite or Separations printer profile that you have selected for your printer.

Export text As

Export Text As lets you set the format in which you want to export the text in your image.

You can convert the text in your image to curves, or you can send text as editable characters. Converting text to curves lets you manipulate individual nodes to change the shape of each character. If the text you are using will not be available when you print the image on another computer, the text might print incorrectly. You can also include PostScript font information with your file.

Send bitmaps As

Send Bitmap As effects the color mode used when you print your file. It is important to choose a color mode that meets your end requirements. You can choose the following color modes:

•	CMYK [image] a color mode composed of cyan ©, magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K). In this color mode, color values are expressed as percentages. A value of 100 for an ink means that it is applied at full saturation. This color mode is used in most full-color commercial printing.

•	RGB [image] Corel RGB color space is used as a standard by Corel graphics software.

•	Grayscale [image] a color mode that displays images using 256 shades of gray. Each color is defined as a value between 0 and 255, where 0 is darkest (black) and 255 is lightest (white).

Maintain OPI Links

Maintain OPI Links lets you use low resolution images as placeholders for the high resolution images that appear in your final work. The low-resolution image is imported into your documents and used for position only (FPO). Working with FPO images keeps your document size smaller and reduces the time needed to redraw the screen.

Auto Increase Fountain Steps

Auto Increase Fountain Steps automatically increases the number of steps used to create fountain fills. This option automatically sets the space required to blend your colors most efficiently on the output device. Use this option to reduce banding.

Fountain Steps

Fountain Steps optimizes the publishing of fountain fills by increasing or decreasing the number of fountain steps. By default, Corel displays each object with the same number of fountain steps, making small objects seem more detailed than larger ones. You can increase the number of fountain steps for fills that require more steps and decrease the number of steps for fountain fills that are too complex. This option sets the fountain fill for the entire file, not for individual objects in the file. A low number of steps prints faster, but the transition between shades may be coarse. You can set a number for Fountain Steps from 1 to 256.

Compatibility

Compatibility lets you set the PostScript levels at which to export your EPS file. You can set the PostScript level to 1, 2, or 3. By default the PostScript level is set at 1. Before increasing the PostScript level, verify that your printer supports that PostScript level.

Bitmap Compression

Bitmap Compression reduces the size of a .EPS file by compressing bitmaps. Bitmaps using JPEG compression have an adjustable quality scale, ranging from 2 to 255. You can adjust the bitmap from a high quality of 2 to a low quality of 255. The higher the image quality, the larger the file size.

User Name

User Name lets you add a user name to your .EPS file header.

Trapping

Trapping lets you maintain current print settings on your image. You can also create a color trap, assign the minimum font size to which auto-spreading is applied, or assign a auto-spread outline to your image. The higher the color, the greater the percentage of the maximum trap value. The darker the color, the smaller the percentage of the maximum trap value.

Bounding box

Bounding Box lets you exactly align a rectangular box to enclose the page or all the selected items on that page.

You can also set the amount by which the bleed extends beyond the edge of the printed area, use crop marks as alignment aids, or have a number shown with decimals.

 Notes

•	The Bitmap Compression check box remains disabled until you choose a PostScript level that supports this feature.

•	If you output all objects as gray scale objects, no color profiles are available. If you output objects as colors, composite color profiles are available. If you output colors as CMYK, composite or separations color profiles are available.

 Related Topics


Exporting a .EPS image

This EPS Export dialog box lets you specify an image header, user name, trapping, maintain OPI links, set fountain steps, and apply color management to a .EPS image before you export it from your Corel application. You can also specify settings for exporting text, bounding boxes, bitmap compression and color mode. The .EPS dialog box automatically displays when you export a .EPS image.

To export a .EPS image

1.	Open the file you want to export.

2.	Click File, Export.

3.	Choose the .EPS format from the Save As Type list box.

4.	Type a filename in the File Name list box.

The file extension for the format you've chosen is appended to your filename automatically.

5.	Click the Export button.

To specify an image header for a .EPS file

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the "To export a .EPS image" procedure.

2.	Click the General page tab.

3.	Enable any of the following buttons:

•	Include Header [image] lets you include a bitmap or vector preview included in the file header

•	Format [image] lets you choose between a vector (WMF) or a bitmap (TIFF) preview format

•	Type [image] lets you choose the color depth of the preview you are saving with your file

•	Resolution [image] lets you set the resolution of the preview you are saving with your file

To choose a color management option

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the "To export a .EPS image" procedure.

2.	Click the General page tab.

3.	Enable any of the following buttons:

•	Use Printer Color Profile [image] lets you export your file using the colors defined in the current printer's profile

•	Composite Printer Profile [image] lets you use the profile you have chosen for your composite printer

•	Separations Printer Profile [image] lets you use the profile you have chosen for your separations printer

To specify how to export text for a .EPS file

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the "To export a .EPS image" procedure.

2.	Click the General page tab.

3.	Enable any of the following buttons:

•	Curves [image] lets you export text as curves

•	Text [image] lets you export text as editable characters

•	Include Fonts [image] lets you include PostScript font information with your file

To select a color mode for a .EPS file

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the "To export a .EPS image" procedure.

2.	Click the General page tab.

3.	Choose a Color Mode from the Send As Bitmap list box.

To maintain OPI link on a .EPS file

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the "To export a .EPS image" procedure.

2.	Click the General page tab.

3.	To use low resolution images as place holders for high resolution images, enable the Maintain OPI Links check box.

To auto increase fountain steps on a .EPS file

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the "To export a .EPS image" procedure.

2.	Click the General page tab.

3.	To automatically increase the number of steps used to create fountain fills, enable the Auto Increase Fountain Steps check box.

To increase or decrease fountain steps on a .EPS file

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the "To export a .EPS image" procedure.

2.	Click the General page tab.

3.	Use the up arrow and down arrow keys to increase or decrease the Fountain steps.

To choose a compatibility option

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the "To export a .EPS image" procedure.

2.	Click the Advanced page tab.

3.	Choose a PostScript level from the Compatibility list box.

To apply bitmap compression to a .EPS file

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the "To export a .EPS image" procedure.

2.	Click the Advanced page tab.

3.	Do any of the following:

•	Use JPEG Compression [image] lets you reduce the size of a .EPS file by compressing bitmaps

•	Quality Compression [image] lets you adjust the compression quality scale of your bitmap image

To apply a user name to a .EPS file

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the "To export a .EPS image" procedure.

2.	Click the Advanced page tab.

3.	Type a user name in the User Name box.

To apply a trapping option to a .EPS file

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the "To export a .EPS image" procedure.

2.	Click the Advanced page tab.

3.	Do any of the following:

•	Preserve Document Overprint Settings [image] lets you maintain current settings on objects

•	Always Overprint Black [image] lets you create a color trap by causing any objects that contain 95 percent or more black to overprint any underlying objects

•	Auto-Spreading [image] lets you create a color trap by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as its fill, and having it overprint underlying objects

•	Maximum [image] lets you specify the amount of spread that the Auto-Spreading option assigns to an object, along with objects color

•	Text Above [image] lets you specify the minimum font size to which Auto-Spreading is applied to

To apply a bounding box to a .EPS file

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the "To export a .EPS image" procedure.

2.	Click the Advanced page tab.

3.	Enable any of the following buttons:

•	Objects [image] lets you align the bounding box exactly to the objects in the file

•	Page [image] lets you align the bounding box to page extents

•	Bleed Area [image] lets you set the amount the bleed extends beyond edge of the area to be printed

•	Crop Marks [image] lets you use crop marks as alignment aids when you trim the print output to its final size

•	Floating Point Numbers [image] lets you have a number with decimals

 Related Topics


Object linking and embedding


Overview: Object linking and embedding
Object linking and embedding

OLE is a method of exchanging information between applications. OLE lets you create objects (e.g., pictures, charts, and text) in one application, then place these objects in other applications. When you double-click the objects, the application that created them is launched letting you edit the objects. For example, you can launch your favorite spreadsheet program from within CorelDRAW, create a new chart, and display it. You can also use OLE to import objects you have already made in other applications into CorelDRAW. Objects that are placed into an application using OLE are called OLE objects.

For OLE to work, the application used to create the OLE object and the application in which you want to place it must both support OLE functionality. CorelDRAW supports all OLE features.

Server and client applications

Whenever you use OLE, two applications are involved: a server application and a client application. A server application is used to create and edit an OLE object (e.g., picture, chart, text). A client application is the application in which you place an OLE object after you create it. For example, if you create a chart in a spreadsheet program and use OLE to place it in CorelDRAW, then the spreadsheet program is the server application and CorelDRAW is the client. Many applications, including CorelDRAW, can act as either server or client applications, but some can't. If you are uncertain about whether an application is capable of performing as a server or a client, see its documentation.

Linking and embedding

OLE objects can be either linked or embedded in client applications.

A linked OLE object is a complete file, or portion of a file, which maintains a link to the source file when it is placed in a client application. The appearance of the linked OLE object in the client application is controlled by the information stored in this external source file. When the source file is changed and saved in the server application, the linked OLE object updates to reflect these changes.

An embedded OLE object is completely contained in the client application file; therefore, there isn't a link to an external file. When you create a new object by launching a server application from CorelDRAW, the object is an embedded object.

To edit an OLE object you double-click it. A linked OLE object will launch the server application outside the client application. An embedded OLE object is edited "in place", meaning the controls of the server application appear in the client application.

The Clipboard

The Clipboard is a temporary storage area used to hold information. You can cut or copy an object from a server application onto the Clipboard and paste it into a client application. This object becomes an OLE object. If you simply copy and paste an object it becomes an embedded OLE object. You must use the client application's Paste Special command to create a linked OLE object using the Clipboard.

When you use the Clipboard, the object you paste will not always become an OLE object. For example, when pasted, plain text from an ASCII text editor becomes CorelDRAW text. If you want complete control of the objects you paste, use the Paste Special command.

Dragging

Dragging is the easiest way to create OLE objects. You can select an object with the mouse in a server application, drag it to a client application, and it automatically becomes an OLE object. If you simply drag an object it becomes an embedded OLE object. If you hold down CTRL + SHIFT while dragging an object, it becomes a linked OLE object.

You can drag a file from the Windows 95 desktop into CorelDRAW. The application will try to import or open the file before it tries to create an OLE object. If you want more control, use the right mouse button to drag. When you release the mouse button, a menu opens that lets you specify how the object is to be placed.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Overview: Limitations of using OLE objects
Limitations of using OLE objects

In most cases, you can only edit OLE objects using the server application. If you attempt to change an OLE object using CorelDRAW, note the following limitations.

OLE objects cannot:

•	be rotated

If the OLE object is placed in a group or a PowerClip, it can be rotated, but this may produce unexpected results.

•	be skewed

•	be cloned

•	have any of the effects in the Effects menu applied to them, except for PowerClip

•	be combined, welded, intersected or trimmed with other objects

There are a limited number of ways that you can change an OLE object without actually editing it using the server application.

OLE objects can

•	be sized and moved

•	be copied

Copies of linked objects are linked to the same file as the original object.

•	be placed into PowerClip containers

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Linking (OLE)


Overview: Linking (OLE)
Linking (OLE)

Linking is one of two ways to place OLE objects in client applications. The other way is embedding. When you link an OLE object to a client application file, you create a connection between the OLE object (the object that appears in the client application) and a source file (the file you create in the server application). When the source file is altered, the object in the client application updates to reflect this change. The object updates automatically when you save the source file unless you specifically choose to update the OLE link manually. If you want to change the content or appearance of a linked OLE object, you must make the changes in the source file. Consequently, when you give a file containing linked OLE objects to someone else, it is important to include the source files.

Linking is most useful when you want to use the same OLE object several times in the same file or in many different files. To change every instance of the OLE object, you only have to change the source file.

Editing linked objects

When you want to edit a linked OLE object, you must edit the source file in the server application. You can launch the server application and open the source file directly, or you can launch the server application from within the client application by double-clicking the OLE object. The source file must be saved for any changes to appear in the client application.

 Related Topics


Linking OLE objects

Linking is a way of placing OLE objects in client applications. Linking is most useful when you want to use the same OLE object several times in the same file or in many different files. To change every instance of the OLE object, you only have to change the source file.

To insert a linked OLE object into a file

1.	Click Edit, Insert New Object.

2.	Enable the Create From File button.

3.	Click the Browse button, and choose the file you want to link.

4.	Click the Insert button.

5.	Enable the Link check box.

6.	Enable the Display As Icon check box if you want the OLE object to appear as an icon instead of as it appears in the source file.

To link an object using the Clipboard

1.	In the server application select the objects you want to link (make sure the file is saved first).

2.	Click Edit, Copy.

3.	In the client application, open the file that is to contain the linked objects.

4.	Click Edit, Paste Special.

5.	Enable the Paste Link button.

To link an object by dragging

1.	In the client application, open the file that is to contain the linked objects.

Make sure the server application and client application windows are visible at the same time.

2.	In the server application, select the objects you want to link.

3.	Drag the selected objects to the open file window in the client application.

4.	Hold down CTRL + SHIFT, then release the mouse.

 Tips

•	With some applications, if you drag using the right mouse button, a menu offering several options appears before the object is placed.

•	You might choose to insert a new OLE object as an icon if you want to let people open the source file from the client application without actually displaying the source file.

 Related Topics


Editing linked OLE objects

When you want to edit a linked OLE object, you must edit the source file in the server application.

To edit a linked object

1.	Select the OLE object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Edit, Linked Object, Edit.

The server application is automatically launched and the linked file is opened.

3.	Edit the object as required.

 Note

•	The exact text of the Edit menu item changes depending on the object type. For example, if the selected OLE object is a document from a word processor, the Edit menu item reads Document Object.

 Tip

•	Double-clicking an OLE object also launches the server application.

 Related Topics


Breaking an OLE link

If you don't want to update a linked OLE object again, you can break the OLE link. Once an OLE link is broken, it cannot be restored and you will not be able to edit the OLE object.

To break an OLE link

1.	Select the OLE object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Edit, Links.

3.	Click the Break Link button.

 Related Topics


Changing the source for a linked file

One way to change the content of a linked OLE object is to change its source file. If the new source file is the same file type as the original source file, then changing the source might be a simple way to change the content of the OLE object without changing its position. For example, you can substitute one image for another. However, if the selected OLE object is only a portion of a file, or if the new source file is a different type of file, changing the source file may have unexpected results.

To change the source for a linked file

1.	Select the OLE object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Edit, Links.

3.	Click Change Source.

4.	Browse to the folder where the file is located.

5.	Double-click the filename.

6.	Click the Close button.

 Related Topics


Manually updating OLE links

If you do not want a linked OLE object to update when the source file is updated, you can set it to update manually. Once an object is set for manual updating, it will not update automatically unless you set it to do so.

To update linked files manually

1.	Click Edit, Links.

2.	Select the OLE objects from the Links list box that you want to manually update.

If you only want to update one object, select it before clicking Edit, Links and it will automatically be highlighted.

3.	Enable the Manual button if the selected objects are set to update automatically.

4.	Click the Update Now button.

5.	Click the Close button.

To update linked files automatically

•	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure, and click the Automatic button.

 Related Topics


Embedding (OLE)


Overview: Embedding (OLE)
Embedding (OLE)

Embedding is one of two ways to place OLE objects in client applications The other way is linked When you embed an OLE object in a client application file, that file contains all the information required to edit and display the OLE object. No source file is required.

Editing embedded objects

When you edit an embedded OLE object, you use "in-place" editing. In-place editing means that you edit an embedded OLE object without switching to the server application. Instead, all of the controls of the server application appear in the client application. You must have the server application installed on your computer to use in-place editing and the application must support this OLE feature.

 Related Topics


Embedding OLE objects

Embedding is a way of placing OLE objects in client applications.

You can create new OLE objects by launching applications from within CorelDRAW or you can insert already existing files into your documents. New objects are always embedded objects and cannot be linked.

To create a new OLE object

1.	Click Edit, Insert New Object.

2.	Choose the type of object you want to create from the Object Type list.

3.	Enable the Display As Icon check box if you want to see just an icon for your file instead of the file contents.

4.	Create your object once the server application is launched.

To embed an existing file

1.	Click Edit, Insert New Object.

2.	Enable the Create From File button.

3.	Click the Browse button, and select the file you want to embed.

4.	Click the Insert button.

5.	Disable the Link check box.

To embed an object using the Clipboard

1.	In the server application select the object you want to embed.

2.	Click Edit, Copy.

3.	In the client application, open the file in which you want to embed the object.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

To embed an object by dragging

1.	In the client application, open the file that is to contain the embedded objects.

Make sure the server and client application windows are visible at the same time.

2.	In the server application, select the objects you want to embed.

3.	Drag the selected objects into the client application file.

 Notes

•	Simply dragging deletes the object from the server application and moves it to the client application. If you want to copy the object, hold down CTRL then drag the object.

•	To return to CorelDRAW after editing an OLE object, click in the Drawing window of your CorelDRAW document.

•	If you enable the Display As Icon check box, the server application is launched outside of CorelDRAW instead of within CorelDRAW.

 Related Topics


Editing embedded OLE objects

To edit an embedded OLE object, you must use in-place editing (i.e., the controls of the server application become available in the client application)

To edit an embedded object

1.	Select the OLE object.

2.	Click Edit, Object, Edit.

Note that the exact text of the Edit menu item changes depending on the object type. For example, if the selected OLE object is a document from a word processor, the Edit menu item reads Document Object.

3.	Edit the objects as required.

 Tip

•	Double-clicking an OLE object also displays the server application's editing controls.

 Related Topics


Working with Asian, Arabic, or Hebrew text


Overview: Working with Asian, Arabic, or Hebrew text
Working with Asian, Arabic, or Hebrew text

If you are running CorelDRAW on an Asian, Arabic, or Hebrew operating system, you can take advantage of the Asian, Arabic, and Hebrew text formatting capabilities available with CorelDRAW.

Asian text

On Asian language versions of Microsoft Windows, CorelDRAW uses the operating system's Input Method Editor (IME) to let you add text using both Latin and Asian fonts. Since there are some special formatting considerations for Asian text, CorelDRAW includes some special features. You can, for example, choose either horizontal or vertical orientation for Asian Artistic or Paragraph Text. Since Asian languages use different rules for breaking text to a new line, CorelDRAW includes a comprehensive set of rules for breaking Asian text. You can use the default rules, customize the rules to suit your needs, or turn the rules off altogether.

Arabic or Hebrew text

If you are running CorelDRAW on an Arabic or Hebrew version of Microsoft Windows, you can add text using both Latin and Arabic or Hebrew fonts. Since Arabic and Hebrew are written right to left, CorelDRAW lets you mix Latin and Arabic or Hebrew text on a line. When you are using the Text tool, the text cursor displays an arrow indicating which mode or direction you are in. To switch between the two modes [image] left-to-right (Latin) and right-to-left (Arabic or Hebrew) [image] select the input language using the language indicator on the system taskbar.

 More Detailed Information


Working with Asian text


Overview: Working with Asian text
Working with Asian text

When you use CorelDRAW on an Asian language operating system, you can use the built-in IME to add text using Asian fonts. Since Asian text can be written both horizontally and vertically, CorelDRAW lets you choose an orientation for the text you type. With CorelDRAW, the default text orientation for Asian text is horizontal.

If you mix Latin and Asian text on a line, you can set the spacing to use between the two languages.

If you need to make changes to the font properties of one or both languages in a block of text, you can select the text and apply formatting changes selectively to one or both of the languages. Since Asian fonts also include the Latin alphabet, you can choose to apply Asian fonts to Latin text.

When you use the Text tool, the language you are using is controlled by the IME. To alternate between Latin and Asian text modes, you must use the appropriate IME command.

CorelDRAW includes an in-line IME that enhances the behavior of the IME available with the Korean and Japanese versions of Microsoft Windows. For example, when you insert Asian text in a block of Latin text using the Windows IME, the inserted text appears to overwrite the existing Latin text. The IME only inserts the text when you press ENTER. The CorelDRAW in-line IME lets you type the Asian text interactively. When you type, the inserted Asian text pushes the Latin text along the line and if necessary, the Latin text wraps to the next line. You can enable or disable the in-line IME from the Options dialog box.

Because Asian text has different rules for breaking from one line or page to another, CorelDRAW includes line-breaking rules for use with Asian text. For most Asian languages, a line of text can break between any two characters, with a few exceptions. Some characters cannot appear at the end of a line. These characters are referred to as "leading characters." Other characters [image] referred to as "following characters" [image] cannot appear at the beginning of a line. Still others [image] referred to as "overflow characters" [image] are not wrapped but are instead allowed to extend beyond the right or bottom margin.

You can enable or disable each of the rules as needed. You can also customize the rules by adding or removing characters from the lists of exceptions.

You type and format Asian Artistic and Paragraph text the same way you do Latin text. You can also apply the same effects you can apply to Latin text, such as fitting Asian text to a path or converting Asian text to curves. For information about formatting text, see "Working with text."

 Notes

•	Asian character input is only supported in CorelDRAW when using an Asian language (double byte) operating system. CorelDRAW does not support the use of plug-ins for the English language version of Microsoft Windows. Asian text features are available for Asian language versions of Windows 95, Windows 98, and Windows NT 4.

•	To add Asian text to your drawing, you must use an IME installed on your computer. To type Asian text, turn the IME on. To type Latin text, turn the IME off. For more information about using the IME, consult the manual for your IME.

•	To indicate the mode of the IME [image] Latin or Asian [image] the text cursor displays either a Latin or Asian character. If the IME is turned on (Asian mode), the cursor displays an Asian character. When the IME is turned off (Latin mode), the cursor displays a Latin character.

•	You must use the Asian fonts appropriate to your operating system. For instance, Chinese Simplified fonts will not work on a Japanese operating system.

 Related Topics


Setting defaults for Asian text

You can choose a default font to use when typing text in Asian mode. When you use the Text tool in Asian mode, the default Asian font appears in the Font list on the Text toolbar. If you want to use another Asian font, you can choose the font you want from the list.

You can choose either horizontal or vertical text orientation as the default text orientation for Asian text. If you want to change the text orientation for new or existing text, you can use the Horizontal or Vertical Text buttons on the Text toolbar.

You can also specify an inter-language space CorelDRAW uses to space Latin and Asian text on the same line. The inter-language space is based on a percentage of a normal space. For example, to separate Latin and Asian text by two spaces, type "200" in the Inter-Language list box.

To choose a default Asian font

1.	Click Text, Format Text.

2.	Click the Font tab.

3.	Choose a font from the Asian font list.

To choose a default text orientation for Asian text

1.	Click Text, Format Text.

2.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Horizontal text [image] displays text horizontally from left to right

•	Vertical text [image] displays text vertically from top to bottom

 Note

•	When you change the text orientation from horizontal to vertical, underlines become leftlines and overlines become rightlines.

To specify a spacing to use between Latin and Asian text

1.	Click Text, Format Text.

2.	Click the Space tab.

3.	Type a value in the Inter-Language list box.

 Related Topics


Formatting Asian text

When you type Artistic or Paragraph text, CorelDRAW uses a default Artistic or Paragraph text style. When you turn the IME on, CorelDRAW uses the font size, style, outline, and fill attributes of the default style but uses the default Asian font. You can change the font properties of an Artistic or Paragraph text object. If the text object includes both Asian and Latin text, you can choose to apply the changes to the Asian text, Latin text, or both. Since Asian fonts include Latin characters, you can choose to apply Asian fonts to Latin text.

To choose a text orientation for new text

1.	Click the Text tool.

2.	On the toolbar, click one of the following buttons:

•	Horizontal Text [image] displays text horizontally from left to right

•	Vertical Text [image] displays text vertically from top to bottom

To change the text orientation of a text object

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the Asian Artistic text or Paragraph text frame.

2.	On the toolbar, click one of the following buttons:

•	Horizontal Text [image] displays text horizontally from left to right

•	Vertical Text [image] displays text vertically from top to bottom

To change the font properties of a selected text object

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the Artistic or Paragraph text object you want to format.

If you want to format only a portion of the text object, select only the text you want to change.

2.	Click Text, format Text.

3.	Click the Font tab.

4.	Change the font properties.

5.	Choose one of the following from the Apply To list:

•	All Characters [image] applies the changes to both Latin and Asian text in the selection

•	Latin Characters [image] applies the changes to the Latin text only

•	Asian Characters [image] applies the changes to the Asian text only

 Note

•	Text orientation applies to the entire text object. You cannot apply a horizontal or vertical orientation to selected characters in one text object.

 Related Topics


Using Asian Line-breaking Rules

Since the rules for breaking text to a new line in Asian languages are different from those in Latin languages, CorelDRAW provides a specialized set of line-breaking rules for Asian text. Lines of Asian text will break between any two characters, with a number of exceptions. These exceptions are grouped under three types:

•	Leading characters [image] cannot appear at the end of a line. The line breaks either before the leading character or after the character following the leading character.

•	Following characters [image] cannot appear at the beginning of a line. The line breaks either after the character or before the character preceding the following character.

•	Overflow characters [image] can extend beyond the right or bottom margin in a line of text.

If you want to enforce one or more of the line-breaking rules, you must ensure that the rules you want are enabled. If you want to customize the rules to suit your needs, you can delete or add characters as necessary. You can reset the rules to the CorelDRAW default.

 Note

•	With CorelDRAW, the line-breaking rules are enabled by default.

To enable or disable line-breaking rules

1.	Click Text, Format Text.

2.	Click the Rules tab.

3.	Enable or disable any of the following check boxes:

•	Leading characters [image] ensures CorelDRAW does not break a line after any of the characters in the list

•	Following characters [image] ensures CorelDRAW does not break a line before any of the characters in the list

•	Overflow characters [image] ensures CorelDRAW allows the characters in the list to extend beyond the margin of the line

To add or remove characters from a line-breaking rule

1.	Click Text, Format Text.

2.	Click the Rules tab.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Type the characters you want to add to the rule in the appropriate box.

•	Delete a character from the appropriate box.

To reset a line-breaking rule to the default

1.	Click Text, Format Text.

2.	Click the Rules tab.

3.	Click the Default button beside the rule you want to reset.

 Related Topics


Using the CorelDRAW in-line IME

By default, CorelDRAW uses the IME installed on your computer. When you use this IME, the characters appear in the IME window as you type. The characters only appear in the text box when you press Enter. If you are running a Korean or Japanese version of Microsoft Windows, you can use the CorelDRAW In-line IME. When you use the in-line IME, the Asian text is inserted in the line as you type.

If you want to use the in-line IME, you must enable it.

To enable the CorelDRAW in-line IME

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Text.

3.	Enable the Enable Inline-IME check box.

 Related Topics


Working with Arabic or Hebrew text


Overview: Working with Arabic or Hebrew text
Working with Arabic or Hebrew text

When you use CorelDRAW on an Arabic or Hebrew operating system, you can switch your input language to add both Latin and Arabic/Hebrew text. CorelDRAW lets you format Paragraph text either left-to-right (Latin) or right-to left (Arabic or Hebrew).

If you need to make changes to the font properties of one or both languages in a block of text, you can select the text and apply formatting changes selectively to one or both of the languages.

When you use the Text tool, the language you are using is controlled by your operating system. To alternate between Latin and Arabic/Hebrew text modes, you must use either the language indicator on the system taskbar or the appropriate shortcut key combination. For more information about changing input languages on Microsoft Windows, consult your Windows manual.

 Note

•	To indicate the input language [image] Latin or Arabic/Hebrew [image] the text cursor displays a flag indicating the direction of the text. Latin text is always typed left to right, while Arabic/Hebrew text is always typed right to left. In Arabic/Hebrew mode, the cursor displays a left arrow. In Latin mode, the cursor displays a right arrow.

•	Arabic/Hebrew text features are available for Arabic/Hebrew versions of Windows 95, Windows 98, and Windows NT 4.

•	You must use the Arabic or Hebrew fonts appropriate to your operating system. For instance, Arabic fonts will not work on a Hebrew operating system.

 Related Topics


Formatting Arabic or Hebrew text

You can choose a default font to use when typing Arabic or Hebrew text. When you use the Text tool in Arabic/Hebrew mode, the default Arabic/Hebrew font appears in the Font list on the Text toolbar. If you want to use another Arabic/Hebrew font, you can choose the font you want from the list.

With CorelDRAW, you can choose to enter Paragraph text left-to-right (Latin) or right-to-left.

When you type Artistic or Paragraph text, CorelDRAW uses a default Artistic or Paragraph text style. When you choose Arabic or Hebrew as the input language, CorelDRAW uses the font size, style, outline, and fill attributes of the default style but uses the default Arabic/Hebrew font. You can change the font properties of an Artistic or Paragraph text object. If the selected text object includes both Arabic/Hebrew and Latin text, you can choose to apply the changes to the Arabic/Hebrew text, Latin text, or both.

CorelDRAW lets you fully justify Arabic text. When you use full justification, the Kashidah character is inserted between letters to elongate the connection between words. CorelDRAW also substitutes ligatures for all the ligature combinations supported by the Arabic/Hebrew version of Microsoft Windows. As well, CorelDRAW lets you type Arabic and Hebrew diacritical marks.

To choose a default Arabic/Hebrew font

1.	Click Text, Format Text.

2.	Click the Font tab.

3.	Choose a font from either the Arabic/Hebrew font list.

To change the font properties of a selected text object

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the Artistic or Paragraph text object you want to format.

If you want to format only a portion of the text object, select the text you want to change.

2.	Click Text, format Text.

3.	Click the Font tab.

4.	Change the font properties.

5.	Choose one of the following from the Apply To list:

•	All Characters [image] applies the changes to both Latin and Arabic/Hebrew text in the selection

•	Latin Characters [image] applies the changes to the Latin text only

•	Arabic/Hebrew Characters [image] applies the changes to the Arabic or Hebrew text only

To choose a default text direction for Paragraph text

1.	Click Text, Format Text.

2.	Click the Align tab.

3.	In the Direction section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Latin [image] to format text left-to-right

•	Arabic or Hebrew [image] to format text right-to-left

To change the text direction for existing Paragraph text

1.	Click the Text tool.

2.	Click in the Paragraph frame of the text you want to change direction

2.	Click the Align tab.

3.	In the Direction section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Latin [image] to format the paragraph left-to-right

•	Arabic or Hebrew [image] to format the paragraph right-to-left


Getting started


Overview: Getting started
Getting started

Understanding the flexible, intuitive features offered by CorelDRAW for setting up your drawings will make it easy for you to create a variety of documents, from individual graphics to newsletters, pamphlets, business cards and labels.

This chapter will help you start using CorelDRAW effectively. It describes how to create new drawings or open existing files, as well as how to save, close, archive, and back up documents. You will learn about the different options associated with these commands, and when to use them. Using these options properly will help you keep your files organized and find them faster.

Before you start creating drawings, you may want to know how to set up an effective working environment. This chapter contains instructions on setting up the Drawing Page, including page size, orientation, and background. It also tells you how add and remove pages, and how to navigate multipage documents.

You'll also want to take advantage of the tools offered by CorelDRAW for ensuring that objects are accurately drawn and placed. These include the rulers, grid, and guidelines.

It's a good idea to become familiar with the Scrapbook as an organizational tool. The Scrapbook is a Docker Window in which you can browse the folders that store files, clipart, photos, preset fills and outlines, and File Transfer Protocol (FTP) sites. The Scrapbook provides drag-and-drop access to these folders and sites. It also lets you organize, store, and access your own favorite designs, fills, and outlines.

The viewing and panning features of CorelDRAW let you view drawings in a variety of ways according to your needs. This chapter contains information on how to magnify or reduce your view, save specific views for future use, and pan quickly through multipage documents.

Finally, you'll learn how to view information about your computer and your documents, and how to turn CorelDRAW warning messages on and off.

 More Detailed Information


Creating and opening drawings


Overview: Creating and opening drawings
Creating and opening drawings

After you start CorelDRAW, you have several choices. In addition to opening the CorelDRAW tutorial or touring the features that are new for CorelDRAW 9, you can:

•	create a new drawing

•	open an existing drawing, even if it was created with a previous version of CorelDRAW

•	open the drawing you last worked on

•	create a new drawing from a template

For a type of document you create frequently, such as newsletters or greeting cards, it is a good idea to base your new drawing on a template. You can also scan images into CorelDRAW or acquire them from a digital camera.

For more information about templates, see "Working with Styles and Templates."

 Related Topics


Creating a new drawing

Creating a new drawing causes a blank Drawing Window to appear. This Drawing Window contains the styles in the default template, CORELDRW.CDT. If you're not planning to work with styles, you don't need to be concerned with the concept of styles and templates. For more information on styles and templates, see "Working with Styles and Templates."

To create a drawing

•	Click File, New.

 Tip

•	You can also create a new drawing by clicking the New button.

 Related Topics


Creating a new drawing based on a template

If there is a document type you create frequently, such as an advertising flyer, a brochure, or a newsletter, using a template will make creating your drawing easier. In CorelDRAW, the Template wizard guides you through the steps involved in creating a document based on a template. You can use one of the templates supplied with CorelDRAW, or create one of your own. For easy access to custom templates saved in previous versions of CorelDRAW, add the templates to the Template wizard. For more information, see "Working with styles and templates."

To create a drawing based on a template

1.	Insert the CorelDRAW CD-ROM which contains the templates.

2.	Click File, New From Template.

3.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	CorelDRAW Templates [image] to choose from a set of CorelDRAW templates

•	PaperDirect Templates, text and paper samples [image] to choose from a selection of PaperDirect text and paper templates

•	PaperDirect Templates, text only [image] to choose from a selection of PaperDirect text templates

4.	Click the Next button.

5.	Follow the instructions.

6.	Click the Finish button when you're satisfied with your choices.

To return to a previous option, click the Previous button.

 Tip

•	To preview the contents of a template, enable the Open With Contents check box to display its thumbnail.

 Related Topics


Opening a drawing

Opening a file in CorelDRAW is easy. CorelDRAW lets you view a thumbnail of the file you are about to open. This allows you to save time by ensuring you are opening the file you want.

To open a drawing

1.	Click File, Open.

2.	From the Look In list box choose the drive where the file is stored.

3.	Double-click the folder where the file is stored.

4.	Double-click the filename.

To view a thumbnail of a file before opening it

•	Enable the Preview check box in the Open dialog box.

 Notes

•	When you open a drawing, the bottom right corner of the Open Drawing dialog box provides information about the version of the file and the compression ratio with which it was last saved (e.g., 60% means the file was 60% smaller after saving).

•	If you try to open a drawing that is already open, and to which you have made changes, a message box appears asking if you want to revert to the saved version of the drawing. Click Yes to replace the open drawing with the saved version. Click No to keep the changes you made.

 Tip

•	You can also open files by clicking the Open button.

 Related Topics


Saving and closing drawings


Overview: Saving and closing drawings
Saving and closing drawings

CorelDRAW lets you save your files in the way that best suits your file management needs. You can save only the selected objects of a drawing, make a copy of a drawing by saving it with a different name, or save a drawing in a format that is compatible with an earlier version of CorelDRAW. There are also several vector formats you can choose from.

CorelDRAW offers advanced options that let you assign notes, keywords, and thumbnails so you can find your files more easily in future sessions. You can save fonts, textures, blends, and extrudes with the file, or save references to them. These references reduce the size of your file, making it faster to open and save.

Before you close an active file, CorelDRAW asks whether or not you wish to save it. You can also close specific viewing windows, and close all open files or views using a single command.

 Related Topics


Saving files

You can specify a new filename for your drawing and a location in which to store it. If you want to save only parts of your drawing, select and save them under a filename that you specify.

To save a new drawing

1.	Click File, Save As.

2.	From the Save In list box, choose the drive where you want to save the file.

3.	Double-click the folder in which you want to save the file.

4.	Type the filename in the File Name box and click Save.

To save selected objects only

1.	Select the objects with the Pick tool.

2.	Click File, Save As.

3.	Enable the Selected Only check box.

4.	To keep the original drawing intact, type a different name in the File Name box or choose a different folder from the Save In list box.

5.	Click Save.

 Note

•	You can also use the Save As command to save a copy of an existing drawing. Saving a copy under a different name keeps the original intact.

 Tip

•	You can also save a file by clicking the Save button.

 Related Topics


Saving files using other options

You can save your drawing in formats compatible with versions 5, 6, 7, or 8 of CorelDRAW; in vector formats other than .CDR; or with the fonts embedded. Embedding the fonts allows someone else to open the file without having the drawing's fonts on their system.

Assigning keywords, notes, and thumbnails when you save a file can help you find files later without having to remember their names.

To save a drawing in CorelDRAW 5, 6, 7, or 8 format

1.	Click File, Save As.

2.	Choose Version 5, 6, 7, or 8 from the Version list box.

3.	To keep the original drawing, type a different name in the File Name box or choose a different folder from the Save In list box.

4.	Click Save.

 Note

•	If you want to open your drawing in CorelDRAW version 5, 6, 7, or 8, but your drawing contains fonts not supplied with those versions, convert the text to curves using the Convert To Curves command before you save the file.

To save a drawing in vector formats other than .CDR

1.	Click File, Save As.

2.	Choose one of the vector formats in the Save As Type list box.

3.	Click Save.

To save a drawing with the fonts embedded

1.	Click File, Save As.

2.	Enable the Embed Fonts Using TrueDoc check box.

To add notes and keywords to a file

1.	Click File, Save As.

2.	Type the information you want to record about the file in the Notes box.

Type the keywords you want to assign to the file in the Keywords box, separating each keyword with a comma.

3.	Click Save.

To set up the thumbnail of a file

1.	Do one of the following:

•	Click File, Save [image] saves the file for the first time

•	Click File, Save As [image] changes the thumbnail of a file you saved previously

2.	Choose a thumbnail type from the Thumbnail list box.

3.	Click Save.

 Notes

•	Keywords can contain a maximum of 37 characters.

•	By default, CorelDRAW adds a color thumbnail to a file when you save it. You can specify a monochrome thumbnail instead, or turn the thumbnail off.

•	If your drawing has more than one page, CorelDRAW uses objects from the active drawing page to create the thumbnail.

 Related Topics


Saving files using Advanced Settings

CorelDRAW lets you make your files smaller, more portable, or faster to open and save.

You can save various elements of your drawing (such as textures, blends, or extrudes) with the drawing instead of saving a reference to them. Saving textures, blends, and extrudes with the drawing increases the file size, but causes complex drawings to open faster.

To save a drawing using Advanced Settings

1.	Click File, Save As.

2.	Click the Advanced button.

3.	Enable one or both of the following check boxes:

•	Save Presentation Exchange (CMX) [image] makes the drawing readable by all applications that support the .CMX format. File size may increase.

•	Use Current Thumbnail [image] saves the drawing with the last thumbnail generated. This speeds up saving.

4.	In the File Optimization section, enable one or both of the following check boxes:

•	Use Bitmap Compression [image] compresses bitmaps in the drawing to reduce the file size

•	Use Graphic Object Compression [image] compresses graphic objects in the drawing to reduce the file size

5.	In the Textures section, enable one or both of the following check boxes:

•	Save Textures With The File [image] allows complex drawings to open faster. This increases the file size.

•	Rebuild Textures When Opening The File [image] creates smaller files. Complex files may take longer to open.

6.	In the Blends And Extrudes section, enable one or both of the following check boxes:

•	Save Blends And Extrudes With The File [image] allows complex drawings to open faster. This increases the file size.

•	Rebuild Blends And Extrudes When Opening The File [image] creates smaller files. Complex files may take longer to open.

 Tip

•	You can also access the Advanced Settings from the Options dialog box under Document, Save.

 Related Topics


Creating swap disk space for temporary file storage

You can store temporary files that are not currently in use in the swap disk space that you specify in CorelDRAW. If you have two hard drives or two partitions, you can use them to set up both a primary and a secondary swap disk. For best results, set the total amount of swap disk space two or three times larger than the size of your uncompressed open images.

To create swap disk space for temporary file storage

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Options dialog box, click Workspace, Memory.

3.	In the Swap Disk section, do the following:

•	From the Primary box, choose the drive letter that corresponds to the hard disk you want to use first to store temporary files.

•	From the Secondary box, choose the drive letter that corresponds to the second hard disk you want to use to store temporary files.

4.	You will need to restart CorelDRAW for the new settings to take effect.

 Notes

•	If you have customized the amount of swap disk space available, it is displayed in the Status Bar.

•	You can click File, Document Info to see an image's size. The Document Info dialog box tells you whether the file size displayed is compressed. When you work with .CPT or .BMP images, the file size is always shown uncompressed.

 Related Topics


Specifying how much RAM is used to store images

You can choose how much of the available RAM on your computer is reserved for storing the images you open and edit. Set the amount of memory based on the type of work you perform and the number of applications you usually run simultaneously. If you increase the amount of memory reserved for images and find the application's performance has decreased, you might need to reduce this amount so that more RAM is available to run CorelDRAW.

To specify how much RAM is used to store images

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Options dialog box, click Workspace, Memory in the list of categories.

The Memory Usage section of the Memory page displays the total amount of memory available on your computer.

3.	In the Max box, type the percentage of the total memory you want to make available for images in CorelDRAW.

The amount of memory this percentage corresponds to appears to the right of the Max box.

4.	You will need to restart CorelDRAW for the new settings to take effect.

 Note

•	The amount of memory allocated for images is displayed in the Status Bar.

 Related Topics


Closing files and windows

If you want to keep the changes made to a file, save it before closing it. If you try to close the file without saving, CorelDRAW asks if you want to save the changes before closing the file. If you don't want to keep the changes, close without saving.

The Close command on the Windows menu allows you to close the active window or close all windows.

To close a file

•	Click File, Close.

To close the active window

•	Click Window, Close.

To close all windows

•	Click Window, Close All.

 Related Topics


Archiving files


Overview: Archiving files
Archiving files

Archiving is a method of saving successive versions of your drawings, and it provides two main benefits: you can access previous versions of your files, and you can do so without creating a large number of files that take up valuable disk space.

When are files archived?

Your files are archived when you choose to do so; archiving is not automatic. You control which versions are archived, depending on how significant they are to you.

You can archive a file as a temporary or a permanent version of the file. Temporary versions are replaced by newer versions when the maximum number of temporary versions for the file is reached. Permanent versions are kept until you choose to delete them.

Where do the archived files end up?

CorelDRAW lets you designate a directory for storing archived files. Archived files have the same folder and filenames as your files.

You can also keep archived files in the same directory as the original file. No matter where a file is archived (either to a local directory or to the versions directory), the filename is the same. The filename is the full path of the archived file, with special characters (backslash and colon) replaced with a $.

 Related Topics


Archiving the current version of your file

CorelDRAW lets you save successive versions of your drawings, including the one you are currently working on. This is called archiving, and it provides two main benefits: access to previous versions of your files, and more disk space. To archive files, you must first enable Version Control in your Windows Control Panel.

To enable Version Control

1.	Click Start, Settings, Control Panel.

2.	Double-click Corel Versions.

3.	Enable the Enable Version Control check box.

To archive the current version of your drawing

1.	Click File, Version Control, Archive Document.

2.	Enable one or more of the following check boxes:

•	Make First Version Permanent [image] preserves your first version as a permanent version. This is a useful option if the file is fairly complete; otherwise it is not necessary.

•	Use Compression [image] compresses your saved versions. This saves disk space, but adds to your retrieval time for larger files.

•	Archive To Single Location [image] saves the archive to the directory specified in the Corel Versions dialog box. If this box is not checked, CorelDRAW stores the archive in the same directory as the original file.

3.	Type the desired number in the Maximum Number Of Temporary Versions box.

This number is not affected by the number of permanent versions you keep.

 Note

•	When you enable the Make First Version Permanent check box, your file is kept until you choose to delete it.

To set the default folder for archiving to a single location

1.	Click Start, Settings, Control Panel.

2.	Double-click Corel Versions.

3.	Click the Browse button.

4.	Double-click the folder where you want to archive your files.

 Related Topics


Retrieving a previous version of the active file

Opening previous versions of your archived files is easy.

To retrieve a previous version of the active file

1.	Click File, Version Control, Retrieve From Current Archive.

2.	Select the version of the file you wish to retrieve from the Choose A Version To Retrieve list box.

3.	Click the Retrieve button.

To retrieve a previous version of another archived file

1.	Click File, Version Control, Retrieve From Saved Archive.

2.	In the Look In list box, double-click the folder containing the archived file you wish to use.

3.	Click the filename.

4.	Click the Open button.

5.	Select a version of the file in the Choose A Version To Retrieve box.

6.	Click the Retrieve button.

 Related Topics


Backing up your work


Overview: Backing up your work
Backing up your work

It's important to safeguard your work against power failures or system problems that can corrupt and destroy your files. CorelDRAW provides automatic saves and backup features that protect your files in case you forget to save them manually.

You can set values to specify automatic save intervals. CorelDRAW saves your file according to the time intervals that you set. This file is named BACKUP_OF_FILENAME, where Filename is the name of your file.

Another way to safeguard your work is to instruct CorelDRAW to automatically create a backup copy of your image every time you save. This file is named AUTOBACKUP_OF_FILENAME, and is saved in the same folder as your CorelDRAW file.

When a non-CorelDRAW file is opened, it opens in the CorelDRAW file format. This version of the file is then backed up.

 Related Topics


Saving your images automatically

To safeguard your work against accidents and system problems, save your images automatically as you work.

To save images automatically

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Workspace, Save.

3.	Enable the Auto-backup check box in the Auto-Backup section.

4.	Type a value in the Minutes box.

The number that you type represents the time interval between auto-saves.

5.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Save Back-up To Same Folder As The CDR File

•	Always Back-up To: click the Browse button and choose a folder

 Note

•	Files created by the Auto-backup feature are named AUTOBACKUP_OF_FILENAME.

 Related Topics


Creating backup copies of your images

You can create a backup copy of an image each time you save it so that you always have another version of the file on your computer.

To create backup copies of images

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Workspace, Save.

3.	Enable the Make Backup On Save check box.

CorelDRAW backs up files to the same folder in which you save your document.

 Notes

•	Backup files are named BACKUP_OF_FILENAME.

•	You can specify a different folder in which to store backup files created while you work, but backup files created when you save are always stored in the same folder as your original document.

 Related Topics


Setting up the Drawing page


Overview: Setting up the Drawing page
Setting up the Drawing page

To start a drawing, you'll need to know what page size and orientation you want to use. You can change and customize the size, orientation, and layout of the pages in your document according to your needs. There are also controls that allow you to modify your view of the document, or modify background properties such as bitmaps, color, printing options, and exporting options.

You can also choose from nearly 40 predefined page sizes and orientations, including standard legal and letter paper, envelopes, and slides. If you can't find the page size you require, you can create and save your own custom page size.

Creating labels

CorelDRAW provides more than 800 label formats from some 40 label manufacturers. You can choose a label and (in most cases) adjust it as needed. You can also create and save your own original labels.

Each label you create should appear on a separate Drawing Page. Before you print labels, however, check your printer's warranty information. Some manufacturers state that your warranty is invalidated if your labels damage the printer.

Setting the layout style

CorelDRAW offers layouts for single-page documents as well as standard multipage publications like booklets and pamphlets. You work with the pages in sequential order on screen, and when you are ready to print them CorelDRAW automatically arranges them in the order required for printing and binding.

For example, if you create a four-page newsletter using standard letter-size pages, you will work with the pages upright and in sequential order. However, the printer will need to work with printer spreads. In this example, printer spreads require that pages two and three be facing pages, while pages one and four are also facing pages. These sets of facing pages are printed on opposite sides of one tabloid-size sheet of paper, which is then folded in half to create the newsletter. But while you are still creating the newsletter, you can work with the pages one by one, upright and in sequential order.

 Related Topics


Inserting, renaming, and deleting pages

You can add, rename, and delete pages in your document. If you have a document with three or more pages, you can delete a range of pages.

To insert a page

1.	Click Layout, Insert Page.

2.	Type the number of pages you want to add in the Insert Pages box.

3.	Click Before or After to specify where you want to add the page relative to the active page.

In multipage documents, type a new page number in the Page box to change the relative page.

To rename a page

1.	Click Layout, Rename Page.

2.	Type the name of the page in the Page Name box.

To delete a page

1.	Click Layout, Delete Page.

2.	Type the number of the page you want to delete in the Delete Page box.

To delete a range of pages

1.	Click Layout, Delete Page.

2.	Type the number of the first page in the Delete Page box.

3.	Enable the Through To Page check box.

4.	Type the number of the last page in the box beside the Through To Page check box.

 Related Topics


Setting the default page size for multipage documents

CorelDRAW provides an array of preset page sizes to choose from, including standard North American and European sizes, and it also lets you create your own custom page sizes. You can use these settings to design a wide variety of publications, from small Internet graphics to newsletters or giant posters.

In a multipage document, the page size you assign anywhere in your document becomes the default size for all pages. Any new pages you add to the document later are automatically assigned the same default page size.

However, you can give individual pages within a multipage document a custom size, without affecting other pages that are using the default. For instance, you can have a 10-page document containing letter-size pages; any pages you add to the document will assume the default page size (letter). But if you wish, you can change page two, or six, or any other individual page, to a different size [image] legal, for instance [image] without affecting the rest of the document.

To set the default page size for a multipage document

1.	With your document open on any page, click the top of the Set Default or Current Page Size & Orientation button on the Property Bar.

2.	Choose a preset paper size from the Paper Type/Size list box on the Property Bar.

To set the size of a single page within a multipage document

1.	On the page you want to change, click the bottom of the Set Default or Current Page Size & Orientation button on the Property Bar.

2.	Choose a preset paper size from the Paper Type/Size list box on the Property Bar.

 Notes

•	Setting a page to a size that is not the default causes any Preset guidelines on that page to disappear.

•	Mixed page sizes are unavailable if you have enabled the View Facing pages option, are creating labels, or have the document page layout set to anything other than full page.

•	The Set Default or Current Page Size & Orientation button is also used to set default and individual page orientations. For information on setting the default page orientation, see "Setting the default page orientation for multipage documents."

 Tip

•	You can also specify a single page's size by clicking Layout, Resize Page.

 Related Topics


Defining, saving and removing a custom page size

If CorelDRAW doesn't provide the page size you require, you can create your own. Custom page sizes are useful for creating Web graphics, icons, or buttons. You can create a page as large as 150 by 150 feet or as small as 1 pixel by 1 pixel.

Custom pages are displayed in the Paper Type/Size list box on the Property Bar.

To define a custom page size

1.	Click Layout, Page Setup.

2.	Enable the Normal Paper button.

3.	Choose Custom from the Paper list box.

4.	Type the horizontal and vertical page dimensions in the Width and Height boxes.

5.	If required, choose a different unit of measurement from the list box that appears beside the Width box.

The dimensions automatically convert when you change units.

 Tip

•	You can also define a custom paper size by typing values in the Paper Width and Height boxes on the Property Bar.

To save a custom page size

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Save Custom Page button.

3.	Type the name of the new page type in the Save Custom Page Type As box.

To delete a custom page size

1.	Click Layout, Page Setup.

2.	Enable the Normal Paper button.

3.	Choose the custom page size from the Paper list box.

4.	Click the Delete Custom Page button, and click Yes to confirm the deletion.

 Related Topics


Setting the default page orientation for multipage documents

The default page orientation that you choose [image] landscape or portrait [image] automatically applies to every page in a multipage document. Any new pages you add after creating the document are automatically assigned the same orientation.

However, you can change the orientation of an individual page within a multipage document without affecting the orientation of other pages using the default. For instance, you can have a 10-page document using portrait orientation as the default. Any new pages you add will assume the default orientation (portrait). But you could change page two or six, or any other individual page, to landscape orientation [image] without affecting the other pages.

To set the default page orientation for a multipage document using the Property Bar

1.	With your document open to any page, click the top of the Set Default or Current Page Size & Orientation button on the Property Bar.

2.	Enable one of the following buttons on the Property Bar:

•	Landscape [image] if you want the horizontal dimension of the page to be greater than the vertical dimension

•	Portrait [image] if you want the vertical dimension of the page to be greater than the horizontal dimension

 Tip

•	You can also set the default page orientation for a multipage document by clicking Layout, Switch Page Orientation.

To set the orientation of a single page within a multipage document

1.	With your document open to the page whose orientation you wish to change, click the bottom half of the Set Default or Current Page Size & Orientation button on the Property Bar.

2.	Enable the Portrait button or the Landscape button on the Property Bar.

 Notes

•	Setting a page to an orientation that is not the default will cause any Preset guidelines on that page to disappear.

•	Mixed page orientations are unavailable if you have enabled the View Facing pages option, are creating labels, or have the document page layout set to anything other than full page.

•	The Set Default or Current Page Size & Orientation button is also used to set default and individual page sizes. For information on setting the default page size, see "Setting the default page size for multipage documents."

 Related Topics


Matching page size and orientation to the current printer settings

If the paper size and orientation don't match the printer's current settings, a message appears when you attempt to print the drawing. This message asks if you want CorelDRAW to match these settings automatically. You can click Yes, or use the following procedure to get the page properties you need.

To match the page size and orientation to the current printer settings

1.	Click Layout, Page setup.

2.	In the list of categories, click Size.

3.	Enable the Normal Paper button.

4.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Landscape [image] if you want the horizontal dimension of the page to be greater than the vertical dimension

•	Portrait [image] if you want the vertical dimension of the page to be greater than the horizontal dimension

 Note

•	Matching page size and orientation to the current printer settings will not reorient or resize pages that were individually reoriented or resized in a multipage document.

 Related Topics


Navigating multipage documents

The Navigator lets you add and delete pages, and helps you view multipage documents quickly without interrupting your work.

The Navigator appears in the bottom-left corner of the Drawing Window, immediately to the left of the page tabs. It shows the total number of pages in your drawing as well as the number of the active page.

To add, rename or delete a page, or change its size or orientation

•	Right-click the page's tab, and click a command.

To add a page at the beginning or end of the document

•	Move to the first or last page, then click the Add Page button on the Navigator.

To go to a specific page in the document quickly

•	Click one of the following buttons on the Navigator:

•	First Page button [image] moves you to the first page in the document

•	Last Page button [image] moves you to the last page in the document

•	Forward One button [image] goes forward one page

•	Back One button [image] goes back one page

•	Page Number button [image] lets you choose a specific page number to go to

 Related Topics


Setting the layout style

CorelDRAW offers layouts for single-page documents as well as standard multipage publications like booklets and pamphlets. You work with the pages in sequential order on screen, but when you are ready to print them, CorelDRAW automatically arranges them in the order required for printing and binding. Depending on the type of document you create, the printing order may need to be different from the order you work in.

The advantage of the layouts offered by CorelDRAW is that regardless of the layout required to print your document, you can edit each page in upright orientation in sequential order in the Drawing Window.

To set the layout style

1.	Click Layout, Page Setup.

2.	In the list of categories, click Layout.

3.	Choose a layout style from the Layout list box.

Each layout style is accompanied by a short description and a graphical example in the Preview window.

 Related Topics


Viewing facing pages

You can display two consecutive pages on the screen at the same time. This option lets you create objects that span two pages. You can specify whether you want CorelDRAW to start the document on a right- or left-facing page.

To view facing pages

1.	Click Layout, Page Setup.

2.	In the list of categories, click Layout.

3.	Enable the Facing Pages check box.

To set the starting side of a multipage document

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose one of the settings from the Start On list box:

•	Left Side [image] starts the document on a left-facing page

•	Right Side [image] starts the document on a right-facing page

 Note

•	You will be unable to view facing pages if your document uses multiple page sizes and orientations, or a Tent Card or Top Fold Card layout style. The Left Side option is only available for the Full Page and Book layout styles.

 Related Topics


Setting the rulers' resolution

When you change the resolution at which you plan to view or print your document, CorelDRAW adjusts the Horizontal and Vertical rulers to reflect the new resolution. The number of pixels equals the resolution multiplied by the page dimensions. For example, a document that is five inches by five inches at 72 dpi has 360 pixels. You can change the resolutions used by the Horizontal and Vertical rulers to configure the rulers.

For information about using pixels as the unit for a drawing, see "Setting ruler units for Internet graphics."

To set the rulers' resolution

1.	Click Layout, Page Setup.

2.	Enable the Normal Paper button.

3.	Choose a resolution from the Resolution list box.

If required, choose Other, and type custom values in the Horizontal Resolution and Vertical Resolution boxes.

 Related Topics


Adding and removing a page background

You can color the background of the Drawing Page with a solid color or a bitmap. You can also print and export backgrounds with your drawing. When using a bitmap to create a background, specify the dimensions of the bitmap and link the graphic to (or embed it in) your document.

When you link a graphic to your document, your document automatically reflects any changes you make to the source graphic. Embedded objects remain the same. Remember to include any linked graphics when sending the file to someone.

To color a page background using a solid color

1.	Click Layout, Page Setup.

2.	In the list of categories, click Background.

3.	Enable the Solid button.

4.	Choose the color you want from the list box.

If you don't see an appropriate color, click the Other button. The Select Color dialog box opens, allowing you to create a custom color or to choose a color from any of the color models provided with CorelDRAW.

To color a page background using a bitmap

1.	Click Layout, Page Setup.

2.	In the list of categories, click Background.

3.	Enable the Bitmap button.

3.	Click the Browse button.

4.	Choose the file format of the bitmap you want to import from the Files Of Type box.

5.	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored from the Look In list box.

6.	Double-click the folder and the filename.

To link or embed the bitmap background

1.	Follow all the steps from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Linked [image] links the bitmap externally

•	Embedded [image] adds the bitmap to your document

To alter the size of the bitmap background

1.	Follow all the steps from the "To color a page background using a bitmap" procedure.

2.	Enable the Custom Size button.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Enable the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box [image] maintains the horizontal and vertical proportions of the bitmap

•	Disable the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box [image] specifies nonproportional height and width values

4.	Type values in the H (horizontal) and V (vertical) boxes to specify the background width.

 Tip

•	You can set the size of a bitmap to its default size by enabling the Default Size button.

To make the background printable and exportable

1.	Follow all of the steps from the "To color a page background using a bitmap" procedure.

2.	Enable the Print And Export Background check box.

Disabling the check box allows you to use the background for display purposes only.

To remove a page background

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Document, Page, and click Background.

3.	Enable the No Background button.

 Related Topics


Hiding and displaying the page border and bleed

The page border [image] the shadowed rectangle that appears in the Drawing Window [image] indicates the dimensions and orientation of the Drawing Page. Although displayed by default, you can hide the page border while you work. However, it's a good idea to display the frame again before printing to ensure that your drawing fits on the page.

A bleed is the extra bit of color, image or text that goes over the edge of the page so that after the printer cuts, binds, and trims it, there is no white space between the edges of your image and the edge of the paper. If you want a bleed, ensure that you draw your image so that it extends a few millimetres over the page borders. The bit extending over the borders is called the bleed, and CorelDRAW displays it with dotted lines along the page borders.

To hide or display the page border

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Document, and click Page.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Disable the Show Page Border check box [image] hides the page border

•	Enable the Show Page Border check box [image] shows the page border

To hide or display the bleed

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Document, and click Page.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Disable the Show Bleed Area check box [image] hides the bleed

•	Enable the Show Bleed Area check box [image] shows the bleed

 Note

•	Viewing the bleed on screen is not the same as setting a bleed limit for printing; the dotted line that indicates the bleed is a visual guideline only. You may also need to set a bleed limit in the Print dialog box when you prepare your drawing for printing. For more information on setting a bleed limit in the Print dialog box, see "Setting a bleed limit."

 Tip

•	You can display the bleed quickly by clicking View, Bleed.

 Related Topics


Starting new documents with default options

You can begin new documents with default options of your choice, presetting such features as guidelines, page size and orientation, grid, and rulers.

To start new documents with specific page layout options

1.	Click Tools, Options, Document.

2.	Enable the Save Options As Defaults For New Documents check box.

 Related Topics


Creating labels

CorelDRAW offers more than 800 predesigned label formats from some 40 label manufacturers for you to choose from. The list uses a file and folder setup (similar to Windows Explorer) and the label formats are arranged alphabetically by manufacturer. You can preview the dimensions of the labels, and see how they fit on a printed page. If CorelDRAW does not provide a label style that meets your requirements, you can modify an existing style or create and save your own original style. You can also remove any label style from the list.

To use a preset label style

1.	Click Layout, Page Setup.

2.	In the list of categories, click Label.

3.	Enable the Labels button.

4.	Choose the manufacturer name from the list.

5.	Choose the label style you want from the list.

To add a custom label style

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Double-click the manufacturer name, and choose the label style closest to the one you want in the list.

3.	Click the Customize Label button.

4.	Adjust the label size, margins, gutters, and the number of labels appearing on each sheet by typing values in the boxes provided.

5.	Click the Add button.

6.	Type a name for the new label style in the Save As box.

 Note

•	You will be unable to create labels if your document uses multiple page sizes and orientations.

 Related Topics


Using consistent settings for new documents


Overview: Using consistent settings for new documents
Using consistent settings for new documents

When you close a CorelDRAW file, certain settings are automatically retained. These include all settings currently displayed in the Options dialog box, as well as all toolbar settings. CorelDRAW also remembers which Docker and Color Palette you were using when you closed the drawing.

The Document page lets you save settings so that CorelDRAW always opens new drawings using them. The following table outlines each setting type and the individual settings it comprises.

Setting type	What CorelDRAW saves

General options	The current general document settings

Page options	The current page size and orientation, label settings, print layout, page border, and page background settings

Grid And Ruler options	The current grid, ruler, snap to grid, and scale settings

Guideline options	The current guideline and snap to guideline settings

Styles	The current default fill, outline, fill settings, and text properties

Save options	The current advanced file saving settings, including thumbnail, file optimization, textures, blends, and extrusions (accessed by clicking the Advanced button in the Save Drawing dialog box)

Publish To Internet options	The current publish to Internet settings

 Related Topics


Saving settings for new documents

You can create a basic work environment that will be the same every time you start a new drawing or document. For example, if you most often display inches on the rulers, enable the Snap To Grid command, and use a drawing scale of 1:16, you can save these settings so that they are used by default for all new documents.

To apply the settings of the active drawing to all new documents

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Document.

3.	Enable the Save Options As Defaults For New Documents check box.

4.	Enable the check boxes that correspond to the settings you want to use for each new document.


Using the Scrapbook


Overview: Using the Scrapbook
Using the Scrapbook

The Scrapbook allows you to browse your computer's folders, view collections of clipart and photographs, import files into your drawing, apply your favorite fills and outlines, and browse File Transfer Protocol (FTP) sites.

The Scrapbook Docker Window is divided into six pages: Browse, Clipart, Photos, Favorite Fills And Outlines, 3D Models, and FTP Sites. To open the Scrapbook to a specific page, choose that page from the Scrapbook submenu in the Tools menu.

The Browse page lets you import items into your document from any folder in your computer. The Clipart and Photos pages let you import clipart and photo files into your document from the Clipart and Photo CD-ROMs. You can drag items to the Browse page directly from your document.

The Favorite Fills And Outlines page lets you apply preset fills and outlines to objects in your document. You can also save an object's fill and outline properties so that you can apply them to other objects. The FTP Sites page lets you browse any FTP site and import or download files from those sites.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Browsing files, clipart, and photos using the Scrapbook


Overview: Browsing files, clipart, and photos using the Scrapbook
Browsing files, clipart, and photos using the Scrapbook

The Scrapbook's Browse page provides a searchable view of your computer's folder and file hierarchy. This page serves two main functions: it allows you to search your computer for a file you want to import, and after you find the file, it allows you to drag it directly into your document. This function is especially useful for importing objects or files created using one of the applications in the CorelDRAW Graphics Suite or other compatible applications.

The Clipart and Photo pages of the Scrapbook also allow you to search for the type of file you want and allow you to drag it into your drawing. The Browse, Clipart, and Photo pages let you do basic file management tasks.

 Related Topics


Importing, opening, and printing files, clipart, and photos using the Scrapbook

The Scrapbook makes it easy to import, open, and print files, clipart, and photos from your computer's hard drive or from the clipart CD-ROM included with CorelDRAW.

To import files, clipart, or photos into your document

1.	Do one of the following:

•	Click Tools, Scrapbook, Browse [image] opens files stored on your computer

•	Click Tools, Scrapbook, Clipart [image] opens a clipart image or object

•	Click Tools, Scrapbook, Photos [image] opens a photograph

2.	Open the folder that contains the file you want.

3.	Drag the file's icon from the Scrapbook to the Drawing Window.

 Tip

•	You can also copy and paste into your document by using the commands in the right mouse button Context menu.

To open a file, clipart, or photo file

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Double-click the file's icon.

•	Right-click the file's icon, and click Open.

To print a file, clipart, or photo

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the procedure "To import files, clipart, or photos into your document."

2.	Right-click the file's icon, and click Print.

 Related Topics


Managing files, clipart, and photos using the Scrapbook

After you use the Scrapbook's Browse, Clipart, or Photos pages to find a file, you can cut, copy, delete, or rename it, create a shortcut to it, or view its properties.

To rename a file, view its properties, or to cut, copy, delete, or rename it

•	Right-click the file's icon, and click a command.

 Related Topics


Browsing the preset fills and outlines using the Scrapbook


Overview: Browsing the preset fills and outlines using the Scrapbook
Browsing the preset fills and outlines using the Scrapbook

The Scrapbook's Favorite Fills And Outlines page offers preset fills and outlines that you can add to objects. You apply these fills and outlines to objects the same way you add items from the Browse, Clipart, Photos, and 3D Models pages: by dragging them from the Scrapbook to your document. In this case, however, you drag the fill or outline to a specific object.

The Favorite Fills And Outlines page also allows you to save your own favorite fills and outlines for future use. This allows you to apply the fills and outlines you use most without having to recreate them each time.

For information about applying fills and outlines to objects, see "Filling and outlining objects."

 Related Topics


Saving a fill or outline on the Scrapbook's Favorite Fills And Outlines page

The Scrapbook's Favorite Fills And Outlines page allows you to save an object's fill and outline properties so that you can apply them to other objects in your document. By saving a fill or outline, you won't have to recreate it each time you want to apply it to an object.

To save a fill or outline in the Scrapbook

1.	Click Tools, Scrapbook, Favorite Fills And Outlines.

2.	Open the folder in which you want to save the fill or outline.

3.	Using the Pick tool, drag the object that has the fill or outline you want to the Scrapbook.

4.	In the Save A Favorite dialog box, enable or disable the check boxes to indicate the fill and outline properties you want to save.

 Tips

•	You can also save a favorite fill and outline in the Scrapbook by dragging the object with the right mouse button to the Scrapbook.

•	To display the contents of a folder, double-click its icon. If you want to move up one level in the folder hierarchy, click the Up One Level button.

 Related Topics


Applying a favorite fill or outline to an object

The Scrapbook's Favorite Fills And Outlines page offers access to preset fills and outlines provided by CorelDRAW, as well as fills or outlines that you've created and stored. You can apply these fills and outlines to any object you create in CorelDRAW. Fills appear in closed shapes only. For added convenience, the fill and outline icons display thumbnails for each file.

To apply a favorite fill or outline to an object

1.	Click Tools, Scrapbook, Favorite Fills And Outlines.

2.	Open the folder that contains the fill or outline you want to apply.

3.	Drag the icon of your favorite fill or outline to the object.

 Tips

•	You can also apply a favorite fill or outline by selecting an object with the Pick tool, then double-clicking the icon that represents the fill or outline.

 Related Topics


Managing favorite fills and outlines using the Scrapbook

After you use the Scrapbook's Favorite Fills And Outlines page to find a file, you can use the right mouse button to access a full set of file management commands.

To cut, copy, delete, or rename a file, or to create a shortcut or view its properties

•	Right-click the file's icon, and click a command.

 Related Topics


Browsing FTP sites using the Scrapbook


Overview: Browsing FTP sites using the Scrapbook
Browsing FTP sites using the Scrapbook

Using the Scrapbook, you can connect, either anonymously or by supplying a user name and password, to any File Transfer Protocol (FTP) site. After you connect to a site, you can browse its contents for files to include in your document. When you find a file you want to use, you can import it into your document or download a copy to your local drive. You can't upload files from your document to the FTP Sites page.

Initially, you connect to an FTP site by typing its address. After you connect to a site, you can create a shortcut to the site so that you don't have to retype its address each time you visit. Creating shortcuts is the easiest way to access the sites you use most often. However, if you choose not to create a shortcut, you can connect to a site by retyping its address. CorelDRAW also maintains a history of the last eight sites to which you've connected.

A shortcut to Corel's FTP site (ftp.corel.com) is saved as your first favorite on the Scrapbook's FTP Sites page.

 Related Topics


Connecting to FTP sites

Most FTP sites let you connect anonymously to the site by typing an address [image] for example, ftp.corel.com. However, some FTP sites are restricted and you cannot access them unless you supply a valid user name and password. After you connect to a site, you can create a shortcut to it so that you don't have to retype the address each time you visit. Creating shortcuts is the easiest way to access the sites you use most often.

To connect anonymously to an FTP site

1.	Click Tools, Scrapbook, FTP Sites.

2.	On the Scrapbook's FTP Sites page, right-click a blank area, and click Go To Site.

3.	Enable the Perform an Anonymous Login check box.

4.	In the Enter FTP Site Name dialog box, do one of the following:

•	Type the address of the site to which you want to connect.

•	Choose an address from the list box.

To connect to an FTP site by supplying a user name and password

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Disable the Perform An Anonymous Login check box.

3.	Click OK.

4.	In the Enter Username And Password dialog box, type the appropriate information in the User Name and Password boxes.

 Note

•	To maintain the security of a restricted FTP site, your user name and password are not saved with the site if you save it as a favorite. You are required to type your user name and password each time you connect to a restricted FTP site.

To create a shortcut to a favorite FTP site

•	Right-click a blank area in the favorite site, and click Save Site.

The shortcut appears as a folder on the Scrapbook's FTP Sites page.

To connect to an FTP site using a shortcut

1.	Double-click a shortcut on the Scrapbook's FTP Sites page.

2.	In the Enter Username And Password dialog box, perform an anonymous login or supply a user name and password.

 Tips

•	If you choose not to create a shortcut, you can connect to a site by either retyping its address or choosing the address in the Enter FTP Site Name dialog box.

•	You can also log in by right-clicking a shortcut, then clicking Browse.

 Related Topics


Obtaining files from FTP sites

After you connect to an FTP site, you can browse the site for files to include in your document. When you find a file you want to use, you can import it into your document, download a copy to your local drive, or drag it to your document.

To open a folder within an FTP site

1.	Click Tools, Scrapbook, FTP Sites.

2.	Connect to the FTP site you want to browse.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	In the FTP site, double-click a folder.

•	Right-click a folder, and click Open.

To import a file into your document from an FTP site

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Double-click the file.

•	Right-click the file, and click Import.

To save a file to your local drive from an FTP site

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the procedure "To open a folder within an FTP site."

2.	Right-click the file, and click Get File.

3.	In the Save As dialog box, select the drive and folder where you want to save the file.

4.	Type a name for the file in the File Name box.

5.	Choose the file format in which you want to save the file from the Save As Type list box.

To drag a file to your document from an FTP site

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the procedure "To open a folder within an FTP site."

2.	Drag the file from the Scrapbook to your document.

 Note

•	You can't upload files from your document to the FTP Sites page.

 Tip

•	You can drag a file using the right mouse button. When you release the mouse button, a pop-up menu appears, allowing you to click the Drop CorelDRAW Internet File Data command.

 Related Topics


Using the rulers, grid, and guidelines


Overview: Using the rulers, grid, and guidelines
Using the rulers, grid, and guidelines

The rulers, grid, and guidelines help you draw and arrange objects with precision. The rulers are adjustable and give you a sense of location and size in the Drawing Window. The grid is also adjustable and is superimposed on your drawing to help you draw and align objects precisely. Guidelines are lines that you add to the Drawing Window to help you align objects. By default, guidelines do not appear when you print your work; you can set them to print using the controls in the Object Manager. For more information about the Object Manager, see "Using the Object Manager."

How and when to use the rulers, grid, and guidelines is up to you; you can set the properties that control how these tools operate in your drawing. You will probably find it helpful to ensure that the rulers, grid, and guidelines are set up the way you want before you start adding objects to a drawing. Although you can change their settings at any time [image] for instance, viewing the grid as lines and then changing it to dots, or moving the guidelines around the Drawing Window [image] you'll probably find that you work more quickly if you set up the rulers, grid, and guidelines first.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Using the rulers and grid


Overview: Using the rulers and grid
Using the rulers and grid

The on-screen rulers help you determine the size and position of objects in your drawing. The rulers can be particularly effective when you use them to position objects when dragging them with the mouse. As you move the mouse pointer around the Drawing Window, the rulers find your current position relative to their origin (the position where the rulers' 0 points intersect). The Status Bar displays the mouse pointer's position by default. The rulers can display the unit of measurement that best suits your drawing.

The grid works with the rulers to help you align and position objects accurately. CorelDRAW displays the grid as a series of intersecting lines spaced according to settings you specify. Displaying the grid is an easy and accurate way to position objects relative to one another and to the Drawing Page. In addition, you can snap objects to the grid to ensure they automatically line up with the grid when you move them.

Setting a drawing scale

You can increase the effectiveness of the rulers and grid by establishing a drawing scale that relates all distances in the drawing to distances in the real world. For example, if you create a technical drawing in which you want to show large objects on a small page, you can adjust the drawing scale accordingly.

 Related Topics


Setting ruler parameters

The rulers can help you determine the size and position of objects. Before using the rulers, determine the position of the ruler origin [image] the place where the rulers' 0 points intersect. Putting the ruler origin exactly where you want it on the Drawing Page ensures that the ruler coordinates begin from the exact location you need.

In addition to positioning the ruler origin, you can move the rulers within the Drawing Window so that you can use them most effectively. For example, you can move the rulers over your drawing to create or move an object with precision.

To set the ruler origin

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Document, and click Rulers.

3.	Type values in the Horizontal Origin and Vertical Origin boxes to set the location of the origin.

 Note

•	The values you specify represent the position of the ruler origin relative to the bottom-left corner of the Drawing Page. For example, if you set 1.0 as the horizontal coordinate and 5.0 as the vertical coordinate, CorelDRAW places the ruler origin 1 inch to the right and 5 inches up from the bottom-left corner of the Drawing Page.

 Tip

•	You can also set the ruler origin by dragging the ruler intersection point onto the Drawing Window.

To reposition the rulers

•	Do one of the following:

•	Hold down SHIFT, and drag the ruler to a new position.

•	Hold down SHIFT, and drag the ruler intersection point to move both rulers simultaneously.

To return a ruler to its previous position

•	Hold down SHIFT, and double-click the ruler.

 Tip

•	You can open the Rulers page in the Options dialog box by double-clicking either of the rulers in the Drawing Window.

 Related Topics


Setting ruler units

You can change the units of measurement displayed on the Horizontal and Vertical rulers. CorelDRAW provides an array of units, ranging from points, millimeters, and inches to larger units such as meters, kilometers, and miles. Use the unit setting that best suits the type and size of drawing you want to create.

To set ruler units using the same units for the horizontal and vertical rulers

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Document, and click Rulers.

3.	Enable the Same Units For Horizontal And Vertical Rulers check box, and choose a unit of measurement from the Horizontal list box and Vertical list box.

To set ruler units using different units for the horizontal and vertical rulers

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Disable the Same Units For Horizontal And Vertical Rulers check box, and choose units of measurement from the Horizontal list box and the Vertical list box.

 Note

•	When you change the ruler units, the grid frequency automatically converts to maintain the same relative distance between lines on the grid. For instance, if your preference is to have four lines per inch, and you change the ruler units to centimetres, CorelDRAW will automatically convert the grid frequency to the right number of lines per centimetre [image] in this case, one line every 1.6 centimetres.

 Tips

•	Enable the Show Fractions check box if you want the rulers to display measurements in fractions instead of decimals.

•	You can also change the units of measurement on the rulers by choosing a unit of measurement for the Horizontal and Vertical rulers from the Drawing Units list box on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Setting ruler units for Internet graphics

When creating a graphic for Internet use, it is usually best to use pixels as your ruler unit. Using pixels and setting a horizontal and vertical resolution for your graphic ensures that it looks the same regardless of what application is used to display it.

For more information, see "Setting up the Drawing page."

To display ruler measurements in pixels

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Document, and click Rulers.

3.	Choose Pixels from the Horizontal list box.

4.	Enable the Same Units For Horizontal And Vertical Rulers check box.

5.	Click the Resolution button.

6.	Type a value in the Horizontal Resolution box.

7.	Do one of the following:

•	To make the horizontal and vertical resolutions the same, enable the Identical Values check box.

•	To make the horizontal and vertical resolutions different from each other, disable the Identical Values check box, and type a value in the Vertical Resolution box.

 Related Topics


Setting ruler precision marks

You can choose how many precision marks appear between each full unit mark or "tick" on the Horizontal and Vertical rulers.

To set the number of tick division marks

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Document, and click Rulers.

3.	Choose the option you want from the Tick Divisions list box.

 Related Topics


Setting the drawing scale

You can set the scale for your drawing. In CorelDRAW, the scale represents a ratio between the drawing (page distance) and the real world (world distance). For example, if you choose a drawing scale of 1:10, one unit on the ruler corresponds to 10 units of "real" distance. Setting a drawing scale is particularly useful when creating a technical or architectural drawing in which you need to draw a large item on a relatively small page.

You can choose from preset scales or create a custom scale to suit your needs.

To choose a preset drawing scale

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Document, and click Rulers.

3.	Click the Edit Scale button.

4.	Choose a drawing scale from the Typical Scales list box.

To create a custom drawing scale

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose Custom from the Typical Scales list box.

3.	Type a value in the Page Distance box to set the part of the scale represented in the drawing.

4.	Choose a unit for the page distance from the list box.

5.	Type a value in the World Distance box to set the distance you want represented by each unit of page distance.

 Notes

•	If you want to change the World Distance units, change the Horizontal ruler units.

•	If the drawing scale is set to anything other than 1:1, the Vertical ruler units will always be the same as the Horizontal ruler units. For more information about changing ruler units, see "Setting ruler units."

 Related Topics


Setting grid parameters

You can set the spacing between grid lines using two options: frequency and spacing. Frequency sets the distance between grid lines according to how many grid lines you want per horizontal and vertical unit. Spacing sets this distance by specifying the exact distance you want between each line. The grid acts the same way no matter which option you choose.

By default, CorelDRAW displays the grid as lines resembling graph paper. You can choose to display the grid as dots, which are not as noticeable. The points where horizontal and vertical lines intersect represent grid dots. The frequency or spacing settings you specify apply to both lines and dots.

To set the distance between grid lines

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Document, and click Grid.

3.	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Frequency [image] sets the grid spacing as a number of lines per unit of measurement selected

•	Spacing [image] specifies the distance between each grid line

4.	Type values in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes.

To display the grid as dots

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Show Grid As Dots button.

 Tip

•	Set high Frequency values or low Spacing values for added precision.

 Related Topics


Using Snap To Grid

The Snap To Grid feature helps you align objects precisely. When you enable Snap To Grid, objects you move or draw automatically snap to the grid so that they line up vertically and horizontally with the nearest grid marker.

To have objects snap to the grid

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Document, and click Grid.

3.	Enable the Snap To Grid check box.

 Tip

•	You can also make objects snap to the grid by clicking the Snap to Grid button on the Property Bar, or by clicking View, Snap To Grid.

 Related Topics


Displaying the rulers and the grid

You can choose when and how you want to display the rulers and the grid. If screen space is limited, you might choose to hide the rulers and display them only when you need them. Or, if you want to view your drawing as it will appear when you print it, you can hide the grid and display it later. The rulers and grid maintain their settings even when you hide them.

To display or hide the rulers

•	Click View, Rulers.

If no check mark appears next to the command name, the rulers are hidden. If a check mark appears, the rulers are displayed.

To display or hide the grid

•	Click View, Grid.

If no check mark appears next to the command name, the grid is hidden. If a check mark appears, the grid is displayed.

 Related Topics


Working with guidelines


Overview: Working with guidelines
Working with guidelines

Guidelines are lines that you can place anywhere in the Drawing Window to help you align and position objects. You can create any number of Horizontal, Vertical, and Slanted guidelines and save them with your drawing. You can also enable snapping to guidelines so that objects automatically align with the guidelines when moved or drawn nearby.

You can select, rotate, nudge, duplicate, and delete guidelines as you would other objects. You can choose any color for your guidelines, but selected guidelines always appear red. You can also hide the guideline layer using the Object Manager. For information about the Object Manager, see "Using the Object Manager."

By default, guidelines do not appear in printed copies of your work. If you want to print guidelines, you can do using the Object Manager. For more information, see "Enabling and disabling the printing of a layer."

 Related Topics


Adding standard guidelines

 You can set up precise Horizontal, Vertical, and Slanted guidelines. You set up Horizontal and Vertical guidelines based on the horizontal or vertical distance from the 0 point on the appropriate ruler. Conversely, you set up Slanted guidelines based on two specific ruler coordinates or one coordinate and an angle. You can align objects along a guideline visually or have them snap to the guideline for exact positioning.

For more speed than precision, use the mouse to add guidelines to your drawing. You can create Horizontal and Vertical guidelines by dragging from a ruler to the Drawing Window. To create Slanted guidelines, rotate a Horizontal or Vertical guideline.

Any guidelines you add appear on every page of a multipage document except for individually resized or reoriented pages.

You can begin all new documents with the same preset guidelines if you choose.

To add a Horizontal or Vertical guideline

1.	Click View, Guidelines Setup.

2.	In the list of categories, choose Horizontal or Vertical.

3.	Type a location for the guideline (relative to the 0 point on the Horizontal or Vertical ruler) in the box.

4.	Choose a unit from the Units list box.

5.	Click the Add button.

 Note

•	To place a guideline below or to the left of the 0 point (for Horizontal or Vertical guidelines, respectively), type negative numbers in the boxes.

 Tip

•	You can also add a guideline by clicking on the Horizontal or Vertical ruler and dragging onto the Drawing page.

To add a Slanted guideline

1.	Click View, Guidelines Setup.

2.	In the list of categories, choose Slanted.

3.	Choose a method of setting the guideline from the Specify list box.

Set two coordinates or one coordinate and an angle. For example, if you choose Angle And 1 Point, you must set coordinates in the X and Y boxes and an angle in the Angle box. The guideline you create passes through that coordinate at the angle you set.

4.	Type the endpoint coordinates relative to the 0,0 point on the rulers in the X and Y boxes.

5.	If you're using the Angle And 1 Point option, type an angle value in the Angle box.

6.	Click the Add button.

 Tip

•	You can turn an existing horizontal or vertical guideline into a slanted guideline by clicking on the guideline twice so the rotation and skewing handles appear.

To begin all new documents with preset guidelines

1.	In the Tools menu, click Options, Document.

2.	Enable the Save Options As Defaults For New Documents check box.

3.	Enable the Guideline Options check box.

4.	Disable the checkboxes beside options you do not want.

 Tip

•	Double-clicking a guideline opens the Guidelines Setup page of the Options dialog box.

 Related Topics


Adding preset guidelines

Preset guidelines make it easy to apply frequently used guidelines to your drawings. You can create your own presets, and you can apply those presets to all new documents. If you resize or reorient the page after applying a preset, the guidelines regenerate in the appropriate places.

Preset guidelines are available only on default pages in multipage documents, and not on individually resized or oriented pages. For information about setting up documents, see Setting up the Drawing Page.

To add preset guidelines

1.	Click View, Guidelines Setup.

2.	In the list of categories, choose Preset.

3.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Corel Presets [image] lets you choose one or more of the different presets offered by CorelDRAW

•	User Defined Presets [image] lets you define your own presets

4.	Enable the check boxes beside the options you want.

If you're using User Defined Presets, type the values you want in the Margins, Columns and Grid boxes.

5.	Click the Apply Presets button.

 Related Topics


Positioning guidelines

You can move guidelines to positions that better suit your needs after you've begun drawing. There are two ways to position guidelines that have already been set: visually, by selecting them and dragging them with the mouse; or with greater precision, using the Options dialog box.

To position Horizontal or Vertical guidelines using the mouse

•	Click on the guideline and drag it anywhere in the Drawing Window.

To position a Slanted guideline using the mouse

•	Double-click it, and rotate it as you would any other object until you get the angle you want.

To position Horizontal or Vertical guidelines precisely

1.	Click View, Guidelines Setup.

2.	In the list of categories, choose Horizontal or Vertical.

3.	Choose a guideline from the list at the left side of the dialog box.

4.	Type a new location relative to the 0 point on the Horizontal or Vertical ruler.

If you want to move the guideline to the left of or below the 0 point (for a Vertical or Horizontal guideline, respectively), type a negative number.

5.	Choose a unit from the units list box, if required.

6.	Click the Move button.

To position a Slanted guideline

1.	Click View, Guidelines Setup.

2.	In the list of categories, choose Slanted.

3.	Choose a guideline from the list.

4.	Choose a method of moving the guideline from the Specify list box.

5.	Type the endpoint coordinates relative to the 0,0 point on the rulers in the X and Y boxes.

6.	If you're using the Angle And 1 Point option, type an angle value in the Angle box.

7.	Click the Move button.

 Notes

•	Repositioning a preset guideline changes it into a standard guideline. Resizing or reorienting the page causes the original preset guideline to regenerate.

•	Selected guidelines are always red.

 Related Topics


Using Snap To Guidelines

The Snap To Guidelines feature helps you align objects precisely. When you enable Snap To Guidelines, objects you move or draw near a guideline automatically snap so that they line up with the guidelines. Objects snap to guidelines in two ways. With Horizontal and Vertical guidelines, the edges of an object's selection box snap to the guidelines. With all types of guidelines, the point you click on in the object when dragging it will snap to guidelines.

To use Snap To Guidelines

1.	Click View, Guidelines Setup.

2.	Enable the Snap To Guidelines check box.

To centre objects on guidelines

1.	Click View, Snap to Guidelines, and make sure there is a check mark beside Snap to Guidelines.

2.	Select an object and move it over a guideline until its center of rotation snaps to the guideline.

 Note

•	Objects also snap to the point where two guidelines intersect.

 Tip

•	You can also snap objects to guidelines by clicking the Snap To Guidelines button on the Property Bar, or by clicking View, Snap to Guidelines.

 Related Topics


Displaying guidelines

You can alter how guidelines are displayed in a drawing at any time. You'll find it best to have guidelines showing when you're drawing and positioning objects. However, you might find it useful to hide them when you want your drawing to look like it will when you print it.

You can change the colors of both default guideline and new guidelines you create.

To display or hide guidelines

•	Click View, Guidelines.

 Tip

•	You can also display guidelines by enabling the Show Guidelines check box on the Guidelines page in the Options dialog box.

To change the color of a guideline

•	Do one of the following:

•	Drag a color from the Color Palette onto the guideline.

•	Select the guideline and right-click on a color in the Color Palette.

You have to deselect the guideline to see the new color, since selected guidelines are always red.

 Related Topics


Locking guidelines

Locking a guideline prevents it from being moved or deleted accidentally. You can unlock a locked guideline if you decide to move or delete it.

To lock a guideline

1.	Select the guideline with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Lock Object.

To unlock a guideline

1.	Select the guideline.

2.	Click Arrange, Unlock Object.

 Tip

•	You can also lock and unlock a guideline by right-clicking it, and clicking Lock or Unlock Object.

 Related Topics


Deleting standard guidelines

You can delete guidelines by selecting them with the Pick tool, then pressing DELETE. If you remove a guideline from a multipage document, it is removed from all pages.

To delete a guideline

1.	Click View, Guidelines Setup.

2.	In the list of categories, click Horizontal, Vertical, or Angle.

3.	Choose the guideline.

4.	Click the Delete button.

To delete all Horizontal, Vertical, or Slanted guidelines

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Clear All button.

To delete a locked guideline

•	Right-click the guideline, and click Unlock Object.

 Tips

•	You can select multiple guidelines by holding down SHIFT while selecting them.

•	You can also use the Guidelines dialog box to delete one, some, or all of the guidelines in the active document.

 Related Topics


Deleting preset guidelines

You must delete preset guidelines using the Guidelines page of the Options dialog box. If you delete a preset guideline any other way, the guideline regenerates when you resize or reorient the page.

To delete a preset guideline

1.	Click View, Guidelines Setup.

2.	In the list of categories, click Presets.

3.	Disable all the check boxes in the list of Corel Presets, and click OK.

 Related Topics


Viewing your work


Overview: Viewing your work
Viewing your work

The view controls in CorelDRAW let you view your drawing according to your needs. These controls consist of the Zoom flyout and View Manager as well as commands available from toolbars and menus. You can use these controls to change the way CorelDRAW displays objects, to magnify or reduce your view, or to save specific views for future use.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Zooming and panning


Overview: Zooming and panning
Zooming and panning

CorelDRAW gives you quick access to tools that let you reduce or magnify the view of your drawing. You can zoom in for a more detailed view, or out for a broader view. You can also change your view by moving your drawing around in the Drawing Window.

You'll also find zoom controls on the Property Bar, the Zoom toolbar, and the Standard toolbar. Using the Property Bar, you can zoom to any level of magnification. You can also choose from preset zoom levels to revert to a specific magnification percentage quickly.

Zooming and panning do not affect your drawing [image] only your view of it.

 Related Topics


Changing your view using the Zoom flyout

The Zoom and Pan tools make it easy to change your view of a drawing. The Zoom tool lets you zoom in to get a closer look at an area of your drawing, or out to get a view of a larger area. The Pan tool lets you move the Drawing Page around to get the view you want. Using the Pan tool is much like using your hand to move a piece of paper on a desk.

CorelDRAW supports the Microsoft IntelliMouse. You can zoom and pan using the wheel. Every notch you encounter on the wheel increases the magnification level by 10 or 50 per cent. When you zoom between 1 per cent and 100 per cent, the zoom level increases and decreases in 10 per cent increments. When the magnification level is above 100 per cent, the zoom increments increase to 50 per cent.

To zoom in on an area of the drawing

1.	Open the Zoom flyout and click the Zoom tool.

2.	Click and drag diagonally in the Drawing Window to create a marquee box around the area you want to magnify.

To zoom out

1.	Open the Zoom flyout, and click the Zoom tool.

2.	Right-click inside the Drawing Window.

To move a drawing in the Drawing Window

1.	Open the Zoom flyout and click the Pan tool.

2.	Drag the document to place it within the Drawing Window.

To zoom in or out using IntelliMouse

1.	Point the mouse over an object.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Rotate the wheel forward (toward the monitor) to zoom in on the object.

•	Rotate the wheel back (away from the monitor) to zoom out from the object.

To pan using IntelliMouse

1.	Click the Wheel button.

2.	Point the mouse in the direction you want to move the Drawing Page.

To increase the panning rate, move the cursor away from the origin mark.

3.	Click the wheel button to stop panning.

 Tips

•	To zoom in on part of a page quickly [image] zoom to fit [image], simply double-click the Zoom tool, or click anywhere in the Drawing Window when the Zoom tool is selected.

•	If you hold down SHIFT while left- or right-clicking the mouse, you reverse the actions of the Zoom tool.

 Related Topics


Changing your view using the Property Bar

When you click the Zoom or Pan tool (found in the Toolbox), the Property Bar displays a new set of controls. These controls include the Zoom and Pan tools, as well as tools for changing your view. You can open the View Manager to save and delete specific views.

These controls are visible on the Property Bar only when you select the Zoom tool or Pan tool.

To change your view using the Property Bar

To see ...	Do this (on the Property Bar) ...

A magnified view of the drawing	Click the Zoom In button.

More of the drawing	Click the Zoom Out button.

Objects at actual size	Click the Zoom Actual Size button.

All selected objects	Click the Zoom To Selected button.

All objects	Click the Zoom To All Objects button.

The entire Drawing Page	Click the Zoom To Page button.

The width of the Drawing Page	Click the Zoom To Page Width button.

The height of the Drawing Page	Click the Zoom To Page Height button.

The View Manager	Click the View Manager button.

 Related Topics


Changing your view using the Zoom and Standard toolbars

You can display the Zoom toolbar so that you always have zoom controls available, regardless of what other tool you're using. The Zoom toolbar provides all the tools you need to get the view you want. These tools work the same way as their counterparts on the Property Bar and in the View Manager. For information about using these tools, see "Changing your view using the Property Bar" and "Changing your view using the View Manager."

You can jump to a preset magnification level in one step, or jump to a specific magnification level. If the value you type exceeds the maximum magnification level, CorelDRAW reverts to the maximum level. If you specify high magnification levels (for example, 100000 per cent), CorelDRAW displays the closest possible magnification level. You can also name and save the magnification level you specify, using the Standard toolbar. For more information, see "Saving user-defined zoom levels."

To display the Zoom toolbar

1.	Click Window, Toolbars.

2.	Enable the Zoom check box.

To jump to a specific magnification level

•	Do one of the following:

•	Choose a magnification level from the Zoom Box control on the Standard toolbar.

•	Type a value in the Zoom Box control.

 Related Topics


Saving user-defined zoom levels

You can save a zoom level so that you can jump to it quickly. Once you have zoomed in on an area of a Drawing Page, you can name and save it. After you save it, you can remagnify any area by choosing that zoom level.

User-defined zoom levels are page specific. For example, if you name and save a user-defined zoom level on page 1 of a multipage document, the zoom level is only available when you display page 1.

If you rename the user-defined zoom level, the View Manager reflects the new name.You must use the View Manager to delete a user-defined zoom level. For more information, see "Saving, using, and deleting specific views."

To save a user-defined zoom level

1.	Click in the Zoom Levels list box on the Standard toolbar.

2.	Type a name for the zoom level, and press ENTER.

 Related Topics


Setting Zoom tool defaults

You can customize the Zoom tool default settings to have it respond a certain way when you right-click it with the mouse button. You can choose between having the Zoom tool automatically zoom out by a factor of two, or display a menu of commands that let you quickly choose from a variety of other zoom levels.

To establish default settings for the Zoom tool

1.	Right-click the Zoom tool on the Zoom flyout, and select Properties.

2.	To specify what you want the Zoom tool to do when you right-click on it in the Drawing Window, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Zoom Out [image] zooms out by a factor of two

•	Context Menu [image] displays a menu of commands that you can choose from to zoom to a specific level

To establish default settings for the Pan tool

1.	Right click the Pan tool on the Zoom flyout, and select Properties.

2.	To specify what you want the Pan tool to do when you right-click on it in the Drawing Window, enable one of the following buttons

•	Zoom Out [image] zooms out by a factor of two

•	Context Menu [image] displays a menu of commands that you can choose from to zoom to a specific level

 Related Topics


Matching real-world distance to screen distance

You can specify that one inch on your screen equals one inch of "real" distance. You'll find this tool particularly useful if you are drawing in 1:1 Zoom mode, as it lets you work using real world distances as opposed to relative distances that depend on screen resolution.

Before you can perform this procedure, you need a clear plastic ruler for comparing real-world and on-screen distances. This ruler should use the same unit of measurement you set for the grid and rulers. For more information, see "Using the rulers and grid."

To match on-screen distance to real-world distance

1.	Right-click the Zoom tool on the Zoom flyout, and select Properties.

2.	Click the Calibrate Rulers button.

3.	Place your plastic ruler under the on-screen Horizontal ruler.

4.	Click the Up or Down Arrow on the Horizontal box to match one unit of measurement on the on-screen ruler with one unit of measurement on the actual ruler.

5.	Place your ruler beside the on-screen Vertical ruler.

6.	Click the Up or Down Arrow button on the Vertical box to match one unit of measurement on the on-screen ruler with one unit of measurement on the actual ruler.

 Related Topics


Using the View Manager


Overview: Using the View Manager
Using the View Manager

The View Manager serves two functions. It provides a set of tools for adjusting your view so that you see your drawing the way you want; and it lets you save any view of a specific Drawing Page so that you can revert to it whenever you want.

 Related Topics


Changing your view using the View Manager

The View Manager provides tools that let you change your view of a drawing. For example, you can use the Zoom In and Zoom Out tools to get a better view of an area, or use the Zoom To Selected or Zoom To Page Width tools to look at a specific area.

To open the View Manager

•	Do one of the following:

•	Click Tools, View Manager.

•	If you have selected the Zoom tool or Pan tool, click the View Manager button on the Property Bar.

To see a magnified view of the drawing

•	Click the Zoom In button as many times as necessary.

To see a magnified view of a specific area of the drawing

•	Click the Zoom One Shot button, then drag a marquee around the area you want to magnify.

To see more of the drawing

•	Click the Zoom Out button as many times as necessary.

To see all selected objects

•	Click the Zoom To Selected button.

To see all objects

•	Click the ZoomTo All Objects button.

 Related Topics


Saving, using, and deleting specific views

The View Manager lets you save different views of a document so that you can switch easily between them. For example, you can save a 230% magnification level on page 2 of a document and revert to that page and view at any time.

If you no longer need a saved view, you can remove it from the list.

To save a view

1.	Click Tools, View Manager.

2.	Use the Zoom tools on the View Manager to get the view you want.

For example, use Zoom In to get a closer look at an object.

3.	Click the Add Current View button.

The new view is given a default name, for example, View 1.

4.	To give the view a new name, click the default name and type a new name.

To switch to a saved view

1.	Click Tools, View Manager.

2.	Choose the view from the View Manager.

3.	Click [image], Switch to View.

To delete a saved view

1.	Click Tools, View Manager.

2.	Click the view you want to delete.

3.	Click the Delete Current View button.

 Notes

•	When working with multipage documents, use the page and magnifying glass icons to change the way you use a saved view. If you disable the page icon beside a saved view, CorelDRAW reverts to the magnification level only [image] not the page. Similarly, if you disable the magnifying glass icon, CorelDRAW reverts to the page only [image] not the magnification level.

•	Use the flyout in the View Manager Docker (accessed by clicking [image]) to access additional commands for adding, deleting, and renaming views, as well as a command for hiding and showing the View Manager's toolbar.

 Related Topics


Setting the view quality


Overview: Setting the view quality
Setting the view quality

You can change the view quality [image] the way CorelDRAW displays the objects in a drawing. For example, you can display objects using only outlines, or using fills, outlines, and bitmaps.

Choose this view...	If you want to...

Simple Wireframe	Hide fills, extrusions, contours, and intermediate blend shapes; display only the outline of any objects; and display bitmaps in monochrome

Wireframe	Hide fills; display extrusions, contours, and intermediate blend shapes; and display bitmaps in monochrome

Draft	Show uniform fills, low-resolution bitmaps, and fountain fills as solid colors

Normal	Display all fills except PostScript fills and high-resolution bitmaps

Enhanced	Use 2X oversampling to show the best possible display, including PostScript fills

In Draft view, CorelDRAW represents fountain fills by a blend of the first and last fill colors. The Draft view displays unique patterns to represent fills. The checkerboard pattern represents two-color fills; the two-way arrow pattern represents full color fills; the hatched line pattern represents bitmap fills; and the PS pattern represents PostScript fills.

 Related Topics


Choosing a view quality

The View menu gives you quick access to the five view qualities available in CorelDRAW, letting you choose how CorelDRAW displays a drawing on the screen. If you have a fast computer or want to see the closest approximation to what a drawing will look like when it's printed, use the Normal or Enhanced view. If you have a slower computer or just want to speed up redrawing of a complex drawing, you may find the Simple Wireframe or Wireframe view most effective.

Changing the view quality does not affect the drawing's content or the way it will print; it affects only the way it displays on the computer screen.

To view a document in Simple Wireframe view

•	Click View, Simple Wireframe.

To view a document in Wireframe view

•	Click View, Wireframe.

To view a document in Draft view

•	Click View, Draft.

To view a document in Normal view

•	Click View, Normal.

To view a document in Enhanced view

•	Click View, Enhanced.


Using full-screen previews


Overview: Using full-screen previews
Using full-screen previews

You can display a full-screen preview of a page from your drawing. You can preview all objects on the active page using the Normal or Enhanced view quality (depending on the view quality currently selected). You can also see a full-screen preview of only the objects you select.

 Related Topics


Previewing a drawing

You can see what your drawing will look like when you print it. You can also set the view quality of the full-screen preview to Normal or Enhanced, and display PostScript fills.

To set the full-screen preview view quality

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Workspace, Display.

3.	Enable one of the following:

•	Use Normal View button [image] specifies the Normal view quality

•	Use Enhanced View button [image] specifies the Enhanced view quality

•	Use Enhanced View button and the Show PostScript Fills In Enhanced View check box [image] displays PostScript Fills

To view a full-screen preview of the current page

•	Click View, Full-Screen Preview.

To view a full-screen preview of selected objects only

1.	Select the objects you want to preview.

2.	Click View, and enable the Preview Selected Only command.

3.	Click View, Full-Screen Preview.

To return to the Drawing Window from any full-screen preview

•	Right-click or press any key.

 Note

•	Although you can draw anywhere in the Drawing Window, only objects positioned in the Printable Area are printed. To display the Printable Area, click View, Printable Area.


Viewing computer and document information


Overview: Viewing computer and document information
Viewing computer and document information

You can view information about your computer as well as information about CorelDRAW itself. For example, you can view details about your computer's setup. You can view detailed information about your system, display and printing properties, Corel .EXE and .DLL files, and system .DLL files.

CorelDRAW information consists of the program name, version number, serial number, and user name. This information doesn't change. You'll find this information particularly useful if you need help from Corel Technical Support Services.

You can also view information about your CorelDRAW document and other details, including the number of pages it contains, the number of layers, and the number of graphics and text objects.

 Related Topics


Viewing system information

You can view the following types of information in terms of the current state of your computer: system, display, printers, Corel .EXE and .DLL files, and system .DLL files. This feature is useful, for instance, to find out how much memory you have on the drive to which you want to save a file. Save any system information in a text file called SYSINFO.TXT.

To view system information

1.	Click Help, About CorelDRAW.

2.	Click System Info.

3.	Choose a category from the Choose A Category list box.

 Note

•	Use the Save button to store system information for printing. System information is saved as SYSINFO.TXT. A message box tells you where the file is saved.

 Related Topics


Viewing document information

CorelDRAW displays detailed information about the contents of your document and the objects it contains. You can print and save this information for future reference.

To view document information

1.	Click File, Document Info.

2.	Enable the check boxes beside each object you want to display.

 Related Topics


Saving and Printing document information

You can save document information in a text file that can be opened by other applications, such as word processing software. You can also print document information.

To save document information

1.	Click File, Document Info.

2.	Click the Save As button.

3.	Double-click the folder where you want to save the file.

4.	Type a filename in the File Name box.

5.	Click the Save button.

To print document information

1.	Click File, Document Info.

2.	Click the Print button.

 Related Topics


Displaying warning messages


Overview: Displaying warning messages
Displaying warning messages

You may encounter warning messages while working in CorelDRAW. Warning messages explain the consequences of an action you are about to perform, and inform you of permanent changes that might result from that action.

Although the warnings are helpful, you may not want to view them after you become familiar with the software. Avoid disabling warning messages until you are comfortable with the application and familiar with the results of the commands you use.

 Related Topics


Enabling and disabling warning messages

You can enable or disable any warning message.

To enable or disable warning messages

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Options dialog box, click Workspace, Warnings in the list of categories.

3.	Enable or disable one or more of the check boxes.


Creating documents for the World Wide Web


Overview: Creating documents for the World Wide Web
Creating documents for the World Wide Web

CorelDRAW gives you the tools to create professional-looking multipage Web documents. You can make your mark by using CorelDRAW to create documents that visually clarify concepts and that are easy to navigate.

Before you create your Web document, you should take some time to plan the structure of your document. Decide which elements in your document you want to emphasize and how you want visitors to move around within the document. You want to create a Web document that gets your message across, that is easy and intuitive to navigate, and is enjoyable to visit.

To ensure that the graphics in your document will display well on the World Wide Web, you need to choose an image type that Web browsers can read. The two most popular image types are Graphics Interchange Format (.GIF) and Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG or .JPG).

CorelDRAW provides various Internet objects, such as radio buttons, that you can use in your drawing. An important aspect to consider as you design your Web document is the positioning of objects to which you want to assign Uniform Resource Locators (URLs) and bookmarks, and of text that is to be HTML-compatible. When you're satisfied with the construction of your Web document, you can publish the document directly to HTML.

 More Detailed Information


Creating HTML text


Overview: Creating HTML text
Creating HTML text

You can convert standard Paragraph text to HTML text so that you can edit the text of your published document in a Web browser. If you don't convert Paragraph text to HTML text before you publish your document to the Internet, the text is converted to a bitmap when published and cannot be edited in a browser. Artistic text cannot be converted to HTML text and is always treated as a bitmap.

After you convert standard Paragraph text to HTML text, you can select the font, size, and style for your text that is supported by HTML. The default HTML font is used automatically unless you override it with another font. Even if you choose to override it, the default font is used if visitors to your site don't have the same font installed on their computers. The usual text styles, including bold, italic, and underline, are also available. In addition, you can apply uniform fills, but not outlines, to HTML text.

Like other Internet objects in your document, HTML text resides on the Internet layer. The Internet layer is created automatically when you convert your text to HTML.

 Related Topics


Converting Paragraph text to HTML text

You can edit the HTML text in your published document directly in a Web browser. Any non-HTML-compatible text in your document is converted to bitmaps when you publish your document to the Internet. For information about entering Paragraph text in your document, see "Adding Paragraph text."

To convert Paragraph text to HTML text

1.	Select the Paragraph text with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Text, Make Text HTML Compatible.

 Notes

•	Ensure that the HTML text does not intersect or overlap other Internet objects or extend beyond the boundaries of your Drawing Page; otherwise the text will be converted to a bitmap and it will lose its Internet properties.

•	Artistic text cannot be converted to HTML text and will always be converted to a bitmap.

 Related Topics


Formatting HTML text

After you convert Paragraph text to HTML text, you can use the Property Bar and the Format Text dialog box to change its font, font size, and style.

To format HTML text using the Property Bar

1.	Select an HTML text object with the Pick tool.

2.	Choose the font you want to use from the Font list box.

3.	Choose the font size you want to use from the HTML Font Size list box.

4.	Apply any other formatting properties you want, for example italic or underline.

To format HTML text using the Format Text dialog box

1.	Select an HTML text object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Click one of the following tabs:

•	Internet Text [image] lets you set the alignment, font, size, and style of the text

•	Align [image] lets you align and indent the text

•	Frames And Columns [image] lets you set the column and paragraph width of the text

4.	Apply the formatting properties you want.

 Note

•	The HTML text sizes, numbered 1 through 7, correspond to particular point sizes between the 10-point and 48-point range.

 Related Topics


Inserting Internet objects


Overview: Inserting Internet objects
Inserting Internet objects

CorelDRAW provides you with a set of Internet objects, such as radio buttons and check boxes, with their functions already specified. All Internet objects in your Web document are placed above all other objects on the Internet layer. The Internet layer is generated automatically when you create an Internet object. Graphical objects to which you assign URLs reside on the graphics layers. For more information about URLs see "Creating Hyperlinks."

You can customize Internet objects and place them anywhere in your drawing as long as they don't overlap one another. If they do intersect or overlap, they will be combined and treated as one large bitmap image. Leaving space around Internet objects helps to ensure that these will function correctly in a browser and helps to keep the appearance of your document clean and attractive. However, Internet objects can overlap non-Internet objects in your drawing because non-Internet objects reside on regular graphics layers.

 Related Topics


Inserting an Internet object

You can insert a variety of Internet objects, such as Java applets, radio buttons, submit buttons, check boxes, text edit boxes, and pop-up menus, in your HTML document.

To insert an Internet object

•	Click Edit, Insert Internet Object, and click the object you want.

 Note

•	Except for Java applets and Embedded files, all other Internet objects require a CGI Script address. Otherwise, these Internet objects might not function properly in your Web document once it is published to the Web. For more information about CGI Script addresses, see Adding a CGI Script address.

 Related Topics


Customizing an Internet object

You can customize each type of Internet object to create special User Interface controls that suit your needs. You can use the Object Properties Docker window to make the modifications you want, or you can use the controls on the Property Bar.

To customize an Internet object using the Property Bar

1.	Select an Internet object with the Pick tool.

2.	Use the controls on the Property Bar to customize the object as you want.

To customize an Internet object

1.	Right-click an Internet object, and click Properties.

2.	In the Object Properties Docker window, click the Internet object's tab.

3.	Use the controls on the object's page to customize the object as you want.

 Related Topics


Adding a CGI Script address

If your document has form-related Internet objects, you need a CGI script address to enable these Internet objects to work better once your document is published to the Internet. Except for Java applets and Embedded files, the rest of the Internet objects which CorelDRAW provides are form related.

You can specify a method for sending the CGI script address to the server. You can also choose a frame type in which to display your Web document.

To type the CGI Script address of the Internet object

1.	Click in a white space to deselect any objects.

2.	Click Edit, Properties.

3.	Click the Form tab.

4.	Type the CGI Script address in the URL Of CGI Script box.

5.	Click the Apply button.

To choose a method for sending the CGI Script address to the server

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose a method from the Method list box.

3.	Click the Apply button.

To choose a frame type

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To choose a method for sending the CGI Script address to the server" procedure.

2.	Choose a frame type from the Target list box.

3.	Click the Apply button.

 Related Topics


Creating Hyperlinks


Overview: Creating Hyperlinks
Creating Hyperlinks

In CorelDRAW, you can create hypergraphics that act as hyperlink navigation tools for your HTML documents. By creating hyperlinks, you can connect to any object in your document that is assigned a bookmark or to any document published on the Internet by using that document's Uniform Resource Locator (URL).

What is a hyperlink?

A text or graphical hyperlink (hypertext or hypergraphic) is used to jump to a specific address that's defined by a URL. In addition to the URL, a hypergraphic also consists of a hotspot. The hotspot is the area of the object that you can click to jump to the address specified by the object. It appears with a foreground cross-hatch pattern and a background fill pattern. You can change the colors of the cross-hatch pattern and the background fill. You can also set whether the hotspot follows the contour of the object, whether it is limited to the same areas as the object's fill, or whether the hotspot fills the object's entire bounding box.

What is a bookmark?

A bookmark is a unique name that you can assign to text or graphics in your document. A bookmark acts as an address, or URL, for the object to which it is assigned. Any bookmarked object can be accessed from within the same document or from an external HTML document by using a hyperlink to that bookmark. For information about bookmarking text or graphics, see "Assigning a bookmark."

The Internet Bookmark Manager contains a list of all the bookmarks you've assigned throughout your document. Each bookmark is listed by name and by the page on which it's located. You can rename a bookmark, and create a hyperlink from an object in your document to the bookmarked object you choose from the Bookmark list. If the bookmarked object isn't on the current page, the document switches to the correct page. The Internet Bookmark Manager also lets you clear a bookmark from the Bookmark list.

What is a Uniform Resource Locator?

A Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is a unique address you assign that defines where a document is found on the Internet, such as http://www.corel.com/visitors/welcome.htm. The first portion, "http," identifies the type of Internet resource that's being requested, such as the World Wide Web (http), FTP, or Gopher. The next portion, "www.corel.com," identifies the server where the document is located and is followed by the folder structure, "visitors." The last part of the URL, "welcome.htm," is the filename.

To successfully connect an Internet object in your published Web document, and another document on the Internet, each URL component must exactly match the URL address to which you want to connect. To connect to a page, or to a specific location on a page within the document you're browsing, you only need to type the specific page or location address.

 Related Topics


Defining a hypergraphic's hotspot

Each hypergraphic has an area called a hotspot. You can define the object's hotspot by using the tools on the Internet Objects toolbar or the controls on the Object Properties Docker.

To display the Internet Objects toolbar

1.	Click Window, Toolbars.

2.	In the Options dialog box, enable the Internet Objects check box.

To assign a hotspot using the Internet Objects toolbar

1.	Select an object with the Pick tool.

2.	On the Internet Objects toolbar, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Use Object Shape To Define Hotspot

•	Use Bounding Box To Define Hotspot

 Tip

•	The Use Object Shape To Define Hotspot and Use Bounding Box To Define Hotspot buttons are enabled when they appear pressed.

To assign a hotspot using Object Properties

1.	Using the Pick tool, right-click an object, and click Properties.

2.	In the Object Properties Docker window, click the Internet tab.

3.	In the Link Extent section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Use Object Bounding Box [image] lets you use the object as the hotspot

•	Use Object Shape button [image] lets you use the object's bounding box as the hotspot

 Related Topics


Identifying hypergraphics in your drawing

CorelDRAW lets you identify the hypergraphics you create in your drawing. You can determine the color of the hypergraphic's cross-hatch pattern and background fill. If you select a hypergraphic first and then change the foreground and background hotspot colors, the change applies to the selected object only. If you change the hotspot colors with no object selected, the default colors are changed for this drawing and for future sessions of CorelDRAW.

To assign a foreground hotspot color

•	On the Internet Objects toolbar, click the Foreground Color Of Hotspot color picker, and click a color swatch.

To assign a background hotspot color

•	On the Internet Objects toolbar, click the Background Color Of Hotspot color picker, and click a color swatch.

To display Internet objects in your document

•	On the Internet Objects toolbar, enable the Show Hotspots button.

All objects to which you've assigned URLs display in the foreground and background hotspot colors.

 Related Topics


Assigning a bookmark

You can assign a new or existing bookmark to any text or graphic object in your drawing by using the Internet Objects toolbar or the Internet page under the Object Properties Docker.

To assign a bookmark using the Internet Objects toolbar

1.	Select an object with the Pick tool.

You can select a text object or a graphical object.

2.	Type the name you want to assign to the object in the Internet Bookmark box.

3.	Press ENTER.

To assign a bookmark using Object Properties

1.	Using the Pick tool, right-click an object, and click Properties.

2.	In the Object Properties Docker window, click the Internet tab.

3.	Type the name you want to assign to the object in the Bookmark box.

4.	Click the Apply button.

 Note

•	You can rename any of your bookmarks by typing in the appropriate box on the Internet Objects toolbar or the Internet page in the Object Properties Docker window.

 Tip

•	You can also assign a bookmark name by right-clicking on an object.

 Related Topics


Using the Internet Bookmark Manager

Using the Internet Bookmark Manager, you can create a hyperlink to an object that has already been bookmarked. You can also manage bookmarks by selecting, removing, or renaming them.

To create a hyperlink to a bookmarked object

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the object for which you want to create a hyperlink to a bookmarked object.

2.	Click Tools, Internet Bookmark Manager.

3.	Choose the bookmark name to which you want to link the object from the Bookmark list.

4.	Click the Link button.

 Note

•	You cannot hyperlink a bookmark to itself.

To select a bookmark in your document

1.	Click Tools, Internet Bookmark Manager.

2.	In the Bookmark Manager Docker window, do one of the following:

•	Choose the bookmark from the Bookmark list.

•	Choose the page on which the bookmark is located from the Page list.

3.	Click the Select button.

To remove a bookmark from an object

1.	Click Tools, Internet Bookmark Manager.

2.	In the Bookmark Manager Docker window, do one of the following:

•	Choose the bookmark from the Bookmark list.

•	Choose the page on which the bookmark is located from the Page list.

3.	Click the Remove button.

To rename a bookmark from the bookmark list

1.	Click Tools, Internet Bookmark Manager.

2.	Choose the name of the bookmark you want to edit from the Bookmark list.

3.	Type the new name.

 Related Topics


Assigning a Uniform Resource Locator

You can create a hyperlink from any text or graphic object in your drawing to another document published on the World Wide Web by assigning that document's Uniform Resource Locator (URL) to the selected object. You can assign a URL to the selected object using the Internet Objects toolbar or the Object Properties Docker.

To assign a URL using the Internet Objects toolbar

1.	Select an object with the Pick tool.

You can select a text object or a graphical object.

2.	In the Internet Address list box, do one of the following:

•	Type the URL to which you want to create a link.

•	Choose a URL from the list.

3.	Press ENTER.

To assign a URL using Object Properties

1.	Using the Pick tool, right-click an object, and click Properties.

2.	In the Object Properties Docker window, click the Internet tab.

3.	In the Location (URL) list box, do one of the following:

•	Type the URL to which you want to create a link.

•	Choose a URL from the list.

 Note

•	You can edit a URL by typing in the appropriate box in the Internet Objects toolbar or the Internet page in the Object Properties Docker window.

 Note

•	You can also assign a URL by right-clicking an object and choosing the Internet Links option.

 Related Topics


Verifying links

You can verify the hyperlinks in your drawing to another document published on the World Wide Web using the Link Manager. For more information on the Link Manager see "Using the Link Manager."

To verify links using the Link Manager

1.	Click Tools, Link Manager

2.	In the list verify, that all URL links have a green check mark status.

3.	Click the Resolve button to verify any broken links.

To view a URL link using your browser

1.	Select an object with a URL link.

2.	Right-click the object, and click Jump To Hyperlink In Browser.

 Related Topics


Checking your document for HTML object conflicts


Overview: Checking your document for HTML object conflicts
Checking your document for HTML object conflicts

You can ensure that your Web document publishes to the Internet successfully by performing conflict verification tests on the drawing. You can determine the type of object conflict to be verified.

 Related Topics


Setting HTML object conflict verification options

CorelDRAW lets you determine what you want tested in the HTML object conflict verification process. You can specify your preferences that pertain to your document.

To set HTML object conflict verification options

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Document, Publish to Internet, and click HTML Conflicts.

3.	Enable the check boxes that correspond to the HTML object conflicts you want to verify.

 Tip

•	You can also click the Analyzer Options button from the HTML Conflict Docker.

 Related Topics


Scanning your document for HTML object conflicts

You can scan your Web document before you publish it to the Internet to ensure that there are no conflicts between Internet objects. You can scan the current page or the entire drawing for HTML object conflicts. Any HTML object conflicts that are verified in your drawing are listed on the HTML Object Conflict Analyzer Docker.

To scan the current page of your document for HTML object conflicts

1.	Click Tools, HTML Object Conflict.

2.	Click the Rescan The Current Page button.

To scan your entire document for HTML object conflicts

1.	Click Tools, HTML Object Conflict.

2.	Click the Rescan The Entire Document button.

 Related Topics


Repairing HTML object conflicts

You can use the HTML Object Conflict Analyzer Docker to identify conflicts between Internet objects in your Web document. Some object conflicts can be repaired automatically by using the controls on the Docker, while other conflicts will require you to repair them manually.

To scroll up to an error or warning message in the object conflict list

•	Click the Move To Previous Error button.

To scroll down to an error or warning message in the object conflict list

•	Click the Move To Next Error button.

To locate the conflicting object in your document

•	Click the Select Object From The Current Error button.

To repair the conflicting object in your document automatically

•	Click the Fix The Current Error button.

 Note

•	If the conflicting object cannot be repaired automatically, you'll have to repair the conflict in your Web document manually.

 Related Topics


Publishing to the Internet


Overview: Publishing to the Internet
Publishing to the Internet

You are now ready to publish your document to the Internet. With CorelDRAW you have several options when publishing. The Publish To Internet wizard guides you through each step of the publishing process and lets you choose basic Internet publishing options. The Publish To Internet dialog box also contains all the options you need to successfully publish your document to the Internet. You can also customize the Publish to Internet feature by setting the options to suit your needs.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Publishing documents to the Internet


Overview: Publishing documents to the Internet
Publishing documents to the Internet

When you publish your document to HTML, CorelDRAW creates an HTML document that appears identical to the source document when viewed in Web browsers. Also, you can choose to export the graphics in your document to either the JPEG or GIF image type format. All of these bitmaps are saved in an image folder of your choice [image] usually a subfolder of the source HTML folder.

For objects in your drawing that are assigned Uniform Resource Locators (URLs), CorelDRAW creates a reference to the object in the HTML document and automatically generates HTML codes that contain all of the information necessary to match the position of a cursor click to a specific URL.

When you publish your document as a single image, CorelDRAW creates an image map. An image map is a hypergraphic that links to different URLs when you view the HTML document with a browser. When you click an image map, the HTML document to which it is linked appears. An image map graphic is made up of an image and a series of coordinates describing the location of the hotspots on the image. When you publish your CorelDRAW document as a single image, you can export the graphics in your document to the JPEG or GIF image type format. You can also choose to export any imported bitmaps at a resolution of 96 dots per inch (dpi).

 Related Topics


Publishing your document to the Internet

CorelDRAW documents that are published in Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) format appear identical to the source document when viewed in Web browsers. CorelDRAW assigns the extension .HTM to documents you publish in the HTML format. By default, .HTM files share the same name as the CorelDRAW .CDR source file and are saved in the last folder you used to place exported Web documents.

To publish a document

1.	Click File, Publish To Internet.

2.	Click the Use Internet Dialog button.

3.	Choose one of the following from the HTML layout list:

•	HTML Table

•	Layers

•	Styles

•	Single Image with Image Map

4.	Choose the folder in which you want to save your published HTML document from the HTML Folder list box. You can also click the Browse button to choose a different folder.

5.	Do one the following to specify the location of the images:

•	Disable the Use HTML Name check box and specify the name of the folder in which you want to save the bitmaps in your document.

•	Enable the Use HTML Name check box.

6.	Click the Export All Pages button if you want to export all of the pages in a multipage Web document.

You can also enable individual check boxes to export specific pages.

7.	Enable the Replace Existing Files check box if you want CorelDRAW to automatically overwrite existing files with the corresponding files you've updated. If you don't enable the Replace Existing Files check box, CorelDRAW will ask for permission before overwriting any existing files.

8.	Enable the View Page In Browser check box if you want to start your browser and verify the page.

9.	Enable the Statistics Page checkbox if you want to generate a document listing the page information.

 Notes

•	You can edit the title and filename of each page in your Web document in the Page List section of the Publish To Internet dialog box.

•	On the Publish To Internet page, in the HTML Layout section, Layers and Styles create simpler and smaller files than the HTML Tables option. However, if you want your document to be compatible with most Web browsers, select the HTML Tables option.


Setting HTML export options


Overview: Setting HTML export options
Setting HTML export options

CorelDRAW provides various options that you can specify for publishing your document to the Internet. Setting the amount of white space and its position are only a couple of ways in which you can customize your final product. You can export the images in your document to the Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG or .JPG) or Graphics Interchange Format (.GIF) format types when you publish to the Internet. The JPEG and GIF image types are standard bitmap file formats that most Web browsers can read and display.

If you export your graphics to the JPEG format, you can choose to have them display progressively when viewed in a Web browser. JPEG files support lossy compression, providing high-quality images with a high level of compression. If you export your graphics to the GIF format, you can choose to have them display in a Web browser using image interlacing. GIF files provide lossless compression, which means that when you convert to .GIF, the file information is stored with the image, and the .GIF file looks almost exactly like the graphic you created.

 Related Topics


Choosing HTML export preferences

You can customize the Publish to Internet options to suit your needs. Specifying the type of text and graphic export will create consistent documents for the World Wide Web.

To choose an export image type

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Document, Publish to Internet, and click Image.

3.	On the Image page, enable one of the following buttons:

•	JPG

•	GIF

4.	For a GIF image type, select a palette from the Palette Type list.

5.	For a GIF image type, enable the Interlace check box if you want your image to display in its entirety in your browser.

6.	Enable one or more of the export checkboxes to set the image options.

7.	For Image Maps, enable the Client or Server checkboxes. If you are using the Server option you must also enable the NCSA or CERN button.

To choose HTML export preferences

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Document, and click Publish To Internet.

3.	On the Publish To Internet page, choose the type of HTML layout you want to use when you export your document to the Internet from the list.

4.	Type values in the following boxes for the HTML layout you choose:

•	Position Tolerance [image] lets you specify the number of pixels text can be automatically nudged in order to avoid introducing rows or columns that are 1 or 2 pixels in size.

•	Image White Space [image] lets you specify the number of pixels that can occur in an empty cell before it's merged with an adjacent cell, in order to avoid splitting a single graphic that spans adjacent cells. Cells, or tables, are used to position Internet objects in your Web document when you choose the HTML Tables layout method.

•	Position White Space [image] lets you specify the amount of white space allowed in an image in order to make your published Web document simpler.

5.	In the list of categories, double-click Publish To Internet, and click Text.

6.	Enable one of the following buttons to choose the method with which you want to export the text in your Web document:

•	Export HTML-compatible Text As Text [image] exports the text as a single image

•	Export All Text As Images [image] exports the text as a single image compatible for all browsers

•	Export HTML compatible Text as text using TrueDoc [image] exports the text using TrueDoc for use in Netscape Comunicator

7.	In the list of categories click Links.

8.	Enable the check boxes to apply underline and color properties to any text that is assigned a URL in your Web document.

The link colors you set in the Options dialog box will override the default link colors used in your Web browser, eliminating any conflict between link color and your document's page background color.


CorelDRAW 9 provides new and exciting features and enhancements that increase productivity and performance. For example, you can now display multiple color palettes simultaneously, you can acquire images from more than 120 digital camera models. New and improved interactive tools available directly from the Toolbox and 50 new special effects filters help you create professional drawings. In addition, improved color options help you achieve predictable color, and printing enhancements allow you to manage print jobs with ease. Furthermore, there are several support applications included with CorelDRAW 9, such as CorelTRACE, which lets you capture on-screen videos or images.


CorelDRAW 9 provides increased usability and user customization. For example, you can substitute the Title Bars of Docker windows with Gripper Bars, display multiple color palettes in the Drawing Window, automatically update "Corel on the Web" links, and add sound feedback using the standard Windows Sound interface.


You can customize your workspace to display multiple color palettes simultaneously to improve the speed and flexibility with which you create drawings. You can also select a default color palette for each workspace.


You can remove redundant information on a Docker window by substituting the Title Bar with a Gripper Bar of an undocked Docker window. And you can collapse undocked Docker Windows to make the drawing area more visible.


You can associate sounds to certain events in CorelDRAW 9 using the standard Windows Sound interface.


CorelDRAW 9 updates "Corel on the Web" links automatically. The new Update Links command lets you download the latest list of Internet links from the Corel Web site. Software information, news, and special offers are some of the links included in this list.


CorelDRAW 9 lets you acquire images directly from a digital camera and create PDF files identical to your image. You can exchange files between CorelDRAW and Corel PHOTO-PAINT, as well as between PC and Macintosh, and you can keep track of external links to bitmaps using the Link Manager Docker window. CorelDRAW 9 includes Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA), which lets you build custom business solutions by automating and integrating off-the-shelf software applications.


CorelDRAW 9 features an interface for acquiring images from more than 120 digital camera models, including Casio Epson, Fujifilm, Hewlett-Packard, Konica, NEC, Nikon, Olympus, Panasonic, Ricoh, Sanyo, and Sharp! You can acquire images directly from a digital camera, and you can transfer images to digital cameras for storage, sharing, and review.


The new Publish to PDF feature lets you create PDF files identical to your original image, increasing publishing capabilities. Some of the options available are advanced text and font handling, downsampling and compression, job ticketing, bookmarking and hyperlinking, and color management.


CorelDRAW 9 provides a common workspace that enables you to exchange files not only between CorelDRAW and Corel PHOTO-PAINT for PC, but also between these products and CorelDRAW and Corel PHOTO-PAINT for Power Macintosh.


Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) 6 is the leading application customization technology. It lets you build custom business solutions by automating and integrating off-the-shelf software applications to meet specific customer needs. Developers who use VBA to extend CorelDRAW 9 applications benefit from the familiar Visual Basic programming language, an integrated Rapid Application Development (RAD) environment, and fast runtime performance. Developers also benefit from the Microsoft Forms Package and support for ActiveX(TM) controls to create rich user interfaces, provide easy access to the Windows API and the underlying file system, add connectivity to corporate data, and integrate with other Component Object Model-based software.


The new Link Manager Docker window prepares an organized list of all new external references in a document to help you keep track of all external links. These links can be Uniform Resource Locators (URLs) or externally linked bitmap images. The Link Manager Docker window also provides valuable link information, such as valid, broken, or out-of-date information, which is useful if you deliver files to service bureaus or external contacts, or if you create documents for the World Wide Web.


CorelDRAW 9 includes new interactive tools that let you create special effects quickly and easily. For example, the Interactive Contour tool adds concentric shapes to objects; the Interactive Mesh Fill tool adds a grid with intersecting points to objects; the Connector Line tool lets you create flow charts, and the improved Interactive Drop Shadow tool lets you change the perspective of drop shadows.


The new Interactive Contour tool lets you create contoured objects by dragging the mouse in any direction to create an interactive vector line that adjusts the number of concentric shapes.


The Interactive Mesh Fill tool lets you produce multipoint fills that can be printed on any device. You can create smooth color transitions in any direction without having to create a large number of objects with blends and contours.


The Connector Line tool lets you draw flow and organization charts by linking objects with connector lines. You can detach connector lines to edit objects, and then reattach them. If you move linked objects, the connector lines are automatically redrawn.


The Interactive Drop Shadow tool now lets you create perspective drop shadows in CorelDRAW 9. The sides of the shadow converge to a vanishing point to create the illusion of a three-dimension depth. You can change a shadow's direction, and the distance between it and the object, its color and opacity, and the feathering of its edges.


CorelDRAW 9 offers new convenience features to help you complete your drawing. For example, you can set the amount of line smoothing, reduce the number of nodes on an object, utilize preset guidelines, round the corners of rectangles, and access the position and size values of an object.


You can set the amount of smoothing that is applied to lines you draw with the Freehand tool. Any subsequent lines that you draw will use the last settings specified.


You can reduce the number of nodes on an object. This simplifies drawings and makes drawings easier to edit and print.


Align the objects in your drawing by applying guidelines as you draw or by opening a document with guidelines already in place. You can choose preset guidelines or define your own.


Use the enhanced Rectangle tool to round the corners of a rectangle individually or as a group.


The Property Bar now displays the position and size values of an object as you create an object.


Fifty new special effects filters let you transform your drawing into impressionist or watercolor paintings, professional-style sketches, stained glass windows, and more. You can also add effects such as rain or crystal fragments. Then, finish the final product with one of 150 preset frames.


The Impressionist special effects filter lets you transform your drawing into the style of the impressionist masters.


The Sketch Pad special effects filter lets you transform a drawing into a graphite or colored pencil drawing.


The Watercolor special effects filter lets you transform a drawing into a watercolor painting and apply a full range of watercolor techniques.


The Frame special effects filter lets you apply any of 150 preset vignettes to a drawing.


The Stained Glass special effects filter lets you transform a drawing into a stained-glass creation, with optional three-dimensional light.


The Weather special effects filter lets you add weather elements to your image including rain, snow, and fog.


The Crystalize special effects filter lets you make your drawing look as if it is created with crystal fragments.


CorelDRAW 9 includes improved color and printing options that make it easy for you to publish your work. Achieve predictable color with ICC color management, create custom color palettes, or produce customized layouts with fold marks and gutters. You can quickly preview print jobs and get early warnings of potential printing errors.


You can achieve predictable color with ICC color management. Choose from hundreds of preset device profiles or import your own. You can embed ICC profiles into various file formats such as CDR, CPT, EPS, and TIFF which helps you manage the color of images or files between applications.


You can quickly preview print jobs with the new Mini Print Preview, which is a compact version of the full Print Preview window.


The Preflight page in the Print dialog box provides important feedback about a print job. For example, controls on the page warn you of potential printing errors associated with your file.


Create your own custom color palettes or edit existing custom palettes with the Palette Editor. Its intuitive user interface makes creating and editing color palettes easier.


The Imposition Layout tool lets you create advanced signature layouts, including predefined or customized layouts, advanced binding options, page rotation, fold marks, and gutters.  It can also be used to print a file numerous times on one sheet of paper.


CorelDRAW 9 includes a variety of supporting applications to enhance your ability to work on drawings. For example, you can convert bitmap images to vector images, develop macros to automate tasks, or modify saved recordings and scripts. You can also use supporting applications to capture on-screen videos or images, install and preview fonts, and organize graphic files into a catalog to help you locate and access images.


CorelTRACE is a bitmap-to-vector training utility that lets you convert bitmap images to vector images.


CorelSCRIPT lets you develop macros and scripts to automate tasks in CorelDRAW 9.


Corel SCRIPT Editor lets you modify saved recordings or scripts. Use Corel SCRIPT Editor to edit commands and add commands that you can not record, or write scripts from scratch to automate tasks in CorelDRAW. Corel SCRIPT Editor also includes features to test, debug, and run script files.


Corel CAPTURE 9 is an advanced screen-capture utility that lets you capture on-screen videos or images, such as the active Drawing Window, the active client, the full screen, or a user-defined area. You can customize shortcut keys, preferences, and file destination, name, or type.


 Bitstream Font Navigator 3.0 is a font manager that lets you find, install, view and print sample fonts. You can also use Bitstream Font Navigator 3.0 to organize fonts into manageable groups.


 Canto Cumulus Desktop 4.0 lets you organize media and graphic files into a indexed catalog that can be indexed so that you can find images, designs, clipart, stock photos, and QuickTime movies quickly and easily.


You can view the Corel World Wide Web site for designers at http://designer.com


Designer.com is the Corel World Wide Web site for designers. You can view tips and tricks, articles, links, and newsgroups at Designer.com.


The Interact pages of Designer.com offer a forum for discussion. You can read a list of frequently asked questions (FAQs) and participate in newsgroups. Live chat sessions will be added in the future. The Interact pages also contain information about tradeshows, conferences, seminars, and the Corel World Design Contest.


Designer.com contains links to World Wide Web sites about design issues. You can suggest links to add or browse the following link categories:

•	Our Favorite Sites [image] highlights design Web sites each month

•	Design Inspirations [image] lists Web sites about creating attractive Web pages

•	Design References [image] contains information about design issues, such as color, printing, and typography

•	Web References [image] provides information about Web page design, such as banner design and HTML codes


You can browse the Designer.com World Wide Web site to obtain

•	a list of locations of all Corel Approved Service Bureaus from the Services page

•	service packs and plug-ins from the Updates and Patches pages

•	technical support options from the Support page


You can find information about Corel products by browsing the Product pages. The Product pages also contain information on how designers use Corel products.

The Corel eStore lets you order products online or search a database to find a store near you. Third-party products and plug-ins will be added to the Designer.com site in the future.


You can submit comments about the Designer.com World Wide Web site by posting to the newsgroups or sending us feedback by email to editor-designer@corel.com.


Corel Greetings Online lets you send electronic cards to your family and friends. Simple instructions prompt you at each step.


Organizing objects


Overview: Organizing objects
Organizing objects

CorelDRAW provides powerful tools for arranging and organizing objects in your drawings. You can accomplish tasks that range from simple operations like copying, grouping, and combining objects, to more advanced operations, such as using the Object Manager to organize an entire document.

You can control the vertical order of objects in a drawing, and align or distribute objects on the page. The object arrangement tools can help you expand the scope of your creativity and increase your efficiency.

This chapter also provides information on finding and replacing object and text properties, grouping and ungrouping objects, duplicating and cloning objects, and using layers to organize your drawing.

For people in charge of creating or supervising large projects, there is also a section on using the Object Data Manager. The Object Data Manager is an advanced feature of CorelDRAW that helps you track expenses, deadlines, assignments, progress and other project-related tasks you need to organize.

 More Detailed Information


Undoing and redoing changes


Overview: Undoing and redoing changes
Undoing and redoing changes

CorelDRAW gives you the freedom and flexibility to experiment and be creative without worrying about permanently altering your drawings or having to start over. If you make a change to your document, then wish you hadn't, you can undo the change.

You can:

•	undo the last few actions performed

•	change the number of undo levels, up to a number limited only by your system's memory configuration

•	undo a series of changes from a chosen point, and redo them if you choose [image] regardless of how many times you have already saved your drawing

•	undo all changes since you last saved, and revert to the last saved version of your drawing

•	repeat commands and copy object properties from one object to another

The ability to repeat commands and copy object properties means you can apply the same properties to several objects without having to recreate them each time.

 Related Topics


Undoing the last change

You can undo the last several actions you performed.

To undo the last change

•	Click Edit, Undo.

 Related Topics


Changing the number of undo levels

You can undo 99 actions by default. You can increase or decrease this default number to suit your needs.

To change the number of undo levels

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Workspace, General.

3.	Type a value in the Regular box in the Undo Levels section.

The number of undo levels is limited only by your system's memory configuration.

 Note

•	The higher the undo value, the greater the demand on your system resources will be.

 Related Topics


Undoing a series of changes

You can view a chronological list of the last several actions performed and choose the point from which to undo them. The action you choose, and all those that follow it, are reversed.

To undo a series of changes

1.	Click the Undo List button on the Standard toolbar.

2.	Choose a command from the Undo list.

 Notes

•	Use this option to undo some or all changes since your last save.

•	File Open, File New, and File Save do not appear in the Undo list because they can't be undone.

 Tip

•	You can undo changes regardless of how many times you have saved your document.

 Related Topics


Undoing all changes since you last saved

You can revert to the last saved version of your file. This function is useful if you tend to save your file whenever you are satisfied with the latest changes in your drawing.

To undo all changes since you last saved

•	Click File, Revert.

 Related Topics


Redoing a series of changes

You can view a chronological list of each action undone and choose the point from which to redo the undone actions. The action you choose, and all those that follow it, are redone.

To redo a series of changes

1.	Click the Redo List button on the Standard toolbar.

2.	Choose a command from the Redo list.

 Related Topics


Repeating commands

You can repeat commands in CorelDRAW. For example, you can fill one object, then select another and fill it with the same fill.

To repeat a command

1.	Select an object with the Pick tool and apply one of the following commands:

•	Fill

•	Outline

•	Move

•	Scale

•	Skew

•	Nudge

•	Rotate

•	Duplicate

•	Copy Attributes From

2.	Select another object with the Pick tool, and click Edit, Repeat [command name].

 Note

•	The command name in the Edit menu changes depending on the command you're repeating, for example, Repeat Move, Repeat Skew, etc.

 Related Topics


Copying object properties

When you apply a fill or outline to an object, you can copy the same properties to another object.

To copy another object's fill properties

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the object to which you want to copy the properties.

2.	Click Edit, Copy Properties From.

3.	Enable one or more of the following check boxes:

•	Outline Pen [image] copies outline pen attributes from one object to another

•	Outline Color [image] copies outline color attributes from one object to another

•	Fill [image] copies fill attributes from one object to another

•	Text Properties [image] copies text attributes from one text object to another

4.	Click OK. The cursor changes to a large arrow.

5.	Click the object that contains the properties you want to copy.

 Related Topics


Arranging objects


Overview: Arranging objects
Arranging objects

You can use many basic editing functions to arrange objects in your drawing. You can manipulate objects by using the Clipboard to cut, copy, and paste them. The Clipboard is a temporary storage area used to transfer text and graphics between applications, as well as within or between CorelDRAW files.

CorelDRAW also offers advanced features such as cloning and duplicating.

Cloning copies selected objects directly on screen, creating a connection between the original object (the "master") and the new object (the "clone"). This connection means that any changes made to the master object are also applied to the clone. For example, if you change the master's fill, the clone's fill also changes.

Duplicating places a copy of the initial object directly on screen, offsetting it slightly from the original object. The duplicate takes on all of the original object's attributes, but has no lasting connection to the original object.

CorelDRAW lets you change the offset for duplicated and cloned objects to suit your needs.

You can also delete objects. When you delete an object instead of cutting it, CorelDRAW does not place it on the Clipboard. Delete an object (rather than cutting it) only when you are sure you will not use it again.

 Related Topics


Using the Clipboard to copy objects

You can copy or cut an object and place it on the Clipboard. Then you can paste it from the Clipboard back onto the Drawing Window.

To copy an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Edit, Copy.

To cut an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Edit, Cut.

To paste an object from the Clipboard

•	Click Edit, Paste.

If the object was cut or copied from CorelDRAW, it is placed at the same location from which it was cut or copied.

 Tip

•	You can also access the Cut, Copy and Paste commands by right-clicking a selected object in the Drawing Window.

 Related Topics


Duplicating objects

Duplicating objects is the quickest way to create copies of them. When you duplicate an object, CorelDRAW creates a copy of it and places it above and to the right of the original object, with a default offset of 0.25 inches (or the equivalent in other units of measurement). For information about changing the offset distance, see "Changing the offset for duplicates and clones."

After you move the duplicated object, you can duplicate it again to create another copy. The new duplicate is placed the same distance from the first duplicate as the first duplicate was from the original. This type of duplicate is called smart duplicate.

To duplicate an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Edit, Duplicate.

To duplicate an object using smart duplication

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Edit, Duplicate.

3.	Select the duplicate with the Pick tool, and move it to another position on the Drawing Page.

4.	Click Edit, Duplicate.

 Note

•	Smart duplication settings revert to the default after you deselect the object, select another object, or change tools. The smart duplicate maintains the relative stretch, skew, and rotation attributes of the last duplicate.

 Tip

•	To make many duplicates of an object quickly, select the object with the Pick tool and move it around the Drawing Window while holding down the SPACEBAR.

 Related Topics


Cloning objects

Cloning creates an offset copy of an object that remains linked to the original object. When you clone an object, the changes you make to the original object (the master) are automatically applied to the copy (the clone).

To clone an object

1.	Select the original object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Edit, Clone.

To determine a clone's master object

•	Right-click the clone, and click Select Master.

To determine a master's clones

•	Right-click the master, and click Select Clones.

To revert to a clone's master

1.	Select the modified clone with the Pick tool.

2.	Right-click the clone, and click Revert to Master.

3.	In the Revert To Master dialog box, enable one or more of the following check boxes:

•	Clone Fill [image] restores the master fill attributes

•	Clone Outline [image] restores the master outline attributes

•	Clone Path Shape [image] restores the master shape attributes

•	Clone Transformations [image] restores the master shape and size attributes

•	Clone Bitmap Color Mask [image] restores the master color settings

You can only enable options that have changed from the master object's properties. Features that have not changed are dimmed.

 Notes

•	The Select Clones option is available only when a clone and master are on the same page.

•	If you select a clone and change one of its attributes, that attribute is no longer dependent upon the master.

 Tip

•	For more information about special effects and cloning, see "Creating special effects."

 Related Topics


Changing the offset for duplicates and clones

You can specify the offset distances for duplicates and clones. Positive values result in offsets right and upward; negative values result in offsets left and downward.

To change the offset for duplicated and cloned objects

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Workspace, Edit.

3.	In the Duplicate Placement section, type offset values in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes.

 Tip

•	You can also use the Property Bar to change the default clone and duplicate offset.

 Related Topics


Deleting objects

When you delete an object, you remove it from the Drawing Window without placing a copy of it on the Clipboard. The only way to retrieve a deleted object is using the Undo command.

To delete an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Edit, Delete.

 Tip

•	If you may need to retrieve a deleted object later, cut it and place it on the Clipboard instead of deleting it.

 Related Topics


Finding and replacing


Overview: Finding and replacing
Finding and replacing

The CorelDRAW Find and Replace wizards let you search for objects with specific properties and replace those properties with new ones. For instance, you can search for 16-point bold text and replace it with 10-point plain text. The Find and Replace wizards also allow you to search for specific words and replace them with others. For instance, you can search for all instances of the word "walking," and replace them with "running."

The Find wizard takes you step by step through the process of finding objects in your drawings that fit the criteria you specify. The Replace wizard takes you through the steps of replacing colors, palettes, outline pen properties, text properties (such as font, weight, or size), words, and other properties.

 Related Topics


Finding objects

The Find wizard identifies graphical and text objects that match the search criteria you specify.

To find objects

1.	Click Edit, Find And Replace, Find Objects.

2.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Begin A New Search [image] begins a new search

•	Load A Search From Disk [image] loads a preset search or one you've previously saved

•	Find Objects That Match The Currently Selected Object [image] finds objects whose properties match those of the currently selected object

3.	Click Next.

4.	Follow the instructions until you reach the end of the search.

CorelDRAW searches your drawing for words or objects that match your search criteria. It then displays the first match it finds, or displays a message indicating that none were found.

 Tips

•	You can search for objects that match the criteria of a selected object in your drawing [image] for instance, rectangles with individually rounded corners.

•	You can change your search criteria in the middle of a search.

 Related Topics


Replacing object properties

The Replace wizard searches for the properties you specify and replaces them with other properties. For example, you can search for specific outline pen properties and replace them with different outline pen properties.

To replace object properties

1.	Click Edit, Find And Replace, Replace Objects.

2.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Replace A Color

•	Replace A Color Model Or Palette

•	Replace Outline Pen Properties

•	Replace Text Properties

3.	Enable the Apply To Currently Selected Objects Only check box.

4.	Click the Next button.

5.	Specify Find and Replace properties as required.

6.	Click the Finish button.

If the Replace wizard cannot find properties that match your search criteria, it displays a message that no object was found.

7.	Click the Find Previous, Find Next, Find All, Replace, or Replace All buttons on the Find and Replace toolbar until your search is finished.

 Related Topics


Finding and replacing text objects

In CorelDRAW, you can search for text objects with specific properties. You can also search and replace specific characters.

To find text

1.	Click Edit, Find and Replace, Find Text.

2.	Type the text you want to find in the Find What box.

3.	To find only words whose case matches the text you typed into the Find box, enable the Match Case check box.

4.	Click the Find Next button.

To find and replace text

1.	Click Edit, Find And Replace, Replace Text.

2.	Type the text you want to replace in the Find What box.

3.	Type the replacement text in the Replace With box.

4.	To find only words whose case matches the text you typed into the Find and Replace boxes, enable the Match Case check box.

5.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Replace [image] replaces the first occurrence of the text specified in the Find What box

•	Replace All [image] replaces all occurrences of the text specified in the Find What box

•	Find Next [image] finds the next occurrence of the text specified in the Find What box

•	Close [image] ends the search

 Tips

•	You can also search for text objects with specific properties and replace those properties with different ones. For information about finding text objects with specific properties, see "Finding objects."

•	For information about replacing text properties, see "Replacing object properties."

 Related Topics


Changing the order of objects


Overview: Changing the order of objects
Changing the order of objects

At its most basic level, a CorelDRAW drawing consists of a series of objects stacked on top of each other. The vertical order of these objects [image] the stacking order [image] helps determine the appearance of the drawing. You can organize these objects using invisible planes called layers. Each of these layers has its own internal stacking order.

The stacking order is most evident in drawings that contain overlapping objects with contrasting properties. If the objects do not overlap, the stacking order may not be evident. In all cases, however, the stacking order is determined by the order in which you add objects to the drawing. Until you rearrange them, the first object you draw occupies the lowest position, whereas the last object you draw occupies the top position.

You can change the stacking order of objects within any layer, sending them to the front or back, or behind or in front of another object. For example, if you select the bottom object on a layer and move it to the front, CorelDRAW places the object on top of all other objects on the layer. The top object becomes the second object, the second becomes the third, and so on.

You can also place objects at precise positions in the stacking order. For example, if you have 10 overlapping objects, you can place the top object behind the third object. In addition, you can select multiple objects and reverse their relative stacking order.

 Related Topics


Changing the order of objects on a layer

You can change the stacking order of objects on a layer. Before using any of the following commands, select the object you wish to move with the Pick tool.

To move the selected object to the front of its layer

•	Click Arrange, Order, To Front.

To move the selected object to the back of its layer

•	Click Arrange, Order, To Back.

To move the selected object forward one position

•	Click Arrange, Order, Forward One.

To move the selected object back one position

•	Click Arrange, Order, Back One.

To move the selected object in front of a specific object

•	Click Arrange, Order, In Front Of, then click the appropriate object.

To move the selected object behind a specific object

•	Click Arrange, Order, Behind, then click the appropriate object.

To reverse the stacking order of objects on a layer

1.	Using the Pick tool, hold down SHIFT to select more than one object.

2.	Click Arrange, Order, Reverse Order.

 Note

•	The Reverse Order command applies to only the selected objects; other objects in the drawing are not affected.

 Tip

•	The To Front and To Back commands are also available on the Property Bar when an object is selected.


Aligning and distributing objects


Overview: Aligning and distributing objects
Aligning and distributing objects

The ability to align objects precisely can be an important requirement for virtually any type of drawing. CorelDRAW provides controls that allow for the exact alignment of any series of objects.

You can specify whether you want objects to line up horizontally or vertically (or both), using their edges or center points. When you've indicated how you want to align the objects, you indicate where you want to line them up: the edge of the page or the center of the page. For maximum precision, you can also choose to align the objects to the grid line nearest to the alignment point you selected.

To line up objects, CorelDRAW uses the imaginary boxes [image] selection boxes [image] that surround selected objects. When you select an object using the Pick tool, its frame and handles become visible, allowing you to manipulate the object.

By distributing objects, you can give your drawing a polished, professional look. You can arrange objects so that their center points or specific edges (for example, top or right) are separated at equal intervals. You can also distribute objects so that they sit an equal distance apart. Once you've indicated how you want to distribute the objects, you can choose the area over which you want to distribute them. In each case, you can choose to distribute the objects to the extent of the length or width of the selection box that surrounds them, or to the length or width of the Drawing Page.

Snapping objects forces them to line up with the grid, guideline, or other objects in your drawing, depending on what you specify. For information on aligning objects using snapping, see "Using the rulers, grid, and guidelines."

 Related Topics


Aligning objects horizontally and vertically

You can align a series of objects horizontally or vertically. You can choose how you want the objects to line up in relation to each other, which is different from specifying where you want them to line up on the page. For example, enabling the Right check box in the Align and Distribute dialog box aligns the right edges of the objects' selection boxes with each other [image] not necessarily on the right side of the page.

To align a series of objects horizontally

1.	Select the objects with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Align and Distribute.

3.	To indicate how you want the objects to line up with each other, enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Top

•	Center

•	Bottom

4.	To indicate where on the page you want alignment to occur, enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Edge Of Page [image] aligns objects with the edge of the page

•	Center Of Page [image] centers objects on the page

•	Align To Grid [image] aligns objects with the nearest grid line

To align a series of objects vertically

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	To indicate how you want the objects to line up with each other, enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Left

•	Center

•	Right

3.	To indicate where on the page you want alignment to occur, enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Edge Of Page [image] aligns objects with the edge of the page

•	Center Of Page [image] centers objects on the page

•	Align To Grid [image] aligns objects with the nearest grid line

 Note

•	You can use the Preview button to view the alignment settings in the Drawing Window.

 Tips

•	To make alignment occur at the target object, leave the Edge Of Page, Center Of Page and Align To Grid check boxes disabled.

•	You can also align objects by selecting them and clicking the Align button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Distributing objects horizontally and vertically

You can distribute a series of objects or guidelines evenly, either horizontally or vertically.

To distribute a series of objects horizontally

1.	Select the objects with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Align and Distribute.

3.	Click the Distribute tab.

4.	To specify how you want to distribute the objects, enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Left

•	Center

•	Right

5.	To indicate the area over which you want to distribute the objects, enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Extent Of Selection

•	Extent Of Page

To distribute a series of objects vertically

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	To specify how you want to distribute the objects, enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Top

•	Center

•	Spacing

•	Bottom

3.	To indicate the area over which you want to distribute the objects, enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Extent of Selection

•	Extent of Page

 Tips

•	You can also distribute objects by selecting them and clicking the Align button on the Property Bar.

•	You can use the Preview button to view the alignment settings in the Drawing Window.

 Related Topics


Grouping and ungrouping objects


Overview: Grouping and ungrouping objects
Grouping and ungrouping objects

Grouping objects binds them together so that you can manipulate them as a single unit. This is particularly effective for protecting and maintaining connections and spatial relationships between objects. For example, you can group all the objects that make up the background or framework of a drawing, and move them without disturbing their relative positioning.

You can break a complex object down into its component objects by ungrouping it. This is useful when you need to make changes to some of the individual objects that comprise a grouped object.

After you have grouped several objects together, you can still select a single object within the group.

 Related Topics


Grouping objects

 When you group multiple objects, each object in the group maintains its original properties. You should group objects together when you want to prevent accidental changes to the relationships between objects. The Group command also lets you create nested groups [image] groups composed of several objects or groups of objects (or both). Nested groups are particularly effective for drawings that contain many complex elements.

Grouping is useful when you want to apply the same formatting, properties, or other changes, such as resizing or mirroring, to multiple objects.

To group objects

1.	Select the objects with the Pick tool.

Hold down SHIFT to select multiple objects.

2.	Click Arrange, Group.

To create a nested group

1.	Using the Pick tool, select two or more groups (or one or more groups and one or more individual objects).

Hold down SHIFT to select multiple objects.

2.	Click Arrange, Group.

This forms a single group composed of two or more nested groups, depending on the number of groups you selected in step 1.

 Tips

•	You can also group objects using the Group button on the Property Bar.

•	You can select a single object that is part of a larger grouped object by holding down CTRL while selecting.

 Related Topics


Ungrouping objects

You can break a grouped object into its component objects.

To ungroup objects

1.	Using the Pick tool, select a grouped object.

2.	Click Arrange, Ungroup.

To ungroup all objects

•	Click Arrange, Ungroup All.

 Tips

•	If you have nested groups (groups inside a group), repeat the ungrouping process until you get to the group level you want.

•	You can also use the Ungroup All command on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Combining and breaking apart objects


Overview: Combining and breaking apart objects
Combining and breaking apart objects

In CorelDRAW, you can fuse multiple curves, lines, and shapes to create a new shape with common fill and outline attributes. If the original objects overlap, the overlapping areas are removed to create clipping holes that allow you to see what's underneath. If the objects don't overlap, they still become part of a single object, but maintain their spatial separation.

When you combine rectangles, ellipses, polygons, stars, spirals, graphs, or text, CorelDRAW converts them to curves before converting them to a single curve object. When text is combined with other text, however, the text objects are not converted to curves; they are converted into larger blocks of text. To change the shape of an Artistic text object, make the text a curve object first. For more information see Converting Artistic text to curves.

You can break apart combined objects. This feature is particularly useful for modifying clipart created by combining several independent objects. When you break apart Clipart (or any combined object), you can change the attributes and properties of its individual components.

Combining objects can create clipping holes and joining line or curve segments. In all cases, the object produced is a curve that can be manipulated just like any other curve in CorelDRAW.

 Related Topics


Combining two or more objects

You can combine two or more objects to create one object.

To combine objects

1.	Select the objects with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Combine.

 Notes

•	You can't convert Paragraph text to curves.

•	If you place a combined object on top of another object, you can see another object through the clipping holes by placing the combined object on top. For information about the vertical stacking order of objects, see Changing the order of objects.

 Tip

•	You can also combine objects using the Combine button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Breaking apart combined objects

You can break apart any object that has been combined.

To break apart combined objects

1.	Select the combined object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Break Apart.

 Note

•	If you break apart an object that has been created by combining Artistic text, the text breaks apart into lines first, then into words. Paragraph text, on the other hand, breaks into separate paragraphs. Both Artistic and Paragraph text can be recombined.

 Tips

•	You can also break apart combined objects using the Break Apart button on the Property Bar.

•	You can break apart Artistic text by converting the text to curves first. For more information, see Converting Artistic text to curves.

 Related Topics


Locking and unlocking objects


Overview: Locking and unlocking objects
Locking and unlocking objects

Locking anchors an object in a specific location and prevents you from accidentally moving, sizing, transforming, cloning, filling, or modifying it. You can lock single, multiple, or grouped objects. To modify a locked object, unlock it first.

 Related Topics


Locking objects

You can lock an object, multiple objects, and grouped objects.

To lock an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Lock Object.

To lock multiple objects or groups of objects

1.	Hold down SHIFT, and select the objects with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Lock Object.

 Note

•	When an object is locked, the Status Bar and Object Manager will indicate Locked Object on Layer.

 Related Topics


Unlocking objects

You can unlock the anchor on an object, multiple objects, and grouped objects to make changes.

To unlock an object

1.	Select the locked object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Unlock Object.

To unlock multiple objects or groups of objects

1.	Select the locked objects with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Unlock All Objects.

 Related Topics


Using the Object Manager


Overview: Using the Object Manager
Using the Object Manager

The Object Manager displays the vertical structure [image] the stacking order [image] of objects, layers, and pages in your document. For each object, the Object Manager displays a small icon and a brief description indicating its basic fill and outline properties. You can set the display options for the pages, layers, and objects using the Object Manager.

You can modify the objects in your drawing using the features and controls in the Object Manager. The Object Manager lets you arrange objects (within layers as well as between layers on the same page), edit outline and fill colors, drag-and-drop styles (color, graphics, and text), and group and ungroup objects.

Using the Object Manager, you can create, rename, and edit layers to organize your drawing. Setting the layer properties can assist you with managing the display, printing, and editing of objects on layers.

When you select an object in the Drawing Window it is automatically highlighted in the Object Manager, and vice versa. Changes to objects (for example, fills and outlines) are reflected in both places.

If you prefer a simpler view of the Object Manager, you can switch to Layer Manager view. The Layer Manager view lists all the layers in your document, but does not show sublevels or objects. It is the most basic view available, and is an easy way to switch between layers or move objects between layers. It is also the only view in which you can access the Move To and Copy To commands in the Object Manager flyout.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Opening and setting up the Object Manager


Overview: Opening and setting up the Object Manager
Opening and setting up the Object Manager

Understanding the Object Manager's basic functions will help you use its more powerful features. You can begin by learning how to open the Object Manager, as well as how to add, delete and rename pages.

To open the Object Manager

•	Click Tools, Object Manager.

To add pages in your drawing

•	Right-click a Page name, and click Insert Page After or Insert Page Before.

To delete pages from your drawing

•	Right-click a Page name, and click Delete Page.

To rename pages in your drawing

1.	Right-click a Page name, and click Rename.

2.	In the Rename Page dialog box, type a new name.

 Note

•	You can apply the rename, delete, or add pages functions by right-clicking on any page in the Object Manager except the Master Page.

 Related Topics


Overview: Using the display options in the Object Manager
Using the display options in the Object Manager

The Object Manager displays the hierarchical structure of the pages, layers, and objects in the active document. Buttons in the Object Manager toolbar let you add layers, show or hide details, and edit across layers.

To display object properties

•	Click the Show Object Properties button.

Click the button again to hide object properties.

To display pages only

•	In the Object Manager Docker, click [image], Show Pages.

To display the layer summary

•	In the Object Manager Docker, click [image], Show Layers.

To display pages and layers

•	In the Object Manager Docker, click [image], Show Pages and Layers.

To expand the Object Manager upon object selection

•	In the Object Manager Docker, click [image], Expand To Show Selection.

 Tip

•	You can also access the Show Object Properties, Show Pages, Show Layers, and Show Layers and Pages commands by right-clicking in the white space of the Object Manager.

 Related Topics


Overview: Using the Layer Manager view
Using the Layer Manager view

The Layer Manager view lists all the layers in your document, without displaying sublevels or objects. It is the simplest view available, and is an easy way to switch between layers or move objects between layers.

To select Layer Manager view in the Object Manager

•	Click the Layer Manager icon.

The different pages in your document, and any objects on them, disappear from your list, leaving only the names of the layers.

 Notes

•	Switching to Layer Manager view causes all other views to be disabled. Options such as Show Pages, Show Layers, or Show Pages and Layers become unavailable.

•	The Layer Manager view is the only one in which you can access the Move To and Copy To functions in the Object Manager flyout.

 Related Topics


Editing objects using the Object Manager


Overview: Editing objects using the Object Manager
Editing objects using the Object Manager

The Object Manager lets you edit objects the same way that you would in the Drawing Window. Before you can edit an object you must select it. CorelDRAW lets you select, group, copy, move, delete, lock, and replace object properties quickly using the Object Manager.

When you've selected an object in the Object Manager, you can change its properties. For example, you can select an object and change its fill or outline just as you do when you're working in the Drawing Window. You can also complete more advanced operations, such as coloring objects and creating PowerClip objects.

 Related Topics


Selecting objects using the Object Manager

Just as you do in the Drawing Window, you must select objects in the Object Manager before you can manipulate, format, or edit them. You can select any object or group of objects using the mouse.

To select one object or group of objects

•	Click the object or group name tag.

To select multiple objects or groups of objects on a single layer

•	Hold down CTRL, and click each of the name tags of the objects or groups of objects you want to select. Hold down SHIFT to select a series of objects.

To select multiple objects or groups of objects on multiple layers

•	Ensure that the Edit Across Layers button is enabled, then hold down CTRL and select objects on the same layer or different layers.

 Note

•	You can only select objects on different layers when the objects are on the same page (or on the Master Page and any other page). You cannot, for example, select multiple objects on different layers of pages 1 and 3 of a document.

 Related Topics


Moving and copying objects between layers

You can move or copy selected objects to a new layer. To do so, you must be in Layer Manager view.

When you move or copy an object to a layer below its current layer, the object becomes the top object on its new layer. Similarly, when you move or copy an object to a layer above its current layer, the object becomes the bottom object.

To move or copy an object to another layer in Layer Manager view

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	In the Object Manager Docker, click Move To Layer or Copy To Layer on the flyout.

A large black arrow appears.

3.	Drag the arrow to the layer to which you want to move or copy the object, and click.

To move an object to another layer using the mouse in any view

•	Select the object with the Pick tool and drag to a new layer.

 Note

•	You can only use the Move To Layer and Copy To Layer commands when you are in Layer Manager view. In all other views, these commands are disabled. To move or copy objects in any other view, use the mouse.

 Tips

•	In Layer Manager view, you can right-click in a white space in the Object Manager to access the Move To Layer and Copy To Layer commands. When using these commands, remember which layer you are moving or copying from.

•	You can hold down CTRL to select multiple objects or SHIFT to select a series of objects.

 Related Topics


Ordering and copying object properties using the Object Manager

The Object Manager lets you move objects behind or in front of other objects on the same layer. You can also copy the fill and outline attributes from one object to another located on the same layer.

To place an object behind or in front of another object

1.	In the Object Manager Docker, right-click and begin to drag the object name that you want to move.

The cursor changes to a dashed rectangle.

2.	Drag over another object and click Move In Front Of or Move Behind.

To copy an object's properties to another object

1.	In the Object Manager Docker, right-click and begin to drag the object name that you want to copy from.

The cursor changes to a dashed rectangle.

2.	Drag over the object you want to copy to and click one of the following options:

•	Copy Fill Here

•	Copy Outline Here

•	Copy All Properties

 Related Topics


Creating PowerClip objects using the Object Manager

You can create PowerClip objects using the Object Manager. When you create a PowerClip, you place one object inside a second object, called the container object. For information on PowerClip objects, see "Creating a PowerClip object."

To create PowerClip objects using the Object Manager

1.	In the Object Manager Docker, right-click and begin to drag the name of the object that you want to place inside a container to create the PowerClip.

The cursor changes to a dashed rectangle.

2.	Without releasing the mouse, drag the dashed rectangle over the name of a second object in the same layer that you want to use as the container object.

3.	Release the mouse and click PowerClip Inside.

To edit or extract the contents of a PowerClip object

•	In the Object Manager Docker, right-click the PowerClip object name and click Extract Contents or Edit Contents.

 Related Topics


Grouping objects using the Object Manager

The Object Manager lets you group objects on one layer quickly. You can also add or remove objects from groups.

To group objects on the active layer

•	In the Object Manager Docker, click the object name that you want to group, and drag it over another object.

The cursor changes to show that the objects will be grouped. Repeat this step to add more objects to the group.

To group objects on the active layer using the menu command

1.	In the Object Manager Docker, right-click the object name that you want to group.

2.	Drag it over another object and click Add to Create Group.

Repeat this procedure to add more objects to the group.

To add or remove an object to or from a group

•	Click the name of the object and drag it into or out of an existing group on the active layer.

 Notes

•	The Object Manager lists the objects that are grouped. To remove an object from a group, drag the object to the active layer.

•	You can select objects from different layers and group them. However, once grouped, the objects will reside on the same layer. Objects cannot remain grouped across layers.

 Related Topics


Using layers to organize your drawing


Overview: Using layers to organize your drawing
Using layers to organize your drawing

The layering feature of CorelDRAW gives you added flexibility for organizing and editing the objects in your drawings. You can divide a drawing into multiple layers, each containing a portion of the drawing's contents. For example, using layers could help you organize an architectural plan for a building. You could organize the building's various components (plumbing, electrical, structural, etc.) by placing them on separate layers. You could then use the Object Manager to view, print, or edit specific layers or combinations of layers. Together, layers act as a hierarchy that helps determine the vertical arrangement of a drawing's components. In this arrangement (the stacking order), objects on the top layer always overlay objects on the layer below.

Each new file, regardless of how many pages it contains, has one master page. This master page controls four default layers: the Grid, Guides, and Desktop layers, plus one Layer (called Layer1) for drawing. The Grid, Guides, and Desktop layers are containers for the grid, guidelines, and any objects outside the borders of the Drawing Page. The Desktop layer is a useful place to create experimental drawings you may want to use later. You can easily drag an object from the Desktop layer to an active layer on the Drawing Page when you decide to keep or print it. You can also create an Internet Layer by inserting an Internet object. For more information about layer properties, see "Setting layer properties."

 Related Topics


Creating a layer

In the Object Manager, you can add new layers to help you organize the objects in your drawing.

To add a new layer using the menu command

•	In the Object Manager Docker, click [image], New Layer.

The new layer becomes the active layer.

To add a new layer using the New Layer button

•	In the Object Manager Docker, click the New Layer button.

 Note

•	By default, each new layer has its editing, printing, and display properties enabled and its master layer property disabled. You can change these properties using the controls provided in the Layer Properties dialog box. For more information about layer properties, see "Setting layer properties."

 Related Topics


Renaming a layer

You can assign a new name to any layer you create in the Object Manager. You might want a layer's name to indicate its contents, position in the stacking order, or relationship with the drawing's other layers.

To rename a layer

1.	In the Object Manager Docker, right-click the layer name and click Rename.

2.	Type a new name for the layer and press ENTER.

To rename a layer using the layer properties

1.	In the Object Manager Docker, right-click a layer name and click Properties.

2.	In the Layer Properties dialog box, type a new name in the Layer Name box.

 Note

•	You can't rename the Grid, Guides, Desktop or Internet layer.

 Related Topics


Changing the active layer

To use a layer in the drawing [image] for example, to add objects to it [image] you must first make the layer active. Once active, a layer is ready to receive any new objects you draw, import, or paste onto it. In the Object Manager, the active layer appears highlighted in red. When you start a drawing, the default layer (Layer 1) is the active layer.

To change the active layer

•	In the Object Manager Docker, click the name of the layer you want to activate.

 Note

•	You highlight a layer to change its basic settings so that you can view, print, or edit it. Note that highlighting a layer is different from activating it, which enables you to add objects to it in the drawing. For more information about layer settings, see "Setting layer properties."

 Related Topics


Reordering layers

The Master Page layer list in the Object Manager shows the order in which layers are stacked in the active drawing. The first layer in the list is the top layer; the last layer is the bottom layer.

To change a layer's position in the stacking order

•	In the Layers list, drag the layer's name tag to the desired position.

As you drag, a position line indicates the layer's current position.

 Notes

•	It is easiest to reorder layers in Layer Manager view. You can switch to Layer Manager view by clicking the Layer Manager View button in the Object Manager.

•	You can change the vertical order of layers in the drawing. When you do so, each layer's contents move to reflect changes in this order.

 Related Topics


Deleting a layer

The Delete command removes the current layer highlighted in the Object Manager.

To delete a layer

1.	In the Object Manager Docker, click the name of the layer you want to delete.

2.	Click [image], Delete Layer.

3.	If a layer contains objects on other pages, click OK to confirm that you want to delete the layer.

 Notes

•	You can't delete a locked layer or any of the three special default layers of the Master Page (Grid, Guides, or Desktop).

•	When you delete a layer, you also delete all of the objects on it. If you want to keep certain objects on the layer you're deleting, move them to a different layer first.

 Related Topics


Setting layer properties


Overview: Setting layer properties
Setting layer properties

CorelDRAW lets you use layers to organize your drawings. You can view, edit, or make a layer printable, or place a layer's contents onto every page of a multipage document. You can also lock layers to prevent accidental changes, or override the full-color view of a layer so that its contents display as outlines of a specific color.

By hiding certain layers, you make it easier to identify and edit the objects on other layers. You also reduce the time CorelDRAW needs to refresh your illustration when you edit it. This setting is particularly effective in illustrations with many objects on multiple layers.

 Related Topics


Showing and hiding a layer

You can show or hide any layer in your drawing.

To show a layer

1.	In the Object Manager Docker, click the layer name.

2.	Right-click the layer, and click Properties.

3.	Enable the Visible check box.

To hide a layer

1.	In the Object Manager Docker, click the layer name.

2.	Right-click the layer, and click Properties.

3.	Disable the Visible check box.

 Tip

•	You can also show or hide a layer by clicking its Eye icon. An Eye icon appears beside each layer name in the Object Manager. When a layer is hidden, its Eye icon and the objects on that layer are dimmed.

 Related Topics


Locking and unlocking a layer

Locking a layer prevents accidental changes to its contents. When a layer is locked, objects on it can't be selected or edited. When you unlock the layer, you can change any object it contains as long as the object is not locked.

To lock a layer

1.	In the Object Manager Docker, click the layer name.

2.	Right-click the layer, and click Properties.

3.	Disable the Editable check box.

To unlock a layer

1.	In the Object Manager Docker, click the layer name.

2.	Right-click the layer, and click Properties.

3.	Enable the Editable check box.

 Tips

•	You can also lock or unlock a layer by clicking its Pencil icon. A Pencil icon appears beside each layer name in the Object Manager. When a layer is locked, its Pencil icon is dimmed and the objects on that layer are also dimmed.

•	You can lock and unlock individual, multiple, or grouped objects using the Arrange menu. For more information, see "Locking and unlocking objects."

•	You can't lock or unlock the Grid layer. Its Pencil icon is always grayed out.

 Related Topics


Enabling and disabling the printing of a layer

CorelDRAW allows you to print selected layers of your drawing. If you enable a layer's print setting, the layer and its contents appear in printed copies of the drawing. If you disable a layer's print setting, the layer and its contents won't appear when you print the drawing.

To enable printing for a specific layer

1.	In the Object Manager Docker, click the layer name.

2.	Right-click the layer, and click Properties.

3.	Enable the Printable check box.

To disable printing for a specific layer

1.	In the Object Manager Docker, click the layer name.

2.	Right-click the layer, and click Properties.

3.	Disable the Printable check box.

 Note

•	If printing is disabled for a layer, its contents do not display in full-screen previews. For information about full-screen previews, see "Using full-screen previews."

 Tip

•	You can also enable or disable the printing of a layer by clicking its Printer icon. A Printer icon appears beside each layer name in the Object Manager. When printing is disabled for a layer, its Printer icon appears dimmed.

 Related Topics


Creating a master layer

Master layers are layers whose contents appear on each page of a multipage document. Master layers are particularly useful if you have an object (such as a corporate logo) that you want to appear on each page of a document.

To create a master layer

•	Right-click a layer name, and click Master.

 Related Topics


Working with multiple layers simultaneously

You can edit objects on any unlocked layer. You can also move and copy objects between any layers that are unlocked, as long as they are on the same page (or on the Master Page and another page).

If you disable the Edit Across Layers function, you can work only on the active layer and the Desktop layer [image] you can't select or edit objects on inactive layers.

To allow editing of all layers

•	In the Object Manager Docker, click [image], Edit Across Layers.

To allow editing of the active layer only

•	In the Object Manager Docker, click [image], then disable the Edit Across Layers command.

To enable or disable the Edit Across Layers option

•	Enable or disable the Edit Across Layers button on the Object Manager.

 Related Topics


Identifying objects on a layer using color override

You can display the contents of a selected layer as colored outlines. Changing to outlines [image] using color override [image] doesn't affect the objects' true appearance; it only affects the way they appear on-screen. This function is useful for identifying objects on different layers [image] for example, in a complex technical diagram [image] or even for changing the colors of the grid and guidelines.

To override layer fill and outline attributes

1.	In the Object Manager Docker, click the layer name.

2.	Right-click the layer, and click Properties.

3.	Enable the Override Full Color View check box.

4.	Click the Layer Color picker.

5.	Choose a color for the objects on the selected layer.

To restore layer fill and outline attributes

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Disable the Override Full Color View check box.

To change a layer color on a specific page

1.	In the Object Manager Docker, double-click the layer color swatch.

2.	Choose a color from the list.

To apply color override on a single page

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To override layer fill and outline attributes" procedure.

2.	Enable the Apply Layer Changes To The Current Page Only check box.

To change a layer color on all pages

1.	In the Object Manager Docker, double-click the layer color swatch on a master page.

2.	Choose a color from the list.

 Note

•	In Wireframe or Simple Wireframe, the object's outline always appears using the color override.

 Related Topics


Defining Master layer setup options

The Grid and Guides layers on the Master Page allow you to modify the settings for these master layers.

To set the Grid on the Master Page

1.	In the Object Manager Docker, click the Grid layer on the Master Page.

2.	Right-click the layer, and click Properties.

3.	Click the Setup button.

4.	Modify the settings as desired.

To set the Guidelines on the Master Page

1.	In the Object Manager Docker, click the Guides layer on the Master Page.

2.	Right-click the layer, and click Properties.

3.	Click the Setup button.

4.	Modify the settings as desired.

 Note

•	For more information about rulers, grids and guidelines, see "Using the rulers, grid and guidelines."

 Related Topics


Creating an object database


Overview: Creating an object database
Creating an object database

The Object Data Manager is an advanced feature that is particularly useful as a project management tool when you create or supervise a large project. The Object Data Manager is like having a small spreadsheet program within your graphics program. Like Corel Quattro Pro or Microsoft Excel, it lets you track expenses, deadlines, assignments, progress, or anything else you need to organize. You can enter many types of data about individual objects or groups of objects.

You create the database by entering information about specific objects in the Object Data Docker. This information is set up on a datasheet called the Object Data Manager. Categories of information are organized in columns. If you're creating a technical drawing, for example, you might include component names in one column, part numbers in another, cost in a third, and so on. For each component in the drawing, you enter the same categories of information.

After you have created your database, you can view information on any object in either list or datasheet form. The Object Data Docker displays a list of all the information you've assigned; the Object Data Manager displays this information in a formatted datasheet that resembles a spreadsheet.

CorelDRAW also provides basic functions for formatting and manipulating the information you add to the database. For example, you can add and delete columns, indent rows to show hierarchical relationships, and summarize data for selected objects. You can print the entire database or only parts of it.

Using the Clipboard, you can copy data to different locations within the datasheet or between datasheets for different CorelDRAW documents. You can also use the Clipboard to copy data to and from other Windows database or spreadsheet programs, such as Corel Quattro Pro or Microsoft Excel.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Setting up the object database


Overview: Setting up the object database
Setting up the object database

Before you assign data to objects in a drawing, you need to know what information you want to display. By default, CorelDRAW creates four data fields: Name, Cost, Comments, and CDRStaticID. The first three fields are for your convenience, and can be edited or deleted as required. The CDRStaticID field is used by CorelDRAW to identify objects, and can't be edited or deleted.

If you require custom fields, you can define their formats using the controls in the Format Definition dialog box. This dialog box gives you access to four basic field formats: General, Date/Time, Linear/Angular, and Numeric. Each of these formats provides a series of common settings. You can use these formats or create your own.

You can create and assign as many data fields as you want, as long as they use permitted format variables.

 Related Topics


Adding new object data fields

If the preset formats in CorelDRAW don't provide the information you want in your data summary, you can create your own custom formats using the variables available for the format type you're using. The field format you select is used for all objects in the active drawing.

To add a field that uses a preset format

1.	Click Tools, Object Data Manager.

2.	In the Object Data Docker, click [image], Field Editor.

3.	Click the Create New Field button.

4.	Type a name for the field in the box.

5.	Click the Change button (unless you want to keep the format displayed beside the Current label).

6.	In the Format Type box, enable the format type you want to create.

7.	Choose a format from the list box and press ENTER.

8.	Click the Add Selected Field(s) button.

To add a field that uses a custom format

1.	Follow steps 1 to 6 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Create box, type the format you want to create and press ENTER.

3.	Click the Add Selected Field(s) button.

 Tips

•	Enable the List Of Default Fields check box to add the new field to the list of default fields. This field is then applied to all new documents you create.

•	Enable the All Objects check box to apply the field to objects that have already been created in addition to those you will be creating.

 Related Topics


Editing object data fields

You can change any object data field by giving it a preset or custom format. For example, you can change a numeric field to display more or fewer decimal places, or to display numbers in thousands.

To change a field's format

1.	Click Tools, Object Data Manager.

2.	In the Object Data Docker, click [image], Field Editor.

3.	Click the field name.

4.	Click the Change button.

5.	In the Format Type box, enable the format type you want to create.

6.	Do one of the following:

•	Choose a format from the list box and press ENTER.

•	In the Create box, type a format to create and press ENTER.

 Related Topics


Renaming, reordering, and deleting object data fields

You can change the name of any field to better suit your object data summary. You can also change the location of fields to make them appear in a logical order on the data summary.

You can delete any data field except for CDRStaticID. When you delete a field, you also delete all data entered for that field in the active document.

To rename a data field

1.	Click Tools, Object Data Manager.

2.	In the Object Data Docker, click [image], Field Editor.

3.	Choose the name of the data field you want to change from the list.

4.	Type a new name in the box and press ENTER.

To reorder data fields

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Reorder the names of the fields in the list box by dragging to get the order you want.

As you drag, the cursor changes to indicate the field's position in the list.

To delete a data field

1.	Click Tools, Object Data Manager.

2.	In the Object Data Docker, click [image], Field Editor.

3.	Choose the field's name from the list box at the left side of the dialog box.

To choose multiple fields, hold down SHIFT as you choose the field names.

4.	Click the Delete Field(s) button.

 Tip

•	You can access the Object Data Field Editor dialog box by double-clicking a field name in the Object Data Docker.

 Related Topics


Assigning and editing object data


Overview: Assigning and editing object data
Assigning and editing object data

After creating all the data fields you want for your drawing, you can create your database. The Object Data Docker and the Object Data Manager provide all the commands and features you need to add and edit object information.

The Object Data Docker is best for entering data for single objects. It lets you add, edit, and delete object data.

The Object Data Manager, in contrast, is best for entering and editing data for multiple objects. It provides many of the editing features available in popular spreadsheet applications.

 Related Topics


Assigning data

The Object Data Docker makes it easy to assign data to objects one at a time. To assign data to several objects at the same time, use the Object Data Manager. Using the Object Data Manager helps speed up the data entry process and lets you look at the data summary as it begins to take shape.

To assign data to an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Tools, Object Data Manager.

3.	In the Field/Value list, click a data field name.

4.	Type the data you want in the text box at the top of the Object Data Docker.

5.	Repeat steps 3 to 4 to add data to other fields.

To assign data to multiple objects

1.	Select the objects using the Pick tool.

2.	Click Tools, Object Data Manager.

3.	Click the Object Data Manager button.

4.	In the Object Data Manager, click a cell.

5.	Type the appropriate data.

6.	Press ENTER to assign your entry to the cell, the fields, and the objects.

 Related Topics


Copying data between objects

The Copy Data From command lets you use one object's data entries to update another object's data entries. This command does not replace an object's data entries; rather, it appends fields and data where appropriate.

To copy data from one object to another

1.	Select the object to which you want to copy data.

2.	Click Tools, Object Data Manager.

3.	In the Object Data Docker, click [image], Copy Data From.

4.	Click the object from which you want to copy data.

 Related Topics


Viewing, editing, and formatting an object data summary


Overview: Viewing, editing, and formatting an object data summary
Viewing, editing, and formatting an object data summary

The Object Data Manager provides the commands and functions you need to edit and format your object data summary. For example, you can add and delete columns, indent rows to show hierarchical relationships, and summarize data for selected objects. You can also print part or all of the database.

 Related Topics


Viewing an object data summary

The Object Data Manager summarizes the information you've assigned to the objects in your drawing. While it can be used to view and edit data associated with a single object, its main purpose is to help you manage large amounts of data associated with multiple objects contained in various groups in a drawing.

To view an object data summary for one object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Tools, Object Data Manager.

3.	In the Object Data Docker, click the Object Data Manager button.

To view an object data summary for multiple objects

1.	Select the objects with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Tools, Object Data Manager.

3.	In the Object Data Docker, click the Object Data Manager button.

To view an object data summary for an entire document

1.	Click Edit, Select All.

2.	Click Tools, Object Data Manager.

3.	In the Object Data Docker, click the Object Data Manager button.

 Related Topics


Displaying data for grouped objects

You can place a two-space indent before data relating to objects in groups to create a visible distinction between groups in a column.

You can also display individual group subtotals for fields sharing multiple groups. Use this command when more than one group of objects is displayed in a datasheet. This command applies only to fields with numeric formats. For more information about viewing summaries in the Object Data Manager, see "Viewing an object data summary."

To indent all groups in a column

1.	In the Object Data Manager, select the column to which you want to apply indents.

2.	Click Field Options, Show Hierarchy.

To show group subtotals

1.	In the Object Data Manager, select the column in which you want to show group subtotals.

2.	Click Field Options, Summarize Groups.

 Related Topics


Showing the sum of values in a column

The Object Data Manager can automatically sum the values in the selected column. It displays the sum at the bottom of the column.

To show the sum of the values in a column

1.	In the Object Data Manager, select the column.

2.	Click Field Options, and click Show Totals.

To hide the sum of values in a column

1.	In the Object Data Manager, select the column.

2.	Click Field Options, and click Show Totals.

 Tip

•	For information about viewing summaries in the Object Data Manager, see "Viewing an object data summary."

 Related Topics


Printing an object data summary

The Object Data Manager gives you access to all of the application's printing capabilities. This gives you the option to print quickly or print using specific settings.

To print an object data summary

1.	In the Object Data Manager, click File, Print.

2.	Choose a printer from the Name list box.

3.	Type the number in the Number of Copies box.

 Tips

•	For information about viewing summaries in the Object Data Manager, see "Viewing an object data summary."

•	For more information about the printing capabilities of CorelDRAW, see "Printing."

 Related Topics


Publishing to PDF


Overview: Publishing to PDF
Publishing to PDF

PDF is a file format designed to preserve fonts, images, graphics, and formatting of an original application file. Using Acrobat Reader and Acrobat Exchange, a PDF file can be viewed, shared, and printed by PC, Unix, and Macintosh users. It can also be placed on an Intranet or the World Wide Web.

You can use preset PDF Styles to create or publish documents for general document delivery, prepress, and the World Wide Web. You can also create, delete, and edit custom PDF styles.

The Publish To PDF feature lets you adjust a PDF file by using bitmap compression, embedding fonts, and compressing text. For more information, see "Publishing PDF objects." For information about preserving object information and setting color profiles in a PDF file, see "Setting image options."

You can generate a job ticket using the Portable Job Ticket Format specification. A job ticket lets you view, share, or print a PDF file on any platform. For information about generating a job ticket, see "Job ticketing."

CorelDRAW PDF capabilities work seamlessly with Adobe Acrobat.

 More Detailed Information


Publishing a PDF file


Overview: Publishing a PDF file
Publishing a PDF file

You can create a PDF file by specifying a filename and location. When you create a PDF file, it is useful to use a PDF style. The Publish To PDF feature contains three preset PDF styles, or you can create a PDF style. The three preset styles are: PDF For Document Distribution, PDF For Prepress, and PDF For The WEB. PDF For Document Distribution is used for general publishing needs. PDF For Prepress uses settings recommended for high-end printing. PDF For The WEB uses low-resolution settings best designed for Internet viewing.

 Related Topics


Choosing a file name, location, and export range

You can create a PDF file by specifying a filename, and a location. You can also export a selection or all of the PDF file.

To save a document as a PDF file

1.	Click File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Click the Browse button.

4.	Choose the drive where you want to save the file from the Save In list box.

5.	Double-click the folder in which you want to save the file.

6.	Type a filename in the File Name box, and click Save.

To choose an export range

1.	Click File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	From the Export Range box, enable one of the following buttons:

•	All

•	Current Page

•	Pages

•	Selection

 Related Topics


Choosing a PDF style

You can choose from three preset PDF styles or create your own PDF style. The three preset styles are: PDF For Document Distribution, PDF For Prepress, and PDF For The WEB. The PDF For Document Distribution style is best used for general document delivery. These documents can be printed on a laser or desktop printer. The PDF For Prepress style contains LZW bitmap compression, embeds fonts, and preserves spot color options best designed for high-end quality printing. If you choose the PDF For Prepress style, consult the service bureau for their preferred settings. The PDF For The WEB style contains JPEG bitmap compression, embeds fonts in a document, and compresses text. These are low-resolution settings best designed for the World Wide Web. The preset styles are general guidelines and can be edited or deleted. You can also create, edit, or delete custom PDF styles.

To choose a PDF style

1.	Click File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	From the PDF Style list box, choose one of the following:

•	PDF For Document Distribution

•	PDF For Prepress

•	PDF For The WEB

To edit a PDF style

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Set options from the following tabs:

•	General

•	Objects

•	Advanced

•	Document

3.	Click the General tab, and click the Plus button.

4.	Choose the style you edited from the Save PDF Style As list box.

 Note

•	Once you overwrite a PDF style, all previous information is deleted. It is recommended to rename a PDF style and not overwrite it.

To create a PDF style

1.	Click File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Set options from the following tabs:

•	General

•	Objects

•	Advanced

•	Document

3.	Click the General tab, and click the Plus button.

4.	Type a name for the style in the Save PDF Style As list box.

To delete a PDF style

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To choose a PDF style" procedure.

2.	Click the Minus button.

 Note

•	The PDF For Document Distribution style is designed for medium sized files with high-resolution. This style is not suitable for Internet viewing.

 Related Topics


Job ticketing


Overview: Job ticketing
Job ticketing

A job ticket lets you view, share, or print a .PDF file on any platform. A job ticket is useful when you want to send a PDF file to the service bureau. You can include all necessary specifications for publishing .PDF files.

Generating a job ticket lets you save an external job ticket file or embed a job ticket file. When you choose the External option, two separate files are created: a .PDF file and a .JTF file. When you choose the Embedded option, a .PDF file that contains a Job Ticket File (JTF) object is created.

Generating a job ticket lets you specify job ticket settings to include job, customer, delivery, and finishing information.

 Note

•	A .JTF file can be opened by a Job Ticket Editor. Consult a service bureau or print shop before you send a .JTF file.

 Related Topics


Generating a job ticket

Generating a job ticket lets you save an external file or embed a job ticket file. When you choose the External File option you create two separate files; a .PDF file and a .JTF file. Every job ticket saved as an external file has an .JTF extension. When you choose the Embedded option you create a .PDF file that contains a Portable Job Ticket object.

To save an external job ticket file

1.	Click File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Enable the Include Job Ticket check box in the Generate Job Ticket section.

4.	Enable the External File button.

5.	Click the Browse button.

6.	Choose the drive where you want to save the file from the Save In list box.

7.	Double-click the folder in which you want to save the file.

8.	Type a file name in the File Name box, and click Save.

To embed a job ticket file

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Include Job Ticket check box in the Generate Job Ticket section.

3.	Enable the Embedded button.

 Note

•	A .JTF file can be opened by a Job Ticket Editor. Consult the service bureau or print shop before sending a .JTF file.

 Related Topics


Setting up job ticket information

You can set up a job ticket to include information about the customer, delivery, and finishing of a job. The information you input helps to produce the customer's desired results.

To set up a job ticket

1.	Click File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Enable the Include Job Ticket check box.

4.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	External [image] lets you create two separate files, a .PDF file and a .JTF file

•	Embedded [image] lets you create a .PDF file that contains a Portable Job Ticket object.

5.	Click the Settings button.

6.	Type job specifications in any of the following tabs:

•	Customer Info

•	Delivery

•	Finishing

 Related Topics


Publishing PDF objects


Overview: Publishing PDF objects
Publishing PDF objects

File size plays an important role in the publishing of a PDF file. Adjusting file size can speed up the management and printing of a file. The Publish To PDF feature lets you change attributes for bitmaps, text, and fonts in a document. You can reduce file size by compressing bitmaps using JPEG or LZW compression and downsampling color, grayscale, or monochrome bitmaps. You can export text as curves or compress text. Exporting text as curves generally increases file size, while compressing text decreases file size.

Fonts can also be changed in a PDF file. You can convert True Type fonts to Type 1 and subset Type 1 fonts. Converting True Type to Type 1 fonts increases file size, while subsetting Type 1 fonts can decrease file size. You can also choose to include the base 14 fonts. Base 14 fonts are guaranteed to be available with Acrobat Exchange and Acrobat Reader.

You can also choose to export a PDF file as an ASCII 85 file or a binary file.

 Related Topics


Compressing bitmaps

You can reduce the size of a PDF file by compressing bitmaps. Bitmap compression is available for JPEG and LZW bitmaps. Bitmaps using JPEG compression have a changeable quality scale ranging from 2 (high) to 255 (low). The higher the image quality, the larger the file size.

To compress bitmaps with LZW

1.	Click File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the Objects tab.

3.	Choose LZW from the Compression Type list box.

To compress bitmaps with JPEG

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose JPEG from the Compression Type list box.

3.	Type a number between 2 and 255 in the Quality Factor box.

 Tip

•	You can also specify the JPEG compression quality by moving the Quality Factor slider.

 Related Topics


Downsampling bitmaps in a PDF file

You can reduce file size by downsampling bitmaps. Bitmaps are made up of pixels. When you downsample a bitmap, the number of pixels per line decreases. The decrease in pixels per line results in a decrease in file size. The Publish To PDF feature lets you downsample color, grayscale, or monochrome bitmaps individually.

To downsample color bitmaps

1.	Click File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the Objects tab.

3.	Enable the Color check box.

4.	Type a number in the Color box.

To downsample grayscale bitmaps

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Grayscale check box.

3.	Type a number in the Grayscale box.

To downsample monochrome bitmaps

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To downsample color bitmaps" procedure.

2.	Enable the Monochrome check box.

3.	Type a number in the Monochrome box.

 Note

•	Downsampling color, grayscale, or monochrome bitmaps is effective only when the resolution of the bitmaps is higher than the resolution specified in the Bitmap Downsampling section.

 Related Topics


Using fonts

The Publish To PDF feature lets you control how fonts are output to PDF documents. You can embed fonts or base 14 fonts, and convert True Type to Type 1 fonts. Embedding fonts causes the file size to increase but makes a PDF file more portable since the fonts do not have to reside on other systems. If you embed base 14 fonts CorelDRAW, adds the fonts to your system; this eliminates font variances on different systems. The base 14 PostScript fonts are resident on all PostScript devices. Converting True Type to Type 1 fonts can increase file size if there are many fonts in a file.

To embed fonts in a document

1.	Click File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the Objects tab.

3.	Enable the Embed Fonts In Document check box.

To embed base 14 fonts

1.	Click File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the Objects tab.

3.	Enable the Embed Base 14 Fonts check box.

To convert True Type fonts to Type 1 fonts

1.	Click File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the Objects tab.

3.	Enable the Convert True Type To Type 1 check box.

 Note

•	When you publish to the Web, you should not choose to include the base 14 fonts as this increases file size.

 Related Topics


Subsetting Type 1 fonts

You can reduce file size by subsetting Type 1 fonts. A font is made up of many characters. If you use only a smaller number of characters (for example English characters A to E), you can create a subset of Type 1 fonts, reducing the size of a file. You can also include a percentage of fonts used. For example, you can create a subset of 50 percent of fonts. If the number of characters used in the document exceeds 50 percent, the whole set of characters is embedded. If the number of characters used in the document is less than 50 percent, only the percentage of characters used is embedded.

To create a subset of Type 1 fonts

1.	Click File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the Objects tab.

3.	Enable the Subset Type 1 Fonts check box.

To include a percentage of fonts used

1.	Click File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the Objects tab.

3.	Enable the Subset Type 1 Fonts check box.

4.	Type a percentage in the Under % Of Charset box.

 Note

•	If you create a subset of Type 1 fonts, you should not edit or correct the PDF file at the service bureau using Acrobat Exchange, since the characters you add when editing may not be present in the file.

 Related Topics


Using text curves and compression

The Publish To PDF feature lets you control how text is treated in PDF documents. If you are using unusual text characters, you can export the text as curves. This method does not use fonts, so this eliminates problems with font variances on different systems. However, for general document publication, you should include the fonts in a document rather than convert text to curves. Converting text into curves increases the complexity of the file and can increase file size. Compressing text is useful for reducing file size.

To export text as curves

1.	Click File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the Objects tab.

3.	Enable the Export Text As Curves check box in the Text And Fonts section.

To compress text streams

1.	Click File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the Objects tab.

3.	Enable the Compress Text check box in the Text And Fonts section.

 Related Topics


Exporting ASCII 85 and binary files

The Publish To PDF feature lets you choose between exporting ASCII 85 or binary files. ASCII 85 and binary are encoding formats. ASCII 85 creates files that are fully portable to all systems. Binary creates smaller files but is less portable, since some systems cannot handle the file format.

To export bitmaps as ASCII

1.	Click File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the Objects tab.

3.	Enable the ASCII 85 button in the Encoding section.

To export bitmaps as binary

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Binary button in the Encoding section.

 Related Topics


Setting image options


Overview: Setting image options
Setting image options

The Publish To PDF feature lets you preserve object information, maintain Open Prepress Interface (OPI) links, and set color profiles.

The object information lets you preserve document overprints, halftone screens, and spot colors. You can also change bitmap complexity and set the number of fountain steps.

Maintaining OPI links lets you use low-resolution images as placeholders for high-resolution images that appear in a final document. You can also set color profiles to ensure accurate color production.

 Related Topics


Preserving object information

You can render complex fills as bitmaps and preserve document overprints, halftone screens, and spot colors. Rendering complex fills as bitmaps helps reduce the complexity of a file. Reducing the complexity of a file speeds up the management and printing of a file. Preserving document overprints is useful for color trapping. Overprint settings made in the document to manually trap objects are maintained in the PDF file. Preserving halftone screens maintains halftone settings for specific objects in the original document. Preserving spot colors is useful for maintaining color consistency. If spot colors are not preserved in a document, they convert to CMYK when exported to a PDF file.

To render complex fills as bitmaps

1.	Click File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the Advanced tab.

3.	Enable the Render Complex Fills As Bitmaps check box.

To preserve document overprints

1.	Click File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the Advanced tab.

3.	Enable the Preserve Document Overprints check box.

To preserve halftone screens

1.	Click File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the Advanced tab.

3.	Enable the Preserve Halftone Screen Information check box.

To preserve spot colors

1.	Click File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the Advanced tab.

3.	Enable the Preserve Spot Colors check box.

 Related Topics


Setting the number of fountain steps

You can increase the number of fountain fills for fills that require more steps, and decrease the number of steps for fountain fills that are too complex. A low number of steps prints faster, but the transition between shades may be rather coarse. The number of fountain steps can be set between 1 to 256.

To increase or decrease the number of fountain steps

1.	Choose File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the Advanced tab.

3.	Type a number in the Fountain Steps box.

 Related Topics


Choosing PostScript or preview

An Encapsulated PostScript file contains two parts; the PostScript portion and the preview portion. The PostScript portion can contain high-resolution images and a large file size best suited when you publish to prepress. The Preview portion is a low-resolution image and a small file size best suited for the World Wide Web.

To choose an EPS file format

1.	Choose File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the Advanced tab.

3.	From the EPS Files list box, choose one of the following:

•	PostScript

•	Preview

 Notes

•	You cannot publish PostScript and Preview EPS portions at the same time. You can only publish them separately.

•	The PostScript file option cannot be viewed in Acrobat Exchange or Acrobat Reader.

•	The Preview option is not useful for printing PDF files.

 Related Topics


Maintaining Open Prepress Interface links

Open Prepress Interface (OPI) lets you use low-resolution images as placeholders for the high-resolution images that appear in your final work. When your service bureau receives your file, the OPI server substitutes the low-resolution images for the high-resolution images.

To maintain OPI links

1.	Choose File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the Advanced tab.

3.	Enable the Maintain OPI Links check box.

 Note

•	If you are not sure whether your PDF file is destined for an OPI server, avoid using OPI.

 Related Topics


Setting color profiles for PDF files

Using color management helps to ensure accurate color reproduction. If you decide to output all objects as RGB or grayscale, no color profiles are available. If you decide to output colors as CMYK, composite or separations color profiles are available. Use the Composite printer profile if you are using a full color desktop printer. Use the Separations printer profile if you are using an imagesetter.

To output all objects as RGB

1.	Click File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the Advanced tab.

3.	Choose RGB from the Output All Objects As list box.

To output all objects as CMYK

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose CMYK from the Output All Objects As list box.

3.	Enable the Use Color Profile check box.

4.	Enable one of the following color profiles:

•	Composite Printer Profile

•	Separations Printer Profile

To output all objects as grayscale

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To output all objects as RGB" procedure.

2.	Choose Grayscale from the Output All Objects As list box.

To set a printer color profile

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To output all objects as RGB" procedure.

2.	Click the Set Profiles button.

3.	Choose a color profile from any of the following list boxes:

•	Composite Printer [image] if you are not printing color separations

•	Separations Printer [image] if you are printing color separations

 Related Topics


Publishing PDF documents


Overview: Publishing PDF documents
Publishing PDF documents

You can include hyperlinks, generate bookmarks, and thumbnails in a PDF document. Hyperlinks are useful for adding jumps to other web pages or to Internet URLs. Generating bookmarks and thumbnails can be useful in large documents. When you open a document in Acrobat Reader or Acrobat Exchange, you can choose to display a page, a full screen, all the bookmarks, or all the thumbnails.

 Related Topics


Using hyperlinks

You can include hyperlinks in a PDF file. Hyperlinks are jumps to Internet URLs or other pages.

To set hyperlinks

1.	Click Edit, Properties.

2.	Click the Internet tab.

3.	Type an URL in the Location (URL) box.

4.	Click the Apply button.

To include hyperlinks in a PDF file

1.	Choose File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the Document tab.

3.	Enable the Include Hyperlinks check box.

 Related Topics


Using bookmarks and thumbnails

You can generate and display bookmarks and thumbnails in a PDF file. Bookmarks are links represented by text. In a Corel application, you can use an electronic bookmark as a placeholder, just as you use a paper bookmark. Thumbnails are low-resolution miniatures of a page.

You can also specify how documents appear when first opened in Acrobat Reader or Acrobat Exchange.

To set bookmarks

1.	Click View, Dockers, Object Properties.

2.	Click the Internet tab.

3.	Type the bookmark name in the Bookmark box.

4.	Click the Apply button.

To generate bookmarks

1.	Click File, Publish To PDF.

2.	Click the Document tab.

3.	Enable the Generate Bookmarks check box.

To generate a thumbnail

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Generate Thumbnails check box.

To display a bookmark on startup

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To generate bookmarks" procedure.

2.	Enable the Generate Bookmarks check box.

3.	Enable the Bookmarks button.

To display a thumbnail on start

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To generate bookmarks" procedure.

2.	Enable the Generate Thumbnails check box.

3.	Enable the Thumbnails button.

 Related Topics


Automating application tasks


Overview: Automating application tasks
Automating application tasks

With CorelDRAW you can create, save, and run a script using the Corel SCRIPT language. This means that when working in CorelDRAW you can automate operations you use frequently by creating and saving a script. For more advanced script writing and editing, you can use the tools provided with the Corel SCRIPT Editor.

With CorelDRAW you can also create projects using Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA). The VBA Editor provides you with the tools you need to automate CorelDRAW operations.

 More Detailed Information


Creating and running scripts


Overview: Creating and running scripts
Creating and running scripts

With CorelDRAW, you can record a series of operations and save them as a script. After you create a script, you can run it any time to reproduce your actions automatically. For example, you can create a script that draws a rectangle and fills it with a two-color fountain fill.

 Related Topics


Recording and saving a script

You can create a scripts by recording the commands that you want to automate. Whenever, you want to repeat the operations you would run the script.

To record and save a script

1.	Click Tools, Corel SCRIPT, Script And Preset Manager.

2.	Click the Record button.

3.	Perform the procedures you want to record.

4.	Click the Stop button.

5.	Type a name for your script in the Name box.

 Related Topics


Running a script

After you create a script you can run it in the Drawing Window. You can run scripts from the Script and Preset Manager or from the Run Script command. When you run a script, the operations that you recorded are performed automatically.

To run a script from the Script Manager

1.	Click Tools, Corel SCRIPT, Script And Preset Manager.

2.	Choose a script from the Script Manager.

3.	Click the Play button.

To run a preset script from the Script Manager

1.	Click Tools, Corel SCRIPT, Script And Preset Manager.

2.	Open the Scripts, Presets folder, then choose a script.

3.	Click the Play button.

To run a script

1.	Click Tools, Corel SCRIPT, Run.

2.	Select the folder and filename of the script you want to run.

3.	Click Open.

 Note

•	If you often run the same script, you can assign it to a shortcut key, a toolbar button, or a menu.

 Tip

•	You can also run scripts by opening Corel SCRIPT Editor. You can open Corel SCRIPT Editor from the Windows desktop or by clicking Tools, Corel SCRIPT, Corel SCRIPT Editor.

 Related Topics


Using Corel SCRIPT Editor


Overview: Using Corel SCRIPT Editor
Using Corel SCRIPT Editor

The Corel SCRIPT Editor, included the CorelDRAW, is a tool that you can use to modify your saved recordings or scripts. For example, if you have a script that you want to make a change to, you can use the Corel SCRIPT Editor to edit the commands in the script. It's often easier just to modify a few commands rather than to rerecord the entire script. As well as editing commands, you can use Corel SCRIPT Editor to add commands that can't be recorded or to write scripts from scratch.

Since scripts are standard text files, they can be edited with any Windows text editor or word processor. However, Corel SCRIPT Editor also includes features to test, debug, and run script files. Corel SCRIPT scripts can be saved as text only or as standalone executables. Text files do not contain a compiled binary component and are compiled each time the script is executed. Standalone executables contain binary code that you cannot edit in a text editor. Corel SCRIPT files are saved with the extension .CSC.

Corel SCRIPT Editor also includes tools to quickly create and edit custom dialog boxes that let users return input to a running script. For more information see, "Using custom dialog boxes in scripts."

Corel SCRIPT Editor programming language

Any scripts you save contain CorelDRAW commands. These commands are part of the Corel SCRIPT programming language. The Corel SCRIPT programming language consists of application commands and functions as well as programming statements and functions. When using the Corel SCRIPT programming language there are commands you use frequently that use parameters such as measurements and coordinates. You can also use OLE automation to access other application components. CorelDRAW also provides a utility that will convert your version 7 and 8 script to version 9.

Computer programming experience isn't a prerequisite for using Corel SCRIPT to modify and write scripts. However, the more knowledge, experience, and desire you have to learn the mechanics of CorelDRAW, the more you'll be able to take advantage of the power of Corel SCRIPT. The amount of information you need to know about scripting depends on the complexity of your scripts. The Corel SCRIPT online Help file contains instructions for novice script writers as well as reference material for experienced script writers and programmers.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT online Help. Corel SCRIPT online Help provides detailed information about using scripts and a script syntax reference.

 Related Topics


Starting Corel SCRIPT Editor

If you want to create or edit a scripts, you can launch Corel Script Editor directly from the Tools menu. For more information about scripts and script syntax, see Corel SCRIPT online Help.

To start Corel SCRIPT Editor

•	Click Tools, Corel SCRIPT, Corel SCRIPT Editor.

 Related Topics


Overview: Corel SCRIPT application commands and functions
Corel SCRIPT application commands and functions

Any script you create by saving a recording of your CorelDRAW operations is comprised of Corel SCRIPT application commands. Corel SCRIPT application commands instruct CorelDRAW to perform specific actions. For example, a command might instruct CorelDRAW to open or to close a document. The application commands are easy to understand, since most are one-word equivalents of the corresponding Corel application user interface. For example, the .FileNew command creates a new document.

Although most CorelDRAW application commands are one-word equivalents of their corresponding menu commands, you might need more than the command itself to execute an action in these applications. If a command needs more information than is provided by the command name alone, parameters are required. Parameters represent aspects of the feature that you can change or selections you can make.

Application functions ask questions about the status of Corel applications, selected items in Corel applications, or image properties. For example, a function may ask CorelDRAW about an object's dimensions. Application functions are not recordable; they must be written into a script.

 Note

•	Each Corel application that supports scripts has a unique set of application commands and functions. However, some Corel applications use the same name for a command or a function. For example, the .FileNew command is available in both CorelDRAW and Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

 Related Topics


Overview: Corel SCRIPT programming statements and functions
Corel SCRIPT programming statements and functions

Corel SCRIPT programming statements and functions are a common set of instructions that can be used with any Corel application that supports scripting. Programming statements and functions are derived from traditional BASIC programming language dialects. If you're already familiar with a version of BASIC, you'll find the Corel SCRIPT programming language easy to read and understand. If you've never programmed using BASIC, you'll be happy to know that BASIC is one of the easiest languages to read, understand, and learn.

Corel SCRIPT programming statements and functions send instructions or perform actions that aren't part of another Corel application. For example, Corel SCRIPT programming statements can be used to display a custom dialog box, include flow control statements and constructs such as loops, create and manipulate variables, and retrieve information about your computer setup. On their own, Corel SCRIPT programming statements form a powerful programming language. A script containing only Corel SCRIPT programming statements can be executed even if another Corel application is not running.

 Related Topics


Overview: Using custom dialog boxes in scripts
Using custom dialog boxes in scripts

You can use a custom dialog box to get user input returned to a running script. Dialog boxes are created using Corel SCRIPT programming statements that support Windows options and controls such as push buttons, drop-down list boxes, option buttons, and progress indicators.

You can create Corel SCRIPT statements used to produce a dialog box using two methods. The first method is to use Corel SCRIPT Editor and type in the dialog box definition statements. This can prove to be a time-consuming option, because each statement's parameters are specific and it is difficult to visualize the dialog box based on coordinate positions.

The second method is to use dialog windows in Corel SCRIPT Editor. In dialog windows, you draw what you want your dialog box to look like. The dialog box and the dialog box controls within it are graphical representations of Corel SCRIPT statements. Working with the dialog boxes in Corel SCRIPT Editor is similar to using a drawing or a painting application. In dialog windows, dialog box controls are graphic objects that can be inserted, moved, resized, and aligned in a dialog box. You can create or edit a dialog box in a few steps using Corel SCRIPT Editor.

 Related Topics


Overview: Measurement units in CorelDRAW recordings and scripts
Measurement units in CorelDRAW recordings and scripts

Most CorelDRAW scripting commands that use measurement parameters use tenths of a micron as the base unit of measurement. There are 10,000 such units in one millimeter, and one inch is made up of 254,000 tenths of a micron. For example, the two parameters of the .SetSize command specify new dimensions for the selected object in tenths of a micron.

 Related Topics


Overview: Coordinates in CorelDRAW recordings and scripts
Coordinates in CorelDRAW recordings and scripts

CorelDRAW scripting commands that specify locations on a page use coordinates as parameters. Coordinates use tenths of a micron as the base unit of measurement and are expressed as being relative to the center of the current page, which has the coordinates (0,0). For instance, the point (100000, 200000) would be located one centimeter left and two centimeters above the center of the page.

Most CorelDRAW commands that use coordinates, such as the .SetPosition command (sets the position of the selected object), are affected by the application's current reference point. This is the point on the selected object's bounding box that the coordinates operate on. For example, if the current reference point is set to 1 (meaning "top-left corner"), the .SetPosition 0, 0 command positions the selected object so that its top-left corner is at the center of the page. If the current reference point is set to 9 (meaning "center"), the .SetPosition 0,0 command has a different effect, positioning the current object so that its center is at the center of the page. You can set the current reference point with the .SetReferencePoint command. Since you cannot be sure what the current reference point is at the time your script starts, it is important that you call the .SetReferencePoint command before using any commands that take coordinate parameters. Otherwise, your script may not always behave predictably.

 Related Topics


Overview: CorelDRAW script example
CorelDRAW script example

The following example creates a star shaped polygon with eight points and applies a custom conical fountain fill with three intermediate colors.

WITHOBJECT "CorelDraw.Automation.9"

.CreateSymPolygon 1032658, -862906, -693154, 877052, 8, 1, 1, TRUE, 50, 100
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 0, 0, 100, 0, 0, 0, 0
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 100
.ApplyFountainFill 0, 0, 0, -3, 256, 0, 0, 50
.Undo
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 0, 0, 100, 0, 0, 0, 0
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 100
.ApplyFountainFill 0, 0, 0, -3, 256, 0, 0, 50
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 0, 0, 100, 0, 0, 0, 0
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 100
.ApplyFountainFill 2, 0, 0, -3, 256, 0, 0, 50
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 0, 100, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 100
.ApplyFountainFill 2, 0, 0, -3, 256, 0, 0, 50
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 0, 100, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 60, 100, 0, 0, 0, 0, 26
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 100
.ApplyFountainFill 2, 0, 0, -3, 256, 0, 3, 50
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 0, 100, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 60, 100, 0, 0, 0, 0, 26
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 0, 100, 0, 0, 0, 0, 50
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 100
.ApplyFountainFill 2, 0, 0, -3, 256, 0, 3, 50
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 0, 100, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 60, 100, 0, 0, 0, 0, 26
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 0, 100, 0, 0, 0, 0, 50
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 60, 100, 0, 0, 0, 0, 75
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 100
.ApplyFountainFill 2, 0, 0, -3, 256, 0, 3, 50
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 0, 100, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 60, 100, 0, 0, 0, 0, 26
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 0, 100, 0, 0, 0, 0, 50
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 60, 100, 0, 0, 0, 0, 75
.StoreColor 5002, 0, 0, 100, 0, 0, 0, 0, 100
.ApplyFountainFill 2, 0, 0, -3, 256, 0, 3, 50
.ApplyOutline 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, FALSE, 0, 33810, FALSE

END WITHOBJECT

 Note

•	Every script that contains CorelDRAW application commands must include a WITHOBJECT and END WITHOBJECT command.

 Related Topics


Overview: OLE automation
OLE automation

OLE Automation is a flexible and powerful CorelDRAW feature that you can use to build applications that use CorelDRAW components.

OLE Automation is an integration standard that allows applications to expose their programmable objects so that other applications can control them. Exposing an object means that an application makes the script, or macro commands that control it, available to other programming applications. The exposed commands become an extension of the controlling programming language.

Any Corel application that supports Corel SCRIPT provides one programmable OLE automation object. The object is used by OLE automation controllers such as Corel SCRIPT to control Corel applications. You can also use OLE automation controllers such as Microsoft Visual Basic and Visual C++ to send commands to CorelDRAW and to develop applications using Corel application components.

OLE Automation can be used for long and complicated manual processes that transfer data between two or more applications. For example, you may have a manual process that puts data into a spreadsheet for creating a presentation graphic. The graphic is then used in a bitmap application such as Corel PHOTO-PAINT. If you use OLE Automation, you can create a program that automatically performs these steps for you. OLE Automation gives you almost total control over a variety of different applications, allowing you to build the applications you need through its seamless integration capabilities.

 Related Topics


Overview: AutoScripts for CorelDRAW
AutoScripts for CorelDRAW

AutoScripts are *.CSC or *.CSB files with special names that run in response to events within CorelDRAW. For example, if you want to insert your name or copyright information in the lower right corner of every document you print, you can write a script that inserts this information and save it as OnPrint.CSC. Every time the user sends a print job in CorelDRAW, this script will run before the print job is generated.

AutoScript	Description

OnStart	Runs after CorelDRAW is loaded, instead of any other startup features you may have selected. For instance, you can write a script to replace the Welcome to CorelDRAW dialog box that CorelDRAW displays by default.

OnOpen	Runs after you open a new document.

OnClose	Runs before you close a document. The script is responsible for calling .FileClose (otherwise your document will stay open).

OnNew	Runs every time you create a new document.

OnPrint	Runs when you start a print job but before the print job is actually sent to the printer.

OnExit	Runs when you exit CorelDRAW. After the script terminates, CorelDRAW closes.

 Notes

•	AutoScripts must be placed in the Draw folder, not the Draw\Scripts folder.

•	If you do not want an AutoScript to run, you can hold down SHIFT when the CorelDRAW event occurs. For instance, if you hold down SHIFT while CorelDRAW is starting, OnStart will not run.

•	You may only run one script at a time. If a script is running and you attempt to trigger an AutoScript, the AutoScript will not run.

 Related Topics


Using CorelDRAW 6 presets in CorelDRAW 9

You can run presets that you created in CorelDRAW 6 using the Script And Preset Manager in CorelDRAW 9.

To use CorelDRAW 6 presets in CorelDRAW 9

1.	Copy the CorelDRAW 6 presets file (.PST extension in the Draw folder of CorelDRAW 6) to the COREL\GRAPHICS9\DRAW\SCRIPTS folder.

2.	Click Tools, Scripts, Script And Preset Manager.

The .PST file is represented by a folder in the Script And Preset Manager.

3.	Double-click the PST folder.

4.	Click the preset you want to run.

5.	Click the Play button at the bottom of the Script And Preset Manager.

 Related Topics


Converting CorelDRAW 7 and 8 scripts in CorelDRAW 9

You can convert scripts created or recorded in CorelDRAW 7 or 8 to CorelDRAW 9 scripts using the Script Conversion Utility. Use the Conversion Utility if you want to use scripts that you have recorded or written in CorelDRAW 9. This utility will convert the script command to CorelDRAW 9 format. The existing CorelDRAW 7or 8 script will be saved in the same folder and have a .BAK extension. The conversion utility will save the converted file with the same name but has a .CSC extension.

To convert a CorelDRAW 7 or 8 script to a CorelDRAW 9 script

1.	Start the Script Conversion Utility from the CorelDRAW 9 productivity tools.

2.	Click the Convert File(s) button.

3.	Choose a folder from the Look In file list.

4.	Choose a file name from the list.

You can choose multiple scripts to convert by holding down SHIFT or CTRL.

5.	Click the Open button.

6.	In the Script Conversion Utility window, you will see a message indicating that the scripts have been converted and are located in the same folder.

You can move your scripts to another folder after they have been converted.

 Tip

•	You can also run CSCConv.exe from the Programs folder.

 Related Topics


Using Visual Basic for Applications


Overview: Using Visual Basic for Applications
Using Visual Basic for Applications

Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) allows you to automate your tasks in CorelDRAW using Visual Basic language. The integration of the VBA Editor lets you create projects that you can run in CorelDRAW. By incorporating VBA, Corel provides an international programming language to users.

For more information on working with VBA, see the online help from the VBA editor.

 Related Topics


Creating an automation project with VBA

You can automate your tasks using the Visual Basic Editor which is available within CorelDRAW.

To create an automation project

1.	Click Tools, Visual Basic, Visual Basic Editor.

2.	Using the Visual Basic Editor create your automation project.


Drawing and shaping objects


Overview: Drawing and shaping objects
Drawing and shaping objects

Once you have opened and formatted your drawing page, you are ready to start drawing. To create your drawing, you will need to know how to create geometrical shapes, straight lines, curves, and irregular shapes. This chapter describes how to use the basic drawing tools available in CorelDRAW for creating these types of objects.

The chapter also describes how to use the specialized drawing tools, such as the Artistic Media tool. The Artistic Media tool is a powerful drawing tool you use to apply different effects to a line. For example, you can use the tool in Brush mode to apply text or graphics to a curve. The Artistic Media tool has five drawing modes: Preset, Brush, Object Sprayer, Calligraphic, and Pressure-sensitive.

As well as the Artistic Media tool, CorelDRAW also has tools for creating dimension, connector, and flow lines.

Once you have created a shape or line, you can move and shape the object to create the effect you want. Some types of objects, such as rectangles and ellipses, can only be shaped in specific ways. For example, you can round one or more corners of a square or create a pie-shape or arc from a circle. Lines and curves [image] including Artistic Media strokes [image] can be formed into any shape by dragging the curve's nodes or moving the control lines.

If you want to make more extensive changes to a rectangle, ellipse, or polygon, you can convert the object to a curve. For example, you can create a trapezoid from a rectangle by converting the rectangle to a curve object and then dragging the corners using the Shape tool.

 More Detailed Information


Drawing basic objects


Overview: Drawing basic objects
Drawing basic objects

CorelDRAW provides drawing tools for drawing basic shapes, such as rectangles, ellipses, polygons, stars, grids, and spirals. To draw a shape with one of these tools, drag diagonally in any direction until the shape is the size you want. For each tool, the Status Bar displays the dimensions of the shape as you draw it.

 Related Topics


Drawing a rectangle or square

The Rectangle tool lets you draw rectangles and squares.

To draw a rectangle

1.	Click the Rectangle tool.

2.	Position the cursor where you want the rectangle to appear.

3.	Drag diagonally to draw the rectangle.

To draw a square

•	Hold down CTRL and drag diagonally.

 Tips

•	If you hold down SHIFT, CorelDRAW creates the rectangle or square from the center outward as you drag.

•	Double-clicking the Rectangle tool creates a rectangle covering the entire drawing page. This is useful if you want to create a background for the drawing.

 Related Topics


Drawing an ellipse or a circle

The Ellipse tool lets you draw ellipses and circles.

To draw an ellipse

1.	Click the Ellipse tool.

2.	Position the cursor where you want the ellipse to appear.

3.	Drag diagonally to draw the ellipse.

To draw a circle

•	Hold down CTRL and drag diagonally.

 Tip

•	If you hold down SHIFT, CorelDRAW creates the ellipse or circle from the center outward as you drag.

 Related Topics


Drawing a polygon or star

The polygon tool lets you draw polygons and stars. A polygon is a closed shape having from three to 500 sides. Stars have from three to 500 points.

To draw a polygon

1.	Open the Object flyout, and click the Polygon tool.

2.	Position the cursor where you want the polygon to appear.

3.	Drag diagonally to draw the polygon.

4.	If you want to change the number of sides on the polygon, type the appropriate number in the Number Of Points On Polygon box on the Property Bar, then press ENTER.

To draw a star

1.	Follow all the steps from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Polygon/Star button on the Property Bar.

To draw a symmetrical polygon

•	Hold down CTRL and drag diagonally.

 Tip

•	If you hold down SHIFT, CorelDRAW creates the polygon or star from the center outward as you drag.

 Related Topics


Drawing spirals

The Spiral tool lets you draw spiral shapes. There are two types of spirals: symmetrical and logarithmic. In a symmetrical spiral, the distance between each revolution of the spiral is constant. In a logarithmic spiral, this distance increases as the spiral progresses outward.

To draw a symmetrical spiral

1.	Open the Object flyout, and click the Spiral tool.

2.	Type a number in the Spiral Revolutions box on the Property Bar to indicate the number of revolutions you want for the spiral.

3.	Click the Symmetrical Spiral button on the Property Bar.

4.	Position the cursor where you want the spiral to appear.

5.	Drag diagonally to draw the spiral.

To draw a logarithmic spiral

1.	Open the Object flyout and click the Spiral tool.

2.	Type a number in the Spiral Revolutions box on the Property Bar to indicate the number of revolutions you want for the spiral.

3.	Click the Logarithmic Spiral button on the Property Bar.

4.	Move the Spiral Expansion Factor slider adjust the amount by which the spiral expands as it moves outward.

Move the slider to the right to increase this amount; move it to the left to decrease this amount.

5.	Position the cursor where you want the spiral to appear.

6.	Drag diagonally to draw the spiral.

To draw a spiral with equal horizontal and vertical dimensions

1.	Do one of the following:

•	Follow steps 1 to 4 of the "To draw a symmetrical spiral" procedure to draw a symmetrical spiral

•	Follow steps 1 to 5 of the "To draw a logarithmic spiral" procedure to draw a logarithmic spiral

2.	Hold down CTRL, drag diagonally to draw the spiral.

 Tip

•	If you hold down SHIFT, CorelDRAW creates the spiral from the center outward as you drag.

 Related Topics


Drawing grids

The Graph Paper tool lets you draw a grid pattern. This pattern is formed by a series of grouped rectangles arranged in rows and columns.

To draw a grid

1.	Open the Object flyout, and click the Graph Paper tool.

2.	Type the number of columns you want in the column number box in the Graph Paper Columns And Rows box on the Property Bar.

3.	Type the number of rows you want in the row number box in the Graph Paper Columns And Rows box on the Property Bar.

4.	Position the cursor where you want the spiral to appear.

5.	Drag diagonally to draw the grid.

To draw a square grid

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 of the previous procedure.

2.	Hold down CTRL and drag diagonally.

 Tip

•	If you hold down SHIFT, CorelDRAW creates the grid from the center outward as you drag.

 Related Topics


Selecting objects


Overview: Selecting objects
Selecting objects

Before you can move or shape an object, you must select it. When you select an object, a selection box appears around the object. A selection box appears as an invisible rectangle having eight black squares, called selection handles, arranged at the corners and midpoints, and a small "x" in the center.

If necessary, you can perform actions on more than one object by selecting all the objects you want. When you select multiple objects, a single selection box encloses all the objects and the "x" appears in the center of the selection box. You can select objects using the mouse, keyboard, or menu commands.

You can select objects on any unlocked layer as long as the Edit Across Layers option is enabled in the Object Manager. If this option is disabled, then you can only select objects on the active layer. For more information about layers, see "Using layers to organize your drawing."

If you select a locked object, the selection handles appear as padlocks. You cannot edit a locked object. To make changes, you must first unlock the object. For more information, see "Locking and unlocking objects."

 Related Topics


Selecting an object

You must select an object before you can make changes to it. If the Treat All Objects As Filled option is enabled, you can select objects without fills by clicking anywhere within the outline. If the option is disabled, you must click on the object's outline to select it.

If you are working with unfilled and filled objects that overlap, you may find it useful to select objects by their outline.

To select an object

•	Click the object with the Pick tool.

 Tips

•	To choose the Pick tool, you can press either the SPACEBAR or, if the Text tool is selected in edit mode, CTRL + SPACEBAR.

•	You can press TAB to select the next object, or press SHIFT + TAB to select the previous object.

To enable or disable the Treat All Objects As Filled option

1.	Click a blank space in the Drawing Window to deselect any objects.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Enable the Treat As Filled button to select unfilled objects by clicking within the outline

•	Disable the Treat As Filled button to select unfilled objects by clicking on the outline

The button is disabled when it appears raised.

 Tip

•	You can also change the Treat All Objects As Filled option by right-clicking the Pick tool and enabling or disabling the check box.

 Related Topics


Selecting all objects

You can select all objects in the active page. You can also select all text objects, guidelines, or nodes.

To select all objects

•	Click Edit, Select All, Objects.

 Note

•	Guidelines are excluded when you choose the Select All, Objects option.

 Tip

•	You can also select all the objects in the active page by double-clicking the Pick tool.

To select all text

•	Click Edit, Select All, Text.

Any Paragraph text or Artistic text becomes selected.

To select all guidelines

•	Click Edit, Select All, Guidelines.

To select all nodes of a selected object

•	Click Edit, Select All, Nodes.

 Tip

•	You can also select all nodes by double-clicking the Shape tool.

 Related Topics


Marquee selecting objects

If you want to select several objects, you can drag a marquee box around them. You can also select objects without completely enclosing them with a marquee box.

To marquee select several objects

•	Using the Pick tool, drag the mouse diagonally until a marquee box encloses all objects.

To marquee select objects without entirely surrounding all objects

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2.	Hold down ALT, and drag diagonally until the marquee box touches the objects you want to select.

 Tip

•	If the objects you want to select are arranged so you cannot use the marquee selection method, you can hold down SHIFT and use the Pick tool to select each of the objects you want in turn.

 Related Topics


Selecting objects in a group

You can select an object that is part of a group or nested group. This eliminates the need to ungroup a group in order to make changes to one or more of them.

To select an object in a group

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2.	Hold down CTRL, and click the object.

To select an object in a nested group

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2.	Hold down CTRL, and double-click the object.

 Note

•	When you select an object that is part of a group, the handles on the selection box appear as circles instead of squares.

 Related Topics


Selecting hidden objects

If you have overlapping objects on a page, you can select a hidden object within a series or within a group without having to move or reorder the other objects.

You can also select multiple hidden objects within a series. When you select the bottom-most object, the cursor moves to the top-most object in the series. You may find it useful to refer to the Object Manager to see which objects are selected. For information on using the Object Manager, see "Using the Object Manager."

The cursor must be positioned over the bottom-most and top-most objects for them to be included in the selection.

To select an object hidden below a series of objects

•	Hold down ALT, and click the top-most object using the Pick tool until the object you want is selected.

As you click, CorelDRAW dispalys the selection box for each selected hidden object.

To select multiple objects hidden below a series of objects

1.	Using the Pick tool, click the top-most object in the series you want to include in the selection.

2.	Hold down ALT + SHIFT, and click to add the next object to the selection.

3.	Click until you add all the objects you want to your selection.

To select a hidden object within a group

•	Hold down CTRL + ALT, and click the top-most object with the Pick tool until the object you want is selected.

 Tips

•	The Simple Wireframe view or Wireframe view makes it easier to identify the objects you select.

•	You can also select hidden objects with the drawing tools using the same method.

 Related Topics


Selecting locked objects

When an object is locked the selection handles appear as small locks. Selecting multiple locked objects is the quickest way to unlock objects in order to modify them.

To select locked objects

•	Select the locked object with the Pick tool.

To select hidden locked objects

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click ALT to select the locked object hidden under other objects.

The locked object has selection handles that appear as locks.

To select multiple locked objects

1.	Select the locked objects with the Pick tool.

2.	Click SHIFT to select additional objects.

 Note

•	You cannot marquee select locked objects.

 Related Topics


Deselecting objects

Deselect an object when you are finished modifying it.

To deselect all objects

•	Click a blank space in the Drawing Window.

 Tip

•	You can also press ESC to deselect all objects.

To deselect an object from several selected objects

•	Hold down SHIFT, and click anywhere on the object's fill or outline.

 Tip

•	If you're not sure which object is selected, refer to the Status Bar or the Object Manager.

 Related Topics


Moving objects


Overview: Moving objects
Moving objects

The easiest way to move and position objects in your drawing is to drag and drop the object using the pick tool or a drawing tool. To drag an object using a drawing tool, you must position the cursor over the small "x" at the center of the selection box.

When you drag an object, CorelDRAW indicates the new position of the selected object as you drag by displaying the object in either outline, transparent fill, or opaque fill. By displaying the new position of the object, CorelDRAW lets you position objects exactly where you want them.

You can also move objects with precision by entering new coordinates for the object or by "nudging" the object incrementally into place.

 Related Topics


Moving objects by dragging and dropping

By dragging an object, you can move it to a new location quickly. While you are dragging an object, CorelDRAW displays an outline, transparent fill, or opaque fill of the object to indicate the new position.

To move an object by dragging and dropping

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Drag the object to a new place in your drawing.

 Note

•	When you drag an object, the values in the Object(s) Position box on the Property Bar indicate the new coordinates of the object.

 Tips

•	You can constrain the object to horizontal or vertical movements by holding down CTRL as you drag the object.

•	To position an object exactly where you want it, you can choose to snap the object to a gridline, guideline, or other object. For information on snapping objects to grids, guidelines, and objects, see "Using the rulers, grid, and guidelines."

 Related Topics


Displaying an object while positioning it

You can display an object in one of three different forms while positioning it. You can display the object in its outline, opaque fill, or transparent fill forms. By displaying the new position of the object, CorelDRAW lets you position objects exactly where you want them.

For very complex illustrations that would take too long to redraw, CorelDRAW indicates the new position while you drag by displaying a rectangle with a dashed border. You can choose to have CorelDRAW redraw the object's outline if you pause while dragging. By default, CorelDRAW displays a rectangle when you drag complex objects.

To select a display mode while positioning an object

1.	Using the Pick tool, position the cursor over an object.

2.	Click and hold the left mouse button until the cursor changes to a four-way cursor.

3.	Press TAB to switch between the three display forms of the object: outline, transparent fill, or opaque fill.

4.	Choose a display form and drag the object in this form to the desired location.

To enable the Redraw Complex Objects option

1.	Right-click the Pick tool, and click Properties.

2.	Enable the Redraw Complex Objects check box to display the outline of complex objects when you pause while dragging the object.

3.	Type a value in the Delay box to specify the delay time from the moment you pause to the moment CorelDRAW redraws the outline.

CorelDRAW draws the outline of a complex object when you pause while positioning it.

 Related Topics


Moving objects in increments

You can use the Arrow keys on the keyboard to move an object in increments. By using the arrow keys, you can nudge an object up, down, right, or left. By default, objects move in 0.1-inch increments. You can also use the super nudge feature to nudge an object using a larger increment.

You can set the Nudge and Super Nudge values to suit your needs. The Super Nudge value is based on the Nudge value.

To nudge an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Press the Arrow key(s).

To move an object in larger increments (super nudge)

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Hold down SHIFT, and press the Arrow key(s).

 Tip

•	As you nudge an object, you can leave a copy of it by pressing + on the numeric keypad before pressing the Arrow key.

To set the nudge or super nudge distance

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	From the tree, click Edit under Workspace.

3.	Type a nudge distance in the Nudge box.

4.	Type a value in the Super Nudge box.

The value you type is multiplied by the nudge distance to determine the super nudge distance.

5.	Choose a unit of measurement from the Units list box.

 Tip

•	You can also specify the nudge distance by deselecting all objects, and typing a value in the Nudge Offset box on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Shaping basic objects


Overview: Shaping basic objects
Shaping basic objects

Once you have created basic objects, you can use a number of tools, buttons, and commands to change the shape of the object. For example, you can use the Shape tool to round the corners of a rectangle or shape an ellipse into an arc or a pie-shape.

To shape a polygon or star, you can use the Polygon/Star button to switch from polygon to star and from star to polygon. You can use the Sharpness slider to adjust the sharpness of a star. You can also use the Shape tool to drag nodes on the object. Nodes cannot be moved individually. Instead, when you drag a node on a polygon or star, other nodes of the same type move in the same way. For example, if you drag a corner node counterclockwise, all other corner nodes move counterclockwise. This form of editing is referred to as mirror editing.

For example, a pentagon has 10 nodes [image] one at each corner and one on each side. All the corner nodes are associated and all the side nodes are associated. If you drag a side node towards the center, all the side nodes move towards the center. Also, if you add a node to a pentagon, five nodes are added (one on each side).

To shape a grid, you can ungroup the grid and then shape each rectangle individually.

If you want more freedom to change the shape of an object, you can convert it to a curve object. Once you convert an object to a curve object, you can drag nodes independently. For example, you can create an irregular four-sided object by converting a rectangle to a curve and then dragging the corner nodes independently.

If you want to edit a grid as a curve, you must first ungroup the grid before you can convert it to curves. Spirals are curved objects when created and can be edited as such.

 Related Topics


Rounding the corners of a rectangle

You can use the Shape tool to round one or more of the corners of a rectangle or square. A rectangle has a node at each corner. When you round the corners of a rectangle, CorelDRAW splits each corner node in two and draws an arc between each of these two new nodes. You can control the size of this arc by moving any of the corner nodes. The amount of rounding is displayed on the Property Bar.

To round the corners of a rectangle

1.	Select the rectangle with the Shape tool.

2.	Drag one of the four corner nodes along the outline of the rectangle or square.

Each corner node splits into two nodes joined by an arc. As you drag the node away from the corner along the outline, the corners of the rectangle become rounder.

To round a single corner of a rectangle or square

1.	Select the rectangle with the Shape tool.

2.	Click a corner node to deselect the other three corner nodes.

3.	Drag the corner node along the outline of the rectangle or square.

The corner node splits into two nodes joined by an arc. As you drag the node away from the corner along the outline, the corner of the rectangle becomes rounder.

 Tips

•	You can also round the corners of rectangles using the Pick tool or any of the basic drawing tools.

•	You can round the corners of a rectangle with precision by entering values in the Rectangle Corner Roundness boxes on the Property Bar. To round only one corner, unlock the Round Corners Together button.

 Related Topics


Changing an ellipse to an arc or a pie shape

You can use the Shape tool to turn an ellipse or circle into an arc or a pie shape. A simple ellipse has one node, but when you create an arc or pie shape, CorelDRAW splits this node in two.

You control the appearance of the arc or the pie shape by moving these two new nodes. You can also change the direction in which CorelDRAW draws arcs and pie shapes.

To create an arc or pie shape from an ellipse

1.	Select the ellipse with the Shape tool.

2.	Drag the node along the outline of the ellipse.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Drag with the cursor outside the perimeter of the ellipse to create an arc.

•	Drag with the cursor inside the perimeter of the ellipse to create a pie shape.

To change the direction in which arcs or pie shapes are drawn

1.	Select the arc or pie shape with the Shape tool.

2.	Click the Clockwise/Counterclockwise Arcs or Pies button on the Property Bar.

 Tips

•	You can also change ellipses to arcs and pie shapes using the Pick tool or any of the basic drawing tools. Simply position the cursor over the node (the cursor changes to the Shape tool cursor) and drag as necessary.

•	When dragging nodes you can constrain the their position to 15-degree increments by holding down CTRL.

•	You can quickly convert between ellipses, arcs, and pie shapes by selecting the shape and clicking the Ellipse, Pie or the Arc button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Changing the properties of a polygon or star

You can change the properties [image] such as number of points [image] of a polygon or star. You can also use the Shape tool or Pick tool to change the shape of the polygon or star.

You can control which points of a star are connected to which others by adjusting the sharpness level. As you increase the sharpness level, the points on the star become more pronounced.

If you want the changes you make to one node to be reflected on all associated nodes, you can mirror edit the polygon or star. When mirror editing, you can move, add, and remove segments and nodes. Nodes can be changed to smooth, cusp, or symmetrical, and segments can be straight or curved. For more information about editing nodes and segments, see "Shaping lines, curves, and curve objects."

To change a polygon to a star or a star to a polygon

1.	Select the polygon or star with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Polygon/Star button on the Property Bar.

To change the number of sides of a polygon or points on a star

1.	Select the polygon or star with the Pick tool.

2.	Type a number in the Number Of Points On Polygon box on the Property Bar, then press ENTER.

To mirror edit a star or polygon

1.	Select the polygon or star with the Pick tool.

2.	Hold the Pick tool over a node until it changes into the Shape tool cursor.

3.	Click and drag the node.

To change the sharpness of a star

1.	Select the star with the Pick tool.

2.	Move the Sharpness slider on the Property Bar to adjust the sharpness of the star.

Move the slider to the right to increase the sharpness; move it to the left to decrease it.

 Note

•	To access the Sharpness slider, a star must have at least seven points. The sensitivity of the slider increases with the number of points.

 Tip

•	You can also adjust the sharpness of polygon objects by right-clicking the Polygon tool, clicking Properties and adjusting the Sharpness slider on the Polygon tool page. You can only adjust the sharpness of a star or a polygon as star but not a regular polygon.

 Related Topics


Shaping parts of a grid

The grid is a set of grouped rectangles created using the Graph Paper tool. A grid object must be ungrouped before you can make changes to its shape. Once you ungroup the grid object, it becomes a set of individual rectangles. For more information about shaping the corners of a rectangle, see "Rounding the corners of a rectangle."

To ungroup a grid

1.	Select the grid with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Ungroup.

 Related Topics


Changing objects to curves

To shape an object without restriction, you must first convert it to a curve object. When you convert an ellipse or rectangle to a curve object, you can shape it by editing its nodes or segments.

To shape a polygon or star without mirror editing, you must first convert it to a curve object. When you convert a polygon or star to a curve object, you can shape it by editing each node and segment individually.

The grid, created by the Graph Paper tool, is formed with a series of grouped rectangles. It must be ungrouped before it can be converted to a curve object.

To convert an ellipse, rectangle, polygon, or star to a curve object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Convert To Curves.

To convert a grid to a curve object

1.	Select the grid with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Ungroup.

3.	Click Arrange, Convert To Curves.

 Note

•	Objects created with the Spiral tool are curve objects. Once you create a spiral, you can edit each node and segment individually.

 Tip

•	You can also convert an object into a curve object by selecting the object and clicking the Convert To Curves button on the Property Bar when the Pick tool is selected.

 Related Topics


Drawing lines and curves


Overview: Drawing lines and curves
Drawing lines and curves

Besides the tools for drawing basic shapes, CorelDRAW also includes two tools for drawing simple lines and curves. These are the Freehand tool and the Bezier tool. Once you have drawn a line or curve, you can apply various effecs using the Artistic Media tool. For more information on the Artistic Media tool, see "Drawing with the Artistic Media tool."

The Freehand tool lets you draw a line or curve by dragging the mouse cursor across the page like a pencil on paper. If the resulting curve is rougher than desired, you can smooth out the line by adjusting the Drawing settings or by editing the curve after you have drawn it. For more information, see "Shaping lines, curves, and curve objects."

The Bezier tool lets you draw smooth, precise curves by placing nodes and adjusting the curvature of the line between the nodes. When you draw a line or curve using the Bezier tool, you place nodes by each click of the mouse. Each node is connected to the previous node by a segment. To control the curvature of the segment you are drawing, position the node's control points. The control points are black boxes connected to the node by dotted lines. By using control points and by placing each node individually, you can create precise lines and curves.

 Related Topics


Drawing lines and curves with the Freehand tool

The Freehand tool lets you draw lines and curves by dragging the mouse like a pencil on paper. You can format lines and curves as you do outlines. For example, you can choose a line width, a line style, as well as start and end arrowheads for the line. For more information, see "Outlining objects."

To draw a curve with the Freehand tool

1.	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Freehand tool.

2.	Click the Freehand Smoothing box and move the pop-up slider to select a smoothness setting.

Move the slider to the right for maximum smoothing; move the slider to the left for no smoothing.

3.	Position the cursor where you want the curve to start.

4.	Drag to draw the curve.

To draw a straight line with the Freehand tool

1.	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Freehand tool.

2.	Click where you want the line to begin.

3.	Click where you want the line to end.

To draw a curve or straight line connected to another curve or line

•	Position the Freehand tool over the node at the end of the existing line or curve, then draw a new line or curve.

 Note

•	You must click within five pixels of the end point to join the two curves. You can adjust this five-pixel threshold by changing the Freehand tool's Auto-join setting. Access this setting by right-clicking the Freehand tool and clicking Properties.

To erase a portion of a curve as you draw with the Freehand tool

•	Without releasing the mouse button, hold down SHIFT and drag backwards along the portion of the curve you want to erase.

When you are finished erasing, you can resume drawing your line by releasing the SHIFT key and continuing to drag the mouse.

To draw a closed shape with the Freehand tool

1.	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Freehand tool.

2.	Click the Freehand Smoothing box and move the pop-up slider to select a smoothness setting.

Move the slider to the right for maximum smoothing; move the slider to the left for no smoothing.

3.	Draw a curve or a series of connected straight lines that begins and ends at the same point.

If you're drawing a series of connected straight lines, double-click to create a node and click the starting point to close the shape. If you're drawing a curve, drag over the starting point and release to close the shape.

 Tips

•	You can draw lines that have both straight and freehand sections with the Freehand tool by using TAB to toggle between straight and freehand mode as you drag the mouse.

•	To constrain the angle of a straight line to 15-degree increments, you must hold down CTRL before placing the end of the line. You can specify a different angle using the controls in the Options dialog box. For more information. see "Controlling the behavior of the Freehand and Bezier tools."

 Related Topics


Drawing lines and curves with the Bezier tool

The Bezier tool lets you draw lines and curves by placing each node with the mouse. As you place each node, it is connected to the previously placed node by a line or curve. The Bezier tool lets you create complex, irregular shapes quickly and easily and gives you precise control over the position and number of nodes that form a curve.

You can format lines and curves as you do outlines. For example, you can choose a line width, a line style, as well as start and end arrowheads for the line. For more information, see "Outlining objects."

To draw a curve with the Bezier tool

1.	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Bezier tool.

2.	Click where you want to place the first node and drag the control point in the direction you want the curve to bend.

3.	Position the cursor where you want to place the next node and drag the control point to create the curve you want.

The position and angle of the control points affects the shape of the segment you've just created and the next segment you add (if you add one).

4.	Repeat step 3 to add nodes to the curve.

5.	Press SPACEBAR to finish the curve.

To draw a straight line with the Bezier tool

1.	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Bezier tool.

2.	Click where you want to place the first node.

3.	Click where you want to place the next node.

4.	Repeat step 3 for each node you want to add.

5.	Press SPACEBAR to finish the curve.

To draw a closed shape with the Bezier tool

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 of the "To draw a curve with the Bezier tool" procedure or the "To draw a straight line with the Bezier tool" procedure.

2.	Position the cursor over the first node and click once.

 Tips

•	Hold down CTRL as you position the control points to move in 15 degree increments. You can specify a different angle of constraint using the controls in the Options dialog box. For information, see "Controlling the behavior of the Freehand and Bezier tools."

•	Holding down ALT while drawing with the Bezier tool lets you drag to reposition the last node created. Holding down C changes the last node to a cusp node, while holding down S changes the last node to a smooth node.

 Related Topics


Drawing with the Artistic Media tool


Overview: Drawing with the Artistic Media tool
Drawing with the Artistic Media tool

The Artistic Media tool lets you apply various effects to a curve. For example, you can create curves that look like strokes from a calligraphic pen or a pressure-sensitive pen. As well, you can apply text, shapes, or images to a curve using the Artistic Media tool. If you need to change the position or shape of the curve, you can edit the Artistic Media stroke's control path. For more information, see "Shaping lines, curves, and curve objects."

The Artistic Media tool has five modes:

•	Preset mode [image] draws curves that change thickness based on preset line shapes you can choose from a list box on the Property Bar.

•	Brush mode [image] applies text or shapes to the curve when you draw it.

•	Object sprayer mode [image] applies a series of images to a curve when you draw it.

•	Calligraphic mode [image] draws curves that change thickness based on the direction of the curve. This creates an effect similar to that of a calligraphic pen.

•	Pressure-sensitive mode [image] draws curves that change thickness based on feedback from a pressure-sensitive pen or a keyboard.

You can select the type of Artistic Media stroke you want to use by clicking the appropriate button on the Property Bar. You must first click the Artistic Media tool to display its Property Bar controls.

 Notes

•	You can draw lines that have both straight and freehand sections with the Artistic Media tool by using TAB to toggle between straight and freehand mode as you drag the mouse. Holding down CTRL constrains the line to 15-degree increments.

•	If you change any of the Property Bar settings for the Artistic Media tool, while nothing is selected, then these settings become the default tool settings.

•	Using the Arrange, Separate command you can separate the Artistic Media stroke from the control path, allowing you to shape the Artistic Media stroke independently of the control path.

 Related Topics


Drawing curves in Preset mode

The Preset mode allows you to draw curves in one of a number of preset shapes. The preset shapes are closed paths that follow the curve you draw. Because the presets are closed paths, you can apply different kinds of fills and change the outline style and color.

To draw a curve in Preset mode

1.	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Artistic Media tool.

2.	Click the Preset button on the Property Bar.

3.	Click the Freehand Smoothing box and move the pop-up slider to select a smoothness setting.

Move the slider to the right for maximum smoothing; move the slider to the left for no smoothing.

4.	Type a width in the Artistic Media Tool Width box on the Property Bar, then press ENTER.

The width you set here represents the curve's maximum width.

5.	Choose a preset curve shape from the Preset list box.

6.	Position the cursor where you want the curve to start.

7.	Drag to draw the curve.

 Related Topics


Drawing curves in Brush mode

The Brush mode allows you to apply shapes or text to a curve. You can select a preset brush from the Brush list box or save a graphic or text object as a brush stroke.

To draw a curve in Brush mode

1.	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Artistic Media tool.

2.	Click the Brush button on the Property Bar.

3.	Click the Freehand Smoothing box and move the pop-up slider to select a smoothness setting.

Move the slider to the right for maximum smoothing; move the slider to the left for no smoothing.

4.	Type a width in the Artistic Media Tool Width box on the Property Bar, then press ENTER.

The width you set here represents the curve's maximum width.

5.	Select a brush from the Brush list box.

6.	Place the cursor where you want the curve to start.

7.	Drag to draw the curve.

To create a brush stroke

1.	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Artistic Media tool.

2.	Click the Brush button on the Property Bar.

3.	Select the graphic or text object you want to use as a brush with the Artistic Media tool.

4.	Click the Save button from the Property Bar.

5.	In the Save As dialog box, type a name for the brush stroke in the File Name box, and click Save.

 Note

•	You can also create a brush stroke by selecting the graphic or text object, clicking the Save button in the Artistic Media Docker, and enabling the Brush button.

To delete a brush stroke

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Select the brush stroke you want to delete from the Brush list box, and click the Delete button.

 Related Topics


Drawing curves using the Object Sprayer

The Object Sprayer mode allows you to "spray" a series of objects along a curve. Besides graphic and text objects, you can import bitmaps and spray them along a curve. Of course, the more complex the object you want to spray, the more system resources you use, the longer CorelDRAW takes to produce the curve, and the larger your file size.

The Object Sprayer has a number of features that allow you to control how the spray appears on the curve. For example, you can adjust the spacing between the objects, vary the order of the objects in the curve, adjust the Sprayer to rotate the objects along the curve, and offset the objects from the curve you draw.

All settings are saved to a spraylist. If you make changes to a spraylist, you can either reset the spaylist to its saved settings, or save the new settings to the spraylist. You can choose to spray some or all the objects in the spraylist. The series of objects selected for the spray is referred to as the "playlist."

To draw a curve using the Object Sprayer

1.	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Artistic Media tool.

2.	Click the Sprayer button on the Property Bar.

3.	Click the Freehand Smoothing box and move the pop-up slider to select a smoothness setting.

Move the slider to the right for maximum smoothing; move the slider to the left for no smoothing.

4.	Type a percentage value in the Size of Objects to be Sprayed box on the Property Bar, then press ENTER.

The value you set here represents the size of the sprayed object as a percentage of the original. If you want the objects to increase of decrease along the curve, click the Incremental Scaling button to enable the Incremental Scaling box, type a percent value, and then press ENTER.

5.	Select a spray from the Spraylist File list box.

6.	Place the cursor where you want the curve to start.

7.	Drag to draw the curve.

To adjust the dabs setting for the Spraylist

1.	Select the Spraylist you want to adjust.

2.	Type the number of objects you want placed at each spacing point.

For example, if you type "4", CorelDRAW places four objects at each spacing point on the curve.

To adjust the spacing between dabs on a curve

•	Type the distance you want between the centers of each object on the curve, then press ENTER.

To adjust the rotation of objects to be sprayed

1.	Select the Spraylist you want to adjust.

2.	Click the Rotation button on the Property Bar.

3.	Type a value between 0 and 360 in the Angle box.

For example, to rotate all objects in the spray by 45 degrees, type "45" in the Angle box.

4.	If you want each object in the spray to rotate incrementally, enable the Use Increment check box and type a value in the Increment box.

5.	Do one of the following:

•	Enable the Path Based button to rotate objects in relation to the curve.

•	Enable the Page Based button to rotate objects in relation to the page.

To offset objects from the curve

1.	Select the Spraylist you want to adjust.

2.	Click the Offset button on the Property Bar.

3.	Enable the Use Offset check box to offset objects from the curve.

If you want the objects to follow the curve, disable the check box.

4.	If you want to adjust the offset distance, type a new value in the Offset box.

5.	Choose an offset direction from the Offset Direction list box.

For example, if you want to alternate between the left and right of the curve, choose Alternating.

To create a new Spraylist

1.	Choose New Spraylist from the Spraylist File list on the Property Bar.

2.	Select the object you want to add to the Spraylist, then click Add to Spraylist.

3.	Repeat step 2 for each object you want to add.

4.	Click the Save button and type a name for the Spraylist in the File name box.

To create or edit a Playlist

1.	Choose the Spraylist from the Spraylist File list box.

2.	Click the Spraylist Dialog button on the Property Bar.

3.	From the Create Playlist dialog box, do the following as necessary:

•	To add an image to the Playlist, choose the image from the Spraylist list box and click Add.

•	To remove an image from the Playlist, choose the image from the Playlist list box and click Remove.

•	To change the order of the Playlist, choose an image from the Playlist and click the Up or Down arrow.

•	To reverse the order of the Playlist, click the Reverse Order button.

•	To clear the Playlist, click Clear.

To delete a Spraylist

•	From the Property Bar, choose the Spraylist you want to delete and click the Delete button.

To reset a Spraylist to its saved settings

1.	Choose the Spraylist you want to reset from the Spraylist File list box.

2.	Click the Reset Values button on the Property Bar.

3.	Click Yes to save the new values to the Spraylist, or No to reset the Spraylist to its saved settings.

 Note

•	You can also create a Spraylist by selecting the graphic or text object, clicking the Save button in the Artistic Media Docker, and enabling the Object Sprayer button.

 Related Topics


Drawing curves in Calligraphic mode

The Calligraphic mode allows you to simulate the effect of using a calligraphic pen. Curves drawn in calligraphic mode vary in thickness according to the direction of the line and the angle of the pen nib.

To draw a curve in Calligraphic mode

1.	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Artistic Media tool.

2.	Click the Calligraphic button on the Property Bar.

3.	Click the Freehand Smoothing box and move the pop-up slider to select a smoothness setting.

Move the slider to the right for maximum smoothing; move the slider to the left for no smoothing.

4.	Type a width in the Artistic Media Tool Width box on the Property Bar, then press ENTER.

The width you set here represents the curve's maximum width.

5.	Type an angle in the Calligraphic Angle box on the Property Bar, then press ENTER.

The Calligraphic Angle box controls the angle of the pen nib. For example, type "0" if you want narrow horizontal lines and thick vertical lines or "90" if you want thick horizontal lines and narrow vertical lines.

6.	Place the cursor where you want the curve to start.

7.	Drag to draw the curve.

 Related Topics


Drawing curves in Pressure-sensitive mode

The Pressure-sensitive mode allows you to use a pressure-sensitive pen to create curves of varying thickness. You can also use the mouse and keyboard to simulate the effect of a pressure-sensitive pen.

To draw a curve in Pressure-sensitive mode

1.	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Artistic Media tool.

2.	Click the Pressure button on the Property Bar.

3.	Click the Freehand Smoothing box and move the pop-up slider to select a smoothness setting.

Move the slider to the right for maximum smoothing; move the slider to the left for no smoothing.

4.	Type a width in the Artistic Media Tool Width box on the Property Bar, then press ENTER.

The width you set here represents the curve's maximum width.

5.	Position the cursor where you want the curve to start.

6.	Drag to draw the curve.

 Tip

•	If you are using the mouse, press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to vary the pen pressure. The Up Arrow increases the pressure effect, making the curve wider; the Down Arrow decreases this effect. To set the maximum width of the curve, type a value in the Artistic Media Tool Width box.

 Related Topics


Applying strokes using the Artistic Media Docker

A powerful feature of the Artistic Media tool is the ability to apply Artistic Media strokes to existing objects. The outline of the object will be used as the control path for the Artistic Media stroke. To make it easier to apply Artistic Media strokes, you can open the Artistic Media Docker and either drag and drop Artistic Media strokes or choose strokes and apply them to selected objects.

When you apply an Artistic Media stroke, the stroke appears in the Last Used list box. This makes it easier to find frequently used Artistic Media strokes.

To apply Artistic Media strokes to existing objects

1.	Click Effects, Artistic Media.

2.	Choose the folder with the strokes you want from the Group list box.

To find another folder, click the Browse button.

3.	Using the Pick tool, select the object you want to apply the Artistic Media stroke to.

4.	From the Docker, choose a stroke either from the Last Used or from the Group list box, then click Apply.

 Tip

•	You can also drag and drop Artistic Media strokes by dragging the stroke from the list box on the Docker to the object on your Drawing Page.

To delete an Artistic Media stroke

•	Choose the stroke from the Group list box, then click the Delete button.

To specify which types of strokes are displayed in the Artistic Media Docker

1.	Click [image].

2.	Enable one or more of the following options:

•	Preset [image] to display Preset strokes

•	Brushes [image] to display Brush strokes

•	Object Sprayer [image] to display Spraylists

A check mark appears beside enabled options.

 Related Topics


Shaping lines, curves, and curve objects


Overview: Shaping lines, curves, and curve objects
Shaping lines, curves, and curve objects

The Shape tool lets you change the shape of all curve objects by editing their nodes and segments. You can also select and edit curves using the Pick tool.

A curve object is a line, curve, or shape created using the Freehand tool, the Bezier tool, the Artistic Media tool, or the Spiral tool. Rectangles, ellipses, polygons, or text objects become curve objects when you use the Convert To Curves command.

Segments

A segment is the part of a curve lying between two nodes. Segments are of two types: curved or straight. You can bend a curved segment by dragging it with the Shape tool or by dragging the control points of the nodes on either end of it. If you want to bend a straight segment, you must convert it to a curved segment.

Nodes

A node is a small square on a line, curve, or object outline you use to edit the object. When you select a curve object with the Shape tool, CorelDRAW displays all the object's nodes. You can shape a curve object by moving a node or by moving the control points attached to a node.

Control points determine the curve of a segment as it passes through a node. You can control the curve of a segment by varying the control point's angle and its distance from the node. Each node has a control point for each curved segment connected to it. A node at the end of a curved segment has one control point, while a node between two segments has two control points. Since straight segments cannot bend, a node at the end of a straight segment does not have a control point for that segment.

You can add nodes to a path if you can't shape the path the way you want by moving the existing nodes. If, on the other hand, you want to smooth the shape of an object, you can remove unwanted nodes.

Subpaths

A single curve object can consist of more than one curve or shape. Each of these curves or shapes is referred to as a subpath. For example, when you convert text to curves, you often create subpaths. Once converted to a curve, the letter "O" appears as two ellipses. Each of these ellipses is a subpath.

 Note

•	When you edit an Artistic Media stroke, you edit the control path of the stroke. The stroke itself is a closed path following the control path. When you shape the control path, the stroke shifts according to how you edit the control path. If you want to edit the closed path directly, you must first separate it from the control path.

 Related Topics


Selecting nodes and segments

You must select a node or a segment before you can make changes to the curve. When you select a node attached to a straight segment, the node appears as an unfilled square. If the node is attached to a curve segment, it appears as a solid square. The Status Bar indicates the type of node (smooth, cusp, or symmetrical) and segment (line or curve) selected.

To select a segment, you must use the Shape tool. To select a node, you can use the Shape tool, Pick tool or any of the basic drawing tools.

To select a node or segment on a curve object

•	Click the node or segment with the Shape tool.

To select multiple nodes

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Hold down SHIFT, and click the nodes with the Shape tool.

 Tips

•	You can also drag a marquee box around the nodes to select them.

To select all nodes of a selected object

•	Click Edit, Select All, Nodes.

 Note

•	If the selected curve has too many nodes to display, Pick tool node editing is automatically disabled.

 Tips

•	You can also select all nodes by holding down CTRL + SHIFT, and clicking a node on the object with the Shape tool.

•	To select the first or last node in a curve object, you can select the object with the Shape tool and then press HOME to select the first node, or END to select the last node.

•	Double-clicking a curve with the Pick tool puts you in full node edit mode.

 Related Topics


Deselecting nodes

Deselect nodes when you are finished shaping the curve.

To deselect one or more nodes

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Hold down SHIFT, and click the nodes with the Shape tool.

 Tips

•	You can also hold down SHIFT and drag a marquee box around the nodes you want to deselect. This method also selects any nodes inside the marquee box that are not selected.

•	To deselect all nodes on an object, you can also click a blank space in the Drawing Window.

 Related Topics


Adding nodes

You can add nodes to a curve object if you need more nodes to create the curve you want.

To add a node to a curve object

1.	Click the Shape tool.

2.	Double-click the curve where you want to add the node.

To add several nodes to a curve object

1.	Using the Shape tool, select the nodes between which you want to add nodes.

2.	Click the Add Node(s) button on the Property Bar.

 Tip

•	You can also use the Shape tool to add a single node to a curve object by clicking the curve and then clicking the Add Node(s) button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Removing nodes

Removing nodes from an object reduces redraw and printing time and can also make the object appear smoother. You can select the nodes you want to remove yourself, or you can use the Curve Smoothness slider to remove unnecessary nodes automatically. The higher the setting on the slider the more nodes that will be removed.

To remove a node from a curve object

1.	Click the Shape tool.

2.	Double-click the node you want to remove.

To remove several nodes from a curve object

1.	Using the Shape tool, marquee select the nodes you want to remove.

2.	Click the Delete Node(s) button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Joining nodes

You can close an open path by joining its two end nodes. You can also join end nodes on separate paths if the paths are all subpaths of the same object. You cannot join nodes of two separate objects. If you want to join nodes from separate curve objects, you must first combine them into a single curve object, then join the two end nodes.

To join two nodes

1.	Using the Shape tool select the nodes you want to join.

2.	Click the Join Two Nodes button on the Property Bar.

A joined node is placed between the positions of the original two nodes.

To join two nodes with a line

1.	Using the Shape tool, select the nodes you want to join.

2.	Click the Extend Curve To Close button on the Property Bar.

To close an open path

1.	Using the Pick tool or the Shape tool, select the object.

2.	Click the Auto-Close button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Shaping nodes and segments

You can change the shape of a curve object by moving its segments, nodes, and control points. Normally, you move the segments and nodes to make coarse adjustments, then fine tune the shape by moving the control points of the nodes. By holding down CTRL as you drag a node or control point, you can force it to move on a straight horizontal or vertical path.

You can edit a curve object's nodes using the Pick tool or any drawing tool. To edit a curve object's segments and control points you must select it with the Shape tool.

To shape a curve object by moving its curved segments

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Drag a curved segment to reshape it.

To shape a curve object by moving its nodes

1.	Select the curve object with the Pick tool or any drawing tool.

2.	Drag a node to reshape the curve.

As you drag, the segments on either side of the node move. If the node is on a curved segment, the control points also move so that the angles at which the curve enters and leaves the node remain unchanged.

To shape a curve object by moving several nodes at once

1.	Hold down SHIFT, and click the nodes you want to select with the Shape tool.

2.	Drag any of the selected nodes.

To shape a curve object by moving its control points

1.	Select a node with the Shape tool.

Control points only extend from the selected node and from those nodes on either side of the selected node if it is on a curved segment.

2.	Drag a control point to reshape the curve.

The control points move differently depending on whether the node they are associated with is smooth, cusp, or symmetrical. This, in turn, affects the shape of the curve.

 Tip

•	To move a control point hidden under its node, deselect all nodes on the curve object, hold down SHIFT, and drag the control point out from under the node.

 Related Topics


Aligning nodes and control points

You can align two or more nodes on the same curve object. You can also align the control points associated with these nodes. Nodes and control points can be aligned horizontally or vertically.

To align nodes and control points

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Hold down SHIFT, and select the nodes you want to align.

3.	Click the Align Nodes button on the Property Bar.

4.	Disable any options you do not want.

 Related Topics


Transforming parts of a curve object

You can change the shape of an object by applying basic geometric transformations (such as scaling) to selected nodes. You might want to do this if, for example, you need to enlarge a portion of an object.

To stretch or scale parts of a curve object

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Select the nodes along the curve you want to transform.

3.	Click the Stretch And Scale Nodes button on the Property Bar.

Eight sizing handles appear.

4.	Drag the corner handles to scale the selected nodes, or drag the side handles to stretch the selected nodes.

To rotate or skew parts of a curve object

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Rotate And Skew Nodes button on the Property Bar.

Eight rotating/skewing handles appear.

3.	Drag the corner handles to rotate the selected nodes, or drag the side handles to skew the selected nodes.

 Related Topics


Changing a node's properties

There are three types of nodes: cusp, smooth, and symmetrical. The control points of each node type behave differently.

Node type	Properties

Cusp	The control points of a cusp node move independently from one another. A curve that passes through a cusp node can bend at a sharp angle.

Smooth	The control points of a smooth node are always directly opposite each other. When you move one control point, the other moves also. The control points of a smooth node may be of different lengths. Smooth nodes produce a smooth transition between line segments.

Symmetrical	The control points of a symmetrical node are always directly opposite each other. Also, the control points are always equal lengths. Symmetrical nodes produce the same curvature on both sides of the node.

Unless a curve changes direction sharply as it passes through a node, changing the node type will not noticeably affect the curve's shape. It will, however, affect the way you can reshape a curve.

To make a node smooth, cusp, or symmetrical

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Click the node you want to change.

If you select more than one node, you can change all the nodes simultaneously.

3.	Click the Cusp, Smooth, or Symmetrical button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Changing a segment's properties

There are two types of segments: straight and curved. If you click on a node with the Shape tool, the Status Bar displays the type of segment entering the node and the node type itself, for example, Selected Node: Curve Smooth. The Convert Line To Curve and Convert Curve To Line buttons make it easy to turn segments from straight to curved and from curved to straight.

You can also change the direction of a curve and smooth out a curve using buttons on the Shape tool Property Bar.

To make a segment straight or curved

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Click the segment you want to change.

If you select several segments at once, you can change them simultaneously.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Click the Convert Curve To Line button on the Property Bar to make a segment straight

•	Click the Convert Line To Curve button to make a segment curved

To reverse the direction of a curve

•	Select the curve with the Shape tool, and then click the Reverse Curve Direction button.

To smooth out a curve

1.	Marquee select the curve with the Shape tool.

2.	Click the Curve Smoothness box and move the pop-up slider to select a smoothness setting.

Move the slider to the right for maximum smoothing; move the slider to the left for no smoothing.

 Related Topics


Breaking a path

You can turn a closed curve object into an open one by breaking its path at any point. You can also break an open path into one or more subpaths or into separate objects.

When you break a path, any subpaths and nodes that are created remain a part of the original object.

To break a path

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Click where you want to break the path.

Select multiple nodes to break the path at several different places.

3.	Click the Break Curve button on the Property Bar.

Two superimposed nodes appear at each break.

To extract a path from an object

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Using the Shape tool, select a segment, node, or group of nodes that represents the portion of the path you want to extract.

3.	Click the Extract Subpath button on the Property Bar.

 Note

•	When you break a path in an object it still remains as one object. When you extract a subpath, you create two separate objects.

 Related Topics


Drawing dimension, connector, and flow lines


Overview: Drawing dimension, connector, and flow lines
Drawing dimension, connector, and flow lines

Dimension lines

Dimension lines let you show the size of objects or the distance between objects. Dimension lines are extremely useful for creating technical diagrams, floor plans, or any drawing where exact measurements and scale are important. A dimension line can be attached to an object so that when the object is moved, the dimension line moves with it. This feature makes dimension lines very flexible, especially when combined with dynamic dimensioning.

Connector and flow lines

The Connector Line tool and the Interactive Connector tool let you connect two objects with a line. If you move either or both of the objects, the connector or flow line is adjusted accordingly.

Linking dimension, connector, and flow lines to objects

For dimension, connector, and flow lines to be effective, they must be linked to the objects you label. When you use the Dimension tool, the Connector tool, or the Interactive Connector tool, special points on each object, called snap points, are activated. When the cursor passes over a snap point, the point becomes visible. Dimension, connector, and flow lines can only be linked to objects at these snap points.

Basic objects and curve objects generally have snap points at each node and at the center of the object.

 Note

•	For snap points to be visible the Show Snap Location Marks check box must be enabled. To access the check box, click Tools, Options, then, in the list of categories, click Workspace, Display.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Drawing dimension lines


Overview: Drawing dimension lines
Drawing dimension lines

Dimension lines let you show the size of objects or the distance between objects. Dynamic dimensioning automatically displays the length of the dimension line, ensuring you use accurate measurements in your drawing. Also, dynamic dimension lines automatically change as you change your drawing. If you prefer to type in your own approximate measurements or other text, you can disable the dynamic dimensioning feature.

When you use dimension lines to label objects, you can set the scale of your drawing to reflect the actual size of the objects you are labeling. By default, the scale is 1:1; therefore, one inch in your drawing equals one inch in the real world. However, if you want to create an office floor plan, a scale of 1:12 (one inch equals one foot) might be more appropriate.

Callout lines

The Callout tool lets you draw lines that point to and label objects in a drawing. When you draw a callout line, a text cursor appears at the end of the line. This cursor indicates where to type a label for the object. You can format this text as you would format Artistic text. You can also alter the format of the callout line as you would format an outline.

Dimension Text

When you have finished measuring an object using the Dimension tool, a text block displays the object's measurement units and value. This text block is called the dimension text and CorelDRAW lets you customize its display options.

You can choose the style, font, and position of the dimension text. You can also choose a unit of measurement and specify the number of decimal places for the measurement.

You can add a prefix and suffix to the dimension text to help you keep track of the various measurements of your drawing. You can also select the dimension text and type custom text.

 Related Topics


Drawing dimension lines

The Dimension tool lets you draw vertical, horizontal, slanted, and angular dimension lines. Vertical and horizontal dimensions are restricted to the vertical and horizontal axes; slanted dimensions can be drawn at any angle.

Angular dimension lines measure angles. An angular dimension consists of two lines extending from a single point. An arc and label between the two lines indicate the angle between the two lines in degrees, gradians, or radians.

To draw a vertical, horizontal, or slanted dimension line

1.	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Dimension tool.

2.	Click one of the following from the Property Bar:

•	Vertical Dimension tool

•	Horizontal Dimension tool

•	Slanted Dimension tool

3.	Click where you want to begin measuring.

If you want the dimension line to be linked to an object, click on one of the object's snap points.

4.	Click where you want to finish measuring.

5.	Click where you want to place the dimension text.

The dimension text appears where you clicked, provided you have not specified a default dimension text location on the Property Bar.

The dimension text value is expressed in the same units as the horizontal ruler, unless you have specified another unit on the Property Bar.

To draw a dimension line using the Auto Dimension tool

1.	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Auto Dimension tool.

2.	Click where you want to begin measuring.

If you want the dimension line to be linked to an object, click on one of the object's snap points.

3.	Press TAB to toggle the Auto Dimension tool from vertical to horizontal or slanted dimension lines.

4.	Click where you want to finish measuring.

5.	Click where you want to place the dimension text.

 Tip

•	If you are drawing a slanted dimension line, hold down CTRL while you drag to constrain the angle to 15-degree increments, or to the value you specified for the Constrain Angle setting in the Options dialog box.

To draw angular dimension lines

1.	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Dimension tool.

2.	Click the Angular Dimension Tool button on the Property Bar.

3.	Click where you want the two lines that measure the angle to intersect.

4.	Click where you want the first line to end.

If you are measuring an angle between two objects and you want the dimension line to change when the objects move, place the end of each line on a snap point.

5.	Click where you want the second line to end.

6.	Click where you want the angle's label to appear.

 Related Topics


Drawing callouts

The Callout tool lets you create callouts for labeling your drawing. For callouts to be effective, they must be linked to the objects they are labeling. To link callouts, use the object's snap points.

CorelDRAW lets you customize the text in callouts in the same way you format and edit text in CorelDRAW. For more information, see "Working with text."

To draw a two-segment callout

1.	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Dimension tool.

2.	Click the Callout button on the Property Bar.

3.	Click where you want the first callout segment to start.

4.	Click where you want the first segment to end and where you want the second segment to start.

5.	Click where you want to place the callout text.

6.	Type the callout text.

To draw a one-segment callout

•	Follow steps 1 to 3 in the previous procedure, then double-click where you want to place the callout text.

 Related Topics


Linking dimension lines to objects

When dimension lines are linked to objects, operations performed on these objects will affect the dimension lines. The following is a list of common operations and the effects each operation has on linked dimension lines:

When you...	an object, the...

Rotate	horizontal and vertical dimension lines remain horizontal and vertical regardless of the object's orientation. Slanted dimension lines rotate with the objects that they label. If you plan to rotate an object, you may find the slanted dimension lines more useful than the horizontal and vertical dimension lines.

Skew	linked dimension line does not get skewed. CorelDRAW updates the dimension text to reflect changes in measurement.

Stretch	dimension line is also stretched. CorelDRAW updates the dimension text to reflect the new measurement.

Delete	the dimension line attached to a deleted snap point is also deleted.

Duplicate	dimension line linked to the object does not get duplicated. To duplicate both the object and any linked dimension lines, you must select the object and the dimension lines before duplicating.

Clone	dimension line linked to the object does not get cloned. To clone both the object and any linked dimension lines, you must select the object and the dimension lines before cloning.

Separate	link between the dimension line and the object is broken. Once separated, a link can only be reestablished by clicking Edit, Undo.

Node edit	dimension lines connected to the edited node are affected.

 Related Topics


Changing dimension text

You can change the units for dimension text and add a prefix and a suffix to the text. If you want to change what the dimension text says you can turn off dynamic dimension lines and type a custom label. To restore the true dimension, select the dimension line and enable the Dynamic Dimensioning button on the Property Bar.

To specify how dimension units are displayed

1.	Select the dimension line with the Pick tool.

2.	If you want the units displayed next to the value on the dimension line, enable the Show Units For Dimension button on the Property Bar.

3.	Choose a style from the Dimension Style list box on the Property Bar.

You can choose from Decimal, Fractional, U.S. Engineering, or U.S. Architectural style. (This option is not available with Angular Dimension lines.)

4.	Choose the precision level from the Dimension Precision list box on the Property Bar.

5.	Choose a unit of measurement from the Dimension Units box on the Property Bar.

To add a prefix or a suffix to dimension text

1.	Select the dimension line with the Pick tool.

2.	Type text in the Prefix For Dimension or Suffix For Dimension box on the Property Bar.

To type custom text on a dimension line

1.	Select the dimension line with the Pick tool.

2.	Disable the Dynamic Dimensioning button on the Property Bar.

3.	Select the text you want to change with the Text tool, and type in new text.

To change the default settings

1.	Press ESC, or click on blank space, to deselect all objects in your drawing.

2.	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Dimension tool.

3.	Change the settings on the Property Bar.

 Note

•	You can change the default settings by accessing the Options dialog box.

 Tip

•	You cannot change the default for dynamic dimension lines. Whenever you create a dimension line, it is dynamic unless you change it.

 Related Topics


Changing the dimension text font

You can change the font and size of dimension text after you have created the dimension line.

To change the point size and font of dimension text

1.	Select the dimension text with the Pick tool.

If the dimension line is already selected, click a blank space on the Drawing Window before you try to select the dimension text.

2.	Type the size in the Font Size list box on the Property Bar.

3.	Choose a font from the Font list box on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Positioning dimension text

You can specify how dimension text is positioned relative to the dimension line, and you can move the text to a different position on the page.

To specify the position of dimension text relative to the dimension line

1.	Select the dimension line with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Text Position Drop Down button on the Property Bar.

3.	Specify where you want to place the dimension text relative to the dimension line.

•	Click [image] to place it above the line.

•	Click [image] to place text within the line.

•	Click [image] to place it below the line.

•	Click [image] to have the text placed horizontally.

This option places the text horizontally even if the dimension line is diagonal or vertical. If you don't choose this option, CorelDRAW places the dimension text at the same angle as the dimension line.

•	Click [image] to have the text centered relative to the dimension line.

This option centers the text on the dimension line. If you don't choose the Center option, CorelDRAW places the dimension text where you last clicked when you drew the dimension line.

To change the position of dimension text

•	Select the dimension text with the Pick tool and drag it to a new location.

The dimension line changes accordingly.

 Related Topics


Drawing Connector lines and Flow lines


Overview: Drawing Connector lines and Flow lines
Drawing Connector lines and Flow lines

The Connector Line and Interactive Connector tools let you dynamically connect two objects with a line. A line drawn with one of these tools is attached to both objects so that if you move one or both of the objects, the line is repositioned to maintain the connection. If only one end of a line is connected to an object, the other end is fixed to the page.

The Connector Line tool draws straight lines at any angle. For example, if you connect two objects where one is above and two the right of the other, the Connector Line tool draws a straight, diagonal line between the objects. Connector lines can be set either to remain attached to the nodes you choose or to shift to the closest nodes on the two connected objects. You can only reposition a connector line by moving the objects it is attached to.

The Interactive Connector tool makes it easy to create flowcharts and organizational charts. Unlike the Connector Line tool, the Interactive Connector tool draws lines with only vertical and horizontal segments. If you connect two objects where one is above and to the left of the other, the Interactive Connector tool draws alternating vertical and horizontal line segments in a step-like fashion. Flow lines remain attached to the nodes you choose when the objects are moved. You can detach a flow line from an object freely.

You can customize the style, thickness and end points of connector and flow lines using the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Drawing connector lines

The Connector Line tool lets you draw lines that connect objects in your drawing. For connector lines to be effective they must be linked to the objects they are labeling. To link objects, use the object's snap points. When a connector line is linked to an object, it moves when you move the object. You can only move connector lines by moving either or both of the objects they connect.

You can change the outline of connector lines as well as customize connector line styles and arrowheads. For more information, see "Filling and outlining objects."

To draw a connector line between two objects

1.	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Connector Line tool.

2.	Click a snap point on the first object.

When the mouse is over a snap point, the snap point is highlighted.

3.	Click a snap point on the second object.

 Notes

•	By default, the Lock To Connector Node button is disabled. When the button is disabled, the connector line will always draw the shortest line between the two objects it connects. When enabled, the connector line remains fixed to the nodes to which it was originally attached.

•	You can access the connector line settings by clicking Tools, Options and selecting the Connector Line tool in the list of categories.

 Related Topics


Drawing flow lines

The Interactive Connector tool lets you draw flow lines that connect objects in your drawing. For flow lines to be effective they must be linked to the objects they are labeling. To link objects, use the object's snap points. When a flow line is linked to an object, it moves when you move the object, and will redraw to reflect the change in position.

You can change the outline, line styles and arrowheads of flow lines. For more information, see "Filling and outlining objects."

To draw a flow line between two objects

1.	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Interactive Connector tool

2.	Click a snap point on the first object.

When the mouse is over a snap point, the snap point is highlighted.

3.	Drag to a snap point on the second object.

 Related Topics


Editing flow lines

You can make some changes to flow lines using the Shape tool. Nodes on the line can be dragged horizontally or vertically, but not both. This means that all angles in a flow line will be right angles.

If you move one of the objects the flow line is connected to, the line will be redrawn and any edits you have made may be lost.

To edit a flow line

1.	Select the flow line with the Shape tool.

2.	Click and drag the node you want to move.

 Related Topics


Linking connector and flow lines to objects

When connector and flow lines are linked to objects, operations performed on these objects will affect the lines. The following is a list of common operations and the effects each operation has on linked connector and flow lines:

When you...	an object, the...

Rotate, skew, or stretch	connector or flow line will be redrawn to reflect the change to the object's position. Connector lines which are not locked to the connection node will jump to whichever two nodes of the objects are closest together, while connector lines which are locked to the connection node will remain attached to the same node.

Delete	connector line attached to the deleted snap point is also deleted. Flow lines redraw to the nearest snap point.

Duplicate	connector or flow line linked to the object does not get duplicated. To duplicate both the object and any linked connector or flow lines, you must select the line and both of the objects it is connected to before duplicating.

Clone	connector or flow line linked to the object does not get cloned. To clone both the object and any linked connector or flow lines, you must select the line and both of the objects it is connected to before cloning.

Separate	link between the connector or flow line and the object is broken. Once separated, a link can only be reestablished by clicking Edit, Undo. If you exceed the maximum number of Undo levels available, you must delete and reconstruct the line.

Node edit	connector line or flow line attached to the edited node is redrawn.

 Related Topics


Setting tool preferences


Overview: Setting tool preferences
Setting tool preferences

CorelDRAW lets you control the default settings of your drawing tools. The options of the Freehand and Bezier tools such as Auto-join, Freehand and Autotrace tracking, Corner and Straight Line Threshold, can be preset only through the Options dialog box. The Auto-join option determines how close two end nodes must be to join automatically.

The Freehand Tracking option determines how closely a freehand curve matches the movement of the mouse. The Autotrace Tracking sets the accuracy of the Freehand and Bezier tools' bitmap autotrace function.

The Corner Threshold option sets the limit at which a corner node is cusped (as opposed to smooth). Through the Straight Line Threshold option, you can set the amount at which a line can deviate from a straight path and still be treated as straight.

CorelDRAW also gives you options that help you pay attention to the details of your drawing. It lets you measure your values up to six decimal places. You can preset the constrain angle at which the object turns per rotation. When using dimension lines in your drawing, you can set the scale to measure distances that represent real world distance values.

 Related Topics


Changing the default settings of a drawing tool

The default settings of a drawing tool determine its behavior when you use it to create an object. If you want a drawing tool to behave differently, you can change its default settings.

If no objects are selected and you select a tool, any changes you make to the settings on the Property Bar become the default settings. Otherwise, the changes you make are applied to the selected object. If you want to deselect all objects while a drawing tool is active, press ESC.

To change the default settings of a drawing tool using the Options dialog box

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list categories, double-click Toolbox, and click the tool you want to change from the list.

3.	Change the settings.

To change the default settings of a drawing tool using the Property Bar

1.	Click the drawing tool you want to change.

2.	Press ESC to ensure that no objects are selected.

3.	Change the settings on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Controlling the behavior of the Freehand and Bezier tools

You can change the way that the Freehand tool and Bezier tool behave by changing their properties on the Toolbox page in the Options dialog box.

To set Freehand and Bezier tool properties

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Toolbox, and click Freehand/Bezier Tool in the list of tools.

3.	Change any of the following property settings by typing a value (in pixels) in the appropriate box. In each case, you can set a value from 1 to 10.

•	Freehand Smoothing determines how closely a freehand curve will match the movement of the mouse. Lower numbers produce more accurate matches; higher numbers produce less accurate matches.

•	Autotrace Tracking sets the accuracy of the Freehand and Bezier tools' bitmap autotrace function. Lower values produce more accurate tracing; higher values produce less accurate tracing.

•	Corner Threshold sets the limit at which a corner node is cusped (as opposed to smooth). A node is more likely to be cusped if the value is lower.

•	Straight Line Threshold sets the amount a line can deviate from a straight path and still be treated as straight. If you set the threshold to a high value, you don't need to be as accurate in your freehand drawing to produce a straight line.

•	Auto-join determines how close two end nodes must be to join automatically.

 Tips

•	Double-click the Freehand tool or the Bezier tool to display the Toolbox page in the Options dialog box.

•	By default, the Fill Open Curves check box is disabled.When it is enabled, you can apply fills to open curves. To enable the Fill Open Curves checkbox, you must open the Options dialog box, and then click Document, General.

 Related Topics


Setting the constrain angle

The Options dialog box provides the controls you need to change the constrain angle. The constrain angle represents the increment by which control points, lines, and objects rotate when you hold down CTRL as you use the mouse to draw or rotate them. For example, if you set the constrain angle to 14 degrees, an object will rotate in 14-degree increments if you hold down CTRL as you drag one of the object's rotation handles.

To set the constrain angle

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Workspace, Edit.

3.	Type the number of degrees in the Constrain Angle box.

 Related Topics


Setting measurement precision for a drawing

You can specify the number of decimal places displayed in measurements and coordinates by changing the drawing precision. This setting does not affect the drawing itself, it only affects how the numbers are displayed in dialog boxes, on the Property Bar, and on the Status Bar.

To set drawing precision

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Workspace, Edit.

3.	Type the desired number of decimals in the Drawing Precision box.

 Related Topics


Drawing dimensions to scale

If you are using dimension lines to measure distances, you will probably need to set the scale in CorelDRAW. It is necessary to set the scale when distances in your drawing represent greater or lesser distances in the real world. For example, if you want to illustrate the size of the head of a pin, you may want a centimeter in your drawing to represent one thousandth of a centimeter in the real world.

To choose a preset drawing scale

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Document, and click Rulers.

3.	Click the Edit Scale button.

4.	Choose a drawing scale from the Typical Scales list box.

To set a custom drawing scale

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose Custom from the Typical Scales list box.

3.	Type a value in the Page Distance box.

4.	Choose a unit for the page distance from the list box provided.

5.	Type a value in the World Distance box to set the actual distance you want represented by each unit of page distance.

 Tip

•	If you want to change the World Distance units, change the Horizontal ruler units. If the drawing scale is set to anything other than 1:1, the Vertical ruler units will always be the same as the Horizontal ruler units. For more information about changing ruler units, see "Setting ruler units."

 Related Topics


Working with styles and templates


Overview: Working with styles and templates
Working with styles and templates

This chapter describes how to use styles and templates to help you format drawings and documents in CorelDRAW.

A style is a set of formatting settings that simplifies the task of formatting objects in your drawings. When you apply a style to an object, all the settings of the style are applied to that object in one step. Styles can save you considerable time if you need to apply the same formatting to many different objects. For example, you can create a graphic style for quickly formatting certain objects in your drawing.

By using styles, you also make it easier to change your drawing. To change the fill for the graphics objects in your drawing, you can simply edit the graphic style to update all the objects using this style.

A template is a set of styles and page layout settings that govern the layout and appearance of a drawing or document. You can use the default template (CORELDRW.CDT) or choose one of a wide variety of other templates available on the CorelDRAW CD-ROM.

You can also create your own templates to suit your needs. For example, if you regularly put together a newsletter, you can save the newsletter's page layout settings and styles to a template. You can also save drawing objects to your template. As with the above example, you can save the newsletter's banner with the template. When you create a new drawing using the template, CorelDRAW formats the page using the page layout settings and loads the styles saved with the template.

 More Detailed Information


Working with styles


Overview: Working with styles
Working with styles

With CorelDRAW, there are three types of styles you can save and apply in your drawings: graphic, text, and color styles.

A graphic style is a combination of fill and outline settings. For more information on creating fills and outlines, see "Filling and outlining objects."

A text style is a set of text settings including font, point size, and font style. Text styles also include fill and outline settings. For example, you can create a style that applies a texture fill to 72 point Wide Latin font. There are two types of text styles: Artistic and Paragraph styles.

A color style is a color you save and apply to objects in your drawing. Since there are millions of colors available in CorelDRAW, color styles can make it easier to find and apply the exact color you want. One powerful feature of color styles is that you can create a series of shades based on a color style. The original color style is referred to as the "parent" color; and the shades, as "child" colors. For most of the available color models and palettes, child colors share the same hue as the parent but have different saturation and brightness levels. With the Pantone Matching System, Pantone Hexachrome, and UserInks palettes, child and parents share a common ID but have different tint levels.

You can create child colors if you need to apply lighter and darker shades to an object. If you later need to change the color of the object, you can edit the parent color, and CorelDRAW will automatically adjust the child colors. For example, if you change a parent color from red to yellow, CorelDRAW converts the child colors of the red parent to shades of yellow.

With CorelDRAW, when you change the settings of a style, all the objects using this style are automatically updated. This allows you to make design changes to your drawing in one step.

By creating and applying styles, you can significantly reduce layout time and also ensure a consistent look for your drawings.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Working with graphic and text styles


Overview: Working with graphic and text styles
Working with graphic and text styles

This section describes how to create and apply graphic and text styles. To make it easier to use these styles, CorelDRAW includes a Graphic and Text Styles Docker. You can use this docker to drag and drop styles into your drawing. You can also use the docker to create, edit, apply, and delete styles.

Every CorelDRAW template includes default styles for graphics, Artistic text, and Paragraph text. When you create graphics or text, CorelDRAW automatically applies the appropriate default style. For example, if you have the default Artistic text style set to format text in 24 point AvantGarde, any Artistic text you create will have these properties.

Once you have created an object, you can apply a new style or change the settings of the default style to update your object. You cannot delete a default style.

When you create a style, the new style is saved to the current drawing. To use the style in another drawing, you can copy the style to the new drawing or save the style in a template. For more information on creating and loading templates, see "Working with templates."

 Related Topics


Creating a style

The Graphic And Text Styles Docker displays all the styles available in the current drawing or template. You can use this docker to create a new graphics or text style. Once you have created a style, you can change the properties of the style.

You can define styles for graphics, Artistic text, and Paragraph text.

To create a style

1.	Click Tools, Graphic And Text Styles.

2.	Click [image], New.

3.	Enable one of the following:

•	Graphic Style [image] creates a new Graphic style based on the default Graphic style

•	Artistic Text Style [image] creates a new Artistic text style based on the default Artistic text style

•	Paragraph Text Style [image] creates a new Paragraph text style based on the default Paragraph text style

4.	Choose the new style from the list in the Graphic And Text Styles Docker.

5.	Click [image], Properties.

6.	Click the Edit button beside the property you want to change.

7.	Adjust the Text, Fill, or Outline properties where necessary.

To create a style from a graphic or text object

1.	Right-click the object using the Pick tool.

2.	Click Styles, Save Style Properties.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Type a name for the style in the Name box.

•	Leave the name of the style unchanged to overwrite the existing style.

4.	Enable any of the following:

•	Text [image] to use the text properties of the object for the new style

•	Fill [image] to use the fill settings of the object for the new style

•	Outline [image] to use the outline settings of the object for the new style.

 Note

•	When you create a style based on an object, CorelDRAW does not automatically apply the style to the object. If you want the object to use the style, you must apply the style.

 Tip

•	You can also create a new style based on an object by dragging the object from the drawing window to the Graphic and Text Styles Docker. By default, the new style is named "New Graphic", "New Artistic Text", or "New Paragraph Text" depending on the type. If a style with this name exists, CorelDRAW numbers the new style to distinguish it from the existing style.

 Related Topics


Editing a style

With CorelDRAW, you can edit the properties of a style either by changing the style's properties in the Options dialog box, or by saving the properties of a selected object to the style.

To edit a style

1.	Click Tools, Graphic And Text Styles.

2.	Choose the style from the list in the Graphic And Text Docker.

3.	Click [image], Properties.

4.	Click the Edit button beside the property you want to change.

5.	Adjust the Text, Fill, or Outline properties as desired.

To edit a style based on changes to an object

1.	Make the desired changes to the object.

2.	Right-click the object.

3.	Click Styles, Save Style Properties.

4.	Type the name of the style you want to update in the Name box.

5.	Enable or disable the Text, Fill, or Outline boxes as desired.

 Tip

•	You can also edit a style by copying object properties from an object to a style. You do this by dragging the object from the drawing window over the style in the Graphic and Text Styles Docker. You can also copy object properties by choosing the style, and then using the Copy Properties From command from the docker menu.

To rename a style

1.	Click Tools, Graphic And Text Styles.

2.	Right-click the style, and click Rename.

3.	Type the new name, and press ENTER.

 Related Topics


Deleting a style

You can delete any custom style from a template. You can't delete any of the default styles: Default Paragraph Text, Default Artistic Text, and Default Graphic.

To delete a style

1.	Click Tools, Graphic And Text Styles.

2.	Choose the style you want to delete.

3.	Click [image], Delete.

 Related Topics


Applying a style

When you apply a style to an object, CorelDRAW overrides the existing text or graphic properties with the properties of the selected style.

To apply a style to an object

1.	Click Tools, Graphic And Text Styles.

2.	Using the Pick tool, select the object you want to apply a style to.

3.	Choose a style from the list in the Graphic And Text Styles Docker.

4.	Click [image], Apply Style.

 Tips

•	You can also apply a style to an object by right-clicking the object with the Pick tool, selecting Styles, Apply, and then selecting a style from the submenu.

•	You can also apply a style by either selecting the object and double-clicking the style or by dragging the style over the object in the Drawing Window.

•	You can apply text styles from the Text property bar. Select the text with the Text tool or the Pick tool. Choose an appropriate style from the Style List box on the Text property bar.

 Related Topics


Reverting to an object's style

The Revert To Style command allows you to undo changes made to an object's properties after applying a style.

To revert to an object's style

1.	Right-click the object using the Pick tool.

2.	Click Styles, Revert To Style to reapply the style to the object.

 Related Topics


Using styles from other drawings or templates

If you want to use a style from another drawing or template, you must either copy the style to the new drawing or load the template containing the style. To copy a style, you must copy an object using the style or import the drawing containing the style. If you copy or import a style with the same name as an existing style, CorelDRAW renames the styles by adding a number to the style name.

To load styles from another template

1.	Click Tools, Graphic And Text Styles.

2.	Click [image], Template, Load.

3.	Choose the drive where the template file is located from the Look In List box.

4.	Click the name of the template you want.

5.	Click Open.

The styles from the loaded template appear in the Graphic and Text Styles Docker.

 Related Topics


Changing a default style

When you create a new graphic or text object, CorelDRAW applies the default graphic or text style. You can edit the default styles as you would any style. CorelDRAW saves the new default style properties with the drawing.

If you want to use the new default style properties for new drawings, you must save the new settings. For information on saving default styles for future CorelDRAW sessions or documents, see "Using consistent settings for new documents."

To change the fill for a default graphic or text style

1.	Click a blank space in the Drawing Window to deselect any objects.

2.	Choose a color from the Color Palette.

3.	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Graphic [image] changes the fill color for new graphic objects

•	Artistic Text [image] changes the fill color for new Artistic text objects

•	Paragraph Text [image] changes the fill color for new Paragraph text objects

To change the outline for a default graphic or text style

1.	Click a blank space in the Drawing Window to deselect any objects.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Right-click a color in the Color Palette to change the default outline color

•	Click the Outline tool and choose a outline width from the flyout to change the default outline width

3.	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Graphic [image] changes the outline color for new graphic objects

•	Artistic Text [image] changes the outline color for new Artistic text objects

•	Paragraph Text [image] changes the outline color for new Paragraph text objects

To change a default text style

1.	Click a blank space in the Drawing Window to deselect any objects.

2.	Click Text, Format Text.

3.	Choose the properties you want to assign as the new defaults and click OK.

4.	Enable one or both of the following boxes to indicate which default styles you want to change:

•	Artistic Text

•	Paragraph Text

 Tip

•	You can also change the default text or graphic style by dragging a text or graphic object over either the Default Graphic, Default Artistic Text, or Default Paragraph Text style.

 Related Topics


Finding objects assigned a selected style

The Find command in the Graphic And Text Docker lets you find any object using a given style. For example, you can use this command to find all objects that use the default Graphic style. You can find these objects in the active drawing only.

To find objects assigned a specific style

1.	Click Tools, Graphic And Text Styles.

2.	Click the style assigned to the objects you want to find.

3.	Click [image], Find.

A selection box appears around the first object with the specified style.

4.	Click [image], Find Next to find the next object that uses the style.

 Related Topics


Assigning a shortcut key to a style

You can assign a shortcut key combination to any style in CorelDRAW. When you press the shortcut key combination, CorelDRAW applies the style to the selected object. For example, you could assign the key combination ALT + H to a paragraph text style for headings. The shortcut key combination can use up to four different keystrokes.

If the shortcut key combination you enter is already in use, you can override the existing setting and assign the combination to the style.

You can also use the Customize dialog box to assign a shortcut key. For more information, see "Assigning and deleting keyboard shortcuts."

To assign a shortcut key to a style

1.	Click Tools, Graphic And Text Styles.

2.	Choose the style you want to assign a shortcut key to.

3.	Click [image], Edit Hot Key.

4.	Click the Press New Shortcut Key box.

The Current Shortcut Keys box lists any shortcut keys currently assigned to that style.

5.	Press the combination you want to assign to the style, and click the Assign button.

To assign an existing shortcut key to a style

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Delete Conflicts Shortcut check box.

3.	If you want to assign a new shortcut key to the style or command you are overriding, enable the Navigate To Conflict check box.

4.	Click the Assign button.

 Related Topics


Customizing the display of the Graphic And Text Docker

You can choose what types of styles [image] graphic, Artistic text, or Paragraph text [image] are displayed in the Graphic And Text Styles Docker. You can also customize the Graphic And Text Docker to display only the styles you can apply to a selected object. For example, when you select Artistic text, only Artistic text styles appear in the Graphic And Text Styles Docker. If you are using a lot of styles to format your document, displaying only the styles applicable to the selected object makes it easier to find the style you want. As you move from graphic objects to text objects, CorelDRAW automatically refreshes the docker and displays only the relevant styles.

To specify which styles are displayed in the Graphic And Text Styles Docker

1.	Click Tools, Graphic And Text Styles.

2.	Click [image], Show.

3.	Enable any of the following options:

•	Graphic Styles [image] to display Graphic styles

•	Artistic Text Styles [image] to display Artistic text styles

•	Paragraph Text Styles [image] to display Paragraph text styles

A check mark appears beside enabled options.

To set CorelDRAW to display only the styles you can apply to a selected object

1.	Follow steps 1 to 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Auto-View option.

 Related Topics


Working with color styles


Overview: Working with color styles
Working with color styles

This section describes how to create and apply color styles. To make it easier to use these styles, CorelDRAW includes a Color Styles Docker. You can use this docker to drag and drop color styles into your drawing. You can also use the docker to create and edit parent and child colors, as well as delete color styles you do not need.

When you create a color style, the new style is saved to the current drawing. To use the style in another drawing, you can open the other drawing and drag the color style from one drawing folder to another in the docker.

CorelDRAW also has an Auto-Create feature for creating color styles from selected objects. When you create color styles from an object, CorelDRAW automatically applies the new styles to this object. When you use the Auto-Create feature, you can choose to create few or many parent color styles. Once you convert all colors to color styles, you can, for example, use one parent color to control all your red objects, or many parents, one for each shade of red in the drawing.

 Related Topics


Creating a color style

The Color Styles Docker allows you to create styles and link colors together in a "parent-child" relationship. You can create color styles by opening the New Color Style dialog box and selecting a color. The New Color Style dialog box is identical to the Uniform Fill dialog box. For more information on creating uniform fills, see "Applying a uniform fill." For information on color models, mixers, fixed and custom palettes, see "Choosing colors."

You can also create color styles quickly by dragging colors from the color palette or from your drawing to the docker.

To create a color style using the New Color Style dialog box

1.	Click Tools, Color Styles.

2.	Click the New Color Style button.

3.	Select a color using the New Color Style dialog box.

To create a color style from the Color Palette

1.	Click Tools, Color Styles.

2.	Drag a color from the Color Palette to the Color Styles Docker.

To create color style from an object

1.	Click Tools, Color Styles.

2.	Drag the object with the fill or outline color you want to the Color Styles Docker.

 Related Topics


Creating a child color

You can create child colors based on a color style by selecting the style and adjusting the saturation, brightness, or tint of the child. You can create child colors one at a time or you can create multiple child colors automatically.

If you change the parent color, all child colors change as well.

To create a child color

1.	Click Tools, Color Styles.

2.	Choose the color style you want to link a child color to.

3.	Click the New Child Color button.

4.	From the Create A New Child Color dialog box, choose a color by clicking in the rectangular Color Palette provided.

5.	Type a name in the Color Name box.

 Tips

•	You can also create a child color by right-clicking a color style, and clicking Create a Child Color.

•	You can also create a child color by typing values in the Saturation and Brightness boxes of the Create A New Child Color dialog box.

To create a series of child colors

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Create Shades button.

3.	Type a number from 1 to 20 in the Create box.

4.	Enable one of the following:

•	Lighter Shades [image] creates child colors that are lighter than the parent

•	Darker Shades [image] creates child colors that are darker than the parent

•	Light and Darker Shades [image] creates an equal number of light and dark child colors

5.	Move the Shade Similarity slider to determine the similarity of the child colors to the parent color.

Move the slider to the left to create very different shades; move the slider to the right to create very similar shades.

 Tip

•	You can also create a series of child colors by right-clicking a color style, and clicking Create Shades.

 Related Topics


Creating parent and child colors from an image

You can easily create parent and child colors from colors in your drawing using the Auto-create Color Styles feature. You can choose to create a number of unrelated color styles, or you can group related colors together in a parent-child relationship.

When creating child colors, colors added from a color-matching system are converted to CMYK so that they can be grouped into appropriate parent-child groups automatically. Once you have converted colors to CMYK, they cannot be converted back to their original format.

To create parent and child colors from an image

1.	Click Tools, Color Styles.

2.	Select the image or group of objects with the Pick tool.

3.	Click the Auto Create Color Styles button.

4.	Enable any of the following:

•	Use Fill Colors [image] to create color styles based on the fill colors in the selected image

•	Use Outline Colors [image] to create color styles based on the outline colors in the selected image

5.	Enable the Automatically Link Similar Colors Together check box to link similar colors together under their appropriate parent colors.

If you disable this check box, CorelDRAW does not group similar colors under a parent color.

6.	If you enable the Automatically Link Similar Colors check box, move the Parent Creation Index slider to determine the number of parent colors created.

Moving the slider to the right creates only a few parent colors; moving the slider to the left creates many parent colors. To test different slider values, click the Preview button.

7.	Enable or disable the Convert Child Palette Colors To CMYK check box.

When enabled, colors added from a color-matching system are converted to CMYK so that they can be grouped under an appropriate parent color. When disabled, all colors added from a color-matching system are made into separate color styles.

 Related Topics


Editing color styles

You can edit both parent and child colors in CorelDRAW. For most of the available color models and palettes, child colors share the same hue as the parent but have different saturation and brightness levels. With the Pantone Matching System, Pantone Hexachrome, and UserInks palettes, child and parents share a common ID but have different tint levels.

When you change the hue of a parent color, all related child colors are updated, based on the new hue and the original saturation and brightness values. For color styles using the Pantone Matching System, Pantone Hexachrome, and UserInks palettes, if you change to the color ID of the parent, all child colors are updated, based on the new ID and the original tint.

To edit a parent color

1.	Click Tools, Color Styles.

2.	Choose the parent color you want to edit.

3.	Click the Edit Color Style button.

4.	Select a color from the Edit Color Style dialog box.

For more information on uniform fills, see "Applying a uniform fill."

 Tip

•	You can also edit a parent color by right-clicking the parent color and clicking Edit Color.

To edit a child color

1.	Click Tools, Color Styles.

2.	Choose the child color you want to edit.

3.	Click the Edit Color Style button.

4.	Select a color from the Edit Child Color dialog box.

 Tip

•	You can also edit a child color by right-clicking the child color and clicking Edit Color.

To rename a color style

1.	Click Tools, Color Styles.

2.	Right-click the color style you want to rename and click Rename.

3.	Type a new name for the color, then press ENTER.

 Tip

•	You can also rename a color style by clicking twice on the color style you want to rename, typing the new name, and pressing ENTER.

 Related Topics


Applying color styles

Once you create a color style, you can apply it to objects in your drawing using the Color Styles Docker.

To apply a color style

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Tools, Color Styles.

3.	Double-click the name of the style you want to apply.

To apply a color style using drag and drop

•	Drag a color style from the Color Styles Docker to an object.

As the mouse pointer moves over the object, the mouse pointer changes shape to indicate whether the color will be applied as a fill or an outline.

 Related Topics


Deleting color styles

You can delete color styles from the Color Styles Docker if you find that you no longer need them.

To delete a color

1.	Click Tools, Color Styles.

2.	Right-click the color style you want to delete and click Delete.

 Related Topics


Sorting colors

You can sort your color styles in alphabetical order, or you can have all parent colors with child colors listed first.

To sort colors by name

•	Right-click the drawing folder you want to reorder, and click Sort, By Names.

This sorts the colors in the drawing alphabetically.

To sort colors by links

•	Right-click the drawing folder you want to reorder, and click Sort, By Color Styles With Children.

This moves all parent colors with child colors to the top of the drawing list.

 Related Topics


Moving a color style under another parent

You can copy a color style (parent or child) and make that style a child of another parent. If the color style has child colors, both the parent and its child colors become child colors of the selected color style. When you move a child color to another parent, the child color changes color based on the new hue or color ID and the original saturation, brightness, or tint levels.

To move a child color from one parent to another

1.	Click Tools, Color Styles.

2.	Right-click the color style you want to move and click Make Child Of An Existing Color.

3.	Using the right arrow, click the color style you want to make the parent of the selected color.

Press ESC or click outside the Color Styles Docker to cancel this action.

To drag a child color from one parent to another

1.	Click Tools, Color Styles.

2.	Select the color with the Pick tool.

3.	Drag a child color over a child color under the parent color you want.

To copy a color style from one drawing to another

1.	Open both the drawing with the color style and the drawing you want to copy the style to.

2.	Click Tools, Color Styles.

The Color Styles Docker displays folders for every open drawing.

3.	Drag the color style to another drawing folder to copy the style to that drawing.

 Related Topics


Working with templates


Overview: Working with templates
Working with templates

A template is a set of styles and page layout settings that determine the appearance of a drawing or document.

When you create a new drawing, CorelDRAW automatically loads the default template (CORELDRW.CDT). This template has one graphic style, one Artistic text style, and seven Paragraph text styles.

In addition to the default template, CorelDRAW provides a wide variety of preset templates to help create drawings. You can find the preset templates on the CorelDRAW CD-ROM or by running the Template Wizard.

If desired, you can modify any of these templates and then save it as a new template. For example, if you like a template but want to make it more versatile, you can add styles that you've created or that you've taken from another template.

If none of the preset templates meets your needs, you can create your own template based on your own styles or styles taken from other templates. You can also create a template from any drawing you create in CorelDRAW. If desired, you can even save graphics or text objects with the template. When you save objects with a template, you can choose to include these objects when you create a new drawing using the template.

Templates can be applied at any time during a CorelDRAW session. For example, you can use the New From Template command (in the File menu) to open the Template wizard, which will help you find the template you want. If you've already created a drawing, you can apply a template to it using the Load command (in the Graphic And Text Styles Docker).

If you want, you can save templates to the Template folder on your hard drive. You can also make your templates available when open a template using the Template wizard.

 Related Topics


Creating a template

You can create a template using custom styles or styles from another template. To save a template, you can use the Graphic And Text Styles Docker or the Save Drawing dialog box. If you have objects on the Drawing Page, you can save them along with the styles, so that when you load the template, you can add the objects to your page. Also, if you altered the page layout, you can save the page settings along with the styles. When you use the Save Drawing dialog box, CorelDRAW automatically saves objects on the Drawing Page with the template.

To create a template from the Graphic And Text Styles Docker

1.	Click Tools, Graphic And Text Styles.

2.	Do any of the following:

•	Create text and graphics, and use them to create the styles you want.

•	Use the Clipboard to add objects with the styles you want to save in your new template.

•	Load an existing template with the styles you want, and apply them to objects on the page.

3.	Click [image], Template, Save As.

4.	Type a name in the File Name box to save the template in the current drive and folder.

5.	Do one of the following:

•	Enable the With Contents check box to include page settings and objects on the active page.

•	Disable the With Contents check box to save only the styles.

6.	Click the Save button.

 Note

•	You can also save a template using the Save Drawing dialog box by clicking File, Save As, and saving the file in the CorelDRAW Templates folder as a CorelDRAW Template (CDT) file.

 Related Topics


Opening a template for editing

If you want to edit a template, simply open the template and make changes to the styles, page layout settings, or objects. For information on setting page layout options, see "Setting up the Drawing page."

To open a template for editing

1.	Click File, Open.

2.	Choose the drive where the template file is located from the Look In List box.

3.	Choose CorelDRAW Template (CDT) from the Files Of Type list box.

4.	Double-click the template you want.

The Open Template dialog box appears.

5.	Enable the Open for Editing check box.

 Related Topics


Loading a template

Each drawing you create using the New command uses the default CORELDRW.CDT template. If you want to use another template, you can use the New From Template or the Open command from the File menu. The New From Template command opens the Template wizard, which helps you find the CorelDRAW or the PaperDirect template you want. For more information about adding custom templates to the Template wizard, see "Adding templates to the Template wizard."

When you load a template, you can also choose to load just the styles or to load styles, page layout settings, and objects.

To start a drawing using a template from the Template wizard

1.	Insert the CorelDRAW CD-ROM in your computer's CD-ROM drive.

2.	Click File, New From Template.

3.	Follow the Instructions in the Template wizard to find the template you want.

To load a template using the Open Drawing dialog box

1.	Click File, Open.

2.	Choose the drive where the template file is located from the Look In List box.

3.	Choose CorelDRAW Template (CDT) from the Files Of Type list box.

4.	Double-click the template you want.

The Open Template dialog box appears.

5.	Enable the New from Template check box.

6.	Do one of the following:

•	Enable the With Contents check box to load the template's styles, page settings and objects.

•	Disable the With Contents check box to load only the styles.

 Related Topics


Assigning a new template to the drawing

When you've already started a drawing and want to change templates, use the Load command from the Graphic And Text Styles Docker menu.

If objects in your drawing use styles with the same names as those in the new template, CorelDRAW prompts you to indicate whether you want to apply the new styles to those objects.

To assign a new style template using the Graphic And Text Styles Docker

1.	Click Tools, Graphic And Text Styles.

2.	Click [image], Template, Load.

3.	Choose the drive where the template file is located from the Look In List box.

4.	Click the template you want to load.

5.	Click the Open button.

 Note

•	When you use the Load command, only the styles are loaded. CorelDRAW does not use the template's page layout settings and does not add objects saved with the template to your page.

 Related Topics


Adding templates to the Template wizard

The Template wizard helps you find templates in the Template folder of the CorelDRAW CD-ROM. If you have custom templates or templates from previous versions of CorelDRAW, you can still make them accessible from the Template wizard. To do this, you need to run the TempWiz script from the Script And Preset Manager. This script provides easy-to-follow instructions to guide you through the task of adding templates to the Template wizard's list.

To add templates to the Template wizard's list

1.	Click Tools, Corel SCRIPT, Script And Preset Manager.

2.	From the Script and Preset Manager Docker, double-click the Scripts folder.

3.	Double-click the TempWiz icon.

4.	Follow the instructions provided to select the templates you want to add.

 Tip

•	You can also rename and remove templates from the Template wizard's list.

 Related Topics


Transforming objects


Overview: Transforming objects
Transforming objects

To transform an object in CorelDRAW, the first thing you must do is select it. You can transform all graphic and text objects in the following ways without altering their basic shapes:

•	position [image] moves the object to another area of the Drawing Window based on coordinates you specify

•	size [image] changes the size of an object by an amount you specify in pixels, millimeters, inches or other units, while maintaining its shape and relative proportions

•	scale [image] changes the size of an object by a percentage value you specify, making it larger or smaller either proportionally or nonproportionally

•	stretch [image] changes an object's relative horizontal or vertical proportions, making one larger compared to the other

•	rotate [image] turns an object upside down or sideways, or tilts it by any degree you specify

•	skew [image] adds a slant to an object

•	mirror [image] creates a reflection of an object horizontally, vertically, or diagonally

You can perform multiple transformations on single objects, on multiple objects, and on combined or grouped objects. There are always several different ways to make each transformation; you can choose the method that works best for you, depending on whether you prefer to transform objects quickly and interactively or with greater precision.

There are other transformations you can do that alter an object's basic shape: you can split, cut, and erase portions of objects; and you can weld, trim, and intersect objects. These features allow you to create entirely new shapes. Welding several objects binds them together to create one object. Trimming removes the areas that are overlapped by other selected objects. Intersecting objects creates a new object from the area where two or more objects overlap.

If you perform a transformation to a single object or a group of objects and are not happy with it, CorelDRAW lets you undo the transformation.

 More Detailed Information


Finding and using the transformation tools


Overview: Finding and using the transformation tools
Finding and using the transformation tools

In CorelDRAW there are numerous ways to transform objects, but most fall into one of two categories: transforming interactively, and transforming with precision. You can choose the method that suits you best, depending on your preference and your drawing. An interactive transformation is one you do quickly and visually on screen, often using the mouse. A more precise transformation involves specifying numerical coordinates and values that tell CorelDRAW exactly how to change the object.

When applying transformations to objects in CorelDRAW using the mouse, you can usually hold down CTRL or SHIFT to constrain or transform the object from its center, respectively. By maintaining these CorelDRAW settings, you ensure that they work in the traditional CorelDRAW fashion. However, you can change these default settings to Windows standards if you prefer.

 Related Topics


Using the transformation tools

There are up to five different ways to transform most objects: using the mouse, the Free Transform tools, the Property Bar, the Transform toolbar, or the Transformation Docker. The mouse is usually the quickest and most intuitive way to transform objects, but will not necessarily work by itself for every transformation (for instance, to weld, trim, or intersect objects, you will need to use the mouse in conjunction with the Property Bar or the Shaping Docker). If you require greater precision or more options, you can choose from several other methods. Choose the method that works best for your drawing.

To transform objects quickly using the Pick tool and Property Bar

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Enter new values in the appropriate boxes on the Property Bar and press ENTER.

To transform objects interactively using the Free Transform Tools

1.	Click the Shape Edit flyout in the Toolbox.

2.	Click the Free Transform tool.

3.	Click one of the following tools on the Property Bar:

•	Free Rotation tool

•	Free Angle Reflection tool

•	Free Scale tool

•	Free Skew tool

4.	Select the object to transform.

5.	Follow the procedure for the transformation you are making.

 Note

•	This method only works for rotating, mirroring, scaling, and skewing objects.

To transform objects with precision using the Transformation Docker

1.	Click Arrange, Transformation, and click one of the following buttons in the Transformation Docker:

•	the Position button

•	the Rotation button

•	the Scale And Mirror button

•	the Size button

•	the Skew button

2.	Follow the instructions for the transformation you are applying.

 Note

•	To weld, trim, or intersect objects, use the Shaping Docker instead by clicking Arrange, Shaping.

To transform objects with precision using the Transform toolbar

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Enter new values in the appropriate boxes on the Transform toolbar and press ENTER.

 Notes

•	You can't use all of these methods for every transformation. For instance, you can't cut, erase, weld, trim, or intersect objects using the Transform toolbar. Therefore, the first thing you should do is find out which methods are possible for the transformation you're making [image] and then choose the best of all the possible methods, depending on your personal preferences and your particular drawing.

•	To open the Transform toolbar, click Window, Toolbars, and enable the Transform check box.

•	The Free Transform tools on the Property Bar function independently of the number boxes on both the Property Bar and the Transform toolbar [image] not in conjunction with them. Therefore, choose one method or the other; and ensure that you follow the appropriate procedures for the method you choose.

 Related Topics


Using and customizing the interactive transformation options

You will find the CTRL, SHIFT, and ALT keys useful when transforming objects using the mouse. These commands can constrain an object's transformation by degrees, transform an object from its center, or transform it horizontally and vertically at the same time.

You can also change the number of increments by which you split, rotate, skew, or mirror an object. The default value for splitting, rotating, skewing, and mirroring while holding down CTRL is 15 degrees.

To cut, rotate, skew, or mirror an object in 15-degree increments

•	Hold down CTRL while dragging with the mouse.

To change the number of increments by which you cut, rotate, skew, or mirror an object

1.	Click Tools, Options and click Workspace, Edit.

2.	Type a new value in the Constrain Angle box.

 Related Topics


Using the CorelDRAW default settings

CorelDRAW lets you switch to Windows standards if you prefer. When you work in Windows standards, pressing the SHIFT key constrains the object, transforming it in increments, while holding down CTRL transforms a copy of the object, leaving the original intact.

To switch to Windows standards

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Toolbox.

3.	Click Pick tool.

4.	Enable the Windows Standard button.

 Related Topics


Undoing transformations


Overview: Undoing transformations
Undoing transformations

When you work on a drawing, CorelDRAW keeps track of the operations and commands you perform. If you make a mistake or change your mind about transformations you have just finished, you can clear them easily.

You can undo transformations (i.e., rotate, size, stretch, scale, rotate, skew, and mirror) applied to an object or group of objects. If you select a group, only the transformations performed on the group as a whole are cleared; transformations performed on individual objects before they were grouped remain unchanged.

CorelDRAW also lets you undo a transformation while you are in the midst of applying it. For example, if you begin rotating an object, then decide you don't want to, you can use the ESC key to stop the transformation. CorelDRAW will revert your object to its original size, position, and shape, unchanged.

 Related Topics


Clearing transformations

You can clear all transformations to an object except for changes to its position. You can also redo transformations you have cleared.

To undo all transformations applied to an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Clear Transformations.

To redo all cleared transformations

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Edit, Undo Clear Transformations.

To undo a transformation in progress when using the mouse

•	Press ESC before you release the mouse.

 Note

•	Pressing ESC to undo a transformation in progress only works if you have not yet released the mouse button to complete the transformation. If you have already released the mouse button and still wish to undo a transformation, use the Clear Transformations or Undo commands.


Applying transformations to duplicates


Overview: Applying transformations to duplicates
Applying transformations to duplicates

CorelDRAW offers you an easy way to experiment with different transformations. If you want to see the effect of a transformation but keep the original intact, you can transform a copy of the object.

CorelDRAW creates a copy of the object as it is being transformed, leaving the original unaffected. If you decide that you'd rather keep the original, you can simply delete the copy.

 Related Topics


Transforming duplicates

You can transform a copy of the object to see how your original object would look after the transformation, without actually changing it. If you don't like the effects of the transformation, simply delete the copy. CorelDRAW creates the copy while you are applying the transformation. You can transform duplicates using the mouse, the Transformation Docker, or the Transform toolbar.

To transform a duplicate using the mouse

1.	Begin a transformation using the mouse.

2.	Click the right mouse button during the transformation, and release it before you release the left mouse button.

CorelDRAW creates a copy of the object while you are transforming it, leaving the original intact.

To transform a duplicate using the Transformation Docker

•	After entering new values for the transformation you want to apply, click the Apply to Duplicate button in the Transformation Docker.

To transform a duplicate using the Transform toolbar

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Window, Toolbars, and enable the Transform check box.

3.	Click the Apply To Duplicate button on the Transform toolbar.

The button is activated when it appears pressed.

4.	Type new values in the Transform toolbar boxes, then press ENTER.

As long as you keep the Apply To Duplicate button activated, CorelDRAW will continue to transform duplicates.

 Note

•	When using the Transform toolbar to transform a duplicate, ensure that you are not mistakenly trying to use the Free Transform tools on the Property Bar. The Free Transform tools on the Property Bar function independently of the boxes on the Property Bar and Transform toolbar (not in conjunction with them), and will not produce a duplicate [image] even if you have enabled the Apply To Duplicate button.


Splitting and erasing portions of objects


Overview: Splitting and erasing portions of objects
Splitting and erasing portions of objects

When you split an object, CorelDRAW lets you choose between cutting the object into two objects, or leaving it as one object composed of two or more subpaths. You can also reshape objects by redrawing their paths. When you do, CorelDRAW automatically draws a path in an object starting at the point you select, and converts the object to curves.

Separating one part of an object from another can require careful node editing. CorelDRAW makes this easier by letting you erase unwanted portions of objects. You can remove parts of a selected object by erasing them, automatically closing any affected paths. If you erase connecting lines, CorelDRAW does not create new objects; it simply creates separate subpaths. Whenever you erase part of an object, it automatically becomes a curve object.

What is a path?

Paths are the basic elements from which all shapes and lines are constructed. A path has no width or color, but you can give it width or color by adding an outline to it. By default, paths are drawn with a thin black outline. This makes paths visible when you first create them.

What is a subpath?

Subpaths are the basic curves and shapes from which a single curve object is constructed. For example, a single curve object with subpaths is often created when text is converted to curves. The letter "O," for instance, is composed of two ellipses. The ellipses are subpaths that compose the single curve object, "O." One of the simplest reasons for creating an object with subpaths is that you can produce objects with holes in them. In the above example, you can see objects underneath the center of the letter "O."

 Related Topics


Splitting an object with the Knife tool

You can split an object in two and completely reshape it by redrawing its path. By default, the Knife tool automatically closes open paths when it cuts them. You can split an object along a straight line, along a freehand line, or by redrawing a path. You can choose to split an object into two subpaths or two objects, and you can specify whether you want to close paths automatically or keep them open.

To split an object along a straight line

1.	Open the Shape Edit flyout, and click the Knife tool.

2.	Position the knife cursor where you want to start cutting.

The cursor will snap upright when it's ready to cut.

3.	Click once.

4.	Move the cursor to where you want to stop cutting.

5.	Click again.

To split an object along a freehand line

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Drag the mouse from where you want the cut to start to where you want it to end.

To reshape an object by redrawing a path

1.	Open the Shape Edit flyout, and click the Knife tool.

2.	Position the knife cursor where you want to start cutting.

The cursor will snap upright when it's ready to cut.

3.	Drag the mouse from where you want the cut to start to where you want the cut to end.

Do not release the mouse.

4.	Press TAB once or twice to choose the cut you want.

Hold down TAB for a second or two each time to view the different cuts.

5.	Release the mouse.

To specify that you want to split an object into two subpaths

•	Enable the Leave As One Object button on the Property Bar.

Disabling this button splits the object into two objects.

To specify whether you want to close paths automatically or keep them open

•	Enable the Auto-Close On Cut button on the Property Bar.

Disabling this button leaves new paths open after splitting an open path.

 Tips

•	Holding down SHIFT while splitting an object with the Knife tool puts you in Bezier curve mode. Holding down SHIFT + CTRL puts you in Bezier curve mode with the curve constrained by increments of 15 degrees.

•	Holding down ESC while splitting an object with the Knife tool will undo the Knife operation and return the cursor to the beginning, leaving the object intact. This only works if you have not yet released the mouse button to finish the cut.

 Note

•	As soon as you use the Knife tool on an object, it becomes a curve object.

 Related Topics


Erasing portions of an object

The Eraser tool removes portions of selected objects that you drag it over, and closes any affected paths.You can change the size and shape of the eraser nib to suit your purposes.

To erase portions of an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Shape Edit flyout, and click the Eraser tool.

3.	Drag the eraser over the object.

To create a hole in an object

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the above procedure.

2.	Double-click anywhere on the object.

To erase portions of an object in straight lines

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To erase portions of an object" procedure.

2.	Click once on the object at the point where you want to begin to erase.

3.	Release the mouse, hold down TAB, and click again where you want to stop erasing.

Hold down CTRL if you also want to constrain the line.

To change the size of the Eraser nib

•	Type a value in the Eraser Thickness box on the Property Bar and press ENTER.

 Notes

•	The Eraser tool automatically reduces the number of nodes on a curve it is erasing, but you can change this by disabling the Auto-Reduce On Erase button on the Property Bar.

•	As soon as you use the Eraser tool on an object, it becomes a curve object.

 Tips

•	You can click the Circle/Square button on the Property Bar to toggle between a circle or square nib shape.

•	Holding down ESC while erasing part of an object with the Eraser tool will undo the operation and return the cursor to the beginning, leaving the object intact. This will only work if you have not yet released the mouse to finish erasing.

 Related Topics


Positioning and moving objects


Overview: Positioning and moving objects
Positioning and moving objects

Dragging with the mouse is the quickest way to move objects in your drawing. You can move an object interactively by dragging it anywhere in your drawing and releasing the mouse button at the desired location. If you require more precision, you can place objects at specific ruler coordinates. You can also move objects by a specific distance, and move copies of objects.

CorelDRAW also lets you nudge objects in increments using the keyboard. You can set the nudge distance to any value you want.

By default, when you move or position an object, the object moves according to its center anchor point. Consequently, the center of the object moves to specific ruler coordinates. However, you can assign a new anchor point. The anchor points correspond to the object's selection handles. You can also reset the anchor point to its original position.

 Related Topics


Positioning objects with precision

To position an object precisely in CorelDRAW, you must specify the horizontal and vertical coordinates of where to place it on the ruler. By default, you position an object according to its center anchor point, which is also the center of the object. You can reset the anchor point to position the object relative to a different set of coordinates. Note that this is different from moving an object, which involves relocating it a specified distance from its current position. For more information, see "Moving objects a specified distance."

To position an object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Shape Edit flyout, and click the Free Transform tool.

3.	Disable the Relative To Object button on the Property Bar.

The button is disabled when it appears raised.

4.	Type values in the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) Object(s) Position boxes on the Property Bar.

5.	Keep the cursor in the X or Y box, and press ENTER.

 Tip

•	You can also position an object by selecting it with the Pick tool and typing new values in the X and Y Object(s) Position boxes in the Property Bar. These values specify the coordinates of the new location where you want to place the object, relative to the origin (0,0 coordinates) of the rulers. Positive values move the object up and to the right; negative values move it down and to the left.

To position an object using a different anchor point

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Transformation, and click the Position button.

3.	Disable the Relative Position check box in the Transformation Docker.

4.	Type values in the H (horizontal) and V (vertical) Position boxes to specify a new location in your drawing.

5.	Enable an Anchor Point check box to assign an anchor point.

The check boxes correspond to the eight selection handles and the object's center.

6.	Click the Apply button.

 Note

•	When you disable the Relative Position check box in the Transformation Docker, the H and V boxes identify the ruler coordinates of the anchor point.

 Tip

•	You can use the ruler as a guide when you're specifying coordinates. You can place the ruler's point of origin (0,0) anywhere in your Drawing Window to help you reposition the selected object.

 Related Topics


Moving objects a specified distance

When you move an object in CorelDRAW, you move it a specified distance from its current position. By default, you move an object according to its center anchor point, which is also the center of the object. You can change the anchor point to move the object relative to a different center location. Note that this is different from positioning an object, which involves specifying horizontal and vertical coordinates on the ruler. For more information, see "Positioning objects with precision."

To move an object a specified distance

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Shape Edit flyout, and click the Free Transform tool.

3.	Enable the Relative To Object button on the Property Bar.

The button is enabled when it appears pressed.

4.	Type values in the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) Object(s) Position boxes on the Property Bar.

5.	Keep the cursor in the X or Y box, and press ENTER.

 Tip

•	You can also move an object by selecting it and typing new values in the X and Y Object(s) Position boxes on the Property Bar. These values specify the distance you want to move the object, relative to its current location. Positive values move the object up and to the right; negative values move it down and to the left.

To move an object a specified distance using a different anchor point

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Transformation, and click the Position button.

3.	Enable the Relative Position check box in the Transformation Docker.

The values in the H (horizontal) and V (vertical) boxes both change to 0.

4.	Enable an Anchor Point check box to assign an anchor point.

The check boxes correspond to the eight selection handles and the object's center.

5.	Type values in the H and V boxes to specify the distance you want to move the object.

6.	Click the Apply button.

 Note

•	When you enable the Relative Position check box in the Transformation Docker, the H and V boxes identify the position of the center anchor point as 0,0. When you specify a different anchor point, the values in the H and V boxes represent that anchor point's position relative to the center anchor point (0,0).

 Related Topics


Resetting the position anchor

By default, you position or move an object according to its center anchor point, which is also the center of the object. If you change the anchor point using the Transformation Docker, you can reset it later.

To reset the anchor point to an object's center

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Transformation, and click the Position button.

3.	Enable the Anchor Point button representing the object's center.

 Related Topics


Sizing and stretching objects


Overview: Sizing and stretching objects
Sizing and stretching objects

CorelDRAW lets you size and stretch objects interactively or with greater precision, depending on your preference and your drawing. An interactive size or stretch is one you do quickly and visually on screen, often using the mouse. A more precise size or stretch involves specifying numerical coordinates and values that tell CorelDRAW exactly how to change the object.

Sizing changes an object's dimensions by specific values, as opposed to scaling, which changes the dimensions by a specified percentage. For more information, see "Scaling objects."

When you stretch an object, you change its horizontal and vertical dimensions to alter the object's proportions. By dragging one of the object's side selection handles, you can stretch objects in either a vertical or horizontal direction.

When you size an object, you can choose to maintain its aspect ratio. When you maintain the aspect ratio, you preserve the relationship between the height and the width of the object.

For example, if you draw a square that is five inches by five inches, and you double its size proportionally, the new object will be 10 inches by 10 inches. If you increase its size nonproportionally, you can change it to 10 inches by 20 inches (or any other nonproportional size). However, when you size an object nonproportionally you create a ratio between the X and Y dimensions which will affect any further transformations. If you want to revert the object to its original one-to-one proportions before transforming it again, you must disable the Non-proportional check box, then re-enter the equal values.

 Related Topics


Sizing objects using the mouse

The easiest way to size objects is to drag the corner handles of the selection box using the mouse. CorelDRAW displays the object's outline while you drag, so that you can preview the effects of the new size.

To size an object using the mouse

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Drag one of the corner selection handles [image] inward to decrease the size of the object, or outward to increase it.

To size an object from its center

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Hold down SHIFT, and drag one of the corner selection handles.

 Tips

•	To increase the size of an object in increments of 100%, hold down CTRL while dragging a handle.

•	To increase the object's size in increments of 100% from its center, hold down CTRL + SHIFT while dragging a handle.

•	To size the object horizontally and vertically at the same time, hold down ALT when you drag a corner handle.

 Related Topics


Stretching objects using the mouse

When you stretch an object, you resize its horizontal and vertical dimensions unproportionally. You can stretch objects interactively by dragging the horizontal and vertical selection handles using the mouse.

To stretch an object horizontally or vertically using the mouse

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Drag one of the side selection handles [image] inward to decrease the size of the object, or outward to increase it.

To stretch an object from its center

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Hold down SHIFT, and drag one of the side selection handles.

 Tips

•	To stretch an object in increments of 100%, hold down CTRL as you drag a side selection handle.

•	To stretch an object vertically and horizontally at the same time, hold down ALT as you drag one of the corner selection handles.

 Related Topics


Sizing and stretching objects with precision

Sizing involves changing an object's dimensions horizontally and vertically while maintaining its proportions. Stretching involves increasing an object's size either horizontally or vertically. You can specify precise dimensions to produce an object that is the size and shape you require.

To size an object with precision using the Transformation Docker

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Transformation, and click the Size button.

3.	Disable the Non-proportional check box to maintain the proportion of width to height.

4.	Type a value in either the H (horizontal) box or the V (vertical) box.

The number in the other box changes to reflect the object's new proportional size.

5.	Click the Apply button.

To stretch an object with precision using the Transformation Docker

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Non-proportional check box to specify that the length and width will be sized nonproportionally.

3.	Type a value in the H (horizontal) box to specify the object's width.

4.	Type a value in the V (vertical) box to specify the object's height.

5.	Click the Apply button.

 Note

•	When you stretch an object by enabling the Non-proportional check box in the Transformation Docker, CorelDRAW lets you enter values in the H (horizontal) or V (vertical) boxes that change the object's original proportions, creating a new ratio between the two values. If you then disable the check box to resize the object, CorelDRAW will resize it based on the new, nonproportional values you just entered. Therefore, if you stretch an object, then decide you want to resize it based on its original proportions, you must first disable the Non-proportional check box and re-enter the original one-to-one proportional values.

 Tip

•	You can also size and stretch an object precisely by selecting it with the Pick tool and entering new values in the Object(s) Size boxes on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Scaling objects


Overview: Scaling objects
Scaling objects

When you scale an object in CorelDRAW, you change its size without altering its basic shape. You can scale objects interactively, or with greater precision. An interactive scale is one you do quickly and visually on screen, often using the mouse. A more precise scale involves specifying percentage values that tell CorelDRAW exactly how to change the object.

Scaling changes an object's dimensions by a specified percentage. Note that scaling is different from sizing, which changes an object's dimensions by a specified amount.

When you scale an object, you can choose to maintain its aspect ratio. When you maintain an object's aspect ratio, you preserve the relationship between the height and the width of the object.

For example, if you draw a square that is five inches by five inches, and you scale it by 200% proportionally, the new object will be 10 inches by 10 inches. If you scale it nonproportionally instead, you could enter percentage values that change it to 10 inches by 20 inches (or any other nonproportional size). However, when you scale an object nonproportionally you create a ratio between the X and Y dimensions which will affect any further transformations. If you want to revert the object to its original one-to-one proportions before transforming it again, you must disable the Non-proportional check box, then re-enter the equal values.

The Free Scale tool lets you scale an object along its horizontal and vertical axes simultaneously, and quickly enlarge or reduce an object relative to its anchor point.

CorelDRAW also lets you set an anchor point anywhere in the Drawing Window simply by clicking. By clicking inside an object, you can scale the object from its center. By clicking outside of an object, you can scale and position it according to the distance and direction in which you drag the mouse. CorelDRAW displays the object's outline as you drag, so you can preview the effects of the scale.

 Related Topics


Scaling objects interactively

There are two interactive ways to scale an object in CorelDRAW: using the mouse and using the Free Scale tool. You can scale an object along its horizontal and vertical axes simultaneously, and quickly enlarge or reduce an object relative to its anchor point.

To scale an object using the mouse

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Hold down CTRL, and drag one of the corner selection handles.

The object scales by increments of 100% as you drag.

To scale an object using the Free Scale tool

1.	Open the Shape Edit flyout, and click the Free Transform tool.

2.	Click the Free Scale tool on the Property Bar.

3.	Click the object you want to scale.

4.	Click anywhere in the Drawing Window to fix an anchor point, and do not release the mouse.

5.	Drag to scale the object.

 Tips

•	To maintain the horizontal and vertical proportions of an object when scaling using the mouse, hold down CTRL while dragging, or disable the Non-proportional Scaling/Sizing Ratio button on the Property Bar.

•	For better control when setting an anchor point, click near the object and drag away from it slowly. If you find that the object is moving off the Drawing Window, zoom out to retrieve it.

 Related Topics


Scaling objects with precision

Scaling changes an object's dimensions by a specified percentage. For example, a value of 100% leaves the object unchanged; 200% doubles the size of the object; and 50% reduces its size by half.

You can scale by a horizontal or a vertical factor. When you use the Transformation Docker, you can also maintain the aspect ratio.

To scale an object using the Transformation Docker

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Transformation, and click the Scale And Mirror button.

3.	Type percentage values in the Scale H (horizontal) and V (vertical) boxes.

4.	Click the Apply button.

 Note

•	By default, CorelDRAW scales an object from its center.

 Tip

•	You can also scale an object precisely by selecting it with the Pick tool and entering new values in the Scale Factor boxes on the Property Bar.

To maintain the aspect ratio while scaling using the Transformation Docker

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Disable the Non-proportional check box.

3.	Type a percentage value in the Scale H (horizontal) or V (vertical) box.

As you change one value, the other value changes automatically to maintain the original proportions of the object. If you type different values in the H and V boxes, CorelDRAW uses the last number you typed as the scale factor.

 Note

•	When you scale an object by enabling the Non-proportional check box in the Transformation Docker, CorelDRAW lets you enter values in the H (horizontal) or V (vertical) boxes that change the object's original proportions, creating a new ratio between the two values. If you then disable the check box to rescale the object, CorelDRAW will scale it again based on the new, nonproportional values you just entered. Therefore, if you scale an object, then decide you want to scale it again based on its original proportions, you must disable the Non-proportional check box and re-enter the original proportional values.

 Related Topics


Setting the scale anchor point

You can change an object's anchor point from its center to any of its eight selection handles  by enabling a different anchor point button at the bottom of the Transformation Docker. Clicking one of these buttons defines a point that remains fixed when you scale the object. As a result, you scale the object around that point.

To set an object's scale anchor point

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Transformation, and click the Scale and Mirror button.

3.	Enable an Anchor Point check box to assign an anchor point.

The check boxes correspond to the eight selection handles and the object's center.

4.	Click the Apply button.

To reset the scale anchor point to its center

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Anchor Point button representing the object's center.

3.	Click the Apply button.

 Note

•	By default, an object scales around an anchor point in the middle of its selection box, but you can change the anchor point to suit your needs.

 Related Topics


Rotating objects


Overview: Rotating objects
Rotating objects

Like the other transformation tools, the rotation tools are flexible and easy to use. You can rotate an object around any point in your illustration in a variety of ways.

Dragging an object's rotation handles with the mouse is a simple and quick way to rotate it. By dragging one of the rotation handles in circular motions, you can rotate an object around its current position interactively while viewing the changes you make on-screen.

If you use the Free Rotation tool to rotate an object instead, you can set the center of rotation with a click of the mouse. When you start to drag the mouse, an outline of the object and a line of rotation [image] a dashed blue line that extends beyond the Drawing Page [image] appear. The line of rotation indicates the angle at which you are rotating the object from the center of rotation. The object's outline allows you to preview the effects of the rotation.

There are also tools that allow you to rotate objects more precisely. You can pivot an object by a precise amount around its center of rotation, or rotate it around a different coordinate in your illustration.

By default, an object always rotates around its center of rotation. You can move the center of rotation to any location in your drawing. You can also reset the center of rotation.

 Related Topics


Rotating objects interactively

You can rotate an object interactively by dragging its rotation handles with the mouse or by using the Free Rotation tool.

To rotate an object using the mouse

1.	Double-click the object with the Pick tool.

The rotation and skewing handles appear as two-way arrows; the center of rotation marker appears in the middle of the selection box.

2.	Click a rotation handle (the corner two-way arrows) and drag in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction to rotate.

To rotate an object around a different anchor point using the mouse

1.	Double-click the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Drag the center of rotation marker to the desired location [image] anywhere inside or outside the object.

3.	Click a corner rotation handle, and drag in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction to rotate.

To rotate a line, a curve, or a closed curve using the mouse

1.	Double-click the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click a rotation handle, and drag in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction to rotate.

To rotate an object using the Free Rotation tool

1.	Open the Shape Edit flyout, and click the Free Transform tool.

2.	Click the Free Rotation tool.

3.	Select the object you want to rotate.

4.	Click in the Drawing Window to specify the center of rotation.

5.	Drag the line of rotation to rotate the object.

 Note

•	The closer you move the cursor to an object's center of rotation, the more sensitive the rotation is to mouse movement. The further you move the cursor along the line of rotation, the smoother the rotation.

 Tips

•	You can skew or size an object while you rotate it by holding down ALT to skew or SHIFT to size.

•	To have the center of rotation snap to various points of other object(s) in your drawing, click Layout, Snap To Objects. Then move the center of rotation towards the other object(s).

 Related Topics


Rotating objects with precision

You can rotate an object by a specific number of degrees for extra precision. You can also rotate an object around a point relative to its current position.

To rotate an object with precision using the Transformation Docker

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Transformation, and click the Rotation button.

3.	Disable the Relative Center check box in the Transformation Docker.

4.	Type values in the Rotation H (horizontal) and V (vertical) boxes to specify the coordinates around which you want to rotate the object.

5.	Type a value in the Rotation Angle box.

6.	Click the Apply button.

 Tip

•	You can also rotate an object precisely by selecting it with the Pick tool and typing a new value in the Angle Of Rotation box on the Property Bar.

 Notes

•	A positive value in the Rotation Angle box rotates the object counterclockwise; a negative value rotates it clockwise from its current position.

•	You can also rotate the object around any of its selection handles. For more information, see "Setting the center of rotation with precision."

 Related Topics


Setting the center of rotation with precision

When you rotate an object, it revolves around its center by default. You can move an object's center of rotation to anywhere in the Drawing Window,

You can also move the center of rotation to a specific ruler coordinate or by a specific distance. The object will rotate around that new point.

To rotate an object around a specified ruler coordinate

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Shape Edit flyout, and click the Free Transform tool.

3.	Disable the Relative To Object button on the Property Bar.

The Relative To Object button is disabled when it appears raised.

4.	Type values in the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) Center Of Rotation Position boxes on the Property Bar.

5.	Type a value in the Angle box on the Property Bar, and press ENTER.

To rotate an object around a point relative to its current position

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Relative To Object button on the Property Bar.

The Relative To Object button is enabled when it appears pressed.

3.	Type values in the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) Center Of Rotation Position boxes on the Property Bar.

4.	Type a value in the Angle box, and press ENTER.

 Notes

•	Negative (-) values rotate the object clockwise; positive (+) values rotate it counterclockwise.

•	Moving the center of rotation to a specific coordinate is useful for rotating a number of objects while maintaining their alignment because you can specify the same coordinates for multiple objects.

 Tip

•	You can also rotate an object precisely relative to its current position using the Transformation Docker.

 Related Topics


Resetting the center of rotation

By default, an object rotates around a point (called the center of rotation) in the middle of its selection box. If you move the center of rotation, you can reset it to the center again using the Property Bar or the mouse.

To reset the center of rotation using the mouse

1.	Double-click the object with the Pick tool.

The rotation and skewing handles appear as two-way arrows, and the center of rotation marker appears in the middle of the box.

2.	Hold down CTRL, and drag the center of rotation marker towards the middle of the object.

3.	Release the mouse button to snap the marker to the object's center.

To reset the center of rotation for a line, curve, or closed object

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the object to display its rotation handles.

3.	Hold down CTRL and drag the center of rotation towards the middle of the object.

To reset the center of rotation precisely

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Shape Edit flyout, and click the Free Transform tool.

3.	Enable the Relative To Object button on the Property Bar.

The Relative To Object button is enabled when it appears pressed.

4.	Type 0,0 in the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) Center Of Rotation Position boxes.

5.	Keep the cursor in the X or Y box, and press ENTER.

 Tip

•	You can also use the Transform toolbar or the Transformation Docker to reset the center of rotation.

 Related Topics


Skewing objects


Overview: Skewing objects
Skewing objects

Like the other transformation tools, the skewing tools are flexible and easy to use. You can skew objects interactively, or with greater precision. An interactive skew is one you do quickly and visually on screen, often using the mouse. A more precise skew involves specifying percentage values that tell CorelDRAW exactly how to change the object.

Dragging an object's skewing handles with the mouse is the fastest way to add a slant to objects in your illustration. The Free Skew tool is also a quick way to skew the horizontal and vertical dimensions at the same time.

When you use the Free Skew tool, it slants the horizontal and vertical lines of an object simultaneously around a fixed point, called an anchor point. You can quickly set an anchor point by clicking anywhere in the Drawing Window, and you can reset the anchor point if you choose.

The skew is relative to the anchor point. For example, if you click inside the object, you can skew from its center. If you click outside the object, you skew according to the anchor point you set, to the distance between the object and the anchor point, and to the direction and the distance you drag with the mouse.

 Related Topics


Skewing objects interactively

You can skew objects interactively with the mouse by dragging the skewing handles. Skewing handles are the straight horizontal and vertical arrows which appear at the mid-points of the object. The Free Skew tool changes the slant and the position of the object.

To skew an object using the mouse

1.	Double-click the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Drag a horizontal skewing handle to skew the object left or right.

•	Drag a vertical skewing handle to skew the object up or down.

To skew an object horizontally and vertically

1.	Double-click the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Hold down ALT, and drag a skewing handle.

To skew a line, curve, or closed object

1.	Double-click the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Drag a skewing handle in any direction.

To skew an object using the Free Skew tool

1.	Open the Shape Edit flyout, and click the Free Transform tool.

2.	Click the Free Skew tool on the Property Bar.

3.	Click the object you want to skew.

4.	Click anywhere in the Drawing Window to fix an anchor point.

5.	Drag to skew the object.

 Tips

•	To maintain control when setting an anchor point, click close to the object and drag away from it slowly. If you find that the object is moving off the Drawing Window, you can zoom out to retrieve it.

•	To skew an object along its horizontal and vertical dimensions at the same time, hold down ALT as you drag the skewing handle. Keep the cursor close to the object to control it.

 Related Topics


Skewing objects with precision

You can skew objects by a specific amount. By default, the skew anchor point is at the center of the object.

To skew an object with precision

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Shape Edit flyout, and click the Free Transform tool.

3.	Type a horizontal value in the top portion and a vertical value in the lower portion of the Skew Angle boxes on the Property Bar.

4.	Keep the cursor in one of the Skew Angle boxes, and press ENTER.

To change an object's skew anchor point

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Transformation, and click the Skew button.

3.	Click an Anchor Point check box to assign an anchor point.

The check boxes correspond to the eight selection handles and the object's center.

4.	Click the Apply button.

 Related Topics


Resetting the skew anchor to an object's center

By default, an object skews around an anchor point in the center of its selection box. If you move the skew anchor point, you can reset it to the center again.

To reset the skew anchor point to an object's center

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Transformation, and click the Skew button.

3.	Enable the center Anchor Point button in the Transformation Docker.

 Related Topics


Mirroring objects


Overview: Mirroring objects
Mirroring objects

The mirror options let you make a reflection of any object in an illustration. You can mirror objects horizontally, vertically, or diagonally, using the mouse, the Free Angle Reflection tool, the Property Bar or the Transformation Docker. Mirroring an object horizontally flips it from left to right or vice versa; similarly, mirroring an object vertically flips it from top to bottom or vice versa.

The Free Angle Reflection toolmirrors an object in the Drawing Window according to the angle you specify. You can set the anchor point by clicking the mouse.

If you use the Free Angle Reflection tool, an outline of the object and a dashed blue line that intersects the anchor point appear as you begin to drag with the mouse. They extend beyond the Drawing Page. The dashed blue line is called the line of reflection. Where you set the anchor point determines the distance between the object and the line of reflection. The line of reflection indicates the angle at which you are mirroring the object from the anchor point.

 Related Topics


Mirroring objects

 You can mirror objects horizontally, vertically, or diagonally You might find it easiest to mirror objects using the mouse. You can also use the Free Angle Reflection tool to mirror objects using the Property Bar. By default, the mirror anchor point is in the center of the object. When you use the Free Angle Reflection Tool or the Transformation Docker, you can change the anchor point to specify the direction in which you want to mirror the object.

To mirror an object horizontally using the mouse

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Hold down CTRL and drag the object's left or right selection handles to the opposite side of the object.

An outline of the object appears when you reach the opposite side of the object.

3.	Release the mouse button and then release CTRL.

To mirror an object vertically using the mouse

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Hold down CTRL, and drag the object's top or bottom selection handles to the opposite side of the object.

An outline of the object appears when you reach the opposite side of the object.

3.	Release the mouse button and then release CTRL.

To mirror an object diagonally using the mouse

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Hold down CTRL, and drag one of the corner handles of the object's selection box to the opposite side.

An outline of the object appears when you reach the opposite side of the object.

3.	Release the mouse button and then release CTRL.

To mirror an object using the Free Angle Reflection Tool

1.	Open the Shape Edit flyout, and click the Free Transform tool.

2.	Click the Free Angle Reflection tool on the Property Bar.

3.	Click the object you want to mirror.

4.	Click anywhere in the Drawing Window to fix an anchor point.

5.	Drag the mouse to create the line of reflection.

To mirror an object using the Transformation Docker

1.	Select the object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Transformation, and click the Scale And Mirror button.

3.	Click one of the following buttons in the Transformation Docker:

•	Horizontal Mirror [image] mirrors an object horizontally

•	Vertical Mirror [image] mirrors an object vertically

4.	Enable an Anchor Point check box to assign an anchor point.

The check boxes correspond to the eight selection handles and the object's center. By clicking a button, you specify the direction in which you want to mirror the object.

5.	Click the Apply button.

 Notes

•	Mirror an object diagonally using the Transformation Docker by clicking both the Horizontal Mirror and the Vertical Mirror buttons in the Transformation Docker.

•	Because the mirror anchor point is in the center of the object, a symmetrical object may not appear to move when you mirror it.

 Tips

•	The closer you move the cursor to the object along the line of reflection, the more sensitive the mouse is to movement. The further you move the mouse from the object, the smoother the movement.

•	You can also mirror an object by selecting it with the Pick tool and clicking either the Horizontal Mirror button or Vertical Mirror button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Welding, trimming and intersecting objects


Overview: Welding, trimming and intersecting objects
Welding, trimming and intersecting objects

When you weld, trim, or intersect objects, you can create completely new shapes that are irregular and unusual. There are two ways to weld, trim, or intersect objects: using the Shaping Docker, and using the Pick tool with the Property Bar. You can weld, trim, or intersect single objects with other single or multiple objects, as well as multiple objects with multiple objects.

You can apply these operations to almost any object created in CorelDRAW, including clones, objects on different layers, and single objects with intersecting lines. However, you cannot weld, trim, or intersect Paragraph text, dimension lines, bitmaps, or masters of clones.

Welding objects

Welding several objects binds them together to create one object with a single outline. This new object uses the welded objects' perimeter as its outline, and all intersecting lines disappear.

You can weld objects regardless of whether or not they overlap each other. If you weld objects that do not overlap, they form a weld group that acts as a single object. In both cases, the object takes on the fill and outline attributes of the target object [image] the object to which you welded the selected object(s).

You can weld any number of objects at one time, including clones, objects on different layers, and single objects with intersecting lines. When you weld objects on different layers, the resulting welded object resides on the same layer as the target object. When you weld single objects with intersecting lines, the object breaks into several subpaths, but its appearance remains the same.

Trimming objects

When you trim an object, you remove the areas that are overlapped by other selected objects. These areas are cut away, creating an entirely new shape. Trimming is a quick way to create objects with irregular shapes.

The object you trim, called the target object, retains its fill and outline attributes. For example, if you trim a rectangle that is overlapped by a circle, you remove the area of the rectangle that was covered by the circle to create a new, irregular shape.

Intersecting objects

Intersecting creates a new object from the area where two or more objects overlap. The shape of this new object can be simple or complex, depending on the shapes you intersect.

The new object's fill and outline attributes depend on the object you define as the target object [image] the object you intersect with the first selected object(s). The resulting new object uses the fill and outline attributes of this target object.

 Related Topics


Welding objects

You can create a single curve object out of two or more objects. If the objects overlap, the result is a single object with one outline. If the objects don't overlap, they form a weld group in which the objects appear separate but are actually treated as one object.

To weld objects using the Shaping Docker

1.	Select the objects with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Shaping.

3.	In the Shaping Docker, click the Weld button.

4.	Enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Source Object(s) [image] keeps a copy of the selected object after welding

•	Target Object(s) [image] keeps a copy of the target object (the object to which you're welding the selected object) after welding

5.	Click the Weld To button.

6.	Click the object you want to be the target object.

The welded object takes on the fill and outline attributes of the target object.

 Tips

•	You can select multiple objects for both the source and the target of the weld operation by holding down SHIFT while selecting them with the Pick tool, or by marquee selecting them.

•	You can remove holes created after welding single objects with intersecting lines by deleting the resulting interior subpaths.

To weld objects using the Property Bar

1.	Select the objects with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Weld button on the Property Bar.

 Note

•	If you marquee select the objects when welding using the Property Bar, the welded object assumes the outline and fill properties of the bottom-most selected object. If you use multiple selection, the welded object takes on the properties of the object you selected last.

 Related Topics


Trimming objects

Trimming creates new, irregularly shaped objects by removing the areas that overlap other selected objects. Before you trim objects, you must decide which object you want to trim (the target object) and which object(s) you want to use to trim it. The objects you use to trim must overlap [image] or be overlapped by [image] the target object. You can trim single objects with one or more objects, and you can trim multiple objects with multiple objects.

To trim an object using the Shaping Docker

1.	Using the Pick tool, select all the objects you want to use to trim the target object.

2.	Click Arrange, Shaping.

3.	In the Shaping Docker, click the Trim button.

4.	Enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Source Object(s) [image] keeps a copy of the object you're using to trim

•	Target Object(s) [image] keeps a copy of the object you're trimming

5.	Click the Trim button.

6.	Click the target object.

To trim an object using the Property Bar

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the object you want to trim and the object(s) you want to use to trim it.

2.	Click the Trim button on the Property Bar.

 Note

•	If you marquee select the objects, CorelDRAW trims the bottom-most selected object. If you use multiple selection, CorelDRAW trims the object you selected last.

To trim multiple objects with multiple objects

1.	Marquee select two or more objects that you have chosen to trim the target objects.

2.	Click Arrange, Shaping.

3.	In the Shaping Docker, click the Trim button.

4.	Using the Pick tool, hold down SHIFT and select the objects you want to trim.

5.	Release SHIFT.

 Note

•	You do not have to group multiple objects prior to trimming them.

 Related Topics


Intersecting objects

Intersecting creates a new object from an area where two or more objects overlap. The result is one object with the size and shape of this overlapping area. In addition to this new object, you can keep all, some, or none of the original objects. The new object always uses the fill and outline attributes of the target object.

To intersect objects using the Shaping Docker

1.	Select the objects with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Shaping.

3.	In the Shaping Docker, click the Intersection button.

4.	Enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Source Object(s) [image] keeps a copy of all other selected objects (except the target object)

•	Target Object(s) [image] keeps a copy of the target object

5.	Click the Intersect With button.

6.	Click the object that you want to be the target object.

To intersect objects using the Property Bar

1.	Select the objects with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Intersect button on the Property Bar.

 Note

•	If you marquee select the objects, the new intersected object takes on the properties of the bottom-most selected object. If you use multiple selection, the new intersected object takes on the properties of the object you selected last.

To intersect multiple objects with multiple objects

1.	Marquee select two or more objects that you have chosen to intersect with the target objects.

2.	Click Arrange, Shaping.

3.	In the Shaping Docker, click the Intersect button.

4.	Using the Pick tool, hold down SHIFT and select the objects you want to intersect.

5.	Release SHIFT.

 Note

•	You do not have to group multiple objects prior to intersecting them.

 Related Topics


Creating typefaces


Overview: Creating typefaces
Creating typefaces

In CorelDRAW, you can create and edit custom characters. The unique design of a character set is called its typeface. A font is a complete set of characters that share a common typeface [image] uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, punctuation marks, and symbols.

Using the TrueType or Adobe Type 1 Export Filter, you can incorporate a vector graphic directly into a TrueType (TTF) or an Adobe Type 1 (PBF) font. By exporting a graphic object, you can use it as a character in CorelDRAW and in other Windows applications.

 Note

•	Unlike the other sections of the Help file, you must complete the procedures for creating typefaces in the sequence in which they appear.

 More Detailed Information


Preparing your resources


Overview: Converting scanned images
Converting scanned images

You can use two types of graphics to create custom characters: scanned and traced images or graphics created directly in CorelDRAW. If you're scanning an image, you can convert the scanner's bitmap file (.PCX or .TIFF) to a vector image using CorelTRACE. When you use CorelTRACE, keep the image size below 3000 by 3000 pixels, so that CorelDRAW can handle it efficiently. For more information, see CorelTRACE online Help.

 Related Topics


Overview: Becoming familiar with typography terms
Becoming familiar with typography terms

Definitions for the typography terms that you need to understand in order to create a typeface are provided below:

•	Baseline [image] the invisible, horizontal line on which all the letters of a line sit

•	Cap height [image] the distance from the baseline to the top of an uppercase character

•	X-height [image] the part of a character that makes up the main body of a lowercase letter. The x-height is equal to the height of a lowercase x.

•	Ascender [image] the part of a lowercase letter that extends above the x-height

•	Descender [image] the part of a lowercase letter that extends below the baseline

Generally, all uppercase letters within the same font have the same cap height. Similarly, lowercase characters all have the same x-height. Ascenders and descenders are more or less uniform in the distance by which they extend from their x-height. The height of different characters tends to look unbalanced if the ratio of ascender to descender isn't uniform.

 Related Topics


Overview: Considering the printer resolution
Considering the printer resolution

To produce characters that print as you would expect at regular type sizes (e.g., 20 to 40 points), you need to know your printer's resolution. For example, at 300 dots per inch (dpi), a 36-point character prints with a maximum vertical resolution of 150 dots. (There are 72 points in an inch.) Similarly, a 12-point character (a typical type size for letters) prints with a maximum vertical resolution of only 50 dots. You should set your printer at the highest possible resolution to yield the maximum result.

If the characters you create are elaborate and include many small, intricate curves, swirls, or segments, your printer might not be able to handle them adequately at small point sizes. Your options at this point are as follows:

•	use the custom characters only at larger point sizes

•	simplify the characters

•	print your work from a high-resolution printer

 Related Topics


Preparing a character for exporting


Overview: Preparing a character for exporting
Preparing a character for exporting

Before you can export a character to a font file, you must create a working font folder, set up the Drawing Page, size the character, convert it to curves, and customize it as required.

Setting up the page ensures that the character height and width are consistent. Otherwise, the new characters might appear unbalanced next to the others in the set.

The key to successfully creating a custom character is to work with large objects. The CorelDRAW TrueType or Adobe Type 1 export filters are sensitive to the size at which you create the character. When you refine details on a larger scale, the result is cleaner and crisper than when you create the character on a smaller scale.

You can create the object at a size suitable for exporting a 720-point character. At this size, most objects fit neatly on an 8.5" by 11" page, making it easy for you to print and review the graphic. This point size, 720, represents one-third the size of the upper limit, 2160 points. If the custom character approaches the maximum, any enlargement from 720 points will be a three-fold increase at the most. For information about conventions and restrictions you should observe when creating a character, see "Modifying a character."

Setting up the Drawing Page for a character design and edit involves the following:

•	sizing the page

•	setting the base point

•	setting up vertical and horizontal guidelines

•	defining the character size parameters

 Related Topics


Creating a working font folder

Whether you are modifying characters, adding characters to a typeface you created and installed, or building an entirely new typeface, you must create a folder on your hard drive and export the characters to a font file in that folder. When you finish exporting to the file, you must install the font file in the default Fonts folder.

If you want to modify a typeface you've created and installed, create a backup of the original font and rename it. You may need to return to the original font later. You'll be exporting the custom character to the renamed version of the font.

To create a working font folder

1.	In Windows Explorer, choose the drive where you want to create the folder.

2.	Click File, New, Folder.

3.	Type the name of the new folder.

4.	Press ENTER.

To make a back-up copy of the font

1.	In Windows Explorer, search for the font in the Fonts directory (i.e., \\WIN95\FONTS if you're using Windows '95).

2.	Right-click the font you want to copy, and click Copy.

3.	Right-click the folder you created in the previous procedure, and click Paste.

4.	Right-click the font, and click Rename.

5.	Type a new name for the font.

 Related Topics


Sizing the Drawing Page

When you export characters, it's important to keep their height consistent. Otherwise, they appear unbalanced. An easy way to ensure consistency is to define a Drawing Page that is the same size as the size of the new character.

To size the drawing page

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Document, double-click Page, and click Size.

3.	Choose Custom from the Paper list box.

4.	Choose Points from the box that appears to the right of the Width box.

5.	Type 750 in the Height and Width boxes.

 Notes

•	A 750 by 750 points page is approximately the size of 10.5" by 10.5" page.

•	You can name and save the page dimensions for future CorelDRAW sessions. For more information, see "Defining, saving, and removing a custom page size."

 Related Topics


Setting the base point

Setting the base point is an essential step in establishing the typeface baseline and intercharacter spacing. The base point is usually defined as the lower left corner of an imaginary rectangle that encloses the character. This rectangle is sometimes referred to as the character's "outline box." However, the outline box is not always the same as the character's bounding box, which is the dashed box that appears when an object or character is moved. Although the character lies entirely inside its outline box, no part of it actually has to lie on the base point.

To ensure that all characters exported to the typeface share the same baseline, they must have the same base point [image] the 0,0 point of the rulers.

To set the base point

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Document, and click Rulers.

3.	Type 30 in the Horizontal Origin and Vertical Origin boxes.

 Note

•	Specifying values in the Horizontal and Vertical Origin boxes resets the rulers so that the point where the rulers intersect is the new origin. This new origin also becomes the character's base point.

 Related Topics


Setting up vertical and horizontal guidelines

Setting up vertical and horizontal guidelines at the base point of a custom character provides you with a way of lining up the character's outline with the base point precisely. The vertical guideline along the left side of the Drawing Window allows you to maintain intercharacter spacing. The horizontal guideline becomes the baseline of the typeface. There are 720 points from the baseline to the top of the page. A typeface's point size is defined as the distance from baseline to baseline between two lines of text.

To set up vertical and horizontal guidelines

1.	Click View, Guidelines Setup.

2.	In the list of categories, click Horizontal.

3.	Type 0 in the top box, and click the Add button.

4.	In the list of categories, click Vertical.

5.	Type 0 in the top box, and click the Add button.

 Related Topics


Defining character size parameters

Whether you are building a typeface from scratch or customizing a typeface you've created and installed, guidelines help maintain a constant height throughout the font. If you're working with a lowercase letter, add horizontal guidelines to mark the x-height, the descender length [image] the part of a lowercase character that falls below the baseline (e.g., "j"), and the ascender height [image] the part of the lowercase character that extends above the x-height. Typically, lowercase letters with ascenders (e.g., "b") have the same height as uppercase characters. Ascenders and descenders are generally more or less uniform in the distance they extend from their x-height.

If you are exporting more than one character, you may want to set all of the guidelines at the beginning of the process, and then continue using the same Drawing Page. If the first character you are exporting is the period, or some other punctuation mark, you will notice it doesn't correspond to these guidelines. To mark all of the guidelines, you must type or create a "T," "x," "g," and "d" (if the cap height and the ascender height are different) before sizing the character. Then, you can mark the top of the "T" to represent the cap height, the top of the "x" to represent the x-height, the tail of the "g" to represent the descender length, and the top of the "d" to represent the ascender height.

If you are creating a symbols set, you can map your symbols to the keyboard when you export them, as you would map a character set. When you press a key on the keyboard, the symbol to which you mapped that key appears on the screen. If you plan to map your symbols to the keyboard, you must establish guidelines to maintain vertical and horizontal consistency among the symbols. You may even want to mark the guidelines using letter characters as a reference.

To define parameters using guidelines

1.	Click the Text tool.

2.	Type 720 in the Font Size list box on the Property Bar, and press ENTER.

3.	Click View, Snap to Guidelines.

4.	Type the character "T".

5.	Using the Pick tool, drag the character to the 0,0 base point.

The character snaps to the intersection of the guidelines.

6.	From the Horizontal ruler that runs across the top of the Drawing Window, drag a guideline to top of the "T" to mark the cap height.

7.	Click the Pick tool, click the "T," and press DELETE.

8.	Repeat steps 4 to 7 for the characters "x," "g," and "d" by dragging guidelines to the following:

•	the top of the "d" to mark the ascender height

•	the top of the "x" to mark the x-height

•	beneath the tail of the "g" to mark the descender line

 Related Topics


Sizing a character and converting it to curves

If you are modifying a typeface you've created, observe the following procedures. If you are creating a character from a scanned and traced image, or from an object you've drawn, proceed to "Positioning a character at the base point."

When you modify a character from a typeface you've created and installed, you need to add the character to your document at the scale at which you intend to modify it. For example, if you're going to export the characters at the suggested 720 points, then size the original, unmodified character to 720 points. This measurement lets you maintain the proper vertical scale, unless you're creating special effects such as oversized characters or subscripts.

Before you can modify a character from a typeface you created, you must convert the character to a curved object so that you can edit the character's nodes.

To size the character you want to modify

1.	Click the Text tool.

2.	Choose the name of the font you created from the Fonts list box on the Property Bar.

3.	Type 720 in the Font Size list box on the Property Bar, and press ENTER.

4.	Type the character you want to modify.

To convert the character to curves

1.	Click the Pick tool, and click the font character you want to modify.

2.	Click Arrange, Convert To Curves.

 Related Topics


Positioning a character at the base point

By positioning the custom character at the base point, you are ensuring that the spacing between characters and the point size are consistent.

The point size is regulated by the distance from baseline to baseline between two lines of text. The distance from the top of the Drawing Page to the top of an uppercase character is the difference between the point size and the cap height. It is also called the interline spacing of the typeface. The interline spacing determines the amount of white space that appears between lines of text. The height of the uppercase character and the interline spacing total the point size of a typeface.

To position the character at the base point

1.	Click View, Snap to Guidelines.

2.	Using the Pick tool, drag the character to the 0,0 base point.

The character snaps to the intersection of the guidelines.

3.	From the Horizontal ruler, drag a guideline to the top of the letter to mark the cap height.

 Note

•	Unless you're creating a special effect, all uppercase characters and lowercase characters with ascenders should be sized to the guideline you added.

•	If the outline box enclosing the character is smaller than the character's actual bounding box, disable the Snap To Guidelines command after you've positioned the character. This gives you more control when placing the lowermost and leftmost object outlines with respect to the guidelines you set.

 Related Topics


Modifying a character

There are a few conventions and restrictions to observe when you create and modify characters:

•	The character that you create or modify must be a single or combined vector object. If your character consists of a number of visually separate lines or shapes, they must all be selected and combined (not grouped) into a single object, and they must be closed paths before you export the character.

•	The character can't have any intersecting lines. An object has to be either inside or outside another object before you combine them; otherwise, the result might not be acceptable.

•	Don't assign any fill color, outline color, or line thickness to a character. Such information is ignored when you export the character.

•	When you modify an existing character that is made of multiple objects, you need to break it apart before you can modify it. For more information, see "Breaking apart combined objects."

•	You can proof a shaped character by printing it. If any part of the character falls outside of the Drawing Page, CorelDRAW can't export the entire character. You can temporarily scale the graphic to fit the page. For more information, see "Sizing a print job."

To combine the individual parts of a character

1.	Click the Pick tool, hold down SHIFT, and click all parts of the character.

2.	Click Arrange, Combine.

To modify the new character

1.	Open the Shape Edit flyout, and click the Shape tool.

2.	Reposition the character's nodes.

 Notes

•	For information about using the Shape tool, see "Shaping lines, curves, and curve objects."

•	When you are modifying a character, use the Zoom feature to make the lines and curves as precise as possible. For more information, see "Zooming and panning."

•	You can save a character as a .CDR file if you think you'll be modifying it further after exporting.

 Related Topics


Exporting characters


Overview: Exporting characters
Exporting characters

Whether you are creating a character from scratch or modifying a character you've previously created, you need to export it to a font file. You can export characters as TrueType fonts or Adobe Type 1 fonts. When you export as an Adobe Type 1 font, you need to use Adobe Type Manager to install the font. You can install TrueType fonts using the Windows Control Panel or the Font Navigator Utility.

When you're building a typeface, the first character you export is automatically designated as the default character. The default character for a typeface is used whenever you type a keyboard character for which no character has been defined in that typeface. (Normally the "period," #046, is designated as the default character.) Once assigned, the default character cannot be changed; however, the character itself can be modified.

If you're exporting a special character, such as an international symbol, the character number must be equal to or higher than 128.

This section provides step-by-step procedures for exporting a character to TrueType and Adobe Type 1 fonts. It explains the following:

•	specifying the font file (if you're modifying an existing typeface you've created in the past)

•	creating a font file (if you're creating a typeface)

•	specifying the character's grid, character space width, and style properties

•	specifying the character number, design size, and character width

 Related Topics


Exporting characters to modify a typeface you created

To save a customized character for future use, you must export it to a font file. Characters must be exported to the font file one at a time. Keep in mind that you are exporting to the folder that you created earlier which contains the renamed font file. For more information, see "Creating a working font folder."

To export a character to modify a typeface you created

1.	Click File, Export.

2.	Choose the drive where the file is located from the Save In list box.

3.	Double-click the folder in which the file is stored.

4.	From Files Of Type list box, choose one of the following:

•	TTF-TrueType Font

•	PFB-Adobe Type 1 Font

5.	Type the font filename, and click OK.

6.	In the TrueType Export or the Adobe Type 1 Export dialog box, specify the character number, design size, and character width.

7.	Click the Options button.

8.	Specify the style, grid size, and space width.

 Note

•	For more information, see "Specifying the character number, design size, and character width" and "Specifying the character grid size, space width, and style properties."

 Related Topics


Exporting characters to create a typeface

To create a typeface character, you must export it to a font file. Characters are exported to the font file, which you created earlier, one at a time. Although symbols are characters, the process of exporting a symbol to a symbol font file differs slightly from exporting a character to a font file.

To create a font file for a new typeface

1.	Click File, Export.

2.	Double-click the folder where you want to store the new font.

3.	Type a filename in the File Name box.

4.	From Files Of Type list box, choose one of the following:

•	TTF-TrueType Font

•	PFB-Adobe Type 1 Font

5.	Click the Save button.

 Note

•	The filename you specify is not the font name, but only the name of the font file. You can specify the font name in the Family Name box of the Options dialog box. For more information, see the following procedure.

To export a character to a font file

1.	Follow all of the steps from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Options dialog box, type the name you want to assign to the font in the Family Name box.

3.	Disable the Symbol Font check box.

4.	Specify a style, grid size, and space width.

5.	Click OK.

6.	Click Yes to upgrade the character definition.

7.	In the TrueType Export or the Adobe Type 1 Export dialog box, specify the character number, design size, and character width.

 Note

•	The first character you export should be a period (# 046). The first character you export is the default character.

•	For more information, see "Specifying the character number, design size, and character width" and "Specifying the character grid size, space width, and style properties."

To export a character to a symbol font file

1.	Follow all of the steps from the "To create a font file for a new typeface" procedure.

2.	In the Options dialog box, type the name you want to assign to the symbol font in the Family Name box.

3.	Enable the Symbol Font check box to create a symbol file or a nonstandard character set.

4.	Follow steps 3 to 7 from the previous procedure.

 Notes

•	You can return to the Options dialog box by clicking the Options button in the TrueType Export or Adobe Type 1 Export dialog box.

•	When you type a keyboard character that hasn't been defined in a font, the default character for the font is used.

 Related Topics


Specifying the character number, design size, and character width

The Preview window in the TrueType Export and Adobe Type 1 Export dialog box displays the character. The base point [image] located in the lower left corner [image] represents the character's origin, and the vertical line to the right of the character represents its width.

Character number

The keyboard is mapped to the ASCII characters set [image] a series of numbers that represent characters. Every key on the keyboard can be identified by a unique numeric value from 0 to 127. The Character Number box identifies the character you are exporting. You can refer to the Microsoft Windows User's Guide for the number of the character you want to export to, and type the value in the Character Number box.

You can also choose the character you are exporting from the box beside the Preview window. Notice that your choice is reflected in the Character Number box. When a character appears gray, it doesn't exist in the font file. Conversely, when a character appears black, it exists in the font file. Characters only appear black when you are exporting to a typeface that you've created and installed.

Design size

The value you type in the Design Size box defines the size of the text character or symbol you create or modify on the Drawing Page. This value doesn't affect the other characters in the set. If you change the design size, the Preview window updates to reflect the change.

You can also choose the unit of measure in which you want to export a character or symbol.

Character width

You can have the width of the character you're exporting calculated automatically, or you can set a specific width value.

When you are modifying a character in an existing typeface, you can preserve the original proportions of the character or you can create it disproportionate in comparison to the other typeface characters. Keep in mind that when you are using the typeface character, you can adjust its spacing by kerning it manually. For more information about kerning, see "Using range kerning."

When you are creating a typeface, you can have the width of the character you're exporting calculated automatically. This width is based on the character's shape and design, plus an additional 5% of the object's width added to the right side of the character for intercharacter spacing. If you don't like the width after examining the character in the CorelDRAW file, you can always re-export the character and adjust the width manually.

You can also set the width manually if you want to create a special effect (e.g., oversized characters) or if you have used this filter extensively enough to develop a feel for character widths.

To specify the number for the character you are exporting

•	In the TrueType Export or the Adobe Type 1 Export dialog box, do one of the following:

•	Type the ASCII value that represents the character you want to export in the Character Number box.

•	Choose the character you want to export from the list box beside the Preview window.

 Notes

•	For information about accessing the TrueType Export or the Adobe Type 1 Export dialog box, see "Exporting characters to create a typeface" or "Exporting characters to modify a typeface you created."

•	If you are exporting symbols or nonstandard characters, they will be available on a character-by-character basis through the Symbols And Special Characters Docker window, as well as the keyboard. If you want to access symbols using the keyboard, after typing the character number in the Character Number box, note what character it is mapped to in the character list box. You can later access the symbol by choosing your symbol font from the Font list and pressing the key to which the symbol was mapped or by holding down ALT and typing the character number.

To specify the design size

1.	In the TrueType Export or the Adobe Type 1 Export dialog box, type the point size value in the Design Size box.

2.	Choose a unit of measure from the Units box.

 Note

•	If you created the character at the suggested 720 points, type 720 and choose points as the unit of measure.

To specify the character width automatically

•	In the TrueType Export or the Adobe Type 1 Export dialog box, enable the Auto check box.

To specify the character width manually

1.	In the TrueType Export or the Adobe Type 1 Export dialog box, disable the Auto check box.

2.	Type a value in the Character Width box.

 Notes

•	For information about accessing the TrueType Export or the Adobe Type 1 Export dialog box, see "Exporting characters to create a typeface" or "Exporting characters to modify a typeface you created."

•	The value that you specify is the width of the character relative to the grid size specified when the font file was created.

 Tip

•	You can also specify the character width interactively. Disable the Auto check box, and in the Preview window, drag the vertical line to the right to increase the character width or to the left to decrease it.

 Related Topics


Specifying the character grid size, space width, and style properties

You can specify the character grid size, space width, the style, and other properties for the new character.

Grid size

The grid size is a complex variable that applies only to TrueType fonts. For Adobe Type 1 fonts, this value is fixed at 1000. The grid size involves a number of factors within the typeface, such as granularity and certain scaling parameters. If you're exporting a character to a typeface you created and installed, a set number appears in the Grid Size box. This value can't be changed. If this is the first character you're exporting into a new typeface, you can specify the grid size.

The industry-standard grid size for TrueType fonts is 2048. However, you may want to change the grid size if you plan to use the typeface at very large point sizes. A larger grid size (e.g., 4096) uses more points to describe the character, yielding better results and more complex character descriptions.

Space width

The space width is the amount of space that's inserted between words when you press SPACE BAR. The space character (#32) represents the SPACE BAR. Decrease this value to produce a lesser space between words, or increase it to produce a greater space.

Style properties

You can make the new character font bold, italic, italic-bold, or normal.

Other properties

Using a font metrics file, you can apply both kerning and width properties from another existing Adobe Type 1 font to your newly created or customized Adobe Type 1 font. First, you must export the final character to the font file; then, reexport it, and then load the font metrics file (.AFM) that contains the kerning and width information that you want to apply to the new font.

To set the grid size for TrueType fonts

1.	Click File, Export.

2.	Double-click the folder in which you want to store the font.

3.	Type a filename in the File Name box.

4.	From Files Of Type list box, choose TTF-TrueType Font.

5.	Click the Save button.

6.	In the Options dialog box, type a value in the Grid Size box.

 Note

•	Once you set the grid size, you can't change it.

To set the width of the space character

1.	Click File, Export.

2.	Double-click the folder in which you want to store the font.

3.	Type a filename in the File Name box.

4.	From Files Of Type list box, choose one of the following:

•	TTF-TrueType Font

•	PFB-Adobe Type 1 Font

5.	Click the Save button.

6.	In the Options dialog box, type a value in the Space Width box.

To specify font style properties

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Options dialog box, choose an option from the Style list box.

 Note

•	You can change the style properties only if you're creating a new typeface and the Symbol Font box isn't enabled. Once you select and save a style option, it can't be changed.

To apply kerning and width information from an Adobe Type 1 font

1.	Click File, Export.

2.	From the Save In list box, choose the drive where the file is located.

3.	Double-click the folder in which the file is stored.

4.	From Files Of Type list box, choose PFB-Adobe Type 1 Font.

5.	Type the font filename, and click OK.

6.	In the Adobe Type 1 Export dialog box, click the Options button.

7.	Click the Load Font Metrics button.

8.	From the Look In list box, choose the drive and folder where the file is located.

9.	Double-click the appropriate .AFM file.

 Related Topics


Using the typeface


Overview: Using the typeface
Using the typeface

Before you can use a new or modified typeface, you must install it. You can install TrueType fonts using the Windows Control Panel or the Font Navigator Utility. To install Type 1 fonts, you must use the Adobe Type Manager. For information about installing Adobe Type 1 fonts, refer to the documentation provided with Adobe Type Manager.

 Related Topics


Installing a TrueType font

If you are installing a font that you've created and installed previously and you didn't rename the font file, you must delete the original font from the font folder before installing the modified font.

To install a TrueType font

1.	On the Windows taskbar, click Start, Settings, Control Panel.

2.	Double-click the fonts folder.

3.	Click File, Install New Font.

4.	From the Drives list box, choose the drive where the font is stored.

5.	In the Folders box, double-click the folder in which the font is stored.

6.	Double-click the font in the List Of Fonts box.

 Note

•	When you create a line of text in CorelDRAW and assign your modified typeface to it, your customized characters appear in the font lists.


Lets you mix the current color with colors in the mixing area. You can choose brush attributes such as size and edge type by clicking the options button.


Displays a color viewer that lets you select colors from different visual representations of the visible spectrum. Hold down the button to choose from several different color viewers.


Click this button to display a mixing area which you can use to mix and select colors. Hold down the button to choose from various types of mixing area.


Displays the custom color palettes. Custom palettes are editable and can include any type of color.


Click this button to use a fixed color palette. Palettes are listed in the Type list box. You may want to use the palettes if you are working with spot or process color systems by DIC, DuPont, FOCOLTONE, PANTONE, TOYO, or TRUMATCH. By using these palettes along with a color reference book, you can be reasonably certain of how the colors will look when printed.


Selects a color from the mixing area.


Opens the Uniform Fill dialog box, which allows you to create and apply a uniform fill color.


Gives you quick access to the most commonly used outline styles, such as outline thickness, line pattern, calligraphic pen effects, and arrowheads.


 Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens the Fill flyout (shown below). The Fill flyout provides preset fills, as well as various tools for setting uniform, fountain, texture, and pattern fills.


Lets you select, move, and resize objects using the mouse. After you select an object, you can use commands in the menus or the toolbar to change its appearance.


Opens the Outline Color dialog box, which allows you to create and apply a custom outline color. You can also create and select colors from a custom palette.


 Allows you to view and select colors that surround the chosen color swatch by Hue and Lightness.


 Allows you to view the same color with decreasing ink densities. This feature is available only for spot colors.


 Displays the Models page that lets you select colors from different visual representations of the visible spectrum. Click on the Options button and select Color Viewers to choose from several different color viewers.


 Displays the custom color palettes page. Custom palettes are editable and can include any type of color.


Displays the Mixers page which you can use the color harmonies wheel and blend colors. Click on the Options button and select Mixers to choose how you want to mix your colors.


PDF-Pop ups


 Lets you add a PDF style.


 Lets you delete a PDF style.


Prints crop marks. These marks are used as alignment aids when trimming the printed output down to its final size.

To see the crop marks, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.


Allows you to print on both sides of the page. When you enable this option, and you print to a non-double sided printer, the application automatically runs a wizard that ensures all of the pages are ordered and oriented correctly.


Prints a negative image when enabled.


Prints a backwards image when enabled.


Lets you add, remove, and position printers' marks.


Places page numbers on the printed sheets. To see the page numbers, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.


Lets you select, position, and scale images in your document.


Prints registration marks on each sheet. These marks serve as guides for aligning color separations.

To see the registration marks, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.


Lets you specify and edit signature layout styles.


Lets you magnify portions of the document.


 Lets you go directly to the first page in the Mini-Preview window.


 Lets you go directly to the last page in the Mini Preview window.


 Lets you view the Mini Preview window in the Print dialog box.


 Lets you enable color separations in the Print Preview window.


 Lets you set the height of a page in the Print Preview window.


 Lets you set the width of a page in the Print Preview window.


 Lets you create and edit imposition layouts.


 Indicates that Preflight has not identified any issues with your print job. To see which issues Preflight has checked, click on the Preflight Settings button.


 Indicates that there are issues that you should be aware of, but these may be intentional.


 Indicates that issue(s) identified may affect the quality of output or cause the print job not to print as intended.


 Indicates that issue(s) identified will cause printing problems; carefully review issue(s) before printing.


Crops the edge of the signature, instead of scaling down the document page.


Tools, Options, Customize


Workspace - Customize


Lets you set the size of toolbar buttons.


Lets you set the width of the border surrounding toolbar buttons.


 Enable to show titles on floating toolbars.


Enable to display the toolbar button name below each button.


Enable the check box beside the toolbars you want to display. Disable a check box to hide the toolbar.


Customize page


Creates a new toolbar.


Resets the selected toolbar to its default settings, or deletes a custom toolbar.


Lets you set the size of toolbar buttons.


 Enable to view only images on buttons.


 Enable to view only text on buttons.


Enable to display the toolbar name on the Title Bar of a floating toolbar.


Enable to view text below images on buttons.


Displays the size options for toolbar buttons and button borders.


Displays the appearance options for toolbar buttons.


Shortcut Keys Page


Displays a list of commands to which you can assign a shortcut.


Lets you choose a command to which you can assign a shortcut.


Displays a list of commands that you can add to a menu.


Lets you specify a new shortcut key combination to assign to the selected command.


Displays any command that is already assigned to the specified shortcut key combination.


Enable to delete the shortcut key combination from the old command and assign it to the new one.


Enable to assign the shortcut key combination to the new command and automatically select the old command.


Displays existing shortcut key combinations for the current command.


Lets you choose a new table.


Assigns the new shortcut key combination to the selected command.


Deletes the selected shortcut key combination.


Resets all shortcut key combinations to their default configuration.


Opens the Shortcut Keys dialog box, which displays all shortcut key combinations and lets you save and print shortcut key combinations.


Displays a short description of the selected shortcut.


When click View All button


Displays the list of available shortcut keys and their names. The active workspace is also displayed.


Opens the Save As dialog box, which lets you save your keyboard shortcuts as a text file.


Opens the Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box, in which you can save the keyboard shortcuts as a text file or print them.


Closes this dialog without saving any attributes.


Menus Page


Displays a list of commands that you can add to a menu.


Adds the selected item to the menu.


Removes the selected item from the menu.


Adds a separating line below the selected menu item.


Adds a menu.


Moves the selected menu item up.


Moves the selected menu item down.


Resets the menu to its default setting.


Lets you choose a menu.


Displays the current menu structure and lets you add, remove, rename, or reorder a menu or a menu command.


Displays a description of the selected command.


Toolbars Page


Lets you choose a command to add to a toolbar.


Displays a list of the commands that you can add to a toolbar.


Lets you choose a Property Bar.


Displays a description of the selected toolbar button.


Displays the toolbar buttons for the selected command category.


Color Palette Page


Displays the color wells options.


Enable to increase the space between color swatches on the on-screen Color Palette.


Enable to increase the size of the color swatches on the on-screen Color Palette.


Enable to display the No Color Well check box on the on-screen Color Palette.


Lets you specify the number of rows that are displayed when the on-screen Color Palette is docked.


Enable to change the effect of the right mouse button when right-clicking a color swatch on the on-screen Color Palette.


Displays the right-mouse-button menu options.


Button properties (Open Customize, find buttons, drag to prop bar, right click on button, choose Properties)


Enable to label your toolbar buttons using text.


Lets you specify a toolbar button label.


Enable to change the bitmap of a toolbar button by choosing a color from the Color Palette, and clicking the preview image.


Lets you edit a bitmap by selecting a displayed color and then clicking the preview image.


Restores the toolbar button to its original configuration.


Lets you adjust the horizontal and vertical position of the bitmap on the toolbar button.


Enable to view only text on the selected toolbar button.


Enable to view only an image on the selected toolbar button.


Displays a preview of the toolbar button.


Displays a preview of the toolbar button.


Lets you choose the Shadow, Highlight, Face, or Text color.


Lets you choose a color.


Restores the toolbar button to its original configuration.